Ontario Provincial Standards

for Roads and Public Works

- Volume 6 -

PROVINCIAL-ORIENTED

MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

OPS is co-owned by the

Ministry of Transportation, Ontario
and the
Municipal Engineers Association
 MANUAL REVISION RECORD

Provincial-Oriented

Volume 6
Material Specifications
This record should remain in the manual at all times. Revisions are numbered sequentially. This sheet
should be filled in after each revision has been placed into the manual. It will quickly indicate to users
whether the contents of the manual are up to date.

Revision Revision Entered By Revision Revision Entered By

Number Date Number Date
1 Apr 2010 Included in new manuals. 26
2 Nov 2012 Included in new manuals. 27
3 April 2013 Included in new manuals. 28
4 Nov 2013 Included in new manuals. 29
5 Nov 2014 Included in new manuals. 30
6 April 2015 Included in new manuals. 31
7 Nov 2015 Included in new manuals. 32
8 Nov 2016 Included in new manuals. 33
9 Apr 2017 Included in new manuals. 34
10 Nov 2017 Included in new manuals. 35
11 Apr 2018 Included in new manuals. 36
12 Nov 2018 Included in new manuals. 37
13 Apr 2018 Included in new manuals. 38
14 Nov 2019 Included in new manuals. 39
15 Apr 2020 Included in new manuals. 40
16 Nov 2020 Included in new manuals. 41
17 Apr 2021 Included in new manuals. 42
18 Nov 2021 Included in new manuals. 43
19 Apr 2022 Included in new manuals. 44
20 Nov 2022 Included in new manuals. 45
21 Apr 2023 Included in new manuals. 46
22 July 2023 Included in new manuals. 47
23 Nov 2023 Included in new manuals. 48
24 July 2024 Included in new manuals. 49
25 Nov 2024 Included in new manuals. 50
 ONTARIO VOLUME 6 INDEX
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD PROVINCIAL-ORIENTED
SPECIFICATION MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

DATE [Link] TITLE

DIVISION 10 - AGGREGATES
Nov 2018 1001 Aggregates - General
Apr 2018 1002 Aggregates - Concrete
Nov 2017 1003 Aggregates - Hot Mix Asphalt
Nov 2012 1004 Aggregates - Miscellaneous
Nov 2022 1005 Aggregates - Waterbody
Apr 2017 1006 Aggregates - Surface Treatment
Apr 2013 1010 Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material

DIVISION 11 - BITUMENS
Nov 2020 1101 Performance Graded Asphalt Cement
Nov 2022 1103 Emulsified Asphalt
Apr 2021 1151 Superpave and Stone Mastic Asphalt Mixtures
Nov 2022 1153 Emulsified Asphalt Patching Material and Proprietary Cold Patching Material

DIVISION 12 - SEALS, BEARINGS, WATERSTOPS

Nov 2020 1202 Bearings - Elastomeric Plain and Steel Laminated
Nov 2020 1203 Bearings - Rotational and Sliding Surface
Apr 2015 1205 Clay Seal
Nov 2023 1212 Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound
Jul 2023 1213 Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing Membrane
Jul 2023 1215 Material Specification for Protection Board
Nov 2020 1210 Deck Joint Assemblies
Nov 2024 1216 Primer Used With Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing
Membrane
Jul 2023 1217 Reinforcement Used With Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing
Membrane

DIVISION 13 - CEMENT AND CONCRETE

Nov 2024 1301 Cementing Materials
Nov 2023 1302 Water
Nov 2014 1303 Admixtures for Concrete
Apr 2019 1305 Moisture Vapour Barriers
Apr 2019 1306 Burlap
Nov 2024 1350 Concrete - Materials and Production

November 2024 Page 1 of 4 OPS Vol 6 - Index - Rev. No. 25

DATE [Link] TITLE

DIVISION 14 - METAL
Nov 2017 1430 Gabion Baskets and Mats
Nov 2024 1440 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete
Nov 2017 1441 Load Transfer Assemblies

DIVISION 15 - SAFETY RELATED

Apr 2022 1503 Cable Guide Rail
Apr 2021 1504 Steel Beam Guide Rail
Apr 2017 1505 Channel Components for Steel Beam Guide Rail
Nov 2017 1540 Standard Highway Fence Components
Apr 2023 1541 Chain-Link Fence Components

DIVISION 16 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Nov 2023 1601 Wood, Preservative Treatment, and Shop Fabrication
Nov 2018 1605 Extruded Expanded Polystyrene Pavement Insulation
Nov 2023 1640 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer (GFRP) Reinforcement for Concrete

DIVISION 17 - COATINGS
Nov 2014 1704 Paint Coating Systems for Structural Steel
Jul 2023 1712 Organic Solvent Based Traffic Paint
Jul 2023 1713 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Materials
Jul 2023 1714 Field Reacted Polymeric Pavement Marking Materials
Jul 2023 1715 Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape
Jul 2023 1716 Water-Borne Traffic Paint
Jul 2023 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

DIVISION 18 - PIPES AND ASSOCIATED DRAINAGE ITEMS

Apr 2018 1801 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) Products
Apr 2018 1802 Smooth Walled Steel Pipe
Nov 2014 1820 Circular and Elliptical Concrete Pipe
Nov 2022 1821 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts with Span 3m or Less
Nov 2018 1840 Non-Pressure Polyethylene Plastic Pipe Products
Nov 2018 1841 Non-Pressure Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Products
Nov 2018 1842 Pressure Polyethylene Pipe Products
Apr 2018 1843 Non-Pressure Polypropylene (PP) Plastic Pipe
Apr 2018 1850 Frames, Grates, Covers, and Gratings
Nov 2022 1853 Rubber Adjustment Units for Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, and Valve
Chambers
Apr 2018 1854 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) and Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Adjustment
Units for Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, and Valve Chambers

November 2024 Page 2 of 4 OPS Vol 6 - Index - Rev. No. 25

DATE [Link] TITLE

Nov 2019 1860 Geotextiles

DIVISION 19 - ENVIRONMENTAL
Currently No Specifications

DIVISION 20 - SIGNS AND SIGN SUPPORT

Apr 2021 2001 Signs

DIVISION 21 - CLOTHING, CLOTH, AND THE LIKE

Currently No Specifications

DIVISION 22 - UNASSIGNED
Currently No Specifications

DIVISION 23 - MISCELLANEOUS

Currently No Specifications

DIVISION 24 - ELECTRICAL
Nov 2018 2401 Electrical Handholes
Nov 2018 2409 Traffic Signal Cable
Nov 2017 2410 Extra Low-Voltage Cable
Nov 2019 2414 Power Supply Equipment
Nov 2018 2420 Wooden Poles
Nov 2017 2421 Spun Concrete Poles
Nov 2016 2422 Heavy Class Steel and Sectional Steel Poles, Base Mounted
Apr 2017 2423 Steel Poles, Base Mounted
Nov 2017 2426 Steel Truss Brackets
Nov 2017 2428 Aluminium Tapered Elliptical Brackets
Nov 2017 2432 High Pressure Sodium Luminaires for Highway Lighting
Nov 2016 2434 High Pressure Sodium Luminaires for Underpass Lighting
Nov 2018 2452 Aluminium Poles, Base Mounted
Nov 2019 2453 Sectional Steel Poles
Nov 2018 2460 Traffic Signal Arms, Brackets, Hangers, Fittings, and Hardware
Apr 2021 2461 Signal Heads
Jul 2023 2471 Sectional Steel High Mast Lighting Poles
Nov 2016 2474 Anchorage Assembly - High Mast Lighting Pole
Apr 2017 2475 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems for LED Traffic Signals
Apr 2019 2476 Raising and Lowering Equipment for High Mast Lighting Poles
Nov 2017 2479 Floodlight Luminaires Used in High Mast Lighting
Nov 2017 2485 Photoelectric Controllers

November 2024 Page 3 of 4 OPS Vol 6 - Index - Rev. No. 25

DATE [Link] TITLE

DIVISION 25 - CHEMICALS
Jul 2023 2501 Calcium Chloride and Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend
Nov 2021 2502 Sodium Chloride
Nov 2017 2510 Tall Oil Pitch Emulsion

November 2024 Page 4 of 4 OPS Vol 6 - Index - Rev. No. 25

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1001
STANDARD NOVEMBER 2018
SPECIFICATION

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - GENERAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1001.01 SCOPE

1001.02 REFERENCES

1001.03 DEFINITIONS

1001.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1001.05 MATERIALS

1001.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1001.07 PRODUCTION

1001.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1001.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the source, processing, and testing requirements for aggregates and provides
for the use of reclaimed asphalt pavement and reclaimed concrete material.

1001.02 REFERENCES

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-609 Petrographic Analysis of Coarse Aggregate
LS-616 Petrographic Analysis of Fine Aggregate

Assessment of Potential for Acid Rock Drainage in Highway Construction, Materials Engineering and
Research (MERO) Report (Unpublished), Smith, S.J., Rogers, C.A and Senior, S.A., March 2007 (See
Note 1)

Note 1: Some of the applicable sections within this report may be obtained upon request from the
Head of the Soils and Aggregates Section, Materials Engineering and Research Office, MTO,
at the following address:

November 2018 Page 1 of 9 [Link] 1001

 Room 220,
145 Sir William Hearst Avenue,
Toronto, Ontario
M3M-0B6
Telephone: 416-235-3734

Canadian General Standards Board

8.1-88 Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series

ASTM International

D 5744 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Weathering of Solid Materials Using a Humidity Cell
from SAI Global
E 11 - 09e1 Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves

Others

ADTI-WP2 Leaching Column Method for Overburden Analysis and Prediction of Weather Rates,
Hornberger, Roger J., et al., 2004.

DRAFT Guidelines and Recommended Methods for the Prediction of Metal Leaching and Acid Rock
Drainage at Minesites in British Columbia, British Columbia Ministry of Employment and Investment,
Energy and Minerals Division; Smithers, BC; Price, W.A., April 1997

Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure, Method 1311; United States Environmental Protection Agency, Publication SW-846, July
1992

1001.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Aggregate means natural mineral materials such as sand, gravel, and crushed bedrock. Reclaimed
materials may substitute for aggregates when allowed by the appropriate specification.

Boulder means a detached rock mass with a diameter greater than 200 mm.

Clay means a fine-grained soil with particles smaller than 2 µm that exhibit plasticity over a range of
water contents.

Coarse Aggregate means that portion of aggregate material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve when tested
according to LS-602.

Cobble means a rounded or semi-rounded rock fragment with an average dimension between 75 mm
and 200 mm.

Crushed Material means aggregate particles having at least one well-defined face resulting from
fracture. Particles with smooth faces and rounded edges or with only small chips removed are not
considered crushed.

Deleterious Material means materials that include, but not limited to, the following: wood, clay brick, clay
tile, plastic, gypsum, gypsum plaster, wallboard, roots, and all other organic matter.

November 2018 Page 2 of 9 [Link] 1001

Fine Aggregate means that portion of aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve when tested according to
LS-602.

Flat and Elongated Particles means aggregate particles whose greatest mean dimension in the
longitudinal axis compared to the least mean dimension in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
exceeds a ratio of 4:1.

Granular means any processed or natural aggregate material with less than 35% by mass passing the
75 µm sieve.

Gravel means rounded, water-worn rock fragments retained on the 4.75 mm sieve and passing through
the 75 mm sieve.

Iron Blast-Furnace Slag means the material resulting from solidification of molten blast-furnace slag
under atmospheric conditions. Subsequent cooling may be accelerated by application of water to the
solidified surface.

Manufactured Sand means sand produced by the crushing and further processing, i.e., washing,
grading, classifying of quarried rock, boulders, cobbles, or gravel from which the natural fine aggregate
has been removed. Natural sand may be added to optimize properties.

Mine By-Product Rock means rock which is removed during an ore mining process and has not been
subjected to any sort of chemical processing.

Natural Sand means naturally formed sand found in unconsolidated deposits.

Nickel Slag means the non-metallic product resulting from the production of nickel.

Quarried Rock means the material that has been or is being removed from an open excavation made in
a solid mass of rock, which was integral with the parent mass prior to removal.

Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) means the processed hot mix asphalt material that is recovered by
partial or full depth removal.

Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM) means removed or processed hardened Portland cement
concrete.

Sand means fine aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on a 75 µm sieve resulting from
natural disintegration of rock or from crushing.

Screened Sand means natural sand obtained from gravel deposits that is screened only.

Screenings means the fine aggregate produced by the crushing of quarried rock, boulders, cobbles, or
gravel.

1001.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1001.04.01 Submission Requirements

The Contract Administrator shall be advised in writing of each intended aggregate source, prior to its use
in the Work.

November 2018 Page 3 of 9 [Link] 1001

The Contractor shall provide all test results, either individual or mean values, which demonstrate
conformance of the material with the requirements of the appropriate specification.

Test results shall be made available at the Contract Administrator’s request.

1001.04.02 Report for Aggregates Produced from Mine By-Product Rock

If an aggregate produced from mine by-product rock is being proposed for use, then, at least 20 Business
Days prior to its intended use, a written report, henceforth referred to as the Mine By-Product Rock
Aggregate Assessment Report (MRAAR), signed by an Engineer or a licensed Professional Geoscientist
([Link].), shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

Prior to beginning the Work, the Engineer or licensed Professional Geoscientist ([Link].), described
above, shall submit sufficient relevant qualifications and past project experience in Acid Base Accounting,
NAG testing, metal leachate testing, physical property and any other related testing and analysis,
acceptable to the Owner.

The report shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a) Petrographic test results according to LS-609, Part A and LS-616, Part A carried out by a licensed
Professional Geoscientist ([Link].). When sulphur minerals or non-iron bearing sulphides are found,
sulphur mineral speciation and associated reactivity shall be determined using X-Ray Diffraction
and/or Scanning Electron Microscopy.

b) An Acid Rock Drainage (ARD) investigation, carried out by a licensed Professional Geoscientist
([Link].) including, but not limited to, the following:

i. Acid Base Accounting and Net Acid-Generating (NAG) tests. If either the neutralization potential
ratio or the NAG tests indicate that the tested material is respectively not shown to be “Non-Acid
Generating” or “Non-Acid Forming” according to the “DRAFT Guidelines and Recommended
Methods for the Prediction of Metal Leaching and Acid Rock Drainage at Minesites in British
Columbia”, then kinetic testing shall also be carried out using either humidity cells according to
ASTM D5744 or columns according to ADTI-WP2 Leaching Column Method for Overburden
Analysis and Prediction of Weather Rates.
ii. pH testing and any other chemical analyses considered necessary by the licensed Professional
Geoscientist ([Link].).
iii. An assessment of all the test results and an identification of any potential impacts of the use of
acid-generating materials on surface and groundwater, any proximate aquatic ecosystems as well
as any other environmentally sensitive areas. When potential impacts are found,
recommendations to eliminate or reduce those impacts to acceptable levels including an
acceptable monitoring plan shall be included in the assessment.

c) Metal leachate testing using Shake Flash Extraction, as described in “Test Methods for Evaluating
Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure” or any other
method acceptable to the Owner;

d) An assessment of the suitability of the aggregate for its intended use, by assuring that the aggregate:

i. meets all applicable safety regulations, guidelines and procedures;

ii. meets all applicable environmental regulations, guidelines and procedures and will not cause any
adverse environmental effects;
iii. meets all current physical and production property requirements required for that aggregate;
iv. does not cause undue discolouration of the pavement or structure in which the aggregates will be
used; and

November 2018 Page 4 of 9 [Link] 1001

 v. otherwise provides long term field performance at least as well as any other aggregates that are
currently acceptable for the same application.

e) Specified minimum sampling & testing rates, the location where the samples shall be taken and the
recommended tests to be carried out, as well as any special recommendations outlining the handling
and placement of aggregates produced from mine by-product rock during construction to ensure that
all of the requirements specified in the Contract Documents will continue to be met during the
Contract.

The sampling, testing and analyses required for parts a) to d) of the MRAAR shall be based on a
minimum of 3 or 8 samples for up to 10,000 or 100,000 tonnes respectively, of crushed mine by-product
rock that is intended for use on the Contract. All samples used for testing and assessment purposes
required for parts a) to d) shall be obtained from stockpiles of at least 1000 tonnes of the crushed mine
by-product rock which is intended for use in the Work. The details regarding the sampling and testing
carried during construction shall be as specified in the MRAAR, according to part e) listed above.

In any case, the sampling & testing rates and the types of tests specified above in parts a) to d) for the
preparation of the MRAAR and in part e) to be conducted during construction, shall only be considered
minimums and the actual amount of sampling, testing and types of tests carried out anytime during the
Contract will depend on the variability of the source, the Contractor’s ability to control that variability as
well as any other relevant recommendations that the MRAAR provides.

In addition to the sampling and testing already described and as specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, the Owner may require additional sampling and testing during construction. Such sampling
and testing shall be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner. If, however, the Owner deems that
sufficient testing is being done to adequately monitor changes within the aggregate source during
construction, according to the recommendations given in the MRAAR, then the Owner shall be
responsible for the costs of that additional testing.

All testing carried out for the preparation of the MRAAR as well as during construction shall be conducted
by laboratories that are acceptable to the Owner.

Within 15 Business Days after submission of the MRAAR, the Contractor shall be notified as to whether
the mine by-product rock is acceptable for use.

In addition to the MRAAR and within 20 Business Days of using aggregate produced from mine by-
product rock, an Aggregate Management Plan shall also be submitted to the Contract Administrator
detailing how the Contractor intends to ensure that the aggregates that are produced will continue to
remain acceptable during aggregate production for the contract.

1001.05 MATERIALS

1001.05.01 Aggregates

1001.05.01.01 General

Aggregates shall be composed of hard, durable fragments that are clean and free of clay coatings and
other deleterious material.

1001.05.01.02 Fine Aggregates

Fine aggregates shall be according to the appropriate specifications and, unless otherwise provided
therein, shall be one or a blend of the following:

November 2018 Page 5 of 9 [Link] 1001

a) Natural sand.

b) Manufactured sand.

c) Screenings produced during crushing.

d) Iron blast furnace slag or nickel slag.

e) Reclaimed asphalt pavement.

f) Reclaimed concrete material.

1001.05.01.03 Coarse Aggregates

Coarse aggregates shall be according to the appropriate specifications and, unless otherwise provided
therein, shall be one or a blend of the following:

a) Crushed particles of consistent quality throughout produced from bedrock formations or boulders.

b) Uncrushed material of consistent quality produced from gravel formations.

c) Iron blast furnace slag or nickel slag.

d) Reclaimed asphalt pavement.

e) Reclaimed concrete material.

1001.07 PRODUCTION

1001.07.01 Stripping of Aggregate Source

Prior to excavating materials for aggregate production, the area to be worked shall be cleared of shrubs
and trees, grubbed of roots, and stripped of all unsuitable surface materials and weathered zones. The
area open ahead of the quarrying or excavating operation shall be of sufficient size to prevent
contamination of the aggregate source working face.

1001.07.02 Processing

1001.07.02.01 General

When necessary to conform to the type of materials specified, aggregates shall be screened, crushed,
washed, classified, or otherwise processed with suitable equipment to meet specification requirements.

Washed materials or materials excavated from underwater shall be stored for at least a 24 hours or
longer period to allow all free water to drain and for the materials to attain uniform water content.

1001.07.02.02 Washing

When specified in the Contract Documents, aggregates shall be washed in washing plants, or otherwise
processed to meet specification requirements. Truck or mixer washing and other similar methods shall
not be permitted.

November 2018 Page 6 of 9 [Link] 1001

Water used for washing aggregates shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali,
organic matter, or other deleterious substances.

1001.07.02.03 Blending

Blending of aggregates including reclaimed materials that meet the physical requirements of the
appropriate specification shall be permitted in order to satisfy the gradation requirements for the material
to be provided. The blending shall produce a consistent and acceptable product. Except where noted
elsewhere in the Contract Documents, blending to improve the physical requirements shall not be
permitted, except to increase the percentage of crushed particles or decrease the percentage of flat and
elongated particles.

1001.07.03 Handling and Transporting

At all times, aggregates shall be handled and transported in a manner and with equipment that avoids
segregation of the material, excess loss of fines, and contamination by any deleterious material.

1001.07.04 Stockpiling

Stockpile sites shall be level, well drained, free of all foreign materials, and of adequate bearing capacity
to support the mass of the materials to be placed thereon. Stockpiles shall be either far enough apart or
separated by substantial dividers to prevent intermingling.

For all coarse aggregates, except when stockpiled on Portland cement concrete or asphaltic concrete
foundations or on an uncontaminated durable surface, a compacted granular pad of material with a
maximum particle size no larger than that of the material being stockpiled and not less than 0.3 m in
depth shall be provided to prevent contamination of the piled material.

For fine or combined aggregate stockpiles, the foundation shall be as specified above for coarse
aggregates or the material may be placed on the ground provided that the bottom 0.3 m of the pile is not
incorporated into the Work.

When samples are obtained for acceptance purposes from stockpiles of combined fine and coarse
aggregate material for gradation testing, the stockpile shall be constructed in layers not exceeding 1 m in
depth, and spilling of material over the edge of the stockpile shall not be permitted. These stockpile
construction requirements shall not apply to separate stockpiles of fine and coarse aggregates and shall
not apply to stockpiles of combined fine and coarse aggregate when the gradation acceptance samples
are obtained after the material has been removed from the stockpile.

1001.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1001.08.01 General

Irrespective of compliance or non-compliance with the gradation and physical requirements of the
applicable specification, aggregates may be accepted or rejected on the basis of past field performance,
as determined by the Owner.

When a change in the character of the material occurs or when the performance of the materials is found
to be unsatisfactory, use of those materials shall be discontinued until the Contractor can prove to the
satisfaction of the Contract Administrator that the source remains acceptable or can be made acceptable.

November 2018 Page 7 of 9 [Link] 1001

1001.08.02 Sampling

1001.08.02.01 General

Quality assurance samples shall be obtained, handled, and stored as specified in the Contract
Documents. The Contract Administrator shall be allowed to access all sampling locations and reserves
the right to request quality assurance samples at any time.

1001.08.02.02 Mix Design

Samples obtained by the Contractor for the purposes of mix design shall be representative of the
materials to be placed in the Work.

1001.08.03 Testing

1001.08.03.01 General

Tests on aggregates shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. The most recent published test
method shall be used.

1001.08.03.02 Testing Sieves

Gradation analysis shall be based on the designated sieves shown in Table 1. As indicated, sieves
complying with the alternative shown are compatible and may be used interchangeably with the MTO
sieve designation shown.

November 2018 Page 8 of 9 [Link] 1001

 TABLE 1
Laboratory Testing Sieves

Alternate Sieve Standards,

MTO Sieve Designation
CAN/CGSB 8.1 and ASTM E 11

150 mm 6 inch
106 mm 4.24 inch
75.0 mm 3 inch
63.0 mm 2-1/2 inch
53.0 mm 2.12 inch
37.5 mm 1-1/2 inch
26.5 mm 1.06 inch
25.0 mm 1 inch
22.4 mm 7/8 inch
19.0 mm 3/4 inch
16.0 mm 5/8 inch
13.2 mm 0.530 inch
12.5 mm 1/2 inch
9.5 mm 3/8 inch
6.7 mm 0.265 inch
4.75 mm No. 4
2.36 mm No. 8
1.18 mm No. 16
600 µm No. 30
425 µm No. 40
300 µm No. 50
150 µm No. 100
75 µm No. 200

November 2018 Page 9 of 9 [Link] 1001

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1002
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1002.01 SCOPE

1002.02 REFERENCES

1002.03 DEFINITIONS

1002.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1002.05 MATERIALS

1002.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1002.07 PRODUCTION

1002.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1002.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not used

1002.01 SCOPE

This specification covers material requirements for aggregates for use in hydraulic cement concrete.

1002.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-412 Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to De-icing Chemicals
LS-601 Material Finer than 75µm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-604 Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

April 2018 Page 1 of 17 [Link] 1002

LS-606 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Magnesium Sulphate
LS-608 Percent Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
LS-609 Petrographic Analysis of Coarse Aggregate
LS-610 Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete
LS-613 Determination of Insoluble Residue of Carbonate Aggregates
LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate
LS-615 Determination of Potential Alkali-Carbonate Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks By Chemical
Composition
LS-618 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-620 Accelerated Detection of Potentially Deleterious Alkali-Silica Reactive Aggregate by Expansion
of Mortar Bars
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Granular Materials

MTO Aggregate Sources Lists (ASL):

Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse Aggregates
Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates

MTO Forms:
PH-D-10 Aggregate Sample Data Sheet

CSA Standards

A23.2-1A Sampling Aggregates for Use in Concrete *

A23.2-12A Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate *
A23.2-14A Potential Expansivity of Aggregates; Procedure for Length Change Due to Alkali-Aggregate
Reaction in Concrete Prisms *
A23.2-23A Method of Test for the Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the
Micro-Deval Apparatus *
A23.2-24A Method of Test for Resistance of Unconfined Coarse Aggregate to Freezing and Thawing
A23.2-25A Test Method for Detection of Alkali-Silica Reactive Aggregate by Accelerated Expansion of
Mortar Bars *
A23.2-26A Determination of Potential Alkali-Carbonate Reactivity of Quarried Carbonate Rocks by
Chemical Composition *
A23.2-27A Standard Practice to Identify Potential for Alkali-Reactivity of Aggregates and Measures to
Avoid Deleterious Expansion in Concrete *
A23.2-29A Method of Test for the Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the
Micro-Deval Apparatus *
* [Part of A23.1-09/A23.2-09 - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of
Test and Standard Practices for Concrete]

ASTM International

C 87/C 87M-10 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar

C 330/C 330M-14 Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
C 666/C 666M-15 Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

1002.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Alkali-Aggregate Reaction (AAR) means a chemical reaction that occurs in concrete between alkalis in
the cement (e.g., sodium and potassium) and minerals in the aggregate. This reaction may cause
deleterious expansion and cracking of the concrete. AAR includes alkali-carbonate and alkali-silica
reactions.

April 2018 Page 2 of 17 [Link] 1002

Air-Cooled Blast Furnace Slag means the material resulting from solidification of molten blast furnace
slag under atmospheric conditions. Subsequent cooling may be accelerated by application of water to
the solidified surface.

Bench means a ledge parallel to stratigraphic bedding that, in quarries, forms a single level of operation
above which rock is excavated from a contiguous face.

Duplicate QA Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for
quality assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Manufactured Sand means fine aggregate produced by crushing bedrock or containing crusher
screenings.

Mineral Filler means a finely pulverized, inert, inorganic mineral or rock (e.g., limestone powder) having
physical and mineralogical properties suitable for use in concrete.

Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size means the largest sieve listed in the applicable specification upon
which any material is permitted to be retained.

Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate material. Tests are carried out
to determine a material's resistance to weathering or degradation or both. Physical properties are
generally not affected by aggregate production processes.

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
Materials received from the Contractor meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

Self-Consolidating Concrete means a highly flowable, yet stable concrete that can spread readily into
place, fill formwork, and encapsulate the reinforcement without any mechanical consolidation and without
undergoing segregation or excessive bleeding.

Siliceous Aggregates means rock particles containing or composed of silica (SiO2) or minerals with
silica in the crystal structure as silicate (SiO4).

1002.05 MATERIALS

1002.05.01 General

Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1001. Aggregates shall be according to this specification when
tested according to the MTO, CSA, and ASTM test methods identified herein.

Except as noted below or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, aggregates may be sands, gravel,
quarried rock, or air-cooled blast furnace slag; provided the source is of such nature and extent to ensure
acceptable processed aggregates of a consistent grading and quality. When any change in the character
of the aggregate occurs or when the performance of aggregate meeting the requirements of this
specification is found to be unsatisfactory, use of the aggregate shall be discontinued until a reappraisal
by the Contractor, with the approval of the Contract Administrator, proves the source to be satisfactory.

Steel slag is prohibited for use as aggregate in hydraulic cement concrete. Air-cooled blast furnace slag
is prohibited for use as aggregate in concrete pavements.

Irrespective of compliance with all of the physical property requirements stated in this specification, at the
discretion of the Owner, aggregates may be accepted or rejected for use based on demonstrated past
field performance in hydraulic cement concrete.

April 2018 Page 3 of 17 [Link] 1002

The field performance of a concrete structure or pavement using aggregates, accepted on the basis of
demonstrated past field performance, shall be evaluated according to CSA A23.2-27A, Attachment A2,
Guidelines for Evaluating the Field Performance of Aggregates: Field and Laboratory Testing, with the
exception that the structure or pavement shall be at least 15 years old. In addition, the concrete being
evaluated to determine the field performance of an aggregate shall:
a) Have been used for equivalent or more severe applications;

b) Have been subjected to equivalent or more severe exposure conditions;

c) Not contain supplementary cementing materials that may have mitigated or improved things like
freeze/thaw performance, scaling resistance or alkali-aggregate reactivity of aggregates in concrete,
and;

d) Contain the equivalent cement and alkali content, as the laboratory tests stated in this specification
for the evaluation of alkali-aggregate reactivity.
The Owner may reject the use of any concrete aggregate on the basis of past field performance in any
structure or pavement of any age.

1002.05.02 Fine Aggregate

1002.05.02.01 General

Fine aggregates used in concrete pavement surfaces and exposed concrete bridge deck driving surfaces
shall have a minimum insoluble residue (IRR75) of 60%. Where a fine aggregate proposed for use does
not meet this requirement, one or more fine aggregates from an alternate source may be blended with the
proposed aggregate to meet this requirement.

1002.05.02.02 Grading Requirements

Unless the Contract Administrator has agreed to allow a special grading, fine aggregates shall meet the
requirements shown in Table 2. The fineness modulus for any sample shall not vary by more than 0.20
from the sample upon which initial acceptance was based.

1002.05.02.03 Mineral Filler

Mineral fillers shall be limited to use in self-consolidating concrete. When mineral fillers are added to the
mix, they shall be inert, non-plastic, free of clay, and added as a separate ingredient to the mix.

1002.05.02.04 Physical Property Requirements

The fine aggregate shall meet the physical property requirements specified in Table 3.

1002.05.03 Coarse Aggregate

1002.05.03.01 Grading Requirements

1002.[Link] General

Coarse aggregate grading requirements shown in Tables 4 and 5 represent the upper and lower limits
allowed.

April 2018 Page 4 of 17 [Link] 1002

1002.[Link] Concrete Structures, Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter

The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 19.0 mm, unless specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. Grading of the coarse aggregate shall meet the requirements shown in Table 4. Stockpiling
aggregates in individual size fractions and blending them to meet the grading requirements, shown in
Table 4, shall be permitted.

1002.[Link] Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base

The grading bands for the individual coarse aggregate components used in concrete pavement and
concrete base are shown in the first two columns of Table 5, for information purposes only. Aggregates
shall be stockpiled as individual size fractions and blended in the mix. The blended aggregates shall
meet the combined grading requirements specified in the last column of Table 5.

1002.[Link] Concrete Patches, Refacing, and Overlays

The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 13.2 mm for concrete patches, refacing, and overlays 100
mm or less in thickness. When the thickness of the repair exceeds 100 mm, the nominal maximum
aggregate size shall be 19 mm. Grading of the coarse aggregate shall be within the limits shown in Table
4.

1002.05.03.02 Physical Property Requirements

The coarse aggregate shall meet the physical property requirements specified in Table 6.

1002.[Link] Scaling Resistance

Coarse aggregate composed of at least 80% siliceous aggregates as determined by LS-609, shall be
tested in a salt scaling test according to LS-412 together with either the fine aggregate that the coarse
aggregate is intended to be used with, or a fine aggregate from the same geographic area as the coarse
aggregate.

For the purposes of this specification, the concrete for LS-412 shall be proportioned with 355 kg/m3 of
Type GU hydraulic cement and shall have a plastic air content of 7.0 ± 1.5% and a slump of 80 ± 20 mm.

Testing shall be performed, according to LS-412, on the finished surface of the slabs and the maximum
permitted loss shall be as specified in Table 6. Such testing shall not be performed on formed surfaces.

Testing shall be done prior to the first use of an aggregate from a pit or quarry in concrete.

For quarries, the bench from which the aggregate is selected for testing shall be identified and approval of
the aggregate shall only apply to the bench from which the aggregate was tested. Aggregate processed
from other benches within the same quarry shall also require the same testing prior to use.

Once an aggregate has been approved for use in concrete, the test results shall remain valid for that use,
as long as the aggregate is still being extracted from the same bench and/or geological formation within
the quarry.

For a pit or quarry, and at the discretion of the Owner, the approval shall remain valid provided that the
aggregate is still representative of the original aggregate that was tested and approved.

In addition, once a pit source, and for quarries a bench/formation and lithology, is listed on the current
Ontario Ministry of Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete Fine and
Coarse Aggregates or the Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates and,
at the discretion of the Owner, the same aggregate type being respectively produced from the same pit

April 2018 Page 5 of 17 [Link] 1002

source or bench/formation and lithology from the same quarry, have not changed, then the need for
further testing according to LS-412, shall be waived by the Owner.

Irrespective of the waiving of these requirements, the warranty provisions of the Contract Documents
shall apply.

However, if in the opinion of the Owner the extraction conditions within a pit or quarry have changed
significantly so that the original test results are no longer representative of the same aggregate type
currently being produced, then at the Owner’s discretion, LS-412, shall be repeated for that aggregate.

1002.[Link] D-Line Cracking

Coarse aggregate from pit sources or from carbonate (e.g. limestone and dolostone) bedrock quarries
used for concrete pavement and concrete base, except for aggregate produced from the Oxford, Gull
River, or Bobcaygeon Formations, shall be tested for resistance to freezing and thawing according to
ASTM C 666/C 666M Procedure A.

For the purposes of this specification, ASTM C 666/C 666M shall be conducted using the following
parameters:

a) The concrete for the test shall be proportioned to the combined grading shown in Table 5, with 325
kg/m3 of Type GU hydraulic cement, a plastic air content of 6.5 ± 1.5%, and a slump of 50 ± 20 mm.

b) The fine aggregate shall be that which is intended for use with the coarse aggregate or a fine
aggregate from the same geographic area as the coarse aggregate.

c) A minimum of three beams shall be tested.

d) Procedure A shall be modified so that each freeze cycle takes 10.5 ± 1 hour.

e) The test shall be conducted for 350 cycles.

The average change in length of the beams tested shall be no more than ± 0.0350%. The average
fundamental transverse frequency (FTF) shall not be less than 90% of the FTF at an age of 14 Days.

Testing, according to ASTM C 666/C 666M Procedure A and as modified above, shall be done prior to
the first use of an aggregate from a pit or quarry source in concrete pavement or concrete base.

For quarries, the bench from which the aggregate is selected for testing shall be identified. Approval of
the aggregate shall only apply to the identified bench from which the aggregate was tested. Aggregate
processed from any other benches within the same quarry shall also require the same testing prior to
use. Once an aggregate has been approved for use in concrete pavement or base, the test results shall
remain valid for that use as long as the aggregate is still being extracted from the same bench and/or
geological formation within the quarry.

For a pit or quarry and at the discretion of the Owner, the approval shall remain valid provided that, the
aggregate is still representative of the original aggregate that was tested and approved.

In addition, once a pit source and, for quarries a bench/formation is listed on the current Ontario Ministry
of Transportation Regional Concrete Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse
Aggregate, the need for further testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M Procedure A shall be waived by
the Owner. Irrespective of the waiving of these requirements, the warranty provisions of the Contract
Documents shall apply. However if, in the opinion of the Owner the extraction conditions within a pit or
quarry have changed significantly so that the original test results are not representative of the aggregate
currently being produced, then at the Owner’s discretion, ASTM C 666/C 666M Procedure A, as modified
above, shall be repeated for that aggregate.

April 2018 Page 6 of 17 [Link] 1002

1002.05.03.03 Lightweight Aggregate

Lightweight aggregate shall be according to ASTM C 330/C 330M.

1002.05.04 Deleterious Expansion Other than Alkali Aggregate Reaction

Aggregates that produce excessive expansion or cracking of concrete through reactions other than AAR
shall not be used in concrete.

The combined coarse and fine aggregate used in a concrete mix shall a total of less than 0.001% by
mass of lime (CaO) or periclase (MgO); a total of less than 1.0% by mass of gypsum, anhydrite or other
sulphate minerals; no steel slag or glass; and based on chemical analysis such as combustion/infrared
absorption using a Leco sulphur analyzer, a total of less than 1.0% by mass of sulphur.

1002.07 PRODUCTION

1002.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling

Processed aggregates shall be separated into fine and coarse aggregates and stockpiled separately.
Aggregates separated during processing, aggregates secured from different sources, aggregates from
the same source but of different gradings, or from a new bench in a quarry, or aggregates resulting from a
significant change in production that affects physical quality shall be stockpiled separately.

For sampling and testing purposes, separate stockpiles of at least 1000 tonnes shall be provided for:

a) The fine aggregate grading shown in Table 2 and for each different coarse aggregate grading shown
in Tables 4 or 5 that will be used in the mix; and

b) Each different aggregate component within the coarse and fine gradings referred to above, if one or
more of the individual aggregate components are derived either from a different source location or
from a different lithology within the same source location.

Where blended aggregates are allowed as specified in the General clause of the Fine Aggregate
subsection then, one of the following shall also be provided:

a) A single stockpile of at least 1000 tonnes of uniformly-blended fine aggregate that will be used in the
mix; or

b) The proportions of each fine aggregate component in the mix.

Where a blended coarse aggregate is used in the mix, then one of the following shall also be provided:

a) A single stockpile of at least 1000 tonnes of uniformly-blended coarse aggregate that will be used in
the mix; or

b) The proportions of each individual aggregate component in the blended coarse aggregate that will be
used in the mix.

For small quantities, such as for concrete repairs, being placed in isolated areas, where enough space
may not be available, the 1000 tonne minimum stockpiles required, in the statements listed above, may
be reduced to 500 tonnes, upon request and at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.

April 2018 Page 7 of 17 [Link] 1002

Where blended fine or coarse aggregates are to be used in the work, the proportions shall be submitted
at the same time as Form A of the concrete mix design. If the proportions are changed, then the revised
proportions and a new Form A shall be submitted.

Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any description, or aggregates that have
become mixed with each other, shall not be used and shall be removed from the stockpile immediately.

Aggregate shall be retained in stockpiles for at least 24 hours before use. Suitable stockpile locations
include the construction site and the site of batching of the concrete. Other locations may be used for
stockpiles provided they are acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

1002.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1002.08.01 General

The laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out QA testing for purposes of ensuring that
aggregates used in the Work are according to the physical property and grading requirements of this
specification. Individual test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

The Owner shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing for QA purposes, unless otherwise
specified in this specification.

1002.08.02 Alternative to LS-614

LS-614 shall be used for acceptance, unless written notification to the Contract Administrator to replace it
with LS-606 for acceptance is received prior to sampling of the applicable materials for QA purposes.
Provided the Contract Administrator has received such a request, LS-606 shall be used. Otherwise,
conformance to LS-614 shall be required.

When notification is provided after QA testing using LS-614 has been initiated, the Contractor shall then
be charged $750.00 for each test initiated, which includes the cost of the testing using LS-614,
administrative charges, and additional sampling, if required.

1002.08.03 Special Grading for Fine Aggregate

Prior to samples being taken for QA purposes, the Contractor may submit a written request to the
Contract Administrator to use a fine aggregate with a grading that falls outside the limits shown in Table
2. This request shall include test data necessary to demonstrate that the material shall produce concrete
of acceptable quality and meet all relevant requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
The assessment of performance shall include, but not be limited to, the following tests: compressive
strength, splitting tensile strength, and drying shrinkage.

1002.08.04 Sampling

Sampling shall be according to CSA A23.2-1A and LS-625. QA samples shall be randomly taken during
production from stockpiles located at the concrete plant, or in the absence of a stockpile at the plant, from
stockpiles at the aggregate source.

The Contractor shall provide new or clean sample bags or containers that are constructed to prevent the
loss of any part of the material or contamination or damage to the contents during shipment. Sample
containers shall be securely fastened. Metal or cardboard containers are unacceptable. The sample
shall be identified both inside and outside of the sample container. Data to be included with the sample
shall be according to MTO form PH-D-10.

April 2018 Page 8 of 17 [Link] 1002

For physical properties, at least one set of duplicate QA samples of each coarse and each fine aggregate
component from each individual source shall be randomly sampled from lots according to the schedule
shown in Table 1.

For gradation, separate sets of lots shall be developed, according the schedule shown in Table 1, for
each:

a) Individual coarse aggregate component being used for structural concrete in this Contract.

b) Individual coarse aggregate component being used for concrete pavement and base in this Contract
or, at the discretion of the Contract Administrator, for the combined coarse aggregate being used in
concrete pavement and base for this Contract, if a stockpile of such aggregate has been provided.

c) Individual fine aggregate component being used in this Contract or, at the discretion of the Contract
Administrator, for the combined fine aggregate being used for this Contract, if a stockpile of such
aggregate has been provided.

Each of the gradation lots shall be divided into two sublots of approximately equal tonnage or cubic
metres, as applicable, and one set of duplicate QA samples shall be randomly obtained from each sublot.

In the event that the Contractor is unavailable to take samples, no further material shall be placed in the
Work until the required QA samples have been taken. The Contract Administrator shall seal each sample
container at the time and place of sampling.

One of the duplicate QA samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory. The QA
laboratory shall retain the remaining sample for referee testing purposes.

1002.08.04.01 Sample Size

The mass of each QA sample shall meet the requirements of Table 7. When more than 30 kg is required,
the total sample shall be recombined by the QA laboratory prior to testing.

1002.08.05 Acceptance

The aggregates within a lot of concrete shall be deemed to be acceptable if all of the test results for the
samples of aggregates representing that lot meet all applicable requirements of this specification.

Irrespective of the negotiation of a reduced price payment, the warranty provisions of the Contract
Documents shall apply.

1002.08.05.01 Acceptance for Physical Properties

The physical properties of a lot of aggregates shall be deemed to be acceptable if all of the test results for
the sample representing that lot meet all of the requirements shown in Tables 3 and 6, for the fine and
coarse aggregates, respectively.

If the tested sample of aggregates representing a lot of concrete does not meet all of the requirements of
this specification, then a reduced price payment of 5% of the tender price shall be given for each cubic
metre of concrete left in the work that includes any of the aggregates within that lot, as long as the
applicable results for that sample:

a) Do not exceed the requirement for LS-614 or LS-606 if it has been accepted by the Owner as an
alternative to LS-614, by more than 25% of the specified value.

b) Do not exceed a petrographic number of 135 for concrete pavement and 150 for structural concrete
when tested according to LS-609;

April 2018 Page 9 of 17 [Link] 1002

c) Do not exceed the requirement for LS-618 by more than 10% of the specified value; and

d) Meets all other requirements of this specification.

For concrete tender items with units of measurement other than m3 or m2, the 5% reduced price payment,
mentioned above, will based on the portion of the bid price represented by the volume, in m3, of the
tender item or items that the deficient aggregate sample represents.

Should the test results for any sample of aggregates representing a lot of concrete not meet the
requirements listed above, then all of the aggregates within that lot shall be considered rejectable and any
concrete that includes those aggregates shall be removed from the Work at no cost to the Owner.

1002.08.05.02 Acceptance for Gradation

The gradation of a lot shall be deemed to be acceptable, based on LS-602, if the test results for the
samples representing that lot meet all of the requirements of the specification.

The percent passing each sieve shall be computed to one decimal place for each individual test result
representing a sublot and the average of the two test results within an aggregate lot.

1002.[Link] Acceptance of Special Grading for Fine Aggregate

If the Owner has accepted a fine aggregate for a lot according to the Special Grading for Fine Aggregate
subsection, then, for each individual sieve within the gradation accepted by the Owner, the percent
passing for at least one of the two test results as well as the average of the two test results shall both be
within 5% of the target percent passing for that sieve.

However, if both of the requirements given above are not met, then all of the aggregates within the
affected lot shall be considered rejectable.

1002.[Link] Acceptance of Gradation for All Other Fine and Coarse Aggregates

With the exception of a fine aggregate accepted by the Owner, according to the Special Grading For Fine
Aggregate subsection, a complete or incomplete lot shall be deemed to meet the applicable requirements
for gradation if, for each individual sieve, the percent passing for at least one of the two test results as
well as the average of both test results representing the two sublots within an aggregate lot, shall be
within the acceptable limits shown in Table 2 for a fine aggregate and the applicable limits shown in
Tables 4 or 5, for the applicable coarse aggregate.

Should the test results for any sample of aggregates representing a lot of concrete not meet the
requirements listed above, then all of the aggregates within that lot shall be considered rejectable.

1002.08.06 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator within 5 Business Days following notification that the aggregate does not meet
the requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained duplicate QA sample shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results shall replace the respective QA test results for acceptance of the applicable lot and
shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

April 2018 Page 10 of 17 [Link] 1002

If a lot is not accepted at full payment based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of referee testing of that lot including the costs for transportation of the referee
samples at the rates specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the Owner shall
bear the cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples representing that lot.

April 2018 Page 11 of 17 [Link] 1002

 TABLE 1
Lot Schedule for Sampling and Testing

Total Quantity of Each Tender Item

With the Same Concrete Mix Design
Minimum Lot Schedule
Concrete Pavement and Structural and all Other
BaseTender Items Concrete Tender Items (Notes 2 and 3)
(m2) (m3)
(Note 1)
Sampling and testing may be waived at the
discretion of the Contract Administrator,
< 150 < 15
except for concrete repairs or critical structural
elements, as described in Note 2.
150 to 10,000 15 to 500 One lot
Concrete Pavement: 10,000 m2 lots
>10,000 > 500 Structural and all Other Concrete: 500 m3 lots
Notes:
1. For tender items with units of measurement other than m3, the quantities shall be converted to m3, in order to
establish the lot schedule. At the discretion of the Contract Administrator, some tender items constructed using
the same mix design may be combined together to meet the specified quantities.

2. At the discretion of the Contract Administrator, concrete repairs, individual sections of bridge decks or critical
structural elements such as cast-in-place girders, cantilever extensions etc., may have their own lot or lots,
regardless of the tender item quantity.

3. Where the remaining quantity of the applicable tender item is insufficient to form a complete lot and is:
a) Less than one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall be added to the previous lot, or
b) Greater than or equal to one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall form its own lot.

TABLE 2
Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates, LS-602 (Note 1)

MTO Sieve Designation Percent Passing

9.5 mm 100
4.75 mm 95-100
2.36 mm 80-100
1.18 mm 50-85
600 µm 25-60
300 µm 10-30
150 µm 0-10
0-3 (Natural Sand)
75 µm
0-6 (Manufactured Sand)

Note:
1. Fine aggregates shall have no more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve. The
fineness modulus shall be a minimum of 2.3 and a maximum of 3.1.

April 2018 Page 12 of 17 [Link] 1002

 TABLE 3
Physical Property Requirements for Fine Aggregate(s)

MTO or CSA
Acceptance Limit
Test Number Laboratory Test
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
Organic Impurities, 3
LS-610
Organic plate number (Note 3)
Insoluble Residue, (IRR75) 60
LS-613
minimum % retained on the 75 µm sieve (Note 4)
LS-619 or CSA A23.2-23A Micro-Deval Abrasion, % maximum loss 20
Accelerated Mortar Bar, 0.150
LS-620 or CSA A23.2-25A (Note 5)
% maximum at 14 Days (Note 6)
Concrete Prism Expansion, 0.040
CSA A23.2-14A (Note 5)
% maximum at 1 year (Note 7)
Chemical composition shall
Potential Alkali-Carbonate Reactivity of Quarried
CSA A23.2-26A or LS-615 plot in the non-expansive field
Carbonate Rock (Note 8)
of Fig. 1 of test method
Notes:
1. LS-615 (or CSA A23.2-26A), LS-619, LS-620 (or CSA A23.2-25A) and CSA A23.2-14A shall apply to each individual fine
aggregate component in the mix. LS-610 and LS-613 shall be carried out either on samples taken from a stockpile of the
blended fine aggregate intended to be used in the mix or from samples taken from stockpiles of each individual fine aggregate
component and later combined in the laboratory to the proportions provided with Form A, prior to testing. All sampling and
blending shall be as specified in the Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling subsection.

2. If the fraction of a coarse aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve represents more than 10% of the grading of that aggregate, by
mass, then that fraction of the individual coarse aggregate shall also meet these requirements.

3. Blended fine aggregate that produces a colour darker than standard colour No. 3 shall be considered to have failed this
requirement. However, a failed blended fine aggregate may be used if comparative mortar specimens prepared according to
ASTM C 87/C 87M meet the following requirements:
a) Mortar specimens prepared using unwashed fine aggregate shall have a 7-Day compressive strength that is a minimum of
95% of the strength of mortar specimens prepared using the same fine aggregate washed in a 3% sodium hydroxide
solution. Type GU Hydraulic cement shall be used.
b) The setting time of the unwashed fine aggregate mortar specimens shall not differ from the washed fine aggregate mortar
specimens by more than 10%.

4. This requirement shall apply to all fine aggregates used in hydraulic cement concrete pavement and exposed concrete bridge
deck driving surfaces (parking lots are excluded). Fine aggregates not meeting the IRR75 requirement may be uniformly
blended with other suitable fine aggregate(s), in order to increase the IRR75 to a minimum of 60%.

5. The need for data to demonstrate compliance with this test shall be waived by the Contract Administrator, if the fine aggregate
component is from a source listed on the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List for
Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

Note that, if the fine aggregate in the mix is comprised of one (or more) individual fine aggregate component(s) which come
from a source location or from a lithology within a source which is not listed as acceptable on the current Ontario Ministry of
Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse Aggregates, then the requirements
for this test shall not be waived for each of the unlisted aggregate component(s).

6. An aggregate that fails this requirement may be accepted, provided the requirements of CSA A23.2-14A are met.

7. An aggregate need only meet this requirement if it fails the requirements of CSA A23.2-25A. Test data shall have been
obtained within the past 18 months from aggregate that is from the same source and processed in the same manner as the
material intended for use.

8. This requirement only applies to an aggregate produced from quarried Gull River and Bobcaygeon Formations of southern and
eastern Ontario. These dolomitic limestones outcrop on the southern margin of the Canadian Shield from Midland to Kingston
and in the Ottawa-St. Lawrence Lowlands near Cornwall.

April 2018 Page 13 of 17 [Link] 1002

 TABLE 4
Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, LS-602
Structural Concrete, Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter, Patches, Refacing and Overlays

Nominal Maximum Size 19.0 mm 16.0 mm 13.2 mm 9.5 mm 6.7 mm

MTO Sieve Designation, mm Percent Passing

26.5 100 - - - -

19.0 85-100 100 100 - -

16.0 65-90 96-100 - - -

13.2 - 67-86 90-100 100 100

9.5 20-55 29-52 40-70 85-100 -

6.7 - - - - 75-100

4.75 0-10 0-10 0-15 10-30 40-80

2.36 - - - 0-10 0-20

TABLE 5
Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, LS-602
Concrete Pavement or Concrete Base

For Information Purposes Only Combined Grading

Used For Acceptance
Nominal Maximum Size
(Note 1)
37.5 mm 19.0 mm

MTO Sieve Designation

Percent Passing
mm

53.0 100 - 100

37.5 90-100 - 95-100

26.5 20-55 100 -

19.0 0-15 85-100 35-70

9.5 0-5 20-55 10-30

4.75 - 0-10 0-5

Note:
1. The grading shown here shall be determined either from a sample of blended coarse aggregate intended for use in
the mix, or from separate samples of the individual coarse aggregate components which are combined in the
laboratory according to the proportions provided along with the mix design submission, as specified in the
Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling subsection.

April 2018 Page 14 of 17 [Link] 1002

 TABLE 6
Physical Property Requirements for Coarse Aggregate(s)
Acceptance Requirements (Notes 2 and 3)
MTO,CSA or ASTM
Test Number Laboratory Test Structures, Sidewalk,
Pavement
(Note 1) Curb and Gutter, and
Concrete Base

Scaling Resistance Due to De-Icing Chemicals,

LS-412 maximum loss after 50 cycles of freezing and 0.80 kg/m2
thawing. (Notes 4 and 5)

Wash Pass 75µm, % maximum

LS-601
(Guideline A) - for gravel 1.0 1.0
- for crushed rock 2.0 2.0
LS-604 or 2.0 2.0
Absorption, % maximum
CSA A23.2-12A (Note 6)
Flat and Elongated Particles,
LS-608 20 20
% maximum
Petrographic Number, Concrete, maximum 125 140
LS-609 Contamination and Unacceptable Minerals Note 7
Siliceous Aggregates Related to LS-412 Note 4
LS-614 or Unconfined Freeze-Thaw,
6 6
CSA A23.2-24A % maximum loss (Note 8)

LS-618 or Micro-Deval Abrasion,

14 17
CSA A23.2-29A % maximum loss

Accelerated Mortar Bar Expansion,

LS-620 or 0.150 0.150
% maximum at 14 Days
CSA A23.2-25A (Note 11) (Note 11)
(Notes 9 and10)

D-Line Cracking, For Concrete Base Only:

Average change in length of 3 tested beams,% no more than ± 0.0350%,
ASTM C 666/C 666M
Average FTF. ≥ 90% of the FTF at 14 days no more than ± 0.0350%,
(Note 12) ≥ 90% of the FTF at 14 days

Concrete Prism Expansion Test,

0.040 0.040
CSA A23.2-14A % maximum at one year
(Notes 9 and 13)
CSA A23.2-26A or LS- Potential Alkali-Carbonate Reactivity of Quarried Chemical composition shall plot in the non-expansive field
615 Carbonate Rock (Note 14) of Fig. 1 of test method
Alternative Requirement for LS-614
Magnesium Sulphate Soundness Loss, 5 Cycles,
LS-606 12 12
% maximum (Note 8)

Notes:
1. LS-412, LS-618, LS-620 (or CSA A23.2-25A), ASTM C 666/C 666M, CSA A23.2-14A and CSA A23.2-26A shall
apply to each individual coarse aggregate component in the mix. The remaining tests shown in this table shall be
carried out either on samples taken from a stockpile of the blended coarse aggregate intended to be used in the mix
or from samples taken from stockpiles of each individual coarse aggregate component and later combined in the
laboratory to the proportions provided with Form A, prior to testing. All sampling and blending shall be as specified in
the Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling subsection.

2. If the fraction of any coarse aggregate component, passing the 4.75 mm sieve represents more than 10% of the
grading of that aggregate by mass, then that fraction of the individual coarse aggregate component shall also meet
the fine aggregate requirements given in Table 2.

April 2018 Page 15 of 17 [Link] 1002

3. When a concrete surface including pavements and exposed bridge decks is subject to vehicular traffic, the physical
requirements for "Pavement" shown in this table shall apply to the aggregates used in the mix.

4. As specified in the Scaling Resistance clause, LS-412 shall be conducted on any aggregate component of a mix
which has at least 80% siliceous aggregates as determined by LS-609. However, this testing will be waived if the
aggregate is from the same bench/formation in a quarry which the Owner has already tested once and approved or,
is listed on the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete
Fine and Coarse Aggregates or the Aggregate Sources List of Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates – See
Note 5., AS LONG AS, at the discretion of the Owner, the aggregate under consideration is still representative of the
aggregate that the Owner originally approved.

5. Note that, if the coarse aggregate in the mix is comprised of one (or more) individual coarse aggregate component(s)
which come from a source location or from a lithology within a source which is not listed as acceptable on the current
Ontario Ministry of Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse
Aggregates, then the requirements for this test shall not be waived for each of the unlisted aggregate component(s).
6. Where an air-cooled blast-furnace slag aggregate is used, the allowable maximum value for Micro-Deval shall be
21% for structures and the allowable maximum value for Absorption shall be according to the Owner's
requirements for slag aggregate.
7. The coarse aggregate shall contain:
a) No steel slag or glass; and
b) Less than 1.0% by mass of gypsum, anhydrite or other sulphate minerals.
8. The requirement for this test shall be waived provided that the Contractor has submitted a written request that the
coarse aggregate meet the alternative requirements for LS-606, magnesium sulphate soundness, as specified in
the Alternative to LS-614 clause.
9. The need to demonstrate compliance with this requirement shall be waived by the Contract Administrator, if the
aggregate component:
a) Is from a source on the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation Regional Aggregate Sources List (ASL) for
Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse Aggregates or the Aggregate Sources List of Concrete Base/Pavement
Coarse Aggregates – see Note 5.; and
b) In accordance with the requirements of Note 13., the aggregate is NOT found to be potentially expansive due to
alkali-carbonate reaction, as determined by CSA A23.2-26A or LS-615.

10. An aggregate that fails to meet these requirements shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator, provided that
the requirements of CSA A23.2-14A are met.

11. If the aggregate is produced from quarried sandstone, siltstone, granite or gneiss, the expansion shall be less than
0.080% after 14 Days. If an aggregate is produced from quarried Gull River, Bobcaygeon, Verulam, or Lindsay
Formations, the expansion shall be less than 0.100% after 14 Days.

12. As specified in the D-Line Cracking clause, this test shall be conducted on any aggregate component of a mix that
will be used in concrete pavement or base which has been produced either from a pit source OR, with the exception
of the Oxford, Gull River or Bobcaygeon Formations, from quarried carbonate (e.g. limestone and dolostone)
bedrock. However, the testing will be waived if the aggregate is from the same bench/formation in a quarry which
the Owner has already tested once and approved or is listed on the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation
Regional Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates – See Note 5. AS LONG AS, at
the discretion of the Owner, the aggregate under consideration is still representative of the aggregate that the Owner
originally approved.

13. An aggregate needs to meet this requirement only if it fails the requirements of either CSA A23.2-25A, or CSA
A23.2-26A or LS-615. The test data shall have been obtained within the past 18 months from aggregate from the
same location within the source as that to be used in the Work. If this test is conducted to show that an aggregate
deemed potentially expansive by CSA A23.2-26A or LS-615 does not exceed 0.040% after one year, then chemical
analysis, CSA A23.2-26A or LS-615, shall be provided to show that the aggregate intended for use has the same
chemical composition as the material tested in CSA A23.2-14A.

14. This requirement only applies to an aggregate produced from quarried Gull River and Bobcaygeon Formations of
southern and eastern Ontario. These dolomitic limestones outcrop on the southern margin of the Canadian Shield
from Midland to Kingston and in the Ottawa-St. Lawrence Lowlands near Cornwall.

April 2018 Page 16 of 17 [Link] 1002

 TABLE 7
Sample Size

Material Minimum Mass, kg (Note 1)

Fine aggregate 15

19 mm coarse aggregate 25

37.5 mm coarse aggregate 50

Note:
1. Individual sample containers shall hold no more than 30 kg of aggregate. When more than 30 kg is required,
additional sample containers shall be used.

April 2018 Page 17 of 17 [Link] 1002

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1003
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - HOT MIX ASPHALT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1003.01 SCOPE

1003.02 REFERENCES

1003.03 DEFINITIONS

1003.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1003.05 MATERIALS

1003.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1003.07 PRODUCTION

1003.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1003.01 SCOPE

This specification covers material requirements for aggregates for use in hot mix asphalt (HMA).

1003.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 313 Hot Mix Asphalt - End Result

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-282 Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Cement and Analysis of Extracted Aggregate From
Bituminous Paving Mixtures

November 2017 Page 1 of 16 [Link] 1003

LS-312 Fractionation of Unextracted Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) and Hot Mix Aggregates for
Testing or Incorporation in Other Test Samples.
LS-600 Dry Preparation of Aggregates For the Determination of Physical Constants
LS-601 Material Finer than 75µm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-604 Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
LS-606 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Magnesium Sulphate
LS-608 Percent Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
LS-609 Petrographic Analysis of Coarse Aggregate
LS-613 Determination of Insoluble Residue of Carbonate Aggregates
LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregates
LS-616 Petrographic Analysis of Fine Aggregate
LS-618 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Granular Materials
LS-629 Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate
LS-631 Qualitative Determination of Presence of Plastic Fines in Aggregates

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

DSM #3.05.25 Aggregates: Surface Friction Courses

ASTM International

D 4791-10 Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated
Particles in Coarse Aggregate
D 5821-01(2006) Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse
Aggregate

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

T176-08 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the
Sand Equivalent Test

1003.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Aggregate means as defined in OPSS 1001.

Air-Cooled Blast Furnace Slag means the material resulting from solidification of molten blast-furnace
slag under atmospheric conditions. Subsequent cooling may be accelerated by application of water to
the solidified surface.

Bench means a relatively horizontal ledge or platform in a quarry that forms a single level of operation
above which rock is excavated from a contiguous face.

Chip Product means an aggregate co-product from the crushing operation with 100% passing the 9.5
mm sieve, predominantly passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 2.36 mm sieve.

Coarse Aggregate means that portion of aggregate material retained on the 4.75 mm or larger sieve
when tested according to LS-602.

Consensus Property means an aggregate property required for use in a Superpave mix.

Copper Slag means the non-metallic product resulting from the production of copper.

November 2017 Page 2 of 16 [Link] 1003

Duplicate Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for quality
assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Fine Aggregate means that portion of aggregate material passing the 4.75 mm sieve when tested
according to LS-602.

Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Nickel Slag means the non-metallic product resulting from the production of nickel.

Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate material. Tests are carried out
to determine an aggregate’s resistance to weathering or degradation or both. Aggregate production
processes generally do not affect physical properties.

Primary Coarse Aggregate means the aggregate component that represents the greatest proportion of
the coarse aggregate in the mix design. For Superpave 12.5 FC1, Superpave 12.5 FC2 and SMA mixes,
the Primary Coarse Aggregate may be identified as Type (D), (G), (M) or (T), as listed in DSM List
#3.05.25.

Quality Assurance (QA) means as defined in OPSS 313

Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Roof Shingle Tabs (RST) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Steel Slag means the non-metallic product resulting from the production of steel in a basic oxygen
furnace or an electric arc furnace.

Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Superpave (Superpave™) means as defined in OPSS 313.

1003.05 MATERIALS

1003.05.01 General

Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1001 and shall meet all of the requirements of this specification
when tested using the applicable MTO, AASHTO, and ASTM test methods identified herein.

Except as noted below or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, aggregates may be sands, gravels,
quarried rock, the aggregate portion of RST, or the aggregate portion of RAP, provided that the source or
sources are of such nature and extent to ensure acceptable processed aggregates of a consistent
gradation and quality. When any change in the character of the aggregate occurs or when the
performance of aggregate meeting the requirements of this specification is found to be unsatisfactory, use
of the aggregate shall be discontinued until a reappraisal by the Contractor, with the approval of the
Contract Administrator, proves the source to be satisfactory.

Steel slag, air-cooled blast furnace slag, nickel slag and copper slag shall not be used in HMA. RAP
containing steel slag aggregate, RST containing asbestos, and post-consumer shingle material shall not
be permitted.

RAP used in an HMA surface or binder course mix shall be comprised of aggregates that, when
combined with all of the other aggregates in the mix, will meet the Owner’s physical property
requirements specified in Table 4.

November 2017 Page 3 of 16 [Link] 1003

The need for, type of and application of anti-stripping additive shall be as specified in the Contract
Documents.

For Superpave 12.5FC 1, the coarse aggregates in the mix shall be produced from crushed bedrock
material or gravel supplied from sources named on the DSM #3.05.25.

For Superpave 12.5FC 2, both the coarse and fine aggregates in the mix shall be produced from crushed
bedrock material supplied from sources named on DSM #3.05.25. Coarse aggregate for Superpave
12.5FC 2 may be obtained from a different source than the fine aggregate. When RAP is used in
Superpave 12.5FC 2, the coarse aggregate portion of the RAP may be derived from different sources. In
all other cases, blending of coarse aggregates for Superpave 12.5FC 2 from different sources shall not be
permitted. Blending of fine aggregates for Superpave 12.5FC 2 from different sources is permitted
provided that aggregate fraction retained on the 4.75 mm sieve as part of the blended fine aggregate
comprise less than 20% by mass of the total amount of coarse aggregate.

For SMA surface courses, both the coarse and fine aggregates shall be produced from crushed bedrock
supplied from sources shown in DSM #3.05.25. Both the coarse and fine aggregates shall be obtained
from the same source except where aggregate is derived from RST.

Chip products shall be derived:

a) For Superpave 12.5FC 2, SMA 12.5 or SMA 9.5, from the same source as the primary coarse
aggregate used in the mix; or

b) For Superpave 12.5FC 1, from an aggregate source listed on DSM #3.05.25; or

c) For all other mixes, either from an aggregate source listed on DSM #3.05.25 or from the same source
and of the same lithology as a coarse aggregate that is being used the mix.

Filler shall consist of mineral filler, hydrated lime, Portland cement, or other material as specified and
currently approved by the Owner for use in HMA. For SMA, the filler shall be mineral filler.

Mineral filler shall meet the following requirements:

a) Be produced from quarried rock from the same bench that is also used to produce a screenings co-
product that is shown to have a Micro-Deval of no more than 30%, when determined in accordance
with LS-619, in lieu of the requirements shown in Note 2 of Table 1.

b) Be sufficiently dry so that it flows freely.

c) Be free from agglomerations.

d) Be non-plastic according to LS-631.

e) Be inert.

f) Mineral filler shall also meet the following gradation requirements according to LS-602:
i) 100% passing the 600 µm sieve.
ii) Not less than 70% passing the 75 µm sieve.

In addition, the mineral filler for SMA mixes shall be of gradation and properties to be capable of
producing asphalt mortar properties meeting the appropriate requirements as specified in the Contract
Documents.

November 2017 Page 4 of 16 [Link] 1003

1003.05.02 Gradation

Each individual fine and coarse aggregate component shall be graded so that when combined with all
other aggregates including RAP and/or RST, the overall gradation of the HMA specified in the Contract
Documents is consistently being met.

1003.05.03 Physical Property Requirements

Each aggregate component of the mix shall be composed of clean, hard, durable particles.

With the exceptions of RAP and RST, the individual aggregate components of the mix shall be properly
proportioned and blended, in accordance with the mix design.

The fraction of the combined aggregates passing the 4.75 mm sieve shall meet the physical property
requirements specified in Table 1.

The fraction of the combined aggregates retained on the 4.75 mm sieve shall meet the physical property
requirements specified in Table 2 for surface course mixes and Table 3 for binder or levelling course
mixes, respectively.

In addition to the physical property requirements for the combined aggregate components described
above, the combined fine and coarse aggregate fractions extracted from samples of HMA shall also meet
the applicable physical property requirements specified in Table 4.

1003.05.04 Consensus Property Requirements

The fraction of the combined aggregates passing the 4.75 mm sieve, including aggregates derived from
RAP or RST or both, each of which have been properly fractionated in accordance with LS-312 then
proportioned and blended in accordance with the mix design, shall meet the consensus property
requirements for AASHTO T 176 and LS-629 given in Table 5 for the traffic category specified in the
Contract Documents. However, for AASHTO T 176 only, any fine aggregate that is derived from RAP or
RST or both shall be excluded.

The fraction of the combined aggregates retained on the 4.75 mm sieve, including aggregates derived
from RAP or RST or both, each of which have been properly proportioned and blended in accordance
with the mix design, shall meet the consensus property requirements according to ASTM D4791 and
ASTM D5821 given in Table 5, for the traffic category specified in the Contract Documents.

1003.07 PRODUCTION

1003.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling

Aggregates separated during processing, aggregates secured from different sources, and aggregates
from the same source, but of different gradation, shall be stockpiled separately. When screenings from
primary and secondary crushers are produced separately, they shall be stockpiled separately.

Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign material of any description, or aggregates from different
stockpiles that have become mixed with each other, shall not be used and shall be removed from the
stockpile immediately.

Aggregates shall be retained in stockpiles for at least 24 hours prior to use. Suitable stockpile locations
are the site of mixing of the HMA, the aggregate source, or any other location acceptable to the Contract
Administrator.

November 2017 Page 5 of 16 [Link] 1003

1003.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1003.08.01 General

A laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out QA testing for purposes of ensuring that the
aggregates used in the Work conform to the physical property, gradation and, at the discretion of the
Contract Administrator, the consensus property requirements of this specification.

With the exceptions of RAP and RST and unless otherwise noted, QA testing will be conducted on
combined samples prepared from individual QA samples by splitting off sufficient quantities of each
individual aggregate component, based on percentages stated in the HMA mix design and the overall
combined quantity required for testing.

When an anti-stripping additive is used, test samples for physical property requirements shall be taken
prior to the addition of the anti-stripping additive. If this is not practical for samples that are coated in
hydrated lime, the lime shall be removed by washing prior to testing. In this case, the requirements for
LS-601 are waived.

The Owner shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing for QA purposes, unless otherwise
indicated in this specification. Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor, as they become
available.

1003.08.02 Alternative to LS-614

LS-614 shall be used for acceptance, unless written notification to the Contract Administrator to replace it
with LS-606 for acceptance is received prior to sampling of the applicable materials for QA purposes.
Provided that the Contract Administrator has received such a request, LS-606 shall be used. Otherwise,
conformance to LS-614 shall be required.

When notification to replace LS-614 is received after QA testing using LS-614 has been initiated, the
Contractor shall be charged $600.00 for each test initiated, which includes the cost of the testing using
LS-614, administrative charges, and additional sampling, if required.

1003.08.03 Sampling

Unless otherwise specified, all QA aggregate samples shall be taken at the hot mix plant from individual
stockpiles, according to the Stockpile Method clause. Each QA sample shall be treated as discrete
samples and not combined or blended with any other sample. In the absence of individual stockpiles at
the plant, QA samples shall be taken at the aggregate source.

For physical properties, the following minimum number of random QA samples shall be obtained for every
lot of 20,000 tonnes or part thereof of each HMA mix produced:

a) One duplicate set of samples of all other primary coarse aggregates as well as all other aggregates
used in the mix, including chip products;

b) One sample of RAP, if RAP is used in the mix, for information purposes only;

c) One sample of RST, if RST is used in the mix, for information purposes only;

d) One duplicate sample of HMA during placement; and

e) For Superpave 12.5FC 1, Superpave 12.5FC 2, SMA 9.5 and SMA 12.5 surface course mixes with a
Type (D) primary coarse aggregate: two sets of duplicate samples of the primary coarse aggregate
obtained from separate sampling pads constructed from aggregate obtained within the stockpile.

November 2017 Page 6 of 16 [Link] 1003

The aggregate samples described in part e) above, shall be taken during the same HMA production shift
represented by the duplicate sample listed in d). If the Contract Administrator determines that this is not
possible, then the samples described in part e) shall be taken within 24 hours or within no more than two
HMA production shifts, represented by the duplicate sample listed in d), whichever is longer.

In the event that the Contractor is unavailable to take any of the samples, no further materials shall be
placed in the Work until the samples have been taken.

In addition to the duplicate samples taken for QA purposes, at the request of the Contract Administrator, a
third sample shall be taken for Superpave 12.5FC 1, Superpave 12.5FC 2, SMA 9.5, and SMA 12.5
aggregates at the time the QA samples are taken.

During the production of each lot of SMA surface course mix, at the request of the Contract Administrator,
random samples of both the mineral filler and the baghouse fines, shall also be taken. Each sample shall
be placed in a triple-sealed metal container of suitable size, which shall be properly identified, and shall
include the contract number, name of the Contractor, highway number, lot number, and the contact
information of the person who conducted the sampling.

One of each of the duplicate QA samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory. The
QA laboratory shall retain the remaining samples for referee testing, if required.

1003.08.04.01 Sample Size

The mass of the each QA sample shall meet the requirements shown in Table 6. When more than 30 kg
of material is required, the total sample shall be recombined prior to testing.

1003.08.04.02 Stockpile Method

The stockpiles from which the QA samples are to be taken shall contain a minimum quantity of
500 tonnes of each aggregate, or at least 10% of the total quantity of aggregate needed for each HMA
mix, unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator. QA sampling from stockpile shall be
according to LS-625.

1003.08.05 Acceptance

The aggregates within a lot of HMA shall be deemed to be acceptable if all of the test results for the
aggregates representing that lot meet all applicable requirements of this specification.

If QA test results of an aggregate sample representing a lot of HMA do not meet all of the requirements of
this specification, then a reduced price payment of 10% of the tender price shall be given for each tonne
of HMA left in the Work that includes any of the aggregates within that lot, as long as the applicable test
results for that sample:

a) Do not exceed the requirement for LS-614, or LS-606 if it has been accepted by the Owner as an
alternative to LS-614, by more than 25% of the specified value.

b) Do not exceed the requirement for LS-618 by more than 10% of the specified value.

c) Do not exceed the requirement for LS-619 by more than 15% of the specified value.

d) Meet all other requirements of this specification.

If QA test results of an aggregate sample representing a lot of HMA do not meet the requirements listed
above, then all of the aggregates within that lot shall be considered rejectable and any HMA that includes
those aggregates shall be removed from the Work at no cost to the Owner.

November 2017 Page 7 of 16 [Link] 1003

Irrespective of a reduced price payment, the warranty provisions of the Contract Documents shall apply.

1003.08.06 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator, within 5 Business Days following notification that an aggregate sample
representing a lot of HMA does not meet the requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out, as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained duplicate QA samples shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot
and shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

If a lot is not accepted at full payment based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of the referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to
the referee laboratory, at the rates specified in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the Owner
shall bear the cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples of that lot.

November 2017 Page 8 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 1
Physical Property Requirements for Combined HMA Aggregates in
Surface, Binder and Levelling Courses - Fraction Passing the 4.75 mm Sieve (Note 1)
SMA 19.0 and
MTO Laboratory MTO Laboratory SMA 9.5 & 12.5; and Superpave
Superpave 4.75, 9.5,
Test Number Test Superpave 12.5FC 2 12.5FC 1
12.5, 19.0, 25.0 & 37.5

Micro-Deval Abrasion, (Note 2)

LS-619
% maximum loss 15 20 25
LS-631 Plastic Fines NP NP NP
Notes for Table 1:
1. As specified in LS-600, the aggregate used for the following tests shall be prepared by first splitting off
sufficient quantities of each of the aggregate components, based on their individual percentages stated
in the mix design and the overall blended quantity required for the test(s). Then, with the exceptions of
RAP and RST, the split portions of each of the other aggregate components shall be placed in a vessel
of appropriate size and blended together by mixing. The blended aggregate shall then be split on the
4.75 mm sieve and the portion passing the 4.75 mm sieve set aside for testing.
2. In addition to the requirements shown below, the Micro-Deval Abrasion loss for any individual aggregate
component where the aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve represents more than 5% of the overall mix
design gradation, by mass, shall not exceed 35%.

November 2017 Page 9 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 2
Physical Property Requirements for Combined HMA Aggregates in Surface Courses
- Fraction Retained on the 4.75 mm Sieve (Note 1)
Aggregate Type (Note 2)
MTO
Type (G) Type (D) Type (M) Type (T)
Laboratory Laboratory Superpave
Test Test 9.5 and 12.5 Superpave Superpave 12.5FC 1 and
Number 12.5FC 1 12.5FC 2,
Only and SMA 9.5 and 12.5
Wash Pass 75µm sieve,
1.3
LS-601 Guideline B, % maximum 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
(Note 3)
loss
LS-604 Absorption, % maximum 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Petrographic Number, (Note 4)
LS-609 -
(HL) maximum 120 145 145 120
Insoluble Residue, retained 45
LS-613 - - - -
75µm sieve, % minimum (Note 5)
Unconfined Freeze-Thaw, 6 (Note 4)
LS-614
% maximum loss (Note 6) 6 7 6 6
Micro-Deval Abrasion, 17 (Notes 4 and 7)
LS-618
% maximum loss (Note 7) 10 15 15 10
Alternative Requirement for LS-614
Magnesium Sulphate
12
LS-606 Soundness, % maximum -
(Note 6)
loss

November 2017 Page 10 of 16 [Link] 1003

Notes for Table 2:
1. As specified in LS-600, the aggregate used for the following tests shall be prepared by first splitting off
sufficient quantities of each of the aggregate components, based on their individual percentages stated
in the mix design and the overall blended quantity required for the test(s). Then, with the exceptions of
RAP and RST, the split portions of each of the other aggregate components shall be placed in a vessel
of appropriate size and blended together by mixing. The blended aggregate shall then be split on the
4.75 mm sieve and the portion retained on the 4.75 mm sieve set aside for testing.
2. Aggregate Types (G), (D), (M) and (T) refer to the Designation Type included in the “Product Description
and Designation Type” column for each source listed on DSM #3.05.25.
3. When quarried rock is used as a source of at least one coarse aggregate in the mix, a maximum of 2.0
percent passing the 75 µm sieve shall be permitted.
4. When this test is being carried out on the coarse aggregate fraction of a Superpave 12.5FC 1 that
contains coarse aggregates from more than one source, the minimum value of the % maximum losses
shown below for the coarse aggregate categories that are included in that mix shall be used for
acceptance.
5. The following requirements shall be met:
i) The average value of two test results carried out on separate samples shall have a minimum
insoluble residue of 45%. Each of the two samples shall be prepared by blending one of the two
primary coarse aggregate stockpile samples, specified in part a) of the Sampling subsection with
each of the remaining aggregates in the mix, excluding RAP and/or RST, according to Table 2, Note
1.
ii) The insoluble residue, determined from part i) above, minus the insoluble residue from the
aggregates extracted from the HMA sample, shall meet the requirements specified in Table 4, Note
8.
6. For Superpave 9.5 and Superpave 12.5, the Owner shall waive the requirements for LS-614, Unconfined
Freeze-Thaw, provided the Contractor has submitted a written request that the coarse aggregate meet
the alternative requirements for LS-606, Magnesium Sulphate Soundness.
7. In addition to the requirements shown below, the Micro-Deval Abrasion loss for any individual aggregate
component where the aggregate retained on the 4.75 mm sieve represents more than 5% of the overall
mix design gradation, by mass, shall not exceed 25%.

November 2017 Page 11 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 3
Physical Property Requirements for Combined HMA Aggregates in Binder and Levelling Courses
- Fraction Retained on the 4.75 mm Sieve (Note 1)
Superpave 9.5, 12.5,
MTO Test Laboratory
19.0, 25.0, & 37.5 and
Number Test
SMA 19.0
LS-601 Wash Pass 75µm sieve, Guideline B, % maximum 1.3 (Note 2)
LS-604 Absorption, % maximum 2.0
LS-614 Unconfined Freeze-Thaw, % maximum loss (Note 3) 15
LS-618 Micro-Deval Abrasion, % maximum loss 21 (Note 4)
Alternative Requirement for LS-614
LS-606 Magnesium Sulphate Soundness, % maximum loss (Note 3) 15
Notes for Table 3:
1. As specified in LS-600, the aggregate used for the following tests shall be prepared by first splitting off
sufficient quantities of each of the aggregate components, based on their individual percentages stated
in the mix design and the overall blended quantity required for the test(s). Then, with the exceptions of
RAP and RST, the split portions of each of the other aggregate components shall be placed in a vessel
of appropriate size and blended together by mixing. The blended aggregate shall then be split on the
4.75 mm sieve and the portion retained on the 4.75 mm sieve set aside for testing.
2. When quarried rock is used as a source of at least one coarse aggregate, a maximum of 2.0 percent
passing the 75µm sieve shall be permitted.
3. The Owner shall waive the requirements for LS-614, Unconfined Freeze-Thaw, provided that the
Contractor has submitted a written request that the coarse aggregate meet the alternative requirements
for LS-606, Magnesium Sulphate Soundness.
4. In addition to the requirements shown below, the Micro-Deval Abrasion loss for any individual aggregate
component where the aggregate retained on the 4.75 mm sieve represents more than 5% of the overall
mix design gradation, by mass, shall not exceed 25%.

November 2017 Page 12 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 4
Physical Property Requirements for Aggregates Extracted From HMA (Note 1)
Binder and
Surface Course
Levelling Course
MTO
Laboratory Superpave Superpave 9.5,
Test
Test 12.5FC 2, Superpave Superpave 12.5, 19.0, 25.0,
Number
SMA 9.5 12.5FC 1 9.5 and 12.5 37.5, and
and 12.5 SMA 19.0
Passing the 4.75 mm Sieve / Retained on the 2.36 mm Sieve
Acid Insoluble Residue,
LS-613 retained on 75 µm sieve, - - 60.0 -
% minimum (Note 2)
LS-616, Category 1 aggregates,
90.0 - - -
Part B % minimum (Note 3)
Retained on the 4.75 mm Sieve
Flat and Elongated Particles,
LS-608 15 15 20 20
% maximum (4:1)
Category 1 aggregates,
90.0 90.0 -
% minimum (Note 3)
Category 2 aggregates,
- - 40
% maximum (Notes 2, 4) -
LS-609,
Part B Category 2 AND Category 5
aggregates, % maximum 5.0 5.0 -
(Note 5)
Category 3 Contaminants,
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
% maximum (Note 6)
Types (G), (M) or (T)
Primary Coarse Aggregate
90.0 (Note 7) 90.0 (Note 7)
Acid Insoluble Residue,
Type (D)
LS-613 retained on 75 µm sieve, - -
Primary Coarse Aggregate
% minimum
45.0 45.0
15, 12, 10 15, 12, 10
(Note 8) (Note 8)
Notes for Table 4:
1. Aggregates used for the following tests shall be extracted from hot mix using LS-282 and then split on the
4.75 mm sieve, prior to testing.
2. This requirement is only applicable to surface courses placed on the Thousand Islands Parkway; Highway 33
from west of Bath to Picton; Highway 35 from County Road 121 northerly to Norland; and in the area to the
north and west of a boundary defined by the north shore of Lake Superior, the north shore of the St. Mary's
River, the south shore of St. Joseph Island, the north shore of Lake Huron easterly to the north and east shore
of Georgian Bay (excluding Manitoulin Island), along the Severn River to Washago and a line easterly passing
through Norland, Burnt River, Burleigh Falls, Madoc, and hence easterly along Highway 7 to Perth and
northerly to Calabogie and easterly to Arnprior and the Ottawa River.
3. Category 1 aggregates shall include:
a. For the fraction passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 2.36mm sieve, all Category 1 aggregates

November 2017 Page 13 of 16 [Link] 1003

 or their acceptable major mineral components or both listed on the Part B form in LS-616.
b. For the fraction retained on the 4.75 mm sieve, the following rock types, when classified according to the
descriptions given in LS-609, Appendix:
i) Rock types 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 22 AND
ii) For mixes with a (G), (M) or (T) primary coarse aggregate, up to 12.5% rock types 25, 27, 29 and 30
(i.e. the actual percentage of these rock types in that fraction may be greater than 12.5%, provided
there is a minimum of 77.5% of the rock types shown in i); OR
iii) For mixes with a (D) primary coarse aggregate, rock types 1, 2, 20 and 21.
4. Category 2 aggregates shall include the following rock types, when classified according to the descriptions
given in LS-609, Appendix:
a. For mixes where the primary coarse aggregate is from a carbonate or dolomitic sandstone source:
i) Rock types 23, 24, 26, 35, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 49; AND
ii) Rock types 1, 2, 20, 21, where the siliceous component determined by petrographic analysis (i.e. and
confirmed by insoluble residue testing using LS-613, when the Petrographic Analyst is unsure) is less
than 45%.
b. For mixes where the primary coarse aggregate is not from a carbonate or dolomitic sandstone source,
rock types 1, 2, 20, 21, 23, 24, 26, 35, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 and 49.
In the event of a dispute based on the petrographic testing described above, the extracted coarse aggregates
must have at least 60% insoluble residue retained on the 75 µm sieve, in accordance with LS-613.
5. This requirement shall only apply to mixes with primary coarse aggregate types (G), (M) or (T) and where the
mix design submission indicates that any RAP in the mix does not contain dolomitic sandstone retained on the
4.75 mm sieve (i.e. the RAP does not contain rock types 3 and/or 22, according to the descriptions given in
LS-609, Appendix or, when present, fine powder obtained from scratching those materials does not
effervesce, when subjected to 5% HCl by volume) and shall include all:
a. Category 2 aggregates, as specified in Note 4 b); and
b. Category 5 aggregates consisting of the following rock types, according to the descriptions given in of LS-
609, Appendix: types 28, 32, 34, 46, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 71,73, 74, 77, 78,
79, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, and 97 as well as any other rock types that do not fall under Categories
1, 2 or 3.
In the event of a dispute based on the petrographic testing described above, then the extracted coarse
aggregates must have at least 95% insoluble residue retained on the 75 µm sieve, in accordance with LS-613.
6. Category 3 contaminants include but are not limited to clay and soluble minerals, clay lumps, earth, wood,
crack sealant as well as all waste materials such as gypsum, plaster, gypsum/plastic wallboard, hydraulic
cement concrete, clay brick, tile, coal, fly ash, cardboard, paper, metals, slags, glass, ceramics, soluble
minerals, paint, rubber, etc.
7. For mixes with primary coarse aggregate types (G), (M) or (T) and where, in the mix design submission,
petrographic testing in accordance with LS 609 Part b), clearly indicates that any RAP in the mix contains
dolomitic sandstone (i.e. the material contains rock types 3 and/or 22, according to the descriptions given in
LS-609, Appendix and fine powder obtained from scratching those materials at least slightly effervesces when
subjected to 5% HCl by volume) retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
8. For mixes with a (D) primary coarse aggregate, the % insoluble residue retained on the 75 µm sieve,
determined from the average of TWO blended samples of aggregates [i.e. see Table 2, Note 5, part i)] MINUS
the % insoluble residue retained on the 75 µm sieve for the coarse portion of the aggregate extracted from the
HMA sample, shall not exceed:
i) 15% by mass for mixes containing RAP that has at least 10% its aggregates retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve;
ii) 12% by mass for mixes containing RAP that has less than 10% of its aggregates retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve; and
iii) 10% by mass for mixes that does not contain RAP.

November 2017 Page 14 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 5
Consensus Property Requirements for HMA Coarse and Fine Aggregates
Including RAP or RST or Both (Note 1)
Combined Aggregates Combined Aggregates
Passing the 4.75 mm Sieve Retained on the 4.75 mm Sieve
ASTM D 4791 ASTM D 5821 Fractured
LS-629 Uncompacted
Traffic AASHTO T 176 Flat and Particles in Coarse
Void Content,
Category Sand Equivalent Elongated Aggregate, % minimum
Method 1, % minimum
Particles, (Note 4)
% minimum
≤ 100mm > 100mm % maximum at ≤ 100 mm > 100 mm
(Note 2)
(Note 3) (Note 3) 5:1 (Note 3) (Note 3)
A 40 - - - 55/- -/-
B 40 40 40 75/- 50/-
C 45 45 (Note 5) 40 85/80 60/-
10
D 45 45 (Note 5) 40 95/90 80/75
E 50 45 (Note 5) 45 (Note 5) 100/100 100/100
Notes for Table 5:
1. As specified in LS-600, the aggregate used for the following tests shall be prepared by first splitting off
sufficient quantities of each of the aggregate components including, with the exception of AASHTO T 176
(i.e. see Note 2.), any aggregates derived from RAP and RST, based on the individual percentages of
each aggregate component stated in the mix design and the overall blended quantity required for the
test(s). The split portions of each of the aggregate components shall be placed in a vessel of appropriate
size and blended together by mixing. The blended aggregate shall then be split on the 4.75 mm sieve
and the portions passing and retained on the 4.75 mm sieve set aside for testing.
2. When the total combined fine aggregate includes aggregate derived from RAP or RST or both, this
requirement shall be met prior to blending with RAP or RST or both.
3. Denotes the depth of the top of lift below the final pavement surface. If less than 25% of a layer is within
100 mm of the surface, then the layer may be considered to be below 100 mm.
4. 85/80 denotes that 85% of the coarse aggregate has one fractured face and 80% has two or more
fractured faces.
5. An uncompacted void content of 43% is acceptable, provided that the selected mix satisfies the mix
volumetrics specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2017 Page 15 of 16 [Link] 1003

 Table 6
Field Sample Size
Material Minimum Mass, kg (Note 1)
Fine aggregate 15
Coarse aggregate 25
RAP 10
RST 5
Filler / Baghouse Fines 2
Hot Mix Asphalt 25
Note for Table 6:
1. Individual sample containers shall hold no more than 30 kg of aggregate. When more than 30 kg is
required, additional sample containers shall be used.

November 2017 Page 16 of 16 [Link] 1003

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1004
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2012

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - MISCELLANEOUS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1004.01 SCOPE

1004.02 REFERENCES

1004.03 DEFINITIONS

1004.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1004.05 MATERIALS

1004.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1004.07 PRODUCTION

1004.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1004.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

APPENDICES

1004-A Commentary

1004.01 SCOPE

This specification covers material requirements for aggregates for use as clear stone, granular sheeting,
gabion stone, mortar sand, rip-rap, rock protection, truck arrester bed aggregate and winter sand.

1004.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

1004.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1004.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

OPSS 1010 Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade and Backfill Material

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-601 Materials Finer than 75 µm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-604 Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
LS-607 Determination of Percent Crushed Particles in Processed Coarse Aggregate
LS-608 Determination of Percent Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
LS-610 Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete
LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate
LS-616 Petrographic Analysis of Fine Aggregate
LS-618 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Aggregate Materials
LS-631 Determination of Presence of Plastic Fines in Aggregates

MTO Forms:
PH-D-10 Aggregate Sample Data Sheet

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

ASTM International

C 87/87M-10 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar

D 6473-10 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Rock for Erosion Control

1004.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Clear Stone means a graded aggregate intended for use in drainage, backfill, bedding, and other
applications.

Duplicate Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for quality
assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Gabion Stone means a graded fractured rock aggregate intended for use in gabion baskets and gabion
mats.

Granular Sheeting means a graded granular aggregate material intended for use as a protective surface
layer on erodible soil slopes.

Mortar Sand means a fine aggregate intended for application in Portland cement based mortars.

Nominal Maximum Size means the largest sieve in the applicable specification upon which material is
permitted to be retained.

Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate material. Tests are carried out
to determine a material's resistance to weathering or degradation or both.

Pit-Run Material means material excavated directly from an existing bank in a pit and delivered to the job
site without further processing, i.e., crushing, screening, washing, and classifying.

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
materials received from the Contractor meet the specified requirements.

Referee Testing means testing of a material property or attribute for the purpose of resolving
acceptance.

Rip-Rap means a well graded, fractured rock or crushed reclaimed concrete intended for use as slope
protection in hydraulic channels.

Rock Protection means a well graded, fractured rock or crushed reclaimed concrete intended for use as
general slope protection.

Spheroidal Particle means when the ratio of the greatest dimension in the longitudinal axis compared to
the least dimension in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis is less than 2:1.

Truck Arrester Bed Aggregate means a single-sized aggregate used in runaway truck lanes to slow and
stop the progress of vehicles.

Winter Sand means a fine aggregate intended for application to roadways during winter conditions to
improve frictional properties of the pavement surface.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

1004.05 MATERIALS

1004.05.01 General

The requirements of OPSS 1001 shall apply to this specification.

All aggregate source materials shall be clean, hard, durable particles free of earth, humus, clay or other
coatings, clay lumps, shale or shaley partings and other deleterious materials. Aggregates may be
sands, gravels, cobbles, boulders, or quarried rock. Reclaimed asphalt pavement, reclaimed hydraulic
cement concrete, glass, other reclaimed materials, and slag materials shall not be used. When reclaimed
materials are permitted by this specification or specified in the Contract Documents, they shall be
homogeneously blended. When reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete is permitted, it shall not contain
loose reinforcing material and shall be free of protruding metal.

When any change in the character of the aggregate occurs or when the performance of aggregate
meeting the requirements of this specification is found to be unsatisfactory, use of the aggregate shall be
discontinued until a reappraisal by the Contractor, with the approval of the Contract Administrator, proves
the source to be satisfactory.

Irrespective of compliance or non-compliance with the gradation and physical property requirements of
this specification, aggregates may be accepted or rejected on the basis of field performance, as
determined by the Owner.

1004.05.02 Clear Stone

Clear stone may be 53.0 mm, 19.0 mm Type I, 19.0 mm Type II, 16.0 mm, 13.2 mm, or 9.5 mm and shall
meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 1 and the gradation requirements shown in
Table 2.

1004.05.03 Granular Sheeting

Granular sheeting shall meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 3 and the gradation
requirements shown in Table 4.

1004.05.04 Mortar Sand

Mortar sand shall consist of natural sand, or with the approval of the Contract Administrator, other inert
materials with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable particles.

Mortar sand shall meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 5 and the gradation
requirements shown in Table 6.

1004.05.05 Gabion Stone, Rip-Rap and Rock Protection

Gabion stone, rip-rap and rock protection shall be produced from crushed or fractured bedrock fragments
with 100% fractured faces or crushed from cobbles or boulders greater than 300 mm diameter and shall
not deteriorate when exposed to air and water and shall be resistant to deterioration by cycles of wetting,
drying, freezing, and thawing.

Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete may be used in non-watercourse applications.

Gabion stone, rip-rap and rock protection shall meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 7
and the gradation requirements shown in Table 8.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

1004.05.06 Truck Arrester Bed Aggregate

Truck arrester bed aggregate shall be pit-run material meeting the physical property requirements shown
in Table 9 and the gradation requirements shown in Table 10. In addition, truck arrester bed aggregate
shall meet the following shape requirements:

a) Rounded particles shall be a minimum of 30% by mass. Rounded particles shall be determined by
the procedure given in LS-607, reporting the percentage of rounded particles instead of crushed
particles. The test specimen size shall be a minimum of 3,000 g passing the 26.5 mm sieve and
retained on the 19 mm sieve.

b) Spheroidal particles shall be a minimum of 50% by mass. Spheroidal particles shall be determined
by the procedure given in LS-608, using a figure-eight calliper in which the ratio of the opening at one
end to that at the other end is 2:1 instead of 4:1. The test specimen size shall be a minimum of
3,000 g passing the 26.5 mm sieve and retained on the 19 mm sieve.

1004.05.07 Winter Sand

Winter sand shall meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 11 and the gradation
requirements shown in Table 12.

1004.07 PRODUCTION

1004.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling

Aggregates separated during processing shall be placed in individual stockpiles. Processed aggregates
secured from different sources and aggregates from the same source but of different gradations shall be
placed in individual stockpiles.

Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any description or aggregates from different
stockpiles that have become mixed with each other shall not be used and shall be removed from the
stockpile immediately.

1004.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1004.08.01 General

Each aggregate, with the exception of mortar sand, shall be randomly sampled in lots according to Table
13.

When the quantity of aggregate material is insufficient for a complete lot and the quantity is:

a) Less than one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall be added to the previous lot.

b) Greater than or equal to one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall form its own lot.

Mortar sand shall be sampled and tested at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.

The Contract Administrator shall be allowed access to all sampling locations.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

The laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out testing for purposes of ensuring that aggregates
used in the Work are according to the physical property and grading requirements of this specification.
The Owner shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing for QA purposes, unless otherwise
indicated in this specification. Individual test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor, as they become
available.

Test data for each aggregate type shall be managed independently. When more than one source is used
for supplying material, test data from each source and product shall be managed independently.

1004.08.02 Sampling

Sampling shall be according to LS-625 and taken at the time and location determined by the Contract
Administrator. Samples shall be of sufficient mass to conduct the necessary gradation and physical
property tests of the material. Minimum sample sizes for most aggregate types shall be according to
Table 14.

Unless otherwise indicated, all QA samples shall be taken from individual stockpiles at the source. Each
QA sample shall be treated as a discrete sample and not combined or blended with any other sample.
When material contains blended or reclaimed aggregates or both, QA sampling shall be performed on the
final blended product.

All samples shall be duplicate samples.

The Contractor shall provide new or clean sample bags or containers that are constructed to prevent the
loss of any part of the material or contamination or damage to the contents during shipment. Metal or
cardboard containers are unacceptable. QA samples shall be identified both inside and outside of the
sample container. Data to be included with QA samples shall be according to the requirements of MTO
Form PH-D-10.

At least one set of QA samples shall be obtained for each aggregate used in the Work. The Contract
Administrator shall seal each QA sample container at the time and place of sampling.

The Contractor shall deliver all samples to the appropriate laboratory in a condition that is suitable for
testing.

1004.08.03 Testing and Retention of Samples

When the Contract Administrator has elected to carry out QA testing, one of the duplicate samples shall
be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory. The QA laboratory shall retain the remaining
sealed sample for possible referee testing, if required.

1004.08.03.01 Winter Sand

Following delivery, winter sand shall be subject to a visual inspection of the stockpile to determine the
presence of oversize material. Oversize particles may be confirmed with a 9.5 mm sieve.

1004.08.04 Acceptance

QA test results shall be used for acceptance purposes, except when referee testing of any aggregate or a
visual examination of winter sand has been carried out.

When QA test results show that the material meets the applicable gradation and physical property
requirements of this specification, the material shall be accepted.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

When QA test results show that the material does not meet the applicable requirements of this
specification, then all the aggregates in that lot shall be considered rejectable and removed from the Work
at no cost to the Owner.

The Contract Administrator shall notify the Contractor that material represented by the test result shall not
be accepted. This notification shall take place in writing within 3 Business Days of receipt of the non-
conforming data.

1004.08.05 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator, within 5 Business Days following notification that the aggregate does not meet
the requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out, as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained duplicate QA sample shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot
and shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

If a lot is not accepted at full payment based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of the referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to
the referee laboratory, at the rates specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the
Owner shall bear the cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples of that lot.

Page 7 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 1
Physical Property Requirements for Clear Stone

Nominal Maximum Size

MTO MTO Test

19 mm
Laboratory Test Number 16 mm, 13.2 mm,
53 mm
and 9.5 mm
Type I Type II

Wash Pass 75 µm Sieve,

LS-601 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Guideline B, % maximum
Percent Crushed Particles,
LS-607 - 50 60 60
% minimum
Micro-Deval Abrasion,
Coarse Aggregate, LS-618 25 25 25 25
% maximum loss

TABLE 2
Gradation Requirements for Clear Stone

Gradation (LS-602), Percent Passing

Nominal Maximum Size

Sieve Size
19 mm
53 mm 16 mm 13.2 mm 9.5 mm
Type I Type II

63 mm 100 - - - - -

53 mm 90 - 100 - - - - -

26.5 mm - 100 100 - - -

19.0 mm 0 - 15 90 - 100 90 - 100 100 - -

16.0 mm - - 65 - 90 96 - 100 100 -

13.2 mm - - - 67 - 86 96 - 100 100

9.5 mm - 0 - 55 20 - 55 29 - 52 50 - 73 95 - 100

6.7 mm - - - - - 20 - 45

4.75 mm - 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10

75 µm 0 - 2.0 0 - 2.0 0 - 2.0 0 - 2.0 0 - 2.0 0 - 2.0

Page 8 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 3
Physical Property Requirements for Granular Sheeting

MTO Laboratory Test MTO Test Number Requirement

Petrographic Requirement,
LS-616 (Note 1)
Fine Aggregate, Part A
Micro-Deval Abrasion,
Coarse Aggregate, LS-618 30
% maximum loss (Note 2)
Micro-Deval Abrasion,
Fine Aggregate, LS-619 35
% maximum loss
Plastic Fines LS-631 NP

Notes:

1. For materials north of the French/Mattawa Rivers only: For materials with > 4.0% passing the
75 µm sieve, the amount of mica passing the 150 µm sieve and retained on the 75 µm sieve shall
not exceed 10% of the material on that sieve. Prior data demonstrating compliance with this
requirement shall be acceptable provided that such testing has been done within the past 5 years
and the Contractor can show to the satisfaction of the Owner that field performance has continued
to be acceptable.

2. The requirement for the coarse aggregate Micro-Deval abrasion loss test shall be waived if the
material has more than 80% passing the 4.75 mm sieve.

TABLE 4
Gradation Requirements for Granular Sheeting

Sieve Size Gradation (LS-602), Percent Passing

150 mm 100

26.5 mm 50 - 100

13.2 mm 35 - 100

9.5 mm -

4.75 mm 20 - 80

1.18 mm 10 - 50

300 µm 5 - 25

150 µm 0 - 15

75 µm 0 - 8.0

Page 9 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 5
Physical Property Requirements for Mortar Sand

MTO Laboratory Test Test Number Requirement

Organic Impurities, 3
LS-610
Organic Plate Number (Note 1)

Mortar Strength Test ASTM C 87/C87M (Note 2)

Notes:

1. When the fine aggregate for use as mortar sand is subjected to this test, it shall not produce a
darker colour than the standard solution or Organic Plate Number 3. However, a fine aggregate
failing this test may be approved by the Owner, if it meets the requirements of the Mortar Strength
Test according to ASTM C 87.

2. Mortar specimens comprised of fine aggregate for use as Mortar Sand and hydraulic cement shall
develop a compressive strength at the age of 7 Days, of not less than 90% of the strength
developed by a mortar prepared in the same manner, with the same cement and with graded
Ottawa sand having a fineness modulus of 2.40 ± 0.10.

TABLE 6
Gradation Requirements for Mortar Sand

Sieve Size Gradation (LS-602), Percent Passing

4.75 mm 100.0

2.36 mm 95 - 100

1.18 mm 60 - 100

600 μm 35 - 80

300 μm 15 - 50

150 μm 2 - 15

75 μm 0 - 5.0

Page 10 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 7
Physical Property Requirements for Gabion Stone, Rip-Rap and Rock Protection
Gabion Stone
MTO Laboratory Test Test Number Rock Protection
and Rip-Rap
Specific Gravity, minimum ASTM D 6473 2.50 2.50
Absorption, % maximum (Note 1) 2.0 2.0
Flat and Elongated Particles, LS-608
15 15
% maximum (Note 2)
Micro-Deval Abrasion
LS-618
Coarse Aggregate, Grading A 25 25
(Note 3)
% maximum loss
Notes:

1. These requirements shall be based on the average test results for at least 5 pieces of rock when the
source is macroscopically uniform or at least 8 pieces of rock when the source is macroscopically
non-uniform. In addition, no individual piece of tested rock shall have a specific gravity less than
2.30 or anabsorption greater than 3.5%.

2. These requirements shall be based on measurements taken of at least 20 randomly-chosen pieces

of rock either in stockpile at the source or after being delivered to the site.

3. Testing using LS-618 may be carried out on another aggregate product that is being simultaneously
produced from the same crushing stage as Rip-Rap, Gabion Stone or Rock Protection, as long as
the other aggregate product being produced is sufficient for sampling and testing, according to the
requirements of the procedure. As an example, if the Contractor can show that both Rip-Rap and
Granular A which meets the requirements of OPSS 1010, are being simultaneously produced from
a primary crusher, a sample of the Granular A may be used for acceptance testing, in-lieu of testing
a sample of Rip-Rap.

Page 11 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 8
Gradation Requirements for Gabion Stone, Rip-Rap and Rock Protection
Approximate Gradation, percent less than mass specified (Note 2)
Mass Dimension of
kg an Equivalent Gabion Stone Rip-Rap
Cube in cm Rock
(Note 1) G-3 G-10 R-10 R-50 Protection
330 50.0 - - - - 100
75 30.5 - - - 100
50 26.5 - - - 70 - 90
Well-
25 21.0 - - - 40 - 55 Graded
15 18.0 - 100 100 -
10 15.5 - 90 - 100 70 - 90 -
5 12.5 100 - 40 - 55 -
3 10.5 90 - 100 - - - 0 - 10
2.5 10.0 - 0-5 - 0 - 15 -
0.5 6.0 0-5 - 0 - 15 - -

Notes:

1. These dimensions are for estimating purposes only and are based on material having a specific
gravity of 2.65.

2. The gradation shall be determined by individually weighing a minimum of 20 randomly-chosen stone

particles from a sample taken from the stockpile representing a lot then comparing the total mass of
the stone particles within each fraction with the total mass of all of the stone particles measured in
the sample. For pieces of rock with masses that are larger than 25 kg, the approximate dimension
of the equivalent cube determined using an average of the three rectilinear measurements of the
piece shall be allowed, in lieu of weighing.

Page 12 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 9
Physical Property Requirements for Truck Arrester Bed Aggregate
MTO Laboratory Test MTO Test Number Requirement
Wash Pass 75 µm Sieve, Guideline B,
LS-601 1.0
% maximum
Absorption, % maximum LS-604 2.0
Unconfined Freeze-Thaw,
LS-614 6
% maximum loss
Micro-Deval Abrasion,
Coarse Aggregate, LS-618 21
% maximum loss

TABLE 10
Gradation Requirements for Truck Arrester Bed Aggregate
Sieve Size
Gradation (LS-602), Percent Passing
Mm
37.5 100

26.5 90 - 100

19.0 0 - 10

TABLE 11
Physical Property Requirements for Winter Sand
Laboratory Test MTO Test Number Requirement

Micro-Deval Abrasion, fine aggregate, 25

LS-619
% maximum loss (Note 1)
Notes:

1. When obtained from sources on St. Joseph Island, Manitoulin Island, or areas of Ontario south and
west of a boundary delineated by the Severn River, Provincial Highway 12, and Provincial Highway
7 east of Highway 12.

Page 13 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 12
Gradation Requirements for Winter Sand
Sieve Size Gradation (LS-602), Percent Passing

9.5 mm 100.0 (Note 1)

6.7 mm 97 - 100

4.75 mm 90 - 100

2.36 mm 50 - 95

1.18 mm 20 - 90

600 μm 0 - 70

300 μm 0 - 35

150 μm 0 - 15

75 μm 0 - 5.0

Notes:

1. In addition to LS-602, this shall be confirmed by visual inspection of the stockpile.

2. The minimum size of the test sample shall be 5 kg. Following oven drying, the sample shall be
sieved on the 9.5 mm, 6.7 mm, and 4.75 mm sieves. Material passing the 4.75 mm sieve shall be
split to an appropriate size according to LS-602 for subsequent washing and fine sieving. The final
grading shall be calculated according to LS-602 as the percentage of material passing each sieve
based on the total mass of the oven dried sample.

Page 14 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 TABLE 13
Lot Sizes
Aggregate Units of Physical Properties and Gradation
Type Measurement (Based on Tender Quantities)

< 200 t:
Clear Stone tonnes (t) 200 – 5000 t: One lot > 5000 t: 5000 t lots
at CA’s discretion

Gabion m3 of gabion < 100 m3:

100 – 1000 m3: One lot > 1000 m3: 1000 m3 lots
Stone baskets at CA’s discretion

Granular < 200 m2:

m2 200 – 5000 m2: One lot > 5000 m2: 5000 m2 lots
Sheeting at CA’s discretion

< 200 m2:

Rip-Rap m2 200 – 5000 m2: One lot > 5000 m2: 5000 m2 lots
at CA’s discretion

Rock < 200 m3:

m3 200 – 5000 m3: One lot > 5000 m3: 5000 m3 lots
Protection at CA’s discretion

Truck
tonnes (t) > 5000 t: 5000 t lots
Arrester Bed < 5000 t: One lot

< 500 t:
Winter Sand tonnes (t) 500-10000 t: One Lot > 10000 t: 10000 t lots
at CA’s discretion

TABLE 14
Sample Size Requirements

Nominal Maximum Size Minimum Sample Size

Aggregate
mm kg

53 80

19.0 20

Clear Stone 16.0 15

13.2 15

9.5 10

Granular Sheeting 25

Mortar Sand 10
25
RipRap / Gabion Stone / Rock Protection
(consisting of stone particles
(for physical properties only)
from 2 to 5 kg each)
Truck Arrestor Bed Aggregate 75

Winter Sand 10

Page 15 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

Appendix 1004-A, November 2012
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 16 Rev. Date: 11/2012 [Link] 1004

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1005
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - WATERBODY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1005.01 SCOPE

1005.02 REFERENCES

1005.03 DEFINITIONS

1005.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1005.05 MATERIALS

1005.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1005.07 PRODUCTION

1005.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1005.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1005.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for aggregate materials placed in waterbodies.

1005.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-618 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Aggregate Materials
LS-630 Determination of the Amount of Contamination of Coarse Aggregate

November 2022 Page 1 of 12 [Link] 1005

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-112 Waterbody Materials Worksheet
PH-D-10 Aggregate Sample Data Sheet

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

DSM #3.05.25 Aggregates: Surface Friction Courses

MTO Aggregate Sources Lists (ASL):

Aggregate Sources List for Structural Concrete Fine and Coarse Aggregates
Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates

ASTM International

D 6473-10 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Rock for Erosion Control

1005.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the definitions in OPSS 182 and the following definitions apply:

Deleterious Material means as defined in OPSS 1001.

Unacceptable Material means earth, humus, clay or other coatings, clay lumps, shale or shaley partings,
deleterious materials, or deleterious substances, reclaimed asphalt pavement, reclaimed hydraulic
cement concrete, glass, ceramics, or any other reclaimed or slag materials.

1005.05 MATERIALS

1005.05.01 General

The requirements of OPSS 1001 shall apply to this specification.

All waterbody materials shall consist of clean, hard, durable, natural particles that are free of
unacceptable materials.

Waterbody materials for the WB-100 and smaller gradation bands, shall consist of naturally-formed,
rounded or sub-rounded materials obtained from pit sources. Waterbody materials with top sizes larger
than the gradation band for WB-100 may come from pit sources, quarry sources or both, unless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents.

When any change in the character of the aggregate occurs or when the performance of an aggregate
meeting the requirements of this specification is found to be unsatisfactory, use of that aggregate shall be
discontinued until a reappraisal with the approval of the Contract Administrator proves the source to be
satisfactory.

1005.05.02 Physical Properties

All waterbody materials shall meet the requirements of Table 1.

In addition, all waterbody materials shall meet the requirements shown in Table 2 unless one of the
following applies:

a) Material is from a source on:

i. the ministry’s DSM list; or

November 2022 Page 2 of 12 [Link] 1005

 ii. Ontario Ministry of Transportation Structural Concrete Aggregate Sources List; or
iii. Concrete Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates.

Or;

b) Acceptance by the Owner based on a written request for consideration containing all the following:

i. Prior testing results demonstrating the physical requirements are as specified in Table 2.
ii. The testing has been done within 12 months of the material being used in the Work.
iii. Field performance has continually been satisfactory.

1005.05.03 Gradation or Size and Mass

All waterbody materials shall be according to Tables 3, 4, and 5, for gradation or size and mass
requirements.

For each waterbody material of WB-400 and larger:

a) The largest rectilinear dimension of every boulder shall be no more than 1.5 times the average of its
2 smallest rectilinear dimensions (i.e. for an equivalent rectangular prism); and

b) At least 80% of the boulders, by mass, shall have an average of their two smallest rectilinear
dimensions (i.e. for an equivalent rectangular prism), no larger than the designated size and no
smaller than 60% of the designated size.

1005.07 PRODUCTION

1005.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling

Aggregates separated during processing shall be placed in individual stockpiles. Processed aggregates
secured from different sources and aggregates from the same source, but of different gradations shall be
placed in individual stockpiles.

Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any description or aggregates from different
stockpiles that have become mixed with each other shall not be used and shall be removed from the
stockpile immediately.

1005.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1005.08.01 General

The total quantity of each different waterbody material type from each source location shall represent an
individual lot.

The Contract Administrator shall be permitted access to all sampling locations.

Unless specified in the Contract Documents, testing shall be carried out for the purpose of ensuring that
the waterbody materials used in the Work are according to the physical property and gradation
requirements.

Test data for each waterbody material type shall be managed independently according to an individual
lot.

November 2022 Page 3 of 12 [Link] 1005

1005.08.02 Sampling

Sampling shall be according to LS-625 and taken at the time and location determined by the Contract
Administrator. Samples shall be of sufficient mass to conduct the necessary gradation and physical
property tests of the material. Minimum sample sizes for each waterbody material type, up to the WB-350
gradation, shall be as shown in Table 6.

Unless specified in the Contract Documents, all samples shall be randomly taken from sampling pads
constructed from individual stockpiles that is intended for use in the Work. Suitable stockpile locations
include the Working Area and the source. Each sample shall be treated as a discrete sample and not
combined or blended with any other sample.

All samples, representing an individual lot of waterbody material, shall be duplicate samples. At least one
set of duplicate samples shall be obtained for each waterbody material item used in the Work.

The Contractor shall provide new or clean containers for sampling. Sample containers shall be
constructed to prevent the loss of any part of the material or contamination or damage to the contents
during shipment. Metal or cardboard containers are unacceptable. Samples shall be identified both inside
and outside of the sample container. Data to be included with samples shall be according to the
requirements of MTO Form PH-D-10, Aggregate Sample Data Sheet.

Medium to large boulders, as specified in Table 5 shall be randomly chosen for sampling, at the discretion
of and at the location determined by the Contract Administrator.

Unless specified in the Contract Documents, testing for physical properties shall be completed. For
WB-350 and larger waterbody materials, duplicate sawed portions of individual boulders may be required
as specified in Table 2.

1005.08.03 Testing and Retention of Samples

1005.08.03.01 General

One of the duplicate samples of waterbody materials shall be randomly selected for testing.

1005.08.03.02 Designated Laboratory

Unless specified in the Contract Documents, the laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out the
following testing:

a) Testing of physical properties and gradation for WB-53 and smaller, as specified in Tables 1, 2 and 3.

b) Testing of physical properties for WB-100 and larger as specified in Table 2.

The laboratory shall retain the remaining sealed samples for referee testing if it is invoked.

1005.08.03.03 Contract Administrator

1005.[Link] General

The Contract Administrator shall carry out the testing within the Working Area or the source.

The remaining sealed samples shall be retained for referee testing if it is invoked.

November 2022 Page 4 of 12 [Link] 1005

1005.[Link] Examination of stockpiles

Examination of stockpiles of waterbody materials for unacceptable materials and contamination as

specified in Table 1.

1005.[Link] Mass Gradation

Mass gradation for WB-100, WB-200 and WB-350 shall be according to Table 4.

The mass gradation shall be determined by individually weighing a minimum of 20 randomly-chosen

cobbles and boulders from a sampling pad, constructed according to LS-625, from the stockpiled material
that’s intended for use and then comparing the mass of the stone particles within each specified fraction
of the mass gradation with the total mass of all of the stone particles that were measured for that sample.
That information shall be recorded on Form PH-CC-112.

For a boulder with a mass larger than 25 kg, its approximate mass may be determined by multiplying the
average of its three rectilinear dimensions (i.e. for an equivalent rectangular prism) by the average
specific gravity for the same waterbody material, determined according to Notes 1 and 2 of Table 2.

1005.[Link] Measurements

Measurements for WB-400 and larger shall be according to Table 5.

For each waterbody material type in Table 5, the dimensions for a minimum of 20 randomly-chosen
boulders, that are intended for use, shall be recorded on Form PH-CC-112.

1005.08.04 Acceptance

QA test results shall be used for acceptance purposes, except when referee testing has been carried out.

When QA test results for the sample representing an individual lot shows that the material meets the
applicable physical property, gradation, size and mass requirements of this specification, the lot shall be
accepted.

When QA test results show that the material does not meet the applicable requirements of this
specification, then all the aggregates in that lot shall be considered rejected and shall be removed from
the Work at no additional cost to the Owner.

The Contract Administrator shall notify the Contractor that material represented by the test result is not
acceptable. This notification shall take place in writing within 3 Business Days of receipt of the non-
conforming data.

1005.08.05 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator within 5 Business Days following notification that the aggregate does not meet
the requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out, as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained duplicate QA sample shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot
and shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

November 2022 Page 5 of 12 [Link] 1005

If a lot is not accepted based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall be responsible for the
cost of the referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to the referee
laboratory, at the rates specified in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the Owner shall bear the
cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples of that lot.

1005.08.05.01 Referee Testing Directly After QA Testing

Upon receiving the Contractor’s written request, the Contract Administrator may elect to carry out the
referee testing for mass gradation or measurements directly after the QA testing.

1005.[Link] Referee Testing for Mass Gradation

The Contract Administrator shall carry out the referee testing for mass gradation according to the Mass
Gradation clause.

1005.[Link] Referee Testing for Measurements

The Contract Administrator shall carry out the referee testing according to the Measurements clause.

November 2022 Page 6 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 1
Mandatory Physical Property Requirements for Waterbody Materials

Description of Test WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB-
Test Number 6.7 13.2 19 37.5 53 100 200 350 400 500 750 1000 1250 1500

Loss by
Washing, Pass
75 μm Sieve, LS-601 5.0 2.0 2.0 - 2.0
-
Guideline A,
% Maximum

Amount of
Contamination, LS-630 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
% Maximum -

Notes:

A. Stockpiles of any waterbody materials intended for use in the Work shall not contain any visible unacceptable materials
and contamination.

November 2022 Page 7 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 2
Physical Property Requirements for Waterbody Materials

Description of Test WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB- WB-
Test Number 6.7 13.2 19 37.5 53 100 200 350 400 500 750 1000 1250 1500
Specific Gravity, ASTM - - - - - 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
Minimum D6473 or
LS-604
Absorption, % (Notes 1 & 2) - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Maximum

Absorption, LS-604 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 - - - - - - - - -

% Maximum

Micro-Deval
Abrasion Coarse
Aggregate Loss, LS-618 - 30 30 30 30 30 - - - - - - - -
(Note 3) (Note 4)
Grading A
% Maximum

Micro-Deval
Abrasion Fine LS-619 35 - - 35 - - - - - - - - - -
Aggregate Loss,
% Maximum

Notes:

1. These requirements shall be based on the average test results for at least five cobbles, boulders or sawed portions of
individual boulder of WB-350 and larger, where the source appears lithologically uniform or at least eight cobbles or
boulders or sawed portions of individual boulder of WB-350 and larger, where the source appears lithologically
non-uniform. The cobbles or boulders, to be tested, shall be randomly sampled, as specified in Notes 1, 2, and 3 of
Table 6. Each sawed portion shall be a minimum of 2kg. In addition, no individual piece of tested rock shall have a
specific gravity less than 2.30 or an absorption greater than 3.5%.

2. ASTM D6473 shall be used for acceptance for WB-100 and larger, unless written notification to the Contract
Administrator to replace it with LS-604 for acceptance is received prior to sampling of the applicable materials for QA
purposes. Provided the Contract Administrator has received such a request, LS-604 shall be performed on another
aggregate product or on a WB-53 or smaller, if it is being simultaneously produced from the same formation and
location within a pit or a quarry as the WB-100 and larger. Otherwise, conformance to ASTM D6473 shall be required.

3. This requirement shall be waived if the material has more than 80% passing the 4.75 mm sieve.

4. Testing may be carried out on another aggregate product or on a WB-53 or smaller, if it is being simultaneously
produced from the same formation and location within a pit or a quarry as the WB-100, as long as the quantity of the
other aggregate product being produced is sufficient for sampling and testing using LS-618. For example, if it can be
demonstrated that the cobbles used to produce WB-100 are the oversize for the simultaneous production of a coarse
granular material or a WB-37.5 which has a LS-618 Micro-Deval Abrasion Loss of no more than 30%, then the WB-100
cobbles being simultaneously produced with that granular material or the WB-37.5 shall also be considered to meet the
requirements of LS-618.

November 2022 Page 8 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 3
Gradation Requirements for Sand and Gravel Used for Waterbody Materials,
Percent Passing

Gradation (LS-602) of Waterbody Materials

% Less Than Sieve Size Specified
Sieve Size
mm
WB-6.7 WB-13.2 WB-19 WB-37.5 WB-53

63.00 - - - - 100
53.00 - - - 100 90-100
37.50 - - - 90-100 -
26.50 - - 100 50-100 -
19.00 - - 90-100 - 0-15
16.00 - 100 - - -
13.20 - 96-100 - - -
9.50 100 50-73 0-55 30-100 -
6.70 97-100 - - - -
4.75 90-100 0-10 0-10 20-100 -
2.36 50-95 - - - -
1.18 20-90 - - 10-100 -
0.60 0-70 - - - -
0.30 0-35 - - 2 - 65 -
0.15 0-15 - - - -
0.07 0-5 0-2 0-2 0-8 0-2

November 2022 Page 9 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 4
Mass Gradation Requirements for Cobbles and Small Boulders
Used as Waterbody Materials

Gradation
%, By Mass, Less Than Mass Specified
Maximum 2nd Smallest Dimension of Mass of Gravel/Cobble
an Equivalent Rectangular Prism /Boulder WB-100 WB-200 WB-300
(mm) (kg)
350 97 - 100
300 60 - 75-100
200 18 - 100 20-40
150 7.7 - 40-60 0-15
100 2.3 100 0-10 -
63 0.55 40-60 - -
53 0.35 0-10 - -

November 2022 Page 10 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 5
Medium to Large Boulders Used For Waterbody Materials

Size WB-400 WB-500 WB-750 WB-1000 WB-1250 WB-1500

Designated Size
(i.e. the Average of
the Two Smallest
Dimensions of an 400 500 750 1000 1250 1500
Equivalent
Rectangular Prism)
(mm)
Average Approximate
Mass of Boulders 145 285 955 2265 4425 7645
(kg) (Note 1)
Note:

1. The mass of any individual boulder, will vary significantly from the stated values, depending on its
shape (e.g. cubical, prism, sphere, oblate spheroid etc.) and actual dimensions.

November 2022 Page 11 of 12 [Link] 1005

 TABLE 6
Sample Size Requirements

Minimum Sample Size for Physical Properties

Waterbody Material Designation Testing kg
(Note 1)

WB-6.7 10

WB-13.2 20

WB-19 20

WB-37.5 40

WB-53 80

25
WB-100
(Note 2)

75
WB-200
(Note 3)

150
WB-350
(Note 3)

WB-400, WB-500, WB-750, WB-1000,

(Note 3)
WB-1250 and WB-1500

Notes:
1. Individual sample bags shall not exceed 25 kg. For a boulder with a mass larger than 25 kg, the
boulder shall be cut using a portable diamond saw by the contractor to produce duplicate sample
portions for testing.
2. Each duplicate sample shall consist of at least five cobbles from lithologically uniform sources
or at least eight cobbles from lithologically non-uniform sources and no cobble shall have a
mass less than 0.4 kg.
3. Each duplicate sample shall consist of at least five cobbles, boulders or sawed portions of
individual boulder of WB-350 and larger from lithologically uniform sources or at least eight
cobbles, boulders or sawed portions of individual boulder of WB-350 and larger from
lithologically non-uniform sources.

November 2022 Page 12 of 12 [Link] 1005

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1006
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - SURFACE TREATMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1006.01 SCOPE

1006.02 REFERENCES

1006.03 DEFINITIONS

1006.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1006.05 MATERIALS

1006.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1006.07 PRODUCTION

1006.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1006.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

APPENDICES Not Used

1006.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for aggregates for use in surface treatment.

1006.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

1006.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1006.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-601 Material Finer than 75 µm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-604 Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
LS-606 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Magnesium Sulphate
LS-607 Percent Crushed Particles in Processed Coarse Aggregate
LS-608 Percent Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
LS-609 Petrographic Analysis of Coarse Aggregate
LS-613 Determination of Insoluble Residue of Carbonate Aggregates
LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate
LS-618 The Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Granular Materials
LS-631 Qualitative Determination of Presence of Plastic Fines in Aggregates

MTO Forms:
PH-D-10 Aggregate Sample Data Sheet

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

1006.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Duplicate Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for quality
assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Lot means a specific quantity of material from a single source.

Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate material. Tests are carried out
to determine an aggregate’s resistance to weathering or degradation or both. Aggregate production
processes generally do not affect physical properties.

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
Materials received from the Contractor meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

Slag means for the purposes of this specification, fused silicate material from the processing of ores and
includes air-cooled blast furnace slag, blast furnace slag, copper slag, nickel slag, and steel slag.

1006.05 MATERIALS

1006.05.01 Aggregates

Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1001, unless otherwise specified in this specification.

Aggregates shall be clean, hard durable particles produced from sands, gravels, or quarried rock and
shall be free of earth, humus, clay coatings, and clay lumps or fragments of any size or shape.

Aggregates containing slag or composed of slag shall not be acceptable for use as surface treatment
aggregates.

At the discretion of the Owner, aggregate may be accepted or rejected for physical properties on the
basis of past field performance, according to Note 1 shown in Table 1.

When any change in the character of the aggregate occurs or when the performance of aggregate
meeting the requirements of this specification is found to be unsatisfactory, use of that aggregate shall be
discontinued until a reappraisal by the Contractor, with the approval of the Contract Administrator, proves
the source to be satisfactory.

1006.07 PRODUCTION

1006.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling

Aggregates separated during processing, aggregates secured from different sources, and aggregates
from the same source but of different gradations shall be stockpiled separately. When screenings from
primary and secondary crushers are produced separately, they shall be stockpiled separately.

Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any description or aggregates from different
stockpiles that have become mixed with each other shall not be used and shall be removed from the
stockpile immediately.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

1006.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1006.08.01 General

The laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out QA testing for purposes of ensuring that the
aggregates used in the Work are according to the physical property and grading requirements of this
specification. The Owner shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing for QA purposes,
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Individual test results shall be forwarded to the
Contractor, as they become available.

When a hydrated lime anti-stripping agent is used, test samples for the physical property requirements
shall be taken prior to the addition of the hydrated lime. If this is not practical, samples coated in hydrated
lime may be taken and the lime removed by washing prior to testing. In this case, the requirements for
LS-601 shall be waived.

QA acceptance of aggregates for surface treatment shall be based on lots that are sampled and tested
for both physical properties and gradation.

1006.08.02 Alternative to LS-614

LS-614 shall be used for acceptance, unless written notification to the Contract Administrator to replace it
with LS-606 for acceptance is received prior to sampling of the applicable materials for QA purposes.
Provided the Contract Administrator has received such a request, LS-606 shall be used. Otherwise,
conformance to LS-614 shall be required.

When notification is provided after QA testing using LS-614 has been initiated, the Contractor shall then
be charged $600.00 for each test initiated, which includes the cost of the testing using LS-614,
administrative charges, and additional sampling, if required.

1006.08.03 Sampling

Aggregates to be used in the Work shall be made available for sampling a minimum of 3 weeks prior to
the time of intended use. The Contract Administrator shall have access to all sampling locations at any
time with notice to the Contractor. The stockpiles from which the samples are to be taken shall contain at
3
least 10% of the total quantity of aggregate needed or a minimum quantity of 500 tonnes or 250 m ,
whichever is greater, unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator.

All samples shall be duplicate samples obtained from stockpiles according to LS-625 and all other
requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

For physical properties, at least one set of QA samples of each aggregate and from each individual
source shall be randomly sampled from lots according to the schedule shown in Table 1.

For production properties, lots according to the schedule shown in Table 1 shall be divided into four
sublots of approximately equal tonnage. One duplicate QA sample shall be randomly obtained from each
sublot.

Duplicate QA samples with a minimum mass of 25 kg shall be taken from the stockpiles. Each bag or
container shall hold no more than 30 kg of material.

The Contractor shall provide new or clean sample bags or containers that are constructed to prevent the
loss of any part of the material or contamination or damage to the contents during shipment. Metal or
cardboard containers are unacceptable. The Contract Administrator shall seal each QA sample container
at the time and place of sampling.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

QA samples shall be identified both inside and outside of the sample container. Data to be included with
QA samples shall be according to MTO form PH-D-10.

In the event that the Contractor is unavailable to take the samples, no further materials shall be placed in
the Work until they have been taken.

One of the duplicate QA samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory. The QA
laboratory shall retain the remaining sample for referee testing, if required.

1006.08.04 Acceptance

The acceptability of a lot of aggregates for surface treatment may result in payment at full price, payment
at a reduced price, or rejection.

Irrespective of the negotiation of a reduced price payment, the warranty provisions of the Contract
Documents shall apply.

1006.08.04.01 Acceptance of Physical Properties

A lot of aggregates shall be deemed to be acceptable for physical properties if all of the test results for the
samples representing that lot meet all of the requirements shown in Table 2.

If a tested sample of aggregates representing a lot does not meet all of the requirements of this
specification, then a reduced price payment of 20% shall be given for that lot, as long as the applicable
test results for that sample do not:

a) Exceed the requirement for LS-614, or LS-606 if it has been accepted by the Owner as an alternative
to LS-614, by more than 25% of the specified value.

b) Exceed the requirement for LS-618 by more than 10% of the specified value.

c) Exceed the requirement for LS-619 by more than 15% of the specified value.

d) Identify plastic fines within the material, when determined according to LS-631 and meet the
requirements for LS-602 on the 75 µm sieve.

e) Exceed 10% of the specified value for any other requirement stated in this specification.

Should the test results for the sample not meet all of the requirements listed above, then all of the
aggregates within that lot shall be considered rejectable and any surface treatment that includes those
aggregates shall be removed from the Work at no cost to the Owner.

1006.08.04.02 Acceptance of Production Properties Based on LS-602 and LS-607

Test results from each sublot within a lot shall be combined to determine the mean and the range of the
lot for each test.

All lot means and ranges for test results carried out according to LS-602 and LS-607 shall be computed to
one decimal place and reported on the MTO Form PH-D-ST by the Contract Administrator.

The acceptability of a lot based on LS-602 and LS-607 may result in payment at full price, payment at a
reduced price or rejection.

A complete or incomplete lot shall be deemed to meet the applicable requirements for LS-602 and LS-
607, if the mean of the test results for that lot is within the limits specified in Table 3 and the range of the
test results for that lot is within the limits specified in Table 5.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

Lots that are subject to a total payment adjustment factor of more than 25 percent in respect of lot mean
and range are deemed to be rejected and shall be removed from the Work at no cost to the Owner.

When the Contractor chooses to use a lot or incomplete lot that does not meet the requirements of LS-
602 and LS-607 and is not subject to removal then, at the request of the Contractor, a payment
adjustment calculated according to the following formula shall be allowed:
3 3
PAYMENT REDUCTION = lot quantity in tonnes (or m ) x item price in $/tonne (or $/m ) x payment
adjustment factor (%),

where:
3
The lot quantity shall be expressed in tonnes (or m ) and the item price shall be the contract price for the
3
tender quantity in tonnes (or m ).

The payment adjustment factor, in percent for production properties, shall be equal to the sum of the
adjustment points determined as follows:

a) adjustment points shall be applied for each 0.1 percent that the mean gradation falls outside the
gradation specification limits for each sieve, according to Table 4,

b) 0.1 adjustment points shall be applied for each 0.1 percent that the range exceeds the maximum
acceptable range for each sieve, according to Table 5; and

c) 0.2 adjustment points shall be applied for each 0.1 percent that the lot mean falls below the
applicable limits for percent crushed.

The reduced price payment for the lot given above shall be in addition to any payment reduction
determined according to the Acceptance of Physical Properties clause.

1006.08.05 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator within 5 Business Days following notification that the aggregate does not meet
the requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained QA samples shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot
and shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

If a lot is not accepted at full payment based on the referee test results, the Contractor shall then be
responsible for the cost of referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to the
referee laboratory at the rates specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the
Owner shall bear the cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples of that lot.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

 TABLE 1
Lot Schedule for Sampling and Testing

Quantity from
Each Source Class 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
3
In tonnes (or m )
3
< 500 t (or <250 m ) Sampling and testing may be waived at the discretion of the Owner.

500 t to 5,000 t
3 One lot for both physical properties and gradation.
(or 250 to 2,500 m )
Gradation: 5,000 tonne lots up to 20,000 tonnes and 10,000 tonne lots thereafter
> 5,000 t 3 3 3
(or 2,500 m lots up to 10,000 m and 5,000 m lots thereafter)
3
(or > 2,500 m )
(Note 1) 3
Physical Properties: 20,000 tonne lots (or 10,000 m lots)

Notes:
1. When the quantity of granular material is insufficient for a complete lot and is:
a) less than one-half the quantity of a complete lot, that quantity shall then be added to the previous
lot; or
b) greater than or equal to one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall form its own
lot.

Page 7 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

 TABLE 2
Physical Property Requirements

MTO Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 5 Class 6

MTO Laboratory Test Class 4
Test No. (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Wash Pass 75 µm sieve, Guideline B, 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
LS-601 -- --
% maximum (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
Absorption, % maximum LS-604 1.75 -- 2.0 -- 1.75 1.75
Flat and Elongated Particles,
LS-608 20 20 20 -- 20 20
% maximum
Petrographic Examination,
60 60 60 60 60
% non-carbonate of retained LS-609 --
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)
4.75 mm, minimum
Unconfined Freeze-Thaw,
LS-614 6 15 6 -- 6 6
% maximum loss (Note 4)
Micro-Deval Abrasion
(Coarse Aggregate), LS-618 17 25 17 -- 17 17
% maximum loss
Micro-Deval Abrasion
(Fine Aggregate), LS-619 -- 30 -- 25 -- --
% maximum loss
Plastic Fines LS-631 -- NP -- NP -- --
Alternative Requirement to Unconfined Freeze-Thaw Loss, LS-614
Magnesium Sulphate Soundness
LS-606 12 15 12 -- 12 12
(coarse aggregate), % max loss

Notes:
1. With the exception of LS-619 and LS-631, the physical property requirements for Class 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6
aggregates noted above shall be conducted on the material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
2. When quarried rock is used as a source of coarse aggregate, a maximum of 2.0% passing the 75 µm sieve shall
be permitted.
3. The requirements listed below are only applicable to the area to the north and west of a boundary defined by the
north shore of Lake Superior, the north shore of the St. Mary’s River, the south shore of St. Joseph’s Island, the
north shore of Lake Huron easterly to the north and east shore of Georgian Bay, excluding Manitoulin Island,
along the Severn River to Washago and a line easterly passing through Norland, Burnt River, Burleigh Falls,
Madoc, and hence easterly along Highway 7 to Perth and northerly to Calabogie and easterly to Arnprior and the
Ottawa River:
a) When the coarse aggregate for use in surface treatment is obtained from a gravel pit or quarry containing
more than 40% carbonate rock type (e.g., limestone and dolostone) then blending with aggregate from non-
carbonate rock types shall be required to increase the minimum non-carbonate rock type content of the
coarse aggregate to 60%, as determined by petrographic examination, LS-609. In cases of dispute, LS-613
shall be used with a minimum acid insoluable residue of 60%.
b) When the coarse aggregate for use in surface treatment is obtained from a non-carbonate source, blending
with aggregate from carbonate rock types is not permitted.
4. The Owner shall waive the requirements for LS-614, unconfined freeze-thaw, provided the Contractor has
submitted a written request that the coarse aggregates meet the alternative requirements for LS-606, magnesium
sulphate soundness.

Page 8 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

 TABLE 3
Production Requirements

Lab Test MTO Test Class 1 Class 5

Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 6
Description Number (Note 1) (Note 1)
LS-602
% Passing By Mass
Sieve Size
19.0 mm -- 100 100 -- -- --
16.0 mm -- 98-100 96-100 -- -- 100
13.2 mm 100 75-95 67-86 -- -- 96-100
Sieve 9.5 mm 75-100 50-80 29-52 100 100 50-73
Analysis
6.7 mm 0-40 -- -- -- 40-85 --
4.75 mm 0-10 25-50 0-10 70-100 5-25 0-10
2.36 mm -- -- -- 10-100 0-10 --
1.18 mm -- 10-40 -- 5-90 0-5 --
600 µm -- -- -- 3-70 -- --
300 µm -- 2-20 -- 2-40 -- --
150 µm -- 2-13 -- 0-15 -- --
75 µm (Note 2) 2-7 (Note 2) 0-7 (Note 2) (Note 2)
Percent % Minimum
Crushed LS-607
Particles 60 60 60 60 60
-

Notes:
1. Class 1 and Class 5 aggregates shall be washed according to OPSS 1001.
2. The requirements for percent passing the 75 µm for Class 1, 3, 5, and 6 aggregates are shown in Table 2.

Page 9 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

 TABLE 4
Mean Requirements For Gradation (LS-602)

MTO Sieve Adjustment Points Per 0.1% Deviation from Specified Limit
Designation Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6
19.0 mm -- 0.1 0.1 -- -- --
16.0 mm -- 0.1 0.1 -- -- 0.1
13.2 mm 0.1 0.1 0.1 -- -- 0.1
9.5 mm 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
6.7 mm 0.1 -- -- -- 0.1 --
4.75 mm Excess Passing 0.5 / Insufficient Passing 0.2
2.36 mm -- -- -- -- 0.1 --
1.18 mm -- 0.1 -- -- 0.1 --
600 µm -- -- 0.1 -- --
300 µm -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- --
150 µm -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- --
75 µm -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- --

TABLE 5
Range Requirements For Gradation (LS-602)

MTO Sieve Maximum Acceptable Range

Designation Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6
19.0 mm -- 1 1 -- -- --
16.0 mm -- 2 4 -- -- 1
13.2 mm 1 12 14 -- -- 4
9.5 mm 20 14 16 1 1 14
6.7 mm 24 -- -- -- 24 --
4.75 mm 8 14 5 18 14 6
2.36 mm -- -- -- 34 8 --
1.18 mm -- 14 -- 34 4 --
600 µm -- -- -- -- -- --
300 µm -- 12 -- 22 -- --
150 µm -- 8 -- 12 -- --
75 µm -- 4 -- 6 -- --

Page 10 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1006

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1010
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2013

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AGGREGATES - BASE, SUBBASE,
SELECT SUBGRADE, AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1010.01 SCOPE

1010.02 REFERENCES

1010.03 DEFINITIONS

1010.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1010.05 MATERIALS

1010.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1010.07 PRODUCTION

1010.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1010.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

APPENDICES

1010-A Commentary

1010.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for granular aggregate materials for use in subgrade, subbase,
base, gravel surface course, shouldering and bedding and backfill to sewers, culverts, and other structures.

1010.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

1010.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract Documents as
the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract requirements
and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices. Depending on these
considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available appendices.

1010.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is a
provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this specification
to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented specification is
specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-oriented specification, the
references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications Material

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-601 Material Finer than 75 m Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-607 Percent Crushed Particles in Processed Coarse Aggregate
LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate
LS-617 Percent Particles with Two or More Crushed Faces and Uncrushed Particles in Processed
Coarse Aggregate
LS-618 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
LS-621 Determination of Amount of Asphalt Coated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
LS-625 Guidelines for Sampling of Granular Materials
LS-630 Determination of Amount of Contamination of Coarse Aggregates
LS-631 Qualitative Determination of Presence of Plastic Fines in Aggregates
LS-709 Determination of Permeability of Granular Soils

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

MTO Forms:
PH-D-1A Granular A Gradation Computation Acceptance & Payment Adjustment Sheet
PH-D-1B Granular B Types I, II & III Gradation Computation Acceptance & Payment Adjustment Sheet
PH-D-1M Granular M Gradation Computation Acceptance & Payment Adjustment Sheet
PH-D-1O Granular O Gradation Computation Acceptance & Payment Adjustment Sheet
PH-D-1SSM SSM Gradation Computation Acceptance & Payment Adjustment Sheet
PH-D-10 Aggregate Sample Data Sheet

1010.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Bench means a ledge parallel to the stratigraphic bedding that, in quarries, forms a single level of operation
above which rock is excavated from a contiguous face.

Delivery Sample means a random sample taken at the point of loading or discharge from delivery vehicles.

Duplicate Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for quality
assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Fines means material passing the 75 m sieve when tested according to LS-601 or LS-602.

Gradation Test means a test used to determine the particle size distribution of an aggregate or soil material
by sieving.

Lot means a specific quantity of material from a single source or a specified amount of construction assumed
to be produced by the same process.

Mean means the arithmetic average of a set of data.

Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate or soil material. Tests are carried
out to determine a materials resistance to weathering or degradation or both. Physical properties are
generally not affected by production.

Production Property means an attribute or feature of an aggregate or soil material, including gradation, that
is introduced through the manufacturing process (i.e., crushing, screening, blending etc.). Tests are carried
out to measure the affects of the process on the material.

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
Materials received from the Contractor meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

Random Numbers means numbers generated by chance, and recorded in random number tables.

Random Sample means a sample based on random numbers so that any portion of a lot or sublot has an
equal opportunity of being selected.

Range means the difference between the largest and the smallest measurements in a set of data.

Road Sample means a random sample taken from road construction after placement and spreading of the
material in the work, but prior to compaction.

Steel Slag means the non-metallic product resulting from the production of steel in a basic oxygen furnace or
an electric arc furnace.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

1010.05 MATERIALS

1010.05.01 General

Aggregates for Granular A, O, B, M and SSM shall be according to OPSS 1001, unless otherwise specified in
this specification, and shall conform to the requirements of Table 2 and Table 3 when tested according to the
test methods identified herein.

Aggregates shall be clean, hard, durable particles and shall be produced from material free of earth, humus,
clay coatings, and clay lumps or fragments of any size or shape. When tested according to LS-630, the total
amount of wood shall not exceed 0.1% by mass, and the total amount of clay brick, gypsum, gypsum plaster
wallboard and other contaminants shall not exceed a combined total of 1.0% by mass.

When reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), post-consumer glass or ceramic material is used, it shall be
homogeneously blended in a manner acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

Steel slag shall not be used.

1010.05.02 Granular O

Aggregates for Granular O shall be produced from a quarry or from boulders, cobbles or gravel retained on
the 50 mm sieve. Recycled or reclaimed materials, including hydraulic cement concrete, RAP, slag, glass,
and ceramic are not permitted.

1010.05.03 Granular A and M

Aggregates for Granular A and M shall be produced from one or a blend of the following:

a) Boulders, cobbles, gravel, sand, and fines from naturally formed deposits.

b) A quarry or talus.

c) Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete.

d) Iron blast furnace slag or nickel slag.

Granular A and M aggregates may include up to 30% by mass of asphalt coated particles derived from RAP,
and not more than a combined total of 15% by mass of glass or ceramic material or both, unless specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Granular A or M produced with RAP containing steel slag aggregates is acceptable for unpaved shouldering
purposes only. Such materials shall be stockpiled separately.

1010.05.04 Granular B

Granular B may be of Type I, Type II, or Type III.

Aggregates for Granular B shall be aggregates produced from one or a blend of the following, subject to the
following restrictions:

Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

a) Boulders, cobbles, gravel, sand, and fines from naturally formed deposits.

b) A quarry or talus.

c) Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete.

d) Iron blast furnace slag or nickel slag.

Aggregates for Granular B Type I and Type III may include up to 30% by mass of asphalt coated particles
derived from RAP, and not more than a combined total of 15% by mass of glass or ceramic material or both.
RAP containing steel slag aggregates shall not be permitted.

Aggregates for Granular B Type II shall only be produced from a quarry or from talus, iron blast furnace slag,
or nickel slag. Recycled materials shall not be permitted.

1010.05.05 Select Subgrade Material (SSM)

Aggregates for select subgrade material shall be produced only from natural deposits of non-plastic silt, sand,
and gravel material. Recycled or reclaimed materials of any type shall not be permitted.

1010.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1010.08.01 General

The laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out QA testing for purposes of ensuring that aggregates
used in the Work conform to the physical and production requirements of this specification. Individual test
results shall be forwarded to the Contractor, as they become available.

The Owner shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing for QA purposes, unless otherwise
specified in this specification.

QA testing for physical properties may be waived by the Contract Administrator when the delivered quantity of
Granular A, O, B, M, or SSM is less than 5,000 tonnes.

1010.08.01.01 Sampling

QA samples shall be taken according to the Contract Documents and LS-625 and shall be road samples or
delivery samples obtained from the Work at a location determined by the Contract Administrator. When
required, the Contractor shall provide a front-end loader to obtain material for QA samples.

When it is not possible to take road or delivery samples, samples of compacted material taken with the
permission of the Owner shall be used for QA acceptance purposes.

In the event that the Contractor is unavailable to take a sample, no further materials shall be placed in the
Work until the required QA samples have been taken.

QA sampling and testing shall be based on lots that are established for each aggregate type; Granular A, O,
B, M, and SSM. When more than one aggregate source is used, separate lots shall also be established for
each source. When aggregates are produced from materials that are extracted from within the right-of way,
each area within a 1,000 m segment of the right-of-way or within a radius of 500 m of the extraction operation
located within the right-of-way shall be considered equivalent to a single aggregate source for QA acceptance
purposes. When aggregates are produced with blended or reclaimed materials or both, QA testing shall be
performed on the final product.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

The Contractor shall provide new or clean sample bags or containers that are constructed to prevent the loss
of any part of the material or contamination or damage to the contents during shipment. Metal or cardboard
containers are unacceptable. QA samples shall be identified both inside and outside of the sample container.
Data to be included with QA samples shall be according to MTO form PH-D-10.

The Contractor shall deliver all samples to the appropriate laboratory in a condition that is suitable for testing.

All QA samples shall be duplicate samples. One of the samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the
QA laboratory and the remaining sample shall be retained by the QA laboratory for possible referee testing.

1010.08.01.02 Sample Size

The mass of the each QA sample shall meet the requirements shown in Table 4. When more than 30 kg of
material is required, the total sample shall be recombined prior to testing.

1010.08.02 Physical Properties

At least one set of duplicate QA samples of each aggregate to be used in the Work shall be randomly
sampled from lots of 25,000 tonnes or part thereof for physical properties. All materials delivered to the Work
shall be included within a lot.

1010.08.02.01 Testing of Physical Properties

The QA laboratory shall carry out testing for each physical property requirement shown in Table 2, as
applicable for each QA sample.

1010.08.02.02 Acceptance of Physical Properties

The acceptability of a lot for physical properties may result in payment at full price, payment at a reduced
price, or rejection.

A lot shall be deemed to be acceptable for physical properties if all of the test results for the samples of
aggregates representing that lot meet the requirements shown in Table 2.

If a tested sample of aggregates representing a lot does not meet all of the requirements shown in Table 2,
then a reduced price payment of 20% of the tender price shall be given for that lot for physical properties, as
long as the lot is not rejectable and the applicable test results for that sample:

a) do not exceed the requirement for LS-614 by more than 25% of the specified value.

b) do not exceed the requirement for LS-618 by more than 10% of the specified value.

c) do not identify plastic fines within the material, when determined according to LS-631 and acceptance test
results for LS-602 are not subject to a payment adjustment on the 75µm sieve.

d) meet all other physical property requirements of this specification.

Should the test results for any sample of aggregates representing a lot not meet the requirements listed
above, then all of the aggregates within that lot shall be considered rejectable and any of those aggregates
used in the Work shall be removed at no cost to the Owner.

The reduced price payment for the lot given above shall be in addition to any payment reduction determined
according to the Acceptance Based on LS-602 and LS-607 clause for production properties.

Irrespective of the negotiation of a reduced price payment, the warranty provisions of the Contract Documents
shall apply.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

1010.08.03 Production Properties

All lots for production properties shall be divided into four sublots of approximately equal tonnage and one
duplicate QA sample shall be randomly obtained from each sublot.

For each tender item, the Contract Administrator shall estimate the quantities of granular materials obtained
from each different source or process. Then, for each of those individual sources or processes, the Contract
Administrator shall identify the number and size of each lot to be sampled and tested using the lot schedule
shown in Table 1.

In addition, if circumstances such as the closure of the construction season or changes in production or
delivery result in a lot not being completed, then the Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator prior to
the first sample is taken within that lot, in order for the Contract Administrator to adjust the sublot sizes equally
to accommodate the reduced tonnage. If such notification is not given in time, then acceptance shall be based
on the number of sampled sublots that are available for the incomplete lot. All lots shall be deemed to be
complete at the end of each calendar year.

1010.08.03.01 Testing of Production Properties

The QA laboratory shall conduct sieve analysis according to LS-602 and determine test results for each sieve
designation shown in Table 3. The QA laboratory shall also carry out testing for percent crushed particles
according to LS-607, particles with two or more crushed faces according to LS-617, and amount of asphalt
coated particles according to LS-621, as applicable.

1010.08.03.02 Acceptance of Production Properties

Test results from each sublot within a lot shall be combined to determine the mean and the range of the lot for
each test.

1010.[Link] Acceptance Based on LS-602 and LS-607

All lot means and ranges for test results carried out according to LS-602 and LS-607, as applicable, shall be
computed to one decimal place and reported on the appropriate MTO form by the Contract Administrator, as
indicated below:

Granular A PH-D-1A
Granular O PH-D-1O
Granular B, Types I, II or III PH-D-1B
Granular M PH-D-1M
SSM PH-D-1SSM

The acceptability of a lot based on LS-602 and LS-607 may result in payment at full price, payment at a
reduced price, or rejection.

A complete or incomplete lot shall be deemed to meet the applicable requirements for LS-602 and LS-607, if
the mean of the test results for that lot is within the limits shown in Table 3 and the range of the test results for
that lot is within the limits shown in Table 5.

Lots that are subject to a total payment adjustment factor of more than 25% in respect of lot mean and range
are deemed to be rejected and shall be removed from the Work at no cost to the Owner.

When a complete or incomplete lot does not meet the requirements of LS-602 and LS-607, is not subject to
removal, but the Contractor chooses to use the lot or for some reason it cannot be totally excluded from the
Work, then at the request of the Contractor, an adjusted payment calculated according to the following
formula shall be allowed in lieu of removal:

Page 7 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

PAYMENT REDUCTION = lot quantity (tonnes) x item price ($/tonne) x payment adjustment factor (%)

Where:

The lot quantity shall be expressed in tonnes as determined according to Table 6, and the item price shall be
according to one of the following:

a) The contract price for the items having the tender quantity in tonnes.

b) $21.50 per tonne for Granular A, O, and M; $15.50 per tonne for Granular B Type II; $15.00 per tonne for
Granular B Type I and Type III; and $8.50 per tonne for SSM where bidding is not by tender quantity such
as lump sum Contracts.

In addition, the payment adjustment factor, in percent, shall be equal to the sum of the adjustment points
determined as follows:

a) Adjustment points shall be applied for each 0.1% that the mean gradation falls outside the gradation
specification limits for each sieve, according to Table 7.

b) 0.1 adjustment points shall be applied for each 0.1% that the range exceeds the maximum acceptable
range for each sieve.

c) 0.2 adjustment points shall be applied for Granular A or M for each 0.1% that the lot mean falls below the
applicable limits for percent crushed.

The reduced price payment for the lot given above shall be in addition to any payment reduction determined
according to the Acceptance of Physical Properties clause.

1010.[Link] Acceptance Based on LS-617 or LS-621

A lot shall be deemed to meet the applicable requirements of this specification for LS-617 or LS-621, if the
mean value of the test results for that lot is within the limits shown in Table 3. When the mean value of the
test results for that lot does not meet these requirements, the material shall be considered deficient and
managed according to the requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1010.08.04 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to the
Contract Administrator within 5 Business Days following notification that the lot does not meet the
requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The retained duplicate QA samples for all sublots shall be used for referee testing of the lot.

All referee test results shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot and shall be
binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

If a lot is not accepted at full payment based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of the referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to the
referee laboratory at the rates specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the Owner
shall bear the cost of the referee testing of that lot.

Page 8 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

 Table 1
Lot Schedule for Sampling and Testing

Quantity for Each Source Granular B Type I, B Type II, B Type

Gran A, O, and M
or Process (tonnes) III, and SSM
Sampling and testing may be waived
< 1,000
at the discretion of the Contract Administrator
1,000 - 5,000 One lot One lot
> 5,000 5,000 tonne lots up to 20,000 tonnes, 10,000 tonne lots up to 20,000 tonnes,
(Note 1) and 10,000 tonne lots thereafter and 20,000 tonne lots thereafter
Note:
1. When the quantity of granular material is insufficient for a complete lot and is:
a) less than one-half the quantity of a complete lot, that quantity shall then be added to the previous lot; or

b) greater than or equal to one-half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity shall form its own lot.

Table 2
Physical Property Requirements

Granular
Select
MTO Test B
Laboratory Test Subgrade
Number A M O
Type I / Material
Type II
Type III
Unconfined Freeze-Thaw,
LS-614 - - - - 15 -
% maximum loss
Micro-Deval Abrasion
30 30
(Coarse Aggregate), LS-618 25 30 25 21
(Note 1) (Note 1)
% maximum loss
Micro-Deval Abrasion
(Fine Aggregate), LS-619 30 35 35 30 25 -
% maximum loss
Amount of Contamination LS-630 (Note 2)
Plastic Fines LS-631 NP (Non-Plastic)
Determination of
LS-709 (Note 3)
Permeability, k
Notes:
1. The coarse aggregate micro-Deval abrasion loss test requirement shall be waived if the material has more than
80% passing the 4.75 mm sieve.
2. Granular A, B Type I, B Type III, or M may contain up to 15% by mass crushed glass or ceramic material or both.
Granular A, O, B Type I, B Type III, and M shall not contain more than 1.0% by mass of any combination of wood,
clay brick, gypsum, gypsum wall board, or plaster. Granular B Type II and SSM shall not contain more than 0.1%
by mass of wood.
3. For materials north of the French/Mattawa Rivers only, the coefficient of permeability, k shall be greater than 1.0 x
-4
10 cm/s or alternatively, when past field experience has demonstrated satisfactory performance. Prior data
demonstrating compliance with this requirement for k shall be acceptable provided that such testing has been
done within 5 years of the material being used and field performance has continually been shown to be
satisfactory.

Page 9 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

 Table 3
Production Requirements
Lab Test MTO Test Granular SSM
Number
A B M O
LS-602 Type I Type II Type III
(sieve) (Note 2) (Note 2)
150 mm - 100 - 100 - - 100
106 mm - - 100 - - - -
37.5 mm - - - - - 100 -
26.5 mm 100 50.0-100 50.0-100 50.0-100 - 95.0-100 50.0-100
85.0-100
19.0 mm (87.0-100) - - - 100 80.0-95.0 -
Note 3
65.0-90.0
13.2 mm (75.0-95.0) - - - 75.0-95.0 60.0-80.0 -
Sieve Analysis, Note 3
% passing
50.0-73.0
9.5 mm (60.0-83.0) - - 32.0-100 55.0-80.0 50.0-70.0 -
Note 3
35.0-55.0
4.75 mm (40.0-60.0) 20.0-100 20.0-55.0 20.0-90.0 35.0-55.0 20.0-45.0 20.0-100
Note 3
1.18 mm 15.0-40.0 10.0-100 10.0-40.0 10.0-60.0 15.0-40.0 0-15.0 10.0-100
300 m 5.0-22.0 2.0-65.0 5.0-22.0 2.0-35.0 5.0-22.0 - 5.0-95.0
150 m - - - - - - 2.0-65.0
2.0-8.0 0-8.0 0-8.0 2.0-8.0
75 m (2.0-10.0) (0-10.0) 0-10.0 (0-10.0) (2.0-10.0) 0-5.0 0-25.0
Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
Percent
Crushed
LS-607 60 - 100 - 60 100 -
Particles,
% minimum
2 or more
85
Crushed Faces, LS-617 - - - - - -
Note 5
% minimum
Asphalt Coated
Particles,
Coarse LS-621 30 30 0 30 30 0 0
Aggregates,%
maximum

Notes:
1. When Granular B is used for granular backfill for pipe subdrains, 100% of the material shall pass the 37.5 mm sieve.
2. When RAP is blended with Granular B Type I or Type III, 100% of the RAP shall pass the 75 mm sieve. Conditions in Note
1 supersede this requirement.
3. When the aggregate is obtained from an iron blast furnace slag source.
4. When the aggregate is obtained from a quarry or blast furnace slag or nickel slag source.
5. When Granular O is produced from boulders, cobbles, or gravel retained on the 50 mm sieve.

Page 10 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

 Table 4
Sample Size

Material Minimum Mass of Field Samples, kg (Note 1)

Granular O, A, M;
25
Granular B, SSM (100% passing 26.5 mm sieve)
Granular B, SSM 50

Notes:
1. Individual sample containers shall hold no more than 30 kg of aggregate. When more than 30 kg is
required, additional sample containers shall be used.

Table 5
Range Requirements For Gradation (LS-602)

Maximum Acceptable Range

MTO Sieve Granular
SSM
A B Type I B Type II B Type III M O
150 mm - 1 - 1 - - 1
106 mm - - 1 - - - -
37.5 mm - - - - - 1 -
26.5 mm 1 - 30.0 - - 5.0 -
19.0 mm 8.0 - - - 1 8.0 -
13.2 mm 20.0 - - - 16.0 17.0 -
9.5 mm 20.0 - - - 18.0 17.0 -
4.75 mm 18.0 - 22.0 - 18.0 18.0 -
1.18 mm 18.0 - 18.0 - 18.0 12.0 -
300 m 12.0 50.0 12.0 25.0 12.0 - -
75 m 5.0 7.0 5.0 7.0 5.0 4.0 15.0

Table 6
Lot Quantity Determinations for Adjusted Payments

Item Road or Delivery Samples

Items having the tender quantity in The quantity measured for payment by weighing.
tonnes.
All other items. The weighed quantity when available; otherwise the theoretical
quantity calculated by the Contract Administrator using a
conversion factor of 2.0 tonnes per cubic metre.

Page 11 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

 Table 7
Adjustment Points

Adjustment Points Per 0.1% Deviation from Specified Limit

MTO Sieve Select
Designation Granular A Granular B Granular M Granular O Subgrade
Material
150 mm - 0.1 (Note 1) - - 0.1
106.5 mm - 0.1 (Note 2) - -
37.5 mm - - - 0.1 -
26.5 mm 0.1 0.1 - 0.1 0.1
19.0 mm 0.1 - 0.1 0.1 -
13.2 mm 0.1 - 0.1 0.1 -
9.5 mm 0.1 - 0.1 0.1 -
4.75 mm Excess Passing 0.5 / Insufficient Passing 0.2 0.1
1.18 mm 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
300 m 0.1 0.1 0.1 - 0.1
150 m - - - - 0.1
75 m 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5

Notes:
1. Granular B Type I and Type III only.
2. Granular B Type II only.

Page 12 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

Appendix 1010-A, April 2013
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal
contract. This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and
considerations discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not
supersede an Owner’s design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 13 Rev. Date: 04/2013 [Link] 1010

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1101
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2020

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PERFORMANCE GRADED ASPHALT CEMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1101.01 SCOPE

1101.02 REFERENCES

1101.03 DEFINITIONS

1101.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1101.05 MATERIALS

1101.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1101.07 PRODUCTION - Not Used

1101.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1101.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1101.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for the properties, use, and payment of performance graded
asphalt cements.

1101.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 313 Hot Mix Asphalt - End Result

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1151 Superpave and Stone Mastic Asphalt Mixtures

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-100 Rounding-Off of Test Data and Other Numbers
LS-228 Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Cement Using Modified Pressure Aging Vessel Protocols

November 2020 Page 1 of 9 [Link] 1101

LS-299 Determination of Asphalt Cement’s Resistance to Ductile Failure Using Double Edge
Notched Tension Test (DENT)
LS-308 Determination of Performance Grade of Physically Aged Asphalt Cement Using Extended
Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR) Method
LS-319 Determining the Cross-Over Temperature of Asphalt Cement
LS-320 Determining the Low Temperature Critical Spread of Asphalt Cement

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M 320-17 Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder

R 29-15 (2019) Grading or Verifying the Performance Grade of an Asphalt Binder
R 66-16 Sampling Asphalt Materials
T 350-19 Standard Method of Test for Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR) Test of Asphalt
Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)

ASTM International

D7643 - 16 Standard Practice for Determining the Continuous Grading Temperatures and
Continuous Grades for PG Graded Asphalt Binders
D8078 - 18 Standard Test Method for Ash Content of Asphalt and Emulsified Asphalt Residues

1101.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Asphalt Binder means modified or unmodified asphalt cement.

Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatment (AST-AC) means as defined in OPSS 1151.

High Temperature Performance Grade (XX) means the high temperature performance grade specified
in the Contract Documents and also referred to as the XX specified for the PGAC where the PGAC grade
specified is PG XX-YY, and the maximum design pavement temperature.

Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Lot means as defined in OPSS 313.

Low Temperature Limiting Grade (LTLG) means the warmest of the Limiting Grades, T L obtained for
1 hour, 24 hours, 72 hours and the two conditioning temperatures according to LS-308, and Form B of
LS-308.

Low Temperature Performance Grade (-YY) means the low temperature performance grade specified in
the Contract Documents and also referred to as the -YY specified for the PGAC where the PGAC grade
specified is PG XX-YY, and the minimum design pavement temperature.

Performance Graded Asphalt Cement (PGAC) means an asphalt binder that is produced from petroleum
residue, either with or without the addition of non-particulate modifiers, according to AASHTO M 320.

Quality Assurance (QA) means as defined in OPSS 313.

Recompaction Temperature means the temperature to which plant produced mix shall be reheated for
testing purposes and shall be the same as the laboratory mix design compaction temperature.

November 2020 Page 2 of 9 [Link] 1101

1101.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1101.04.01 Submission Requirements

1101.04.01.01 PGAC Product Documentation

For each grade of PGAC specified in the Contract Documents, the following items shall be supplied to the
Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to the first use of each product:

a) The PGAC supplier, the facility type, and location that the product shall be supplied from.

b) Applicable mixing and compaction temperatures for the product.

c) The minimum temperature of the HMA immediately after spreading, recommended by the PGAC
supplier. This information is required when paving on bridge decks only.

d) Documentation of construction, storage, and handling requirements, including the material safety data
sheet, recompaction temperature, mix discharge temperature, and recommended extraction
procedure.

e) When the PGAC contains any polyphosphoric acid (PPA) and a liquid AST-AC is incorporated into the
PGAC at the PGAC supplier's depot:

i. Information on how much AST-AC was added to the PGAC.

ii. Documentation from the PGAC supplier stating that the PPA modified PGAC with the liquid AST-
AC added at the PGAC supplier's depot shall meet all PGAC material requirements specified in the
Contract Documents, including AASHTO M 320 for the PGAC grade specified.

1101.04.01.02 PGAC Supply Documentation

For each grade of PGAC specified in the Contract Documents, the following items shall be supplied to the
Contract Administrator prior to the commencement of HMA production:

a) All PGAC documentation from the PGAC supplier in the form of bill of lading and certificate of analysis,
confirming the grade of PGAC. The bill of lading and certificate of analysis shall also be supplied for
each subsequent delivery of PGAC that will be used for the HMA production.

b) Documentation identifying the PGAC storage tank at the HMA plant that will be supplying the PGAC
during production of HMA for this Contract. The Contract Administrator shall be notified and provided
updated documentation prior to changing the storage tank that is being used to supply PGAC for the
HMA production at the HMA plant.

1101.05 MATERIALS

All PGAC shall be according to AASHTO M 320 for the performance grades specified in the Contract
Documents when tested using the methods designated in AASHTO R 29, section Test Procedure for
Grading an Unknown Asphalt Binder and continuous grading temperatures according to ASTM D7643 and
reported continuous grading temperatures rounded to the nearest 0.1 °C.

When silicone oil is added to the PGAC, it shall be less than five parts per million of the PGAC.

The PGAC shall be homogeneous; free of water and any contamination; and shall not foam when heated
to the temperatures specified by the manufacturer for the safe handling and use of the product. It shall be
shipped, used, and always handled in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

November 2020 Page 3 of 9 [Link] 1101

All PGAC 70-28, 70-34, and 64-34 shall not contain more than 0.5% PPA and shall only be used as a
catalyst for the purpose of modification with polymers. Other grades of PGAC shall contain no more than
1.0% PPA. All grades of PGAC shall not contain any orthophosphoric acid.

The PGAC shall meet the performance grading requirements shown in Table 1 and the additional testing
requirements shown in Table 2.

1101.07 PRODUCTION

1101.07.01 Sampling and Testing

Sampling shall be as specified in the Quality Assurance section.

1101.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1101.08.01 Sampling

1101.08.01.01 General

The QA, referee, and other required samples for possible Owner testing shall be taken at the same time.

1101.08.01.02 Performance Graded Asphalt Cement

All PGAC test samples shall be obtained during the production of the HMA at the HMA plant from the
storage tank which is directly feeding the production of the HMA according to AASHTO R 66 and the asphalt
plant’s Health and Safety Plan. The asphalt plant’s Health and Safety Plan and procedure for sampling
shall be discussed at the pre-pave meeting.

Notification from the Contract Administrator shall be provided when the PGAC is required to be sampled.

Sampling frequency, minimum quantities, and additional labelling shall be as shown in Table 3.

1101.08.02 Lot Size

The Contract Administrator shall determine the size and location of the lots for each grade of PGAC, after
discussion with the Contractor and before HMA production for the HMA tender item starts.

For tonnage tender items, the quantity of PGAC incorporated into a maximum of 10,000 tonnes of HMA is
considered one lot or as determined by the Contract Administrator.

For square metre tender items, the quantity of PGAC incorporated into a maximum of 80,000 m 2 of HMA
for lift thicknesses in the order of 40 to 55 mm is considered one lot or as determined by the Contract
Administrator. For lift thicknesses in the order of 60 to 100 mm, the lot size is adjusted to a maximum of
50,000 m2 or as determined by the Contract Administrator.

All PGAC lot sizes shall be based on the HMA tender quantity for each grade of PGAC.

A lot shall be terminated when the source of PGAC is changed. A lot may be terminated at the Contract
Administrator's option when HMA production for the Contract ceases for a period of 20 Days or more.

November 2020 Page 4 of 9 [Link] 1101

1101.08.02.01 Switching Performance Grades

When switching from the use of one performance grade to a different performance grade, a request may
be made that the quantity of PGAC in the first tanker load be considered as a separate lot. This request
shall be submitted in writing to the Contract Administrator. The Contract Administrator shall consider only
one request for the duration of the Contract.

1101.08.03 Acceptance Testing

Material acceptance of PGAC for performance grading and for the additional testing specified in Tables 1
and 2, respectively, shall be based on QA test results conducted by the Owner’s designated laboratory
unless superseded by referee test results, subject to the conditions specified in the Contract Documents.

Test results from the tests completed to determine if the material complies with the requirements of the
Contract Documents shall be provided by the Owner.

1101.08.04 Basis of Acceptance

Lots of PGAC are categorized for acceptance according to Tables 1 and 2.

When a PGAC lot is categorized with more than one category in Tables 1 and 2, acceptance of the HMA
shall be dealt with using the category selected by the Owner.

1101.08.04.01 Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatment

At the discretion of the Owner, an allowance may be made for the impact of the asphalt cement anti-
stripping treatment on a PGAC grade for QA or referee purposes provided that when production begins a
request is submitted to the Owner with complete AASHTO M 320 test results for the following:

a) Asphalt cement with anti-stripping treatment at the percentage identified in the mix design.

b) Asphalt cement without the anti-stripping treatment.

1101.08.05 Referee Testing

Referee testing may be invoked for any lot of PGAC within five Business Days of receiving all the QA test
results for the lot.

Referee testing costs as specified in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor, unless the
referee testing confirms total conformance of the PGAC sample to the Contract Documents when the QA
testing did not, in which case the costs shall be borne by the Owner.

Referee testing may only be invoked for a PGAC lot that is categorized as major borderline or rejectable.

The referee testing shall include all testing specified in Tables 1 and 2. Test results generated by the referee
laboratory shall be used to re-evaluate the lot to determine whether the PGAC conforms to the Contract
Documents and the disposition of the HMA. The referee test results are binding on both the Owner and the
Contractor.

1101.08.06 Disposition of HMA Produced with Borderline and Rejectable Lots

The Owner shall review the test results and determine the disposition of the HMA produced using any
PGAC that does not conform to all requirements of the Contract Documents. HMA for which PGAC test
results indicate that the PGAC did not conform to the Contract Documents shall be dealt with as follows
and a non-conformance report shall be issued:

November 2020 Page 5 of 9 [Link] 1101

Minor Borderline: HMA shall be accepted into the Work at full payment.

Major Borderline: HMA shall be accepted into the Work, provided that a payment reduction is
accepted, calculated as follows:

PGAC Payment Reduction = 5% of HMA contract price x quantity of HMA in the

PGAC lot.

The quantity of HMA shall be in tonnes or square metres as specified for the applicable HMA tender item.

This payment reduction is assessed independently of other payment adjustment provisions specified in the
Contract Documents.

If the PGAC in a particular lot has been used for the production of more than one HMA type, the payment
reduction shall be calculated using the actual quantities of the HMA types produced with the PGAC for the
HMA type, within the PGAC lot.

Rejectable: HMA for which PGAC test results are rejectable shall be subject to repair or
payment adjustment. The Contract Administrator shall determine if a rejectable lot
may remain in the Work without repairs, with a payment adjustment accepted by
the Owner.

When there are changes from one performance grade to a different performance grade and the request for
the establishment of a separate lot has been accepted according to the Switching Performance Grades
clause, HMA produced with this separate PGAC lot shall be administered as follows:

a) The HMA payment shall not be assessed a PGAC payment reduction for a major borderline disposition
due to performance grading.

b) All HMA with PGAC that is rejectable shall be removed or its payment shall be adjusted at the discretion
of the Contract Administrator.

November 2020 Page 6 of 9 [Link] 1101

 TABLE 1
Performance Grading Requirements and Categories for PGAC
Performance Grading Test Result Requirements
Category
(Notes 1 & 2)
Acceptable Equal to or above XX and equal to or below -YY
Minor Borderline ≤ 0.5 °C below XX and ≤ 0.5 °C above -YY
Major Borderline ≤ 1.0 °C below XX and ≤ 1.0 °C above -YY
Rejectable > 1.0 °C below XX or > 1.0 °C above -YY
Notes:
1. XX is the specified high temperature performance grade and design maximum
pavement temperature. -YY is the specified low temperature performance grade
and design minimum pavement temperature.
2. Performance grading test results shall be reported rounded to the nearest 0.1°C.

TABLE 2
Additional Testing Requirements and Categories for PGAC
Results
Reported Category
PGAC Property and
Test Rounded
Grade Attributes
Method to
(Note 1) (Unit) Minor Major
Nearest Acceptable Rejectable
(Note 2) Borderline Borderline

All PGAC
Grades Ash Content, ≤ 0.60 N/A > 0.60 and ≤ 0.80 > 0.80
except % by mass of residue ASTM 0.01
PG58-28 D8078
(%)
PG58-28 ≤ 0.40 N/A > 0.40 and ≤ 0.60 > 0.60
Non-recoverable creep
compliance at 0.01 < 4.50 N/A N/A ≥ 4.50
3.2 kPa, Jnr-3.2 (kPa-1)
≤ the lesser of 55.0
or [(29.371) (Jnr-3.2)- ≤ the lesser
All PGAC > the lesser 0.2633]
Average percent of 45.0 or
Grades of 55.0 or
recovery at 3.2 kPa, AASHTO 0.1 and N/A [(29.371)
except [(29.371)
R3.2 (%) T 350 > the lesser of 45.0 (Jnr-3.2)-0.2633-
PG58-28 (Jnr-3.2)-0.2633]
(Note 3) or [(29.371) (Jnr-3.2)- 10]
and 0.2633-10]
PG52-34
Percent difference in
non-recoverable creep
compliance between 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
0.1 kPa and 3.2 kPa,
Jnrdiff (%)
LS-299
CTOD, t (mm) 0.1 ≥ 10.0 < 10.0 and ≥ 6.0 < 6.0 and ≥ 4.0 < 4.0
(Note 4)
PG70-28, LS-308
LTLG (°C) 0.1 ≤ -28.0 > -28.0 and ≤ -25.0 > -25.0 and ≤ -22.0 > -22.0
PG64-28 (Note 4)
LS-308
Grade Loss (°C) 0.1 ≤ 6.0 N/A > 6.0 and ≤ 8.0 > 8.0
(Note 4)

November 2020 Page 7 of 9 [Link] 1101

 Results
Reported Category
PGAC Property and
Test Rounded
Grade Attributes
Method to
(Note 1) (Unit) Minor Major
Nearest Acceptable Rejectable
(Note 2) Borderline Borderline

LS-299
CTOD, t (mm) 0.1 ≥ 6.0 < 6.0 and ≥ 4.0 N/A < 4.0
(Note 4)
LS-308
PG58-28 LTLG (°C) 0.1 ≤ -24.0 N/A > -24.0 and ≤ -22.0 > -22.0
(Note 4)
LS-308
Grade Loss (°C) 0.1 ≤ 6.0 N/A N/A > 6.0
(Note 4)
LS-299
CTOD, t (mm) 0.1 ≥ 14.0 < 14.0 and ≥ 10.0 < 10.0 and ≥ 8.0 < 8.0
PG70-34, (Note 4)
PG64-34, LS-308
LTLG (°C) 0.1 ≤ -34.0 > -34.0 and ≤ -31.0 > -31.0 and ≤ -28.0 > -28.0
PG58-34, (Note 4)
PG52-34 LS-308
Grade Loss (°C) 0.1 ≤ 6.0 N/A > 6.0 and ≤ 8.0 > 8.0
(Note 4)
LS-299
CTOD, t (mm) 0.1 ≥ 18.0 < 18.0 and ≥ 14.0 < 14.0 and ≥ 12.0 < 12.0
(Note 4)
PG58-40, LS-308
LTLG (°C) 0.1 ≤ -37.0 N/A > -37.0 and ≤ -34.0 > -34.0
PG52-40 (Note 4)
LS-308
Grade Loss (°C) 0.1 ≤ 6.0 N/A > 6.0 and ≤ 8.0 > 8.0
(Note 4)
LS-299
CTOD, t (mm) 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
(Note 5)
Cross-Over
LS-319
Temperature, Tδ45 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
(Note 4)
(°C)
Cross-Over
ALL LS-319
Temperature, Tδ45 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
PGAC (Note 5)
(°C)
grades
Low Temperature
LS-320
Critical Spread, ΔTC 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
(Note 4)
(°C)
Low Temperature
LS-320
Critical Spread, ΔTC 0.1 Testing carried out for information purposes only.
(Note 5)
(°C)
Notes:
1. PGAC grades are as specified in the Contract Documents.
2. The rounding-off procedure, for all values, shall be according to LS-100.
3. Conducted at 52°C for Contracts located north of the boundary formed by the French River, Lake Nipissing, and the
Mattawa River, excluding Manitoulin Island (also referred to as PGAC Zone 1). Conducted at 58°C for locations South
of PGAC Zone 1 in Ontario, including Manitoulin Island (also referred to as PGAC Zones 2 and 3).
4. Conducted on PAV residue LS-228 Method A.
5. Conducted on PAV residue LS-228 Method C.

November 2020 Page 8 of 9 [Link] 1101

 TABLE 3
PGAC Sampling Requirements
Samples Frequency Minimum Sample Labelling
Quantity
Owner Samples Each Lot 6 litres (Note 1) Label shall include:
(includes QA and - Grade
Referee) - Supplier
Notes:
1. Six litres shall be provided in 6 suitable one litre containers or 3 containers able to hold a minimum of
2 litres each.

November 2020 Page 9 of 9 [Link] 1101

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1103
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1103.01 SCOPE

1103.02 REFERENCES

1103.03 DEFINITIONS

1103.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1103.05 MATERIALS

1103.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1103.07 PRODUCTION

1103.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1103.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1103.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for different types and grades of emulsified asphalt suitable for
both roadway construction and as a straw mulch adhesive.

1103.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-220 Demulsibility of Emulsified Asphalts
LS-224 Coating for Emulsified Asphalts
LS-226 Test for High Float Emulsified Asphalt

ASTM International

D5/D5M-20 Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials

D36/D36M-14(2020) Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)
D113-17 Standard Test Method for Ductility of Asphalt Materials
D139-16 Standard Test Method for Float Test for Bituminous Materials
D244-09(2017) Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts

November 2022 Page 1 of 12 [Link] 1103

D1310-14(2021) Standard Test Method for Flash Point and Fire Point of Liquids by Tag Open-Cup
Apparatus
D6084/D6084M-21 Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Asphalt Materials by Ductilometer
D6930-19 Standard Test Method for Settlement and Storage Stability of Emulsified Asphalts
D6933-18 Standard Test Method for Oversized Particles in Emulsified Asphalts (Sieve Test)
D6935-17 Standard Test Method for Determining Cement Mixing of Emulsified Asphalt
D6997-12(2020) Standard Test Method for Distillation of Emulsified Asphalt
D7402-09(2017) Standard Practice for Identifying Cationic Emulsified Asphalts
D7496-18 Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Emulsified Asphalt by Saybolt Furol
Viscometer
D8078-18e1 Standard Test Method for Ash Content of Asphalt and Emulsified Asphalt
Residues

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

R 66-16 (2020) Standard Practice for Sampling Asphalt Materials

T 59-16 (2021) Standard Method of Test for Emulsified Asphalts
T 300-11 (2020) Standard Method of Test for Force Ductility Test of Asphalt Materials

Others

Environment and Climate Change Canada - Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC) Emissions from the Use of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt - Feb, 2017
Ozone Annex (2000) of the Canada-United States Air Quality Agreement (1991)
Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA 1999)

1103.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Emulsified Asphalt means asphalt cement milled into microscopic particles and dispersed in water using
a chemical emulsifier and other additives. Based on the electrical charges surrounding the asphalt particles,
it can be anionic, cationic and non-ionic. It can be classified based on setting time of the asphalt droplets
(RS, MS, QS, SS), viscosity of the emulsions (1,2), hardness of the base asphalt cement (H, HH), polymer
content (P), and float & flow properties (HF).

Ozone Season means the period of May 1st through September 30th (warm-season months, when the days
are warmer and longer), as defined in the Ozone Annex (2000) of the Canada-United States Air Quality
Agreement (1991).

Tack Coat means an emulsified asphalt applied to the surface of a new or existing asphalt layer to enhance
the bond between the asphalt layers, prior to placing an overlaying layer.

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) means the Item 65 components on the List of Toxic Substances in
Schedule 1 of the Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA 1999).

1103.05 MATERIALS

1103.05.01 Emulsified Asphalt

Emulsified asphalt shall be of the type and grade as specified in the Contract Documents and shall be
supplied from a source named on the ministry’s DSM. Under no circumstances shall the source of supply
or the product be changed, or partial or total supply allocated to another supplier without prior written
approval of the Owner.

November 2022 Page 2 of 12 [Link] 1103

1103.05.02 Physical Requirements

Emulsified asphalts shall consist of suitable paving asphalts dispersed in water and shall meet the
requirements specified in Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. The addition of polymers or other additives after the
manufacture of an emulsified asphalt shall not be permitted.

Emulsified asphalts shall be homogeneous after mixing and show no signs of separation within 14 Days of
delivery.

1103.05.03 Straw Mulch Adhesive

Emulsified asphalt used as a straw mulch adhesive shall be:

a) A specially refined petroleum asphalt emulsified in water;

b) Designed to have a fluid consistency for cold spray applications;

c) Designed with no petroleum solvents nor other components toxic to plant life; and

d) According to Table 1.

1103.07 PRODUCTION

1103.07.01 Shipping

The material shall be shipped in clean containers. Containers that are being reused shall be inspected and
cleaned, if required, prior to loading to ensure there is no contamination.

When shipping is by tank truck or railway tank car, the material shall arrive at the destination at a
temperature at least 5 °C higher than the minimum spraying temperature specified in Table 7 and not more
than the maximum spraying temperature specified in Table 7.

When no spraying temperatures are specified in Table 7, the material shall arrive at a temperature meeting
the manufacturer’s requirements.

1103.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1103.08.01 Compliance

Emulsified asphalts shall be according to Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 for the particular type and grade when
tested according to the test methods designated in the tables.

1103.08.02 Inspection

The Owner may inspect shipping containers for cleanliness at any time.

1103.08.03 Sampling

Representative samples of material being supplied may be taken from either the supplier's plants,
maintenance yards, construction sites, or any shipment using the sampling methods according to
AASHTO R 66 in the presence of the Contract Administrator. Sample material taken prior to delivery shall
be at no additional cost to the Owner.

November 2022 Page 3 of 12 [Link] 1103

The samples shall remain in a condition that maintain their original physical and engineering properties of
the samples for quality acceptance testing and referee testing, if invoked by the Contractor. The samples
shall be protected from freezing, heat, pressure and agitation during the storage period and transportation
process.

Duplicate sample shall be taken. The sample size for each sample shall be 3.8 L, or quantity as required
by the specific testing. The containers for samples shall be new clean plastic wide-mouth jars or bottles
with tight screw caps. The caps and the containers shall fit together tightly. The containers shall be free
from contamination, and shall not be submerged in solvent, nor wiped with a solvent saturated cloth.
Transferring samples from one container to another shall be avoided if possible.

If the sample appears to be inhomogeneous after reconditioning and mixing, or the sample was subjected
to freeze-thaw cycling prior to receipt, the sample shall be discarded and resample for testing shall be
required.

1103.08.04 Testing

Samples may be tested by the Owner according to the tests listed in Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Before performing the tests, the samples shall be conditioned and stirred thoroughly to a homogeneous
mixture according to AASHTO T 59 to ensure that the emulsified asphalt is in its optimal state for
determining its true properties.

1103.08.05 Acceptance

Failure of any sample to conform to any of the material requirements shall be cause for rejection of the
material, unless payment adjustments are as specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2022 Page 4 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 1
Anionic Emulsified Asphalts

Type Rapid Setting Medium Setting Slow Setting

Straw
Require- Test
Grade RS-1 RS-2 RS-1HH MS-1 MS-2 SS-1 SS-1H SS-1HH Mulch
ments Method
Adhesive
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Tests on Emulsion
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol
Seconds: ASTM
at 25 °C 20 100 -- -- 20 60 20 60 -- -- 20 60 20 60 20 60 17 40 D7496
at 50 °C -- -- 75 300 -- -- -- -- 35 400 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Residue by Distillation, ASTM
55 -- 60 -- 55 -- 55 -- 65 -- 55 -- 55 -- 55 -- 55 --
% by Mass D6997
Settlement, %,
ASTM
5 Days -- 3 -- 3 -- 5 -- 3 -- 3 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- --
D6930
7 Days -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5
Demulsibility, %
35 ml, 0.02 N CaCl2 60 -- 60 -- 60 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LS-220
50 ml, 0.1 N CaCl2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0
Oil Portion of Distillate, ASTM
-- -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- 1 -- --
% by Volume/Mass D6997
VOC Content as
determined by Oil ASTM
-- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3
Portion of Distillate, D6997
% by Volume (Note 1)
Sieve Test, ASTM
-- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1
% by Mass D6933
Cement Mixing Test, ASTM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 -- 2.0 -- -- -- --
% by Mass D6935
ASTM
Particle Charge NEGATIVE OR NEUTRAL
D7402
Coating Ability and
Water Resistance, %, -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 -- 80 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LS-224
(Note 2)
Fire Resistance -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- PASS (Note 3)

Tests on Residue
Penetration (at 25 °C, ASTM
100 200 100 200 20 55 100 200 100 250 100 200 40 100 20 55 100 200
100 g, 5 s), 0.1 mm D5M
Ductility (at 25 °C, ASTM
60 -- 60 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 --
5 cm/min), cm D113
Ash Content, ASTM
-- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0
% by Mass of Residue D8078

Notes:
1. Apply to emulsified asphalt used in paving material or in paving, construction and maintenance operations during the
ozone season in accordance with ‘Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions
from the Use of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt’ with distillation temperature to 260°C.
2. This requirement does not apply for tack coat or joint painting emulsified asphalts.
3. There shall be no flash or flare-up when the flame of a Bunsen burner is held in contact with the surface of the material,
as received, for a period of 10 seconds.

November 2022 Page 5 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 2
Cationic Emulsified Asphalts

Slurry
Type Rapid Setting Medium Setting Slow Setting
Seal
Require- Test
ments Grade CRS-1 CRS-2 CRS-1HH CMS-2 CMS-2H CSS-1 CSS-1H CSS-1HH CSS-H Method
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Tests on Emulsion
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol
Seconds : ASTM
at 25 °C -- -- -- -- 20 60 -- -- -- -- 20 100 20 100 20 60 20 100 D7496
at 50 °C 50 150 100 400 -- -- 50 400 50 400 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Residue by Distillation, ASTM
62 -- 67 -- 55 -- 65 -- 65 -- 57 -- 57 -- 55 -- 57 --
% by Mass D6997
Settlement, %, ASTM
-- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5
5 Days D6930
Demulsibility, %
35 ml 0.8% Dioctyl
40 -- 40 -- 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LS-220
Sodium Sulfosuccinate
Solution
Oil Portion of Distillate, ASTM
-- 3 -- 3 -- 1 -- 10 -- 10 -- 5 -- 5 -- 1 -- --
% by Volume/Mass D6997
VOC Content as
determined by Oil ASTM
-- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3
Portion of Distillate, D6997
% by Volume (Note 1)
Sieve Test, ASTM
-- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1
% by Mass D6933
Cement Mixing Test, ASTM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 -- 2.0 -- -- -- --
% by Mass D6935
ASTM
Particle Charge POSITIVE
D7402
Coating Ability and
Water Resistance, % -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 -- 80 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LS-224
(Note 2)

Test on Residue
Penetration (at 25 °C, ASTM
100 250 100 250 20 55 100 250 40 125 100 250 40 125 20 55 40 125
100 g, 5 s), 0.1 mm D5M
Ductility (at 25 °C, ASTM
60 -- 60 -- 40 -- 60 -- 40 -- 60 -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 --
5 cm/min), cm D113
Ash Content, ASTM
-- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0
% by Mass of Residue D8078

Notes:
1. Apply to emulsified asphalt used in paving material or in paving, construction and maintenance operations during the
ozone season in accordance with ‘Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions
from the Use of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt’ with distillation temperature to 260°C.
2. This requirement does not apply for tack coat or joint painting emulsified asphalts.

November 2022 Page 6 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 3
High Float Emulsified Asphalts

Type High Float

Require- Test
Grade HFRS-2 HFMS-2(ON) HF-100S HF-150S HF-250S HF-150M HF-1000M
ments Method
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Tests on Emulsion
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol ASTM
75 400 50 300 35 150 35 150 35 150 50 -- 50 --
Seconds at 50 °C D7496
Residue by Distillation,
63 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 65 -- LS-226
% by Mass
Demulsibility, %
35 ml 0.02 N CaCI2 60 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
LS-220
50 ml 0.10 N CaCl2 -- -- -- -- 75 -- 75 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
50 ml 0.02 N CaCl2 -- -- 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Oil Portion of Distillate, ASTM
-- -- 0.5 3 0.5 4 0.5 4 1 6 1 6 1 7
% by Volume/Mass D6997
VOC Content as
determined by Oil ASTM
-- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3
Portion of Distillate, % D6997
by Volume (Note 1)
Sieve Test, ASTM
-- 0.10 -- 0.10 -- 0.10 -- 0.10 -- 0.10 -- 0.10 -- 0.10
% by Mass D6933
ASTM
Particle Charge -- Negative -- -- -- -- --
D7402
Coating Ability and ASTM
-- (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3)
Water Resistance, % D244
Storage Stability ASTM
-- 1.0 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5
24 h, % by Mass D6930

Test on Residue
Penetration (at 25 °C,
100 200 90 200 100 175 150 250 250 500 150 -- -- -- LS-226
100 g, 5 s), 0.1 mm
Ductility (at 25 °C, ASTM
40 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
5 cm/min), cm D113
Ash Content, ASTM
-- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0
% by Mass of Residue D8078
Float Test at 60 °C, s 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- LS-226
Apparent Viscosity
-- -- -- -- 250 -- 90 -- 20 -- 10 80 2 8 LS-226
(at 60 °C), Pa·s

Notes:
1. Apply to emulsified asphalt used in paving material or in paving, construction and maintenance operations during the ozone
season in accordance with ‘Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions from the
Use of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt’ with distillation temperature to 260°C.
2. Follow ASTM D244, except that the mixture of aggregate and emulsified asphalt shall be mixed vigorously for 5 min. at the
end of which period the aggregates shall be thoroughly and uniformly coated. The mixture shall then be completely
immersed in tap water and the water poured off. The aggregate shall then be at least 90% coated.
3. Follow ASTM D244, except that the mixture of aggregate and emulsified asphalt shall be mixed vigorously for 5 min. then
allowed to stand for 3 hours after which the mixture shall be capable of being mixed an additional 1 min. The mixture shall
then be rinsed twice with approximately its own volume of tap water, without showing appreciable loss of bituminous film.
After the second washing the aggregate shall be at least 90% coated.

November 2022 Page 7 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 4
Polymer-Modified Emulsified Asphalts

Type Anionic Cationic High Float

Require- HFMS- Test
Grade RS-1P RS-2P CRS-1P CRS-2P CQS-1HP CSS-1P HF-100SP HF-150SP HF-150MP
ments 2P(ON) Method
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Tests on Emulsion
Viscosity, Saybolt
Furol Seconds: ASTM
at 25 °C 20 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 100 20 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- D7496
at 50 °C -- -- 75 300 25 150 75 400 -- -- -- -- 50 300 35 150 35 150 50 --
Residue by ASTM
Distillation to 204°C, 55 -- 60 -- 62 -- 65 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- 62 -- D6997
% by Mass LS-226
Storage Stability, 24 ASTM
-- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5 -- 1.5
h, % by Mass D6930
Demulsibility, %
35 ml, 0.02 N CaCl2 60 -- 60 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
50 ml 0.10 N CaCl2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 75 -- 75 -- -- --
50 ml 0.02 N CaCl2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
LS-220
35 ml, 0.8% Dioctyl
Sodium Sulfo- -- -- -- -- 40 -- 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Succinate Solution
Oil Portion of
ASTM
Distillate, -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5 0.5 3 0.5 4 0.5 4 1 6
D6997
% by Volume/Mass
VOC Content as
determined by Oil
ASTM
Portion of Distillate, -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3 -- 3
D6997
% by Volume
(Note 1)
Sieve Test, ASTM
-- 0.2 -- 0.2 -- 0.2 -- 0.2 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1 -- 0.1
% by Mass D6933
ASTM
Particle Charge Negative or Neutral Positive Negative -- -- --
D7402
Coating Ability and
ASTM
Water Resistance, -- -- -- -- -- -- (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3)
D244
%

Test on Residue
Penetration ASTM
(at 25 °C, 100 g, 100 200 100 200 100 250 100 250 40 90 100 250 90 200 90 150 150 250 150 250 D5M
5 s), 0.1 mm LS-226
LS-226
Float Test at 60 °C,
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- 1200 -- ASTM
s
D139
Ash Content,
ASTM
% by Mass of -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 10 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0 -- 1.0
D8078
Residue
Elastic Recovery
ASTM
(at 10 °C), % 55 -- 55 -- 55 -- 55 -- 50 -- 55 -- 55 -- 55 -- 50 -- 50 --
D6084M
(Note 4)
Force Ductility at
800% Elongation, AASHTO
0.5 -- 0.5 -- 0.5 -- 0.5 -- -- -- -- -- 0.5 -- 0.5 -- -- -- -- --
5 cm/min. T 300
Pull Rate at 4 °C, kg
Softening Point, ASTM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 57 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
R&B, °C D36M

November 2022 Page 8 of 12 [Link] 1103

Notes for Table 4:
1. Apply to emulsified asphalt used in paving material or in paving, construction and maintenance operations during the ozone
season in accordance with ‘Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions from the Use
of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt’ with distillation temperature to 204°C for polymer-modified emulsified asphalts.
2. Follow ASTM D244, except that the mixture of aggregate and emulsified asphalt shall be mixed vigorously for 5 min. at the end
of which period the aggregates shall be thoroughly and uniformly coated. The mixture shall then be completely immersed in
tap water and the water poured off. The aggregate shall then be at least 90% coated.
3. Follow ASTM D244, except that the mixture of aggregate and emulsified asphalt shall be mixed vigorously for 5 min. then
allowed to stand for 3 hours after which the mixture shall be capable of being mixed an additional 1 min. The mixture shall then
be rinsed twice with approximately its own volume of tap water, without showing appreciable loss of bituminous film. After the
second washing the aggregate shall be at least 90% coated.
4. Testing Procedure B of ASTM D6084M to be used for elongation of 20 ± 0.25 cm.

November 2022 Page 9 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 5
Emulsified Asphalt Primer (EAP)

Requirements Min. Max. Test Method

Viscosity, Saybolt Furol Seconds at 50 °C 35 150 ASTM D7496
Residue by Distillation to 260 °C, % by Mass 40 -- ASTM D6997
Oil Portion of Distillate, % by Volume/Mass 10 30 ASTM D6997 (Note 1)
VOC Content as determined by Oil Portion of
-- 3 ASTM D6997
Distillate, % by Volume (Note 2)
Particle Charge Neutral ASTM D7402 (Note 3)
Flash Point, Tag Open Cup, °C 45 -- ASTM D1310
Storage Stability, 24 h No visible separation ASTM D6930 (Note 4)
Tests on Residue
Penetration (at 25 °C, 100 g, 5 s), 0.1 mm 100 300 ASTM D5M
Ductility (at 25 °C, 5 cm/min), cm 100 -- ASTM D113
Ash Content, % by Mass of Residue -- 1.0 ASTM D8078
Notes:
1. Since the total distillate exceeds 100 ml, follow ASTM D6997 with the following modification:
Prior to reaching 100 ml of distillate, carefully replace the first 100 ml graduated cylinder with a second
one. After the distillation is complete, determine the volume of oil distillate in both cylinders and record
the sum. Calculate the oil portion of the distillate as a percentage of the original weight of primer:
% Oil = (Total Volume of oil distillate, ml X 100) / (200 g primer)
2. Apply to emulsified asphalt used in paving material or in paving, construction and maintenance
operations during the ozone season in accordance with ‘Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile
Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions from the Use of Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt’ with distillation
temperature to 260°C.
3. Follow ASTM D7402 with the modification that the asphalt does not deposit due to an electrical charge
on either the anode (positive electrode) or the cathode (negative electrode). Equal adherence to both
electrodes due to the viscous nature of the material is not considered deposition.
4. Follow ASTM D6930 to obtain the percentage of residue from the top samples and bottom samples,
and the testing results will be for information purposes only. The compliance of storage stability shall
be based on any visual separation of 500 ml representative sample in the glass cylinder after 24 hours.

November 2022 Page 10 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 6
Solvent-Free Emulsified Asphalt

Requirements Min. Max. Test Method

Viscosity, Saybolt Furol Seconds at 25 °C 5 50 ASTM D7496
Residue by Distillation to 260 °C, % by Mass 40 - ASTM D6997
Sieve Test, % by Mass - 0.1 ASTM D6933
Oil Portion of Distillate, % by Volume/Mass - 0.5 ASTM D6997 (Note 1)
Storage Stability, 24 h, % No visible separation ASTM D6930 (Note 2)
Particle Charge Negative or Neutral ASTM D7402
Tests on Residue
Penetration (at 25 °C, 100 g, 5 s), 0.1 mm 40 150 ASTM D5M
Ductility (at 25 °C, 5 cm/min), cm 40 -- ASTM D113
Ash Content, % by Mass of Residue -- 1.0 ASTM D8078
Notes:
1. Since the total distillate will exceed 100 ml, follow ASTM D6997 with the following modification:
Prior to reaching 100 ml of distillate, carefully replace the first 100 ml graduated cylinder with a second
one. After the distillation is complete, determine the volume of oil distillate in both cylinders and record
the sum. Calculate the oil portion of the distillate as a percentage of the original weight of solvent-free
emulsified asphalt:
% Oil = (Total Volume of oil distillate, ml X 100) / (200 g solvent-free emulsified asphalt)
2. Follow ASTM D6930 to obtain the percentage of residue from the top samples and bottom samples, and
the testing results will be for information purposes only. The compliance of storage stability shall be
based on any visual separation of 500 ml representative sample in the glass cylinder after 24 hours.

November 2022 Page 11 of 12 [Link] 1103

 TABLE 7
Temperature for Spraying and Mixing Emulsified Asphalts, °C

Spraying Mixing
Grade
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
30 (Note 1) 70 -- --
RS-1, RS-1P, RS-1HH
20 (Note 2) 70 -- --
RS-2, RS-2P 60 (Note 1) 80 -- --
MS-1 -- -- 30 70
MS-2 -- -- 30 70
SS-1 20 70 20 70
SS-1H, SS-1HH 20 70 20 70
HFRS-2 60 80 -- --
HFMS-2(ON), HFMS-2P(ON) 60 80 -- --
HF-100S, HF-100SP 60 80 -- --
HF-150S, HF-150SP 60 80 -- --
HF-250S 60 80 -- --
HF-150M, HF-150MP -- -- 40 80
HF-1000M -- -- 40 75
CRS-1, CRS-1P, CRS-1HH 60 80 -- --
CRS-2, CRS-2P 60 80 -- --
CMS-2 -- -- 30 70
CMS-2H -- -- 30 70
CSS-1 -- -- 30 70
CSS-1H -- -- 30 70
CSS-1P -- -- 20 60
CSS-1HH 20 70 -- --
CSS-H (Slurry) -- -- 20 35
CQS-1HP -- -- Manufacturer's Requirements
Emulsified Asphalt Primer (EAP) Manufacturer's Requirements -- --
Solvent-Free Emulsified Asphalt Manufacturer's Requirements -- --
Notes:
1. For surface treatment.
2. For other uses.

November 2022 Page 12 of 12 [Link] 1103

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1151
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2021

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SUPERPAVE AND STONE MASTIC ASPHALT MIXTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1151.01 SCOPE

1151.02 REFERENCES

1151.03 DEFINITIONS

1151.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1151.05 MATERIALS

1151.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1151.07 PRODUCTION

1151.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1151.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1151.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for the materials, equipment, and processes for proportioning
and mixing hot mix asphalt (HMA) including warm mix asphalt (WMA), recycled mixes, and mixes for
miscellaneous work according to the Superpave and stone mastic asphalt (SMA) mix design methodology.

1151.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 313 Hot Mix Asphalt - End Result

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General

OPSS 1003 Aggregates - Hot Mix Asphalt
OPSS 1101 Performance Graded Asphalt Cement

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM) Manual

April 2021 Page 1 of 12 [Link] 1151

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:
LS-282 Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Cement and Analysis of Extracted Aggregate from
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
LS-284 Recovery of Asphalt from Solution by Rotary Evaporator
LS-292 Quantitative Determination of Asphalt Cement Content by Ignition and Analysis of
Remaining Aggregate from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
LS-309 Superpave Mix Design
LS-311 Stone Mastic Asphalt Mix Design
LS-316 Practice for Mix Check
LS-318 Practice for Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) Mix Design
LS-321 Method for Calculation of Asphalt Film Thickness
LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates
LS-603 Resistance to Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Abrasion Machine

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-251 Method to Calculate Asphalt Film Thickness

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M 325-08 Standard Specification for Designing Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA)

T 305-14 Determination of Draindown Characteristics in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixtures

National Asphalt Pavement Association (NAPA)

QIS 122 Designing and Constructing SMA Mixtures — State-of-the-Practice

1151.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the definitions in OPSS 313, OPSS 1101, and the following definitions
apply:

AMRL means the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory.

Anti-Stripping Treatment (AST) means a treatment used to minimize stripping of asphalt cement from
HMA aggregates, and can be either AST-AGG or AST-AC.

Aggregate Anti-Stripping Treatment (AST-AGG) means an AST applied directly to the HMA aggregates
prior to incorporating them into the mix or dryer at the HMA plant.

Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatment (AST-AC) means an AST added directly to the asphalt cement
to be used in the mix, prior to incorporating it into the mixer at the HMA plant.

Binder Replacement means the asphalt cement from the RAP contributing to the total asphalt cement
content in the mix, expressed as a percentage.

CCIL means the Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories.

Coarse Aggregate means that portion of aggregate material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve, when tested
according to LS-602.

Deleterious Material means materials other than reclaimed asphalt pavement, and that includes but is not
limited to the following: ceramic, clay brick, clay tile, glass, gypsum, gypsum plaster, plastic, reclaimed
concrete material, wallboard, and wood.

April 2021 Page 2 of 12 [Link] 1151

Fine Aggregate means that portion of aggregate material passing the 4.75 mm sieve when tested according
to LS-602.

Maximum Aggregate Size means one sieve size larger than the nominal maximum aggregate size.

Mix Design means the design of the proportions of aggregates, asphalt cement, and additives, when
uniformly mixed, results in an acceptable HMA in accordance with the specified method.

Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size means one sieve size larger than the first sieve to retain more than
10% by mass.

Primary Control Sieve means the sieve defining the break point between fine and coarse-graded mixtures
for each nominal maximum aggregate size.

Roof Shingle Tabs (RST) means ground roof shingle scrap generated when new shingles are trimmed
during production

1151.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1151.04.01 Design Requirements

1151.04.01.01 General

A laboratory that has current CCIL Type A certification, AMRL, or AMRL equivalent certification shall be
used to conduct all mix designs and mix checks.

Superpave mixes shall be designed using the procedures specified in LS-309, with the exception of WMA
mixes. WMA mixes shall be designed using the procedures specified in LS-318 at the anticipated WMA
production temperature. In the mix design procedure, all references to reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP)
content shall be deleted and replaced with % binder replacement.

Superpave materials, mix designs, and the JMF shall be according to the requirements specified in Tables
1, 2, and 3 for the HMA mix type specified in the Contract Documents.

The use of roof shingle tabs (RST) is not permitted in the HMA.

SMA mixes shall be designed using the procedures specified in LS-311. The SMA materials, mix designs,
and the JMF shall be according to the requirements specified in Tables 1, 4, and 5 for the SMA mix type
specified in the Contract Documents. Cellulose or mineral fibres shall be used as a stabilizing additive in
dosage rates of 0.3% or 0.4%, respectively, by mass of the total mixture. Regardless of the type of fibre
used, the manufacturer’s recommendations for any product used shall be followed.

The composition of the HMA may be modified as permitted in Table 6.

The amount of RAP allowable by mass in a mix will be calculated by the asphalt binder replacement method
according to the following formula:

% binder replacement = [(% asphalt cement content of RAP x % RAP by mass of mix) /
(% total asphalt cement content of mix)]

RAP as processed and ready for use in a HMA shall be tested using LS-282 or LS-292 to determine the
average percentage asphalt cement and the average gradation for the extracted RAP aggregates.

April 2021 Page 3 of 12 [Link] 1151

Density testing of aggregates and RAP shall be conducted for the purpose of developing the mix design for
each mix type in the Contract. Such testing shall be performed during production of each aggregate, RAP,
or during stockpiling of the materials at the HMA plant.

In addition, if the composition of the mix is modified by including RAP, the high and low grade of performance
graded asphalt cement (PGAC) required shall be lowered by 6 °C when:

% Binder Replacement > 20 %

The JMF selected for use shall produce HMA that meets all the requirements as specified in the Contract
Documents.

1151.04.01.02 Changes to the Job-Mix Formula and the Mix Design

Changes to the JMF shall be permitted subject to the conditions as specified in the Contract Documents.

A new mix design shall be completed according to the Mix Design clause, when:

a) A material is eliminated.

b) A new material is added.

c) A material source is changed.

d) The net impact of all adjustments to the original JMF exceeds any of the maximum field adjustments as
specified in the Contract Documents.

e) The allowable time period has been exceeded and the use of the mix design has not been extended.

1151.04.01.03 Anti-Stripping Treatments

1151.[Link] General

The AST shall treat the mix components at the greater of the dosages specified in the Aggregate
Anti-Stripping Treatment clause, the Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatment clause, or as specified in the
Contract Documents.

1151.[Link] Moisture Sensitivity

Moisture sensitivity shall meet the tensile strength ratio requirements specified in Tables 3 and 4.

1151.[Link] Aggregate Anti-Stripping Treatment

1151.[Link].01 General

Irrespective of any moisture sensitivity testing that shows that AST-AGG is not required, hydrated lime or
an approved AST-AGG from the ministry’s DSM shall be used in all mixes consisting of more than 75%
quartzite and dolomitic sandstone aggregates, or combinations thereof.

Irrespective of any moisture sensitivity testing that shows that AST-AGG is not required, the AST-AGG
dosage and type shown in the ministry’s DSM shall be the minimum used for all aggregates to be
incorporated into SMA and Superpave 12.5FC 2.

April 2021 Page 4 of 12 [Link] 1151

1151.[Link].02 Hydrated Lime

When hydrated lime is used as the AST-AGG, the dosage shall be the greater of:

a) The amount determined to meet the moisture sensitivity requirements, or

b) one percent by mass of total dry aggregate, or

c) the listed dosage from the ministry’s DSM.

1151.[Link].03 Alternate Aggregate Anti-Stripping Treatment

When an alternate is used as the AST-AGG in place of hydrated lime, the dosage shall be the greater of:

a) The amount determined to meet the moisture sensitivity requirements; or

b) the listed dosage from the ministry’s DSM.

1151.[Link] Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatment

When AST-AGG is not required in the mix, AST shall be used in the mix if:

a) Mix moisture sensitivity testing indicates an AST is required; or

b) the Contract Documents note that an AST is required.

The amount of AST to be used in the mix shall be the greater of:

a) The amount required to meet the moisture sensitivity requirements; or

b) the listed minimum dosage from the ministry’s DSM.

1151.04.02 Submission Requirements

1151.04.02.01 Mix Design

A copy of all mix design and JMF documents, signed, dated, and certified correct by the person accountable
for the engineering and management responsibility for the laboratory that conducted the work, shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator. The mix design shall include a statement that the mix exceeds 75%
if the percentage of the mix comprising quartzite and dolomitic sandstone aggregates, or combinations
thereof, is more than 75%. The Hamburg test results shall be submitted with the mix design, or up to 30 Days
after submission of the original WMA mix design.

The % Binder Replacement shall be calculated and submitted with the mix design.

For SMA mix, the technical data sheet for the supplied fibres shall be submitted with the mix design.

The asphalt film thickness (TF) shall be calculated according to LS-321 and submitted on form PH-CC-251
along with the mix design. The calculated asphalt film thickness shall be shown on the mix design summary
sheet.

The mix design shall be valid for a maximum of 14 months from when the mix design was prepared. To
extend use of the mix design for each calendar year past the initial 14 months, a one point mix check for
the properties listed in Table 7, using the methodology in LS-316 as applicable, shall be submitted to the
Contract Administrator. The mix must meet the requirement and tolerances given in Table 7.

April 2021 Page 5 of 12 [Link] 1151

The mix shall not be placed until the Contract Administrator gives written confirmation that the submitted
mix design documents and JMF meet the Contract requirements. Within four Business Days following the
delivery of all required documentation, the Contract Administrator shall provide written confirmation that the
mix design and all samples meet the Contract requirements or advise of any requirements that have not
been met.

Confirmation of conformance to Contract requirements of the submitted mix design does not constitute any
guarantee that the mix can be produced or constructed or both to Contract requirements and does not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ensuring the specified quality of Materials and workmanship.

1151.04.02.02 Material Samples

At the written request of the Contract Administrator, one set of material samples representative of those
used for mix design shall be submitted to the laboratory as specified in the Contract Documents. The
materials shall be delivered within two Days of the request made by the Contract Administrator or within two
Days of submission of the mix design to the Contract Administrator, whichever is later.

For the one point mix check, new samples for aggregate density determination shall be submitted within
two Days of submission of the mix check to the Contract Administrator.

Each material sample shall be packaged separately, and each filled sample container shall not exceed a
mass of 30 kg.

The sample quantities are specified in Table 8.

1151.04.02.03 Warm Mix Asphalt

For WMA, the following information shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator in writing with the mix
design:

a) The WMA technology to be used.

b) Complete name and address of the WMA supplier.

c) The type and dosage of WMA additives, if applicable, and how the additives are incorporated.

d) The WMA technology supplier’s established recommendations for usage.

1151.05 MATERIALS

1151.05.01 Asphalt Cement

Asphalt cement shall be performance graded asphalt cement according to OPSS 1101.

1151.05.02 Aggregates

Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1003.

1151.05.02.01 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement

The aggregate contained in the RAP, where permitted in an HMA, shall be according to the aggregate
requirements of OPSS 1003 for the mix type as specified in the Contract Documents.

April 2021 Page 6 of 12 [Link] 1151

Any RAP that is contaminated with deleterious material shall not be used and shall be removed from the
work. The RAP shall be stockpiled conforming to the stockpiling requirements for coarse aggregates
according to OPSS 1001, except that when the material is stockpiled on a compacted granular pad, the top
75 mm of the pad shall be the coarse aggregate that is required for a new (virgin) mixture of the tendered
hot mix item.

The use of RAP that is obtained from existing stockpiles that do not have a foundation conforming to the
above paragraph shall be permitted provided that the bottom 0.3 m of the stockpile is not incorporated into
the work.

Process control sampling and testing of the RAP shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

1151.05.03 Silicone

Silicone oil, when added to the asphalt cement, shall be less than five parts per million of asphalt cement.

1151.05.04 Filler

Filler shall be according to OPSS 1003.

1151.05.05 Fibres

Fibres shall be either cellulose or mineral fibres, and appropriate for use in the SMA mix design, such as
those detailed in QIS 122. The use of rock wool, asbestos, fiberglass, and fibres contained in RST, is
prohibited.

1151.07 PRODUCTION

1151.07.01 Anti-Stripping Treatments

1151.07.01.01 Asphalt Cement Anti-Stripping Treatments

If the AST-AC is added by the asphalt cement supplier at the refinery depot, the Contract Administrator shall
be provided with the AST-AC and PGAC documentation from the asphalt cement supplier in the form of a
weigh bill or bill of lading, confirming the type and concentration of the AST-AC for each tanker of asphalt
cement.

If the AST-AC is added at the HMA plant, the Contract Administrator shall be provided with documentation
from the HMA plant confirming the type and concentration of the AST-AC, accompanied by an approved
statement of calibration for the metering device and a continuous record of the process prior to placement
of mix containing AST-AC for each batch of asphalt cement with AST-AC added.

1151.07.01.02 Aggregate Anti-Stripping Treatments

Aggregate treated and stored from a previous construction season may be used only after the Contract
Administrator agrees to a written proposal that verifies the effectiveness of the stored aggregate. The
proposal shall include the sampling protocol used and test results from those samples that show that the
aggregates meet the moisture sensitivity requirements of this specification.

When hydrated lime or an alternative AST-AGG is used, it shall be added to all aggregates requiring AST
by one of the following processes:

a) Blending During Aggregate Production

April 2021 Page 7 of 12 [Link] 1151

Hydrated lime or an alternative AST-AGG can be mixed with aggregate at the pit or quarry prior to delivery of
the aggregate to the HMA plant. The mixing shall ensure uniform and complete adhesion of the AST-AGG
to the aggregate.

b) Blending at the HMA Plant

The AST-AGG may be homogeneously mixed with aggregate prior to entering the dryer at the HMA plant.
The HMA plant shall be equipped with suitable pumps, mixers and spray bars for introducing the required
quantity of AST-AGG to the aggregates. Mixing shall be accomplished with a pugmill or a drum-type mixer.

Regardless of the process or mixing equipment used, the process shall result in the production of
aggregates that are uniformly and homogeneously coated with the quantity of the AST-AGG as specified in
the Contract Documents, and that are free of clumps and balls prior to entering the dryer at the HMA plant.

1151.07.02 Preparation of the Mixture

Proportioning and mixing of materials shall produce a uniform homogeneous mixture in which all particles
of the aggregate are thoroughly and uniformly coated.

The maximum temperature of the mixture after it is discharged from the mixing chamber shall not exceed
the maximum specified mixing temperature from the mix design by more than 20 °C, to a maximum of
170°C.

April 2021 Page 8 of 12 [Link] 1151

 TABLE 1
Aggregate Gradation

Percentage Passing by Dry Mass of Aggregates

HMA Sieve Size
Type mm
50.0 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2.36 1.18 0.075
Superpave
- - - - 100 95-100 90-100 - 30-60 6-12
4.75
Superpave
- - - - 100 90-100 32-90 32-67 - 2-10
9.5
Superpave
12.5,
50-65 39-58
12.5FC 1 - - - 100 90-100 45-90 - 2-10
(Note 1) (Note 1)
and
12.5FC 2
Superpave
- - 100 90-100 23-90 - - 23-49 - 2-8
19.0
Superpave
- 100 90-100 19-90 - - - 19-45 - 1-7
25.0
Superpave
100 90-100 15-90 - - - - 15-41 - 0-6
37.5
SMA 9.5 - - - - 100 70-95 30-50 20-30 (Note 2) 8-12
SMA 12.5 - - - 100 90-100 50-80 20-35 16-24 8-11
SMA 19.0 - - 100 90-100 50-88 25-60 20-28 16-24 8-11
Notes:
1. For mixes that have been specified in the Contract Documents as coarse graded, the allowable range of
percentage by mass passing the 4.75 mm sieve shall be 45-55, and for the 2.36 mm sieve the allowable
range will be 28-58.

2. For the SMA 9.5 mm, the maximum percentage passing the 1.18 mm, 0.600 mm, and 0.300 mm sieves
is 21, 18, and 15 respectively.

TABLE 2
Superpave Gradation Primary Control Sieve Points

HMA Type Primary Control Sieve PCS Control Point at

mm % Passing
Superpave 4.75 - -
Superpave 9.5 2.36 47
Superpave 12.5, 12.5FC 1, and 12.5FC 2 2.36 39
Superpave 19.0 4.75 47
Superpave 25.0 4.75 40
Superpave 37.5 9.5 47

April 2021 Page 9 of 12 [Link] 1151

 TABLE 3
Superpave HMA Properties

Traffic % of Theoretical VMA VFA Dust to Minimum

Category Maximum Specific % minimum (Note 2) Binder Tensile
(Note 1) Gravity % Ratio Strength
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size
(Note 3) Ratio
mm
%
Ninitial Ndesign Nmax 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75
70-80
A ≤ 91.5
(Note 4)
B ≤ 90.5 65-78
96.0 ≤ 98.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 0.6-1.2 80
C
≤ 89.0 65-75
D
(Note 5) (Note 6)
E
Notes:
1. Traffic category as specified in the Contract Documents.

2. For Traffic categories C, D, and E Superpave 9.5 mixes shall have a VFA range of 73 to 76%, while
Superpave 4.75 mixes shall have a VFA range of 75 to 78%.

3. For Superpave 4.75 mixes, the dust-to-binder ratio shall be 0.9 to 2.0. Superpave mixes with gradations
that pass beneath the PCS Control Point in Table 2, the dust-to-binder ratio shall be 0.8 to 1.6.

4. For Traffic category A, Superpave 25.0 mixes shall have a VFA range of 67 to 80%.

5. The percent of Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity at N initial of ≤ 89.5 shall be permitted at the
Contractor’s option with the understanding that the contractor may be exposed to quality issues related to
constructability including, but not limited to, mix tenderness and stability for paving equipment.

6. Superpave 37.5 mixes shall have a VFA range of 64 to 75%.

TABLE 4
Properties for all SMA Mix Types

% Air Minimum VCA of the Compacted Maximum Draindown at Minimum

Voids VMA Mixture Production Temperature Tensile
(Note 1) % % (Note 2) Strength Ratio
% %
4.0 17 Less than the VCA in the 0.3 70
dry rodded condition.
Notes:
1. SMA mixes shall be designed with 100 gyrations, unless the mix aggregates have an L.A. Abrasion value
according to LS-603 of greater than 30%, then the SMA mix shall be designed with 75 gyrations.

2. Tested according to AASHTO T 305.

April 2021 Page 10 of 12 [Link] 1151

 TABLE 5
SMA Minimum Asphalt Content for
Aggregates with Varying Bulk Specific Gravities

Combined Aggregate Bulk Relative Density Minimum Asphalt Content Based on Mass, %
2.40 6.8
2.45 6.7
2.50 6.6
2.55 6.5
2.60 6.3
2.65 6.2
2.70 6.1
2.75 6.0
2.80 5.9
2.85 5.8
2.90 5.7
2.95 5.6
3.00 5.5

TABLE 6
Maximum % Binder Replacement

Traffic Binder Course Binder Course Surface

Category 150 mm or More Below Within 150 mm of Course
(Note 1) Pavement Surface Pavement Surface
A, B 40% 40% 0%
C, D 40% 20% 0%
E 40% 20% 0%
Notes:
1. Traffic category as specified in the Contract Documents.

April 2021 Page 11 of 12 [Link] 1151

 TABLE 7
One Point Mix Check Requirements

Mix and Aggregate Property Requirements

Gradation of component aggregates For information only
Bulk Relative Density (BRD) of (blended) coarse For information only
aggregate and (blended) fine aggregate, and the
resulting BRD of the combined aggregate
Bulk Relative Density and Maximum Relative Density For information only
of Mix
Air voids at Ndesign  0.5% from submitted mix design
VMA  1.0% from submitted mix design and not less than
contract design minimum
VFA Within specified mix design range
%Gmm at Ninitial Not more than contract design maximum
%Gmm at Nmax Not more than contract design maximum
Dust Proportion Within specified mix design range
Tensile Strength Ratio Not less than 0.8

TABLE 8
Sample Quantities for Mix Design Monitoring

Quantity
Material
(Note 1)
Asphalt Cement 4 litres evenly split between 2 containers
Aggregate 75 to 100 kg of each type
RAP 75 to 100 kg required when RAP contained in the mix
Fines material passing 75 μm sieve 5 to 10 kg when the mix is to be produced with a plant
that returns fines to the mix
Mineral Filler 5 to 10 kg sample for SMA mixes
Any other material samples including anti-stripping Quantity large enough to allow for a complete mix design
agents and fibres to be used in HMA
Notes:
1. Each material sample receptacle shall have a maximum mass of 30 kg.

April 2021 Page 12 of 12 [Link] 1151

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1153
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

EMULSIFIED ASPHALT PATCHING MATERIAL AND
PROPRIETARY COLD PATCHING MATERIAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1153.01 SCOPE

1153.02 REFERENCES

1153.03 DEFINITIONS

1153.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1153.05 MATERIALS

1153.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1153.07 PRODUCTION

1153.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1153.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1153.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for the manufacturing of emulsified asphalt patching material
and proprietary cold patching material (PCPM).

1153.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1003 Aggregates - Hot Mix Asphalt

OPSS 1151 Superpave and Stone Mastic Asphalt Mixtures

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-282 Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Cement and Analysis of Extracted
Aggregate from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
LS-289 Workability of Cold Patching Materials by Blade Resistance Method

November 2022 Page 1 of 5 [Link] 1153

LS-290 Cohesion of Cold Bituminous Patching Materials by Rolling Sieve Method
LS-323 Stripping Resistance of Asphaltic Mixtures by Using Boiling Water

Others

Environment and Climate Change Canada - Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC) Emissions from Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt, February 2017

1153.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the definitions in OPSS 307 apply.

1153.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1153.04.01 Design Requirements

The emulsified asphalt patching material or PCPM shall meet all of the requirements of this specification
and shall maintain its effective properties in stockpile for a minimum period of eight months from the date
of supply.

1153.04.02 Submission Requirements

1153.04.02.01 Emulsified Asphalt Patching Material

The emulsified asphalt patching material mixture composition shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator 7 Days before the start of the production. The following items shall also be included in the
submission:

a) Type and grade of asphalt emulsion, supplier and facility type, and location from which the asphalt
emulsion is being supplied.

b) A statement that the Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of the emulsified asphalt used in the
mix is not more than the limit specified in the Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC) Emissions from Cutback and Emulsified Asphalt.

c) Test results for the asphalt emulsion that demonstrate compliance to the requirements of the Asphalt
Emulsion clause.

d) The aggregate supplier and location from which the aggregates are being supplied.

e) Type of aggregate and test results for the aggregate that demonstrate compliance to the requirements
of the Aggregates clause.

f) Test results for percent of residual asphalt content and percent by mass of patching mixture, when
tested according to LS-282, that demonstrate compliance according to the Composition clause.

g) Testing results for the mixture property tests including stripping resistance, workability and cohesion.

November 2022 Page 2 of 5 [Link] 1153

1153.04.02.02 Proprietary Cold Patching Material

The following shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 7 Days prior to the delivery of the
PCPM:

a) A copy of the manufacturer’s product specification.

b) A statement that the binder used has a Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content not more than the
limit specified in the Code of Practice for the Reduction of Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions
from Cutback Asphalt and Emulsified Asphalt.

c) The aggregate supplier and location from which the aggregates are being supplied.

d) The type of aggregate and test results for the aggregate that demonstrate compliance to the
requirements of General clause of Proprietary Cold Patching Material.

e) Test results for percent of residual asphalt content and percent by mass of patching mixture, when
tested according to LS-282, that demonstrate compliance to the requirements of manufacturer’s product
specification.

f) Testing results for the mixture property tests including stripping resistance, workability and cohesion.

1153.05 MATERIALS

1153.05.01 Emulsified Asphalt Patching Material

1153.05.01.01 Asphalt Emulsion

The asphalt emulsion type shall be selected to ensure compatibility with the aggregates to be used.

1153.05.01.02 Aggregates

The aggregates shall consist of a blend of coarse and fine aggregate such that not less than 85% of the
portion passing a 4.75 mm sieve is natural sand.

The aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable particles according to the physical requirements for
Superpave 12.5 according to OPSS 1003.

Gradation of aggregates used in the patching mixture shall be according to Table 1.

1153.05.01.03 Composition

The patching mixture shall contain between 3.7 to 5.5% residual asphalt content by mass. The percent
residual asphalt shall be expressed as a percentage of the total mix.

The patching mixture shall meet the mixture property testing requirements according to Table 2.

November 2022 Page 3 of 5 [Link] 1153

1153.05.02 Proprietary Cold Patching Material

1153.05.02.01 General

The PCPM shall be according to the manufacturer’s product specification and the mix property testing
requirement specified in Table 2, including the ingredients that were submitted to obtain Owner approval of
the PCPM. The PCPM shall be either a summer or winter mix category as specified in the Contract
Documents. The PCPM shall be supplied directly from the manufacturer’s terminal without further blending
or modification.

The aggregates used in the PCPM shall consist of clean, hard, durable particles meeting the physical
requirements for Superpave 12.5 according to OPSS 1003.

All PCPM supplied shall be uniformly coated.

1153.07 PRODUCTION

1153.07.01 Emulsified Asphalt Patching Material

The mineral aggregates and asphalt emulsion shall be combined and mixed to provide a uniformly coated
and homogeneous product according to Table 1.

Temperature of the emulsion and mixing temperature shall be as specified by the emulsion supplier.

1153.07.02 Proprietary Cold Patching Material

The composition of the mixture, temperature of the emulsion and mixing temperature shall be according to
the manufacturer’s product specification.

November 2022 Page 4 of 5 [Link] 1153

 TABLE 1
Gradation of the Emulsified Asphalt Patching Mixture

MTO Sieve Designation Percentage Passing by Mass

16.0 mm 100

12.5 mm 98 - 100

9.5 mm 85 - 100

4.75 mm 50 - 85

2.36 mm 35 - 65

1.18 mm 25 - 50

0.600 mm 15 - 40

0.300 mm 7 - 25

0.150 mm 2 - 13

0.075 mm 0-7

TABLE 2
Mixture Property Testing Requirements

Mixture Testing Acceptance Acceptable Rejectable

Property Method Parameter Limit Limit

Stripping
LS-323 Percent Coating ≥ 75% < 75%
Resistance

Workability LS-289 Workability Index ≤ 2,000 N > 2,000 N

Cohesion LS-290 Cohesion Index ≥ 60% < 60%

November 2022 Page 5 of 5 [Link] 1153

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1202
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2020

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

BEARINGS - ELASTOMERIC PLAIN AND STEEL LAMINATED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1202.01 SCOPE

1202.02 REFERENCES

1202.03 DEFINITIONS

1202.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1202.05 MATERIALS

1202.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1202.07 PRODUCTION

1202.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1202.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL – Not Used

1202.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for Materials, design, and fabrication of plain and steel-
laminated elastomeric bearings for bridges and for approach slab bearings and ballast wall bearings.

1202.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-427 Method of Test for Compressive Deformation of Plain Bearings
LS-428 Method of Test for Compressive Deformation of Laminated Bearings
LS-429 Method of Test for Measurement of Tolerances for Steel Laminated Bearings

Structural Manual:
Division 1 - Exceptions to the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code CSA S6 for Ontario

CSA Standards

S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

November 2020 Page 1 of 8 [Link] 1202

ASTM International

D395-18 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set

D412-16 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
Tension
D429-14 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid Substrates
D573-04 (2019) Standard Test Method for Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven
D1149-18 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Cracking in an Ozone
Controlled Environment
D2240-15e1 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
D4014-03 (2018) Standard Specification for Plain and Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearings for
Bridges

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M251-06 (2016) Plain and Laminated Elastomeric Bridge Bearings

1202.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Effective Elastomer Thickness means the sum of the thickness of all layers of elastomer, excluding the
outer top and bottom layers of the laminated bearings.

Elastomer means a compound containing virgin natural polyisoprene (natural rubber).

Laminated Bearing means a bearing composed of elastomer laminates separated by and fully bonded to
steel plates.

Plain Bearing means a bearing, which consists wholly of elastomer.

Plan Dimension means the dimensions of an object, when viewed perpendicular to the top of the object.

1202.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1202.04.01 Design Requirements

1202.04.01.01 Design

The bearings, including any fasteners or dowels, shall be designed according to CSA S6 and the
Structural Manual, Division 1.

1202.04.01.02 Elastomer Thickness

The effective elastomer thickness for plain bearings shall be greater than or equal to 15 mm and less than
or equal to 25 mm.

All internal layers of elastomer in a laminated elastomeric bearing shall have the same thickness.

November 2020 Page 2 of 8 [Link] 1202

1202.04.01.03 Steel Thickness

The minimum and maximum nominal thickness of the internal steel plates for laminated bearings shall be
3 mm and 5 mm respectively, except bearings with an area that is 0.25 m 2 or larger shall have internal
steel plates of 5 mm nominal thickness. All internal steel plates in a bearing shall be the same thickness,
and each plate’s thickness shall be uniform.

1202.04.01.04 Compressive Deformation

Compressive deformation of laminated elastomeric bearings shall not exceed 0.05 of the effective
elastomer thickness when tested according to LS-428 and this specification.

Compressive deformation of plain elastomeric bearings shall not exceed 0.06 of the effective elastomer
thickness when tested according to LS-427 and this specification.

1202.04.02 Submission Requirements

1202.04.02.01 General

Within 30 Days of the Contract award, the name and address of the supplier and manufacturer of the
bearings shall be submitted in writing to the Contract Administrator.

Change Proposal shall bear the seal and signature of the design and checking Engineers.

When another authority is involved, all submissions shall be made a minimum of 35 Days prior to the
commencement of work.

1202.04.02.02 Working Drawings

At least seven Days prior to commencement of bearing fabrication, one hardcopy set and one electronic
PDF copy of Working Drawings for the bearings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for
information purposes only. An Engineer shall affix their seal and signature on the Working Drawings
verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

A sealed and signed copy of these drawings shall be kept on site prior to and during the installation of the
bearings.

These drawings shall clearly indicate the following:

a) Specified bearing design data (Dead Load and Total Load at SLS and ULS, movement at SLS,
rotation at SLS).

b) The number and thickness of internal steel plates.

c) Compressive stiffness.

d) Shear stiffness at 20 °C and -40° C.

e) Bearing alphanumeric identification.

1202.04.02.03 Manufacturer’s Certification

Upon completion of fabrication and prior to installation of the bearings, a certificate of compliance signed
by the manufacturer, shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator. The certificate of compliance shall
include test results according to Table 1 and shall state that the fabricated bearings are according to the
Working Drawings and Contract Documents.

November 2020 Page 3 of 8 [Link] 1202

1202.05 MATERIALS

1202.05.01 General

Reclaimed material shall not be incorporated in the finished bearing.

1202.05.02 Materials for Elastomeric Plain and Steel Laminated Bearings

1202.05.02.01 Steel

Internal steel plates for laminated bearings shall be according to CSA S6.

1202.05.02.02 Elastomers

Elastomers shall be according to the following:

a) Virgin natural polyisoprene elastomer shall be the only raw polymer permitted.

b) The physical properties of any polyisoprene used shall be according to the requirements of Table 1.

1202.05.03 Approach Slab Bearings and Ballast Wall Bearings

The physical properties of elastomer used for the manufacture of approach slab bearings or ballast wall
bearings shall be according to the following:

a) Hardness, when tested according to ASTM D2240 shall be 55 +10 / -5 Shore A.

b) Minimum tensile strength shall be 15 MPa, when tested according to ASTM D412, Method A.

c) Minimum ultimate elongation shall be 400%, when tested according to ASTM D412, Method A.

1202.07 PRODUCTION

1202.07.01 Plain Bearings

Plain bearing pads shall be moulded individually, cut from moulded strips or slabs of the required
thickness, or extruded and cut to length.

1202.07.02 Laminated Bearings

Laminated bearings shall be moulded under pressure as a single unit and heated in moulds that have a
smooth surface finish.

Steel plates shall be according to the following:

a) Internal steel plates shall be free from sharp edges.

b) Steel plates shall be completely bonded on all surfaces to the elastomeric material during molding.
The cover on the vertical side surfaces shall be 6 mm. The cover on the top and bottom surfaces
shall be 5 mm, except that no cover is required over pintle holes.

c) When pintles are specified in the Contract Documents, the depth of pintle holes shall be such that the
pintle engages only one steel plate through the entire thickness of the plate.

November 2020 Page 4 of 8 [Link] 1202

Elastomer laminates shall be of uniform thickness.

1202.07.03 Identification

Each laminated elastomeric bearing shall be marked with the date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd) and
an individual alphanumeric identification. The alphanumeric identification shall consist of the designated
identification letter of the supplier and source followed by the letter I for polyisoprene and a five-digit
number. Bearings shall be sequentially numbered. The characters shall be not less than 10 mm in height,
stamped or engraved into two adjacent sides, with the indentations or protrusions not less than 1 mm in
width and 1 mm in depth.

Plain, approach slab and ballast wall bearings shall be marked every 1 m with the name of manufacturer,
the date of manufacture, and the lot number.

1202.07.04 Tolerances

Tolerances shall be according to Table 2.

1202.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1202.08.01 General

Bearings shall be acceptable if they meet the requirements of this specification.

[Link] Acceptance of Physical Properties of Elastomers for Laminated and Plain

Bearings

Bearing physical properties shall be acceptable if they meet the requirements of Table 1 of this
specification.

1202.08.02.01 Referee Testing of Physical Properties of Elastomers for Laminated and

Plain Bearing

A written request may be submitted for referee testing the physical properties of elastomers for any
sample within five Business Days of receiving notification of rejection of the lot. Referee testing shall be
done on the remaining piece of sample representing the failed acceptance test result. The results of the
referee test shall be used for acceptance determination and shall be binding on both parties. If the referee
testing results in rejection of the lot, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the referee testing. If the referee
testing results in the material passing all test criteria, the referee testing charge shall be paid by the
Owner.

1202.08.03 Acceptance of Compressive Deformation

1202.08.03.01 Compressive Deformation of Laminated Bearings

The method of testing bearings shall be according to LS-428. The increment in compressive deformation
of laminated bearings shall not exceed 5% of the effective elastomer thickness, when the bearing load is
increased from an initial pressure of 1.5 MPa to a pressure of 7 MPa.

1202.08.03.02 Compressive Deformation of Plain Bearings

The method of testing of plain bearings shall be according to LS-427. The increment in compressive
deformation of plain bearings shall not exceed 6% of the thickness of the bearing when the bearing load
is increased from an initial pressure of 20% of the average pressure to the average pressure, and not
greater than 7 MPa.

November 2020 Page 5 of 8 [Link] 1202

1202.08.03.03 Compressive Deformation Referee Testing

A written request may be submitted for referee testing of compressive deformation within five Business
Days of receiving notification of rejection of the lot. Referee testing shall be done on the same sample.
The results of the referee test shall be used for acceptance determination and shall be binding on both
parties. If the referee testing results in rejection of the lot, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the referee
testing. If the referee testing results in the material passing all test criteria, the referee testing charge shall
be paid by the Owner.

1202.08.04 Acceptance of Approach Slab Bearings and Ballast Wall Bearings

Approach slab bearings and ballast wall bearings shall be acceptable if properties meet the requirements
of this specification.

November 2020 Page 6 of 8 [Link] 1202

 TABLE 1
Physical Requirements for Polyisoprene

Property Test Polyisoprene Requirements

Shear modulus GRT, MPa @ 20 °C ASTM D4014, Annex A1, as

0.80 ± 0.15
(Note 1) modified by AASHTO M251

Not more than 3 times the

Shear modulus GLT, MPa @ - 40 °C ASTM D4014, Annex A1, as
value at room temperature
(Note 2) modified by AASHTO M251
GLT ≤ 3 GRT

Tensile strength, MPa ASTM D412, Method A minimum 17.0

Ultimate elongation, % ASTM D412, Method A minimum 400

Heat resistance ASTM D573 70 h at 70 °C

Change in hardness, Shore A ASTM D2240 maximum + 10

Change in tensile strength, % ASTM D412, Method A maximum - 25

Change in ultimate elongation, % ASTM D412, Method A maximum - 25

Compression set, % (Note 3) ASTM D395, Method B 22 h at 70 °C maximum 25

ASTM D1149, Method B,

25 pphm, 48 h
Ozone Resistance Procedure B1
no cracks
20% strain, 40 ± 2 °C

Peel bond test, N/mm ASTM D429, Method B minimum 7.0

Note:
1. Shear Modulus shall be determined at ambient temperature in accordance with ASTM D4014
Annex A1 modified as follows: the initial cycles shall be taken to a strain of 0.7 and on the last
cycle the shear modulus shall be determined at 0.5 strain.

2. Shear Modulus testing shall be performed with the test specimen in an enclosed freezer unit
capable of maintaining the specified conditioning temperature. A ± 25 percent strain cycle shall be
applied for a period of 100 seconds. The first three-quarter cycle of strain shall be discarded and
the shear modulus shall be determined by the slope of the force deflection curve for the next half
cycle of loading.

3. All test specimens of steel laminated bearings used for compression set test ASTM D395, Method
B, shall be prepared from the representative bearing pads and may consist of a single layer or
multiple layers of elastomer.

November 2020 Page 7 of 8 [Link] 1202

 TABLE 2
Tolerances

Criteria Tolerance

Bearing thickness ≤ 40 mm 0 to + 3 mm

Bearing thickness > 40 mm 0 to + 6 mm

Bearing plan dimension 0 to + 6 mm

Thickness of individual measurement of each elastomer layer according to

± 20% of design value
LS-429

Top and bottom 1 in 200

Deviation from plane parallel to theoretical
surface:
Sides 1 in 100

Cover to embedded steel on vertical side surfaces -1.0 to + 4.0 mm

Cover to embedded steel on top and bottom surfaces -1.0 to +2.0 mm

Pintle hole diameter 0 to + 2 mm

Position of pintle holes relative to each other ± 2 mm

November 2020 Page 8 of 8 [Link] 1202

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1203
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2020

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

BEARINGS - ROTATIONAL AND SLIDING SURFACE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1203.01 SCOPE

1203.02 REFERENCES

1203.03 DEFINITIONS

1203.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1203.05 MATERIALS

1203.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1203.07 PRODUCTION

1203.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1203.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL – Not Used

1203.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for Materials, design, and fabrication of rotational and sliding
surface bearings for bridges.

1203.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 906 Structural Steel for Bridges

OPSS 911 Coating Structural Steel Systems

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1202 Bearings - Elastomeric Plain and Steel-Laminated

November 2020 Page 1 of 11 [Link] 1203

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual:
Division 1, Exceptions to the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code CAN/CSA S6 for Ontario

CSA Standards

B95-1962 (R2002) Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness and Lay)

G40.20-13/40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel
/Structural Quality Steel
S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
S157-17 Strength Design in Aluminium
W48-18 Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction (metal Arc Welding)

ASTM International

A240-19 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
B36-18 Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Roller Bar
B137-95(2014) Standard Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area on
Anodically Coated Aluminium
B487-85(2013) Standard Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide Coating Thickness
by Microscopical Examination of a Cross Section
D395-18 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Compression Set
D412-16 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
Tension
D429-14 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid Substrates
D638-14 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D792-13 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement
D2240-15e1 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
D4894-19 Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and
Ram Extrusion Materials
F2329-15 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to
Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded
Fasteners
F3125-19 Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel
and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum
Tensile Strength

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

B4.1-1967 (R2009) Preferred Limits and Fits for Cylindrical Parts

U.S. Military Specifications

SAE AS 8660 Silicone Compound Nato Code Number S-736

1203.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

November 2020 Page 2 of 11 [Link] 1203

Disc Bearing means a bearing consisting of a single moulded disc of unreinforced elastomer confined by
upper and lower steel bearing plates and restricted from horizontal movement by limiting rings and a
centrally located shear restriction mechanism.

Elastomer means a compound containing virgin natural polyisoprene (natural rubber) for confined
elastomeric bearings or polyether urethane polymer for disc bearings.

Plan Dimension means the dimensions of an object, when viewed perpendicular to the top of the object.

Pot Bearing means a bearing consisting of a metal piston supported by a single moulded disc of
unreinforced elastomer that is confined within a metal cylinder.

Product Drawings means drawings prepared by the manufacturer that have been approved by the
Owner for use with the product.

PTFE means polytetrafluoroethylene polymer.

Spherical Bearing means a bearing consisting of a curved spherical metal surface in contact with and
sliding on a matching curved sliding surface.

Substructure means the abutments, piers, columns, and other components of a bridge below the
bearings.

Superstructure means all parts of a bridge above the bearings.

1203.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1203.04.01 Design Requirements

1203.04.01.01 Design

All components of the bearings, including fasteners and sliding materials, shall be designed according to
the requirements of CSA S6 and Structural Manual, Division 1.

Bearings subject to uplift shall limit the separation of the bearing components to the value specified in the
Contract Documents.

1203.04.01.02 Translations and Rotation

Provision for rotation about any horizontal axis shall be by means of a single disc of confined elastomer
for pot bearings, a single disc of polyether urethane polymer compound for disc bearings, and a spherical
sliding surface of stainless steel or anodized aluminium alloy against a sliding surface for spherical
bearings.

The rotational capacity about any horizontal axis shall be the rotation caused by ultimate limit states loads
plus 0.02 radians.

The rotational capacity about the vertical axis through the centre of the bearing shall be a minimum of
0.02 radians, unless specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

November 2020 Page 3 of 11 [Link] 1203

For bearings that are not restrained in the longitudinal direction, the bearings shall accommodate the
design movements at Serviceability Limit States (SLS) plus 25 mm in each direction, but no less than 50
mm in each direction. For bearings that are not restrained in the transverse direction, the bearings shall
accommodate the design movements at SLS plus 5 mm in each direction, but not less than 10 mm in
each direction.

Brass sealing rings shall have a rectangular cross-section.

The depth of the pot wall shall be such that a minimum vertical distance of 2.5 mm remains between the
top of the pot wall and the closest point of contact of the sealing rings with the pot wall upon rotating the
piston about any horizontal axis to the maximum rotation at ultimate limit states (ULS) plus 0.02 radians.

The pot and piston surfaces in contact with the confined elastomer shall be lubricated with silicone
grease. The bearing shall be sealed by a one-piece continuous preformed closed-cell compressible ring
against entry of dirt, dust, and moisture between the elastomer and the pot and piston contact surfaces.
Any joint in the ring shall be bonded and the strength shall be at least equal to the strength of the ring.

For disc bearings, the upper and lower plates in contact with the elastomer shall be provided with outer
limiting rings to restrict the horizontal movement of the elastomer and a centrally located shear restriction
mechanism.

1203.04.01.03 Sliding Surfaces

1203.[Link] Geometric Requirements

The metal surface shall overlap the sliding material by at least 5 mm at extremes of movement. The metal
surface shall be positioned above the sliding material element except for guides for lateral restraint.

1203.[Link] Polytetrafluoroethylene Polymer Layer

Except when used as mating surfaces for guides for lateral restraint, PTFE resin shall be virgin material
and shall be used as unfilled sheets and shall contain spherical reservoirs for lubricant pressed into its
surface.

Material used as mating surface for guides for lateral restraint shall not be dimpled or lubricated.

1203.[Link] Lubrication

All PTFE surfaces except those that act as mating surfaces for guides for lateral restraint or that are
subject to a contact pressure of less than 5 MPa shall be permanently lubricated with silicone grease.

1203.[Link] Contact Pressure

The average contact pressure at serviceability limit state loads for filled PTFE elements used to face
mating surfaces for guides for lateral restraint shall not exceed the following:

a) PTFE filled with up to 15% by mass of glass fibres, 45 MPa.

b) Lead filled PTFE in a bronze matrix, 140 MPa.

1203.04.01.04 Guides for Lateral Restraint

Unless the guide bars are machined to form an integral part of the top plate, they shall be recessed
greater than 5 mm into the plate to which they are attached and fastened with bolts.

November 2020 Page 4 of 11 [Link] 1203

The translational elements of guides for lateral restraint shall be faced with stainless steel and shall
provide lateral restraint by sliding against mating surfaces faced with either PTFE or another Approved
sliding material. Lead filled PTFE shall be at least 2 mm thick and shall be mechanically fastened and
bonded to the substrate. Glass filled or virgin PTFE shall be recessed and bonded to the substrate.

1203.04.01.05 Top and Base Plates

The top and base plates that are permanently attached to the structure shall be provided with the
bearings.

1203.04.01.06 Fasteners and Anchorage

Fasteners used to attach the bearing to the top and base plates and the anchorage devices shall be
capable of resisting lateral loads as specified in the Contract Documents.

The beneficial effect of friction shall be neglected in proportioning the fasteners and anchors.

1203.04.01.07 Bearing Assembly Replacement

The entire bearing assembly, except for the top plate used to attach it to the superstructure and the base
plate used to anchor it to the substructure but including both contact surfaces of the sliding interface, shall
be replaceable without damage to the structure and without removal of any concrete, welds, or
anchorages permanently attached to the structure and without lifting the superstructure more than 5 mm.
Bearings shall not be recessed into plates that are permanently attached to the structure.

1203.04.01.08 Durability

Bearings shall be designed to prevent moisture and dirt from entering the internal surfaces.

Contact between dissimilar metals that could have corrosion potential and between the aluminium alloy
and concrete shall be prevented by use of suitable insulation.

1203.04.01.09 Concrete Bearing Pressure

For bearings subject to compressive loading, the top plate and the base plate shall be designed to ensure
the average concrete bearing pressure does not exceed 24 MPa at the ultimate limit states providing the
following:

a) Concrete on which the plate is supported has a specified nominal 28-Day compressive strength of at
least 30 MPa.

b) Edges of the plates are located a minimum of 100 mm from the edge of the concrete.

c) The largest dimension of plate does not exceed 1,000 mm.

Alternatively, the top plate and the base plate of the bearing shall be designed to ensure the factored
bearing resistance of concrete specified in CSA S6 and the Structural Manual, Division 1, is not
exceeded.

November 2020 Page 5 of 11 [Link] 1203

1203.04.02 Submission Requirements

1203.04.02.01 General

Within 30 Days of the Contract award, the name and address of the supplier of the bearings shall be
submitted in writing to the Contract Administrator.

Proposals shall bear the seal and signature of the design and checking Engineers.

When another authority is involved, all submissions shall be made a minimum of 35 Days prior to the
commencement of work.

1203.04.02.02 Working Drawings

At least seven Days prior to commencement of bearing fabrication, one hardcopy and one electronic PDF
copy of Working Drawings for the bearings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for
information purposes only. An Engineer shall affix his or her seal and signature on the Working Drawings
verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents.

The Working Drawings shall be according to the Contract Documents and Product Drawings.

The Working Drawings shall clearly indicate all material properties, dimensions, connection attachments,
fasteners and accessories, the bearing alphanumeric identification, and the load capacity at the
serviceability and ultimate limit states as follows:

a) Maximum vertical permanent and total load.

b) Maximum lateral load and corresponding vertical load.

c) Maximum rotational capacity about any horizontal axis and about the vertical axis at the centre of the
bearing.

The bearing supplier shall have a copy of the Working Drawings at the manufacturing plant prior to and
during the bearing fabrication.

1203.04.02.03 Mill Test Certificates

Mill test certificates shall be submitted and shall be according OPSS 906 Mill Test Certificates
clause.

1203.04.02.04 Test Reports for Fasteners

Test reports for fasteners shall be submitted and shall be according OPSS 906 Test Reports for
Fasteners clause.

1203.04.02.05 Manufacturer’s Certification

Upon completion of fabrication and prior to installation of the bearings, a certificate of compliance signed
by the manufacturer shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator. The certificate of compliance shall
state that the fabricated bearings are according to the Working Drawings, Product Drawings, and
Contract Documents.

November 2020 Page 6 of 11 [Link] 1203

1203.05 MATERIALS

1203.05.01 Steel

Steel components shall be according to OPSS 906, Grades 300W or 350W, except for components
permanently attached to steel superstructures, which shall be Grade 350A.

Stainless steel for sliding surfaces shall have a minimum corrosion resistance according to ASTM A240,
Type 304.

Steel fasteners shall be Grade A325M according to ASTM F3125 and hot-dipped galvanized according to
ASTM F2329. For guide bars, alternative steel fasteners and corrosion protection systems shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

Stud shear connectors shall be according to CSA W59 Annex H, Type B.

1203.05.02 Aluminium Alloy

Aluminium alloy shall be according to CSA S157.

1203.05.03 Brass

Brass sealing rings for confined elastomer bearings shall be according to ASTM B36, half-hard.

1203.05.04 Elastomers

Polyisoprene shall be according to OPSS 1202 Table 1 except the shear modulus shall be between 0.65
and 0.80 MPa.

Polyether urethane polymer shall be according to Table 1.

1203.05.05 Sliding Materials

PTFE used in sliding surfaces shall be virgin, according to ASTM D4894. The PTFE shall be unfilled and
according to Table 2.

Material used as the mating surface for guides for lateral restraint may be one of the following:

a) Unfilled PTFE.

b) PTFE filled with up to 25% by mass of glass fibres.

c) Lead filled PTFE in a bronze matrix.

Sliding materials other than PTFE shall be from the same material supplier and shall be the same
material composition as specified on the product drawings.

1203.05.06 Lubricant

Lubricant for PTFE shall be silicone grease according to SAE AS8660.

Lubricant for other sliding materials shall be as specified by the manufacturer and shall be the same
lubricant used during the testing of the sliding material.

November 2020 Page 7 of 11 [Link] 1203

1203.05.07 Adhesives

Adhesives for bonding sliding materials to metal shall produce a bond with a minimum peel strength of
3.6 N/mm. Adhesives shall not degrade in the service environment and shall be compatible with both the
substrate and the sliding material.

1203.07 PRODUCTION

1203.07.01 Welding

Welding of structural quality steels shall be according to CSA W59.

All welding shall be done with electrodes certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of
CSA W48.

Stainless steel sheets that come in contact with sliding materials shall be one piece continuously welded
around the perimeter to its backing plate to prevent ingress of moisture. The weld shall be clean, uniform,
and without overlaps and located outside the area in contact with the sliding material.

1203.07.02 Fasteners

The threaded portion of the bolts shall be coated with silicone grease prior to installation.

1203.07.03 Anchors

The top and base plate anchorage to concrete shall be by studs approved by the Owner that are fusion
welded to the plates.

1203.07.04 Machining

Metal to metal contact surfaces shall be machined or fine ground. The pots and pistons for confined
elastomer bearings and the upper and lower plates with limiting rings for disc bearings shall be machined
from solid metal plate or castings. The concave and convex plates for spherical bearings shall be
machined from solid metal plate or castings.

There shall be no openings or discontinuities in the metal surfaces in contact with the elastomer or sliding
material.

1203.07.05 Roughness of Metal Surfaces

The roughness of sliding stainless steel metallic surfaces in contact with a sliding material, measured
according to CSA B95, shall not be greater than 0.25 μm arithmetic average for plane surfaces and 0.50
μm arithmetic average for spherical surfaces. The roughness of anodized aluminium metallic surfaces
shall not be greater than 0.40 μm arithmetic average.

The roughness of metal surfaces in contact with elastomer measured according to CSA B95 shall not be
greater than 3.0 μm arithmetic average.

1203.07.06 Attachment of Sliding Surfaces

Virgin or glass filled PTFE elements shall be recessed in a rigid backing material and shall be bonded
over the entire area with an adhesive. The rigid backing material shall be grit blasted prior to applying the
adhesive.

November 2020 Page 8 of 11 [Link] 1203

Lead filled PTFE shall be mechanically fastened and bonded to the backing plates.

The PTFE elements used as mating surfaces for guides for lateral restraint shall extend to within 10 mm
from the ends of the backing plates.

Other sliding materials shall be recessed in a rigid backing and shall be bonded over the entire area with
an adhesive.

1203.07.07 Anodizing

Aluminium alloy surfaces shall be anodized using the sulphuric acid process and shall meet the
requirements in Table 3.

1203.07.08 Corrosion Protection

All exposed metal corners that receive corrosion protection shall have a 3 mm rounding. All exposed
metal surfaces of the bearings, except stainless steel and components permanently attached to steel
superstructures, shall be protected against corrosion by a low volatile organic compound coating system
according to OPSS 911. The continuous weld attaching the stainless steel sheet shall be ground smooth
and have the same corrosion protection as the bearing. Steel fasteners shall be galvanized or as
specified in the Contract Documents.

For corrosion protection purposes, bearing components permanently attached to steel superstructures
shall be considered part of the structural steel.

1203.07.09 Identification

Each bearing shall be marked with the date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd) and an individual
alphanumeric identification. The alphanumeric identification shall consist of the designated identification
letter of the supplier and source followed by a sequential five digit number. The characters shall be
stamped or engraved into two adjacent sides and shall be clearly legible after installation. The characters
shall not be less than 10 mm in height with the indentations not less than 1 mm in width and 0.5 mm in
depth.

1203.07.10 Tolerances

The deviation from flatness of sliding surfaces shall not exceed:

a) 0.2 mm, when the diameter or diagonal is equal to or less than 800 mm.

b) 0.00025 of the diameter or diagonal, when the diameter or diagonal is greater than 800 mm.

The deviation from flatness of stainless steel or aluminium alloy surfaces in contact with sliding materials
for plane surfaces and from the theoretical surface for spherical surfaces shall not exceed:

a) 0.0003 LH mm for a rectangular sliding element.

b) 0.0006 RH mm for a circular sliding element

where:

L = the greater plan dimension for a rectangular bearing,

R = the radius of a circular bearing, and,
H = the free height of sliding element

November 2020 Page 9 of 11 [Link] 1203

For confined elastomer bearings, the tolerance of fit between the piston and the pot shall be + 0.75 to +
1.25 mm. The inside diameter of the pot cylinder shall be the same as the nominal diameter of the
elastomer and shall be machined to a tolerance of:

a) 0 to + 0.125 mm for diameters up to and including 500 mm.

b) 0 to + 0.175 mm for diameters over 500 mm.

For disc bearings, the gap between the edge of the polyether urethane polymer disc and the inside face
of the limiting ring shall be 1.25% ± 0.25% of the diameter of the disc.

The plan dimensions of the recess for the sliding material shall be the same as the nominal plan
dimensions of the material and shall be machined to a tolerance of 0 to + 0.2% of the diameter or
diagonal.

Overall bearing plan dimension ± 3 mm

Overall bearing height ± 3 mm

Machined surface dimensions ± 0.4 mm

Elastomer:
Diameter a) 0.0 to -1.5 mm for diameters ≤ 500 mm
b) 0.0 to -2.0 mm for diameters > 500 mm

Thickness 0.0 to + 1.0 mm

Brass rings:
Difference between internal diameter of brass ring and diameter
of recess in the moulded elastomer 0 to + 0.5 mm

Difference between sum of thicknesses of brass rings and recess

depth in the moulded elastomer 0 to + 0.25 mm

Recessed Guide Bars - American Standard Clearance Locational Fit

Class LC3 according to ANSI B4.1.

Guides for Lateral Restraint - Gap between metal restraints surfaces

and mating PTFE elements 0.50 mm ± 0.25
mm

Sliding material plan dimension 0 to - 0.2% of diameter or diagonal

Sliding material thickness 0 to + 10.0% of thickness

Depth of recess for sliding material 0 to + 0.3 mm

November 2020 Page 10 of 11 [Link] 1203

 TABLE 1
Physical Requirements for Polyether Urethane Polymer

Requirements
Physical Property ASTM Test Methods
Minimum Maximum

Hardness, Scale D D 2240 60 64

Tensile Stress, MPa

@ 100% elongation D 412 14 --
@ 200% elongation 26 --

Tensile Strength, MPa D 412 35 --

Ultimate Elongation, % D 412 220 --

Compression Set, %
D 395 -- 40
22 h @ 70 °C

TABLE 2
Physical Requirements for Polytetrafluoroethylene Polymer

Physical Property ASTM Test Method Requirement

Tensile Strength, MPa D 638 minimum 20

Elongation, % D 638 minimum 200

Relative Density D 792 2.16 ± 0.03

TABLE 3
Requirements for Anodizing of Aluminium Alloy Surfaces

Physical Property of
Units Test Method Requirements
Sealed Anodic Coating
Thickness, t μm ASTM B 487 25 minimum
Mass, w mg/ cm2 5.8 minimum
ASTM B 137
Apparent density, d g/ cm3 2.32 minimum
The apparent density shall be determined as: d = 10 w
t

November 2020 Page 11 of 11 [Link] 1203

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1205
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2015

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CLAY SEAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1205.01 SCOPE

1205.02 REFERENCES

1205.03 DEFINITIONS

1205.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1205.05 MATERIALS

1205.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1205.07 PRODUCTION - Not Used

1205.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1205.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

APPENDICES

1205-A Commentary

1205.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements of clay seal material for use at the upstream or inlet side of
culverts.

1205.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2015 [Link] 1205

1205.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1205.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1010 Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.

ASTM International

D 4318-10 Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
D 5084-10 Permeability of Saturated Soils Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter

1205.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification the following definitions apply:

Bentonite means a commercial term applied to clay deposits containing sodium montmorillonite as the
essential mineral.

Clay means a fine textured (i.e., grain size smaller than 0.002 mm) sedimentary or residual deposit
consisting of hydrated silicates of aluminum mixed with various impurities, but no organics. It is a cohesive
soil and plastic within a wide range of water content.

Geosynthetic Clay Liner means sodium bentonite soils sandwiched between two protective geotextiles.

Liquid Limit means the water content between the semi-liquid and the plastic states of the soil.

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2015 [Link] 1205

Plastic Limit means the water content between the plastic and semi-solid states of the soil.

Plasticity Index means the water content range of a soil at which it is plastic, defined numerically as the
liquid limit minus the plastic limit.

1205.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1205.04.01 Submission Requirements

1205.04.01.01 Natural Clay

The results of the Atterberg Limit Tests (Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index) on the natural clay shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator at least one week prior to the commencement of work. The
Atterberg Limits shall be determined using ASTM D 4318.

1205.04.01.02 Clay Mixture

The results of the Atterberg Limit Tests (Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index) and permeability tests on the clay
mixture shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least one week prior to the commencement of
work. The Atterberg Limits shall be determined using ASTM D 4318. The permeability shall be according to
ASTM D 5084.

1205.04.01.03 Geosynthetic Clay Liner

Material specifications containing the physical, mechanical, and hydraulic properties of the geosynthetic clay
liner shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted to the Contract Administrator. The specification
shall include the manufacturer’s certification and warranty.

1205.05 MATERIAL

1205.05.01 General

Material used shall have plasticity index and liquid limit percentages that are within the hatched area shown
in Figure 1. It shall be natural clay, clay mixture, or a geosynthetic clay liner and shall meet the physical
requirements as specified below.

1205.05.02 Natural Clay

Not all clays are suitable for use as clay seal. Clay material shall be according to the following:

a) Liquid limit shall be > 50%.

b) Plasticity index shall be > 0.75 x (Liquid Limit - 20%).

1205.05.03 Clay Mixture

A mixture of clay and other materials can be used, provided that they meet the physical properties for
natural clay and the permeability as determined from the falling head permeameter test does not exceed 1 x
-5
10 mm/s.

1205.05.04 Geosynthetic Clay Liner

-5
The geosynthetic clay liner shall have a permeability not exceeding 1 x 10 mm/s.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2015 [Link] 1205

 PLASTICITY INDEX %

LIQUID LIMIT %

FIGURE 1
Plasticity Chart

LEGEND:

Soil Classifications

CH - Inorganic Clays of High Plasticity, Fat Clays

CI - Inorganic Silty Clays of Medium Plasticity
CL - Inorganic Silty Clays, Gravelly Clays, Sandy Clays, lean Clays
MH - Inorganic Silts, Highly Compressible Micaceous or Diatomaceous Fine Sandy Silts, Elastic Silts
MI - Inorganic Compressible Fine Sandy Silt With Clay of Medium Plasticity, Clayey Silts
ML - Inorganic Silts and Sandy Silts of Slight Plasticity, Rock Flour
OH - Organic Clays of High Plasticity
OI - Organic Silty Clays of Medium Plasticity
OL - Organic Silt of Low Plasticity, Organic Sandy Silts

Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2015 [Link] 1205

Appendix 1205-A, April 2015
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 04/2015 [Link] 1205

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1210
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2020

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

DECK JOINT ASSEMBLIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1210.01 SCOPE

1210.02 REFERENCES

1210.03 DEFINITIONS

1210.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1210.05 MATERIALS

1210.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1210.07 PRODUCTION

1210.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1210.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1210.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for Materials, design, and fabrication of deck joint assemblies.

1210.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 906 Structural Steel for Bridges

OPSS 920 Deck Joint Assemblies, Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers, Joint Seals, Joint Sealing
Compounds, and Waterstops - Structures

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1202 Bearings - Elastomeric Plain and Steel Laminated

OPSS 1203 Bearings - Rotational and Sliding Surface

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual:
Division 1, Exceptions to the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code CAN/CSA S6 for Ontario

November 2020 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 1210

CSA Standards

S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

W47.1-09 (R2019) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

ASTM International

A123-17 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
A240-18 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Application
D412-16a Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
Tension
D471-16a Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids
D573- 04(2015) Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration in an Air Oven
D832-07 (2018) Standard Practice for Rubber Conditioning for Low Temperature Testing
D1149-18 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Cracking in an Ozone Controlled
Environment
D2240-15 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
F835-13 Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head
Cap Screws
F2329-15 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to
Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded
Fasteners
F3125/F3125M-19 Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel,
Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength

1210.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Armouring means an edging to the deck joint comprising of a steel angle or steel plate permanently
attached to the concrete dam corners.

Armouring Angle means the expansion joint angle at the gap.

Bearing means a structural device that transmits load while permitting translation or rotation or both.

Elastomer means a compound containing virgin polychloroprene (neoprene).

Manufacturer means a fabrication company that is certified according to CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2.

Nosing Angle means the angle that forms the outside edges of the joint blockout.

Preformed Seal means an extruded elastomer that, when retained in recesses in the deck joint
assembly, prevents the passage of water and other materials.

Separation Beam means a steel section which conveys wheel loads that spans between support bars.

Support Bar means a member upon which a traffic bearing separation beam rests.

November 2020 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 1210

1210.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1210.04.01 Design Requirements

1210.04.01.01 General

Deck joint assemblies shall be designed to function satisfactorily under the critical combinations of loads,
translations, and rotations according to CSA S6 and the Structural Manual, Division 1.

1210.04.01.02 Modular Expansion Joints

Loading for modular joints shall be as specified in the Structural Manual, Division 1.

Modular joints shall be equipped with a mechanism capable of ensuring all openings of the joint are of
uniform width as follows:

a) Stiffness of the mechanism shall not exceed 8.5 kN per metre along the length of the expansion joint.

b) The width of individual openings shall not vary by more than 6 mm along the length of the joint.

c) The range of widths of openings shall not vary by more than 6 mm.

Field splices in modular joints are not permitted.

1210.04.01.03 Fasteners and Anchorage

Fasteners and anchorage devices shall be designed to transfer all the static and dynamic loads from
each side of the deck joint assembly to the structure.

1210.04.01.04 Preformed Seal

All deck joint assemblies and the bearings in modular deck joint assemblies shall be designed so that the
entire preformed seal is replaceable without damage to the structure and without removal of any
concrete, welds, or anchorages permanently attached to the structure.

Seals shall not be bent in a vertical plane more than 30° at any one location.

1210.05 MATERIALS

1210.05.01 Bearings

All material forming parts of the bearing component of the deck joint assembly shall be according to
OPSS 1202 and OPSS 1203.

Virgin polytetrafluoroethylene element shall have a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.

1210.05.02 Preformed Seal

The preformed seal shall be manufactured from an elastomer with physical requirements according to
Table 1.

Manufacturer’s storage and handling requirements shall be followed. The seal shall not be exposed to
ultraviolet rays for more than three Days prior to installation.

November 2020 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 1210

1210.05.03 Steel

Structural steel components shall be according to OPSS 906, Grade 300W.

Stainless steel shall have a minimum corrosion resistance according to ASTM A240, Type 304.

Steel fasteners other than stainless steel shall be according to ASTM F3125 (Grade A325M, Type 1,
galvanized) or ASTM F835 (zinc phosphate coated).

1210.05.04 Anchors

Anchors shall be headed type stud shear connectors according to CSA W59, Annex H.

1210.05.05 Anti-seize Compound

Anti-seize compound shall be LOCTITE Moly 50 manufactured by Henkel Corporation or an alternative

acceptable to the Owner.

1210.05.06 Injection Hose System for Deck Joint Assembly

The injection hose system shall be installed on the deck joint assembly for both nosing and armouring
angles. This system shall be long enough to extend between the barrier or parapet walls on each side of
the structure, including the sidewalks and curbs.

The nosing and armouring angles shall not contain bleeder holes.

1210.07 PRODUCTION

1210.07.01 General

The deck joint assembly manufacturer shall have a copy of the deck joint assembly Working Drawings
specified in OPSS 920 at the manufacturing plant during the deck joint assembly fabrication.

1210.07.02 Welding

Welding of structural quality steels shall be according to CSA W59.

Welding of stainless steel shall be according to OPSS 1203.

1210.07.03 Fasteners

The threaded portion of bolts and the underside of the bolt heads shall be coated with an anti-seize
compound prior to installation.

1210.07.04 Steel Fabrication

Machining shall be carried out after welding, whenever possible.

All rough flame cut surfaces and metal-to-metal contact surfaces shall be machined ground smooth.

Re-entrant corners that are cut shall be free from notches and shall have the largest practical radius with
a minimum radius of 14 mm. Bearing surfaces shall be in contact over the full area of the mating surfaces.

November 2020 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 1210

1210.07.05 Corrosion Protection

All structural steel components of the deck joint assembly shall be hot dip galvanized according to ASTM
A123 after fabrication. Hardware shall be galvanized according to ASTM F2329.

1210.07.06 Preformed Seal

The preformed seal shall exceed the required length by at least 1 m to provide a sample to be submitted
for testing that includes the entire identification label, which includes the name of manufacturer, product
identification, the lot and date of manufacture.

1210.07.07 Identification

Each deck joint section shall be marked with the date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd-), and an
individual alphanumeric identification. The alphanumeric identification shall consist of the identification
letters of the supplier and source, followed by a sequential number. The characters shall be die stamped
into an exposed surface at the gutter line at the barrier wall or curb. The characters shall not be less than
10 mm high with the indentations not less than 0.5 mm in width and 0.2 mm in depth.

The preformed seal shall be clearly and indelibly marked at one metre intervals indicating manufacturer,
lot number, date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd), and model number.

1210.07.08 Designation of Lifting Points

The lifting points shall be clearly marked on the deck joint assembly.

November 2020 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 1210

 TABLE 1
Preformed Seal Physical Requirements

Preformed Seal Physical Requirements Physical Requirements Test Procedure

Property
Tensile Strength Minimum 13.5 MPa ASTM D412
Test Method A
Ultimate Elongation Minimum 250% ASTM D412
Test Method A
Hardness, 55 Shore A, + 7, -5 ASTM D2240
Oven Aging Test, 70 h @ 100 °C Maximum 20% ASTM D573
Change in Tensile Strength ASTM D412
Test Method A
Change in Elongation Maximum 20% ASTM D412
Test Method A
Change in Hardness Maximum 10 points ASTM D2240
Permanent set at break Maximum 10% ASTM D412
Test Method A
Low Temperature Crystallization Maximum 15 points ASTM D832
Hardness, Shore A ASTM D2240
7 d @ -10 °C
Change in Hardness
Oil Swell, ASTM Oil No. 3, Maximum 45% ASTM D471
70 h @ 100 °C
Weight Change
Ozone Resistance, No cracks ASTM D1149
20% Strain, 150 pphm in air Method B,
70 h @ 40 °C Procedure B1
Notes:

A. All tests shall be made on specimens prepared from the preformed seals.

November 2020 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 1210

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1212
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

HOT POURED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT JOINT SEALING COMPOUND

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1212.01 SCOPE

1212.02 REFERENCES

1212.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1212.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1212.05 MATERIALS

1212.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1212.07 PRODUCTION

1212.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1212.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1212.01 SCOPE

This specification covers hot poured rubberized asphalt compounds for sealing joints and cracks with a small
amount of movement either in Portland cement concrete pavements or hot mix asphalt pavements.

1212.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

ASTM International

D36-06 Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring and Ball Apparatus)
D70-08 Standard Test Method for Density of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials (Pycnometer Method)
D5329-07 Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, Hot-Applied, For Joints and Cracks in Asphaltic and Portland
Cement Concrete Pavements

Ministry of Transportation Publications

LS-262 Method of Test for Bulk Relative Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures

National Standard Specifications

CAN/CGSB 37.50-M89 Hot Applied Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing

November 2023 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1212

1212.05 MATERIALS

1212.05.01 Hot-Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint/Crack Sealant Compounds

Shipments of hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds shall meet the requirements given
in Table 1.

1212.07 PRODUCTION

1212.07.01 Pouring Point

The pouring point for hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds shall be at least 10 °C lower
than the safe heating temperature recommended by the manufacturer.

For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds used for sealing joints and cracks in Portland
cement concrete pavements, the pouring point shall also be the lowest temperature to which the material is
heated and at which it is suitable for filling a 12.5 mm wide and 40 mm deep groove formed between two blocks
of concrete without inclusions of large air voids or discontinuities and without damage to the material.

For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds used for sealing joints and cracks in asphalt
pavements, the pouring point shall also be the lowest temperature to which the material is heated and at which
it is suitable for filling a 40 mm wide and 10 mm deep groove cut in asphaltic concrete pavement without
inclusions of large air voids or discontinuities and without damage to the material.

1212.07.02 Packaging and Marking

The sealing compound shall be packaged in 22 kg or smaller units. It shall be contained in a polyethylene bag,
and the bags, shall, in turn be placed in a metal container. Each container shall be legibly marked with the
following information:

a) Designated trade name of the compound.

b) Manufacturer's name.

c) Batch number.

d) Date of manufacture.

e) Quantity contained.

1212.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1212.08.01 Testing Joint/Crack Sealant Compound

All samples of sealant compound that are used for sealing joints and cracks in hot mix asphalt pavements and
Portland cement concrete pavements shall/will be tested for all of the attributes listed in Table 2, with the
exceptions as noted.

November 2023 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1212

 TABLE 1
Testing Requirements

Sealant Designation
Test
“Southern Ontario Only” “All Districts” (Note 1)
Cone Penetration @ 25 C  90 units -
Flow (mm) 5 3
Bond- 3 cycles @ 50% extension at-18 C Pass -
Notes:
1. A successful field trial is required before a product is accepted for placement on the DSM.

TABLE 2
Testing Requirements

Procedures Required for Procedures Required for Hot-Poured

Hot-Poured Rubberized Joint / Rubberized Joint / Crack Sealing
Test
Crack Sealing Compounds Used Compounds Used in Portland
in Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements Cement Concrete Pavements
Sample Preparation CAN/CGSB 37.50-M CAN/CGSB 37.50-M
Cone Penetration ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Resilience ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Asphalt Compatibility
ASTM D5329- (Note 1) Not Required
(tested to 80 °C)
Bond (Non-Immersed) (Note 2) ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Flow ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Softening Point ASTM D36- (Note 1) Not Required
Relative Density ASTM D70- (Note 1) LS-262
Toughness Not Required CAN/CGSB 37.50-M
Notes:
1. For each batch of sealant compound used in hot mix asphalt pavements, the Contractor shall provide
results for all of these tests. However, for re-heated sealant compounds that are sampled during
construction, these tests will be completed at the discretion of the Bituminous Section in Downsview.
2. For each batch of “All Districts” products used as joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt
pavements, the Contractor shall provide test results based on bond testing that is conducted in 3 cycles
at -29 C with both 50% and 200% extension. For each batch of “Southern Ontario Only” sealant used as
joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt pavement, the Contractor shall provide test results based
on bond testing that is conducted in 5 cycles at-18 C with 50% extension.
All re-heated sealant compounds sampled during construction will be tested in 5 cycles at -18 C with 50%
extension, or when used as joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt pavements, the samples will
be tested, as specified by the Bituminous Section in Downsview.

November 2023 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1212

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1213
SPECIFICATION JULY 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

HOT-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1213.01 SCOPE

1213.02 REFERENCES

1213.03 DEFINITIONS

1213.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1213.05 MATERIALS

1213.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1213.07 PRODUCTION

1213.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1213.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1213.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements for hot-applied rubberized asphalt (HRA) waterproofing
membrane for structures.

1213.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction:

OPSS 914 Waterproofing Bridge Decks and Culverts with Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications:

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-350 Low Temperature Flexibility of Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane
LS-351 Cone Penetration and Relative Density of Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane
LS-352 Flow of Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane

July 2023 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1213

LS-353 Toughness and Ratio of Toughness to Peak Force and Adhesion of Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt
Waterproofing Membrane
LS-354 Heat Stability of Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane
LS-360 Oven Aged Low Temperature Flexibility of Hot-Applied Rubberized (HRA) Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane

1213.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing Membrane means as defined in OPSS 914.

1213.05 MATERIALS

1213.05.01 HRA Waterproofing Membrane

The HRA waterproofing membrane, including oven aged samples, shall be according to Table 1.

1213.07 PRODUCTION

1213.07.01 Markings and Packaging

The following information shall be clearly shown on each package of HRA waterproofing membrane:

a) Product name.

b) Name of manufacturer.

c) Manufacturer’s batch or lot number.

1213.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1213.08.01 Sampling and Lot Size

Sampling and lot size for the HRA waterproofing membrane shall be according to OPSS 914.

1213.08.02 Acceptance of HRA Waterproofing Membrane

The HRA waterproofing membrane shall be considered acceptable when all the properties listed above meet
the acceptance values specified in Table 1.

Unacceptable HRA waterproofing membrane shall be subject to removal and replacement.

July 2023 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1213

 TABLE 1
HRA Waterproofing Membrane Properties - Acceptance Values

Test Test Number Acceptance Value

Pass according to the

Low Temperature Flexibility at -25 °C LS-350 requirements in LS-350
(no breaks or cracks).
Cone Penetration at 25 °C LS-351 Max. 110 (0.1 mm)
Cone Penetration at 50 °C LS-351 Max. 160 (0.1 mm)
Flow at 60 °C LS-352 Max. 3 mm
Toughness LS-353 Min. 5.5 joules
Toughness/Peak Force LS-353 Min. 0.040 joules/newton
A minimum of 2 of the 3
samples shall pass
Adhesion LS-353
according to the
requirements in LS-353.
Relative Density LS-351 For Information
Heat Stability LS-354 Pass all tests
Pass according to the
Oven Aged Low Temperature requirements in LS-360
LS-360
Flexibility
(no breaks or cracks).

July 2023 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1213

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1215
SPECIFICATION JULY 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PROTECTION BOARD

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1215.01 SCOPE

1215.02 REFERENCES

1215.03 DEFINITIONS

1215.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1215.05 MATERIAL

1215.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1215.07 PRODUCTION

1215.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1215.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS - Not Used

1215.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements for protection board for use with hot-applied rubberized
asphalt (HRA) waterproofing membranes.

1215.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standards Specifications, Construction:

OPSS 914 Waterproofing Bridge Decks and Culverts with Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane

MTO Publications

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-282 Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Cement and Analysis of Extracted Aggregate
LS-355 Water Absorption of Protection Board
LS-356 Indentation/Puncture Test
LS-357 Compatibility
LS-358 Weather Simulation and Bond of Protection Board
LS-359 Thickness of Protection Board

July 2023 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1215

1215.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing Membrane means as defined in OPSS 914.

1215.05 MATERIAL

1215.05.01 Protection Board

1215.05.01.01 General

Protection board shall be formed of asphalt and fillers between two fibreglass sheet materials. The thickness of
the protection board shall be 3.60 ± 0.40 mm when tested according to this specification.

1215.05.01.02 Compatibility

When tested according to LS-357, the protection board shall show no evidence of puncture, delamination,
pumping, stripping of the aggregates, or any signs of incompatibility between the boards and the asphaltic
concrete or the HRA waterproofing membrane.

1215.05.01.03 Indentation/Puncture

When tested according to LS-356, the protection board shall have no punctures, tears or separations, and
indentations shall be a minimum of 0.25 mm deep and not greater than 0.9 mm deep.

1215.05.01.04 Separation Material Between Boards

The protection board separation material, used to separate the boards and prevent bonding, shall be sand.

1215.05.01.05 Visual Appearance

The protection board shall have a uniform appearance and the fibre glass mesh shall be properly coated.
Excess sand shall not be present on the protection board prior to placement.

1215.05.01.06 Water Absorption

When tested according to the Quality Assurance section, the specimens shall have a water absorption of less
than or equal to 5.0% and shall show no deterioration such as stripping emulsification or loss of mass.

1215.05.01.07 Weather Simulation and Bond

When tested according to LS-358, the edge of the upper board shall not curl up more than 5 mm from the
original horizontal position, and shall not delaminate within itself or debond from the HRA waterproofing
membrane.

1215.07 PRODUCTION

1215.07.01 General

The protection board or the board separation material shall not be changed without the prior approval of the
Owner.

Protection boards shall be coated on each side with a separation material.

July 2023 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1215

1215.07.02 Dimensions

The thickness of the protection board shall be 3.6 mm ± 0.4 mm. The width of the protection board shall be
1100 mm ± 200 mm and the length of the board shall be 1500 mm ± 200 mm. The board shall have straight
edges, square corners, and edges free of burrs and breakaways.

Notwithstanding the size tolerance above, all sheets in a shipment shall be of the same length and width within
a tolerance of ± 5 mm and of uniform thickness within a tolerance of ± 0.25 mm.

1215.07.03 Storage

After manufacturing, protection boards shall be stored within the manufacturer’s recommended temperature
range, and in conditions that prevent water penetration and exposure to the elements.

1215.07.04 Markings and Packaging

The following information shall be clearly shown on each bundle of protection board:

a) Product name.

b) Name of manufacturer.

c) Date of manufacture.

The material shall be packaged to permit shipping, handling, and storage without damage to the protection
board.

1215.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1215.08.01 Sampling and Lot Size

Sampling and lot size for the protection board shall be as specified in OPSS 914.

1215.08.02 Acceptance of Thickness

Measurement of protection board thickness shall according to LS-359. Protection board shall be acceptable if
the test result for thickness is 3.6 mm ± 0.4 mm.

1215.08.03 Acceptance of Water Absorption

The protection board shall be tested for water absorption according to LS-355. The protection board shall be
acceptable if the water absorption is less than or equal to 5.0% and the protection boards shows no deterioration
such as stripping emulsification or loss of mass.

1215.08.04 Acceptance of Indentation/Puncture

The protection board shall be tested for indentation/puncture according to LS-356. The protection board shall
be acceptable if:

a) The protection board shows no punctures; and

b) Indentations are a minimum of 0.25 mm deep and not greater than 0.9 mm deep.

July 2023 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1215

1215.08.05 Acceptance of Compatibility

The protection board shall be tested for compatibility according to LS-357. The protection board shall be
acceptable if the board shows no evidence of puncture, delamination, pumping, stripping of the aggregates, or
any signs of incompatibility between the boards and the asphaltic concrete or the HRA waterproofing
membrane.

1215.08.06 Acceptance of Weather Simulation and Bond

Protection board shall be tested for weather simulation and bond according to LS-358. The protection board
shall be acceptable if the edge of the upper board does not curl up more than 5 mm from the original horizontal
position, and does not delaminate within itself or debond from the HRA waterproofing membrane.

1215.08.07 Asphalt Content

Protection board shall be tested for asphalt content according to LS-282. The asphalt content of the protection
board shall be tested for information purposes only.

July 2023 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1215

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1216
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2024

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR PRIMER USED WITH HOT-APPLIED RUBBERIZED

ASPHALT (HRA) WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1216.01 SCOPE

1216.02 REFERENCES

1216.03 DEFINITIONS

1216.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1216.05 MATERIAL

1216.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1216.07 PRODUCTION

1216.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1216.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1216.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements for primer used with hot-applied rubberized asphalt (HRA)
waterproofing membranes.

1216.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction:

OPSS 914 Waterproofing Bridge Decks and Culverts with Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane

ASTM International

D5/D5M-20 Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials

D36/D36M-14(2020) Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)
D88/D88M-07(2019)e1 Test Method for Saybolt Viscosity
D95-13(2018) Test Method for Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous Materials by Distillation
D402/D402M-14 Test Method for Distillation of Cutback Asphaltic
D2042-22 Test Method for Solubility of Asphalt Materials in Trichloroethylene or Toluene

November 2024 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1216

1216.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing Membrane means as defined in OPSS 914.

Primer means as defined in OPSS 914.

1216.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1216.04.01 Submission Requirements

1216.04.01.01 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Test Results

At least 14 Days prior to the application of primer, test results for the VOC content of the primer shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator.

1216.05 MATERIAL

1216.05.01 Primer

Primer shall meet the requirements of Table 1.

The primer used shall be as recommended by the HRA waterproofing membrane manufacturer.

The primer shall not be cutback or diluted.

1216.07 PRODUCTION

1216.07.01 Labeling

The following information shall be shown on the container of primer:

a) Product name.

b) Name of manufacturer.

c) Batch/lot number.

1216.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1216.08.01 General

The laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out quality assurance testing for purposes of ensuring that
primer used in the work is according to the requirements of this specification. Individual test results shall be
forwarded to the Contractor, as they become available.

1216.08.02 Sampling and Lot Size

Sampling and lot size for the primer shall be according to OPSS 914.

November 2024 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1216

1216.08.03 Acceptance of Primer

The primer shall be acceptable if the requirements of this specification are met.

A lot shall be deemed to be acceptable if all the test results for the sample of primer representing the lot meet
the requirements of Table 1. Unacceptable lots shall be rejected.

November 2024 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1216

 TABLE 1
Primer Properties

Property Test Method Acceptance Requirement

190 °C 25% minimum
Distillate obtained, expressed as a percentage of total 225 °C 70% minimum
ASTM D402
volume to 360°C (%) 260 °C 80% minimum
315 °C 92% minimum
Distillate obtained as a percentage of volume of original
ASTM D402 Min. 30%
cutback asphalt, distilled to 360 °C (%)
Water Content (%) ASTM D95 Max. 0.5%
Solubility in trichloroethylene tested on residue from
ASTM D2042 Min. 98%
distillation to 360°C (%)
Penetration (100 g/25 °C/5 sec) tested on residue from
ASTM D5 25 to 85 (0.1 mm)
distillation to 360 °C (0.1 mm)
Softening Point tested on residue from distillation to 360 °C ASTM D36 49 to 80 °C
Saybolt Viscosity at 25 °C (seconds) ASTM D88 50 to 400 seconds

November 2024 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1216

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1217
SPECIFICATION JULY 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR MEMBRANE REINFORCEMENT

USED WITH HOT-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1217.01 SCOPE

1217.02 REFERENCES

1217.03 DEFINITIONS

1217.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1217.05 MATERIAL

1217.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1217.07 PRODUCTION

1217.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1217.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1217.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements for membrane reinforcement used with hot-applied
rubberized asphalt (HRA) waterproofing membranes.

1217.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction:

OPSS 914 Waterproofing Bridge Decks and Culverts with Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane

ASTM International

D1777-96 (2019) Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials

D3776/D3776M-20 Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric
D4533/D4533M-15(2023) Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
D4632/D4632M-15a(2023) Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles

July 2023 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1217

1217.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt (HRA) Waterproofing Membrane means as defined in OPSS 914.

1217.05 MATERIAL

1217.05.01 Membrane Reinforcement

Membrane reinforcement shall be a non-woven polyester material meeting the requirements specified in
Table 1.

The membrane reinforcement product used shall be as recommended by the HRA waterproofing membrane
manufacturer.

1217.07 PRODUCTION

1217.07.01 Labeling

Each meter of membrane reinforcement shall be labelled with the product name and grade.

1217.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1217.08.01 Sampling and Lot Size

Sampling and lot size for the membrane reinforcement shall be according to OPSS 914.

1217.08.02 Acceptance of Reinforcement

The membrane reinforcement shall be acceptable if the requirements of this specification are met.

A lot shall be deemed to be acceptable if all the test results for the sample of membrane reinforcement
representing the lot meets the acceptance requirements specified in Table 1. Unacceptable lots shall be
rejected.

July 2023 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1217

 TABLE 1
Membrane Reinforcement Properties

Property Acceptance Requirement Test Method

Colour White Not applicable
Unit Weight (g/m2) 46 ASTM D3776
Thickness (mm) 0.26 ± 0.02 ASTM D1777
Grab Tensile (N) MD x XD 131 x 98 ASTM D4632
Trapezoid Tear (N) MD x XD 28 x 35 ASTM D4533

July 2023 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1217

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1301
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2024

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR CEMENTING MATERIALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1301.01 SCOPE

1301.02 REFERENCES

1301.03 DEFINITIONS

1301.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1301.05 MATERIALS

1301.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1301.07 PRODUCTION

1301.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1301.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1301.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for cementing materials together with the method of sampling,
testing, delivery, handling and storage, prior to use.

1301.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material

OPSS 1350 Concrete - Materials and Production

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

CSA Standards

A3001-23 Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete*

* [Part of A3000-23- Cementitious Materials Compendium]

November 2024 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1301

1301.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Cementing Material means a product having hydraulic or pozzolanic properties that is used as a binder to
make concrete or mortar. Portland cement, blended hydraulic cement, Portland limestone cement,
supplementary cementing materials and blended supplementary materials are examples of cementing
materials.

Slag means ground granulated blast furnace slag, Type S.

Fly Ash means the finely divided residue that results from the combustion of pulverized coal or a combination
of pulverized coal blended with up to 30% by mass of petroleum coke and that is carried from the combustion
chamber of a furnace by exhaust gases, Types F, CI or CH except reclaimed fly ash

Silica Fume means the finely divided residue, resulting from the production of silicon or ferrosilicon alloys, that
is carried from the burning area of a furnace by exhaust gases. The silica fume shall contain a minimum of
80% SiO2.

1301.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSIONREQUIREMENTS

1301.04.01 Submissions

1301.04.01.01 Cementing Materials

The following documentation shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum of 7 Days prior to use
of the cementing material:

a) Product name;

b) The cementing material supplier’s name;

c) The cementing material manufacturer’s name;

d) Type of the cementing material;

e) Location of the mill;

f) A test report from a qualified laboratory, which includes the following:

i. All the physical and chemical test requirements of CSA A3001, including the test for false set if the
product is Portland cement or Portland limestone cement. The test report shall be accompanied by a
letter from the Technical Services Representative of the cement supplier certifying that the cementing
materials are according to the physical and chemical requirements of CSA A3001.
ii. The test requirements of this specification.

a) If non-agitating trucks are used, a certificate from the cementitious material supplier verifying the cement is
free from early stiffening tendencies.

Testing of cementing materials shall be carried out by a laboratory that has participated successfully in the
Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory’s (CCRL) Laboratory Inspection Program (LIP) and CCRL’s
Proficiency Sample Program (PSP) for Portland Cement and Portland limestone cement (PLC). The CCRL
Inspection Report shall be provided to the Owner upon request.

November 2024 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1301

1301.05 MATERIALS

1301.05.01 Cementing Materials

Cementing materials shall be from the Ministry’s DSM list and according to CSA A3001 requirements unless
otherwise specified in Contract Documents.

Physical and chemical requirements of cementing materials shall be according to CSA A3001 including the
optional requirements of CSA A3001 with the exception of the requirements for “Control of Expansion Due to
Alkali-Silica Reactivity”.

The cementing material shall be free of lumps or partially hydrated material.

At the time of delivery to the concrete producer and at the time of use, the temperature of cementing material
shall not exceed 65 °C.

Where Portland cement, and Portland limestone cement is required to be certified as being free from early
stiffening tendencies, the penetration shall be 50% or greater when determined according to CSA A3001.

1301.07 PRODUCTION

1301.07.01 Packaging

Bags used in the supply of packaged cementing materials shall be of such composition and quality as to provide
protection from the elements and to withstand normal handling procedures.

1301.07.02 Marking

Cementing materials delivered in bags shall have the name of the supplier, and type of cementing material
plainly marked on each bag.

Cementing material delivered in bags or in bulk shall be accompanied by a shipping invoice listing the following
information:

a) Product name;

b) Type of cementing material;

c) Name of the cementing material supplier;

d) Name of manufacturer; and

e) Location of mill.

1301.07.03 Delivery and Storage

Cementing material shall be protected from moisture and precipitation during delivery and storage.

Bagged cementing material shall be stored within a weather-tight building except that when the period of storage
will not exceed 1 month, temporary protection by complete enclosure within tarpaulins or plastic sheets shall
be permitted. Bags shall be stacked, clear of the ground, to provide a space for air circulation. Bagged
cementing material stored in a building shall not be closer than 600 mm to the roof or walls.

November 2024 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1301

1301.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1301.08.01 Acceptance of Cementing Materials

Sampling, acceptance, and referee testing shall be according to OPSS 1350.

November 2024 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1301

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1302
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

WATER

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1302.01 SCOPE

1302.02 REFERENCES

1302.03 DEFINITIONS

1302.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1302.05 MATERIALS

1302.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1302.07 PRODUCTION

1302.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1302.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS - Not Used

1302.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for water used in the production, fog misting and curing of concrete
and mortar.

1302.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-340 Field Sample Data Sheet - Concrete

CSA Standards

A23.1-19 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard
Practices for Concrete
A23.2-9C Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens*
A283-06(R2016) Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories
* [Part of A23.1-19/A23.2-19 - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete]

ASTM International

D512-23 Test Method for Chloride Ion in Water

November 2023 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1302

D516-22 Test Method for Sulfate Ion in Water
D4192-15 Test Method for Potassium in Water by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
C403/C403M-23 Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance

Other

Technical Support Document for Ontario Drinking Water Quality Standards, Objectives and Guidelines

Provincial Statutes

Ontario Regulation 169/03, Ontario Drinking Water Quality Standards under Safe Drinking Water Act, 2002
S.O. 2002, c. 32

1302.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Potable Water means water supplied by a municipality or non-municipal source, meeting the Ontario
Regulation 169/03, Ontario Drinking-Water Quality Standards.

Recycled Water means water recovered from processes of hydraulic cement concrete production that includes
wash water from mixers or that was a part of a concrete mixture; water collected in a basin as a result of storm
water runoff at a concrete production facility; or water that contains quantities of concrete ingredients.

1302.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1302.04.01 Submission Requirements

1302.04.01.01 General

The test certificate shall not be required for potable water supplied by a municipality.

1302.04.01.01 Submission for Potable Water from Non-Municipal Source

For potable water from non-municipal source, documentation shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator
a minimum of 7 Days prior to the placement of concrete verifying that the water is according to the Potable
Water from Non-Municipal Source clause.

1302.04.01.02 Submission for Non-Potable Water

For non-potable water the following shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum 7 Days prior to
placement of concrete:

a) Test certificates from an independent testing laboratory that the water is according to the Non-Potable
Water clause.

i. The test certificate for chloride, sulphate, alkalis, and total solids shall be from a laboratory accredited
by Standards Council of Canada (SCC) for water testing using methods listed in Protocol of Accepted
Drinking Water Testing Methods or test methods validated and accredited by SCC for water testing.

b) Test certificate for compressive strength and time of set shall be from a laboratory certified by organization
accredited by SCC according to the requirements of CSA A283 for Category I - Intermediate Tests and
which is also equipped to carry out the specified testing of time of set.

November 2023 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1302

1302.05 MATERIALS

1302.05.01 Water

1302.05.01.01 General

When potable water supplied by a municipality is used testing is not required.

1302.05.01.02 Potable Water from Non-Municipal Source

When potable water from non-municipal source is used for production, fog misting and curing of concrete and
mortar shall meet the following requirement:

a) Potable water from non-municipal source shall meet the requirements of the Ontario Regulation 169/03,
Ontario Drinking-Water Quality Standards.

b) The water shall additionally meet the requirements for chloride, sulphate, sodium, alkalinity and total
dissolved solids according to the Technical Support Document for Ontario Drinking Water Quality
Standards, Objectives and Guidelines.

1302.05.01.03 Non-Potable Water

Non-potable water used for production, fog misting and curing of concrete and mortar shall meet the following
requirements:

a) 7-Day compressive strength of concrete made with the water to be used in the work shall not be less than
90% of that of the control concrete when tested according to CSA A23.2-9C and this specification.

b) Time of set of concrete made with the water to be used in the work shall be no more than 60 minutes than
the time of set of the control concrete when tested according to ASTM C403 and this specification.

c) The chloride, sulphate, alkalis, and total solids content of the water shall meet the requirements of Table 9,
Water used for making concrete - Optional of CSA A23.1.

1302.[Link] Determination of 7-Day Compressive Strength and Time of Set

For determination of 7-Day compressive strength and time of set, the testing laboratory shall prepare test and
control concrete. The test concrete shall be made with a representative sample of the water to be used in the
work and a control mix shall be made with potable water from a municipal source. Both mixes shall be produced
using the same materials and proportions, and same dosages of chemical admixtures. The test and control
concrete mixes used to assess the water shall have a strength of 25 MPa or greater. The concrete mixes do
not need to be the same as mixes used in the work.

The water shall not change the initial setting time of the test concrete by more than 1 hour when compared to
a reference concrete prepared with potable water from a municipal source.

Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious
substances.

1302.07 PRODUCTION

1302.07.01 General

Potable water from a municipal source may be used in production, fog misting, or curing of concrete and mortar,
without testing.

Potable water from non-municipal source and non-potable water may be used in production, fog misting, or
curing of concrete and mortar, if the water meets the requirements of this specification.

November 2023 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1302

Recycled water shall not be used in production, fog misting, or curing of concrete and mortar.

1302.07.02 Sampling for Testing by the Owner

Samples of the water other than the potable water supplied by a municipality shall be supplied for testing by
the Owner and delivered to the designated laboratory. Samples shall be taken:

a) At the beginning of concrete placement in each calendar year.

b) No more than 30 Days prior to concrete placement.

c) One additional set of samples shall be taken during the calendar year.

d) Additional samples shall be taken every time there is a change in material source.

Two samples of water shall be taken during each sampling. Each sample shall be at least 1 litre. One sample
shall be used for acceptance testing and the other shall be reserved for referee testing. Water samples shall
be contained in a clean 1 litre bottle of a suitable plastic, with a lid and shall be accompanied by MTO form
PH-CC-340, Field Sample Data Sheet - Concrete.

1302.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1302.08.01 Acceptance of Chemical Analysis Testing of Water

1302.08.01.01 General

Water that is not according to this specification shall not be used for making, fog misting and curing of concrete
and mortar.

Individual test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

1302.08.01.02 Acceptance of Potable Water from Non-Municipal Source

Testing of potable water from non-municipal source shall meet the requirements according to the Potable Water
from Non-Municipal Source clause.

1302.08.01.03 Acceptance of Non-Potable Water

Testing of non-potable water for chloride, sulphate, alkalis, and total solids content shall be according to test
methods specified in Table 9, Water used for making concrete - Optional limits of CSA A23.1. Water to be used
in the work shall meet the requirements in Table 9, Water used for making concrete - Optional of CSA A23.1.

1302.08.02 Referee Testing

Referee testing of the water shall be carried out according to the Protocol of Accepted Drinking Water Testing
Methods or test methods validated and accredited by SCC for water testing. Referee testing shall be carried
out on the reserved referee samples and transported to the referee laboratory by the Owner within 3 Business
Days of invoking referee testing.

November 2023 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1302

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1303
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2014

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1303.01 SCOPE

1303.02 REFERENCES

1303.03 DEFINITIONS

1303.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1303.05 MATERIALS

1303.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1303.07 PRODUCTION - Not Used

1303.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1303.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS - Not Used

APPENDICES

1303-A Commentary

1303.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the materials for use as air entraining, chemical, and superplasticizing
admixtures for concrete.

1303.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1303

1303.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1303.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-413 Method of Test for Non-volatile Content of Chemical Admixtures, Latex Admixtures and Curing
Compounds
LS-422 Method of Test for Evaluation of Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
LS-423 Method of Test for Evaluation of Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
LS-424 Method of Test for Evaluation of Superplasticizing Admixtures

ASTM International

C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

E 70-97 (2002) Test Method for pH of Aqueous Solutions with the Glass Electrode

1303.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Air Entraining Admixture means a type of admixture according to ASTM C 260 that causes
development of a system of microscopic air bubbles in concrete during mixing, to increase the workability
of the concrete and its resistance to freezing and thawing.

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1303

Chemical Admixture means Types A, B, C, D, E, and S admixtures according to ASTM C 494.

Non-Chloride Admixture means an admixture that contains not more than 0.01% chloride by mass of
cement.

Superplasticizer means Types F and G admixtures according to ASTM C 494.

Type A means a water reducing admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water required to produce
concrete of a given consistency.

Type B means a retarding admixture that retards the setting of concrete.

Type C means an accelerating admixture that accelerates the setting and early strength development of
concrete.

Type D means a water reducing and retarding admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water
required to produce concrete of a given consistency and retards the setting of concrete.

Type E means a water reducing and accelerating admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water
required to produce concrete of a given consistency and accelerates the setting and early strength
development of concrete.

Type F means a superplasticizing admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water required to
produce concrete of a given consistency by 12% or greater.

Type G means a superplasticizing and retarding admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water
required to produce concrete of a given consistency by 12% or greater and retards the setting of
concrete.

Type S Admixture means a specific performance admixture that provides desired performance
characteristics, other than reducing water content or changing the time of setting of concrete or both,
without any adverse effects on fresh, hardened, and durability properties of concrete.

1303.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1303.04.01 Submission Requirements

1303.04.01.01 Admixtures

The supplier shall submit documentation verifying that each admixture used on the Contract is included
on the ministry’s DSM.

1303.05 MATERIALS

All admixtures shall be in liquid form.

All admixtures shall be non-chloride, with the exception of admixtures used in fast-track full-depth repairs
to concrete pavements or concrete base.

Admixtures shall be according to LS-422, LS-423, and LS-424.

In addition, required performance characteristics of each Type S chemical admixture shall be

demonstrated on Owner approved field trials prior to use in the work.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1303

1303.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Admixtures shall be sampled and tested as specified in the Contract Documents.

Relative density and pH of air entraining admixtures, and non-volatile content and relative density of
chemical and superplasticizing admixtures shall be according to the product data shown on the DSM,
within the following tolerances:

a) Relative density:

i. Where relative density is 1.050 or less, the tolerance shall be ± 0.005.

ii. Where relative density is greater than 1.050, the tolerance shall be calculated according to the
following formula:

Tolerance = (relative density of acceptance sample-1.000)/10

b) Non-volatile content ± 2.5%.

c) pH ± 1.5.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1303

Appendix 1303-A, November 2014
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1303

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1305
STANDARD APRIL 2019
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1305, November 2008)

Note: The PROV published in April 2019 replaces OPSS 1305 COMMON, November 2008 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

MOISTURE VAPOUR BARRIERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1305.01 SCOPE

1305.02 REFERENCES

1305.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1305.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1305.05 MATERIALS

1305.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1305.07 PRODUCTION - Not Used

1305.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1305.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for materials in sheet form used to inhibit moisture loss in
concrete during its curing period.

1305.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

ASTM International

C 171-16 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

1305.05 MATERIALS

The material shall be a white opaque polyethylene film according to ASTM C 171.

April 2019 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 1305

1305.07 PRODUCTION

1305.07.01 Labelling

Each roll shall be labelled with following information:

a) Name of manufacturer.

b) Type of material.

c) Batch number.

d) Film thickness.

e) Roll number.

1305.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1305.08.01 Sampling

The Owner may take quality assurance samples of film or sheeting from rolls selected at random at the
jobsite from each shipment representing material of the same type.

1305.08.02 Testing

Testing of sheeting and film shall be according to ASTM C 171.

1305.08.03 Acceptance or Rejection

Material represented by a quality assurance sample failing to meet the requirements of this specification
shall be rejected.

April 2019 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 1305

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1306
STANDARD APRIL 2019
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1306, November 2011)

Note: The PROV published in April 2019 replaces OPSS 1306 COMMON, November 2011 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

BURLAP

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1306.01 SCOPE

1306.02 REFERENCES

1306.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1306.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1306.05 MATERIALS

1306.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1306.07 PRODUCTION - Not Used

1306.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1306.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for burlap used for curing concrete and for use in surface
texturing of concrete pavement.

1306.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M182-05 (2017) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats

1306.05 MATERIALS

1306.05.01 Burlap

Burlap shall be according to AASHTO M182, Class 4, and shall be free of substances that are deleterious
to concrete. The burlap shall have no tears or holes.

April 2019 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 1306

1306.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1306.08.01 Sampling

The Owner may take quality assurance samples of the burlap selected at random at the job site from
each shipment representing material of the same type.

1306.08.02 Testing

Testing of burlap shall be according to AASHTO M182.

1306.08.03 Acceptance or Rejection

Material represented by a quality assurance sample failing to meet the requirements of this specification
shall be rejected.

April 2019 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 1306

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1350
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2024

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE - MATERIALS AND PRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1350.01 SCOPE

1350.02 REFERENCES

1350.03 DEFINITIONS

1350.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1350.05 MATERIALS

1350.06 EQUIPMENT

1350.07 PRODUCTION

1350.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1350.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1350.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for materials and methods for proportioning, mixing, transporting,
field testing, acceptance, and payment adjustments of concrete material, including provisions for referee testing
of compressive strength, air void system parameters, and rapid chloride permeability.

1350.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 350 Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base

OPSS 904 Concrete Structures
OPSS 905 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1002 Aggregates - Concrete

OPSS 1301 Cementing Materials
OPSS 1302 Water
OPSS 1303 Admixtures for Concrete

November 2024 Page 1 of 33 [Link] 1350

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-100 Method of Rounding-off Data and Other Numbers
LS-101 Method for Calculation of Per Cent Within Limits
LS-407 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Moulded Cylinders
LS-410 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cores
LS-413 Method of Test for Non-Volatile Content of Chemical Admixtures, Latex Admixtures and Curing
Compounds
LS-414 Method of Test for Relative Density of Chemical Admixtures, Air Entraining Admixtures, Latex
Admixtures and Curing Compounds
LS-415 Method of Test for pH of Aqueous Solutions by Glass Electrode
LS-426 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of High Strength Concrete Cylinders
LS-432 Method of Test for Microscopical Determination of Air Void System Parameters in Hardened
Concrete
LS-433 Method of Test for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-322 Concrete Construction Report
PH-CC-340 Field Sample Data Sheet - Concrete
PH-CC-433A Concrete Mix Design Submission Form A
PH-CC-433B Concrete Mix Design Submission Form B
PH-CC-434 Sample Letter to Contractor - Concrete Mix Design
PH-CC-845 Daily Concrete Load Test Results

CSA Standards

A23.2-1C Sampling Plastic Concrete*

A23.2-3C Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Test Specimens*
A23.2-4C Air Content of Plastic Concrete by the Pressure Method*
A23.2-5C Slump and Slump Flow of Concrete*
A23.2-6C Density, Yield, and Cementing Materials Factor of Plastic Concrete*
A23.2-14C Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores for Compressive Strength Testing*
A23.2-17C Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete*
A23.2-1D Moulds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically*
A3001 Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete**
A3004-B6 Physical Test Methods for Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete and Masonry **
* [Part of A23.1:24/A23.2:24 - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete]
** [Part of A3000:23 - Cementitious Materials Compendium]

1350.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

High Performance Concrete (HPC) means concrete with a minimum specified 28-Day compressive strength
of at least 50 MPa that includes silica fume and may include other supplementary cementing materials and
having a specified rapid chloride permeability at 28 to 32 Days of 1,000 coulombs or less.

Limestone Filler means an aggregate of divided limestone powder that may be used in concrete for the
purpose of reducing the total amount of Portland cement used. Its use is limited to appropriate applications and
exposure conditions after its suitability is determined through physical, chemical and mineralogical testing.

November 2024 Page 2 of 33 [Link] 1350

Portland Limestone Cement means cement obtained by intergrinding limestone with Portland cement clinker,
as defined in CSA A3001.

Stationary Mixer means a non-mobile mixer installed at a plant for the purpose of mixing concrete.

Steel Reinforcement means as defined in OPSS 905.

Tremie Concrete means a concrete mix specifically designed to be placed under water by means of a tremie.

1350.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1350.04.01 Design Requirements

1350.04.01.01 Concrete Mix Design

1350.[Link] General

The concrete mix shall be designed to provide adequate strength and durability for its intended use, including
but not limited to resistance to salt scaling on concrete surfaces exposed to de-icers and/or anti-icers, and to
meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

1350.[Link] Use of Admixtures

Water reducer Type A or D shall be used in all concrete, except in applications where plant addition of
superplasticizer is used, in which case the water reducer may be used at the Contractor’s option.

Retarding of concrete set shall be provided when specified in the Contract Documents. If no retarding of set is
specified, retarders may be used to delay setting of concrete for a maximum of 3 hours. Longer periods of set
retardation shall be used only when specified in the Contract Documents.

Accelerators shall be used only when specified in the Contract Documents.

Superplasticizers shall be used in concrete containing silica fume and concrete in expansion joint end dams.
Superplasticizers may be used in other applications provided the superplasticized concrete meets the Contract
requirements and there is no evidence of segregation or inadequate consolidation.

Where rapid chloride permeability is an acceptance requirement, superplasticizers may be added to the
concrete at the batch plant or at the site. Where rapid chloride permeability is not an acceptance requirement,
superplasticizer shall be added to the concrete at the site.

Type S admixtures listed on the DSM may be used and concrete containing Type S admixture shall meet all
requirements of this specification.

1350.04.02 Submission Requirements

1350.04.02.01 Mix Design

1350.[Link] General

A complete mix design submission shall be provided for concrete of each specified compressive strength that
is to be placed in the work, for each of the following:

a) Cast-in-place concrete.

b) Slip formed concrete.

November 2024 Page 3 of 33 [Link] 1350

c) Mixes with different sources of materials.

d) Mixes with different admixtures.

e) Precast concrete.

f) Special purpose or unique mixes.

A complete mix design submission shall be submitted for each specific concrete mix a minimum of 7 Business
Days prior to the placement of that mix in the work. A complete mix design submission shall consist of the
following:

a) A completed MTO form PH-CC-433A, Concrete Mix Design Submission (Form A). Form A shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator.

b) A completed MTO form PH-CC-433B, Concrete Mix Design Submission (Form B). Prior to the placement
of concrete of a given mix design, for each Form A submitted, a corresponding Form B completed by the
concrete supplier shall be submitted directly to the Regional Head of Quality Assurance with a copy to the
MTO Concrete Section electronic mix design depository. The Form B shall bear the mix design number
assigned by the Contractor to the corresponding Form A.

c) Mix design supporting documentation.

Form A and Form B shall identify all materials to be used in the concrete. No material shall be used in the
concrete without the knowledge of the Owner.

If the same mix design (i.e., same materials and sources in the same proportions) is to be supplied by multiple
plants, submission of separate mix designs and separate supporting documentation is not required.

Within 4 Business Days of receiving a complete mix design submission, the Contract Administrator will provide
the Contractor with a MTO form PH-CC-434, Letter to Contractor - Concrete Mix Design, confirming the
submission meets the requirements or advising the Contractor of any requirements that have not been met.
The mix shall not be placed until the Contract Administrator provides written confirmation that Form A and the
mix design supporting documentation meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

1350.[Link] Changes to Mix Design Submission

The following adjustments to the submitted mix design may be made without having to submit a new mix design
or supporting documentation:

a) Total cementing material content: ± 5% of quantity stated on Form B.

b) Supplementary cementing materials: +0/-5% of quantity stated on Form B.

c) Admixtures: variation within range of dosage stated on Form B.

d) Water: variation within range stated on Form B.

Removal of a material from the mix or addition of retarding admixture Type B or D requires submission of a new
mix design but does not require resubmission of mix design supporting documentation.

A new mix design, including supporting documentation, shall be provided prior to placing concrete, if any of the
following mix design changes are made:

a) Changing sources of materials used in the concrete.

November 2024 Page 4 of 33 [Link] 1350

b) Substituting a material or product for another from the same source.

c) Adding any material to the concrete that was not on the original mix design, except retarding admixture
Type B or D.

d) Adjusting the quantities of the stated materials in the concrete outside of the ranges provided in points a),
b), c) or d) above.

The submission process for new or modified mix designs is the same as for the original mix design, except that
when supporting documentation is not required, the confirmation by the Contract Administrator shall be provided
within 1 Business Day.

1350.[Link] Mix Design Number

Each mix design submitted shall be identified with a mix design number consisting of the following:

a) 8-digit Contract number, followed by;

b) 2 digits indicating the specified compressive strength of concrete, followed by;

c) 2 digits indicating the number of the submission for that Contract (e.g., 01 for the first mix design of a
specified strength, 02 for the second, and so on) followed, optionally and if applicable, by;

d) 1 digit indicating the number of revisions of a mix design submitted previously (e.g., 1 for first revision, 2 for
second revision, and so on). When a revised mix design is submitted, only the latest revision shall be used.

1350.[Link] Mix Design Supporting Documentation

Mix design supporting documentation shall include the following:

a) A currently valid Certificate of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities as issued by the Ready Mixed
Concrete Association of Ontario (RMCAO) for any plant to be used on the Contract.

b) The range of concrete production rates required for the work.

c) Documentation for aggregates used in concrete demonstrating compliance with the requirements of
OPSS 1002.

d) Water test results, if water other than municipal drinking water is used, demonstrating compliance with the
requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

e) A certificate verifying the cement is free from early stiffening tendencies when tested according to
CSA A3004-B6, if non-agitating trucks are used.

f) Any other requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Documentation applicable to multiple mix designs need only be submitted once for a Contract.

All required supporting test data and certificates shall be less than 12 months old at the time the concrete mix
design is submitted.

November 2024 Page 5 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.04.02.02 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities

For multi-year Contracts, verification that the plant continues to hold a valid Certificate of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities, as issued by the RMCAO shall be submitted to Contract Administrator for all plants
supplying concrete to the Work.

1350.05 MATERIALS

1350.05.01 Admixtures for Concrete

Air entraining, chemical, and superplasticizing admixtures for concrete shall be according to OPSS 1303.

1350.05.02 Aggregates

1350.05.02.01 General

Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1002.

1350.05.02.02 Limestone Filler

Limestone filler shall be according to the following:

a) Requirements specified in OPSS 1002 with the exception that use of limestone filler is not confined to
self-consolidating concrete (SCC).

b) Requirements specified in CSA A23.1, Annex L, L2 Organic Impurities.

c) Requirements specified in CSA A3001, Clause 4.4.3 a) for calcium carbonate content.

d) Restricted to a maximum of 15% of the cement by mass.

1350.05.03 Cementing Materials

Cementing materials shall be according to OPSS 1301 and the following:

a) For all concrete other than silica fume overlays and HPC, Portland cement or Portland limestone cement
shall be used. A portion of it may be replaced by ground granulated blast furnace slag or fly ash or both. At
the Contractor’s option, silica fume in the form of a blended cement containing silica fume, may be added
to the concrete mix to achieve reduced permeability. Where silica fume is used, the allowable limit for
concrete permeability shall be reduced to 1,000 coulombs and the curing requirements of OPSS 904 for
HPC shall apply.

b) For silica fume overlays and HPC, blended hydraulic cement containing silica fume shall be used. A portion
of it may be replaced by Portland cement or Portland limestone cement, or ground granulated blast furnace
slag or fly ash, or both.

c) Fresh concrete made with different types of Portland cement shall not be used in the same component.
Portland limestone cement shall not be used in concrete in combination with limestone filler.

Ground granulated blast furnace slag (slag) or fly ash or a combination of the two materials shall be restricted
to the following proportions by mass of the total cementing material:

a) Slag up to 25%.

b) Fly ash up to 10%, except for silica fume overlays and HPC where up to 25% is permitted.

November 2024 Page 6 of 33 [Link] 1350

c) A mixture of slag and fly ash up to 25%, except the amount of fly ash shall not exceed 10% by mass of the
total cementing materials, in concrete other than silica fume overlays and HPC.

For tremie concrete, the minimum cementing material content shall be 415 kg per cubic metre of concrete.

1350.05.04 Concrete

1350.05.04.01 General

The selection of materials and design of the concrete mix shall be optimized to achieve greenhouse gas (GHG)
reduction of a minimum of 10% while maintaining the concrete performance requirements for the application
and environment.

The 10% GHG reduction shall be obtained through the use of one or a combination of the following options:

a) Use of Portland limestone cement.

b) Use of slag or fly ash to replace at least 10% of the cement content of the mix.

c) Use of limestone filler to reduce the cement content of the mix by at least 10% through enhanced particle
packing, optimized aggregate gradation or other means.

Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) will be considered on an individual Contract basis subject to the Owner’s
approval. If permitted for use, SCC shall be according to the Owner’s current specification for SCC. A copy of
the specification can be obtained from:

Concrete Section
Engineer Materials Office (EMO)
Ontario Ministry of Transportation,
95 Arrow Road, North York, Ontario, M9M 2L4

1350.05.04.02 Hardened Concrete Requirements

The hardened concrete shall meet the following requirements:

a) Concrete compressive strength shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

b) Rapid chloride permeability at 28 to 32 Days when tested according to LS-433 shall be less than or equal
to:

i. 1,000 coulombs for HPC, silica fume overlays and any other concrete containing silica fume.
ii. 2,500 coulombs for all other concrete.

c) Hardened concrete air void system parameters when tested according to LS-432 shall meet the following
requirements:

i. Each core shall have a minimum air content of 3.0 %.

ii. Each core shall have a maximum spacing factor of 0.230 mm, except for HPC and silica fume overlays
for which each core shall have a maximum spacing factor of 0.250 mm.

1350.05.04.03 Plastic Concrete Requirements

Target values for air content and slump shall be identified for all plastic concrete on mix design Forms A and B.

The plastic concrete shall meet the following requirements:

November 2024 Page 7 of 33 [Link] 1350

a) Concrete shall be free of lumps and segregation and shall have consistent air content and slump throughout
each load.

b) Plastic air content shall meet the requirements specified in Table 1.

c) Slump shall meet the requirements specified in Table 1. The maximum allowable slump, including
tolerance, shall be 100 mm, except for tremie concrete, which shall have a maximum slump of 180 mm,
including tolerance.

d) The concrete temperature at the time of discharge from the truck shall be at or between 10 and 28 °C, with
the exception of HPC and silica fume overlays, which shall be at or between 10 and 25 °C.

When superplasticizer is to be added to the concrete according to the Use of Admixtures clause, the following
shall apply:

a) For superplasticizers added at the plant, the target slump for the concrete shall be identified after the
addition of the superplasticizer. The tolerance on the measurement of concrete slump after addition of
superplasticizer shall be ± 30 mm and the maximum slump, including tolerance, shall not exceed 230 mm.

b) For superplasticizers added at the site, the target slumps for the concrete shall be identified both prior to
and after the addition of the superplasticizer. The tolerance on the measurement of concrete slump prior to
the addition of superplasticizer shall be ± 20 mm and the maximum slump, including tolerance, shall not
exceed 100 mm. The tolerance on the measurement of concrete slump after addition of superplasticizer
shall be ± 30 mm and the maximum slump, including tolerance, shall not exceed 230 mm.

1350.05.05 Proprietary Patching Materials

Proprietary patching materials shall be from the Ministry’s List of Concrete Patching Materials. The list shall be
obtained from the Contract Administrator.

1350.05.06 Water

Water used for production shall be according to OPSS 1302.

1350.06 EQUIPMENT

1350.06.01 Batching Plant

The batching plant and equipment shall be certified by the RMCAO prior to producing concrete for the work,
including concrete for any trial batches, and shall meet the requirements for certification throughout the
production of concrete.

1350.06.02 Delivery Equipment

Delivery equipment shall be truck mixers, agitator trucks, or non-agitating equipment. Use of non-agitating
equipment shall be restricted to delivery for placement of concrete base, concrete pavement or Portland cement
treated open graded drainage layer (OGDL).

Truck mixers shall consist of concrete mixers mounted on a truck or other vehicle used for the complete mixing
of concrete ingredients after they have been batched at the plant. All truck mixers shall be certified by RMCAO
and shall display valid certification stickers.

Agitator trucks shall consist of drums or containers mounted on trucks or other vehicles in which completely
mixed concrete is kept sufficiently agitated during delivery to prevent segregation.

November 2024 Page 8 of 33 [Link] 1350

Non-agitating equipment shall consist of containers mounted on trucks for delivering completely mixed
concrete. The body of the container shall be smooth, watertight, made of steel, and equipped with gates that
permit control of the discharge of the concrete.

When concrete is discharged from the delivery equipment into a container or other piece of equipment, prior to
being discharged into the work, the container or other equipment shall be clean and free of dirt and debris. Any
container or other equipment used shall be acceptable to the Owner.

Use of mobile mixers is not permitted.

1350.07 PRODUCTION

1350.07.01 General

Concrete shall only be produced at a batching plant. A back-up plant shall be identified for all post-tensioned
deck placements.

When multiple plants supply concrete for the same component, all plants, including primary and back-up, shall
produce the same mix design using the same aggregates, cementing materials, and admixtures.

The supplementary cementing material shall be weighed separately from the cement, except when the cement
and supplementary cementing materials are supplied in blended form.

The entire contents of the mixer shall be discharged and the mixer completely emptied of wash water prior to
loading of a new concrete batch. When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, it shall not be loaded beyond
its maximum mixing capacity.

Cementing materials shall not be added by bags or sacks, nor from a storage facility remote from the ready mix
plant.

1350.07.02 Temperature Control

Aggregates shall be heated using a method that ensures uniform temperature distribution, avoiding the
formation of localized hot spots.

Frozen lumps of aggregate shall not be added to the concrete.

When ice is used as part of mixing water, the ice shall be measured by mass and shall be completely melted
by the time concrete mixing is completed.

1350.07.03 Mixing Time and Mixing Rate

The minimum mixing time for concrete shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer or the
minimum time required to produce concrete meeting the requirements of this specification, whichever is greater.

When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of concrete prior to transferring to a truck mixer, the mixing
time shall be no more than is required to intermingle the ingredients. After transfer to a truck mixer, further
mixing at the designated mixing speed shall be carried out.

After completion of mixing, the truck mixer drum shall be rotated at the designed agitating speed until discharge
of concrete commences.

November 2024 Page 9 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.07.04 Delivery

1350.07.04.01 General

Concrete that is transported in non-agitating equipment shall be covered. Concrete delivered by means of
agitator trucks or truck mixers shall be transported after completion of mixing.

1350.07.04.02 Discharge Time

When concrete is transported to the site by means of agitating or mixing equipment, discharge of the concrete
into the work shall be completed within 1.5 hours after introduction of the mixing water to the cement and
aggregates, except when the air temperature exceeds 28 °C and the concrete temperature exceeds 25 °C, the
concrete shall be discharged into the work within 1 hour after the introduction of the mixing water.

When concrete or OGDL is transported by means of non-agitating equipment, discharge into the work shall be
completed within 30 minutes after introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates.

Use of retarders or other admixtures does not change the specified concrete discharge time.

1350.07.04.03 Delivery Ticket

Each load shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket. The following information shall be printed on each ticket
at the plant using an automated printing device:

a) Name and location of plant.

b) Date, including year, month, and Day.

c) Contract number.

d) Truck number.

e) Time of batching concrete. Where an electronic ticketing system is not used, time shall be stamped by a
time clock within 5 minutes of batching.

f) Mix design number assigned by the Contractor or the supplier’s unique mix design number verified to
correspond to the mix design number assigned by the Contractor.

g) Specified minimum 28-Day compressive strength of concrete.

In addition, the following shall be recorded in writing on the delivery ticket:

a) The amount of any material added after batching.

b) Rejection of a load or part thereof, if applicable.

c) Time truck arrived at the job site.

d) The time the truck finished discharging into the work.

November 2024 Page 10 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.07.05 Material Sampling and Testing

1350.07.05.01 Contractor Sampling for Quality Control Purposes

The Contractor may obtain samples of plastic concrete for quality control purposes. The Contractor shall not
carry out sampling or destructive testing of hardened concrete in the work for quality control purposes without
obtaining the written permission of the Owner in advance. The Owner’s denial of permission shall not absolve
the Contractor for the quality of concrete.

1350.07.05.02 Sampling of Water, Admixtures, Limestone Filler, and Cementing Materials

Samples of all cementing materials, admixtures, limestone filler and water (when other than municipal drinking
water is used) shall be obtained according to the frequencies shown in Table 2, in the presence of the Contract
Administrator, for testing by the Owner.

Samples of admixtures and water shall be protected from freezing and high temperatures. Cementing materials
samples shall be protected from moisture.

1350.07.05.03 Testing of Plastic Concrete

Field sampling and testing of plastic concrete shall be performed by a person holding one of the following
certifications:

a) Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories (CCIL) Certified Concrete Testing Technician; or

b) ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1; or

c) CSA Standard Concrete Field Testing Technician.

This person shall always have a valid, original certification card issued by the certifying agency in their
possession.

Samples for determining acceptance of concrete for air and slump shall be grab samples taken according to
CSA A23.2-1C after approximately 10% of the load has been discharged into the work. The discharge shall be
stopped and no additional concrete shall be discharged or placed into the work until samples have been tested
and found acceptable. If the test results indicate that the concrete does not meet the specified requirements
and adjustments permitted in the Acceptance and Field Adjustments of Plastic Concrete clause cannot produce
acceptable concrete, the remainder of the load shall be rejected.

Concrete temperature shall be measured according to CSA A23.2-17C. Slump shall be measured according to
CSA A23.2-5C. Air content shall be measured according to CSA A23.2-4C. The air meter shall be calibrated at
least once a year according to CSA A23.2-4C and a copy of the calibration certificate shall be with the air meter
and available for review when requested by the Contract Administrator.

1350.07.05.04 Frequency of Testing Slump, Air Content, and Temperature

Quality control testing consisting of slump, air content, and temperature determinations shall be carried out on
each load or batch of concrete until satisfactory control is established. Satisfactory control shall be established
each Day. It is established when concrete from five consecutive loads or batches is within the specified
requirements without field adjustments as defined in the Acceptance and Field Adjustments of Plastic Concrete
clause. If any field adjustments are required, testing on each load shall be continued until five consecutive loads
or batches meet the requirements with no field adjustment. After satisfactory control has been established,
testing shall be carried out on every third load. If testing indicates that a load does not meet the requirements,
testing shall resume on each load until satisfactory control is established. The Contract Administrator may
require testing of additional loads or batches of concrete.

November 2024 Page 11 of 33 [Link] 1350

If multiple plants supply concrete, satisfactory control shall be established for each plant.

In addition to the above, air content, slump, and temperature tests shall be carried out whenever compressive test
cylinders are cast.

1350.07.05.05 Acceptance and Field Adjustments of Plastic Concrete

The Contractor shall be responsible for all quality control inspection and testing required to ensure that plastic
concrete included in the work is according to the submitted mix design and meets the specified requirements
for air content, slump, temperature, Visual Acceptance of Plastic Concrete clause, delivery time, and uniformity.

Concrete which does not meet the specified requirements for air content, slump, temperature, Visual
Acceptance of Plastic Concrete clause, delivery time or uniformity shall be rejected and not used in work.

Slump of concrete shall be measured prior to and after the addition of superplasticizer. When superplasticizer
is added at the plant according to the Use of Admixtures clause, the slump shall be measured after the addition
of superplasticizer. Air content shall be measured after any addition of the superplasticizer.

For non-superplasticized concrete, when the measured slump is higher than specified and there is time
available to discharge the concrete within the specified time limit, the Contractor shall be permitted to retest the
slump once using the unused portion of the same concrete sample. Slump shall be retested within 5 minutes
of the completion of the original test.

For superplasticized concrete, when the measured slump is higher than specified and there is time available to
discharge the concrete within the specified time limit, the Contractor shall be permitted to wait and retest the
slump using a new sample of concrete when superplasticizer is plant added and rapid chloride permeability is
an acceptance requirement, or superplasticizer is added on site and the measured slump prior to addition of
superplasticizer is within specified limits.

When the measured plastic air content exceeds the upper test limit and there is time available within the
discharge time limit specified, the Contractor shall be permitted to rotate the load at agitation speed and re-test
the air content. The use of additives to reduce the air content shall not be permitted.

When a truck mixer is used, the following field adjustments may be carried out prior to acceptance of the load:

a) When the measured air content is low, air-entraining admixture may be added.

b) When the measured or estimated slump is low, the following adjustments may be made:

i. For concrete mixes that do not include superplasticizer, water may be added:

(1) Prior to discharge of concrete from the truck has started; or

(2) When the measured slump of concrete is lower than the maximum targeted range.

ii. For concrete mixes with site-added superplasticizer:

(1) Water may be added before superplasticizer is added at the site. Water additions may be done prior
to discharge of concrete from the truck has started or when the measured slump of concrete is lower
than the maximum targeted range.

(2) No water shall be added after the addition of a superplasticizer. Additional doses of superplasticizer
may be added.

iii. For concrete mixes with plant added superplasticizer:

November 2024 Page 12 of 33 [Link] 1350

 (1) No water shall be added.

(2) Superplasticizer may be added.

No field adjustments shall be carried out after concrete has been accepted, with the exception of
superplasticized concrete. For superplasticized concrete, addition of a superplasticizer to increase the slump
to assist in placing shall be permitted.

When any material is added to the concrete, the load of concrete shall be mixed for 30 revolutions or more at
the designated mixing speed to ensure that the concrete is uniformly mixed. The load shall be re-tested for
acceptance.

1350.07.05.06 Visual Acceptance of Plastic Concrete

The Contractor shall visually inspect plastic concrete during discharge and placement to identify the presence
of any excessive bleeding, segregation, or lumps.

If any segregation is identified, the Contractor shall immediately reject the entire load of concrete.

Any visible lumps present in the concrete shall be removed before concrete is placed in the work. If more than
three visible lumps are present in a load of concrete, the remainder of the load shall be immediately rejected
and no further concrete from that truckload shall be placed in the work.

If more than three truckloads during the Day’s work are observed to contain more than three lumps per truck,
concrete placement shall be stopped at the end of the Day or at the end of the placement of the specific structure
component, whichever comes first.

No further concrete shall be placed until all of the following occur:

a) An explanation has been submitted to the Contract Administrator of the reasons for the lumps and
identification of steps that shall be taken to eliminate the reoccurrence of lumps in future work.

b) A trial batch has been carried out in the presence of the Contract Administrator and the Contract
Administrator has verified that the concrete is free of lumps.

c) The Contract Administrator has granted written permission for placement to proceed.

1350.07.05.07 Within-Batch Uniformity of Plastic Concrete

When required by the Contract Administrator, determination of the within-batch uniformity of the plastic concrete
shall be carried out by testing air content, slump, and density according to CSA A23.2-4C, CSA A23.2-5C, and
CSA A23.2-6C, respectively. A 24 hour notice shall be granted when density testing is required as part of within-
batch uniformity determination. No advance notice shall be granted for carrying out the slump and air portion of
the uniformity testing.

Tests shall be carried out on samples of concrete obtained when approximately 10%, 50%, and 90% of the
batch has been discharged while the mixer is being emptied at a normal operating rate. The minimum size of
sample shall be 30 litres. Between samples, the mixer shall not be allowed to turn in the mixing direction.

The acceptance and rejection limits for uniformity shall be according to Table 3. When the result of each test is
equal to or less than the acceptance limit, the concrete is uniform. If the result of any single test is greater than
the rejection limit, the concrete shall be deemed non-uniform.

If the result of any single test exceeds the acceptance limit and is not greater than the rejection limit, all tests shall
be made on the next consecutive batch or load delivered by that mixing equipment.

November 2024 Page 13 of 33 [Link] 1350

If, after testing one additional batch or load, the test result is greater than the acceptance limit, the concrete is
non-uniform.

If the concrete is non-uniform and the mixing equipment is a stationary mixer, no more concrete shall be produced
in it until batch uniformity has been demonstrated. If the unit is a truck mixer, the truck mixer shall not be used
again.

1350.07.05.08 Submission of Plastic Concrete Test Results

After each Day’s work, a copy of the delivery ticket for each load of concrete, along with a daily summary and
a completed MTO form PH-CC-845, Daily Concrete Load Test Results, shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator. The daily summary shall include the following:

a) Time truck arrived on site;

b) Time truck finished discharging into the work;

c) Air contents, and slumps prior to and after any additions;

d) Concrete temperature;

e) Any adjustments made to each load of concrete, including volume of any water or superplasticizer added;
and

f) Rejection of a load or part thereof.

1350.07.05.09 Compressive Strength

1350.[Link] General

Prior to placing concrete, an estimate of concrete volumes for each minimum specified 28-Day compressive
strength shall be provided to the Contract Administrator. Acceptance method A shall be used when the quantity
of concrete of a specified minimum compressive strength is 100 m3 or more. Acceptance method B shall be used
for concrete in expansion joints, tremie concrete, or when the quantity of concrete of a specified minimum
compressive strength is less than 100 m3. The Contract Administrator shall confirm the method(s) to be used.

1350.[Link] Acceptance Method A

For acceptance method A, the Contract Administrator shall determine the lot and sublot size after discussion
with the Contractor and before any concrete is placed. Each lot shall contain concrete of one specified minimum
28-Day strength. There shall be only one lot of each specified strength of concrete; however, if the quantity of
concrete of one specified strength is greater than 5,000 m3, the Contract Administrator shall consider requests
to divide the concrete into two lots based on placement in separate structures or in different construction
seasons.

Each lot shall be divided into sublots of approximately 10 m3 to a maximum of 100 m3. Sublot sizes shall be
established based on the estimated concrete quantity such that each lot contains a minimum of 10 sublots. One
set of acceptance and one set of referee cylinders shall be made from each sublot. The loads of concrete to be
sampled shall be selected by the Contract Administrator on a random basis.

In addition to acceptance cylinders cast on a random basis, the Contract Administrator may request additional
test cylinders to be cast. The results from these requested cylinders will be used for assessment of structural
adequacy, information purposes, or for other uses by the Owner.

November 2024 Page 14 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.[Link] Acceptance Method B

One set of acceptance and referee cylinders, each shall be cast for every 20 m 3 of concrete placed or one set
per Day, whichever is more frequent.

1350.[Link] Test Cylinders

The Contractor shall cast, cure, and transport cylinders for compressive strength testing by the Owner.

Every time a set of acceptance cylinders is cast, a second set of cylinders shall be cast for referee testing
purposes, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

Concrete test cylinders for compressive strength testing for acceptance and for referee testing purposes, where
required, shall be cast, cured, and transported according to CSA A23.2-3C. Referee cylinders shall be cured
and transported to the Regional Quality Assurance Laboratory, along with the acceptance cylinders. A set of
cylinders for concrete made with aggregate of nominal maximum size larger than 19 mm shall consist of two
150 mm diameter x 300 mm long cylinders. For all other concrete, a set of cylinders shall consist of three
100 mm diameter x 200 mm long cylinders.

Concrete test cylinders for early strength determination shall be cast, cured, and transported as specified in the
Contract Documents. No referee cylinders shall be cast when cylinders are prepared for determination of early
strength or are requested by the Owner, for information purposes.

All concrete test cylinders shall be cast in moulds. The moulds shall be single use moulds according to
CSA A23.2-1D and made of plastic with a lid. The lids shall be chemically and physically compatible with the
concrete and shall provide watertight closure for the moulds.

Test information shall be recorded on MTO form PH-CC 322, Concrete Construction Report and shall be submitted
with each set of concrete cylinders.

The concrete temperature shall be continuously recorded and monitored immediately adjacent to the cylinders
during the field-curing period. The maximum time interval for recording the temperature shall be every 15 minutes.

1350.[Link] Submission of Cylinder Curing Records

Cylinder curing temperature records shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at the completion of the
field-curing period.

1350.07.05.10 Air Void System Parameters

Cores for evaluation of air void system parameters shall be required for the categories of concrete specified in
Table 4.

Cores shall be removed from the hardened concrete for testing by the Owner. Cores shall be taken at random
locations specified by the Contract Administrator. All cores shall be removed when the concrete is between 7 to
10 Days of age, and cores from bridge decks and concrete culverts shall be removed prior to the application of
any waterproofing membrane.

The lot sizes, core size, and number of cores shall be as specified in Table 4. When two cores are required for
a lot, the lot shall be divided into two, and one core shall be removed at a random location within each half of
the lot. For concrete barriers and barrier walls on structures, the cores shall be removed from the lower sloped
portion of the wall at the designated locations. For parapet walls, the cores shall be removed from the lower
one-third of the wall at the designated locations. Steel and glass fibre reinforced polymer (GFRP) reinforcement
and other embedded material shall be avoided when possible while coring. The Contractor shall use an
appropriate covermeter to establish reinforcement or other embedded material locations, prior to coring.

November 2024 Page 15 of 33 [Link] 1350

For concrete patches and refacing where the total area of patches or refacing on a structure is less than 20 m 2,
no cores shall be required, but one 100 x 200 mm cylinder shall be prepared according to the Test Cylinders
clause for testing by the Owner.

The Contract number, lot number and exact location of each individual core shall be marked legibly on the core
with durable ink. Cores or cylinders, as applicable, shall be placed in a plastic bag and given to the Contract
Administrator along with Form A of the concrete mix design for the component.

1350.07.05.11 Rapid Chloride Permeability

Cores for evaluation of rapid chloride permeability shall be required for the categories of concrete according to
Table 4.

Cores shall be removed from the hardened concrete for testing by the Owner. Coring shall be carried out
according to CSA A23.2-14C. Cores shall be taken at random locations specified by the Contract Administrator.
All cores shall be removed when the concrete is between 7 to 10 Days of age and cores from bridge decks and
concrete culverts shall be removed prior to the application of any waterproofing membrane. Cores from footings
shall be removed from the above ground portion of the footing.

The lot sizes, core sizes, and number of cores shall be as specified in Table 4. If the total quantity of concrete
in a category or quantity of concrete in a category during a construction stage is less than that specified in
Table 4, two cores per stage shall be removed except for overlays, concrete patches and refacing for which
four cores per stage shall be removed.

One core shall be removed at a random location specified by the Contract Administrator and the second core
shall be removed at a location no more than 1 m from the location of the first core. When four cores are required
from a lot, the same procedure shall be followed with a second random location selected within the lot. Cores
shall not contain steel or GFRP reinforcement, or other embedded material. The Contractor shall use an
appropriate covermeter to establish reinforcement or other embedded material locations, prior to coring.

The Contract number, lot number and exact location of each individual core shall be marked legibly on the core
with durable ink. Cores shall be placed in a plastic bag sealed to prevent loss of moisture and given to the
Contract Administrator along with Form A of the concrete mix design for the component.

1350.07.06 Filling of Core Holes

Each core hole shall be filled immediately after coring with a proprietary patching material. The patching material
shall be comparable to the surrounding concrete in terms of strength and permeability. The patching material
shall be mixed, handled, and cured according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Immediately prior to filling, the
inside surface of each core hole shall be cleaned of the paste left from the coring operation by nylon brushing
and all free water shall be removed. The patch shall be finished flush with the surface of the surrounding
concrete. All excess material shall be removed from the surface of the concrete. When filling core holes, the
proprietary patching material shall be cured with curing compound according to OPSS 904, or shall be cured
as recommended by the manufacturer of the proprietary patching material.

1350.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1350.08.01 Acceptance of Concrete Compressive Strength

1350.08.01.01 General

Lots for compressive strength shall be as identified in the Acceptance Method A or the Acceptance Method B
clause of the Construction section, as applicable.

Compressive strength shall be determined according to LS-407 and LS-426.

November 2024 Page 16 of 33 [Link] 1350

The compressive strength result of a sublot shall be the average of the set of three acceptance cylinders made
from the sublot, rounded to one decimal place, except for concrete made with aggregate of nominal maximum
size larger than 19 mm where the sublot result shall be the average of two cylinders.

The individual test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available. The Contractor shall
forward individual test results and monthly summaries to the concrete supplier.

When any individual strength test result falls below the specified minimum 28-Day compressive strength by
more than 4.0 MPa, the Contract Administrator may require the Contractor to take and test 100 mm diameter
concrete cores to determine whether individual sections of concrete are structurally adequate and whether
remedial work or removal is required. When required, cores shall be removed in groups of three at locations
specified by the Contract Administrator. Cores shall be removed according to CSA A23.2-14C and tested for
compressive strength according to LS-410.

If required, determination of structural adequacy is independent of and in addition to any payment reduction.
Core results shall not replace cylinder results in any bonus or payment reduction calculations. Where extensive
design calculation is required in order to confirm structural adequacy, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner
for all costs incurred up to a maximum of $5,000.00 per occurrence.

1350.08.01.02 Acceptance Method A

Acceptance of concrete compressive strength for each lot shall be based on the mean and standard deviation
of the compressive strength results of all sublots contained in the lot.

The mean and standard deviation of the results and forecast potential bonus or payment reduction, if any, will
be submitted to the Contractor at monthly intervals.

The Contract Administrator will calculate the percent within limits (PWL) according to LS 101, using the specified
compressive strength as the lower limit.

When the lot PWL is greater than 95%, the Contractor shall receive a bonus, in $/m3, as calculated by the
following:

Bonus = PWL - 95

When the lot PWL is greater than or equal to 90% and less than or equal to 95%, there shall be no bonus or
payment reduction due to concrete compressive strength.

When the lot PWL is less than 90% and greater than or equal to 50%, the Contractor shall be assessed a
payment reduction, in $/m3, as calculated by the following:

Payment Reduction = 90 - PWL

When the lot PWL is less than 50%, the lot is unacceptable and is subject to removal and replacement. The
Contractor may submit an alternative in writing for the Owner’s consideration for unacceptable lots. If the
Contract Administrator determines that an unacceptable lot may remain in the work, it shall be subject to the
calculated payment reduction.

For the purpose of a bonus or payment reduction, the quantity of concrete in each lot will be calculated by the
Contract Administrator as the sum of the following:

a) The payment quantity for items paid by unit price per cubic metre of concrete.

b) The theoretical quantity indicated in the Contract Documents for items paid by lump sum, provided the
actual quantity is within ± 3% of the theoretical quantity.

November 2024 Page 17 of 33 [Link] 1350

c) The quantity of concrete in each lot shall be calculated from the quantities indicated in the Contract
Drawings for items, where these quantities are listed.

d) The quantity based on the neat lines called for in the Contract Drawings, where none of the above methods
are applicable.

1350.08.01.03 Acceptance Method B

Concrete compressive strength shall be considered acceptable when it meets the following:

a) The average of all groups of three consecutive compressive strength tests shall be equal to or greater than
the specified strength; and

b) No individual strength test shall be more than 4.0 MPa below the specified strength.

Unacceptable concrete shall be subject to removal and replacement.

The Contractor may submit an alternative in writing for the Owner’s consideration for unacceptable concrete.

1350.08.01.04 Referee Testing Based on Duplicate Cylinders

1350.[Link] General

The referee testing process for concrete compressive strength is based on duplicate cylinders cast at the same
time as the acceptance cylinders.

Referee testing of compressive strength may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days of
receiving the test results for the acceptance cylinders.

The referee laboratory shall be designated by the Owner based on the applicable roster. Referee test results
will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

If the referee test result is more than 4.0 MPa below the specified strength, the result shall be reviewed to
determine if structural adequacy is in question and, if so, the relevant provisions of this specification shall be
followed.

1350.[Link] Acceptance Method A

If the difference between the referee test result and the acceptance test result is less than the confirmation
value, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and the acceptance test result shall be used in the
determination of acceptance and payment for the concrete. If the difference between the referee test result and
the acceptance test result is greater than the confirmation value, the acceptance test result is then not confirmed
and the acceptance test result shall be disregarded and not used in the determination of acceptance and
payment. The confirmation value for confirming the acceptance test result shall be the greater of 10% of the
specified strength or 10% of the strength of the acceptance cylinders, expressed to one decimal place.

When acceptance results are eliminated from the analysis as a result of the referee process, the concrete shall
be assessed based on the available strength results for the lot.

If acceptance test results from multiple sublots are eliminated such that there are fewer than four acceptance
test results available for the lot, Acceptance Method B shall be used for acceptance of the concrete.

November 2024 Page 18 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.[Link] Acceptance Method B

If the difference between the referee test result and the acceptance test result is less than the confirmation
value, the acceptance test result is confirmed, and the acceptance test result shall be used in the determination
of acceptance of the lot. If the difference between the referee test result and the acceptance test result is greater
than the confirmation value, the acceptance test result is not confirmed, and the acceptance test result shall be
disregarded and the referee test result shall replace the acceptance test result in the acceptance requirements
of this specification. The confirmation value for confirming the acceptance test result shall be the greater of 10%
of the specified strength or 10% of the strength of the acceptance specimens, expressed to one decimal place.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing Cost

The cost of compressive strength referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee result confirms the acceptance test result, the Contractor shall be charged the cost of
compressive strength referee testing. When the referee result does not confirm the acceptance test result, the
Owner will bear the cost.

1350.08.02 Acceptance of Air Void System in Hardened Concrete

1350.08.02.01 General

The lots for air void system shall be according to Table 4.

One half of each core shall be tested to determine the acceptability of the concrete. The core shall be tested
according to LS-432. The other half of each core will be retained by the Owner for audit purposes.

Individual test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

1350.08.02.02 Basis of Acceptance

For a lot to be considered acceptable, each core shall have an air content of 3.0% or more and spacing factor
of 0.230 mm or less in all concrete, except for silica fume overlays and HPC where the spacing factor shall be
0.250 mm or less. Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment or bonus payment.

When testing is done on one core per lot, an unacceptable lot is a lot represented by one core that fails to meet
the air void system parameters.

When testing is done on two cores per lot, an unacceptable lot is a lot represented by one or two cores that fail
to meet the air void system parameters.

Unacceptable lots shall be removed and replaced except where the Owner permits the work to remain in place.
The removal and replacement of unacceptable lots shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. The replacement
lots shall be evaluated for acceptance on the same basis as the original lot. When the Owner permits the work
to remain in place, it shall be subject to the calculated payment reduction and shall not be eligible for bonus.

For the purpose of calculating a bonus or payment reduction, the Contract Administrator will round-off the
spacing factor test data to two decimal places and the air content test data to one decimal place according to
LS-100 and will determine the quantity of concrete in the lots using the dimensions specified in the Contract
Documents.

When one core is tested per lot, the bonus payment for an acceptable lot shall be the bonus value corresponding
to the core according to Table 5. When two cores are tested per lot, the bonus payment for an acceptable lot
shall be calculated by averaging bonus values corresponding to individual core results.

November 2024 Page 19 of 33 [Link] 1350

Bonus payment for a lot represented by two cores shall be calculated according to the following:

B1 + B2
B=
2
Where: B = bonus in $/m3 of concrete in the lot
B1 and B2 = bonus for cores 1 and 2 in $/m3 of concrete in the lot from Table 5

Bonus for Acceptable Lot = lot quantity (m3) x B

Payment for unacceptable lots shall be calculated by averaging the pay factors corresponding to individual core
results. Where one core in an unacceptable lot meets the specified requirements for air void system, the core
shall be assigned a pay factor of 100%. When only one core is tested per lot, the payment for an unacceptable
lot shall be the pay factors corresponding to the individual core result.

Payment for unacceptable lot represented by two cores shall be calculated according to the following:

P1 + P2
P=
2
Where: P = pay factor for the lot (%)
P1 and P2 = pay factor for cores 1 and 2 in % as shown in Table 6 or 7, as applicable

Payment reduction for a lot = lot quantity/tender quantity x tender lump sum price x [(100-P)/100]

Where: Lot quantity and tender quantity are in cubic metres

1350.08.02.03 Referee Testing

1350.[Link] General

Referee testing of air void system parameters may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days
of receiving the test result(s).

When referee testing is invoked, all core samples representing a lot shall be referee tested and the acceptance
test results discarded. The lot referee test results shall replace the acceptance test result in the acceptance
requirements of this specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out on the same half of the core sample that was tested for acceptance.

Cores shall be tested according to LS-432. Referee test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they
become available.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing Cost

The cost of air void system referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee results indicate that the refereed lot is acceptable, the Owner shall bear the cost. When the
referee results indicate that the refereed lot is not acceptable, the Contractor shall be charged the cost of the air
void system referee testing.

1350.08.03 Acceptance of Rapid Chloride Permeability

1350.08.03.01 General

The lots for rapid chloride permeability shall be according to Table 4.

November 2024 Page 20 of 33 [Link] 1350

Cores shall be tested according to LS-433. Acceptance testing shall be carried out at 28 to 32 Days.

For cores that are a minimum of 125 mm long, one of the two cores representing a lot shall be cut to obtain
two 50 mm long samples and tested to determine the acceptance of the lot. The second core shall be retained
for referee testing.

For overlays, patches and refacing represented by cores that are less than 125 mm long, two of the four cores
representing a lot, both from the same location, shall be cut to obtain two 50 mm samples; one sample from
each core. The two cut samples shall be tested to determine the acceptance of the lot. The remaining two cores
shall be retained for referee testing.

Individual test results will be provided to the Contractor as they become available.

1350.08.03.02 Basis of Acceptance

Acceptance of rapid chloride permeability shall be based on the average of two results obtained on two 50 mm
long samples representing a lot.

For HPC, silica fume overlays and any other concrete containing silica fume, lots with an average value of rapid
chloride permeability less than 1,000 coulombs are considered acceptable. Lots with an average value of rapid
chloride permeability exceeding 1,000 coulombs and less than or equal to 2,000 coulombs shall be considered
unacceptable but with the agreement of the Owner may be permitted to remain in the work with a payment
reduction. Lots with an average value of rapid chloride permeability exceeding 2,000 coulombs shall be rejected
and replaced.

For all other concrete, lots with an average value of rapid chloride permeability less than 2,500 coulombs are
considered acceptable. Lots with an average value of rapid chloride permeability exceeding 2,500 coulombs
and less than or equal to 3,500 coulombs shall be considered unacceptable but with the agreement of the
Owner may be permitted to remain in the work with a payment reduction. Lots with an average value of rapid
chloride permeability exceeding 3,500 coulombs shall be rejected and replaced.

For the purpose of calculating the payment reduction, the Contract Administrator shall determine the volume of
concrete in the lots using the dimensions specified in the Contract Documents.

The payment reduction shall be calculated based on individual lots and applied as follows:

For silica fume overlays, HPC and any other concrete containing silica fume:

C − 1000
PR = lot quantity x
3
For all other concrete:

C − 2500
PR = lot quantity x
3
Where:
PR = payment reduction of a lot ($)
C = average rapid chloride permeability of a lot (coulombs)
Lot quantity = volume of concrete in a lot (m³)

November 2024 Page 21 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.08.03.03 Referee Testing

1350.[Link] General

Referee testing of rapid chloride permeability may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days of
receipt of the acceptance test result.

Referee testing shall be carried out on two 50 mm long samples obtained from the reserved core representing
the lot for which referee testing was invoked, and the results shall be averaged to obtain the test result for the
lot. For overlays, patches and refacing, referee testing shall be carried out on two 50 mm long samples cut from
the two reserved cores representing the lot for which referee testing was invoked, and the results shall be
averaged to obtain the test result for the lot.

The referee laboratory will be designated by the Owner based on the applicable roster and cores shall be tested
according to LS-433 by that laboratory.

Referee test results will be provided to the Contractor as they become available.

For silica fume overlays, HPC and any other concrete containing silica fume:

a) When the referee result is greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 300 coulombs below the
acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid.

b) When the referee test result for the lot is more than 300 coulombs below the acceptance test result, the
acceptance test result is then not confirmed and the referee test result shall replace the acceptance test
result in the acceptance requirements of this specification.

For all other concrete:

a) When the referee result is greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 500 coulombs below the
acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid.

b) When the referee test result for the lot is more than 500 coulombs below the acceptance test result, the
acceptance test results is then not confirmed and the referee test result shall replace the acceptance test
result in the acceptance requirements of this specification.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing Cost

The cost of referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee result confirms the acceptance test result, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of
rapid chloride permeability referee testing. When the referee result does not confirm the acceptance test result,
the Owner shall bear the cost.

1350.08.04 Acceptance of Admixtures, Water and Cementing Materials

1350.08.04.01 Admixtures

1350.[Link] General

Air entraining admixtures will be tested by the Owner for pH and relative density. Chemical and superplasticizing
admixtures will be tested by the Owner for relative density and non-volatile content. Testing shall be according to
LS-413, LS-414, and LS-415, as applicable.

One 750 ml admixture sample shall be used for acceptance testing. The other 750 ml admixture sample shall be
reserved for referee testing.

November 2024 Page 22 of 33 [Link] 1350

Individual test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

1350.[Link] Basis of Acceptance

Relative density, pH and non-volatile content shall be according to OPSS 1303. Admixtures represented by
sample test results that fail to fall within the specified tolerances for pH, relative density, or non-volatile content
shall be deemed unacceptable and no further concrete shall be produced with that supply of admixture.

For each admixture represented by sample test results that exceed the tolerances specified by OPSS 1303 and
before any additional concrete can be placed, the Contractor shall remove and replace the admixture with a new
supply of admixture meeting the requirements of OPSS 1303.

For each sample of air-entraining admixture that exceeds the tolerances for relative density, or pH, or both,
specified in Table 8, in addition to the removal and replacement of the admixture represented by the sample, a
payment reduction of $5,000 shall be assessed.

For each chemical admixture sample that exceeds the tolerances for relative density, or non-volatile content or
both, specified in Table 8, in addition to the removal and replacement of the admixture represented by the sample,
a payment reduction of $5,000 shall be assessed.

For each superplasticizing admixture sample that exceeds the tolerances for relative density, or non-volatile
content or both, specified in Table 8, in addition to the removal and replacement of the admixture represented by
the sample, a payment reduction of $5,000 shall be assessed.

Notwithstanding the above, concrete made with admixtures that do not meet the specified requirement may be
subject to an additional financial payment reduction or removal if the deficiency has the capacity to adversely
impact the short or long-term performance of the concrete.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing

1350.[Link].01 General

Referee testing of admixtures may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days of receiving the test
results. Referee testing shall be carried out on the reserved referee sample.

The referee laboratory will be designated by the Owner based on the applicable roster. Referee samples will be
transported from the Regional Quality Assurance laboratory to the Referee Laboratory by the Owner, and testing
shall be carried out according to LS-413, LS-414, and LS-415, as applicable.

Referee test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

The referee test results shall replace the original results.

1350.[Link].02 Referee Testing Cost

The cost of referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee results indicate that the refereed sample is acceptable, the Owner will bear the cost. When the
referee results indicate that the refereed sample is not acceptable, the Contractor shall be charged the cost of the
admixture referee testing.

November 2024 Page 23 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.08.04.02 Water Other than Municipal Drinking Water

1350.[Link] General

Samples of water, other than municipal water, will be tested by the Owner according to OPSS 1302.

One 1-litre water sample shall be used for acceptance testing. The other 1-litre water sample shall be reserved
for referee testing.

Individual test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

1350.[Link] Basis of Acceptance

Water that fails the requirements of OPSS 1302 shall be deemed unacceptable and the source of water
represented by the failed samples shall not be used for making of concrete.

Concrete made with water that does not meet the specified requirements is unacceptable and may be subject to
a payment reduction or removal if there is potential for the short-term or long-term performance of the concrete to
be adversely affected.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing

1350.[Link].01 General

Referee testing of water may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days of receiving the test
results. Referee testing shall be carried out on the reserved referee sample.

The referee laboratory will be designated by the Owner based upon the applicable roster. Referee samples will
be transported from the Regional Quality Assurance laboratory to the Referee Laboratory by the Owner, and
testing shall be carried out according to OPSS 1302.

Referee test results will be provided to the Contractor, as they become available.

The referee test results shall replace the original result.

1350.[Link].02 Referee Testing Cost

The cost of referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee results indicate that the refereed sample is acceptable, the Owner will bear the cost. When the
referee results indicate that the refereed sample is not acceptable, the Contractor shall be charged the cost of the
water referee testing.

1350.08.04.03 Cementing Materials

1350.[Link] General

Cementing materials will be tested by the Owner for fineness, initial time of set, compressive strength, and slag
activity index or pozzolanic strength activity index, as applicable, according to CSA A3000.

One 10-kilogram sample shall be taken and divided into two 5-kilogram samples. One 5-kilogram sample shall be
used for acceptance testing. The second 5-kilogram sample shall be reserved for referee testing.

Individual test results will be provided to the Contractor as they become available.

November 2024 Page 24 of 33 [Link] 1350

1350.[Link] Basis of Acceptance

Only cementing materials according to OPSS 1301 shall be used for the making of concrete.

Concrete made with cementing materials that do not meet the specified requirements is unacceptable and may
be subject to payment reduction or removal if there is potential for the short-term or long-term performance of the
concrete to be adversely affected.

1350.[Link] Referee Testing

1350.[Link].01 General

Referee testing of cementing materials may only be invoked by the Contractor within 3 Business Days of receiving
the test results. Referee testing shall be carried out on the reserved referee sample.

Referee testing will be carried out according to CSA A3000 by the Owner’s laboratory or an independent laboratory
acceptable to the Contractor and the Owner, in the presence of the Contractor or their designate.

Referee results will be provided to the Contractor, as they are available.

The referee test results shall replace the original result.

1350.[Link].02 Referee Testing Cost

The cost of referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the referee results indicate that the refereed sample is acceptable, the Owner will bear the cost. When the
referee results indicate that the refereed sample is not acceptable, the Contractor shall be charged the cost of the
cementing material referee testing.

November 2024 Page 25 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 1
Slump and Air Content of Plastic Concrete

Slump Air Content in Plastic

Component mm Concrete
(Note 1) %

Slip formed Concrete Barriers Target slump ± 10 Target air ± 1.5

Tremie Concrete Target slump ± 30 When required 5.0 ± 1.5
All Other Concrete Target slump ± 20 Target air ± 1.5

Note:
1. When superplasticizer is used, requirements shall be as specified in the Concrete subsection.

November 2024 Page 26 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 2
Admixtures, Water, Limestone Filler and Cementing Materials - Minimum
Frequencies for Sampling and Testing

Material Use or Type of Minimum Sampling Frequency Minimum Sample Size

Construction (Note 1) (Note 2)

Air Entraining and

One sample shall be taken at the Two samples shall be
Chemical and
All concrete. beginning of concrete placement in taken. Each shall be at
Superplasticizing
each calendar year, no more than least 750 ml.
Admixtures
30 Days prior to concrete placement.
Water Other Than One additional sample shall be taken Two samples shall be
Municipal Drinking All concrete. during the calendar year. taken. Each shall be at
Water least 1 litre.

Concrete One sample per Contract or one

pavement and sample per each 10,000 m³ of
Cementing Materials: concrete base. concrete, whichever is more frequent.
Portland Cement,
10 kg of each
Portland Limestone Precast
One sample per calendar year. cementing material
Cement, Slag, Fly components.
used.
Ash, Blended Silica
Fume Cement One sample per Contract or one
All other concrete. sample per each 5,000 m³ of
concrete, whichever is more frequent.

Notes:
1. Additional samples shall be taken every time there is a change in material source.
2. Admixture and water samples shall be contained in a new, clean 1 litre bottle of a suitable plastic with a
lid, accompanied by MTO form PH-CC-340, Field Sample Data Sheet - Concrete. Cementing material
samples shall be contained in a canvas bag with plastic insert, accompanied by MTO form PH-CC-340,
Field Sample Data Sheet - Concrete.
A. Minimum sampling and testing frequencies for limestone filler shall be the same as those specified for
cementing materials.

TABLE 3
Determination of Within-Batch Uniformity of the Concrete

Range Between Highest and Lowest Values of Three Test

Samples
Test
Acceptable Rejectable
If Equal to or Less Than If Greater Than

Density, kg/m3 32 50
Air Content in Plastic Concrete, % 0.7 1.0
Slump, mm 30 50

November 2024 Page 27 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 4
Cores for Air Void System (AVS) & Rapid Chloride Permeability (RCP) Determination

Number Number
of of
Category Lot Size Core Size Cores Cores
Per Lot Per Lot
for AVS for RCP
Bridge Deck-Thin Slab Deck 500 m2 per stage.
Bridge Deck-Post-Tensioned
300 m2 per stage.
Deck
Between piers or between
Arches and Spandrels
pier and abutment.
Concrete Buttress and
Each.
Concrete Appurtenances
Each abutment, wingwall,
Abutment, Wingwall, Cast-In-
cast-in-place retaining wall or
Place Retaining Wall
a stage thereof.
Pier Column(s) Each pier column. (Note 1)
Pier Cap Each pier cap
Approach Slab 500 m2 per stage.
Protections slabs and 300 m2 of area per stage.
Distribution slabs
Caissons (Bridges) Each. 100 mm diameter
Slip formed: 1,000 lineal and 200 mm long 2 2
Concrete Barrier (not on metres. (Note 3) (Note 6)
structure) Formed, including transitions:
250 lineal metres. (Note 3)
Sidewalk on Structure and
500 lineal metres per stage.
Curb on Structure
Median on Structure 500 lineal metres per stage.
Parapet or Barrier Wall on 500 lineal metres per
Structure structure per stage.
Toe Wall 500 lineal metres per stage.
1,000 m2 of floor area of cast-
in-place culvert. (Note 2)
Culvert All cast-in-place concrete
associated with a precast
culvert, per stage.
Concrete Footings (for high
mast poles and sign supports 40 m3 (Note 4)
which extend above ground)

Continued on Next Page

November 2024 Page 28 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 4 - Continued from Previous Page

Number Number
of of
Category Lot Size Core Size Cores Cores
Per Lot Per Lot
for AVS for RCP
All other Concrete in 100 mm diameter
Structural Components not Per Day’s work and 200 mm long 2 2
listed above (Note 6)
Mud Slabs / Working Slabs Not applicable (NA) NA NA NA
150 mm diameter
Approximately equal in size and a minimum of 70 1 0
Concrete Patches and and not greater than 100 m2 mm long (Note 6).
Refacing of patches or refacing per 100 mm diameter
individual structure. and a minimum of 70 0 4
mm long (Note 6).
150 mm diameter
and a minimum of 70 1 0
300 m2 of overlay per mm long (Note 6).
Overlays
individual structure. 100 mm diameter
and a minimum of 70 0 4
mm long (Note 6).
100 mm diameter
Not
Sidewalk 500 lineal metres. (Note 3) and full depth of 2
required
concrete (Note 6).
100 mm diameter
and a minimum of Not
Curb with Gutter 500 lineal metres. (Note 3) 2
125 mm long (Note required
6).
Concrete Pavement and
According to OPSS 350
Concrete Base
According to the Contract
Precast Elements According to the Contract Documents
Documents
Notes:
1. Multiple pier columns from the same pier grouping cast on the same Day shall be grouped into a single
lot.
2. The total length of a component shall be added together and then divided into lots of specified size.
3. The total floor area of a component shall be added together and then divided into lots of specified size.
Where a culvert has no floor, the area of the upper surface shall be used as the basis of determining the
lots.
4. The total volume of concrete in footings for high mast poles and sign supports per Contract shall be added
together and then divided into lots of specified size. Cores shall be taken from above ground portion of
the footing.
5. If typical depth of overlay is less than 70 mm, the Contract Administrator shall identify areas for coring
that provide the required core lengths.
6. The Contract Administrator may direct the Contractor to obtain cores with different dimensions for certain
components.

November 2024 Page 29 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 5
Bonuses for Air Void System Parameters in All Hardened Concrete
$/m3

Air Content, %

3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.1

<0.100 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
Spacing Factor, mm

0.100 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.110 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.120 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.130 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.140 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.150 0 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.160 0 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 2 1 0
0.170 0 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 0
0.180 0 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 0
0.190 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
0.200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Notes:
A. For silica fume overlays and HPC, when a core has an air content of 3% or higher and a spacing factor of 0.250 mm or lower, but its air void system
parameters are outside the range shown in Table 5, it shall be assigned a value of 0 $/m3 for the purpose of calculating a bonus.
B. For all other concrete, when a core has an air content of 3% or higher and a spacing factor of 0.230 mm or lower, but its air void system parameters are
outside the range shown in Table 5, it shall be assigned a value of 0 $/m3 for the purpose of calculating a bonus.

November 2024 Page 30 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 6
Pay Factor for Air Void System Parameters of Hardened Concrete for Concrete Other Than Silica Fume Overlays and HPC
Pay Factor in % of Tender Item Price Per Lot

Air Content, %
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 >2.9
<0.100 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.100 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.110 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.120 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.130 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.140 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.150 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.160 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.170 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.180 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.190 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
Spacing Factor, mm

0.200 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.210 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.220 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.230 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.240 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95
0.250 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95
0.260 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93
0.270 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90
0.280 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88
0.290 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86
0.300 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83
0.310 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81
0.320 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79
0.330 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76
0.340 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74
0.350 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71
0.360 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69
0.370 19 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67
0.380 17 19 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62 64
0.390 14 17 19 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59 62
0.400 12 14 17 19 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45 48 50 52 55 57 59
>0.400 0 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 19 21 24 26 29 31 33 36 38 40 43 45
Notes:
A. When a core in an unacceptable lot has an air content of 3% or higher and a spacing factor of 0.230 mm or lower, the core shall be assigned a value
of 100% for the purpose of calculating a payment reduction.
B. Thick line between 0.230 and 0.240 mm spacing factor indicates maximum acceptable spacing factor.

November 2024 Page 31 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 7
Pay Factor for Air Void System Parameters of Hardened Concrete for HPC and Silica Fume Overlays
Pay Factor in % of Tender Item Price Per Lot

Air Content, %
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 >2.9
<0.100 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.100 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.110 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.120 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.130 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.140 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.150 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.160 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.170 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.180 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.190 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
Spacing Factor, mm

0.200 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.210 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.220 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.230 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.240 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.250 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95 100
0.260 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95 95
0.270 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93 95
0.280 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90 93
0.290 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88 90
0.300 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86 88
0.310 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83 86
0.320 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81 83
0.330 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79 81
0.340 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76 79
0.350 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74 76
0.360 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71 74
0.370 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69 71
0.380 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67 69
0.390 13 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64 67
0.400 10 13 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50 52 55 57 59 62 64
>0.400 0 0 0 3 5 7 10 13 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 47 50

Notes:
A. When a core in an unacceptable lot has an air content of 3% or higher and a spacing factor of 0.250 mm or lower, the core shall be assigned a value of
100% for the purpose of calculating a payment reduction.
B. Thick line between 0.250 and 0.260 mm spacing factor indicates maximum acceptable spacing factor.

November 2024 Page 32 of 33 [Link] 1350

 TABLE 8
Admixture Test Result Tolerances for Payment Reduction

Chemical and Superplasticizing

Test Result Air Entraining Admixtures
Admixtures

a) ± 0.010 where the value of relative density shown on the MTO DSM
is 1.050 or less; or
b) ± X where the value of relative density shown on the MTO DSM is
Relative Density greater than 1.050.
Where:
(relative density shown on the MTO DSM − 1.000)
X =
5

± 3.0% of the value shown on the

Non-volatile Content Not required
MTO DSM (Note 1)

pH ± 2.0 of the value shown on DSM Not required

Notes:
1. Example: When the value shown on the MTO DSM is 10.0 %, no payment reduction will be applied if
the result is between 7.0% and 13.0%.

November 2024 Page 33 of 33 [Link] 1350

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1430
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 1430, November 2012)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 1430 COMMON, November 2012 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

GABION BASKETS AND MATS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1430.01 SCOPE

1430.02 REFERENCES

1430.03 DEFINITIONS

1430.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1430.05 MATERIALS

1430.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1430.07 PRODUCTION

1430.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1430.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for gabion baskets or gabion mats and related accessories.

1430.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

ASTM International

A 90/A 90M-11 Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with
Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
A 313/A 313M-10e1 Stainless Steel Spring Wire
A 370-11a Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 641/A 641M-09a Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
A 764-07 Metallic Coated Carbon Steel Wire, Coated at Size and Drawn to Size for
Mechanical Springs
A 975-11 Double-Twisted Hexagonal Mesh Gabions and Revet Mattresses (Metallic-Coated
Steel Wire or Metallic-Coated Steel Wire with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coating)

November 2017 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 1430

Underwriters Laboratories

746B-96 Polymeric Materials - Long-Term Property Evaluations

1430.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Gabion Baskets means rectangular containers made of double twisted steel wire mesh produced to the
dimensions shown in Table 1.

Gabion Mats means rectangular containers made of double twisted steel wire mesh produced to the
dimensions shown in Table 2.

Lacing Wire means a galvanized steel wire or galvanized steel wire with PVC coating used to assemble
and interconnect gabion basket or gabion mat containers and to close and secure stone filled containers.

1430.05 MATERIALS

1430.05.01 Gabion Baskets and Gabion Mats

Gabion baskets shall be manufactured from galvanized steel wire mesh or PVC coated galvanized steel
wire mesh as specified in the Contract Documents. When the type of mesh is not specified in the
Contract Documents, the gabion baskets shall be manufactured from PVC coated galvanized steel wire
mesh.

Gabion mats shall be manufactured from PVC coated galvanized steel wire mesh.

Gabion baskets and the base section of gabion mats shall have all components connected in such a
manner that the strength at the point of connection meets the requirements of Table 3 as tested
according to ASTM A 975, Section 13.1.

1430.05.02 Wire Mesh

The mesh shall be woven from wire using a double twist pattern to create uniform hexagonal openings of
83 x 114 mm. The wire mesh shall be non-ravelling and shall provide the strength listed in Table 3 as
tested according to ASTM A 975, Section 13.1.

The perimeter edges of the wire mesh shall be woven around a selvage wire in a manner designed to
prevent slippage and to create a selvage.

1430.05.02.01 Wire

The wire for wire mesh, selvage wire, lacing wire, and internal connections shall be galvanized wire, soft
temper, Class 3 coating, according to ASTM A 641. The wire diameter shall be according to Table 4.
The tensile strength of the wire shall be according to ASTM A 641 as tested according to ASTM A 370.
Galvanizing on the wire shall meet the requirements of Table 4 as tested according to ASTM A 90M.

1430.05.02.02 PVC Coating

PVC coating shall be according to ASTM A 975 and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.38 mm with a
nominal thickness of 0.50 mm. Prior to UV and abrasion degradation, the PVC polymer coating shall
have a projected durability life of 60 years as tested according to UL 746B.

November 2017 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 1430

1430.05.03 Fasteners

1430.05.03.01 General

Fasteners shall be fabricated such that when the ends of the fastener are brought together and properly
locked, the fastener forms a closed loop. The inside area of the closed loop shall be at least 325 mm2 to
enclose up to four selvage wires.

Locked fasteners shall be able to resist a minimum direct force across any axis of 3 kN while remaining
closed and locked.

1430.05.03.02 Stainless Steel Rings

Stainless steel rings shall be manufactured from 3 mm diameter stainless steel spring wire Type 302,
Class 1, according to ASTM A 313M.

1430.05.03.03 Interlocking Wire Fasteners

Interlocking fasteners shall be manufactured from 3 mm diameter steel mechanical spring wire Class 1,
Finish 2, Type B, Tensile Class 2, according to ASTM A 764.

1430.07 PRODUCTION

1430.07.01 General

Gabion baskets and gabion mats shall be manufactured so that the sides, ends, lid, base, and
diaphragms can be readily assembled into rectangular units.

Where the length of the gabion basket exceeds its horizontal width, the gabion basket shall be divided
into equal cells by diaphragms. Cell length shall not exceed its horizontal width. Diaphragms shall be
made of wire mesh and shall be secured in the proper position on the base section. Gabion mats shall
have diaphragms spaced at 1.0 m across the width of the mat and 3.0 m along the length of the mat.

Gabion baskets or gabion mats shall be manufactured with all components connected at the production
facility with the exception of the gabion mat lid. Gabion baskets manufactured from galvanized wire mesh
shall be assembled using either lacing wire or fasteners. Gabion baskets and gabion mats manufactured
from PVC coated galvanized wire mesh shall be assembled using stainless steel ring fasteners.
Fasteners shall be installed at a maximum spacing of 150 mm with at least one fastener per gabion mesh
opening.

1430.07.02 Dimensions and Tolerances

Gabion baskets and gabion mats shall be produced to the sizes and dimensions shown in Tables 1 and
2. All dimensions are subject to a tolerance limit of ± 5%, except depth dimensions, which are subject to
tolerance limit of ± 5% for gabion baskets and ± 10% for gabion mats.

1430.07.03 Packaging and Marking

Each gabion basket and gabion mat shall be clearly colour coded according to Tables 1 and 2 or
otherwise suitably identified to indicate its size.

Gabion baskets shall be shipped folded flat in bundles. Each bundle shall contain an equal number of
one size of gabion baskets, except as necessary to complete an order. Each bundle shall be clearly
marked to show the size and number of baskets it contains. The maximum weight of one bundle shall be
850 kg.

November 2017 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 1430

Gabion mats shall be shipped in rolls with ends, sides, and dividers attached to the base. The gabion
mat lid and base units are to be shipped unattached, but rolled together as one. The maximum weight of
one roll shall be 850 kg.

1430.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1430.08.01 Inspection and Testing

The Owner reserves the right to make inspections and tests and at times the Owner may consider
necessary to ensure that the materials supplied are in accordance with this specification.

All materials failing to comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

November 2017 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 1430

 TABLE 1
Gabion Basket Sizes and Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions and Volumes
Size Number of Colour
Number Diaphragms Length Width Depth Capacity Code
m m m m3

1 1 2.00 1.00 0.30 0.60 Blue/Red

2 1 2.00 1.00 0.50 1.00 Red

3 1 2.00 1.00 1.00 2.00 Blue

4 2 3.00 1.00 0.30 0.90 Blue/Yellow

5 2 3.00 1.00 0.50 1.50 Green

6 2 3.00 1.00 1.00 3.00 White

7 3 4.00 1.00 0.30 1.20 Blue/Green

8 3 4.00 1.00 0.50 2.00 Yellow

9 3 4.00 1.00 1.00 4.00 Black

10 1 2.00 0.50 0.50 0.50 White/Yellow

11 2 3.00 0.50 0.50 0.75 White/Green

TABLE 2
Gabion Mat Sizes and Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions and Areas
Size Number of Number of Colour
Number Dividers Diaphragms Length Width Depth Area Code
m m m m2

12 1 18 30 2 0.23 60 Black/Green

13 2 27 30 3 0.23 90 Black/Yellow

14 1 18 30 2 0.30 60 Black/Blue

15 2 27 30 3 0.30 90 Black/White

November 2017 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 1430

 TABLE 3
Minimum Strength Requirements of Mesh and Connections

Galvanized PVC Coated

Test Description
Gabion Basket Gabion Basket Gabion Mat

Parallel to Twist 51.1 kN/m 42.3 kN/m 33.6 kN/m

Perpendicular to Twist 26.3 kN/m 20.4 kN/m 13.1 kN/m

Connection to Selvages 20.4 kN/m 17.5 kN/m 10.2 kN/m

Panel to Panel
Connection Using Lacing 20.4 kN/m 17.5 kN/m 10.2 kN/m
Wire or Fasteners

Punch Test 26.7 kN 23.5 kN 17.8 kN

TABLE 4
Gabion Baskets and Gabion Mats

Galvanized PVC Coated

Gabion Basket Gabion Basket Gabion Mat

Mesh Type 80 x 100 mm 80 x 100 mm 80 x 100 mm

Mesh Opening 83 x 114 mm 83 x 114 mm 83 x 114 mm

Wire Diameter for Mesh 2.95 mm 2.70 mm 2.20 mm

Wire Diameter for

3.85 mm 3.40 mm 2.65 mm
Selvages and Corners

Wire Diameter for Lacing

2.20 mm 2.20 mm 2.20 mm
and Internal Connections

Galvanizing for Mesh 2 2 2

Wire 244 g/m min 244 g/m min 213 g/m min

Galvanizing for Selvage 2 2 2

Wire 274 g/m min 260 g/m min 244 g/m min

Galvanizing for Lacing 2 2 2

Wire 213 g/m min 213 g/m min 213 g/m min

November 2017 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 1430

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1440
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2024

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1440.01 SCOPE

1440.02 REFERENCES

1440.03 DEFINITIONS

1440.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1440.05 MATERIALS

1440.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1440.07 PRODUCTION

1440.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1440.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1440.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for all steel reinforcement used in concrete work.

1440.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 905 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-448 Method of Test for Determination of Tensile Properties of Welded Wire Reinforcement

MTO Designated Sources for Materials (DSM):

9.65.58 Carbon Steel Mechanical Connectors
9.65.60 Stainless Steel Mechanical Connectors
9.65.76 Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars
9.65.80 Carbon Steel Reinforcing Bars

November 2024 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 1440

CSA Standards

G30.18:21 Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

S6:19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

ASTM International

A276/A276M-24a Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

A416/A416M-24 Specification for Low-Relaxation, Seven-Wire Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete
A421/A421M-21 Specification for Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete
A722/A722M-18 Specification for High-Strength Steel Bars for Prestressed Concrete
A955/A955M-20c Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A1064/A1064M-24 Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and
Deformed, for Concrete
E328-21 Test Methods for Stress Relaxation for Materials and Structures

International Organization for Standardization/International Electrotechnical Commission

ISO/IEC 17025:2017 General Requirements for the Competence of the Testing and Calibration Laboratories

Others

Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada - Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice - 2020

1440.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification the following definitions apply:

Carbon Steel Reinforcing Bars means as defined in OPSS 905.

Lot means a quantity of steel that can be identified and traced. For each nominal diameter of prestressing steel
bar and for each size designation of the reinforcing steel bar, a lot shall be all the supplied bars from one heat.

Prestressing Steel means as defined in OPSS 905.

Prestressing Steel Bar means a high strength alloy steel bar having a nominal diameter greater than 9 mm.

Reinforcing Steel Bars means as defined in OPSS 905.

Spacer means a rolled steel shape punched to form hooks that are bent over the spiral to maintain a specified
pitch.

Spiral means a continuously wound reinforcing steel bar in the form of a cylindrical helix.

Splice Bar means as defined in OPSS 905.

Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars means as defined in OPSS 905.

Steel Reinforcement means as defined in OPSS 905.

Strand means as defined in OPSS 905.

Structure means as defined in OPSS 905.

November 2024 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 1440

1440.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1440.04.01 Submission Requirements

1440.04.01.01 Mill Certificates for Steel Reinforcement

One electronic copy in PDF format of the mill certificates for each lot shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator prior to shipment of reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete applications and prior to shipment
of precast elements to the Working Area. The certificates shall show that the material is as specified in the
Contract Documents.

When prestressing steel mill test certificates originate from a mill outside Canada or the United States of
America, the information on the mill test certificate shall be verified by testing in a Canadian laboratory. This
laboratory shall be certified by an organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada to comply with
the requirements of ISO/IEC DIS 17025 for the specific tests or type of tests required by the material standard
specified on the mill test certificate. The Canadian laboratory’s test certificate shall clearly identify the
laboratory's name and confirm the material is as specified in the Contract Documents. The certificate shall
include the appropriate material specification number, testing date (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd), signature of an
authorized officer of the Canadian laboratory, and shall be traceable to the original mill test certificate. Samples
to be tested in the Canadian laboratory for the purpose of verifying mill test certificates originating from a mill
outside of Canada or the United States of America shall be taken from the material once it has arrived in
Canada.

1440.04.01.02 Stress-Strain Curves for Prestressing Steel

One electronic copy in PDF format of the mill certificates and stress-strain curves for each lot shall be submitted
to the Contract Administrator prior to the shipment of prestressing steel. The certificates shall confirm that the
material is as specified in the Contract Documents.

1440.05 MATERIALS

1440.05.01 Carbon Steel - Reinforcing Bars, Splice Bars, Tie Bars, Dowel Bars, Spirals

Carbon steel reinforcing bars, splice bars, tie bars, dowel bars shall be according to CSA G30.18.

All carbon steel reinforcing bars shall be grade 400W except for a structure, where the grade shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

Deformed steel bars for spirals shall be according to CSA G30.18 type W.

1440.05.02 Prestressing Steel

Prestressing steel strand shall be weldless, low relaxation grade and according to ASTM A416. Prestressing
steel strand shall be certified by its manufacturer to bond to concrete of normal strength and consistency.

Prestressing steel wire shall be according to ASTM A421.

Prestressing steel bars shall be according to ASTM A722. The maximum relaxation of high-strength bars, as
measured according to ASTM E328 on full-scale specimens, shall be 2.5% at 1000 hours when threads are
hot-rolled onto the bar, and 4.5% at 1000 hours in other cases. The bars shall not be welded.

1440.05.03 Spacers

Steel spacers shall be according to CSA G40.20/G40.21, grade 350W.

November 2024 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 1440

1440.05.04 Stainless Steel - Reinforcing Bars, Splice Bars, Tie Bars, Dowel Bars, Spirals, and
Mechanical Connectors

Stainless steel reinforcing bars, splice bars, tie bars, dowel bars and spirals shall be a minimum grade 520
according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A955.

Nominal dimensions, unit masses, and deformation requirements for metric bar sizes shall be according to
CSA G30.18.

Stainless steel reinforcing bars, stainless steel spirals, and stainless steel mechanical connectors shall be of a
stainless steel type according to Table 1.

Imperial and soft-converted metric bar size substitutions for metric bar sizes shall be permitted on a one-for-one
basis without adjustment according to Table 2.

Other imperial and soft-converted metric stainless steel reinforcing bar sizes may be substituted for metric bar
sizes, subject to the following:

a) The area of substituted steel reinforcement for the concrete component per linear metre or per gross
cross-section area, as applicable, shall not be less than that specified for the concrete component in the
Contract Documents; and

b) The spacing of substituted steel reinforcement for the concrete component shall be according to CSA S6
and the Structural Manual, Division 1.

Nominal cross-sectional areas of metric and imperial bar sizes used for determining substitutions shall be
according to ASTM A955 and CSA G30.18, respectively.

1440.05.05 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement

Plain and deformed steel wires used for steel welded wire reinforcement shall be according to ASTM A1064.

Steel welded wire reinforcement shall be according to ASTM A1064 with the following exceptions:

a) The yield strength shall be calculated according to LS-448 and shall meet or exceed the minimum value
specified in the Contract Documents.

b) The average minimum elongation of steel welded wire reinforcement shall be 4% with no individual test
result less than 3.2% elongation when tested according to LS-448.

c) The minimum diameter of the wire shall be 3.14 mm.

1440.07 PRODUCTION

1440.07.01 Manufacturer and Fabricator

1440.07.01.01 General

Bars shall be cold bent at the fabricator's shop listed under “Fabricators” in the MTO Designated Sources for
Materials (DSM) listings for Carbon Steel Reinforcing Bars and Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars, for the grade
specified in the Contract Documents.

The standard fabricating tolerances for all bars, straight or bent, shall be according to the Reinforcing Steel
Manual of Standard Practice of the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

November 2024 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 1440

Fabrication of stainless steel reinforcement shall be so that the surfaces are not contaminated with deposits of
iron or non-stainless steel, and the bar is not damaged by straightening from coil.

1440.07.01.02 Carbon Steel Reinforcing Bars

The manufacturer and fabricator of carbon steel reinforcing bars shall be by a manufacturer listed under "Mills"
and a fabricator listed under "Fabricators" in MTO DSM #9.65.80 for the grade specified in the Contract
Documents.

1440.07.01.03 Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars

The manufacturer and fabricator of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be by a manufacturer listed under "Mills"
and a fabricator listed under "Fabricators" in MTO DSM #9.65.76.

1440.07.02 Identification

1440.07.02.01 Prestressing Steel

For each size designation of prestressing steel strand, a lot shall consist of reels or coils produced from one
production lot and shall be tagged with the lot number.

For each nominal diameter of prestressing steel bar, a lot shall consist of all supplied bars from one heat and
shall be tagged with the lot number.

1440.07.02.02 Reinforcing Steel Bars and Splice Bars

All bars shall be shipped in bundles.

For each size designation and type of the reinforcing steel bars and splice bars, a lot shall be all the supplied
bars from one heat. Each lot shall be assigned an individual lot number and shall be tagged with the lot number.

In addition, tags for reinforcing steel bars shall identify the manufacturer, the stainless steel type and grade or
reinforcing steel grade, and bar size.

1440.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1440.08.01 Inspection and Testing

The Owner reserves the right to carry out inspections and tests at such times as the Owner may consider
necessary to ensure that the materials supplied are as specified in the Contract Documents.

Materials failing to comply with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents shall be rejected.

The Owner’s representative shall be permitted free entry to the manufacturing and fabrication plants, as well
as the finished product storage and loading areas for inspection purposes.

November 2024 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 1440

 TABLE 1
Type of Stainless Steel

Common or Trade Name AISI Type UNS Designation

Type 316 LN 316 LN S31653

Type 2205 Duplex 2205 S31803

Type 2304 Duplex 2304 S32304

Note:

A. Condition/Finish: stainless steel reinforcing bars and shapes shall be hot rolled and pickled, or hot rolled
and descaled to the required mechanical properties and dimensions.

TABLE 2
Size Conversions

Metric Bar Size Imperial Bar Size Bar Designation No.

15M #5 16

25M #8 25

35M # 11 36

November 2024 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 1440

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1441
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 1441, September 1988)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 1441, September 1988 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

LOAD TRANSFER ASSEMBLIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1441.01 SCOPE

1441.02 REFERENCES

1441.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1441.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1441.05 MATERIALS

1441.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1441.07 PRODUCTION

1441.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1441.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for load transfer assemblies for use in concrete pavement
expansion joints.

1441.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standards Specifications, Materials

OPSS 1442 Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcement for Concrete

November 2017 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 1441

Canadian Standards Association Standards:

CAN/CSA-G40.21-M87 Structural Quality Steels

1441.05 MATERIALS

Side ladders and spacer bars shall be plain round bars according to CAN/CSA-G40.21.

Dowel bars shall be plain round bars of grade 300 or better according to CAN/CSA-G40.21. They shall
be epoxy coated according to OPSS 1442.

Dowel caps shall be cold rolled deep drawn quality steel.

Compressible spacers shall be cold rolled blue tempered spring steel.

The Owner will consider approval of supporting structures (ladders) spacer bars and compressible
spacers made of materials other than steel.

1441.07 PRODUCTION

1441.07.01 Fabrication

Dowel bars shall be cut and handled in such a manner as to avoid distortion or burrs that would inhibit
free movement in the concrete. Welds shall be resistance or arc type. The assembly shall be readily
separable into two parts to permit the greasing of the dowels and the addition of bulkheads and joint
fillers.

Dowel bars shall not deviate from the prescribed angle of skew by more than one degree and shall be
parallel to each other within a tolerance of zero degrees forty-five minutes. Dowel cap assemblies shall
be fabricated with sufficient accuracy to permit the free movement of all dowels within the dowel caps.

Suitable wire ties shall be provided to hold the assembly in normal position during shipping and
installation and to permit the fastening and unfastening of the dowel cap assembly.

1441.07.02 Patching

After fabrication, all areas of the dowel bar with damaged epoxy coating shall be cleaned and painted with
a patching material according to OPSS 1442.

November 2017 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 1441

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1503
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CABLE GUIDE RAIL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1503.01 SCOPE

1503.02 REFERENCES

1503.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1503.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1503.05 MATERIALS

1503.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1503.07 PRODUCTION

1503.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1503.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1503.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for cable guide rail and associated components including
anchor blocks, fabricated bases, and hardware.

1503.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material

OPSS 1350 Concrete - Materials and Production

CSA Standards

G12-14 (R2019) Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality
Steel/Structural Quality Steel
G164-18 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction

April 2022 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1503

ASTM International

A47/A47M-99(2018)e1 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

B30-20 Copper Alloys in Ingot and Other Remelt Forms

SAE International

J403-2014-06-30 Chemical Compositions of SAE Carbon Steels

1503.05 MATERIALS

1503.05.01 Cable

Guide rail cable and cable used for the pressed ferrule and cable fittings shall be according to CSA G12,
grade 800 steel wire strand and hot zinc-coated or class A electro-zinc-coated. Cable shall be 12 mm
diameter, 7-wire strand weighing approximately 760 kg/1000 m with a minimum breaking strength of
74 kN and a maximum breaking strength of 100 kN.

1503.05.02 Fittings

Ferrous castings for the end fitting and splicer shall be according to ASTM A47M, grade 32510 for
malleable iron.

The tension bolt for the end fitting shall be SAE 1035 hot rolled fine grained steel and the ferrule shall be
SAE 1020 rolled steel according to SAE J403. As an option, the tension bolt may contain a square or hex
nut welded as specified in the Contract Documents. All welds shall be according to CSA W59. The
ferrous castings, tension bolt, and ferrule shall be hot dip galvanized according to CSA G164. The ferrule
shall be galvanized after it has been pressed onto the cable.

Wedges shall be bronze according to ASTM B30 for alloy suitable for sand casting.

1503.05.03 Anchor Blocks

1503.05.03.01 Fabricated Steel Sections

The fabricated steel section and angle iron braces in the precast anchor block shall be according to
CSA G40.20/G40.21. After fabrication, the section shall be hot dip galvanized according to CSA G164.

1503.05.03.02 Precast Concrete Anchor Blocks

Precast concrete anchor blocks shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. The concrete shall be
according to OPSS 1350 with a nominal minimum 28-Day compressive strength of 30 MPa.

1503.05.04 Cable Clamps and Nails

Nails shall be 65 mm long standard spiralled, flat heads with diamond points. Clamps shall be 2.5 mm
minimum thickness mild steel. After fabrication, clamps and nails shall be hot dip galvanized according to
CSA G164.

1503.05.05 Fabricated Steel Bases

Fabricated steel bases shall be according to CSA G40.20/G40.21. After fabrication, the steel bases shall
be hot dip galvanized according to CSA G164.

All welding shall be according to CSA W59. All welds shall be continuous.

April 2022 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1503

1503.07 PRODUCTION

1503.07.01 Pressed Ferrule and Cable Fitting

The ferrule shall be pressed onto the end of the cable fitting. The ferrule shall not slip from the cable
when tested under a tensile static load to the limit of cable breakage.

1503.07.02 Marking

Coils and reels of guide rail cable shall be identified by an attached durable tag with the following
information indelibly recorded:

a) CSA standard designation.

b) Grade of steel.

c) Nominal diameter of strand.

d) Manufacturer's name and location.

e) Length of strand in metres.

f) Weight of strand in kilograms per coil.

1503.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1503.09.01 Packaging

Guide rail cable shall be supplied either in coils or on expendable reels. All reels shall be of sufficient
strength to withstand transportation and normal handling. Coils shall be securely and suitably fastened.

The tension bolt and ferrous castings for the end fitting shall be pre-assembled. Splices and end fittings
including wedges shall be supplied in cartons containing one type of assembly. Each carton shall be
clearly marked as to the number and type of assembly it contains.

Pressed ferrules and cable fittings shall be supplied in bundles of six fittings banded with steel straps.

Cable clamps and nails shall be supplied in separate containers having a maximum gross weight of
20 kg. Containers shall be clearly marked with their contents and weight.

1503.09.02 Measurement and Payment

Guide rail cable and cable clamps and nails shall be measured in the units specified in the purchasing
order delivered and accepted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of end fittings, splicers, and pressed
ferrule and cable fittings of each type specified in the purchasing order delivered and accepted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of fabricated steel sections delivered
and accepted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of fabricated steel bases delivered and
accepted.

April 2022 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1503

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of guide rail cable, cable
clamps and nails, end fittings, splicers, pressed ferrule and cable fittings, fabricated steel sections, and
fabricated steel bases delivered to the destination or destinations at the dates and times specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner's laboratory, shall be included in the price.

April 2022 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1503

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1504
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2021

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

STEEL BEAM GUIDE RAIL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1504.01 SCOPE

1504.02 REFERENCES

1504.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1504.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1504.05 MATERIALS

1504.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1504.07 PRODUCTION

1504.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1504.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1504.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for steel beam guide rail, terminal sections, fabricated bases,
and installation hardware.

1504.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

CSA Standards

G40.20/G40.21-04 (R2009) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality

Steel/Structural Quality Steels
G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
W59-03 (R2008) Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Metric Version)

April 2021 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1504

ASTM International

A307 - 07 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M180-18 Standard Specification for Corrugated Sheet Steel Beams for Highway Guardrail

1504.05 MATERIALS

1504.05.01 Rail and Terminal Sections

Rail elements shall have a minimum yield strength of 345 MPa.

After fabrication, all rail elements and terminal sections shall be hot dip batch galvanized according to
CSA G164. Rail elements that are continuous hot dip galvanized shall be supplied from a source named
on the ministry’s DSM. Zinc coating thickness shall be according to AASHTO M180, Type II.

1504.05.02 Fabricated Steel Bases

Steel bases shall be fabricated according to CSA G40.20/G40.21. After fabrication, steel bases shall be
hot dip galvanized according to CSA G164.

1504.05.03 Installation Hardware

All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be according to ASTM A307 and hot dip galvanized according to
CSA G164.

1504.07 PRODUCTION

1504.07.01 Steel Beam Guide Rail and Terminal Sections

Steel beam guide rail shall consist of rail elements fabricated to develop continuous beam strength with a
cross-section as specified in the Contract Documents.

Bolt holes in rail elements, terminal sections, and fabricated bases shall be perpendicular to the surface
and shall not deviate more than 1.0 mm in any direction from the true location. Rail element and terminal
section ends shall be cut square.

After fabrication, prefabricated curved steel rail elements shall be galvanized according to CSA G164.

Steel beam guide rail components furnished under this specification shall be interchangeable with similar
components regardless of the source or manufacturer.

1504.07.02 Marking

As a minimum, each rail element shall be marked with the following information:

a) Name, trademark, or brand of the manufacturer.

b) Standard designation 1504. M180A2 will be accepted as an equivalent standard designation.

c) Identification symbols or code for heat.

April 2021 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1504

d) Week number and year of production.

Markings shall be clearly and permanently stamped in the valley of the centre corrugation, placed at a
location clear of the splice overlap, and shall not be obscured after installation. The height of the letters
and numerals shall be within the range of 19 to 32 mm.

1504.07.03 Welding

All welds shall be according to CSA W59 and shall be continuous.

1504.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1504.09.01 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel beam guide rail elements
delivered and accepted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of terminal sections delivered and
accepted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of fabricated steel bases for guide rail
posts delivered and accepted.

Installation hardware shall be measured in the units specified in the purchasing order, delivered and
accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of steel beam guide rail
elements, terminal sections, fabricated steel bases, and installation hardware delivered to the destination
or destinations at the dates and times specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner’s laboratory, shall be included in the price.

April 2021 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1504

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1505
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2017
(Formerly OPSS 1505, November 2010)

Note: The PROV implemented in April 2017 replaces OPSS 1505 COMMON, November 2010 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CHANNEL COMPONENTS FOR STEEL BEAM GUIDE RAIL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1505.01 SCOPE

1505.02 REFERENCES

1505.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1505.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1505.05 MATERIALS

1505.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1505.07 PRODUCTION

1505.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1505.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

APPENDICES Not Used

1505.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for steel channel and installation hardware.

1505.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification has been developed for use in provincial oriented Contracts. The administration,
testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices reflected in this specification correspond to
those used by the Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1505

1505.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1505.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles

S136-07 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members

ASTM International

A 307-07 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

1505.05 MATERIALS

1505.05.01 Cold Rolled Channel

Channels shall be cold rolled steel sections according to CSA S136 and have a minimum yield strength of
345 MPa. After fabrication, sections shall be hot dip galvanized according to CAN/CSA G164.

1505.05.02 Installation Hardware

All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be according to ASTM A 307 and be hot dip galvanized according to
CAN/CSA G164.

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1505

1505.07 PRODUCTION

1505.07.01 Fabrication Tolerances and Workmanship

Bolt holes in steel channels shall be perpendicular to the surface and shall not deviate more than 1.0 mm
in any direction from the true location. Steel channel ends shall be cut square.

After fabrication, curved steel channels shall be hot dip galvanized according to CAN/CSA G164.

1505.07.02 Marking

As a minimum, each steel channel section shall be marked with the following information:

a) Name, trademark, or brand of the manufacturer.

b) Standard designation 1505.

c) Identification symbols or code for heat.

d) Week number and year of production.

Markings shall be clearly and permanently stamped in the valley of the steel channel, placed at a location
clear of the splice overlap, and shall not be obscured after installation. The height of the letters and
numerals shall be within the range of 19 to 32 mm.

1505.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1505.09.01 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel channel sections delivered and
accepted.

Installation hardware shall be measured in the units specified in the purchasing order, delivered and
accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of steel channels and
installation hardware delivered to the destination or destinations at the dates and times specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner's laboratory, shall be included in the price.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1505

Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 1505
 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1540
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

STANDARD HIGHWAY FENCE COMPONENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1540.01 SCOPE

1540.02 REFERENCES

1540.03 DEFINITIONS

1540.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1540.05 MATERIALS

1540.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1540.07 PRODUCTION

1540.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1540.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1540.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for highway fence components and hardware.

1540.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1601 Wood, Preservation Treatment, and Shop Fabrication

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

138.2-96 Steel Framework for Chain-Link Fence

ASTM International

A 116-11 Metallic-Coated, Steel-Woven Wire Fence Fabric

A 641/A 641M-09a Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
A 702-89 (2006) Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought

November 2017 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1540

Others

NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber (2003)

1540.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Chain and Hook means hardware to hold the gate in place when closed.

Hinge Bolt means hardware that attaches to the gatepost and fits into the hinge clip to permit the gate to
swing.

Hinge Clip means hardware that attaches to the gate frame and functions with the hinge bolt.

Sweep means the deviation of a wooden brace from straightness.

1540.05 MATERIALS

1540.05.01 Fence Fabric

The fence fabric shall be one type as shown in Table 1.

Locks or fastening at the intersections of the line and stay wires of the woven fence fabric shall prevent
longitudinal and vertical slipping.

Fence fabric shall be galvanized prior to fabrication to provide a minimum weight of metallic coating
according to ASTM A 641, Class 3.

1540.05.02 Wooden Posts

Wooden posts shall be according to OPSS 1601.

Wooden terminal posts shall have a minimum diameter of 200 mm. Wooden line posts shall have a
minimum diameter of 150 mm. The maximum diameter of the large end of any wooden post shall be
330 mm.

1540.05.03 Steel Posts

Steel line posts shall be T-rail posts.

T-rail posts and angle iron posts shall be galvanized and according to ASTM A 702.

T-rail posts shall be 2.4 m long and punched so that the fence fabric can be secured to the broad face of
the post. Each post shall be supplied with nine steel wire ties for securing the fence fabric.

1540.05.04 Steel Wire Ties

Steel wire ties shall be galvanized and according to ASTM A 702.

1540.05.05 Diagonal Wooden Braces

Diagonal wooden braces shall be round or sawn Eastern White Cedar, Jack Pine, Red Pine, or Southern
Yellow Pine according to OPSS 1601. Round braces shall be a minimum diameter of 110 mm and

November 2017 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1540

maximum diameter of 165 mm. Sawn braces shall be a minimum 100 x 100 mm and in sound condition
according to NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, Utility Light Framing. Diagonal
wooden braces shall have a maximum sweep of 25 mm.

1540.05.06 Diagonal Brace Wire

Diagonal brace wire shall consist of four strands of 3.5 mm diameter, galvanized, soft steel.

When installing fence fabric with design number 949-12-12.5, the diagonal brace wire shall consist of four
strands of 2.51 mm diameter, Class 3, high tensile wire.

1540.05.07 Staples

Staples for wooden posts shall be 4.0 mm diameter, galvanized, with a minimum driving length of 45 mm.

1540.05.08 Gates

Gates shall be constructed from 43 mm outside diameter galvanized steel pipe for the frame and 32 mm
outside diameter galvanized steel pipe for the braces according to the requirements for galvanized
standard-weight pipe, CAN/CGSB 138.2. All joints shall be electrically welded and coated with a zinc rich
paint.

All required hardware and galvanizing of such parts shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.2.

1540.05.09 Mechanical Splicing Units and Crimp Sleeves

Mechanical splice units or crimping sleeves shall provide a maximum load carrying capacity that meets or
exceeds the minimum breaking strength of the fence fabric line wires. For 3.50 mm and 3.76 mm
diameter line wire, the minimum breaking strength of the splice shall be 4,590 N.

For 2.51 mm diameter line wire, the minimum breaking strength of the splice shall be 5,990 N.

1540.07 PRODUCTION

1540.07.01 Gates

Gates shall be supplied completely assembled, including the fence fabric. The fabric and other
components used on the gates shall match the adjacent fence.

All gates shall be supplied with galvanized chain and hook, hinge bolts, and hinge clips.

November 2017 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1540

 TABLE 1
Fence Fabric

Fence Fabric Number of Minimum Wire Stay Wire Standard

Design Horizontal Height Diameter Spacing
Number Wires mm mm mm

948-12-9.75 9 1219 3.50 305 ASTM A 641

949-12-9 9 1219 3.76 305 ASTM A 116
949-12-12.5 9 1219 2.51 305 ASTM A 116

November 2017 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1540

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1541
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CHAIN-LINK FENCE COMPONENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1541.01 SCOPE

1541.02 REFERENCES

1541.03 DEFINITIONS

1541.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1541.05 MATERIALS

1541.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1541.07 PRODUCTION

1541.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1541.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1541.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for chain-link fence components and hardware.

1541.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 772 Chain-Link Fence

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

138.1-2019 Fabric for Chain Link Fence

138.2-2019 Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence
138.4-2019 Gates for Chain Link Fence

ASTM International

A27/A27M-20 Steel Casting, Carbon, for General Application

A153/A153M-16a Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A824-01(2022) Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With Chain-Link Fence
F626-14(2019) Fence Fittings
F1043-18(2022) Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence Framework

April 2023 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1541

1541.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the definitions in OPSS 772 apply.

1541.05 MATERIALS

1541.05.01 Barbed Wires

Barbed wires shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.2.

1541.05.02 Diagonal Wire Braces, Top and Bottom Wires for use with Galvanized Steel
Fence Fabric

Top wire, bottom wire, and diagonal wire braces shall be 4.50 mm diameter marcelled tension wire Type II
according to ASTM A824 with a minimum Class 5 galvanized coating.

1541.05.03 Diagonal Wire Braces, Top and Bottom Wires for use with Vinyl-Coated Fence
Fabric

Top wire, bottom wire, and diagonal wire braces shall be 4.50 mm diameter marcelled tension wire Type II
according to ASTM A824 with a minimum Class 3 galvanized coating. The wire shall be vinyl-coated to match
the class and colour of the vinyl-coated fence fabric and shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.1

1541.05.04 Fasteners

1541.05.04.01 General

Wire ties for attaching fence fabric to line posts, bottom wires, top rails, and top wires shall be according to
ASTM F626.

1541.05.04.02 Fasteners for Galvanized Steel Fence Fabric

Round wire ties used for attaching fence fabric to line posts and top rails shall be manually or power fastened,
3.76 mm diameter steel wire, with a minimum 488 g/m2 galvanized coating.

Wire ties used for attaching the fence fabric to the bottom or top wires shall be round wire hog rings, 2.69 mm
diameter steel wire, with a minimum 488 g/m2 galvanized coating.

1541.05.04.03 Fasteners for Vinyl Coated Fence Fabric

Round wire ties used for attaching the fence fabric to the line posts and top rails shall be manually or power
fastened, 3.76 mm diameter zinc or aluminum coated steel core wire, with a vinyl.

Wire ties used for attaching the fence fabric to the bottom or top wires shall be round wire hog rings, 2.69 mm
diameter zinc or aluminum coated steel core wire, with a vinyl coating.

Fasteners shall be vinyl-coated to match the class and colour of the vinyl-coated fence fabric and shall be
according to CAN/CGSB 138.1.

1541.05.05 Fence Fabric

The fence fabric shall be 1,200 mm or 1,800 mm wide according to the Contract Documents, with a uniform
50 mm diamond pattern chain-link mesh closed at one edge by knuckling and at the other edge by twisting.
The steel wire for chain-link fence fabric shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.1. The fence fabric shall be
one of the types listed in Table 1.

The vinyl coating for wire fabric shall be black in colour.

April 2023 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1541

1541.05.06 Fittings

Tension bars, tension bands, brace bands, top rail sleeves, and rail ends shall be according to ASTM F626.

Barbed wire arms shall be fabricated from galvanized pressed steel or cast iron according to
CAN/CGSB 138.2 or ASTM F626.

Terminal and line post caps shall be according to ASTM F626.

When vinyl-coated fence fabric is used, the fittings shall be vinyl-coated to match the class and colour of the
vinyl-coated fence fabric and shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.1

1541.05.07 Gates

Gates shall be constructed from galvanized steel pipe frames and braces according to CAN/CGSB 138.4. All
joints shall be electrically welded and coated with a zinc rich paint after welding.

When vinyl-coated fence fabric is used, gate frames and braces shall be vinyl-coated to match the class and
colour of the vinyl-coated fence fabric and shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.1.

1541.05.08 Hardware

All required hardware including, but not limited to carriage bolts and nuts, shall be hot dip galvanized
according to ASTM A153M.

1541.05.09 Posts and Rails

All posts, post sleeves, and rails shall be galvanized steel pipe or roll-formed steel shapes. Galvanized steel
pipe shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.2. Roll-formed steel shapes shall be according to ASTM F1043.

When vinyl-coated fence fabric is used, all posts, post sleeves, and rails shall be vinyl-coated to match the
class and colour of the vinyl-coated fence fabric and shall be according to CAN/CGSB 138.1.

1541.05.10 Turnbuckles

Turnbuckles shall be drop forged steel according to ASTM A27M and shall be galvanized according to
ASTM A153M.

The average overall length shall be approximately 300 mm with ends in the closed position. Bolt diameter
shall be approximately 10 mm and capable of taking up a minimum of 150 mm slack.

1541.07 PRODUCTION

1541.07.01 Gates

All gates shall be supplied with galvanized malleable iron or pressed steel hinges, latch, latch catch, and shall
be capable of opening approximately 180 degrees. Gate latches shall be suitable for use with padlocks that
can be attached and operated from either side of the gate.

Gates shall be supplied completely assembled, including the fabric. The gate fabric and wire ties used on the
gate shall match the adjacent fence fabric and be subjected to the same quality requirements.

April 2023 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1541

 TABLE 1
Fence Fabric

Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum

Diameter of Weight of Diameter of Wire
Type Zinc-Coated Galvanized Vinyl-Coated Breaking Standard
Wire Coating Wire Strength
mm g/m2 mm N

Class B – Zinc-Coated
Galvanized Before CAN/CGSB
3.5 488 n/a 5000
Weaving (WGW) 138.1
Steel Fabric
Class D –
CAN/CGSB
Vinyl-Coated Steel 3.5 90 4.26 5000
138.1
Fabric

April 2023 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1541

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1601
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

WOOD, PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT, AND SHOP FABRICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1601.01 SCOPE

1601.02 REFERENCES

1601.03 DEFINITIONS

1601.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1601.05 MATERIALS

1601.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1601.07 PRODUCTION

1601.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1601.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1601.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for materials, production, preservative treatment, and methods for
testing and acceptance of wood and mass timber used in permanent and temporary structures, and post for
signs, highway fence, and guide rail.

1601.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 906 Structural Steel

OPSS 907 Structural Wood Systems

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-701 Request to Proceed
PH-CC-702 Notice to Proceed
PH-CC-821 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance

CSA Standards

O56:10 (R2020) Round Wood Piles

O80 Series:21 Wood Preservation

November 2023 Page 1 of 13 [Link] 1601

O122-16 (R2021) Structural Glued-Laminated Timber
O125:23 Mechanically Laminated Lumber - Production and Qualification Specifications
O141:23 Softwood Lumber
O177:23 Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Structural Glued-Laminated Timber

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A190.1-2022 Product Standard for Structural Glued Laminated Timber

American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

M4-23 Standard for Handling, Storage, Field Fabrication and Field Treatment of
Preservative-Treated Wood Products
P1/P13-19 Standard for Creosote Preservative
P3-19 Standard for Creosote-Petroleum Solution
P22-20 Standard for Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate (ACZA)
P23-14 (R2020) Standard for Chromated Copper Arsenate Type C (CCA-C)
P28-20 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type C (ACQ-C)
P29-20 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type D (ACQ-D)
P32-19 Standard for Copper Azole Type B (CA-B)
P34-20 Standard for Copper Naphthenate Waterborne (CuN-W)
P36-22 Standard for Copper Naphthenate (CuN)
P39-18 (R2020) Standard for 4,5-Dichloro-2-N-Octyl-4-Isothiazolin-3-One (DCOI)
P61-16 (R2022) Standard for Micronized Copper Azole (MCA)
P62-16 (R2022) Standard for Micronized Copper Azole Type C (MCA-C)
P63-23 Standard for Micronized Copper Quat Type D (MCQ-D)

Others

National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA): Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2022

1601.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Check means separation of the wood along the grain, the greater part of which occurs across the rings of
annual growth. When the depth of a check exceeds half the thickness of the member, it shall be deemed a split.

Coating means a liquid, liquifiable, or mastic composition that is converted to a solid protective, decorative, or
functional adherent film after application as a thin layer.

Decay means a disintegration of the wood substance due to the action of wood-destroying fungi that causes
the wood to become unsound. Also known as dote or rot.

Dowel-Laminated Timber (DLT) means the mass timber product made up of softwood boards that are
fastened together using hardwood dowels.

Dressed (Surfaced) Wood means wood that is surfaced by a planning machine to attain a standard of
smoothness and uniformity of size on one or more sides/edges.

Element means a prefabricated part of a structure, defined by function and cross-sectional shape, made of
DLT, GLT or NLT.

Glued-Laminated Timber (GLT or Glulam) means the engineered wood product that is made by bonding
under pressure graded laminating stock whose grain is essentially parallel and that meets the requirements of
CSA O122.

November 2023 Page 2 of 13 [Link] 1601

Grade means the designation of the size or quality of a piece of wood according to the NLGA Standard Grading
Rules for Canadian Lumber.

Knot means that portion of a branch or limb with a minimum diameter of at least 9.5 mm that has been
surrounded by subsequent growth of the trunk or other portion of the tree.

Mass Timber means the engineered layered wood products DLT, NLT and GLT.

Mechanically Laminated Timber (MLT) means the prefabricated engineered wood products DLT and NLT.

Nail-Laminated Timber (NLT) means an engineered wood product made from stacking and fastening together
individual lumber boards using nails or screws.

New Wood means wood that is free from deterioration such as that caused by decay, chemical or insect attack,
or physical damage and has not been remanufactured since the time of its original grading.

Paint Coating means a liquid or mastic composition that upon drying or curing is converted to a solid protective,
decorative, or functional adherent opaque film after application as a thin layer.

Preservative Treatment means a pressure process that impregnates wood with registered wood preservatives
to prevent decay and insect attack.

Shake means a lengthwise separation of the wood that occurs between or through the rings of annual growth.

Short Crook means a localized deviation from straightness that is more than half the mean diameter of the
crooked section within any section 5 feet or less in length.

Sound, tight knot means a knot that is free from decay, solid across its face, firmly embedded in the piece,
and at least as hard as the surrounding wood.

Species means the tree source from which the wood was taken.

Split means a lengthwise separation of the wood due to the tearing apart of the wood cells that usually extends
from surface to surface of a wooden pile.

Stain Coating means a paint coating that results in an opaque, transparent, or semi-transparent film.

Structural Adhesive means an exterior exposure adhesive that provides stiffness and strength to the structural
element according to CSA O122 and shall meet the qualification requirements of CSA O177.

Structure means any bridge, culvert, building, tunnel, retaining wall, wharf, dock, or guideway, or any part
thereof, designed to carry loads.

Sweep means the deviation of a post from straightness.

Used Wood means wood other than that defined as new wood.

Wane means bark or lack of wood from any cause on the edge or corner of a piece of lumber.

Wood means that generic term covering all wood including glued-laminated members.

1601.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1601.04.01 Design Requirements

1601.04.01.01 General

The design shall be according to OPSS 907 and the requirements of this specification.

November 2023 Page 3 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.04.01.02 Preservative Treatment

Preserved wood components shall be treated according to CSA O80 and the Contract Documents. The wood
component use category shall be according to Table 1.

1601.04.02 Submissions

1601.04.02.01 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 7 Days prior to commencement of the
fabrication of elements. Prior to making a submission, an Engineer’s seal and signature shall be affixed to the
shop drawings verifying that they are consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

The fabricator shall have a sealed and signed copy of the shop drawings at the fabrication facility during
fabrication. The shop drawings shall include at least the following:

a) The grade and species of all wood components.

b) Full detail dimensions and sizes of all component parts of the structure including fabrication tolerances.
These dimensions shall make allowance for changes in shape due wood species, moisture content,
temperature, lumber grain orientation, camber, and any other effects that cause finished dimensions to
differ from initial dimensions.

c) Identification marking of each member for erection.

d) Lifting point details and locations.

e) All necessary specifications and standards for the material to be used.

f) Fastener installation requirements, including number of fitting up fasteners required at each connection,
torquing values and methods, and oversize and slotted holes.

g) Identification of areas requiring special surface treatment and details of surface finish of faying surfaces.

h) Preservative treatment requirements for all components, including the type, penetration and retention.

i) All permitted field machining, including drilling, cutting and notching.

1601.04.02.02 Fabrication

1601.[Link] Notification of Fabrication

The fabrication schedule shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 7 Days prior to
commencement of fabrication of elements. Any changes in the fabrication schedule shall be provided to the
Contract Administrator in writing.

1601.[Link] Pre-Assembly

The Contract Administrator shall be notified in writing at least 7 Days prior to the shop trial assembly of
fabricated elements.

1601.04.02.03 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and Fabrication Report

A fabrication report shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for each shipment of elements, at least
5 Business Days prior to shipping the elements from the fabrication plant.

The fabrication report shall contain the following information:

a) List of elements including their identification number and description.

November 2023 Page 4 of 13 [Link] 1601

b) Material certification according to the Material Certificates of Compliance clause.

c) Summary of all measurements and inspections carried out to verify elements are as specified in the
Contract Documents including drilling, cutting, notching, and dimensional verification.

d) Summary of material test results for wood and structural adhesives used. If test results are not available at
the time of shipping, they may be submitted within 4 Business Days following completion of testing.

e) Documentation, including colour photographs (labelled and dated), confirming that elements were
pre-assembled and any defects repairable by standard methods have been identified, evaluated, and
repaired.

f) A MTO form PH-CC-821, Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance.

g) Analysis of elements and calculation of forces for shipping, handling, and lifting; maintenance of stability of
elements; and modification of lifting and handling methods and/or the addition of supplemental
reinforcement to resist shipping and handling forces if they cannot be resisted by the as-designed element.

A MTO form PH-CC-701, Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator before the
delivery of each shipment of elements to the site.

The elements shall not be delivered to the site until the Contract Administrator has received the Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Conformance, the fabrication report, Request to Proceed, and the Contractor has received a MTO
form PH-CC-702, Notice to Proceed.

1601.04.02.04 Preservative Treatment

1601.[Link] Wood Preservation Facility Certification

The certificate, verifying that the wood preservation facility is certified according to the Canadian Wood
Preservation Certification Authority (CWPCA) shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

1601.[Link] Preservative Treatment Certificate

A certificate from the wood preservation facility shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator, identifying the
preservative, use category and retention for each type of preservative treated product, and verifying that the
material was treated according to CSA O80.

1601.04.02.05 Material Certificates of Compliance

1601.[Link] Identification of Wood

When the grade stamp is obscured or is nonexistent, a verification of compliance with grade and species by an
agency approved by the Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board (CLSAB) shall be submitted to the
Contract Administrator.

1601.[Link] Glued-Laminated Timber

Verification that all structural glued-laminated timber has been manufactured according to CSA O122 or
ANSI A190.1 by a plant certified according to CSA O177 or ANSI A190.1 shall be submitted as part of the
fabrication report.

1601.[Link] Mechanically Laminated Timber

Verification that all mechanically laminated timber has been manufactured according to CSA O125 shall be
submitted as part of the fabrication report.

November 2023 Page 5 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.[Link] Structural Steel Mill Certificates

Structural steel mill certificates shall be according to OPSS 906 except that the mill certificates shall be
submitted as part of the fabrication report.

1601.05 MATERIALS

1601.05.01 General

All wood in permanent structures shall be new and shall be according to the grade, species, size, preservative
treatment, and surface finish as specified in the Contract Documents.

1601.05.02 Coating of Preservative Treated Wood

Only waterborne preservatives CCA, ACQ, CA-B and MCA shall be permitted for use on wood that is to be
coated following preservative treatment.

Coatings that exceed 29% solids shall not be applied to wood surfaces unless the minimum nominal dimension
of the wood is less than 51 millimetres. Coatings shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

1601.05.03 Preservatives

Preservatives shall be according to CSA O80 Series and shall be selected from the following:

a) Creosote shall be according to AWPA P1/P13.

b) Creosote petroleum solution shall be according to AWPA P3.

c) Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA) shall be according to AWPA P22.

d) Chromated copper arsenate (CCA) shall be according to AWPA P23, Type C.

e) Alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ-C) shall be according to AWPA P28.

f) Alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ-D) shall be according to AWPA P29.

g) Copper azole type B (CA-B) shall be according to AWPA P32.

h) Waterborne copper naphthenate (CuN-W) shall be according to AWPA P34.

i) Copper naphthenate (CuN) shall be according to AWPA P36.

j) 4,5-dichloro-2-N-octyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one (DCOI) shall be according to AWPA P39.

k) Micronized copper azole (MCA) shall be according to CSA O80.3 or AWPA P61. MCA type C shall be
according to AWPA P62

l) Micronized copper quat (MCQ-D) shall be according to AWPA P63

1601.05.04 Round Wooden Piles

Wooden piles shall be according to CSA O56, cleaned and peeled, and treated with an oil-borne preservative
according to CSA O80 Series.

1601.05.05 Structural Glued-Laminated Wood

Structural glued-laminated wood shall be according to CSA O122 or ANSI A190.1 and shall be produced by a
manufacturer certified according to CSA O177 or ANSI A190.1.

November 2023 Page 6 of 13 [Link] 1601

Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the appearance grade of glulam shall be industrial.
Edges of glulam that shall remain exposed shall be eased. Glulam shall be incised as required by the species
specified in the Contract Documents.

1601.05.06 Used Wood

Used wood shall not be used as posts for delineator, steel beam guide rail, or cable guide rail installations.

Used wood shall be permitted for use in temporary structures, provided that the wood is of known history, the
grade and species are identifiable, and has been subject to structural assessment for reuse where required.
The wood shall be the stress level for new wood of the same grade and species, provided that the previous use
has not damaged the wood in such a way that the grade requirements are no longer met.

Used wood shall not be used where the wood has been damaged, has deteriorated due to decay or to chemical
or insect attack, or its planned use is in a structure to which the public has access, unless it is regraded by a
grading agency approved by CLSAB.

1601.05.07 Wood for Highway Fence, Cable Guide Rail, and Delineator Posts

Round wooden posts for highway fence, cable guide rail, and delineators shall be Eastern White Cedar, Eastern
Hemlock, Western Hemlock, Jack Pine, Red Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Coastal Douglas Fir, or Southern Yellow
Pine. Allowable defects shall be according to CSA O56, except that the posts shall be free from loose or
unsound knots, short crooks, reverse sweep, shakes, decay, and checks that exceed 6 mm in width. Posts
having a sweep exceeding 2% of the length of the post shall be rejected.

1601.05.08 Wood for Steel Beam Guide Rail and Sign Posts

Wooden posts and wooden offset blocks for steel beam guide rail shall be Jack Pine, Red Pine, Lodgepole
Pine, Coastal Douglas Fir, Eastern Hemlock, Western Hemlock, or Southern Yellow Pine.

Wooden posts for signs shall be Coastal Douglas Fir, Western Hemlock, Amabilis Fir, Lodgepole Pine, Jack
Pine, Ponderosa Pine, Red Pine, or Western Red Cedar.

Except for maximum allowable wane, posts and blocks for steel beam guide rail and posts for signs shall be
No. 1 Grade - Post and Timber, graded according to the NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

Wane on blocks and on the portion of posts to be set above ground shall not exceed a total width of 25 mm on
any one face. Wane on the lower 1.2 m or on the portion of posts to be set below ground shall not exceed a
total width of 60 mm on any one face. The total width of wane on any face shall be determined by deducting
the portion of the face that is entirely free from wane from the minimum permissible dimension as specified in
the Contract Documents.

1601.07 PRODUCTION

1601.07.01 General

All cutting and machining shall be performed prior to preservative treatment for mass timber elements and
non-replaceable primary structural bridge elements. Cutting and machining after preservative treatment shall
only be permitted when permission is received from the Contract Administrator.

The Contract Administrator shall be notified in writing at least 7 Days prior to commencement of fabrication of
elements.

1601.07.02 Fabricator Certification

Glulam shall be fabricated by a plant certified according to CSA O177 or ANSI A190.1.

November 2023 Page 7 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.07.03 Markings

1601.07.03.01 Wood Grade Stamp

All wood shall be marked using a grade stamp of an association or independent grading agency according to
CSA O141.

Where wood is not identified by a grade stamp, a certificate of compliance shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator according to the Identification of Wood clause.

1601.07.03.02 Identification of Preservative Treatment

All wood with preservative treatment shall be marked by a stamp, indicating the producer, CSA use category,
preservative and retention.

Where a stamp is not available, a certificate from the wood preservation facility shall be submitted to the
Contract Administrator according to the Preservative Treatment Certificate subclause.

1601.07.03.03 Prefabricated Elements

1601.[Link] General

All prefabricated elements shall be identified by indelible marking, readily visible for inspection, with the following
information:

a) Identification number.

b) Orientation marking identifying the tops of elements.

c) Name or trademark of the fabricator.

d) Identification of the plant if the fabricator has more than one plant.

e) Date of manufacture (yyyy-mm-dd).

f) Product marking as applicable.

g) Certification marking as applicable.

Permanent marking shall be affixed in an area not exposed to view in the finished structure.

1601.[Link] Mechanically Laminated Timber

MLT products shall have the product and certification markings according to CSA O125.

1601.07.04 Fabrication

1601.07.04.01 General

Fabricated elements shall be GLT, DLT or NLT.

1601.07.04.02 Shop Trial Assembly

Girders and other main components specified in the Contract Documents shall be pre-machined and
pre-assembled in the shop to prepare or verify the field connections. Components shall be supported in a
manner consistent with the finished geometry of the structure, as specified in the Contract Documents, with
allowance for any camber required to offset the effects of dead load deflection.

November 2023 Page 8 of 13 [Link] 1601

Cuts, holes, bores and grooves shall be manufactured to final size while in assembly and prior to preservative
treatment. The components shall be pinned and firmly drawn together before reaming or drilling.

When a number of sequential assemblies are necessary because of the length of the bridge, the second and
subsequent assemblies shall include at least one section from the preceding assembly to provide continuity of
alignment.

Each assembly shall be checked for accuracy of cuts, holes and grooving, camber, alignment, and fit-up.

1601.07.04.03 Shaping Using Numerically Controlled Machines

As an alternative to the shop trial assembly requirements when numerically controlled machines have machined
wood components, a check assembly consisting of the first components of each type of congruent shape to be
made shall be undertaken to adequately demonstrate the accuracy of the machining equipment. If the check
assembly is satisfactory, further assemblies of like components are not required. If the check assembly is not
satisfactory, the work shall be redone or repaired in a manner acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

1601.07.04.04 Inspection

Inspection shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

1601.07.04.05 Dimensional and Workmanship Tolerances

Dimensional and workmanship tolerances shall be according to the Contract Documents, and the following:

a) CSA O122 or ANSI A190.1 for glulam; and

b) CSA O125 for MLT.

1601.07.05 Preservative Treatment

Wood preparation including seasoning, conditioning, incising and preservative treatment shall be according to
CSA O80 Series or AWPA standards listed in the Reference section. Wood to be treated shall be free of excess
saw dust and wood chips.

All products shall meet the minimum penetration and retention levels specified for each preservative and
species according to CSA O80 or AWPA standards. Products requiring incising to meet penetration and
retention standards shall be incised prior to treatment to the minimum depth specified for that species and
preservative combination.

All wood for permanent applications shall be treated with preservative, except eastern white cedar for cable
guide rail posts, guide posts, delineator posts, and highway fence posts and western red cedar for sign posts.
Wood treated using oil borne preservatives shall be free of excessive surface oil and surface deposits.

All wood, except cedar posts, in temporary structures with an intended service life exceeding 1 year shall be
treated with preservative.

Treated wood shall have a moisture content not exceeding the requirements of CSA O80 or as specified in the
Contract Documents. Wood treated using water borne preservatives shall have an average moisture content
not exceeding 25% at 25 mm depth below the surface prior to preservative treatment.

1601.07.05.02 Treatment of Glued Laminated Timber

Glued laminated timber beam elements shall be treated with an oil-based preservative. Water-based
preservatives shall not be used.

November 2023 Page 9 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.07.05.03 Quality Control - Wood Preservation

The wood preserving plant shall use quality control procedures according to CSA O80 Series or AWPA
standards.

1601.07.06 Repair of Preservative Treatment

Repair of injuries in the surface of treated material, including cuts, abrasions, and holes, shall be with a field
treatment preservative according to CSA O80 or AWPA M4 and compatible with the pressure preservative
treatment. At least three coats shall be applied. Each coat shall be dry before the next coat is applied. End grain
shall be coated with clear anchorseal paraffin sealant following treatment.

1601.07.07 Post-Treatment Trial Assembly

After preservative treatment, girders and other main structure components shall be preassembled to verify the
field connections and accuracy of cuts, holes and grooving, camber, alignment, and fit-up. Components shall
be supported in a manner consistent with the finished geometry of the structure, as specified in the Contract
Documents, with allowance for any camber required to offset the effects of dead load deflection.

When a number of sequential assemblies are necessary because of the length of the structure, the second and
subsequent assemblies shall include at least one section from the preceding assembly to provide continuity of
alignment.

1601.07.08 Delivery, Handling and Storage

1601.07.08.01 General

Handling and storage of wood shall be according to CSA O80 Series.

Wood shall be kept free of dirt and stored in a location that will not create an excessive increase in temperature
through the green house effect resulting in rapid drying of the material. Wood shall be stored in a manner that
will prevent ponding or trapping of excess moisture between surfaces where it cannot dry readily.

1601.07.08.02 Handling

1601.[Link] General

Store and handle wood in the manner necessary to avoid damage. Dropping, brushing, breaking of fibres, and
penetrating the treated surface shall be avoided. Sharp or pointed tools that might damage the integrity of the
preservative treated surface shall not be used for lifting, turning, or handling the wood.

1601.[Link] Laminated Members

Laminated members shall not be dragged or dropped. Care shall be taken in handling to prevent damage to
the finished surface. Cable slings or chokers shall not be used to handle laminated materials unless adequate
blocking is provided between the cable and the wood member to prevent surface damage. Padded or
non-marring slings shall be used. Protection cleats or blocking shall be applied at pickup points to protect
corners.

Spreader bars of suitable length shall be used when lifting long members. The method of erection and handling
shall not overstress the member.

Members shall be lifted on edge whenever possible.

Care shall be taken to minimize impact forces during lifting.

November 2023 Page 10 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.07.08.03 Wrapping

1601.[Link] General

Members shall be protected during transit with water-resistant wrapping. Elements may be individually wrapped,
bundle wrapped, or load wrapped.

Wrapping shall be secured to the element by staples, tape or other suitable fastenings that do not penetrate
through the preservative treatment to bright wood. Seams of wrapping shall inhibit the passage of moisture.

1601.[Link] Individual Wrapping

Individually wrapped members shall cover all surfaces with water-resistant wrapping. Wrapping left in place on
individually wrapped members during storage and erection shall be slit or punctured on the lowest side to
prevent moisture accumulation inside the wrapping.

1601.[Link] Bundle Wrapping

Bundle wrapped members shall totally enclose all elements with water-resistant wrapping. Wrapping left in
place on bundle-wrapped elements during storage and construction shall be slit or punctured on the lowest side
to prevent moisture accumulation inside the wrapping.

1601.[Link] Load Wrapping

Load wrapped members shall be enclosed on the top, sides and ends with water-resistant wrapping. Wrapping
shall extend to the bottom of the members included in the load.

1601.07.08.04 Delivery and Storage

If DLT and GLT elements are stored away from the Working Area, the form of lease according to OPSS 907
shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator prior to delivery.

The Contract Administrator shall be notified in writing a minimum of 3 Business Days prior to delivery of
members.

Lifting, storing and transporting shall be as specified in the Working Drawings.

Delivery shall include transportation, loading, unloading, and storage of the members.

Storage includes, but is not limited to, storage while awaiting delivery in temporary locations or, at the job site.

Members shall be stored in a level area, supported on blocking spaced to provide uniform and adequate
support. If covered storage is not available, material shall be blocked well off the ground at a well-drained
location. If a paved surface is unavailable, the ground under the material shall be covered with opaque,
polyethylene film.

Stored members shall be separated with stickers arranged vertically over the supports so that air can circulate
around all four sides of each member. The top and all sides of elements shall be covered with moisture-resistant
covering.

Advertising by means of removable signing shall be permitted on elements only while in transit to the site. Any
permanent markings on a surface that would be visible after installation shall not be permitted.

1601.07.09 Tolerances

1601.07.09.01 Dimensions

The tolerances in Table 2 shall apply.

November 2023 Page 11 of 13 [Link] 1601

1601.07.09.02 Splits and Checks

Splits and checks in all cedar and treated posts shall not exceed:

a) In width, 10 mm at the surface, regardless of their length or depth.

b) In depth, 40% of the post diameter or thickness, regardless of their length or width.

Other treated wood shall be according to the NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber and the
Contract Documents.

1601.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1601.08.01 General

The acceptance of wood shall be according to the requirements of this specification. Wood which does not
meet one or more requirements of this specification is deemed rejectable and shall not be incorporated into the
work.

1601.08.02 Inspection

The quality of all materials and finished products shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Owner. The
manufacturer shall afford the Owner all reasonable facilities and access to ensure that the wood products
furnished are according to the Contract Documents.

November 2023 Page 12 of 13 [Link] 1601

 TABLE 1
Wood Component Use Category

Component CSA O80 Use Category

Foundation Elements UC-4.2
Structure Elements (except barrier) UC-4.2
Structure Barrier UC-4.1
Guide Rail Posts UC-4.1
Guide Rail Blocks UC-4.1
Ground Mounted Sign Posts UC-4.1
Fence Posts UC-4.1

TABLE 2
Dimension Tolerances

Dimension Tolerance
Diameter of round wooden posts for highway fence, cable guide rail, and delineator posts ± 10 mm
Diameter of other round wooden posts ± 6 mm
Dressed cross-sectional dimensions ± 2 mm
Length ± 10 mm

November 2023 Page 13 of 13 [Link] 1601

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1605
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2018

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

EXTRUDED EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE PAVEMENT INSULATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1605.01 SCOPE

1605.02 REFERENCES

1605.03 DEFINITIONS

1605.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1605.05 MATERIALS

1605.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1605.07 PRODUCTION

1605.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1605.01 SCOPE

This specification covers extruded expanded polystyrene for use as pavement insulation for frost heave
treatment of pavements.

1605.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

CAN/ULC S701-11 Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering

1605.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Extruded Expanded Polystyrene Pavement Insulation means insulation in the form of rigid boards
made by extrusion of expanded polystyrene beads.

Production Lot means the quantity of insulation boards produced in a continuous period of
manufacturing the same grade and thickness of product within the same production day.

November 2018 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1605

Truckload means a truck, including trailer, loaded with rigid insulation boards.

1605.05 MATERIALS

The extruded expanded polystyrene boards shall be according to the requirements of CAN/ULC S701,
Type 4, with the exception of the compressive strength.

The minimum compressive strength for each grade shall be according to Table 1.

1605.07 PRODUCTION

Each board of the same production lot shall be stamped with the same production code showing plant
identification, type, grade, and date of production (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

1605.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1605.08.01 Certificate of Compliance

Test certificates for each production lot supplied showing compliance with all requirements of this
specification shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted to the Contract Administrator prior to
installation.

1605.08.02 Sampling

One board from each production lot on each truckload shall be selected at random by the Contract
Administrator when the material arrives at the job site. The samples shall be tested by a laboratory
designated by the Owner for compliance with this specification.

1605.08.03 Testing

All test procedures shall be according to CAN/ULC S701.

The compressive strength shall be the average of 5 specimens taken at different places across the width
of the board and determined on the face perpendicular to the extrusion plane.

1605.08.04 Acceptance or Rejection

Failure of any one of the sample boards to comply with any requirement of this specification shall be
cause for rejection of the production lot from which it was taken. Culling of the rejected material by the
Contractor shall be permitted and a proposal for retesting the remaining material shall be submitted to the
Contract Administrator to demonstrate conformance with the specification. Retesting of material
remaining from culling rejected material shall be at no cost to the Owner.

November 2018 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1605

 TABLE 1
Minimum Compressive Strength

Grade Minimum Compressive Strength, kPa at 5% Deflection or Yield

A 275

B 400

C 690

November 2018 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1605

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1640
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (GFRP) REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1640.01 SCOPE

1640.02 REFERENCES

1640.03 DEFINITIONS

1640.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1640.05 MATERIALS

1640.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1640.07 PRODUCTION

1640.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1640.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1640.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for all glass fibre reinforced polymer (GFRP) internal reinforcement
used in concrete work.

1640.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 950 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer (GFRP) Reinforcement for Concrete

CSA Standards

S806:12 (R2021) Design and Construction of Building Structures with Fibre-Reinforced Polymers
S807:19 Specification for Fibre-Reinforced Polymers

ASTM International

D570-22 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics

D578/D578M-23 Specification for Glass Fibre Strands
D2584-18 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
D3171-22 Test Methods for Constituent Content of Composite Materials
D3418-21 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and Enthalpies of Fusion and
Crystallization of Polymers by Differential Scanning Calorimetry

November 2023 Page 1 of 8 [Link] 1640

D5028-17 Test Method for Curing Properties of Pultrusion Resins by Thermal Analysis
D7205/D7205M-21 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Fiber Reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite
Bars
D7617/D7617M11(2017) Test Method for Transverse Shear Strength of Fiber Reinforced Polymer Matrix
Composite Bars
E168-16(2023) Practices for General Techniques of Infrared Quantitative Analysis
E1131-20 Test Method for Compositional Analysis by Thermogravimetry
E1252-98(2021) Practice for General Techniques for Obtaining Infrared Spectra for Qualitative
Analysis
E1640-23 Test Method for Assignment of the Glass Transition Temperature by Dynamic
Mechanical Analysis

American Concrete Institute Publications

ACI PRC-440.3R12 Guide Test Methods for Fiber Reinforced Polymers (FRPs) for Reinforcing or
Strengthening Concrete Structures

Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada

RSIC Manual of Standard Practice, 2020

Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)

AMS-STD-595A/A3-2022 Colors Used in Government Procurement

1640.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Bar means the abbreviated term for GFRP reinforcing bar.

Congruent Shape means bent bar shapes with the same number of bends and angles that coincide exactly
when superimposed, except the length of the straight portions which could be different.

Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer (GFRP) means as defined in OPSS 950.

Glass Transition Temperature means the midpoint of the temperature range over which an amorphous
material changes from a brittle and vitreous state to a plastic state, or vice versa.

Production Lot means any batch of GFRP bar produced from start to finish with the same batch of constituent
materials used with the same proportions without changing any production parameter, without interruption in
production, and without change of equipment setup such as cure temperature or line speed.

Spiral means continuously fabricated GFRP reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix.

Structural Component means as defined in OPSS 950.

Sublot means a part of a production lot.

1640.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1640.04.01 Submission Requirements

1640.04.01.01 GFRP Quality Control Report

A GFRP quality control report for all materials delivered to the site shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator upon completion of the fabrication and prior to placing any bars in the Work.

November 2023 Page 2 of 8 [Link] 1640

The GFRP quality control report shall contain the following information:

a) Production information including:

i. Supplier;
ii. Bar classification: fibre type, tensile strength, modulus of elasticity, grade of GFRP, durability and
diameter of bar;
iii. Production lot and sublot numbers;
iv. Resin batch number;
v. The start and end date of each production lot and sublot of material; and,
vi. The total linear metres produced in each production lot and sublot for straight bars or the total number
of bars in each production lot and sublot for bent bars and anchor headed bars. Production lot and
sublot sizes shall be according to the Production Lot Size clause.

b) Summary of all material test results, listed in order, as identified in Table 1 and Table 2 including:

i. The number of samples tested for each property;

ii. The results of each sample for all tests specified in the Quality Control subsection;
iii. The average and standard deviation of test results; and,
iv. The test method used.

c) An affirmation confirming that the production and test results meet the requirements of this specification.

For bent bars and anchor headed bars that are marked with a unique colour according to the Identification
subsection, the GFRP quality control report shall identify the colour code used. Colours shall be according to
AMS-STD-595A.

1640.05 MATERIALS

1640.05.01 GFRP - Bars, Dowel Bars, Anchor-Headed Bars and Spirals

Bars shall be grade III according to CSA S807.

The bars shall be according to the requirements in CSA S807 and Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 of this specification. The
physical and durability properties of the bars shall meet or exceed the requirements for a durability classification
of D1 according to CSA S807.

Binding material for the bars shall be composed of thermoset vinyl ester or epoxy resin matrix that is
homogeneous throughout the cross-section of the bar. Fibre reinforcement in the bars shall be continuous E-CR
glass fibres according to ASTM D578.

1640.07 PRODUCTION

1640.07.01 Manufacture

The manufacture of bars shall be by a manufacturer listed on the MTO DSM.

The standard fabricating tolerances for all bars, straight or bent, shall be according to tolerances for reinforcing
steel bars in the RSIC Manual of Standard Practice.

1640.07.02 Workmanship and Finish

The bars shall be uniform in diameter/size and free of defects that are detrimental to the mechanical properties
and durability. The surface finish shall be uniform, free of voids and air pockets, and similar to the product tested

November 2023 Page 3 of 8 [Link] 1640

for qualification. Defects include, but are not limited to, exposed fibres, cracks, kinks, surface pitting, and uneven
or patchy discoloration.

Bulging of the cross-section on the inside of the bend or along the start of bend on a bent bar shall measure
less than 4 mm or 25% of the bar diameter, whichever is smaller. Bars with bulges exceeding this limit shall be
rejected and replaced on a bar by bar basis and rejected bars shall not be incorporated into the Work.

1640.07.03 Identification

1640.07.03.01 General

All bars to be used in the Work shall be legibly stamped by the manufacturer with the following information at
no more than 2.0 m spacing for straight bars and at least once per piece for bent bars and anchor headed bars:

a) Manufacturer’s name and symbol;

b) Type of fibre;

c) Designated bar diameter;

d) Grade designation;

e) Designated modulus of elasticity; and,

f) Production lot or batch number.

1640.07.03.02 Spirals, Bent and Anchor Headed Bars

1640.[Link] General

Where it is not practical to stamp spirals, bent or anchor headed bars, they may be identified with bar tags and
paint.

1640.[Link] Bent and Anchor Headed Bar Tags

Bar tags shall contain information according to the Identification subsection, the identifiable paint marking colour
code, and include the shape description. Tags shall be maintained legible and clearly visible on the bars until
the bars are placed in the structural component.

1640.[Link] Paint Marking

The paint used to mark the bars shall not have any detrimental effects on the bars. The paint shall be durable
to maintain legibility within a construction environment and be both insoluble in water and resistant to ultraviolet
(UV) degradation and discolouring.

Each sublot shall be identified by a colour according to AMS-STD-595A that can be easily distinguished from
other sublots and the bar’s own colour. The colour shall be applied to each bar tag, and both ends of all bars in
the sublot. Sublot colour shall be identified in the GFRP quality control report.

1640.07.04 Quality Control

1640.07.04.01 General

All bar materials shall meet the mechanical, physical and durability properties specified in this specification.

November 2023 Page 4 of 8 [Link] 1640

1640.07.04.02 Production Lot Size

1640.[Link] Straight Bars

The production lot size of straight bars shall be as follows:

a) Each lot shall have a maximum of 60,000 m of bars of the same grade and diameter;

b) Bars manufactured by different machines for multiple lines of production shall be considered as separate
production lots;

c) Bars shall be considered as a separate production lot if there is an interruption in production or change in
batch of raw material; and,

d) A production lot shall consist of no more than 7 Days of continuous production.

Each production lot shall be divided into sublots. Sublots shall be a maximum of 20,000 m.

1640.[Link] Bent Bars and Anchor Headed Bars

The production lot size of bent bars and anchor headed bars shall be as follows:

a) Each lot shall have a maximum of 6,000 pieces of the same grade and diameter;

b) Bent bars of congruent shape may be considered as the same production lot for establishing the number
of samples;

c) Bars manufactured by different machines for multiple lines of production shall be considered as separate
production lots;

d) Bars shall be considered as a separate production lot if there is an interruption in production or change in
batch of raw material;

e) A production lot shall consist of no more than 7 Days of continuous production; and,

f) A production lot of anchor headed bars shall be comprised of only one production lot of straight bars.
Additional production lots of straight bars shall not be permitted in a production lot of anchor headed bars.

Each production lot shall be divided into sublots. Sublots shall be a maximum of 2,000 pieces. A sublot of
anchor headed bars shall be comprised of only one sublot of straight bars.

1640.07.05 Quality Control Testing

1640.07.05.01 Number of Samples

The minimum number of samples required for each test shall be five from each sublot of straight bars, anchor
headed bars, and bent bars. If more than five samples are tested, then all the results shall be reported.

1640.07.05.02 Determination of Properties

The manufacturer’s quality control test requirements for mechanical, physical, and durability properties of the
bars for various tests and reporting shall be determined as specified in Table 1 and Table 2 for the initial sublot
of each production lot. The limits of the various properties shall be as specified in Table 1, and Table 2.

For any property listed in Table 1 and Table 2, a sublot shall be rejected if:

a) Any one of the samples fails to meet the specified limit when the number of test samples for a specific
property is 20 or less.

November 2023 Page 5 of 8 [Link] 1640

b) If more than 5% of tested samples fail to meet the specified limit when the number of tested samples is
greater than 20.

If the initial sublot of a production lot is acceptable the subsequent sublots shall only require quality control tests
as specified in Table 2.

If the initial sublot of a production lot is rejected, then all subsequent sublots of that production lot shall not be
incorporated into the work unless they meet the requirements as specified in both Table 1 and Table 2.
All bars from failed sublots shall not be incorporated into the work.

1640.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1640.08.01 Inspection of Fabrication Facility

The Owner reserves the right to carry out inspections and tests at such times as the Owner may consider
necessary to ensure that the materials supplied are according to this specification.

Materials failing to comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected and replaced.

The Owner shall be granted access to the manufacturing and distribution facilities, as well as the finished
product storage and loading areas for inspection purposes.

1640.08.02 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy

At the discretion of the Owner, Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR) testing for any number of sublots
may be conducted by a laboratory designated by the Owner. The testing shall be performed according to the
methods and requirements of ASTM E1252 or ASTM E168.

November 2023 Page 6 of 8 [Link] 1640

 TABLE 1
Quality Control Test Requirements - A

Property Standard for Test Specified Limits

Cross sectional area. CSA S806, Annex A, Determination of Cross Minimum and maximum
Sectional Area of FRP Reinforcement. area limits are as defined in
Table 4.
Longitudinal tensile strength ASTM D7205; or CSA S806, Annex C, Test Minimum values specified
for straight bars and straight Method for Tensile Properties of FRP in Table 3.
portion of the bent bars. Reinforcements.
Longitudinal tensile modulus ASTM D7205; or CSA S806, Annex C, Test Minimum values of tensile
and ultimate elongation (for Method for Tensile Properties of FRP modulus defined in Table 3;
straight bars and straight Reinforcements. the ultimate elongation shall
portion of the bent bars). not be less than 1.2%.
Transverse shear strength. ACI PRC-440.3, Test Method B.4, Test Method ≥ 180 MPa for Grade III
for Transverse Shear Strength of FRP Bars; or
CSA S806, Annex L, Test Method for Shear
Properties of FRP Rods; or ASTM D7617.
Strength of FRP bent bars CSA S807 Annex E, Method of test for Minimum values defined in
and stirrups at bend determining the strength of the bent portion of Table 3.
locations. FRP reinforcing bars.

TABLE 2
Quality Control Test Requirements - B

Property Standard for Test Specified Limits

Fibre content. The relevant of the following: Glass fibre content ≥ 70% by Weight
ASTM D3171 (Method I of Procedure
G), ASTM E1131, and ASTM D2584.
Water absorption at 50 ºC ASTM D570 Water Absorption of For 24-hour immersion:
for straight bars, straight Plastics: Procedures 7.1 & 7.4, except ≤ 0.25% for bars of size 15 and larger
portion and curved portion that both tests shall be conducted at ≤ 0.30% for bars smaller than size 15
of bent bars and grids. 50 ºC (Note 1). For 1-week (168 hours) immersion:
≤ 0.45% for all bar sizes
Cure ratio for straight bars, Test Method according to Appendix A ≥ 95% of Cure
straight portion and curved of CSA S807; Calibration of DSC by
portion of bent bars and Indium according to ASTM D5028.
grids.
Dry glass transition ASTM D3418 or ASTM E1640. DSC ≥ 100 °C
temperature. DMA ≥ 110 °C
Notes:
1. Test is conducted at 50 ºC for both 24-hour immersion and long-term immersion.

November 2023 Page 7 of 8 [Link] 1640

 TABLE 3
Tensile Strength and Modulus of Grade III Bars

Straight Bars

Designated Bar Minimum Specified Longitudinal Longitudinal Modulus of

Diameter Tensile Strength kN Elasticity GPa (Min)

13 129
15 199
20 284 60
22 387
25 510

Bent Bars

Minimum Specified Minimum Specified Longitudinal Modulus

Designated
Longitudinal Tensile Strength Longitudinal Tensile Strength of Elasticity
Bar Diameter
of Straight Portion kN at Bend (Bend Strength) kN GPa (Min)
13 129 58.1
15 199 89.6
20 255.6 116.4 50
22 329 150.9
25 433.5 198.9

TABLE 4
Designated Bar Diameter and Nominal Area

Designated Bar Nominal Minimum Measured Maximum Measured

Diameter Cross-Sectional Area Cross-Sectional Area Cross-Sectional Area
(Note 1) (mm²) (Note 2) (mm²) (mm²)
13 129 119 169
15 199 186 251
20 284 268 347
22 387 365 460
25 510 476 589
Notes:
1. The nominal cross sectional area is not based on designated diameter. These designated diameters
shall be used for the calculation of the bond strength and the apparent horizontal shear strength.
2. These nominal cross sectional area values shall be used for the determination of properties.

November 2023 Page 8 of 8 [Link] 1640

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1704
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2014

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PAINT COATING SYSTEMS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1704.01 SCOPE

1704.02 REFERENCES

1704.03 DEFINITIONS

1704.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1704.05 MATERIALS

1704.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1704.07 PRODUCTION

1704.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1704.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

APPENDICES

1704-A Commentary

1704.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements of paint coating systems for structural steel. It also
covers the procedure to be followed for initial approval and subsequent acceptance testing of paint
coatings and paint coating systems.

1704.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

1704.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1704.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 911 Coating Structural Steel Systems

ASTM International

A 123/A123M-12 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

B 117-11 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

D 523-14 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
D 562-10 Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit (KU)
Viscosity Using the Stormer-Type Viscometer
D 609-00 (2012) Standard Practice for Preparation of Cold-Rolled Steel Panels for Testing Paint,
Varnish, Conversion Coatings, and Related Coating Products
D 610-08 (2012) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces
D 660-93 (2011) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Checking of Exterior Paints
D 661-93 (2011) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Cracking of Exterior Paints
D 714-02 (2009) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints
D 772-86(2011) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Flaking (Scaling) of Exterior Paints
D 1210-05 (2010 Standard Test Method for Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems by
Hegman-Type Gage
D 1475-13 Standard test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products
D1640 -03(2009) Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film Formation of Organic Coatings at
Room Temperature

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

D 1654-08 Standard test method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens subjected to
Corrosive environment
D 2369-10e1 Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings
D 2371-85(2010) Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Solvent-Reducible Paints
D 2621-87(2011) Standard Test Method for Infrared Identification of Vehicle Solids From Solvent-
Reducible Paints
D 3271-87(2012) Standard Practice for Direct Injection of Solvent-Reducible Paints Into a Gas
Chromatograph for Solvent Analysis
D 3723-05(2011) Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Water-Emulsion Paints by Low-
Temperature Ashing
D 3960-05(2013) Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of
Paint and Related Coatings
D 4214-07 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films
D 4400-99(2012)e1 Standard Test Method for Sag Resistance of Paints Using a Multinotch Applicator
D 4451-02(2008) Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Paints by Low-Temperature Ashing
D 4541-09e1 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers
D 4587-11 Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings
D 5894-10 Standard Practice for Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of Painted Metal, (Alternating
Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation Cabinet)
D 6386-10 Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product
and Hardware Surfaces for Painting
E 1347-06 (2011) Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by Tristimulus
(Filter) Colorimetry

ASTM International Manual Series: MNL 17

th
Paint and Coating Testing Manual, 15 Edition, 2012

The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

th
Good Painting Practice, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 1, 4 Edition, 2002
SP 3-82 (2004) Power Tool Cleaning
VIS 1-02 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel
VIS 3-93(2004) Visual Standard for Power and Hand Tool Cleaned Steel

SSPC and National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) Joint Publications

SP 5 / NACE No. 1, Jan 2007 White Metal Blast Cleaning

SP 10 / NACE No. 2, September 2000 Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC, American Welding Society (AWS) and NACE Joint Publications

SSPC-CS 23.00 / AWS C2.23M/NACE No.12-2003 Application of Thermal Spray Coatings (metalizing)
of Aluminum, Zinc, and Their Alloys and
Composites for Corrosion Protection of Steel

Others

U.S. General Services Administration:

Federal Standard 595C Colors, 2008

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

1704.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the definitions in the SSPC, Good Painting Practice Manual Volume
th
1, 4 Edition; and the following definitions apply:

Coating System means as defined in OPSS 911.

Low Volatile Organic Coating Material means coating material that contains not more than 340 g/L of
volatile organic compounds (VOC) when tested according to ASTM D 3960.

Marginally Prepared Surface means a steel surface prepared by power tool cleaning according to
SSPC-SP 3.

Paint Coating means as defined in OPSS 911.

Paint Coating System means as defined in OPSS 911.

Pot Life means the length of time a multi-component material is usable after all the components are
mixed in the recommended portions.

Seal Coat means as defined in OPSS 911.

Structural Steel means as defined in OPSS 911.

Target Value means the value of various properties listed in OPSF 1704-1 submitted by the supplier with
the initial submission of material samples for coating system approval.

1704.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1704.04.01 Submissions Requirements

1704.04.01.01 Paint Coatings and Paint Coating System Approval

The supplier shall provide samples and a completed OPSF 1704-1 for each component of the paint
coating system for approval and material acceptance testing. The sample shall be accompanied by the
manufacturer's instructions for use; material safety data sheets; and material information, including
documentation on laboratory and field tests carried out to establish the pot life; physical characteristics;
and chemical composition as shown in OPSF 1704-1.

1704.05 MATERIALS

1704.05.01 Coating Material

1704.05.01.01 General

The requirements of the paint coating shall be according to the following:

a) The concentration of lead in the dry film of each coating shall not exceed 0.01% or 100 ppm.

b) The components shall be homogenous, well-dispersed to a uniform consistency and, when mixed
according to manufacturer's instructions, shall be suitable for application by spray equipment.

c) Each paint coating shall be a low VOC material.

d) Zinc–rich touch up paint shall contain not less than 87% of zinc by mass of non-volatile matter.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

e) The paint coating system for marginally prepared surfaces shall be suitable for application over
existing coatings of alkyd, vinyl, and currently approved low VOC paint coating systems.

1704.05.01.02 Colour

The prime coat shall be of such a colour as to assist the applicator in distinguishing between primed
areas and the uncoated cleaned steel or other prepared surfaces.

Each coat shall be formulated to show a distinct colour difference. With the exception of coal tar epoxies,
the colour of the finish coat shall be equivalent to 10045 brown for Atmospheric Corrosion Resistant steel,
and a colour equivalent to 16307 grey for all other steels, both according to Federal Standard 595C
Colors.

1704.05.01.03 Application Requirements

When applied according to the manufacturer's instructions and to the manufacturer's specified thickness,
the paint coating shall show good levelling with no runs, sags, or mud cracks. Applied coatings shall
have no pin-holes, holidays, bubbles, or craters.

Each coat shall be capable of application by spray, brush, or roller for a temperature range of 5 to 35 °C,
without thinning.

After the components have been combined, multiple component paint coating shall have a minimum pot
life of 3 hours at 25 °C.

1704.[Link] Two-Coat Zinc Rich Rapid Deployment Coating System

In order to qualify as a primer for a rapid deployment coating system, zinc rich coating material shall cure
or dry sufficiently to be top coated within 3 hours at 15 ºC when applied at a wet film thickness required
for a DFT of 100 µm.

The coatings to be used as the top coat material shall cure or dry to touch within 4 hours when applied at
a wet film thickness required for a DFT of 125 µm.

1704.05.01.04 Performance Requirements

1704.[Link] General

The entire coating system shall be tested on test panels for adhesion, weathering resistance, and
corrosion resistance performance. Testing shall be as shown in Table 1.

1704.[Link] Accelerated Weathering

After 5,000 hours of exposure, the coating system on the test panel for abrasive blast cleaned surfaces
shall exhibit none of the characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of
the SSPC Good Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. Chalk rating shall be 7
or higher, and the colour difference shall not exceed 6 units.

After 2,500 hours of exposure, the coating system on the test panel for marginally prepared surfaces shall
exhibit none of the characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of the
SSPC Good Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. Chalk rating shall be 7 or
higher and the colour difference shall not exceed 6 units.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

After 5,000 hours of exposure, the coating system on the galvanized test panel shall exhibit none of the
characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of the SSPC Good
Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. Chalk rating shall be 7 or higher and
the colour difference shall not exceed 6 units.

After 5,000 hours of exposure, the coating system on the metallized test panel shall exhibit none of the
characteristics of the paint failure as described in the chapter "Causes and Prevention of Paint Failure" in
SSPC Vol. 1. Chalking shall be 7 or higher, and the colour difference shall not exceed 6 units when
measured as shown in Table 1.

1704.[Link] Cyclic Corrosion Resistance Testing

After 12 cycles of exposure, the coating system on the test panel for abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall
exhibit none of the characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of the
SSPC Good Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. There shall not be any
corrosion, except along the score lines. The average value of the rust creepage of all the scored panels
tested shall not be more than 4 mm. However, the rust creepage on any individual panel may exceed
4.0 mm, but shall be below 5.0 mm. Chalk rating shall be 7 or higher and the colour difference shall not
exceed 6 units.

After 6 cycles of exposure, the coating system on the test panel for marginally prepared surfaces shall
exhibit none of the characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of the
SSPC Good Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. There shall not be any
corrosion, except along the score lines. The average value of the rust creepage of all the scored panels
tested shall not be more than 4 mm. However, the rust creepage on any individual panel may exceed
4.0 mm, but shall be below 5.0 mm. Chalk rating shall be 7 or higher and the colour difference shall not
exceed 6 units.

After 12 cycles of exposure, the coating system on the galvanized test panel shall exhibit none of the
characteristics of the paint failure as described in the Coating Failures chapter of the SSPC Good
Painting Practice Manual, except for characteristics noted below. There shall not be any corrosion,
except along the score lines. The average value of the rust creepage of all the scored panels tested shall
not be more than 4 mm. However, the rust creepage on any individual panel may exceed 4.0 mm, but
shall be below 5.0 mm. Chalk rating shall be 7 or higher and the colour difference shall not exceed 6
units.

After 12 cycles of exposure, the seal coatings on the metallized test panel shall exhibit none of the
characteristics of the paint failure as described in the chapter "Causes and Prevention of Paint Failure" in
SSPC Vol. 1. There shall not be any corrosion, except along the score lines where the total width of rust
creepage shall not be more than 1.0 mm. Chalking shall be 7 or higher and the colour difference shall not
exceed 6 units when measured as shown in Table 1.

1704.[Link] Salt Spray Resistance Testing

Salt spray resistance testing of zinc-rich touch up paint coated test panels shall be conducted according
to ASTM B117 for 720 hours. There shall not be any corrosion, except along the score lines where the
total width of rust creepage shall not be more than 1.00mm.

1704.05.01.05 Recoat Time

At an ambient temperature of 23 °C and a relative humidity of 80%, a paint coating shall dry or cure
sufficiently to receive the next coat satisfactorily within 16 hours of application. It shall remain recoatable
for a minimum of 30 Days.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

1704.07 PRODUCTION

1704.07.01 Quality Control

1704.07.01.01 Physical Tests and Paint Coating Composition

The results for physical tests and paint coating composition of production batches shall be within the
tolerances as shown in Table 2, when the results of testing are compared to the respective test results of
the sample submitted for the coating system approval.

1704.07.01.02 Chemical Analysis

When the product from production batches of paint coatings is analyzed for chemical composition, the
test results shall not vary by more than:

a)  5% from the value of the original submission, if the amount of ingredient is greater than 50% by
weight of the product.

b)  10% from the value of the original submission, if the amount of the ingredient is from 5 to 50% by
weight of the product.

1704.07.01.03 Infrared Analysis

The infrared spectrum of the product or any product fraction of production batches of paint coatings shall
match the corresponding spectrum from the sample submitted for coating system approval.

1704.07.01.04 Gas Chromatogram of Volatiles

The gas chromatogram of production batches of paint coatings shall show the identical volatile
components present in the same proportions as in the sample submitted for coating system approval.

1704.07.01.05 Colour Difference

Colour difference of production batches of paint coatings shall be within the tolerances as shown in Table
2. The reference colour for the finish coat shall be the appropriate colour specified in the Material section.
For all other coats, the reference colour shall be the colour of the sample submitted for paint coating
system approval.

1704.07.02 Packaging and Delivery

The paint shall be delivered in the manufacturer's originally sealed containers.

Containers shall be leak-free and constructed so that the contents can be thoroughly and completely
mixed. They shall be provided with triple-tight lids. Containers 4 litres or larger shall have wire bail
handles.

Each container and shipping case shall be marked to show the following information:

a) Identification of the paint coating system.

b) The contents of container (i.e., prime coat, second coat, third coat, or fourth coat).

c) The colour and colour code.

d) The manufacturer's name and address.

Page 7 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

e) The quantity of the contents in litres.

f) The date of filling the container (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

g) The manufacturer's code and coating batch numbers.

The markings shall be permanent and the coating batch number shall be prominently displayed.

1704.07.02.01 Certificate of Compliance

A certificate of compliance from the manufacturer indicating that the physical properties and chemical
composition of the material supplied complies with the requirements of this specification shall be included
with each shipment of paint.

1704.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1704.08.01 Test Panels

1704.08.01.01 Testing General

For the following tests, the number of panels specified below shall be made for the paint coating system
being evaluated and the panels for the approved paint coating system to be used for reference purposes
during paint coating operations.

1704.08.01.02 Weathering Resistance and Corrosion Resistance Testing

1704.[Link] Panel Preparation

1704.[Link].01 Abrasive Blast Cleaned Surfaces

Panels shall be cold-rolled carbon steel according to ASTM D 609, measuring 75 x 150 x 2.6 mm with
rounded edges. Panels shall be blast cleaned to the requirements of SP 10/NACE NO. 2. The pictorial
standards as shown in SSPC-VIS 1 shall be used to check conformance of the panel preparation in
conjunction with SP 10/NACE NO. 2. The height of the surface profile shall be a minimum of 25 µm and
a maximum of 75 µm.

1704.[Link].02 Marginally Prepared Surfaces

The panels shall be prepared as specified in the Abrasive Blast Cleaned Surfaces clause and then be
subjected to 72 hours of salt spray according to ASTM B 117, after which, the rusted panels shall be
power-tool cleaned to SSPC SP 3 condition by power wire brush. The pictorial standards as shown in
SSPC-VIS 3 shall be used to check conformance of the panel preparation in conjunction with SSPC SP3.

1704.[Link].03 Paint Coating on Galvanized Surfaces

As the first step, cold-rolled carbon steel panels, measuring 75 x 150 x 5 mm with rounded edges shall be
hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M. Galvanized panel surfaces shall then be prepared
according to ASTM D 6386. Thick edges due to excess zinc run-off, high spots, and rough edges shall
be removed by power tools. Surface preparation shall be performed by sweep blasting to roughen the
surface using an abrasive of a hardness that does not damage the galvanized coating.

Page 8 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

1704.[Link].04 Seal Coating on Metallized Surfaces

As the first step, cold-rolled carbon steel panels measuring 75 mm x 150 mm x 2.6 mm, and shall be blast
cleaned to the requirements of SP5/NACE NO. 1. The height of the surface profile shall be a minimum of
50 μm and a maximum of 75 μm. The blast cleaned panels shall then be coated on both surfaces and the
edges with 85% zinc / 15% aluminum alloy by thermal metal spraying according to SSPC-CS 23.00 /
AWS C2.23M/NACE No.12. The dry film thickness of the metallized coating shall be between 75 µm and
110 µm. The metallized panels shall be vacuum sealed or stored in a vacuum desiccator to prevent
oxidation until the seal coat material is ready to be spray applied.

1704.[Link] Paint Coating and Seal Coating Application

The paint coating system shall be spray applied on both faces of the prepared test panels according to
the manufacturer's recommendations and to the manufacturer’s recommended thickness. When the
painted faces are hard dry, the edges of the panels shall be covered with the same coating applied by
brush. After the final coat, the panels shall be dried and cured for 7 Days prior to any further handling.

The coating on the panels intended for scoring shall be scored according to ASTM D1654.

1704.[Link] Test Method for Accelerated Weathering

Test panels shall be prepared and coated as specified in the Panel Preparation clause and the Paint
Coating and Seal Coating Application clause.

Seven unscored panels shall be prepared for each cleaning requirement for each coating system. One
panel from each set shall be set aside as reference for comparison purposes. The other panels from
each set shall undergo exposure testing as shown in Table 1. Evaluation shall be done at 500 hour
intervals of exposure to the maximum of 5,000 hours for coating systems on abrasive blast cleaned
surfaces and galvanized surfaces, seal coating on metallized surfaces, and 2,500 hours for coatings on
marginally prepared surfaces.

1704.[Link] Test Method for Cyclic Corrosion Resistance of Coatings

Test panels shall be prepared, coated, and scored as specified in the Panel Preparation clause and the
Paint Coating and Seal Coating Application clause.

Eleven panels shall be prepared for each cleaning requirement for each coating system. One panel from
each set shall be set aside as reference for comparison purposes. The other panels, 5 unscored and 5
scored from each set, shall undergo exposure testing as shown in Table 1. Evaluation shall be done after
each cycle of exposure. At the completion of testing, the coating between the score lines on the bottom
half of the scored panels shall be stripped and the mean rust creepage in millimetres for each panel shall
be determined according to ASTM D 1654. The average rust creepage shall be calculated from the mean
rust creepage values of the individual panels of the respective paint system.

1704.08.02 Coating System Approval

1704.08.02.01 General

Approval shall only be given for a complete paint coating system and for paint coating to be used as a
seal coat for thermal spray metal coating.

Testing shall be performed by the Owner or by an independent laboratory chosen by the Owner.

When an independent laboratory is used, the paint manufacturer shall arrange for testing by the
independent laboratory. The independent laboratory shall obtain samples of the approved paint coating
and paint coating system to be used for comparison purposes from the Owner.

Page 9 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

1704.08.02.02 Testing by Owner

When testing is carried out by the Owner for initial approval, the supplier shall be notified of the sample
size, date, labelling, and other details regarding submission of samples, including cost.

1704.08.02.03 Testing for Coating System Approval and Approval of Subsequent Batches

The initial submission shall be evaluated for approval based on the requirements specified in the
Materials section, using the testing methods as shown in Tables 1 and 2, and the data submitted on the
completed OPSF 1704-1.

For comparison, an approved system from the Owner's list of approved coatings shall be subjected to the
tests for accelerated weathering and cyclic corrosion resistance concurrently with the system under
evaluation. Where possible, coatings of the same generic type shall be used for comparison.

When the testing is done by the approved independent laboratory, the Owner shall review the test results
and may repeat any of the tests.

Subsequent batches of material shall be tested for acceptance as specified in the Quality Assurance
section.

1704.08.02.05 Acceptance or Rejection

1704.[Link] Initial Approval

Approval shall only be given to paint coatings and paint coating systems satisfying the requirements of
the Materials section.

1704.08.03 Sampling at Work Site

Samples of material for quality assurance testing shall be taken by the Owner from material delivered to
the work site.

1704.08.03.01 Acceptance or Rejection on Site

Testing shall be done by the Owner according to the methods as shown in Table 2.

Acceptance shall be based on the testing requirements and allowable tolerances as shown in Table 2,
when compared to the results of the testing conducted by the Owner on the initially approved material.

Failure to conform to the requirements of the Material section and the tolerances as shown in Table 2,
changes made in the formulation after approval, inability to maintain production quality, and unsatisfactory
field performance of paint coatings or paint coating systems shall be a cause for rejection.

Page 10 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

 TABLE 1
Performance Tests for Paint Coating Systems

Type of Test ASTM

Requirements
Method

Pull-Off Adhesion D 4541 2.75 MPa minimum

Accelerated Weathering using Fluorescent UV - Condensation Light-

and Water-Exposure Apparatus for evaluation of: Exposed to:

Paint coating system on abrasive blast cleaned test panels 5,000 hours maximum
D 4587
Paint coating systems on hot dip galvanized test panels Test Condition D 5,000 hours maximum

Seal coating on metallized test panels 5,000 hours maximum

Paint coating system on marginally prepared test panels 2,500 hours maximum

Cyclic Corrosion Resistance Testing by Alternating Exposures in a

UV/Condensation Cabinet and a Salt Fog/Dry Cabinet for evaluation Exposed to:
of:

Paint coating system on abrasive blast cleaned test panels 12 cycles maximum
D 5894 (Note 1)
Paint coating systems on hot dip galvanized test panels 12 cycles maximum
(Note 1)
Seal coating on metallized test panels 12 cycles maximum
(Note 1)
Paint coating system on marginally prepared test panels 6 cycles maximum
(Note 1)
Evaluation of Test Panels After Accelerated Weathering Test / Cyclic
Corrosion Resistance Test for:

Gloss D 523 Test Method for

Colour Difference (ΔE) E 1347 Accelerated
Chalking D 4214 Weathering and the
Checking D 660 Test Method for Cyclic
Cracking D 661 Corrosion Resistance
Flaking D 772 of Coatings clauses
Blistering D 714 (Note 2)
Rusting D 610
Rust Creepage D 1654

Notes:

1. One cycle represents a total exposure of 336 hours which comprises 168 hours or 1 week of exposure of test
panels in the fluorescent UV condensation cabinet, followed by 168 hours of exposure of the test panels in the
cyclic salt fog or dry exposure cabinet.

2. Clauses in this specification.

Page 11 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

 TABLE 2
Test Methods for Physical Testing and Compositional Analysis of Paint Coatings
and Acceptance Criteria for Field Samples and Production Batches

Acceptance Criteria
(Note 1)
ASTM
Tolerance
Others
(Note 2)
Physical Tests on Mixed Coating:

Density D 1475 5% -
Consistency, Kreb Units (KU) D 562 ± 10 or 25% -
(Note 3)
Dry Time:
To Touch D1640 ± 30% -
Hard Dry D1640 ± 30% -
Hiding Power Determination Using Pfund Black Paint and Coating ± 1.5 (Note 4) -
and White Cryptometer Testing Manual

Skinning - - -
Fineness of Grind, Hegman Units (HU) D 1210 ±2 -
Sag Resistance D 4400 ± 20% -
Coating Composition:

Pigment Content by % mass D 4451, D 2371, ± 5% -

D 3723
Vehicle Solids Content by % mass @ 24 hours - ± 5% -

Volatile Content by % mass @ 2 hours and D 2369 ± 5% -

24 hours

Pigment Composition by Chemical and Chemical Analysis

Instrumental Analysis - - clause
(Note 5)
VOC Content ± 10% but the total
D 3960 not exceeding -
340 g/L ( Note 6)
Vehicle Solids Identification by Infrared Analysis Infrared Analysis clause
D 2621 -
(Note 5)
Determination of Paint Volatiles Composition by Gas Chromatogram of
Gas Chromatography D 3271 - Volatiles clause
(Note 5)
Determination of Thinner Composition by Gas Gas Chromatogram of
Chromatography D 3271 - Volatiles clause
(Note 5)
Tests on Cured Paint Coating:

Gloss D 523 ± 30% -

Colour Difference (ΔE) E 1347 ± 4 units -
IR Fingerprinting Paint and Coating - Infrared Analysis clause
Testing Manual (Note 5)
Notes:

1. Acceptance criteria for field samples and production batches.

2. Allowable tolerance for field samples or production batches based on the Owner’s test results for the initially
approved paint coating material.
3. Whichever is less.
4. Pfund black and white cryptometer, wedge #3.5.
5. Clause in this specification.
6. VOC content of Zinc -rich touch up paint shall not exceed 500g/L.

Page 12 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

 PAINT COATING DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER INFORMATION
Name:
Address:

Telephone:
Fax:
Email:
B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer's Code No.: Coating Batch No.:
Colour of Coating: Production Date:
C. TEST DATA OF MIXED COATING
Test Method Manufacturer’s Test Results
Density, kg/L ASTM D 1475
VOC, g/L ASTM D 3960
Viscosity, KU ASTM D 562
Pot Life, hours @ 25 °C Manufacturer’s Procedure
Sag Resistance, mm ASTM D 4400
Dry Time, hours @ 25 °C
To touch ASTM D1640
Hard dry ASTM D1640
D. COMPOSITION OF MIXED COATING
Test Method % by Mass
Pigment and Fillers ASTM D 2371, D 4451, D 3723
Non Volatile -
Volatile ASTM D 2369
E. COMPOSITION OF PIGMENTS AND FILLERS IN EACH COMPONENT % BY MASS - List % lead to three decimal places
Component A % Component B % Component C %
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F. PAINT VOLATILE COMPOSITION BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY - Attach chromatogram with peaks identified
Chemical Name %
1
2
3
4
5
G. COMPOSITION OF THINNER BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY - Attach chromatogram with peaks identified
Chemical Name %
1
2
3
4
5

H. VEHICLE SOLIDS IDENTIFICATION by Infrared Analysis - Attach spectrum with major peaks identified

I. MIXING RATIO OF COMPONENTS A, B, and C by weight __________________________

J. IR FINGERPRINT OF MIXED, CURED COATING - Attach Spectrum with major peaks identified

OPSF 1704-1

Page 13 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

Appendix 1704-A, November 2014
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 14 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1704

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1712
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1712, February 1991)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1712 COMMON, February 1991 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ORGANIC SOLVENT BASED TRAFFIC PAINT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1712.01 SCOPE

1712.02 REFERENCES

1712.03 DEFINITIONS

1712.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1712.05 MATERIALS

1712.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1712.07 PRODUCTION

1712.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1712.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1712.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for organic solvent based traffic paint which is suitable for
application onto concrete and bituminous pavements.

1712.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

Canadian General Standards Board

CGSB-1-GP-12C-1983 Standard Paint Colours

CGSB-1-GP-71-1983 Testing Paints and Pigments:

American Society for Testing and Materials

D185-84 Coarse Particles in Pigments, Pastes and Paints

D562-81 (1985) Consistency of Paints Using the Stormer Viscometer.

July 2023 Page 1 of 9 [Link] 1712

D711-84 No Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint
D713-87 Conducting Road Service Tests on Traffic Paint
D868-85 Evaluating Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint
D869-85 Evaluating Degree of Settling of Traffic Paint
D969-85 Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint
D2205-85 Traffic Paints
D2244-85 Calculation of Colour Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates
E97-82 (1987) Test Method for 45-deg., 0-deg., Directional Reflectance Factor of Opaque Specimens by
Broad-Band Filter
E303-83 Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester

United States Federal Standard

U.S. FED-STD-595B Colours Used in Government Dec. 15, 1989 Procurement

International Commission on Illumination

CIE 1976 L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference Equation

1712.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

Compliance Certification means the procedure and requirements for establishing an approved source for
materials.

Fingerprinting means the testing of organic solvent based traffic paint by gas chromatographic and infrared
spectroscopic techniques for verification purposes.

No Tracking Time means the time required for a newly applied pavement marking line to show no visible
deposition of the material to the pavement surface, outside the line when viewed from a distance of
15 metres, as determined by passing over the applied line at 60 km per hour in a simulated passing
maneuver with a passenger car.

Organic Solvent Based Traffic Paint means a traffic paint whose components are carried in an organic
solvent system and will form a solid paint film on evaporation of the solvent after application.

Pavement Marking Material means a material formulated for application onto bituminous or concrete
pavement in order to delineate vehicle operating limits.

Reflectorization means a material, treatment, or process to enable incident light to be returned in high
proportions in the general direction of the light source.

Service Test means the evaluation of pavement marking materials on a test deck and performance rating
prior to compliance certification.

Traffic Paint means a paint specifically formulated for use as a pavement marking to delineate vehicle
operating limits.

July 2023 Page 2 of 9 [Link] 1712

1712.05 MATERIALS

1712.05.01 General

Organic solvent based traffic paint shall be homogeneous and shall be well ground to a uniform smooth
consistency. It shall be free from skin, dirt, and other foreign particles and shall be capable of being sprayed
at the temperature intended for application. The organic solvent based traffic paint shall flow evenly and
smoothly and cover solidly when applied to pavements.

Materials used in the manufacture of the traffic paint shall be of high quality and consistency such that the
appearance will not change in service to impair the colour or visibility of the delineation. The organic solvent
based traffic paint film shall be flat in finish and be visible under daylight and artificial light with the addition of
the overlay glass beads.

1712.05.02 Colour

The organic solvent based traffic paint shall be according to the following colour requirements:

White - CGSB 1-GP-12C white 513-301

Yellow - Shall match either the yellow traffic paint chip of the Ministry of Transportation, Ontario
or U.S. FED-STD-595B, Yellow 33538

Black - CGSB 1-GP-12C black 512-301

The tolerance in colour allowed is as follows in CIE L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference
Equation when calculated from instrumentally measured colour differences according to ASTM D2244:

White L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +1.5 and -1 max
b* = +4 and -4 max

Yellow - MTO L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +3 and -1.5 max
b* = +7 and -1.5 max

Yellow - US L* = -2 and +4 max

a* = -6 and +4 max
b* = -9 and +10 max

1712.05.03 Chemical Composition

The chemical composition of the organic solvent based traffic paint shall be at the discretion of the paint
manufacturer and shall be certified by the Owner.

1712.05.04 Reflectorization

The white and yellow organic solvent based traffic paints shall be used with overlay glass beads which are
applied uniformly after application of the paint at a rate as shown below. The white and yellow organic
solvent based traffic paints shall provide proper anchorage for overlay glass beads according to OPSS 1750.

Rate of application for overlay glass beads per litre of traffic paint.

July 2023 Page 3 of 9 [Link] 1712

% Volume Solids of Traffic Paint Glass Beads Required in kg
40 - 56 0.7
57 - 70 0.8

Test samples of glass beads according to OPSS 1750 may be obtained from the Owner upon request.

1712.05.05 Physical Property Requirements

Organic solvent based traffic paints shall be supplied ready-mixed for use without any addition of solvents.

The handling and storage qualities must be acceptable with respect to degree of settling, uniform consistency,
absence of skinning, and thixotropic properties. The organic solvent based traffic paint shall be capable of
being sufficiently atomized to produce an uniformly applied paint stripe without side splatter and overspray
within the limitation imposed by conventional striping equipment.

The physical properties of the organic solvent based traffic paints submitted for compliance certification shall
be according to Table 1.

Samples are required by the Owner for laboratory testing. The supplier shall submit with each test sample,
complete data on physical properties, application procedure, and material safety for the organic solvent based
traffic paint.

1712.05.06 Service Test

Organic solvent based traffic paint, according to subsection 1712.05.05 and Table 1 shall be submitted for
service test when requested by the Owner.

Organic solvent based traffic paints shall be service tested according to the following:

a) Test deck location, time, and procedure of application shall be as specified by the Owner.

b) Test stripe shall be 10 cm in width and applied transversely across the lanes of the road. Application of
the organic solvent based traffic paint to a dry thickness of 230 microns  25 microns on bituminous or
concrete pavement with about 20,000 AADT and the subsequent application of overlay glass beads
according to OPSS 1750, at the approved rate immediately over the yellow and white striped line.

c) The ease and uniformity of application, severity of overspray, covering properties, and drying time will be
evaluated during application.

d) The applied organic solvent based traffic paint will be inspected periodically and its service performance
will be rated by the Owner, as specified in Table 2.

e) Approval will be given after one year of service rating, providing the material conforms to Table 2 and
meets the conditions of subsection 1712.09.02.

1712.07 PRODUCTION

1712.07.01 Plant Inspection

In order to qualify as a supplier of organic solvent based traffic paints, a manufacturer must satisfy the
following minimum requirements:

a) Adequate facilities to produce minimum batches of 3000 litres;

July 2023 Page 4 of 9 [Link] 1712

b) A laboratory sufficiently equipped and staffed to provide a quality control program which will ensure
compliance with this specification; and

c) Properly documented production, sampling, and testing procedures and methods.

1712.07.02 Quality Control

A manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a quality control program to ensure that the organic
solvent based traffic paints conform to this specification.

1712.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1712.08.01 Acceptance Criteria

The Owner may request samples to be taken from the shipments of organic solvent based traffic paints at any
time for quality assurance testing. Samples shall be taken from each batch produced for delivery to the
Owner. Criteria for accepting each production batch include the following requirements and manufacturing
tolerances:

a) Density shall be within 0.05 kg/L of the value established on the test sample according to
CGSB-1-GP-71, Method 2.1.

b) Viscosity shall be within  5 KU of the reference value.

c) Colour Difference E shall be within  1.5 of the value established on the reference sample.

d) Composition shall not vary by more than  5%, based on fingerprinting and other tests, of the value of the
reference sample.

e) No pickup time of each production batch sample shall be within  1.5 minutes of the value established for
the test sample according to ASTM D711.

f) Hiding power with minimum value of 8.4 m2/L.

g) Bleeding with minimum value of 5.0.

h) Directional reflectance with:

i. Minimum value of 70% white.

ii. Minimum value of 50% yellow.

1712.08.02 Quality Control of Production Batches

A one litre sample from each production batch along with test results on density, viscosity at 25 C and no
pickup time shall be delivered to the Owner’s laboratory within two days of manufacture of the respective
batches.

Delivery records shall be kept by the supplier of the number of containers of each batch shipped to each
delivery point and a list of such shipments during each calendar week shall be given to the Owner at the end
of each week until the entire order is completed and shipped.

1712.08.03 Storage

The organic solvent based traffic paint shall conform to this specification after storage.

July 2023 Page 5 of 9 [Link] 1712

1712.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1712.09.01 Trial Batch Application

A trial batch of organic solvent based traffic paints according to this specification may be purchased by the
Owner for evaluation of application properties using the Owner’s painting equipment. The trial batch shall
consist of a minimum quantity of 1,000 litres of organic solvent based traffic paint.

No tracking time will also be determined.

Those organic solvent based traffic paints according to this specification which exhibit satisfactory loading and
application properties when used with the Owner’s painting equipment will be considered for purchase.

1712.09.02 Certificate of Compliance

The manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance with tenders indicating that the physical properties
and chemical composition of all of the manufacturer's production batches of traffic paint for the Owner shall
conform to this specification and shall not deviate from the allowable tolerances, unless approved by the
Owner.

1712.09.03 Delivery and Packaging of Organic Solvent Based Traffic Paint

The delivery schedule, delivery location, colour, type, and quantity shall be as specified on the Owner’s
purchase order.

The organic solvent based traffic paint shall be furnished in returnable drums with air tight liners.

Each drum shall be clearly marked on the side and the top with weather resistant markings to show the
following information:

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

b) Type of traffic paint.

c) Colour.

d) Manufacturer's code and batch numbers.

e) Date of filling the drum.

f) Volume of contents in litres.

A small portion of the organic solvent based traffic paint may be required in twenty-litre containers. The
quantity will be specified on the purchase order.

1712.09.04 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of organic solvent based traffic paint shall be by litres.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of organic solvent based traffic
paint.

July 2023 Page 6 of 9 [Link] 1712

 TABLE 1

PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS

FOR ORGANIC SOLVENT BASED TRAFFIC PAINT

Requirements Test Methods

Test and Property
Min. Max. CGSB 1-GP-71 ASTM Other

Water Content % by mass 0.5 24.1

Settling 6 months 8.0 D869

Hiding Power m2/l 8.4 Pfund cyptometer

with #3.5 wedge
Skinning 48 hours nil nil 10.1

Bleeding 5.0 D969

&
D868
Viscosity KU
@ 7 C 135.0
@ 25 C 80.0 90.0 4.5 D562

Coarse Particles
# 60 sieve - 250 m nil nil D185
#100 sieve - 150 m 0.01 &
D2205

No Pickup Time, mins. 8.0* D711

Directional Reflectance % E97

White Paint 70.0
Yellow Paint 50.0

Skid Resistance ** E303

BPN Units

* For coning type of traffic paints, this value can be higher.

** Values to be established.

July 2023 Page 7 of 9 [Link] 1712

 TABLE 2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE TEST AT ABOUT 20,000 AADT

FOR ORGANIC SOLVENT BASED TRAFFIC PAINT

Performance Requirements

Property Newly Service Life Ratings of

Test
Installed
Method
Paints 3 mths 1 yr 1.5 yrs 2 yrs

Directional Reflectance % ASTM

White  70  70  50  50  50 E-97*
Yellow  50  50  35  35  35
Black  12  12

Retroreflectance Instrument
mcd/m2/lux Mirolux
White ** ** ** ** ** 12
Yellow ** ** ** ** **
Black ** ** ** ** **

No Tracking Time, mins. 2

Durability
White and Yellow  90  85  75  70 MTO***
Black  90

Appearance 10 8 7 6 5 ASTM
D713 & MTO
****

* These values are based on markings placed on a typical asphalt surface.

** Values to be established.

*** Durability is calculated, first by estimating the % wear from the photographs/video images of stripes
taken at test sites, and then deducting the value obtained from 100.

**** Rating 1-10; Perfect Score is 10.

Rating made on inspection of the markings by a panel of evaluators from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 8 of 9 [Link] 1712

 FORM PAV.M.1712
ORGANIC SOLVENT BASED TRAFFIC PAINT DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER’S NAME
ADDRESS

TELEPHONE NO.

B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer’s Code No. Paint Batch No.
Colour of Paint Sample Date

C. TEST DATA
Density, kg/l 1-GP-71 M2.1 ____________________________
Volatile Matter, % 1-GP-71 M17.1 ____________________________
Water, % 1-GP-71 M24.1 ____________________________
No Pickup Time, minutes ASTM D711 ____________________________
Hiding Power, m2/l Pfund Cryptometer ____________________________
OPSS 1712 Table 1
Bleeding, 1-10 rating ASTM D868/D969 ____________________________
Viscosity, KU ASTM D562 ____________________________
@ 7 C ____________________________
@ 25 C ____________________________

D. COMPOSITION OF PAINT % by Mass % by Volume

Pigment and Fillers ____________________ ___________________
Non-Volatile ____________________ ___________________
Volatile ____________________ ___________________
Composition of Pigment and Fillers % by Mass
1. _______________________________________________________________________
2. _______________________________________________________________________
3. _______________________________________________________________________
4. _______________________________________________________________________
5. _______________________________________________________________________
6. _______________________________________________________________________
7. _______________________________________________________________________
8. _______________________________________________________________________
Type of Vehicle______________________________________________________________
Type of Thinner______________________________________________________________
Type of Driers _______________________________________________________________

E. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

F. APPLICATION PROCEDURES
Surface Preparation
Minimum Pavement Temperature ______________________
Paint Temperature min C max C
Mode of Application
Ambient Temperature ______________ min C Relative Humidity ______________ max %

NOTE: Above form to be completed and forwarded with paint sample. Samples submitted without a
completed Paint Data form will not be considered.

July 2023 Page 9 of 9 [Link] 1712

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1713
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1713, February 1991)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1713 COMMON, February 1991 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1713.01 SCOPE

1713.02 REFERENCES

1713.03 DEFINITIONS

1713.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1713.05 MATERIALS

1713.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1713.07 PRODUCTION

1713.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1713.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1713.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for reflectorized thermoplastic pavement marking material that is
suitable for application onto bituminous and concrete pavements.

1713.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

Canadian General Standards Board

CGSB 1-GP-12C-1983 Standard Paint Colours

American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM D256-1988 Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

ASTM D570-81 (1988) Water Absorption of Plastics

July 2023 Page 1 of 10 [Link] 1713

ASTM D713-87 Conducting Road Service Tests on Traffic Paint
ASTM D1415-88 Rubber Property - International Hardness
ASTM D2240-86 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D2244-85 Calculation of Colour Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates
ASTM E28-67(1982) Softening Point by Ring and Ball Apparatus
ASTM E97-82(1987) Test Method for 45-deg., 0-deg. Directional Reflectance Factor of Opaque
Specimens by Broad-Band Filter
ASTM E303-83 Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester

British Standards Institution

BS 3262-1987 Hot-Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials

Part 1, Specification for Constituent Materials and Mixtures
Part 2, Specification for Road Performance
Part 3, Specification for Application of Material to Road Surfaces

United States Federal Standard

U.S. FED-STD-595B, Dec. 15, 1989 Colours Used in Government Procurement

International Commission on Illumination

CIE 1976 L*,a*,b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference Equation

1713.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

Compliance Certification means the procedure and requirements for establishing an approved source for
materials.

Fingerprinting means the testing of thermoplastic pavement marking materials by gas chromatographic and
infrared spectorscopic techniques for verification purposes.

Hot Applied Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material means a thermoplastic material that is specifically
formulated for hot spray or screed application onto bituminous or concrete pavements to delineate the vehicle
operating limits.

No Tracking Time means the time required for a newly applied pavement marking line to show no visible
deposition of the material to the pavement surface outside the line when viewed from a distance of 15 metres,
as determined by passing over the applied line at 60 km per hour in a simulated passing maneuver with a
passenger car.

Pavement Marking Material means a material formulated for application onto bituminous or concrete
pavement in order to delineate vehicle operating limits.

Reflectorization means a material, treatment, or process to enable incident light to be returned in high
proportions in the general direction of the light source.

Service Test means the evaluation of pavement marking materials on a test deck and performance rating
prior to compliance certification.

Thermoplastics means a polymeric plastic material which softens, melts, and flows at elevated
temperatures, but forms into a solid material at lower temperatures. This thermal behaviour being reversible
is retained on repeated heating and cooling cycles.

July 2023 Page 2 of 10 [Link] 1713

1713.05 MATERIALS

1713.05.01 General

The thermoplastic pavement marking material shall not undergo any significant breakdown or deterioration
when held at 170 C for four hours or during four one-hour reheatings to the plastic temperature. The
softening point and viscosity characteristics of the plastic material shall remain constant through four
reheatings and should be the same from batch to batch.

There shall be no significant change in the colour of the material as the result of up to four reheatings of one
hour each, up to a temperature of 170 C. The material shall be environmentally safe during heating and
application. The material shall not deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride, calcium chloride, or any other
chemical used for ice control, or because of oil content of pavement materials or oil droppings from the traffic.

The ingredients used in the production of thermoplastic pavement marking materials shall be of high quality
and consistency so that the appearance will not change in service to impair the colour or the visibility of the
delineation.

1713.05.02 Colour

Thermoplastic pavement marking materials shall be according to the following colour requirements:

White Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material - CGSB 1-GP-12C white 513-301

Yellow Thermoplastic Pavement marking Material shall match either the yellow colour chip of the Ministry of
Transportation, Ontario or U.S. Federal 595B, Yellow 33538

The tolerance in colour allowed is as follows in the CIE L *,a*,b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference
Equation when calculated from instrumentally measured colour differences according to ASTM D2244.

White L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +1.5 and -1 max
b* = +4 and -4 max

Yellow - MTO L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +3 and -1.5 max
b* = +7 and -1.5 max

Yellow - U.S. L* = -2 and +4 max

a* = -6 and +4 max
b* = -9 and +10 max

1713.05.03 Chemical Composition

The chemical composition of the thermoplastic material shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer and
shall be certified by the Owner.

1713.05.04 Reflectorization

Thermoplastic material for screed application and preformed thermoplastic pavement marking material shall
contain premixed glass beads. Overlay glass beads shall also be applied at a rate recommended by the
manufacturer for reflectorization. Thermoplastic materials recommended for spray application shall be used
with overlay glass beads for reflectorization. These materials shall provide proper anchorage for the glass
beads according to OPSS 1750, with the exception of the requirement of silicone coating.

July 2023 Page 3 of 10 [Link] 1713

Test samples of glass beads according to the above requirements may be obtained from the Owner upon
request.

1713.05.05 Physical Property Requirements

Physical properties of thermoplastic pavement marking material submitted for compliance certification shall be
according to Table 1.

Samples are required by the Owner for laboratory testing. The supplier shall submit with each test sample,
complete data on physical properties, application procedure, and material safety for the thermoplastic
pavement marking material.

1713.05.06 Service Test

Thermoplastic pavement marking material according to the qualifications of section 1713.05 and Table 1,
shall be supplied for service test when requested by the Owner.

Thermoplastic pavement marking material shall be service tested according to the following:

a) Test deck location and time for application shall be determined by the Owner.

b) The test stripes shall be 10 cm in width and applied transversely across the lanes of the road.
Thermoplastics shall be applied at a rate which results in a uniform thickness of 1.90 mm  0.40 mm
measured dry. The application shall be made by the supplier/manufacturer or their approved agent, using
the pieces of equipment recommended by the manufacturer of thermoplastic pavement marking material.

c) Application of test stripes of hot applied or preformed thermoplastic pavement marking material on a
bituminous or concrete pavement with about 20,000 AADT.

d) Ease of application and quality and nature of the stripes, shape of the edges, and uniformity in thickness
will be evaluated.

e) Thermoplastic pavement marking will be inspected periodically and its service performance will be rated
by the Owner as specified in Table 2.

f) Susceptibility to snow plow damage and chipping will be assessed.

g) Approval will be given after two years of service rating, providing the material conforms to Table 2 and
meets the conditions of subsection 1713.05.05.

1713.07 PRODUCTION

1713.07.01 General

In order to qualify as a supplier, a manufacturer must satisfy the following minimum requirements:

a) Adequate production facilities.

b) A laboratory sufficiently equipped and staffed to provide a quality control program which will ensure
compliance with this specification.

c) Properly documented production, sampling, and testing procedures and methods.

July 2023 Page 4 of 10 [Link] 1713

1713.07.02 Quality Control

A manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a quality control program to ensure that the thermoplastic
pavement marking materials conform to this specification.

1713.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1713.08.01 Acceptance Criteria

The Owner may request samples to be taken from the shipments at any time for quality assurance testing.
Samples shall be taken from each batch produced for delivery to the Owner. Criteria for acceptance shall
include the following requirements and manufacturing tolerances:

a) Composition shall not vary by more than  5%, based on fingerprinting and other tests of the values
established for the reference sample.

b) Softening point shall be within  3 C from the value established for the reference sample.

c) Colour difference 'E' shall be less than  1.5 provided the colour conforms to this specification.

d) Directional reflectance with:

i. Minimum value of 70% white.

ii. Minimum value of 45% yellow.

1713.08.02 Quality Control of Production Batches

A 500 g sample of hot applied thermoplastic pavement marking material or one section of the preformed
thermoplastic pavement marking material from each production batch along with test results on softening
point, hardness, and material composition shall be supplied to the Owner for laboratory testing.

Delivery records shall be kept by the supplier of the number of containers of each batch shipped to each
delivery point and a list of such shipments shall be given to the Owner.

1713.08.03 Storage

Thermoplastic pavement marking materials shall conform to this specification after storage.

1713.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1713.09.01 Certificate of Compliance

The manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance with tenders indicating that the physical properties,
material composition, and installation characteristics of all of the manufacturer's production batches of
thermoplastic pavement marking materials for the Owner shall conform to this specification and shall not
deviate from the allowable tolerances, unless approved by the Owner.

1713.09.02 Delivery and Packaging of Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material

The delivery schedule, delivery location, colour, type, and quantity shall be as specified by the Owner.
Thermoplastic pavement marking material supplied shall be packaged to commercially acceptable standards.
Each package shall have a label or marking with the following information:

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

July 2023 Page 5 of 10 [Link] 1713

b) Type and colour of thermoplastic pavement marking material.

c) Manufacturer's code and batch numbers.

d) Net weight in kilograms or in metres for preformed material.

e) Date of manufacture.

1713.09.03 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of thermoplastic pavement marking material shall be by metres.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of thermoplastic pavement
marking material.

July 2023 Page 6 of 10 [Link] 1713

 TABLE 1
PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS FOR
THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

Requirements Test Methods

Test and Property
ASTM
Min. Max.
Directional Reflectance % E97
White 70
Yellow 45

Softening Point C 80 E28

Water Absorption % 0.5 D570

Impact Resistance Izod ** D256*

Hardness at 25 C
IRHD 90 98 D1415

Skid Resistance
BPN Units ** E303

* Material is cast into 3" x 1" x 0.9" bars for this test.

** Values to be established.

July 2023 Page 7 of 10 [Link] 1713

 TABLE 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE TEST AT ABOUT 20,000 AADT
FOR THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

Performance Requirements for Test Stripes

Property Newly Service Life Ratings of

Installed Test
Thermo- Method
Plastics 1 yr 2 yrs 3 yrs 4 yrs 5 yrs

Directional Reflectance %
White  70  50  50  50  50  50 ASTM
Yellow  45  35  35  35  35  35 E97*

Retroreflectance Instrument
mcd/m2/lux Mirolux
White ** ** ** ** ** ** 12
Yellow ** ** ** ** ** **

No Tracking Time, mins. 2 MTO

Durability  95 90  80  75  70 MTO***

Appearance 10 8 7 6 5 5 ASTM D713

& MTO***

* These values are based on markings placed on a typical asphalt surface.

** Values to be established.

*** Durability is calculated, first by estimating the % wear from the photographs/video images of stripes
taken at test sites, and then deducting the value obtained from 100.

**** Rating 1-10; Perfect score is 10.

Rating made on inspection of the markings by a panel of evaluators from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 8 of 10 [Link] 1713

 PAV.M.1713
Page 1

THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER’S NAME
ADDRESS

TELEPHONE NO.

B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION

Commercial Trade Name of Sample

Manufacturer’s Code No. ____________________________________________
Batch No. ____________________________________________
Colour ____________________________________________
Date of Manufacture ____________________________________________

C. MATERIAL COMPOSITION
Resins and Conditioners wt % ____________________________________________
Pigments and Fillers wt % ____________________________________________
Glass Beads wt, % ____________________________________________
Gradation of Beads ____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________

D. TEST DATA
Softening Point C ASTM E28 ______________________________________
Water Absorption % ASTM D570 ______________________________________
Impact Resistance ASTM D256* ______________________________________
Hardness**, IRHD ASTM D1415 ______________________________________
Shore A or D ASTM D2240 ______________________________________

E. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

* Material is cast into 3” x 1” x 0.9” bars for this test.

** Hardness may also be measured according to ASTM D2240.

July 2023 Page 9 of 10 [Link] 1713

 PAV.M.1713
Page 2

F. PROCEDURE FOR OVERLAY AND INLAY APPLICATION

1. Pavement Surface Preparation Procedure

2. Pavement Temperature Range for Installation

Minimum C __________________________
Maximum C __________________________

3. Air Temperature
Minimum C __________________________

4. Humidity Maximum % __________________________

5. Temperature Range of Hot Thermoplastic Material for Application

Minimum C __________________________
Maximum C __________________________

6. Types of Pavement *** where the application is not recommended.

__________________________
__________________________
__________________________

7. Equipment for Application ______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

8. Application Procedure for Glass Beads ____________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

9. Particulars regarding suitability of application onto partly worn existing pavement marking.

a. On solvent based traffic paint ___________________________________

b. On water-borne traffic paint ___________________________________
c. On thermoplastic pavement marking ___________________________________
d. On field reacted polymeric pavement marking ___________________________________

10. Any Other Relevant Information __________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________

*** Refers to the age of pavement, the surface texture (e.g., OFC, DFC etc.) and whether it is asphalt or
concrete pavement.

Note: This form must be completed in full and forwarded with material sample. Samples submitted
without a completed data form will not be considered.

July 2023 Page 10 of 10 [Link] 1713

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1714
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1714, February 1991)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1714 COMMON, February 1991 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

FIELD REACTED POLYMERIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1714.01 SCOPE

1714.02 REFERENCES

1714.03 DEFINITIONS

1714.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1714.05 MATERIALS

1714.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1714.07 PRODUCTION

1714.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1714.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1714.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for field reacted, two component polymeric pavement marking
materials which are suitable for application onto concrete and bituminous pavements.

1714.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

Canadian General Standards Board Specifications

CGSB 1-GP-12C-1983 Standard Paint Colours

American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM D713-87 Conducting Road Service Tests on Traffic Paint

ASTM D868-85 Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint

July 2023 Page 1 of 10 [Link] 1714

ASTM D869-85 Degree of Settling of Traffic Paint
ASTM D1415-88 Rubber Property - International Hardness
ASTM D1644-88 Non-Volatile Content of Varnishes
ASTM D1652-88 Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins
ASTM D2074-66 (1987) Total, Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Amine Values of Fatty Amines by
Alternative Indicator Method
ASTM D2240-86 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D2244-85 Calculation of Colour Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates
ASTM D4060-84 Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser
ASTM E97-82 (1987) Test for 45-deg, 0-deg, Directional Reflectance Factor of Opaque Specimens by
Broad Band Filter
ASTM E298-84 Assay of Organic Peroxides
ASTM E303-83 Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester

United States Federal Standard

U.S.-FED-STD-595B-Dec. 15, 1989 Colours Used in Government Procurement

International Commission on Illumination

CIE 1976 - L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference Equation

1714.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

Compliance Certification means the procedure and requirements for establishing an approved source of
materials.

Field Reacted Polymeric Pavement Marking Material means a pavement marking material consisting of
two separate components, a polymerizable component and a curing agent or a polymerization catalyst.
These two components are designed to be mixed at the site and applied during the pot life of the mixture.

Fingerprinting means the testing of field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials by infrared
spectroscopy and other techniques for verification purposes.

No Tracking Time means the time required for a newly installed beaded line to show no visible deposition of
the material to the pavement surface outside the line when viewed from a distance of 15 metres, as
determined by passing over the applied pavement marking line at 60 km per hour in a simulated passing
maneuver at about 60 km per hour with a passenger car.

Pavement Marking Material means a material formulated for application onto bituminous or concrete
pavement in order to delineate vehicle operating limits.

Pot Life mean the length of time a material is usable after a curing agent or a polymerization catalyst has
been mixed.

Reflectorization means a material, treatment, or process to enable incident light to be returned in high
proportions in the general direction of the light source.

Service Test means the evaluation of pavement marking materials on a test deck and performance rating
prior to compliance certification.

July 2023 Page 2 of 10 [Link] 1714

1714.05 MATERIALS

1714.05.01 General

The ingredients used in the production of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials shall be of
high quality consistency such that the appearance will not change in service to impair the colour or visibility of
the delineation.

1714.05.02 Colour

The field reacted polymeric pavement marking material shall be according to the following colour
requirements after mixing at the recommended proportions and curing:

White - CGSB 1-GP-12C white 513-301

Yellow - Shall match either the yellow colour chip of the Ministry of Transportation, Ontario or U.S.
Federal 595B, Yellow 33538

Black - CGSB 1-GP-12C black 512-301

The tolerance in colour allowed is as follows in the CIE L*a*b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference.

Equation when calculated from instrumentally measured colour differences according to ASTM D2244:

White L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +1.5 and -1 max
b* = +4 and -4 max

Yellow - MTO L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +3 and -1.5 max
b* = +7 and -1.5 max

Yellow - U.S. L* = -2 and +4 max

a* = -6 and +4 max
b* = -9 and +10 max

1714.05.03 Chemical Composition

The chemical composition of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking material shall be at the discretion
of the manufacturer and shall be certified by the Owner.

1714.05.04 Reflectorization

Field reacted polymeric pavement marking material recommended for screed application shall contain
premixed glass beads and overlay glass beads shall also be applied at a rate recommended by the
manufacturer for reflectorization of the pavement markings. Field reacted polymeric pavement marking
materials recommended for spray application shall be used with overlay glass beads for reflectorization.
These materials shall provide proper anchorage for the glass beads which shall be according to OPSS 1750,
with the exception of the requirement of silicone coating.

Test samples of glass beads according to the above requirements may be obtained from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 3 of 10 [Link] 1714

1714.05.05 Physical Property Requirements

The physical properties of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking material submitted for compliance
certification shall be according to Table 1.

Samples are required by the Owner for laboratory testing. The supplier shall submit with each test sample,
complete data for both components and mixing ratios of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking
material.

1714.05.06 Service Tests

Field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials according to the qualifications of section 1714.05 and
Table 1 shall be submitted for service tests when requested by the Owner.

The field reacted polymeric pavement marking material shall be service tested according to the following:

a) Test deck location and time for application shall be determined by the Owner.

b) The test stripes shall be 10 cm in width and applied transversely across the lanes of the road. The
application shall be made by the supplier or the manufacturer or his agent, as recommended by the
manufacturer except that the thickness of screed applied material shall be 1.90 mm  0.40 mm.

c) Application of test stripes of the field reacted polymeric material on a bituminous or concrete pavement
with about 20,000 AADT.

d) Ease of application, quality, and nature of the stripes, including the shape of the edges and uniformity in
thickness will be assessed.

e) The field reacted polymeric pavement marking will be inspected periodically and its service performance
will be rated by the Owner as specified in Table 2.

f) Approval will be given after two years of service rating, providing the material conforms to Table 2 and
meets the conditions of subsection 1714.05.05.

1714.07 PRODUCTION

1714.07.01 General

In order to qualify as a supplier of field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials, a manufacturer must
satisfy the following minimum requirements.

a) Adequate production facilities.

b) A laboratory sufficiently equipped and staffed to provide a quality control program which will ensure
compliance with this specification.

c) Properly documented production, sampling, and testing procedures and methods.

1714.07.02 Quality Control

A manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a quality control program to ensure that the field reacted
polymeric pavement marking materials conform to this specification.

July 2023 Page 4 of 10 [Link] 1714

1714.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1714.08.01 Acceptance Criteria

The Owner may request samples to be taken from the shipments of field reacted polymeric pavement
marking materials at any time for quality assurance testing. Samples shall be taken from each batch
produced for delivery to the Owner. Criteria for accepting each production batch include the following
requirements and manufacturing tolerances:

a) Composition shall not vary by more than  5% of the reference value, as determined by fingerprinting and
other specific tests for the materials according to the applicable ASTM specification from ASTM D1644,
ASTM D1652, ASTM D2074, and ASTM E298.

b) Pot life shall not vary by more than  5 minutes of the value established for the reference sample, when
tested at 25 C and 50% relative humidity.

c) Directional reflectance with:

i. Minimum value of 70% white.

ii. Minimum value of 45% yellow.

1714.08.02 Quality Control of Production Batches

A 500 g sample of the prepolymer or polymerizable component and an equivalent amount of curing agent or
catalyst samples shall be supplied to the Owner for laboratory testing.

1714.08.03 Storage

The field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials shall be according to this specification after storage.

1714.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1714.09.01 Certificate of Compliance

The manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance with tenders indicating the physical properties,
material composition, and installation characteristics of all of the manufacturer's production batches of the
field reacted polymeric pavement marking materials for the Owner shall conform to this specification and shall
not deviate from the allowable tolerances, unless approved by the Owner.

1714.09.02 Delivery and Packaging of the Field Reacted Polymeric Pavement Marking
Material

The delivery schedule, delivery location, colour, type, and quantity shall be as specified by the Owner. Both
components of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking material supplied shall be packaged to
commercially acceptable standards. Each package shall have a label or marking with the following
information:

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

b) Type and colour of the field reacted polymeric pavement marking material.

c) Manufacturer's code and batch numbers.

d) Net weight in kilograms.

July 2023 Page 5 of 10 [Link] 1714

e) Date of manufacture.

1714.09.03 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of field reacted polymeric pavement marking material shall be by kilograms.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of field reacted polymeric
pavement marking material.

July 2023 Page 6 of 10 [Link] 1714

 TABLE 1
PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS FOR FIELD REACTED
POLYMERIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

Requirements Test Methods

Test and Property
Min. Max. ASTM Other

Settling, 6 months D869

Component A 6
Component B 6

Pot Life min. at 25 C 20 MTO

Bleeding 5 D868

Directional Reflectance % E97

White Paint 70
Yellow Paint 45
Black 12

Hardness 90 98 D1415
IRHD

Abrasion Resistance * D4060

1000 cycles/g CS-17

Skid Resistance
BPN Units * E303

* Values to be established.

July 2023 Page 7 of 10 [Link] 1714

 TABLE 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE TEST AT ABOUT 20,000 AADT
FOR FIELD REACTED POLYMERIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

Performance Requirements

Property Newly Service Life Ratings of

Test
Installed
Method
Marking 3 mths 1 yr 2 yr 3 yrs 4 yrs 5 yrs

Directional Reflectance %
White  70  50  50  50  50  50 ASTM
Yellow  45  35  35  35  35  35 E97*
Black  12  12

Retroreflectance Instrument
mcd/m2/lux Mirolux
White ** ** ** ** ** **
Yellow ** ** ** ** ** **
Black ** **

No Tracking Time, mins.  15

Durability
White & Yellow  95  90  80  75  70 MTO***
Black  90

Appearance 10 9 8 7 6 5 5 ASTM
D713 &
MTO****

* These values are based on markings placed on a typical asphalt surface.

** Values to be established.

*** Durability is calculated, first by estimating the % wear from the photographs/video images of stripes taken
at test sites, and then deducting the value obtained from 100.

**** Rating 1 - 10; Perfect Score is 10. Rating made on inspection of the markings by a panel of evaluators
from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 8 of 10 [Link] 1714

 FORM PAV-M-1714
Page 1

FIELD REACTED POLYMERIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER’S NAME ____________________________________________________________

ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE NO. ____________________________________________________________

B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION COMPONENT A COMPONENT B

Commercial, Trade Name of Sample _________________________ ________________________
Manufacturer’s Code No. _________________________ ________________________
Batch No. _________________________ ________________________
Colour _________________________ ________________________
Date of Manufacture _________________________ ________________________

C. MATERIAL COMPOSITION COMPONENT A COMPONENT B

Resins and Conditions, wt % _________________________ ________________________
Pigments and Fillers, wt % _________________________ ________________________
% Active Polymerization
Catalyst, Curing Agent _________________________ ________________________
Glass Beads, wt % _________________________ ________________________
Gradation of Glass Beads _________________________ ________________________
_________________________ ________________________
_________________________ ________________________

D. TEST DATA
Settling, 6 months ASTM D869
Component A ___________________
Component B ___________________
Bleeding, mixed material ASTM D868 ___________________
Pot Life at 25C min. MTO
___________________

Hardness*, IRHD ASTM D1415 __________________

Shore A or D ASTM D2240 __________________

Abrasion Resistance ASTM D4060

1000 cycles/g CS-17 _______________________

E. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA FOR BOTH COMPONENTS

July 2023 Page 9 of 10 [Link] 1714

 FORM PAV-M-1714
Page 2
F. PROCEDURE FOR OVERLAY AND INLAY APPLICATION

1. Pavement Surface Preparation Procedure

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________

2. Pavement Temperature Range for Application

Minimum C ______________________
Maximum C ______________________

3. Air Temperature
Minimum C ______________________
Maximum C ______________________

4. Humidity Maximum % ______________________

5. Mix Ratio of Component A & B _______________________

Mixing Procedure Quantities _______________________
Pot Life min. at 25 C _______________________

6. Types of Pavement ** where the _______________________

application is not recommended _______________________
_______________________
_______________________

7. Equipment for Application _____________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________

8. Application Procedure for Glass Beads Overlay ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________

9. Particulars regarding suitability of application onto partly worn existing pavement marking.
a. on solvent based traffic paint _____________________________________________________
b. on water-borne traffic paint _____________________________________________________
c. on thermoplastic pavement
marking _____________________________________________________
d. on field reacted polymeric
pavement marking _____________________________________________________

10. Any Other Relevant Information _____________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________

* Hardness may also be measured according to ASTM D2240.

** Refers to the age of pavement, the surface texture (e.g., OFC, DFC), and whether it is asphalt or
concrete pavement.

NOTE: This form must be completed in full and forwarded with test sample. Samples submitted without a
completed Data Form will not be considered.

July 2023 Page 10 of 10 [Link] 1714

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1715
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1715, February 1991)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1715 COMMON, February 1991 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PREFORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1715.01 SCOPE

1715.02 REFERENCES

1715.03 DEFINITIONS

1715.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1715.05 MATERIALS

1715.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1715.07 PRODUCTION

1715.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1715.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1715.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for reflective and non-reflective preformed plastic pavement
marking tapes which are suitable for use onto concrete and bituminous pavements.

1715.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials

OPSS 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

Canadian General Standards Board

CGSB 1-GP-12C-1983 Standard Paint Colours

American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM D523-89 Method for Specular Gloss

July 2023 Page 1 of 10 [Link] 1715

ASTM D638-87b Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D713-87 Conducting Road Service Tests on Traffic Paint
ASTM D1000-88a Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic
Applications
ASTM D4505-85 Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape for Extended Service Life
ASTM D4592-86 Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape for Limited Service Life
ASTM E97-82(1987) Method for 45-deg., 0-deg. Directional Reflectance Factor of Opaque Specimens by
Broad-Band Filter
ASTM E303-83 Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester

United States Federal Standard

U.S. FED-STD-595B Dec. 15, 1989 Colours Used in Government Procurement

International Commission on Illumination

CIE 1976 - L*,a*,b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference Equation

1715.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

Compliance Certification means the procedure and requirements for establishing an approved source of
materials.

Durable Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape means preformed plastic pavement marking tape with
extended service life period with a minimum service period of two years when placed according to the
manufacturer's recommended procedures on pavement surfaces with an annual average daily traffic, AADT
of about 20,000.

Fingerprinting means the testing of preformed plastic pavement marking tape by gas chromatographic
method and other techniques for verification purposes.

Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape means plastic material specifically designed and preformed into
pliable rolls or ribbons of various lengths and width or into symbols either white, yellow, or black for use as
pavement marking on concrete or bituminous pavement.

Reflectorization means a material, treatment, or process to enable incident light to be returned in high
proportions in the general direction of the light source.

Service Test means the evaluation of pavement marking materials on a test deck and performance rating
prior to compliance certification.

Temporary Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape means preformed plastic pavement marking tape
with a limited service life and a minimum service period of three months when placed according to
manufacturer's recommended procedures on pavement surfaces with an annual average daily traffic, AADT
of about 20,000.

July 2023 Page 2 of 10 [Link] 1715

1715.05 MATERIALS

1715.05.01 General

Only material properties which are necessary for proper installation and satisfactory performance of
preformed plastic pavement marking tape are specified here. The material as supplied shall be free of cracks
and have edges true, straight, and unbroken according to ASTM D4505. Preformed plastic pavement
marking tape of all types shall have a uniform width and thickness.

The material used in the manufacture of preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be of high quality so
that the appearance will not change in service to impair the colour or the visibility of the delineation.

1715.05.02 Colour

The preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be according to the following colour requirements:

White - CGSB 1-GP-12C white 513-301

Yellow - Shall match either the yellow traffic paint chip of the Ministry of Transportation, Ontario or
U.S. Federal 595B, Yellow 33538

Black - CGSB 1-GP-12C black 512-301

The tolerance in colour allowed is as follows in CIE L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference
Equation when calculated from instrumentally measured colour differences according to ASTM D2244:

White L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +1.5 and -1 max
b* = +4 and -4 max

Yellow - MTO L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +3 and -1.5 max
b* = +7 and -1.5 max

Yellow - U.S. L* = -2 and +4 max

a* = -6 and +4 max
b* = -9 and +10 max

1715.05.03 Adhesive

The preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be either precoated with a factory applied adhesive at the
base or supplied with a suitable adhesive and any other material such as a primer that is necessary for
installation of the tape onto the pavement.

1715.05.04 Material Composition

The material composition of the preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be at the discretion of the
manufacturer and shall be certified by the Owner.

1715.05.05 Physical Property Requirements

The physical properties of the preformed plastic pavement marking tape submitted for compliance certification
shall be according to Table 1.

July 2023 Page 3 of 10 [Link] 1715

Samples are required by the Owner for laboratory testing. The supplier shall submit with each test sample,
one complete set of data on physical properties, application procedure, and material safety for preformed
plastic pavement marking tape.

1715.05.06 Service Test

Preformed plastic pavement marking tape according to subsection 1715.05.06 and Table 1 shall be submitted
for service test when requested by the Owner.

Preformed plastic pavement marking tape for extended service, durable preformed plastic tape shall be
service tested according to the following:

a) Test deck location and time for installation shall be determined by the Owner.

b) The test strips shall be 10 cm in width and installed transversely across the lanes of the road. The
installation of the preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be made by personnel from the
supplier/manufacturer or his agent using the pieces of equipment recommended by the manufacturer for
installation.

c) A service test shall consist of installation of test stripes of pre-formed plastic pavement marking tapes,
onto bituminous or a concrete pavement with about 20,000 AADT.

d) Ease of application and quality and nature of the stripes will be assessed.

e) The installed tape will be inspected periodically and its service performance will be rated by the Owner as
specified in Table 2.

f) Approval will be given after two years of service rating of durable preformed plastic pavement marking
tape, providing the material conforms to Table 2 and meets the conditions of subsection 1715.05.05.

Temporary preformed plastic pavement marking tapes of removable type shall be according to this
specification and also to ASTM D4592 except that the required minimum service life is three months at about
20,000 AADT.

1715.07 PRODUCTION

1715.07.01 General

In order to qualify as a supplier of preformed plastic marking tape, a manufacturer must satisfy the following
minimum requirements:

a) Adequate production facilities.

b) A laboratory sufficiently equipped and staffed to provide a quality control program which will ensure
compliance with this specification.

c) Properly documented production, sampling, and testing procedures and methods.

1715.07.02 Quality Control

A manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a quality control program to ensure that the preformed
plastic pavement marking tapes conform to this specification.

July 2023 Page 4 of 10 [Link] 1715

1715.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1715.08.01 Acceptance Criteria

The Owner may request samples to be taken from the shipments of preformed plastic pavement marking tape
for quality assurance testing. Samples shall be taken from each batch produced for delivery to the Owner.
Criteria for accepting the preformed tape include the following requirements and tolerances:

a) Composition as determined by fingerprinting and other tests shall not vary by more than  5% from that of
the reference sample.

b) Colour difference, E shall be within  1.5 of the value established on the reference sample.

c) Directional Reflectance, Y shall not vary by more than  3 and have a minimum value of 65 and 45 for
white and yellow tapes respectively.

d) Retroreflectance shall not vary by more that  10 mcd/m2/lux.

Viscosity and the infrared spectograph of any adhesive and/or primer shall match that obtained for the
approved reference samples.

1715.08.02 Quality Control of Production Batches

a) One metre sections of each type and colour of the tapes, and a section of legends and/or symbols shall
be supplied to the Owner for laboratory testing from each production batch.

b) 200 ml of primer or adhesive, if the use of such surface preparation material or adhesive is recommended
by the manufacturer, from each production batch, to be supplied to the Owner.

1715.08.03 Storage

The preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall conform to this specification after storage.

1715.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1715.09.01 Certificate of Compliance

The manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance with tenders indicating that the physical properties,
material composition, and installation characteristics of all of the manufacturer's production batches of
preformed plastic pavement marking tapes for the Owner shall conform to this specification and shall not
deviate from the allowable tolerances, unless approved by the Owner.

1715.09.02 Delivery and Packaging of Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking Tape

The delivery schedule, delivery location, colour, type, and quantity shall be as specified on the Owner's
purchase order.

Each package of preformed plastic pavement marking tape shall be clearly identified with the following
information:

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

b) Types and colour of preformed plastic pavement marking tape.

c) Manufacturer's code and batch numbers.

July 2023 Page 5 of 10 [Link] 1715

d) Dimension and length or numbers of legends and symbols.

e) Date of manufacture.

1715.09.03 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of preformed plastic pavement marking tapes shall be by metres.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of legends and symbols.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of preformed plastic pavement
marking tape.

July 2023 Page 6 of 10 [Link] 1715

 TABLE 1
PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS FOR
PREFORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE

Durable Preformed Temp. Preformed

Test Methods
Plastic Tape Plastic Tape
Property
Min. Max. Min. Max. ASTM Others

Directional Reflectance % E97

White 65 65
Yellow 45 45
Black Temporary 12

Retroreflectance Instrument
mcd/m2/lux Mirolux 12
White ** **
Yellow ** **
Black Temporary **

Tensile Strength MPa 7.5* D638

Elongation at Break % 50 50 D638

Adhesion at
10 C 500 500 D1000
24 C 500 500 D1000
g/25.4 mm of width

60 Gloss D523

White 10 10
Yellow 10 10
Black Temporary 5

Skid Resistance ** ** E303

BPN Units

* This requirement is applicable to temporary preformed tape of removable type.

** Values to be established.

July 2023 Page 7 of 10 [Link] 1715

 TABLE 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE TEST AT ABOUT 20,000 AADT
FOR PREFORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE

Performance Requirements

Property Temp. Durable Tape

Test
Tape
Method
3 mths 1 yr 2 yr 3 yr 4 yr 5 yr
Directional Reflectance %
White  65  50  50  50  50  50 E97
Yellow  45  35  35  35  35  35
Black Temporary  12

Retroreflectance
mcd/m2/lux
White * * * * * * Instrument
Yellow * * * * * * Mirolux
Black Temporary * 12

Durability %  95  95 > 90 > 80  75  70 MTO**

Appearance 8 8 7 6 5 5 D713 & MTO

***

* Values to be established.

** Durability is calculated, first by estimating the % wear from the photographs/video images of stripes taken
at test sites, and then deducting the value obtained from 100.

*** Rating 1 - 10; Perfect Score is 10.

Rating made on inspection of the markings by a panel of evaluators from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 8 of 10 [Link] 1715

 FORM PAV.M 1715
Page 1

PREFORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE MATERIAL DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER’S NAME _____________________________________________

ADDRESS _____________________________________________
_____________________________________________

TELEPHONE NO. _______________________________

B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
Commercial/Trade Name of Sample _____________________________________________
Manufacturer’s Code No. ______________________________________
Batch No. ______________________________________
Colour ______________________________________
Width ______________________________________
Thickness ______________________________________
Date of Manufacture ______________________________________

C. MATERIAL COMPOSITION
Resins and Conditioners wt % ___________________________________________________
Pigments and Fillers wt % ___________________________________________________
Beads wt, % ___________________________________________________

D. TEST DATA
1. Preformed Tape
a. Tensile strength, Mpa ASTM D638
at 24 C 0.6 cm/min ___________________

b. Elongation and Break % ASTM D638

0.6 cm/min ___________________

c. Adhesion at 10 C ASTM D1000

g/25.4 mm at 24 C ___________________
Softening Point C ASTM E28 ___________________

2. Adhesive and Primer, if used separately

Primer Adhesive
Viscosity 25 C ASTM D562 ________________ _______________

E. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

July 2023 Page 9 of 10 [Link] 1715

 FORM PAV.M. 1715
Page 2

F. PROCEDURE FOR OVERLAY AND INLAY APPLICATION/INSTALLATION

1. Pavement Surface Preparation Procedure ___________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________

2. Pavement Temperature Range for Installation

Minimum C __________________________________
Maximum C __________________________________

3. Air Temperature
Minimum C __________________________________

4. Humidity Maximum % __________________________________

5. Adhesive Application Procedure __________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________

6. Type of Pavement * where the application is recommended ____________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

7. Equipment for Installation _______________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________

8. Any Other Relevant Information __________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________

* Refers to the age of the pavement, the surface texture, e.g. OFC, DFC, and whether it is asphalt
or concrete.

NOTE: This form must be completed in full and forwarded with tape sample. Samples submitted
without a completed Data Form will not be considered.

July 2023 Page 10 of 10 [Link] 1715

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1716
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1716, February 1991)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1716 COMMON, February 1991 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

WATER-BORNE TRAFFIC PAINT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1716.01 SCOPE

1716.02 REFERENCES

1716.03 DEFINITIONS

1716.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1716.05 MATERIALS

1716.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1716.07 PRODUCTION

1716.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1716.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1716.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for water-borne traffic paint which is suitable for application onto
concrete and bituminous pavements.

1716.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1750 Traffic Paint Reflectorizing Glass Beads

Canadian General Standards Board

CGSB-1-GP-12C-1983 Standard Paint Colours

CGSB-1-GP-71-1983 Testing Paints and Pigments:

California Department of Transportation

8010-61G-30 Water Borne Traffic Paint

July 2023 Page 1 of 11 [Link] 1716

American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM D185-84 Coarse Particles in Pigments, Pastes and Paints

ASTM D562-81(1985) Consistency of Paints Using the Stormer Viscometer.
ASTM D711-84 No Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint
ASTM D713-87 Conducting Road Service Tests on Traffic Paint
ASTM D869-85 Evaluating Degree of Settling of Traffic Paint
ASTM D2205-85 Traffic Paints
ASTM D2243-82(1987) Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Water-Borne Paints
ASTM D2244-85 Calculation of Colour Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates
ASTM D2369-87 Volatile Content of Coatings
ASTM D3168-85 Practice for Qualitative Identification of Polymers in Emulsion Paints
ASTM D3960-87 Determining Volatile Organic Content (VOC) of Paints and Related Coatings
ASTM E70-77(1986) Test Method for pH of Aqueous Solutions With the Glass Electrode
ASTM E97-82(1987) Test Method for 45-deg., 0-deg., Directional Reflectance Factor of Opaque
Specimens by Broad-Band Filter
ASTM E303-83 Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester

United States Federal Standard

U.S. FED-STD-595B Dec. 15, 1989 Colours Used in Government Procurement

International Commission on Illumination

CIE 1976 - L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference Equation

1716.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

Compliance Certification means the procedure and requirements for establishing an approved source for
materials.

Fingerprinting means the testing of water-borne by gas chromatographic and infrared spectroscopic
techniques for verification purposes.

No Tracking Time means the time required for a newly applied pavement marking line to show no visible
deposition of the material to the pavement surface outside the line when viewed from a distance of 15 metres,
as determined by passing over the applied line at 60 km per hour in a simulated passing maneuver with a
passenger car.

Pavement Marking Material means a material formulated for application onto bituminous or concrete
pavement in order to delineate vehicle operating limits.

Reflectorization means a material, treatment, or process to enable incident light to be returned in high
proportions in the general direction of the light source.

Service Test means the evaluation of pavement marking materials on a test deck and performance rating
prior to compliance certification.

Traffic Paint means a paint specifically formulated for use as a pavement marking to delineate vehicle
operating limits.

July 2023 Page 2 of 11 [Link] 1716

Water-Borne Traffic Paint means traffic paint whose components are carried in water either as an emulsion
or a dispersion and will form a solid paint film on deposition and evaporation of water and volatiles after
application.

1716.05 MATERIALS

1716.05.01 General

Water-borne traffic paint shall be homogeneous and shall be well ground to a uniform smooth consistency. It
shall be free from skin, dirt, and other foreign particles and shall be capable of being sprayed at the
temperature intended for the paint. The water-borne traffic paint shall flow evenly and smoothly and cover
solidly when applied to pavements.

The materials used in the manufacture of the water-borne traffic paint shall be of high quality and consistency
such that the appearance will not change in service to impair the colour or visibility of the delineation. The
water-borne traffic paint film shall be flat in finish, and the white and yellow markings shall be visible under
daylight and artificial light after the addition of the overlay glass beads.

1716.05.02 Colour

The water-borne traffic paint shall conform to the following colour requirements:

White - CGSB 1-GP-12C white 513-301

Yellow - Shall match either the yellow traffic paint chip of the Ministry of Transportation, Ontario or
U.S. Federal 595B, Yellow 33538

Black - CGSB 1-GP-12C Black 512-301

The tolerance in colour allowed is as follows in the CIE L*, a*, b* Uniform Colour Space and Colour Difference
Equation when calculated from instrumentally measured colour differences conforming to ASTM D 2244:

White L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a* = +1.5 and -1 max
b* = +4 and -4 max

Yellow - MTO L* = +2 and -1.5 max

a** = +3 and -1.5 max
b* = +7 and -1.5 max

Yellow - U.S. L* = -2 and +4 max

a* = -6 and +4 max
b* = -9 and +10 max

1716.05.03 Chemical Composition

The chemical composition of the water-borne traffic paint shall be at the discretion of the paint manufacturer
and shall be certified by the Owner.

July 2023 Page 3 of 11 [Link] 1716

1716.05.04 Reflectorization

The white and yellow paints shall be used with overlay glass beads which are applied uniformly after
application of the paint at a rate as shown below. The white and yellow paints shall provide proper anchorage
for overlay glass beads according to OPSS 1750.

Rate of application for overlay glass beads per litre of traffic paint.

% Volume Solids of Traffic Paint Glass Beads Required in kg

40-56 0.7
57-70 0.8

Test samples of glass beads according to OPSS 1750 may be obtained from the Owner upon request.

1716.05.05 Physical Property Requirements

Water-borne traffic paints shall be supplied ready-mixed for use without any addition of water.

The handling and storage qualities must be acceptable with respect to degree of settling, uniform consistency,
absence of skinning, and thixotropic properties. The water-borne traffic paint shall be capable of being
sufficiently atomized to produce an uniformly applied paint stripe without side splatter and overspray within
the limitation imposed by conventional striping equipment.

The physical properties of the water-borne traffic paints submitted for compliance certification shall conform to
Table 1.

Samples are required by the Owner for laboratory testing. The supplier shall submit with each test sample,
complete data on physical properties, application procedure, and material safety for the water-borne traffic
paint.

1716.05.06 Service Test

Water-borne traffic paint, according to subsection 1716.05.05 and Table 1 shall be submitted for service test
when requested by the Owner.

Water-borne traffic paints will be service tested according to the following:

a) Test deck location, time, and procedure of application shall be as specified by the Owner.

b) Test stripe shall be 10 cm in width and applied transversely by across the lanes of the road. Application
of the traffic paint to a dry thickness of 230 microns  25 microns on bituminous or concrete pavement
with about 20,000 AADT and application of overlay glass beads according to OPSS 1750 at the approved
rate immediately over the white and yellow striped line.

c) The ease and uniformity of application, severity of overspray, covering properties, and drying time will be
evaluated during application.

d) The applied water-borne traffic paint will be inspected periodically and its service performance will be
rated by the Owner as specified in Table 2.

e) Approval will be given after one year of service rating providing the material conforms to Table 2 and
meets the conditions of subsection 1716.09.02.

July 2023 Page 4 of 11 [Link] 1716

1716.07 PRODUCTION

1716.07.01 Plant Inspection

In order to qualify as a supplier of water-borne traffic paints, a manufacturer must satisfy the following
minimum requirements:

a) Adequate facilities to produce minimum batches of 3000 litres.

b) A laboratory sufficiently equipped and staffed to provide a quality control program which will ensure
compliance with this specification.

c) Properly documented production, sampling, and testing procedures and methods.

1716.07.02 Quality Control

A manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a quality control program to ensure that the water-borne
traffic paints conform to this specification.

1716.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1716.08.01 Acceptance Criteria

The Owner may request samples to be taken from the shipments of water-borne traffic paints at any time for
quality assurance testing. Samples shall be taken from each batch produced for delivery to the Owner.
Criteria for accepting each production batch include the following requirements and manufacturing tolerances:

a) Density shall be within 0.05 kg/l of the value established on the test sample according to
CGSB-1-GP-71 - Method 2.1.

b) Viscosity shall be within  5 KU of the reference value.

c) Colour Difference E shall be within  1.5 of the value established on the reference sample.

d) Composition shall not vary by more than  5%, based on fingerprinting and other tests, ASTM D3168, of
the value of the reference sample.

e) Total solids shall not vary by more than  2% from the value of the reference sample.

f) pH of the sample shall not vary by more than one unit from that of the value established for the reference
sample.

g) No pickup time of each production batch sample shall be within  2.5 minutes of the value established for
the test sample according to ASTM D711.

h) Directional Reflectance with:

i. Minimum value of 70% white.

ii. Minimum value of 50% yellow.

i) Hiding Power with minimum value of 8.4 m2/l.

July 2023 Page 5 of 11 [Link] 1716

1716.08.02 Quality Control of Production Batches

A one litre sample from each production batch of water-borne traffic paint along with test results on density,
viscosity at 25 C, pH, total solids, and no-pickup time shall be delivered to the Owner's laboratory within two
days of manufacture of the respective batches.

Delivery records shall be kept by the supplier of the number of containers of each batch shipped to each
delivery point and a list of such shipments during each calendar week shall be given to the Owner at the end
of each week until the entire order is completed and shipped.

1716.08.03 Storage

The water-borne traffic paint shall conform to this specification after storage.

1716.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1716.09.01 Trial Batch Application

A trial batch of water-borne traffic paints conforming to this specification may be purchased by the Owner for
evaluation of application properties using the Owner's painting equipment. The trial batch shall consist of a
minimum quantity of 1,000 litres of traffic paint.

No-tracking time will also be determined.

Those water-borne traffic paint conforming to this specification which exhibit satisfactory loading and
application properties when used with the Owner's traffic painting equipment will be considered for purchase.

1716.09.02 Certificate of Compliance

The manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance with tenders indicating that the physical properties
and chemical composition of all of the manufacturer's production batches of traffic paint for the Owner shall
conform to this specification and shall not deviate from the allowable tolerances, unless approved by the
Purchaser.

1716.09.03 Delivery and Packaging of Water-Borne Traffic Paint

The delivery schedule, delivery location, colour, and quantity shall be as specified on the Owner's purchase
order.

The water-borne traffic paint shall be furnished in returnable drums with airtight liners.

Each drum shall be clearly marked on the side and the top with weather resistant markings to show the
following information:

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

b) Type of traffic paint.

c) Colour.

d) Manufacturer's code and batch numbers date of filling the drum.

e) Volume of contents in litres.

July 2023 Page 6 of 11 [Link] 1716

A small portion of the water-borne traffic paint may be required in 20-litre containers. The quantity will be
specified on the purchase order.

1716.09.04 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of water-borne traffic paint shall be by litres.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of water-borne traffic paint.

July 2023 Page 7 of 11 [Link] 1716

 TABLE 1
PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER-BORNE TRAFFIC PAINT

Requirements Test Methods

Test and Property
Min. Max. CGSB 1-GP-71 ASTM OTHER

Volatile Organic Content % 8.5 D3960

Settling 6 months 8.0 D869

Hiding Power m²/l 8.4 Pfund cyptometer

with #3.5 wedge
Skinning 48 hours nil nil 10.1

Viscosity KU
@ 7 C 135.0
@ 25 C 85 110.0 4.5 D562

Viscosity Change after Heat- Caltrans

Shear Stability Test at 25 C 8010-61G-30
KU 10.0

Freeze-Thaw Stability Pass

D2243
Coarse Particles
# 60 sieve - 250 m nil nil D185
# 100 sieve - 150 m 0.01 &
D2205

No Pickup Time, mins. 8.0* D711

Directional Reflectance % E97

White Paint 70.0
Yellow Paint 50.0
Black Paint 12

Skid Resistance ** E303

BPN Units

* For coning type of traffic paints, this value can be higher.

** Values to be established.

July 2023 Page 8 of 11 [Link] 1716

 TABLE 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE TEST
AT ABOUT 20,000 AADT FOR WATER-BORNE TRAFFIC PAINT

Performance Requirements

Property Newly Service Life Ratings of

Test
Installed
Method
Paints 3 mths 1 yr 1.5 yrs 2 yrs

Directional Reflectance % ASTM

White  70  70  50  50  50 E-97*
Yellow  50  50  35  35  35
Black  12  12

Retroreflectance Instrument
mcd/m2/lux Mirolux
White ** ** ** ** ** 12
Yellow ** ** ** ** **
Black ** **

No Tracking Time, mins. 2 MTO

Durability
White and Yellow  90  85  75  70 ASTM D913
Black  90 & MTO***

Appearance 10 8 7 6 5 ASTM D713

& MTO****

* These values were obtained on a typical asphalt surface.

** Values to be established.

*** Durability is calculated, first by estimating the % wear from the photographs/video images of stripes
taken at test sites, and then deducting the value obtained from 100.

**** Rating 1 - 10; perfect score is 10.

Rating made on inspection of the markings by a panel of evaluators from the Owner.

July 2023 Page 9 of 11 [Link] 1716

 FORM PAV.M.1716
Page 1

WATER-BORNE TRAFFIC PAINT DATA FORM

A. MANUFACTURER’S NAME _____________________________________________

ADDRESS _____________________________________________
_____________________________________________

TELEPHONE NO. _______________________________

B. SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer’s Code No. ______________________ Paint Batch No. ______________________
Colour of Paint ______________________________ Sample Date ________________________

C. TEST DATA
Density, kg/l 1-GP-71 M2.1 ___________________________________
Volatile Organic Content % ASTM D 3960 ___________________________________
No Pickup Time, minutes ASTM D711 ___________________________________
Hiding Power, m2/l Pfund Cryptometer
OPSS 1716, Table 1 ___________________________________
pH ASTM E70 ___________________________________
Total Solids ASTM D2369 ___________________________________
Freeze-Thaw Stability ASTM D2243 ___________________________________
Viscosity Change after
Heat-Shear Stability OPSS 1716, Table 1 ___________________________________

D. COMPOSITION OF PAINT % by Mass % by Volume

Pigment and Fillers __________________ __________________
Binder __________________ __________________
Water __________________ __________________

Composition of Pigment % by Mass

and Fillers

1 _____________________________________________________________________________
2 _____________________________________________________________________________
3 _____________________________________________________________________________
4 _____________________________________________________________________________
5 _____________________________________________________________________________
6 _____________________________________________________________________________
7 _____________________________________________________________________________
8 _____________________________________________________________________________
Type of Binder ____________________________________________________________________

VOC individual components mg/litre

__________________________________ ___________________________________
__________________________________ ___________________________________
__________________________________ ___________________________________
__________________________________ ___________________________________

July 2023 Page 10 of 11 [Link] 1716

 FORM PAV.M.1716
Page 2

E. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

F. APPLICATION PROCEDURE
Surface Preparation ________________________________________________________________
Minimum Pavement Temperature _____________________________
Paint Temperature ___________ min C ____________ max C
Mode of Application ________________________________________
Air Temperature __________ min C Humidity __________ max %

NOTE: This form must be completed in full forwarded with paint sample. Samples submitted without a
completed Paint Data form will not be considered.

July 2023 Page 11 of 11 [Link] 1716

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1750
STANDARD JULY 2023
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1750, December 1983)

Note: The PROV implemented in July 2023 replaces OPSS 1750 COMMON, December 1983 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

TRAFFIC PAINT REFLECTORIZING GLASS BEADS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1750.01 SCOPE

1750.02 REFERENCES

1750.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1750.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1750.05 MATERIALS

1750.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1750.07 PRODUCTION

1750.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1750.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1750.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for glass beads for use with traffic paint and requirements for
Owner purchase of reflectorizing glass beads.

1750.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications or publications:

ASTM Specifications

D1155-53 (1975) Standard Test Method for Roundness of Glass Spheres

D1214-58 (1975) Standard Method of Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres
E11-81 Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing purposes

July 2023 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1750

1750.05 MATERIALS

1750.05.01 Durability

The beads shall be manufactured from glass of a composition designed to be highly resistant to the effects of
traffic wear and weathering.

1750.05.02 Colour

The glass shall be colourless to a degree that the resulting beads, when added to white paint, do not impart a
noticeable hue.

1750.05.03 Bead Type and Grade

Beads shall be supplied in the Overlay Type and Moisture Proof Grade. The beads shall be treated in such a
manner as to overcome the effects of water, as vapour or liquid, on the beads before the beads are added to
the paint stripe.

1750.07 PRODUCTION

1750.07.01 Roundness

At least 70% by mass of the glass beads shall be true spheres.

1750.07.02 Gradation

The glass beads shall meet the following gradation requirements when tested according to ASTM D1214.

US Standard Percentage Passing by Dry Mass

Opening m
ASTM E11 Sieve Series Overlay Type
No. 20 850 100
No. 30 600 95 - 100
No. 40 425 45 - 70
No. 50 300 20 - 40
No. 70 212 5 - 20
No. 100 150 0-3

1750.07.03 Refractive Index

The index of refraction of the glass beads, when tested by the immersion method at 25 C under tungsten
light, shall not be less than 1.50.

1750.07.04 Imperfections

The surface of the beads shall be smooth, lustrous, and free from film, scratches, and pits.

Not more than 25% by mass of the true spheres shall have imperfections such as milkiness, dark specks,
incipient fractures, and air inclusions in the form of bubbles greater than 10% of the volume of the spheres.

July 2023 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1750

1750.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

1750.09.01 Sampling and Testing

1750.09.01.01 General

A maximum of 10% but no less than 1% of the total number of packages in each batch will be taken at
random for test purposes by the Owner. The contents of each random package will be riffled until a
representative sample of approximately 1000 g (or 500 ml) of beads is obtained. The 1,000 g samples will be
combined to form a composite sample of about 4 kg (about 4 L in volume) representing a batch of 25,000 kg
of beads. The composite sample will be riffled in the laboratory until about a 150 g sample is obtained for the
following testing.

1750.09.01.02 Roundness Testing

The percentage true spheres shall be determined by one of the following methods:

a) By counting the beads under 50X and 100X magnification as follows:

i. Glass beads larger than #50 sieve size inclusive, shall be counted under 50X magnification (see
gradation requirements).
ii. Glass beads smaller than #50 sieve size shall be counted under 100X magnification.
iii. Approximately 1,000 beads contained loosely in a culture dish shall be counted under reflected light
for each sieve specified to determine the percentage by mass of perfectly round spheres.

b) By ASTM D1155.

1750.09.01.03 Imperfections Testing

Imperfections shall be evaluated by observation under 50X and 100X magnification.

1750.09.01.04 Water Resistance Test

One hundred grams of glass beads will be placed in a 500 ml beaker and an equivalent volume of distilled
water will be flowed into the beaker on top of the glass beads. The beaker will be permitted to stand for
5 minutes. At the end of this period, the water shall be poured off and the glass beads will be transferred to a
clean, dry beaker and permitted to stand for 5 minutes. The spheres will then be introduced into a standard
125 m diameter glass funnel having a stem of 125 mm length. The beads shall flow through the funnel
without stoppage. Slight initial agitation to start the flow through the funnel at the beginning of the test will be
permissible.

1750.09.02 Packaging

Beads in bags shall be free of clusters, lumps, moisture, and foreign matter.

Glass beads shall be packaged in bags of 25 kg net capacity and each bag shall be marked to show clearly
the following information:

a) Overlay Type Glass Beads

b) Moisture Proof Grade

c) MTC

d) Batch number

e) Manufacturer's name (marked in 25 mm high letters)

July 2023 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1750

Bags shall be paper-lined burlap with 50 m polyethylene inserts. The burlap liner, all seams and top
closures shall be waterproof and leakproof and shall be capable of maintaining these properties during
transportation and numerous handlings.

Bags shall be approximately 0.35 x 0.66 m with the 50 m polyethylene insert being 0.35 x 0.96 m.

All bags shall be subject to prior approval by the Owner and shall be or be equal in quality to either:

a) A Bemis Waterproof, Standard Type, single paper lined, cemented centre seam, taped bottom bag,
produced by Bemis Bros. Bag Company, St. Louis, Missouri, U.S.A., or

b) A Lloyd jute bag with polyethylene liner, Code #1010, produced by Lloyd Bag Company Limited, 114,
St. Clair Street, Chatham, Ontario.

1750.09.03 Delivery

Delivery details and scheduling shall be as stipulated on the Owner's purchase order.

1750.09.04 Quality Assurance

Any shipment or shipments of this material supplied to the Owner shall be sampled and tested within a
30 Day period immediately following the date of the delivery. Failure to meet the requirements of this
specification shall constitute cause for rejection of the shipment. Upon rejection of the shipment, the letters
"MTC" shall be made permanently illegible on each bag of the shipment. Rejected materials shall be
expeditiously removed and replaced with acceptable materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

1750.09.05 Measurement and Payment

Measurement of beads shall be by kilograms.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of beads.

July 2023 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1750

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1801
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1801, November 2014)

Note: The PROV published in April 2018 replaces OPSS 1801 COMMON, November 2014 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE (CSP) PRODUCTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1801.01 SCOPE

1801.02 REFERENCES

1801.03 DEFINITIONS

1801.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1801.05 MATERIALS

1801.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1801.07 PRODUCTION

1801.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1801.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for all corrugated steel pipe products to be used for storm
sewers, pipe culverts, and subdrains.

1801.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G401-14 Corrugated Steel Pipe Products

1801.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Certification Body means an independent 3rd party agency accredited by the Standards Council of
Canada that has the qualifications, skills, and expertise required to confirm that a pipe manufacturer

April 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1801

produces pipe products to the quality and requirements of an accepted standard and that has the
mandate to certify the pipe products produced.

Certified means pipe products that have been marked with a certification body’s logo confirming that the
production of the pipe product is in accordance with the quality and requirements of CSA G401.

Corrugated Steel Pipe Products means any one or any combination of the following products:

- round corrugated steel pipe with an end finish

- corrugated steel pipe arch with an end finish
- round structural plate corrugated steel pipe with an end finish
- structural plate corrugated steel pipe arch with an end finish
- round spiral rib pipe with an end finish
- spiral rib steel pipe arch with an end finish
- perforated corrugated steel pipe
- corrugated steel pipe coupler bands with or without gasket
- corrugated steel pipe end sections
- corrugated steel pipe safety slope end treatments
- corrugated steel pipe saddle branches

Delivered Quality means the pipe products’ physical condition upon arrival at the construction site in
terms of the extent and degree of dents, scratches, cracks, pipe coating integrity, etc., that appear on the
pipe products delivered.

1801.05 MATERIALS

1801.05.01 Corrugated Steel Pipe Products

Corrugated steel pipe products shall be according to CSA G401 and Appendix A of the same standard.
Coating shall be galvanized, aluminized Type 2, thermoplastic polymer, or polymer laminated as specified
in the Contract Documents.

1801.07 PRODUCTION

1801.07.01 Fabrication

The pipe diameter, wall thickness, coating, and type of all corrugated steel pipe products shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

All corrugated steel pipe products used on the Contract shall be certified and supplied from a
manufacturer that produces the corrugated steel pipe products according to CSA G401.

When the delivered quality of certified corrugated steel pipe products is deemed to be unacceptable by
the Contract Administrator, the products shall be rejected.

1801.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1801.08.01 Inspection, Testing, and Record Keeping

Inspection, testing, and record keeping for corrugated steel pipe products shall be according to CSA
G401.

April 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1801

1801.08.02 Markings

Certified corrugated steel round pipe and pipe arch and certified spiral rib round pipe and pipe arch shall
be marked according to CSA G401, along with the logo of the certification body and name of the pipe
manufacturer.

Certified structural plate corrugated steel pipe plate shall be marked according to CSA G401, along with
the logo of the certification body and name of the pipe manufacturer.

Accepted certification body logos confirming certified corrugated steel pipe products shall be as shown in
Figures 1 and 2.

1801.08.03 Certificate of Compliance

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a certificate of compliance for subdrains and
the corrugated steel pipe products used for eccentric loader assemblies to indicate that the product was
produced and tested according to the appropriate specification requirements.

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the certificate of compliance from
the manufacturer for storm sewers and pipe culverts. The manufacturer’s certificate of compliance shall
be issued by the certification body confirming that the manufacturer produces certified corrugated steel
pipe products in accordance with CSA G401.

April 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1801

 FIGURE 1
CSA Standards Certification Logo

FIGURE 2
Canadian Welding Bureau Certification Logo

April 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1801

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1802
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1802, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in April 2018 replaces OPSS 1802 COMMON, November 2015 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SMOOTH WALLED STEEL PIPE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1802.01 SCOPE

1802.02 REFERENCES

1802.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1802.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1802.05 MATERIAL - Not Used

1802.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1802.07 PRODUCTION

1802.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1802.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for smooth walled steel pipe to be used for the installation of
pipes or casings.

1802.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

Z662-11 Package Consists of Z662-11, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems, and Z662.1-07, Commentary on
CSA Z662-11, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems

ASTM International

A 252-98e1 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles

April 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1802

American Water Works Association (AWWA)

C200-05 Steel Water Pipe-6 in. (150 mm) and Larger

1802.07 PRODUCTION

1802.07.01 Requirements

All pipe shall be new and manufactured from steel according to ASTM A 252, Grade 2, with a minimum
yield strength of 240 MPa.

Production welding shall be according to AWWA C200.

Pipe ends shall be bevel edged on the outside to an angle of 30°.

Pipe wall thickness shall be according to Table 1, except as amended below:

a) The least nominal wall thickness for pipe with outside diameters from 88.9 to 141.3 mm shall be
4.8 mm.

b) When protective coating or cathodic protection for steel casing or carrier pipe is not specified in the
Contract Documents, the pipe wall thickness shall be increased to the nearest standard size that is a
minimum of 1.6 mm greater than the least nominal wall thickness shown.

1802.07.02 Identification

The following information shall be clearly marked by stencilling, stamping, or painting of each section of
pipe:

a) Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

b) Heat number.

c) Outside diameter.

d) Nominal wall thickness.

e) Length of pipe.

f) Weight per unit length.

g) Standard designation.

h) Grade of steel.

1802.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1802.08.01 Certificate

Upon request, suppliers shall provide a certificate to indicate that the product was produced and tested
according to the appropriate standard requirements.

April 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1802

1802.08.02 Inspection and Testing

The Owner reserves the right to make inspections and tests at such time as the Owner considers
necessary to ensure the materials supplied are according to this specification. All materials failing to
comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

April 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1802

 TABLE 1
Least Nominal Wall Thickness for Steel Casing Pipe
in Cased Crossings and Carrier Pipe in Uncased Crossings
Pipe Outside Diameter Least Nominal Wall Thickness
mm mm
Roads Railways
88.9 3.2 3.2
101.6 3.2 3.2
114.3 3.2 3.2
141.3 4.0 4.0
168.3 4.8 4.8
219.1 4.8 4.8
273.1 4.8 4.8
323.9 4.8 4.8
355.6 4.8 5.6
406.4 4.8 5.6
457.0 4.8 6.4
508.0 4.8 7.1
559.0 5.6 7.9
610.0 6.4 8.7
660.0 6.4 9.5
711.0 6.4 10.3
762.0 6.4 10.3
813.0 6.4 11.1
864.0 6.4 11.9
914.0 6.4 11.9
965.0 7.9 12.7
1016.0 7.9 12.7
1067.0 7.9 12.7
1118.0 7.9 14.3
1168.0 7.9 15.9
1219.0 8.3 15.9
1270.0 8.7 15.9
1321.0 9.5 19.1
1372.0 9.5 19.1
1422.0 9.5 19.1
1524.0 10.3 20.6
Copyright © 2007 Canadian Standards Association, CSA Z662. Reproduced with permission.

With the permission of Canadian Standards Association, Table 1 is reproduced from Z662-11, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems, which
is copyrighted by Canadian Standards Association, 5060 Spectrum Way, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 5N5. While use of this
material has been authorized, CSA shall not be responsible for the manner in which the information is presented, nor for any
interpretations thereof. For more information on CSA or to purchase standards, please visit the CSA website at [Link] or
call 1-800-463-6727. These references only provide basic guidance; users should refer to the standard for the full requirements of
Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems

April 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1802

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 1820
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2014

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CIRCULAR AND ELLIPTICAL CONCRETE PIPE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1820.01 SCOPE

1820.02 REFERENCES

1820.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1820.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1820.05 MATERIALS

1820.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1820.07 PRODUCTION

1820.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

1820.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

APPENDICES

1820-A Commentary

1820.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for reinforced and non-reinforced non-pressure circular
concrete pipe with rubber gasket joints, and for non-gasketed reinforced elliptical concrete pipe.

1820.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

1820.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

1820.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

A257.1-09 Non-Reinforced Circular Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe, and Fittings
[Part of A257 Series-09, Standards for Concrete Pipe and Manhole Sections]
A257.2-09 Reinforced Circular Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe, and Fittings
[Part of A257 Series-09, Standards for Concrete Pipe and Manhole Sections]
A257.3-09 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Manhole Sections, and Fittings
Using Rubber Gaskets
[Part of A257 Series-09, Standards for Concrete Pipe and Manhole Sections]
A3000-08 Cementitious Materials Compendium

ASTM International

C 507M-11 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe (Metric)

Plant Prequalification Program Publication

Prequalification Requirements for Precast Concrete Drainage Products

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

1820.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1820.04.01 Design Requirements

1820.04.01.01 Concrete Pipe

Non-reinforced circular concrete pipe shall be according to CAN/CSA A257.1.

Reinforced circular concrete pipe shall be according to CAN/CSA A257.2.

Reinforced elliptical concrete pipe shall be according to ASTM C 507M.

1820.04.01.02 Joints and Gaskets

Joints and gaskets for circular concrete pipe shall be according to CAN/CSA A257.3.

Joints for elliptical concrete pipe shall be according to ASTM C 507M, and according to the requirements
outlined in the publication, Prequalification Requirements for Precast Concrete Drainage Products.

Elliptical concrete pipe produced with non-gasketed joints shall be used for storm pipe sewers only.

1820.04.01.03 Jacking Pipe

Jacking pipe shall be according to CAN/CSA A257.2 with a minimum class of 65-D and a minimum
concrete strength of 40MPa.

1820.04.01.04 Elliptical Reinforcing

Elliptical reinforcing for circular concrete pipe is not permitted for pipes up to and including 900 mm
nominal internal diameter.

1820.04.01.05 Lift Holes and Anchors

Lift holes are not permitted for pipes. Lift anchors are not permitted for pipes up to and including 900 mm
nominal internal diameter.

1820.05 MATERIALS

1820.05.01 Cement

Cement shall be Portland cement or a commercial blend of Portland cement and blast-furnace slag or fly
ash, or both. Ground granulated blast-furnace slag or fly ash may also be added separately to Portland
cement. Whether added separately or in the form of blended cement, ground granulated blast-furnace
slag shall constitute not more than 70% by mass of the total cementing materials and fly ash shall
constitute not more than 40% by mass of the total cementing materials. The total amount of
supplementary cementing materials in the cement for concrete pipe shall not exceed 70% by mass of the
total cementing materials.

Portland cement, blended cement, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and fly ash shall be according to
CAN/CSA A3000.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

1820.07 PRODUCTION

1820.07.01 General

A manufacturer producing circular concrete pipe or elliptical concrete pipe or both shall possess a current
Prequalification Certificate, issued under the Plant Prequalification Program as outlined in the publication,
Prequalification Requirements for Precast Concrete Drainage Products.

1820.07.02 Markings

Markings for circular concrete pipe shall be according to CAN/CSA A257.2.

Markings for elliptical concrete pipe shall be according to ASTM C 507M.

In addition, all pipe shall be marked with the Prequalification Stamp shown in Figure 1 and as outlined in
the publication, Prequalification Requirements for Precast Concrete Drainage Products.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

 Figure 1
Prequalification Stamp

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

Appendix 1820-A, November 2014
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2014 [Link] 1820

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1821
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR PRECAST REINFORCED

CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS WITH SPAN 3m OR LESS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1821.01 SCOPE

1821.02 REFERENCES

1821.03 DEFINITIONS

1821.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1821.05 MATERIALS

1821.06 EQUIPMENT

1821.07 PRODUCTION

1821.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1821.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1821.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material and fabrication requirements of single-cell precast reinforced concrete
box culverts with span 3 m or less (including imperial sized spans of 3.048 m).

1821.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 904 Concrete Structures

OPSS 905 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete
OPSS 909 Prestressed Concrete - Precast Concrete
OPSS 919 Formwork and Falsework

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1002 Aggregates - Concrete

OPSS 1302 Water
OPSS 1306 Burlap
OPSS 1350 Concrete - Materials and Production
OPSS 1440 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete

November 2022 Page 1 of 19 [Link] 1821

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual

MTO Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-410 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cores
LS-412 Method of Test for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to De-icing Chemicals
LS-432 Method of Test for Microscopical Determination of Air Void System Parameters in Hardened
Concrete
LS-433 Method of Test for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration

MTO Forms:
PH-CC-433A Concrete Mix Design Form A
PH-CC-701 Request to Proceed
PH-CC-702 Notice to Proceed

CSA Standards

A23.2-14C Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores for Compressive Strength Testing*
* [Part of A23.1-19/A23.2-19 – Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete]
A23.4-16 Precast Concrete Materials and Construction
S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
W47.1-09 (R2019) Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel
W59-18 Welded steel construction (metal arc welding)
W186 Welding of Reinforcing Bars Company Certification

ASTM International

A153/A153M-16a Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

A240/A240M-22 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

1821.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Box Culvert means a box culvert constructed of precast reinforced concrete box units rectangular in
cross-section, with a span 3 m or less and includes imperial sized spans of 3.048 m.

Box Unit means a single precast reinforced concrete box unit of a box culvert.

Concrete Appurtenances means as defined in OPSS 422.

Dry Cast Concrete means concrete with a slump of 0 mm at the time of placing, that is consolidated in the
form using low-frequency high-amplitude vibration.

Height of Fill means the smallest elevation difference, between the top surface of box culvert and the top
of pavement or finished grade, from edge of shoulder to edge of shoulder.

Honeycombing means rough and stony concrete surface with voids where the mortar did not fill the spaces
between the coarse aggregate particles.

Longitudinal Steel Reinforcement means steel reinforcement aligned parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the box unit.

November 2022 Page 2 of 19 [Link] 1821

Perimeter Steel Reinforcement means perimeter steel reinforcing bars or perimeter wires reinforcement
aligned perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the box unit.

Wet Cast Concrete means concrete with a measurable slump at the time of placing, that is typically
consolidated by vibration.

1821.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1821.04.01 Design Requirements

All box units shall be designed according to CSA S6, the Structural Manual, Division 1, Table 1 and as
specified the Contract Documents.

1821.04.02 Submission Requirements

1821.04.02.01 Working Drawings

The box unit manufacturer’s Working Drawings, including supporting documentation, shall be submitted to
the Contract Administrator at least 7 Days prior to fabrication of the box units. All Working Drawings shall
bear the seal and signature of an Engineer certifying they are as specified in the Contract Documents.

1821.04.02.02 Concrete Mix Designs

The concrete mix shall be designed to provide adequate strength and durability for the intended use and to
meet the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents. The concrete mix design shall be submitted
according to the Mix Design clause in OPSS 1350.

1821.04.02.03 Salt Scaling Resistance in Dry Cast Concrete

Salt scaling results obtained by the manufacturer shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within
14 weeks of casting the box unit. Salt scaling results shall be current within 3 months at the time of
submission. The results shall demonstrate the concrete meets the requirements of this specification.

For evaluation of the salt scaling resistance of dry cast concrete, a set of two specimens shall be cast and
tested a using the same mix design and production procedures as will be used for the work. The specimens
shall be 300 x 300 x 75 mm and shall be tested according to LS-412.

The salt scaling resistance test shall be carried out by a laboratory from MTO’s list of qualified laboratories
for scaling resistance of concrete surfaces. The salt scaling result shall be the average of a set.

1821.04.02.04 Precast Plant Certification Submissions

The certificate, verifying that the precast plant is certified according to the Precast Plant Certification clause,
shall be submitted with the concrete mix design submission.

Copies of precast plant certification audit reports of the Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance
Program (CPCQA), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), or both as applicable, and related
documentation, shall be submitted to the Owner upon request.

If concrete is supplied by a ready-mix concrete supplier, a currently valid certificate of ready mixed concrete
production facilities as issued by the Ready Mixed Concrete Association of Ontario (RMCAO), shall be
submitted with the concrete mix design submission.

For multi-year Contracts, for all plants supplying the work, documentation verifying that the precast plant,
and ready-mix plant(s) if used, continue to hold valid certification shall be submitted annually.

November 2022 Page 3 of 19 [Link] 1821

1821.04.02.05 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and Precast Report

A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and a precast report shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator for each shipment of box units at least 5 Business Days prior to shipping from the precast
plant.

The precast report shall contain the following information:

a) List of box units in the shipment, including their ID number, lot number, and description.

b) Mill certificates for the steel reinforcement used in the box units.

c) Summary of material test results for plastic concrete. For wet cast concrete, test results for air content,
slump, and concrete temperature shall be submitted. For dry cast concrete, test results for concrete
temperature shall be submitted.

d) Covermeter and dimensional check report.

e) Summary of material test results for hardened concrete: stripping strength (for wet cast concrete only),
confirmation of the projected 28-Day compressive strength. If test results are not available at the time
of shipping, they may be submitted within 4 Business Days following completion of testing.

f) Sampling records for compressive strength, air void system (for wet cast), rapid chloride permeability
and scaling resistance (for dry cast).

A MTO form PH-CC-701, Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator before the
delivery of each shipment of box units to the Working Area.

The box units shall not be delivered to the Working Area until the Contract Administrator has issued a MTO
form PH-CC-702, Notice to Proceed.

1821.05 MATERIALS

1821.05.01 Associated Hardware

All associated hardware shall be according to OPSS 905, except that all exposed and embedded hardware
within 35 mm of exposed faces, including spacers and support devices, shall be non-corroding, non-metallic,
or be galvanized according to ASTM A153M, or be stainless steel according to ASTM 240M Type 304.

1821.05.02 Burlap

Burlap shall be according to OPSS 1306.

1821.05.03 Concrete

Concrete materials for precast components shall be according to the Materials section in OPSS 1350 with
the following additions and amendments:

a) The minimum specified 28-Day compressive strength shall be 35 MPa, unless otherwise specified in
the Contract Documents.

b) For wet cast concrete, the minimum specified stripping strength shall be 20 MPa, unless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2022 Page 4 of 19 [Link] 1821

c) For wet cast concrete, the air void system spacing factor, when tested according to LS-432, shall be
0.200 mm maximum.

d) For dry cast concrete, the salt scaling resistance when tested according to LS-412 and this specification
shall have a mass loss of not more than 0.8 kg/m².

e) Aggregates shall be according to OPSS 1002.

f) The allowable proportion of cementing material of ground granulated blast furnace slag in dry cast
concrete shall be limited to a maximum of 40% by mass of total cementing materials.

1821.05.04 Formwork

All formwork shall be according to OPSS 919 and CSA A23.4. Formwork shall be fabricated to meet the
dimensional tolerances and finishes specified in the Contract Documents. Textile form liners shall not be
permitted.

1821.05.05 Steel Reinforcement

Steel reinforcement shall be according to OPSS 1440.

1821.05.06 Water

Water used for curing, including steam curing and pre-soaking of burlap, and water used in proprietary
patching materials shall be according to OPSS 1302.

1821.06 EQUIPMENT

1821.06.01 General

Equipment made of aluminum, including tools, shall not come in contact with the plastic concrete.

1821.07 PRODUCTION

1821.07.01 Precast Plant Certification

Box units shall be fabricated by a plant certified according to one of the following:

a) CPCQA certification program, precast concrete drainage products, or

b) CSA precast concrete products certification program, group D, drainage products (D1 minimum).

If concrete is supplied by a ready-mix concrete plant, the concrete production facility shall be certified by
the RMCAO.

1821.07.02 Markings

As a minimum, the following information shall be lettered with waterproof paint on an upper top haunch of
each box unit in the following order, and readily visible for inspection:

a) Prequalification stamp according to the CPCQA or CSA certification program.

b) Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

November 2022 Page 5 of 19 [Link] 1821

c) Identification of plant if manufacturer has more than one plant.

d) Date of manufacture (yyyy-mm-dd).

e) Unique number.

f) Specification designation.

g) MTO site number, when specified in the Contract Documents.

h) Minimum and maximum height of fill over box units.

In addition, the word "TOP" shall be lettered with waterproof paint on the top surface of each box unit. This
requirement shall be waived if the manufacturer installs lift holes in the top slab only.

1821.07.03 Steel Reinforcement

1821.07.03.01 General

The placement of steel reinforcement shall be according to OPSS 905.

Under no circumstance shall reinforcement be inserted into plastic concrete.

1821.07.03.02 Area of Steel Reinforcement

The box unit steel reinforcement area shall be according to Table 1 for the box unit dimensions, wall
thickness, and height of fill specified in the Contract Document.

1821.07.03.03 Placement of Steel Reinforcement

The concrete cover shall be according to Table 2.

The clear distance of the end perimeter steel reinforcement shall be not less than 35 mm or greater than 50
mm from the ends of the box unit. Box units may be assembled utilizing any combination of single or double
layers of the steel welded wire reinforcement (WWR) or reinforcing steel bars.

The areas of steel reinforcement shall be the steel reinforcement areas as shown in Table 1. Steel
reinforcement areas greater than those required shall not be cause for rejection.

1821.07.04 Laps, Welds, and Spacing of Steel Reinforcement

Splices in the perimeter steel reinforcement shall be made by lapping and only at locations specified in the
Contract Documents. Sheets of the WWR shall be welded at lap locations using the provisions for non-load-
bearing joints according to CSA W186. WWR sheets shall not be welded elsewhere. The welding shall be
performed by a welder qualified by the Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB) working for a company certified
according to CSA [Link] overlap measured between the outermost longitudinal wires of each WWR
sheet shall not be less than the spacing of the longitudinal wires plus 50 mm, or 250 mm, whichever is
greater. Lap splices for reinforcing steel bars including longitudinal steel reinforcement, shall be Class B
splices according to CSA S6.

The spacing center to center of the perimeter wires shall not be less than 50 mm or greater than 105 mm.
The spacing center to center of the longitudinal wires shall not be greater than 205 mm.

Welding of steel hardware shall be according to CSA W59 and shall be performed by a welder qualified by
the CWB working for a company certified according to CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2.

November 2022 Page 6 of 19 [Link] 1821

Welding of steel reinforcement shall be according to OPSS 905.

1821.07.05 Joints

The box units shall be produced with bell and spigot ends. The ends shall be of such design that when the
boxes are laid together, they will make a continuous box culvert with a smooth interior free of irregularities
in the flow line.

1821.07.06 Production of Concrete

1821.07.06.01 General

Production of concrete shall be according to the General, Temperature Control, Mixing Time and Mixing
Rate, and Discharge Time subsections in OPSS 1350.

1821.07.06.02 Sampling and Testing of Plastic Concrete for Wet Cast Concrete

For wet cast concrete, sampling and testing of the plastic concrete for slump, air content, and temperature
shall be according to OPSS 1350. The results of these tests shall be recorded and submitted in the precast
report. The minimum frequency of testing shall be as follows:

a) For concrete supplied by an external concrete supplier and delivered by a ready-mix truck, once for
each of the first three trucks, until satisfactory control is established, and then once every third truck.

b) For batches of concrete produced at the precast plant and transported by a ready-mix truck, once for
each of the first three trucks, until satisfactory control is established, and then once every third truck.

c) For batches of concrete produced at the precast plant, and not delivered by a ready-mix truck, once for
each of the first five batches of concrete, until satisfactory control is established, and then once every
fifth batch.

Satisfactory control is established when three or five consecutive tests of concrete, as specified above, are
within the specified requirements, without adjustments. If any adjustments are required or conducted, testing
shall continue until three or five consecutive tests, as specified above, meet the requirements with no
adjustments. Satisfactory control shall be established each Day or when there is a break in production longer
than 1.5 hours.

Testing of plastic concrete shall be carried out as close as possible to the location of discharge of concrete
into the formwork.

Sampling and testing of slump, air content, and temperature of plastic concrete shall be carried out by a
person holding either of the following certifications:

a) CCIL Certified Concrete Testing Technician;

b) ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1; or

c) CSA Standards Concrete Field Testing Technician.

The person shall have a valid original card issued by the certifying agency in their possession at all times.

1821.07.06.03 Testing of Plastic Concrete for Dry Cast Concrete

For dry cast concrete, the concrete shall be tested for temperature. Temperature shall be measured
according OPSS 1350. The minimum frequency of testing shall be once for each Day of production.

November 2022 Page 7 of 19 [Link] 1821

1821.07.07 Placing of Concrete

1821.07.07.01 General

The method of transporting, placing, and consolidating the concrete shall be such as to prevent segregation.

For wet cast concrete, concrete shall be deposited within 0.5 m of the top of the steel reinforcement and
1.5 m horizontally of its final position.

Concrete shall be placed at a steady rate, such that a monolithic concrete is obtained without the formation
of cold joints or pour lines.

1821.07.07.02 Concrete Placing Restrictions

All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be free of standing water.

All debris shall be removed from the area where concrete is to be placed.

Any surface against which concrete is placed, including any existing concrete, steel reinforcement, structural
steel, forms, or other surfaces shall be at a minimum temperature of 5.0 °C immediately prior to
commencement of placing concrete. The temperature of the formwork, steel reinforcement or any other
material against which concrete is to be placed shall not exceed 30.0 °C.

1821.07.07.03 Consolidation

Internal or external vibrators or both shall be used to thoroughly consolidate concrete.

Vibration shall not be used to make the concrete flow or to spread the concrete more than 1.5 m from the
point of deposit.

The requirements of this clause do not apply to self-consolidating concrete, where accepted for use by the
Owner.

1821.07.07.04 Concrete Finishing

For wet cast concrete, finishing of the concrete surface shall be done immediately following placement.

No material shall be applied to the concrete surface or the finishing tools to aid in the finishing.

1821.07.08 Curing

1821.07.08.01 General

Box units shall be moist cured until a minimum compressive strength of 25 MPa is achieved or for 4 Days,
whichever occurs first.

Except for exposed surfaces, wet cast box units may be cured by leaving the box units in the form.

Dry cast box units and the exposed surfaces of the wet cast box units shall be moist cured using one or a
combination of the methods in the Moist Curing clause of this specification.

1821.07.08.02 Moist Curing

Moist curing shall be sufficient to keep all surfaces of the concrete in a continuously wet condition, with no
dry areas, by applying one or a combination of the following methods:

November 2022 Page 8 of 19 [Link] 1821

a) Curing according to the Curing with Burlap and Water clause.

b) Curing by means of continuous water application, e.g. mist.

c) Curing according to the Steam Curing and Other Application of Heat clause.

d) Curing by means of immersion in water.

Records of moist curing shall be maintained and submitted according to the requirements of this
specification.

Formwork shall be removed within 4 Days of concrete placement and the concrete shall be moist cured for
the remainder of the minimum curing period and no less than 24 hours.

1821.07.08.03 Curing with Burlap and Water

Curing with burlap and water shall be according to the Curing with Burlap and Water clause in OPSS 909
with the addition of the following:

a) Burlap shall be held in place without marring the surface of the concrete.

1821.07.08.04 Steam Curing and Other Application of Heat

Steam curing and application of heat, if used, shall be according to the requirements of the Steam Curing
and Other Application of Heat section in OPSS 909.

1821.07.09 Surface Finish

The surface finish shall be according to the Surface Finish subsection in OPSS 904.

1821.07.10 Concrete Cover Measurement

The Contractor shall carry out, at the precast facility, a covermeter survey on two box units, selected at
random, per group of 15 consecutively produced box units.

Measurement shall be obtained on a 1 metre grid on all interior and exterior surfaces of the box unit,
including the ends of the units.

Cover measurements shall be carried out by a method acceptable to the Contract Administrator and shall
be reported in writing to the Contract Administrator prior to delivery of the box units.

1821.07.11 Dimensional Tolerances

The Contractor shall carry out dimension measurements on two box units, selected at random, per group
of 15 consecutively produced box units.

Box units shall meet the tolerances according to Table 2 and as specified in the Contract Documents.

For dimensional tolerances not specified, the maximum allowable dimensional variation shall be 1:800 or
+/- 5mm, whichever is greater.

November 2022 Page 9 of 19 [Link] 1821

1821.07.12 Material Sampling for Acceptance Testing

1821.07.12.01 Sampling of Steel Reinforcement

When requested by the Contract Administrator, samples of steel reinforcement shall be provided to the
Owner according to OPSS 905.

1821.07.12.02 Sampling of Water, Admixtures and Cementing Materials

When requested by the Contract Administrator, samples of all cementing materials, admixtures, and water
shall be obtained for testing by the Owner.

1821.07.12.03 Sampling of Hardened Concrete for Acceptance Testing

1821.[Link] General

Test specimens shall consist of cores removed from box units.

Cores shall be removed at the plant or on site when the box unit is between 7 to 10 Days of age, and prior
to application of any sealer. Cores and slabs shall be removed in the presence of the Contract Administrator
or Owner’s representative.

The box units and the location of the cores shall be randomly selected by the Contract Administrator.

1821.[Link] Notification

A list of box units and their identification numbers shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within
24 hours of the completion of a lot.

1821.[Link] Coring

One set of cores shall be obtained from each lot for quality assurance testing as directed by the Contract
Administrator.

For dry cast concrete, a set of cores shall consist of five 100 mm diameter and 200 mm long cores.

For wet cast concrete, a set of cores shall consist of six 100 mm diameter and 200 mm long cores.

If the box unit is less than 200 mm thick, the full depth of the box unit shall be cored such that the core has
a length to diameter ratio of at least 1.5.

The box unit from which the cores and samples are taken shall be clearly labelled and shall be retained until
Contract Completion.

Coring shall be carried out according to CSA A23.2-14C. Cores shall not contain steel reinforcement or
other embedded material. A covermeter capable of detecting the type(s) of steel reinforcing materials in the
box unit shall be used to establish the location of steel reinforcement and other embedded material prior to
coring.

The Contract number, lot number, and unique box unit number shall be marked legibly on each core with
durable ink. Each core shall be placed in a plastic bag, sealed to prevent loss of moisture and placed into
clear polyethylene security bags supplied by the Owner when instructed by the Contract Administrator. The
specimens shall be accompanied by a transmittal form and MTO form PH-CC-433A, Concrete Mix Design
Form A of the concrete mix design for the box unit. At this point, the Contract Administrator shall take
possession of, and assume responsibility for the samples. The Contract Administrator or his representative
may apply security seals.

November 2022 Page 10 of 19 [Link] 1821

The core holes and lift holes shall be filled, within 3 Days, according to the Filling of Core Holes subsection
in OPSS 1350, with concrete or a proprietary patching material from the Owner’s pre-qualified products list.
Concrete used to patch holes shall have comparable properties to that of the concrete used in the box unit.

1821.07.12.04 Access for Quality Assurance

Unhindered access for inspection and testing of all the work shall be provided to the Contract Administrator
or Owner’s representative.

Any debris and obstructions shall be removed to allow access for the purposes of covermeter and
dimensional measurements or inspection.

1821.07.13 Management of Excess Material

Management of excess material shall be according to the Contract Documents.

1821.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1821.08.01 General

The acceptance of box units shall be according to the requirements of this specification.

Acceptance for compressive strength, rapid chloride permeability, concrete cover and dimensional
measurements of dry cast concrete shall be on a lot basis.

Lots not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be deemed rejectable.

1821.08.02 Lot Size

The Contract Administrator shall determine the limits of each lot prior to commencing production and shall
confirm the specific box units to be included in each lot prior to commencing production of that lot. A lot
generally consists of all the box units of the same span and concrete mix design produced during
7 consecutive Days.

1821.08.03 Acceptance of Concrete Compressive Strength

1821.08.03.01 General

Compressive strength shall be determined according to LS-410.

Three cores shall be tested to determine the acceptability of compressive strength of the lot. 28-Day
concrete compressive strength of a lot shall be considered acceptable when the average of the three
individual compressive strength cores is equal to or greater than the specified strength and no individual
core result is more than 10.0% below the specified 28-Day compressive strength.

Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

1821.08.03.02 Referee Testing of Compressive Strength

Referee testing of compressive strength may only be invoked by the Contractor within 5 Business Days of
receipt of the acceptance test result.

November 2022 Page 11 of 19 [Link] 1821

Referee testing of compressive strength shall be carried out on a set of three cores taken by the Contractor
from the box unit which the acceptance cores were taken from. The cores shall be removed in the presence
of the Contract Administrator. Coring shall be according to the Coring clause. Referee cores shall be
obtained within 3 Business Days of invoking referee testing.

The referee laboratory shall be designated by the Owner based on the applicable roster and cores shall be
tested according to LS-410.

Referee test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

The confirmation value for confirming the acceptance test result shall be the greater of 10.0% of the specified
strength or 10.0% of the strength of the acceptance cores, expressed to one decimal place.

If the difference between the referee test result and the acceptance test result is less than the confirmation
value, the acceptance test result is confirmed, and the acceptance test result shall be used in the
determination of acceptance of the lot. If the difference between the referee test result and the acceptance
test result is greater than the confirmation value, the acceptance test result is not confirmed, and the
acceptance test result shall be disregarded and the referee test result shall replace the acceptance test
result in the acceptance requirements of this specification.

The cost of referee testing of compressive strength shall be according to OPSS 1350.

1821.08.04 Acceptance of Air Void System in Hardened Concrete

1821.08.04.01 General

For wet cast concrete, one core per lot shall be tested for air void system parameters. Acceptance of air
void system shall be based on the result obtained on the core representing the lot.

Testing of air void system shall be according to LS-432. One half of the sample shall be tested to determine
the acceptability of the lot. The other half of the sample shall be retained by the Owner for audit purposes.

Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

For a lot to be considered acceptable, the sample shall have a minimum air content of 3.0% and a spacing
factor of 0.200 mm or less. Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.

Lots with samples having a spacing factor between 0.200 mm and 0.250 mm shall be considered
unacceptable. Unacceptable lots shall be rejected and replaced, except where the Owner permits an
unacceptable lot to remain in place. When the Owner permits an unacceptable lot to remain in place it shall
be subject to a payment adjustment, calculated according to the Payment Adjustment for Air Void System
in Hardened Concrete clause in OPSS 422.

Lots with samples having air content less than 3.0%, a spacing factor more than 0.250 mm or both shall be
deemed rejectable.

1821.08.04.02 Referee Testing of Air Void System in Hardened Concrete

Referee testing of air void system in hardened concrete shall be according to OPSS 1350.

The cost of air void system referee testing shall be according to OPSS 1350.

November 2022 Page 12 of 19 [Link] 1821

1821.08.05 Acceptance of Rapid Chloride Permeability

1821.08.05.01 General

Acceptance of rapid chloride permeability shall be based on the result obtained on the core representing
the lot.

One core per lot shall be tested according to LS-433. Acceptance testing shall be carried out at 28 to
32 Days. Two samples 50 mm long shall be cut from the core representing a lot, tested, and averaged to
determine the acceptance of the lot. Another core shall be retained for referee testing.

Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

1821.08.05.02 Concrete Without Silica Fume

Lots with rapid chloride permeability less than or equal to 2,500 coulombs are considered acceptable.
Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.

Lots with a rapid chloride permeability result greater than 2,500 coulombs are unacceptable. If the Owner
permits the work to remain in place, lots with an average value of rapid chloride permeability exceeding
2,500 coulombs and less than 3,500 coulombs shall be subject to a payment adjustment calculated
according to the Basis of Payment section in OPSS 422.

Lots with rapid chloride permeability results exceeding 3,500 coulombs shall be deemed rejectable.

1821.08.05.03 Concrete Containing Silica Fume

Lots with rapid chloride permeability less than or equal to 1,000 coulombs are considered acceptable.
Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.

Lots with a rapid chloride permeability result greater than 1,000 coulombs are unacceptable. If the Owner
permits the work to remain in place, lots with an average value of rapid chloride permeability exceeding
1,000 coulombs and less than 2,000 coulombs shall be subject to a payment adjustment calculated
according to the Basis of Payment section in OPSS 422.

Lots with rapid chloride permeability results exceeding 2,000 coulombs shall be deemed rejectable.

Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

1821.08.05.04 Referee Testing of Rapid Chloride Permeability

1821.[Link] General

Referee testing of rapid chloride permeability may only be invoked by the Contractor within 5 Business Days
of receipt of the acceptance test result.

Referee testing shall be carried out on two 50 mm samples obtained from the reserved core representing
the lot for which referee testing was invoked, and the results shall be averaged to obtain the test result for
the lot.

Cores shall be tested according to LS-433.

The referee laboratory shall be designated by the Owner based on the applicable roster and cores shall be
tested by that laboratory.

Referee test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become available.

November 2022 Page 13 of 19 [Link] 1821

The cost of referee testing of rapid chloride permeability for all concrete shall be according to OPSS 1350.

1821.[Link] Concrete Without Silica Fume

When the referee result is greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 500 coulombs below the
acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid. When the referee
test result for the lot is more than 500 coulombs below the acceptance test result, the acceptance test result
is then not confirmed, and the referee test result shall replace the acceptance test result in the acceptance
requirements of this specification.

1821.[Link] Concrete Containing Silica Fume

When the referee result is greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 300 coulombs below the
acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid. When the referee
test result for the lot is more than 300 coulombs below the acceptance test result, the acceptance test result
is then not confirmed, and the referee test result shall be used for determining acceptability of the lot.

1821.08.06 Acceptance of Water, Admixtures, and Cementing Materials

Acceptance of water, admixtures and cementing materials shall be according to OPSS 1350.

1821.08.07 Dimensional Verification and Concrete Cover Measurements

The Contract Administrator shall carry out measurements on interior and exterior surfaces on at least one
box unit per lot to confirm compliance with the requirements of Table 2 and the Contract Documents. The
Contract Administrator shall be notified in writing when the test area is ready for the concrete covermeter
survey and dimensional verification.

If a box unit fails to meet the dimensional or cover tolerances specified in Table 2 and the Contract
Documents:

a) It shall be deemed rejectable; and

b) A consultant shall be retained by the Owner, at the Contractor’s expense, to verify that all the other
box units in the lot are within the tolerances of Table 2 and as specified in the Contract Documents.

1821.08.08 Defects and Deficiencies Causing Rejection

An individual box unit having one or more of the following defects and deficiencies shall be deemed
rejectable:

a) Inadequate area of steel reinforcement or cover to steel reinforcement;

b) Dimensions outside of the tolerances specified in Table 2 and the Contract Documents;

c) Defects resulting from incorrect proportioning, mixing, and forming;

d) Cracks greater than 0.3 mm in width or full-depth cracks;

e) Honeycombed or broken surface texture; and

f) Spalls and damaged ends.

November 2022 Page 14 of 19 [Link] 1821

 TABLE 1 (1.1 to 1.9)
Steel Reinforcement Areas

Table 1.1: 1.8 m span by 0.9 m rise. 200 mm wall thickness. As4=400
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 520 415 400 400 425 510 600
As2 1010 410 400 420 525 635 810
As3 480 425 400 435 540 650 865
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.2: 1.8 m span by 1.2 m rise. 200 mm wall thickness. As4=400
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 470 400 400 400 400 465 545
As2 1085 440 400 445 555 670 865
As3 480 460 400 465 575 695 950
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.3: 2.4 m span by 1.2 m rise. 200 mm wall thickness. As4=400
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 790 725 545 645 755 920 1085
As2 1350 700 565 715 905 1400 2480
As3 565 730 590 745 930 1560 2750
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.4: 2.4 m span by 1.5 m rise. 200 mm wall thickness. As4=400
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 730 685 515 605 705 855 1010
As2 1385 790 630 800 1010 1430 2500
As3 630 825 665 835 1045 1600 2850
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.5: 2.4 m span by 1.8 m rise. 200 mm wall thickness. As4=400
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 675 650 490 570 665 800 945
As2 1445 830 660 830 1045 1510 2670
As3 675 875 705 880 1095 1740 3060
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

November 2022 Page 15 of 19 [Link] 1821

Table 1.6: 3.0 m span by 1.5 m rise. 250 mm wall thickness. As4=500
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 850 875 660 775 905 1090 1290
As2 1260 835 675 855 1070 1680 2910
As3 620 875 715 895 1110 1910 3310
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.7: 3.0 m span by 1.8 m rise. 250 mm wall thickness. As4=500
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 800 835 630 740 855 1035 1215
As2 1290 930 750 945 1185 1685 2950
As3 660 985 800 995 1240 1950 3380
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.8: 3.0 m span by 2.1 m rise. 250 mm wall thickness. As4=500
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 750 805 610 710 820 985 1155
As2 1340 970 775 980 1225 1780 3080
As3 700 1035 835 1040 1290 2080 3610
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Table 1.9: 3.0 m span by 2.4 m rise. 250 mm wall thickness. As4=500
Fill <0.6 m Fill = 0.6 m Fill = 2.0 m Fill = 3.0 m Fill = 4.0 m Fill = 5.0 m Fill = 6.0 m
As1 770 740 565 650 750 900 1055
As2 1380 1010 800 1010 1260 1860 3220
As3 745 1080 875 1080 1335 2220 3850
As5 300 140 140 140 140 140 140

Notes Table 1 (1.1 to 1.9):

a) All metric or all imperial dimensions may be used for span, height, and wall thickness unless specified
in the Contract Documents.

b) Specified yield strength of welded WWR Fy = 500 MPa. Reinforcing steel bar, if used, shall be grade
500W.

c) Area of steel reinforcement given is mm2 per metre length of box unit. In Table 1.1 through Table 1.9:

i. As1 shall be the area of steel of the C-shaped bars on the outside face of the box culvert.
ii. As2 shall be the area of steel on the bottom face of top slab.
iii. As3 shall be the area of steel on the top face of the bottom slab.
iv. As4 shall be the area of steel on the inside face of the walls.
v. As5 shall be the area of steel in the longitudinal direction on each face of all slabs and walls.
vi. As6 = 525 shall be the longitudinal steel reinforcement required on the bottom face of the top slab,
in lieu of As5, only when depth of fill is <0.6 m.
vii. The extent and details of the steel reinforcement shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2022 Page 16 of 19 [Link] 1821

d) The area of steel reinforcement for As1 through As3, shall be determined from Table 1 for height of fill
at both edges of pavement and at the crown. The largest steel reinforcement area for each of As1
through As3 shall be used for each one of these points. Interpolation shall be used for values of height
of fill between those tabulated. As4 through As6 shall be taken as applicable on each box culvert size
mentioned in their respective in Table 1.1 through Table 1.9

e) As6 is only required for height of fill <0.6 m. As6 may be added to the area of As5 of the bottom mat of
steel reinforcement in the top slab or as a second layer of steel reinforcement on top of the bottom mat
of steel reinforcement in the top slab.

f) Where some reinforcing steel bar is used instead of fully using WWR, or where steel reinforcement is
comprised of second layer of steel reinforcement, the effective area of steel reinforcement (Ase),
calculated as Ase = ASL1 x ηf + ASL2 x ηs, shall be greater than the tabulated value of As. ASL1 is the
Area of steel in the first layer, ASL2 is the Area of steel in the second layer, and η f and ηs are the
efficiency factors obtained from Table 3. The second layer of steel reinforcement shall be placed
against the first layer such that the clear spacing of reinforcing steel bar in all layers shall permit proper
consolidation of the concrete. (For example, if 1000 mm2 of reinforcing steel bar is provided in the first
layer of steel reinforcement, and 2000 mm2 of WWR is provided in the second layer, and the slab is
200 mm thick, the effective area of steel reinforcement shall be 1000 x 88% + 2000 x 75% = 2380 mm2,
which must be greater than the value from Table 3).

November 2022 Page 17 of 19 [Link] 1821

 TABLE 2
Tolerances

Item Tolerances
Span

(Straight-line measurement taken horizontally at ± 15 mm from Working Drawings

the mid-height of box unit perpendicular to the
centre line of the culvert.)
Height ± 15 mm from Working Drawings
Length +15/-5 mm
Wall and Slab Thickness +10 mm, -5 mm
Haunch ± 10 mm
End Squareness or Skew (Note 1) < 15 mm along its length
Plumbness 1 in 300 maximum
Location of Blockouts ± 15 mm
Location of Inserts ± 10 mm

Cover shall be 40 mm, ± 5 mm for WWR and 50 mm

Concrete Cover
± 15 mm to reinforcing steel bars.

Notes:

1. Variations in the lengths of two opposite surfaces of the box unit. The ends of the box unit shall be
normal to the wall and centreline of the box unit within the tolerances specified elsewhere in this
Table except where concrete appurtenances are specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2022 Page 18 of 19 [Link] 1821

 TABLE 3
Steel Reinforcement Efficiency Factors, ηf and ηs

First Layer WWR First Layer Reinforcement Bar

Section
(ηf) (ηs) (ηf) (ηs)
Thickness
200 100% 86% 88% 75%
250 100% 90% 91% 82%

November 2022 Page 19 of 19 [Link] 1821

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1840
STANDARD NOVEMBER 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1840, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 1840 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

NON-PRESSURE POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC PIPE PRODUCTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1840.01 SCOPE

1840.02 REFERENCES

1840.03 DEFINITIONS

1840.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1840.05 MATERIALS

1840.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1840.07 PRODUCTION

1840.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1840.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for non-pressure polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe products to be
used for sanitary or storm sewers, pipe culverts, and subdrains.

1840.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

B182.6-11 Profile Polyethylene (PE) Sewer Pipe and Fittings for Leak-Proof Sewer Applications
[Part of B1800-11, Thermoplastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium]
B182.8-11 Profile Polyethylene (PE) Storm Sewer and Drainage Pipe and Fittings
[Part of B1800-11, Thermoplastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium]

ASTM International

F 405-13 Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings

F 667-12 3 Through 24 in. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
F 714-13 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter
F 894-13 Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe

November 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1840

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

M252-09 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe

M294-13 Corrugated Polyethylene Plastic Pipe, 300 to 1,500 mm Diameter

Bureau De Normalisation Du Quebec (BNQ)

3624-115 (2007) Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings - Flexible Corrugated Pipes for Drainage -
Characteristics and Test Methods.

1840.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Certification Body means an independent 3rd party agency, accredited by the Standards Council of
Canada that has the qualifications, skills, and expertise required to confirm that a pipe manufacturer
produces pipe products to the quality and requirements of an accepted standard and that has the
mandate to certify the pipe products produced.

Certified means pipe products that have been marked with a certification body’s logo confirming that the
production of the pipe product is in accordance with the quality and requirements of CSA B182.6, CSA
B182.8, AASHTO M294 Type S, or ASTM F 894.

Closed Profile Pipe means a pipe product that has a hydraulically smooth waterway reinforced
circumferentially or spirally with corrugations that are joined integrally by an essentially smooth outer wall.

Corrugated Pipe means a single-walled pipe where the wall is formed into a series of alternating crests
and valleys.

Delivered Quality means the pipe products’ physical condition upon arrival at the construction site in
terms of the extent and degree of dents, scratches, cracks, pipe coating integrity, etc., that appear on the
pipe products delivered.

Open Profile Pipe means a pipe product that has a hydraulically smooth waterway reinforced
circumferentially or spirally with outside corrugations.

Polyethylene Plastic means plastics based on virgin polymers made with ethylene as essentially the
sole monomer.

Profile means a pipe wall construction that presents an essentially smooth surface in the waterway but
includes ribs or other shapes, which can be either solid or hollow that helps brace the pipe against
diametrical deformation.

1840.05 MATERIALS

1840.05.01 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe Products

The moulding and extrusion material shall be polyethylene plastic according to:

a) ASTM F 405, ASTM F 667, or BNQ 3624-115 for corrugated sub-drainage tubing.

b) AASHTO M252 for corrugated interior flexible culvert pipe.

November 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1840

c) CSA B182.6, CSA B182.8, or AASHTO M294 Type S for open profile sewer and drainage pipe.

d) ASTM F 714 or ASTM F 894 for closed profile sewer and drainage pipe.

1840.07 PRODUCTION

1840.07.01 Requirements

The pipe diameter, stiffness, material, and type for all polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

Polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be produced according to the following:

a) ASTM F 405, ASTM F 667, or BNQ 3624-115 for corrugated sub-drainage tubing and fittings.

b) AASHTO M252 for corrugated interior flexible culvert pipe.

c) CSA B182.6, CSA B182.8, or AASHTO M294 Type S for open profile sewer and drainage pipe and
fittings.

d) ASTM F 714 or ASTM F 894 for closed profile sewer and drainage pipe.

All polyethylene plastic pipe products used on the Contract for sewers and culverts shall be certified and
supplied from a manufacturer that produces the polyethylene plastic pipe products according to
CSA B182.6, CSA B182.8, AASHTO M294 Type S, ASTM F 894 or ASTM F 714.

When the delivered quality of certified polyethylene plastic pipe products is deemed to be unacceptable
by the Contract Administrator, the products shall be rejected.

1840.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1840.08.01 Testing

Test methods for corrugated polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be according to ASTM F 405, ASTM
F 667, BNQ 3624-115 or AASHTO M252, as applicable.

Test methods for open and closed profile polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be according to CSA
B182.6, CSA B182.8, AASHTO M294 Type S, ASTM F 894, or ASTM F 714 as applicable.

1840.08.02 Markings

Markings for certified polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be according to CSA B182.6, CSA B182.8,
AASHTO M294 Type S, ASTM F 894, or ASTM F 714 as applicable.

As a minimum, the following markings shall be placed, notwithstanding any other required markings, in
accordance with the applicable standard:

a) Pipe nominal size.

b) Pipe or ring stiffness.

c) Standard designation (e.g., CSA B182.6).

d) Manufacturer.

November 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1840

e) Accredited certification body’s logo.

Accepted certification body logos confirming certified polyethylene plastic pipe products shall be as
shown in Figures 1, 2, and 3.

1840.08.03 Certificate of Compliance

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a certificate of compliance for subdrains to
indicate that the product was produced and tested according to the appropriate specification
requirements.

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the certificate of compliance from
the manufacturer for storm sewers and pipe culverts. The manufacturer’s certificate of compliance shall
be issued by the certification body confirming that the manufacturer produces certified polyethylene
plastic pipe products.

FIGURE 1
CSA Standards Certification Logo

FIGURE 2
Warnock Hersey - Intertek Certification Logo

FIGURE 3
NSF International Certification Logo
(Note: Different variations of the NSF logo will also be accepted)

November 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1840

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1841
STANDARD NOVEMBER 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1841, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 1841 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

NON-PRESSURE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE PRODUCTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1841.01 SCOPE

1841.02 REFERENCES

1841.03 DEFINITIONS

1841.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1841.05 MATERIALS

1841.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1841.07 PRODUCTION

1841.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1841.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for non-pressure polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe products
to be used for sanitary and storm sewers, service connections, and pipe culverts.

1841.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

B182.1-11 Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings

[Part of B1800-11, Plastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium]
B182.2-11 PSM Type Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
[Part of B1800-11, Plastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium]
B182.4-11 Profile Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
[Part of B1800-11, Plastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium]

ASTM International

D 3034-14 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
F 679-13a Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings

November 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1841

F 794-03 (2009) Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
F 949-10 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and
Fittings
F 1760-01(2011) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having
Reprocessed-Recycled Content
F 1803-06 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Closed Profile Gravity Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter

Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

UNI-B-9-90 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Profile Wall Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter (Nominal Pipe Sizes 4 - 48-inch)

1841.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Certification Body means an independent 3rd party agency, accredited by the Standards Council of
Canada that has the qualifications, skills, and expertise required to confirm that a pipe manufacturer
produces pipe products to the quality and requirements of an accepted standard and that has the
mandate to certify the pipe products produced.

Certified means pipe products that have been marked with a certification body’s logo confirming that the
production of the pipe product is in accordance with the quality and requirements of CSA B182.1, CSA
B182.2, or CSA B182.4.

Delivered Quality means the pipe products’ physical condition upon arrival at the construction site in
terms of the extent and degree of dents, scratches, cracks, pipe coating integrity, etc., that appear on the
pipe products delivered.

Pipe Products means pipe lengths and associated pipe fittings that are needed to construct a pipe sewer
run or a pipe culvert.

1841.05 MATERIAL

1841.05.01 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Products

The extruded, moulded, and fabricated material shall be polyvinyl chloride plastic according to CSA
B182.1, CSA B182.2, CSA B182.4, ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 679, ASTM F 794, ASTM F 949, ASTM F
1760, ASTM F 1803, or UNI-B-9, as applicable, for the appropriate type of polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe
products.

1841.07 PRODUCTION

1841.07.01 Requirements

The pipe diameter, stiffness, material, and type of all polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

The requirements for profile polyvinyl chloride plastic pipes and associated fittings shall be according to
CSA B182.4, ASTM F 794, ASTM F 949, ASTM F 1803, or UNI-B-9, as applicable.

November 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1841

The requirements for smooth interior and exterior walled polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe and associated
fittings shall be according to either:

a) ASTM D 3034 or ASTM F 679 for pipes manufactured without reprocessed-recycled material.

b) CSA B182.2 for pipes manufactured that may have multilayer construction and the middle layer may
have reprocessed-recycled material.

c) CSA B182.2 or ASTM F 1760 for pipes manufactured having reprocessed-recycled material.

Polyvinyl chloride service connection pipe shall be according to CSA B182.1 and have bell and spigot
joints with elastomeric gaskets.

All polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products used on the Contract shall be certified and supplied from a
manufacturer that produces the polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products according to CSA B182.1, CSA
B182.2, CSA B182.4, ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 679, ASTM F 794, ASTM F 949, ASTM F 1760, ASTM F
1803, or UNI-B-9, as applicable, for the appropriate type of polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products.

1841.07.02 Testing

Testing of polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products shall be according to the appropriate standard for which
the product was produced.

1841.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1841.08.01 Inspection and Testing

The Owner reserves the right to make inspections and tests at such times as the Owner may consider
necessary to ensure that the materials supplied are in accordance with this specification.

All materials failing to comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

1841.08.02 Markings

Markings for certified polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products shall be according to the appropriate
standard for which the product was produced.

As a minimum, the following markings shall be placed, notwithstanding any other required markings, in
accordance with the applicable standard:

a) Pipe diameter.

b) Pipe stiffness.

c) Standard designation (e.g., CSA B182.2).

d) Manufacturer.

e) Accredited certification body’s logo.

Accepted certification body logos confirming certified polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products shall be as
shown in Figures 1, 2 and 3.

November 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1841

1841.08.03 Certificate of Compliance

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the certificate of compliance from
the manufacturer for sanitary and storm sewers, service connections, and pipe culverts. The
manufacturer’s certificate of compliance shall be issued by the certification body confirming that the
manufacturer produces certified polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe products.

FIGURE 1
CSA Standards Certification Logo

FIGURE 2
Warnock Hersey - Intertek Certification Logo

FIGURE 3
NSF International Certification Logo
(Note: Different variations of the NSF logo will also be accepted)

November 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1841

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1842
STANDARD NOVEMBER 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1842, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 1842 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PRESSURE POLYETHYLENE PIPE PRODUCTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1842.01 SCOPE

1842.02 REFERENCES

1842.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

1842.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1842.05 MATERIALS

1842.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1842.07 PRODUCTION

1842.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1842.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for pressure polyethylene pipe products to be used for sewage
forcemains, watermains, and associated service connections.

1842.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

B137.1-13 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings for Cold Water Pressure Services
[Part of B137 Series-05, Thermoplastic Pressure Piping Compendium]

American Water Works Association (AWWA)

C901-08 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, ½ In. (13 mm) Through 3 In. (76 mm), for
Water Service
C906-15 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 In. (100 mm) Through 63 In. (1,600 mm),
for Water Distribution and Transmission

November 2018 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 1842

1842.05 MATERIALS

1842.05.01 Polyethylene Pipe Products

The moulding and extrusion material used to manufacture polyethylene pipe shall be polyethylene
according to the requirements of AWWA C901 or AWWA C906.

The moulding and extrusion material used to manufacture polyethylene fittings shall be polyethylene
according to the requirements of AWWA C906 for fittings 100 mm through 1,600 mm and CSA B137.1 for
fittings less than 100 mm diameter.

1842.07 PRODUCTION

1842.07.01 Requirements

The requirements for the production of polyethylene pipe and tubing shall be according AWWA C901 or
AWWA C906.

The requirements for the production of polyethylene pipe fittings shall be according to AWWA C906 for
fittings 100 mm through 1,600 mm diameter and CSA B137.1 for fittings less than 100 mm diameter.

1842.07.02 Markings

Markings for polyethylene pipe and tubing shall be placed so that the intervals between markings are no
greater than 1.5 m.

For polyethylene pipe and tubing according to AWWA C901, minimum markings shall be as follows:

a) Nominal size.

b) Standard material code designation (e.g., PE 2406).

c) On pipe, the dimension ratio and diameter base (e.g., DR 11).

d) On tubing, the word “Tubing” and dimension ratio.

e) Pressure class (e.g., PC 160).

f) Standard designation (e.g., AWWA C901).

g) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.

h) Production record code.

For polyethylene pipe according to AWWA C906, minimum markings shall be as follows:

a) Nominal size and OD base.

b) Standard material code designation (e.g., PE 3408).

c) Dimension ratio (e.g., DR 17).

d) Pressure class (e.g., PC 100).

November 2018 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 1842

e) Standard designation (e.g., AWWA C906).

f) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.

g) Production record code.

Markings shall be applied in a manner that will not reduce the strength or damage the pipe and shall
remain legible during normal handling and storage.

1842.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1842.08.01 Certificate

Upon request, suppliers shall provide a certificate to indicate that the product was produced and tested
according to the appropriate specification requirements.

1842.08.02 Inspection and Testing

The Owner may make inspections and tests at such times as considered necessary to ensure that the
material supplied is according to this specification.

All materials failing to comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

November 2018 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 1842

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1843
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1843, November 2013)

Note: The PROV published in April 2018 replaces OPSS 1843 COMMON, November 2013 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

NON-PRESSURE POLYPROPYLENE (PP) PLASTIC PIPE PRODUCTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1843.01 SCOPE

1843.02 REFERENCES

1843.03 DEFINITIONS

1843.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

1843.05 MATERIALS

1843.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1843.07 PRODUCTION

1843.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1843.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for non-pressure polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe products to
be used for sanitary or storm sewers and pipe culverts.

1843.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

B182.13-11 Profile Polypropylene (PP) Sewer Pipe and Fittings for Leak-Proof Sewer Applications
[Part of B1800-11, Thermoplastic Non-Pressure Pipe Compendium]

1843.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Certification Body means an independent 3rd party agency, accredited by the Standards Council of
Canada that has the qualifications, skills, and expertise required to confirm that a pipe manufacturer

April 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 1843

produces pipe products to the quality and requirements of an accepted standard and that has the
mandate to certify the pipe products produced.

Certified means pipe products that have been marked with a certification body’s logo confirming that the
production of the pipe product is in accordance with the quality and requirements of CSA B182.13.

Delivered Quality means the pipe products’ physical condition upon arrival at the construction site in
terms of the extent and degree of dents, scratches, cracks, pipe coating integrity, etc., that appear on the
pipe products delivered.

Polypropylene Plastic means a material made with virgin polymers in which propylene is essentially the
sole monomer.

Profile means a pipe wall construction that presents an essentially smooth surface in the waterway but
includes ribs or other shapes, which can be either solid or hollow that helps brace the pipe against
diametrical deformation.

1843.05 MATERIALS

1843.05.01 Polypropylene Plastic Pipe Products

The moulding and extrusion material shall be polypropylene plastic according to CSA B182.13 for profile
sewer and drainage pipe.

1843.07 PRODUCTION

1843.07.01 Requirements

The pipe diameter, stiffness, material, and type for all polypropylene plastic pipe products shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

Polypropylene plastic pipe products shall be produced according to CSA B182.13 for profile sewer and
drainage pipe and fittings.

All polypropylene plastic pipe products used on the Contract for sewers and culverts shall be certified and
supplied from a manufacturer that produces the polypropylene plastic pipe products according to
CSA B182.13.

When the delivered quality of certified polypropylene plastic pipe products is deemed to be unacceptable
by the Contract Administrator, the products shall be rejected.

1843.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1843.08.01 Testing

Test methods for profile polypropylene plastic pipe products shall be according to CSA B182.13.

1843.08.02 Markings

Markings for certified polypropylene plastic pipe products shall be according to CSA B182.13.

As a minimum, the following markings shall be placed, notwithstanding any other required markings, in
accordance with the applicable standard:

April 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 1843

a) Pipe nominal size.

b) Standard designation (e.g., CSA B182.13).

c) Manufacturer.

d) Accredited certification body’s logo.

Accepted certification body logo confirming certified polypropylene plastic pipe products shall be as
shown in Figure 1.

1843.08.03 Certificate of Compliance

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the certificate of compliance from
the manufacturer for storm sewers and pipe culverts. The manufacturer’s certificate of compliance shall
be issued by the certification body confirming that the manufacturer produces certified polypropylene
plastic pipe products.

April 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 1843

 FIGURE 1
Warnock Hersey - Intertek Certification Logo

April 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 1843

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1850
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1850, April 2013)

Note: The PROV published in April 2018 replaces OPSS 1850 COMMON, April 2013 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND GRATINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1850.01 SCOPE

1850.02 REFERENCES

1850.03 DEFINITIONS

1850.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1850.05 MATERIALS

1850.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1850.07 PRODUCTION

1850.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1850.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for frames with grates or covers for catch basins, maintenance
holes, and valve chambers, ditch inlet gratings and locking devices.

1850.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles

W59-03 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
CAN/CSA-S6-14 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

ASTM International

A 36/A 36M-08 Carbon Structural Steel

April 2018 Page 1 of 5 [Link] 1850

A 48/A 48M-03 Gray Iron Castings
A 536-84 (2009) Ductile Iron Castings
F 738M-02 (2008) Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs
F 836M-02 (2010) Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric Nuts

Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)

J403-01 Chemical Compositions of SAE Carbon Steels

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

Metal Bar Grating Manual

1850.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Cover means a cast iron or ductile iron casting to allow access into a maintenance hole or valve
chamber.

Frame means a cast iron or ductile iron casting to support a cover or grate.

Grate means a cast iron or ductile iron casting with parallel or lattice of cross bars to allow water flow and
access into a catch basin or ditch inlet.

Grating means a fabricated lattice of steel bars covering a drain, ditch inlet, or pipe outlet.

Locking Device means a device consisting of a cast iron or ductile iron-locking lug and stainless steel
bolt, nut, and washer to secure a cover to a frame.

Reticuline Bar means a sinuously bent connecting bar extending between two adjacent bearing bars,
alternately contacting and being riveted to each other.

1850.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1850.04.01 Design Requirements

Frames, grates, covers, and gratings shall be designed to an ultimate limit state of 166.6 kN wheel load.
This load includes a live load factor and a dynamic load allowance specified in CAN/CSA-S6. The load
application shall be distributed over an area of 250 x 250 mm.

1850.05 MATERIALS

1850.05.01 Frames With Grates or Covers

1850.05.01.01 Castings

Castings shall be according to ASTM A 48M, Class No. 30B, or ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12.

1850.05.01.02 Bolts and Nuts

All bolts, nuts, and washers shall consist of stainless steel Type 304. Bolts shall be according to
ASTM F 738M and nuts shall be according to ASTM F 836M.

April 2018 Page 2 of 5 [Link] 1850

1850.05.01.03 Locking Devices

All components shall be manufactured from material compatible with the associated frame and cover.

Locking lugs shall be cast according to ASTM A 48M, Class No. 30B, or ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12.

1850.05.01.04 Hinge Pins

Steel for hinge pins shall be according to ASTM A 36M.

Steel pins shall be cast into the grate during the pouring and filling operation. Pins shall not be added
after the grate is cast.

1850.05.02 Gratings

1850.05.02.01 Welded Steel Gratings

Steel for bearing bars and cross bars shall be according to ASTM A 36M.

1850.05.02.02 Riveted Steel Gratings

Steel for bearing bars shall be according to ASTM A 36M.

Steel for reticuline bars shall be according to ASTM A 36M.

Rivets shall be flat-headed according to SAE J403, Grade No. 1015.

1850.05.02.03 Fasteners

Fasteners, except for the bolts, shall be hot dipped galvanized according to CSA G164-M. The bolt
thread shall be coated with white non-staining grease after galvanizing.

1850.07 PRODUCTION

1850.07.01 Frames, Grates, and Covers

The castings shall be produced as specified in the Contract Documents.

The castings shall be sound, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blowholes, and other defects.

Circular frames, covers, and grates shall be furnished with machined horizontal bearing surfaces as
specified in the Contract Documents. All square and rectangular frames and grates shall be furnished
with an as-cast bearing surface.

1850.07.01.01 Tolerances

a) For the rectangular frame with two piece cover for meter and valve chambers, tolerances shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.

b) For all other castings, the overall casting dimensions shall conform to the following tolerances:

i. 300 mm or less, ± 3 mm
ii. Up to and including 900 mm, ± 6 mm

April 2018 Page 3 of 5 [Link] 1850

1850.07.01.02 Markings

The initials or trademark of the manufacturer, product code, year of manufacture, and additional lettering,
logos, or markings as specified in the Contract Documents shall be distinctly cast in raised letters on the
top side of the frame and the grate or cover.

The word DANGER shall be distinctly cast in the centre portion of the top side of all maintenance hole
covers and shall be a minimum of 50 mm in height and a minimum of 6 mm in depth.

If iron for the casting is melted and poured at one foundry and labelled with the name of another
organization, manufacturer, or foundry, the castings shall include both the name of the producing foundry
and the organization for which the casting is produced. This lettering shall be cast so that the producing
foundry and the organization for which the casting is produced can be easily identified on the same side
of the casting.

The initials or trademark of the manufacturer, country of manufacture, and date of manufacture
(yyyy/mm/dd) shall be cast on the underside of the grate or cover, and as well, on either the top side of
the frame flange or on the inside of the frame.

1850.07.01.03 Finish

All surfaces shall be bare, without any coating. The surfaces of castings shall be uniform and free of
flaking rust or mounds of rust or debris.

When specified in the Contract Documents, all surfaces shall be painted in the shop with one coat of
asphalt or tar base black paint having a minimum softening point of 71 °C. All joints shall be thoroughly
coated.

1850.07.02 Gratings

Gratings shall be produced as specified in the Contract Documents.

1850.07.02.01 Welded Gratings

The end bearing bars shall be welded to the angle bars along both legs with a 5 mm fillet weld. Other
bearing bars shall be spot welded on each end to the angle bar. Crossbars shall be spot welded at each
point of contact with the bearing bars. Welding shall be according to CSA W59.

1850.07.02.02 Reticuline Bars

The section of reticuline bar parallel to the bearing bar at each rivet shall not exceed 40 mm.

1850.07.02.03 Tolerances

All tolerances shall be within the limits specified in the NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual.

1850.07.02.04 Finish

Gratings shall be hot dipped galvanized according to CSA G164-M.

1850.07.03 Locking Devices

Locking devices shall be produced as specified in the Contract Documents.

April 2018 Page 4 of 5 [Link] 1850

1850.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1850.08.01 Certificate

When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a certificate from the manufacturer to indicate
that the product was produced and tested according to the appropriate specification requirements. The
certificate shall be from an independent testing laboratory currently accredited by the Standards Council
of Canada.

1850.08.02 Inspection and Testing

When requested by the Owner, 2 Type B test bars for each lot of castings as described in ASTM A 48M
shall be supplied for tension testing. Test results for the test bars shall be reported within 2 weeks from
receipt of the test bars. Testing shall be completed by an independent testing laboratory currently
accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.

Additionally, when requested by the Owner, an independent testing laboratory currently accredited by the
Standards Council of Canada shall perform load testing and dimensioning of sample castings.

The Owner reserves the right to make inspections and tests at such time as the Owner may consider
necessary to ensure the materials are in accordance with this specification. All materials failing to comply
with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

April 2018 Page 5 of 5 [Link] 1850

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1853
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2022

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

RUBBER ADJUSTMENT UNITS FOR MAINTENANCE HOLES,
CATCH BASINS, AND VALVE CHAMBERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1853.01 SCOPE

1853.02 REFERENCES

1853.03 DEFINITIONS

1853.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1853.05 MATERIALS

1853.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1853.07 PRODUCTION

1853.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1853.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

1853.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material and performance requirements for rubber adjustment units for
maintenance holes, catch basins, and valve chambers.

1853.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

ASTM International

D412-16(2021) Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension

D573-04(2019) Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in an Air Oven
D2240-15(2021) Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness
D3574-17 Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials-Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane
Foams

November 2022 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 1853

1853.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Flat Profile means not having more than 0.25 mm deviation lineally in 305 mm.

1853.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1853.04.01 Design Requirements

The maximum thickness of any rubber adjustment unit shall not be greater than 75 mm, and stack height
to be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Rubber adjustment units shall not be adversely affected by exposure to salt, gasoline, antifreeze, or motor
oil when tested for resistance to chemical agents.

Thickness of the rubber adjustment units shall be within 3 mm of the manufacturer’s stated dimension. All
other dimensions shall be within 5 mm of manufacturer’s stated dimensions.

1853.05 MATERIALS

1853.05.01 Rubber

Rubber adjustment units shall be made of recycled or virgin rubber - most preferably Styrene-Butadiene
Rubber (SBR).

1853.07 PRODUCTION

1853.07.01 Requirements

Adjustment units shall be manufactured using production compression moulding, tooling, and
manufacturing practices to be consistent with current technology used for that type of material.

Manufactured rings shall be compressed to a minimum of 300 psi / 20.68 bar.

Adjustment units to be supplied in round, square, and rectangular shapes, and in flat and tapered profiles
up to a maximum of 75 mm (3”) per ring. Stacking height per manufacturer’s recommendation.

1853.07.02 Quality Control

The manufacturing process shall be such that individual units will be consistent in quality and appearance.
All rough edges shall be trimmed of excess flash, each ring to be checked for thickness, and flatness.

1853.07.02.01 General

Testing shall be conducted on production run rubber adjustment units not less than 24 hours old and not
more than 60 Days old. The temperature of the test specimens shall be maintained at 23 °C ± 2 °C for at
least 12 hours prior to and during the test period.

November 2022 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 1853

1853.07.02.02 Hardness

The moulded surface and interior hardness measurements of the adjustment unit material shall not vary
more than 15 points Shore A for any single unit when measured according to ASTM D2240. The readings
shall be taken within 1 second after the presser foot is in firm contact with the specimen, unless the
durometer has a maximum indicator, in which case the maximum indicated reading shall be recorded within
1 second of the cessation of the indentor travel.

1853.[Link] Moulded Surface Hardness

A minimum of six measurements for hardness shall be taken on each moulded surface of the adjustment
unit. Each measurement shall be at different positions evenly spaced along the adjustment unit surfaces
and shall be at least 12 mm from any edge of the adjustment unit.

1853.[Link] Interior Hardness

The adjustment units selected for testing shall be cut into a minimum of three equal size pieces providing
a minimum of six cut surfaces. A total of 15 evenly spaced interior hardness measurements shall be taken
of each cut surface. Each measurement shall be at least 6 mm apart and shall be at least 12 mm from any
edge of the specimen.

1853.07.02.03 Tensile Strength

A minimum of three test specimens shall be cut from each adjustment unit selected for testing. The tensile
strength of each specimen shall be a minimum of 1 MPa when tested according to ASTM D412, Test
Method A, using straight specimens.

1853.07.02.04 Compression Deformation and Compression Set

1853.[Link] Specimens

A minimum of three test specimens shall be cut from each adjustment unit selected for testing. The same
samples shall be used for the compression deformation and compression set testing. Each specimen shall
have a minimum thickness of 25 mm and a minimum top and bottom surface area of 2,500 mm 2. The top
and bottom surfaces shall not be larger than the plates of the compression equipment.

1853.[Link] Testing Procedure

Each specimen shall be tested for initial compression deformation, final compression deformation, and
compression set.

1853.[Link] Initial Compression Deformation

The initial compression deformation for each specimen shall be 6% ± 2% when tested in the following
manner:

a) The dimensions of each specimen shall be recorded to the nearest 0.02 mm prior to being subjected
to any testing.

b) Place the specimen in the compression equipment, using extreme care to place it exactly in the centre
between the plates to avoid tilting. Apply an initial constant load to achieve 0.05 MPa stress to the
specimen. Immediately determine the thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance between
the top and bottom plates. This value will represent the initial thickness of the specimen prior to
compression.

November 2022 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 1853

c) Over a period of 30 seconds or less, apply and maintain a constant load to achieve 1 MPa stress to the
specimen.

d) Immediately after the required load has been achieved, determine the initial compression deformation
thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance between the top and bottom plates and calculate
the percentage of compression as follows:

Cd1 = [(D1 - D2) / D1] x 100

where:

Cd1 = initial compression deformation as a percentage of the initial thickness

D1 = initial thickness
D2 = initial compression deformation thickness

1853.[Link] Final Compression Deformation

The final compression deformation for each specimen shall be 6% ± 2% when tested in the following
manner:

a) Maintain the load required to achieve the 1 MPa stress for a period of 30 minutes.

b) At the end of the 30-minute period, determine the final compression deformation thickness of the
specimen by measuring the distance between the top and bottom plates and calculate the percentage
of compression as follows:

Cd2 = [(D1 - D3) / D1] x 100

where:

Cd2 = final compression deformation as a percentage of the initial thickness

D1 = initial thickness, as derived during the initial compression deformation testing
D3 = final compression deformation thickness

1853.[Link] Compression Set

The maximum compression set for each specimen shall be 4% when tested in the following manner:

a) Remove the load on the specimen and allow it to rest undisturbed for a period of 30 minutes.

b) At the end of the 30-minute period, apply a constant load to achieve 0.05 MPa stress to the specimen.
Immediately determine the compression set thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance
between the top and bottom plates and calculate the percentage of compression set as follows:

Cs = [(D1 - D4) / D1] x 100

where:

Cs = compression set as a percentage of the initial thickness

D1 = initial thickness
D4 = compression set thickness

1853.07.03 Tolerances

The thickness of the adjustment unit shall be within 3 mm of manufacturer's stated dimensions. All other
dimensions shall be within 5 mm.

November 2022 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 1853

Except for shim or wedge units, the deviation from a plane parallel to theoretical surface shall not be greater
than 1 in 500.

1853.07.04 Minimum Physical Requirements

Minimum physical requirements shall be according to Table 1.

1853.07.05 Markings

Each adjustment unit shall be clearly marked on the inside or top surface with the following information:

a) Manufacturer's name.

b) Product trade name/catalogue number, if applicable.

c) Origin of manufacture.

d) Dimensions of the adjustment unit including:

i. thickness,
ii. inside dimensions, and
iii. outside dimensions.

1853.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1853.08.01 Certificate of Conformance

A certificate of compliance from the manufacturer indicating that the physical properties of the material
supplied complies with the requirements of this specification shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator prior to installation.

November 2022 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 1853

 TABLE 1
Minimum Physical Requirements
TEST / STANDARD PROPERTIES

Hardness - ASTM D2240 Maximum 15 Shore A variance

220 psi 1.5 Mpa

Tensile Strength - ASTM D412
1 Mpa minimum (145 psi)

Compression Deformation - OPSS 1853 6% ± 2%

Compression Set - OPSS 1853 4% maximum
Density - ASTM D3574 Test A 64.214 Lbs./Cu. Ft. ± 3%

Thermal Aging Properties - ASTM D573 3Hrs. @ 148• C (300• F)

Tensile, Hardness, Compression Deformation 100% Retained

Low Temperature Brittleness - 24 Hrs. @ -40 C No signs of cracks, ruptures, or degradation

November 2022 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 1853

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 1854
STANDARD APRIL 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 1854, November 2014)

Note: The PROV published in April 2018 replaces OPSS 1854 COMMON, November 2014 with no
technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) AND

EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS) ADJUSTMENT UNITS FOR MAINTENANCE
HOLES, CATCH BASINS, AND VALVE CHAMBERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1854.01 SCOPE

1854.02 REFERENCES

1854.03 DEFINITIONS

1854.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1854.05 MATERIALS

1854.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1854.07 PRODUCTION

1854.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1854.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material and performance requirements for high density polyethylene
(HDPE) and expanded polystyrene (EPS) adjustment units used for maintenance holes, catch basins,
and valve chambers.

1854.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

S6-14 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

ASTM International

D 543-06 Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents

D 1308-02 (2013) Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented
Organic Finishes

April 2018 Page 1 of 7 [Link] 1854

D 1248-05 Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

1854.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definition applies:

Flat Surface means a surface not having more than 0.25 mm deviation lineally in 305 mm.

1854.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1854.04.01 Design Requirements

Both high density polyethylene (HDPE) and expanded polystyrene (EPS) adjustment units shall meet the
following requirements, unless otherwise specified.

Adjustment rings shall not be adversely affected by exposure to salt, gasoline, antifreeze, or motor oil
when tested for resistance to chemical reagents.

The maximum allowable deviation from dishing or bowling, as measured at the outer edge with the
adjustment ring turned top down on a known flat surface shall be 6 mm.

The thickness of the adjustment units shall be within 3 mm of the manufacturer’s stated dimension. All
other dimensions shall be within 5 mm of manufacturer’s specified dimension.

The appearance of the adjustment units shall be such that it shall have no voided areas, cracks,
separations, or protrusions. Ripples or sags on vertical walls shall not cover more than 10% of the
surface area. The colour of the adjustment ring shall be consistent.

1854.05 MATERIALS

1854.05.01 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

The injection molding material shall be either recycled or virgin high density polyethylene or a
combination of both. The properties of the injection molding material shall be according to ASTM D 1248,
Type III, Class B, Category 3.

Adjustment units shall be manufactured from injection molding material that is recyclable as a high
density polyethylene product.

The maximum allowable bulging between webs as measured around the largest outside diameter and the
points where the outer wall intersects the web sections shall be 3 mm.

The HDPE material shall be tested for resistance to chemical reagents according to ASTM D 543,
Practice A.

1854.05.02 Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)

EPS adjustment units shall be manufactured using high density expanded polystyrene with minimum
density of 80.1 kg/m3. Core material of both round and square adjustment units shall be made of virgin
expanded polystyrene that is polymerized during pre-expansion and aging. Recycled EPS material shall
not be used.

April 2018 Page 2 of 7 [Link] 1854

EPS adjustment units shall be coated with a highly cross linked plural component polyurea sprayable
system. The coating shall be 0.0762 to 0.127 mm thick.

The polyurea coating shall be tested for resistance to chemical reagents according to ASTM D 1308.

1854.07 PRODUCTION

1854.07.01 General

Adjustment units shall be manufactured using production type injection moulding, tooling, and
manufacturing practices consistent with current technology being used for the type of material.

All rough edges shall be trimmed prior to shipping.

1854.07.02 Testing During Production

Testing shall be conducted on production run units not less than 24 hours old and not more than 60 Days
old.

For each production run, the tests to confirm dimensions, flatness, and to ensure consistent appearance
shall occur at a minimum rate of once every 500 adjustment units with the first test being conducted
between the 5th and 10th adjustment ring.

1854.07.03 Markings

Each adjustment ring shall be clearly marked on the inside or top surface with the following information:

a) Manufacturer’s name or logo

b) Product trade name or catalogue number, if applicable

c) Location of manufacture

d) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd)

e) Dimensions of the adjustment units, including:

i. Thickness
ii. Inside dimensions
iii. Outside dimensions

f) If the top and bottom surfaces are different, the side that is to be installed upwards.

1854.07.04 Proof Testing Procedures

1854.07.04.01 General

The adjustment ring shall meet or exceed the design load requirements as specified in CAN/CSA S6, for
a CL-625-ONT Truck.

This testing procedure is intended to determine if a product line of similar material strength and structural
design meets the performance requirements of Ontario Provincial Standards for Roads and Public Works
(OPS) by testing the catch basin units, which are usually one of the smallest adjustment units and
therefore under the greatest stress. If the catch basin ring passes, it can then be assumed that larger
maintenance hole units of equal material strength and structural design shall also pass. If there are

April 2018 Page 3 of 7 [Link] 1854

material or structural differences between the sizes, separate tests shall then need to be conducted for
the different materials and types.

Proof testing shall be conducted on production run units not less than 24 hours old and not more than 60
Days old.

1854.07.04.02 Sample Sizes

The manufacturer shall have the option of conducting tests on either a full size 50 mm high catch basin
adjustment units for a 600 x 600 mm precast concrete catch basin or 50 mm high mini specimens cut
from these units.

When mini specimens are used, the stress that would have been applied to the full size ring shall be the
same as applied to the mini specimen.

1854.07.04.03 Maximum Bearing Surface Area

For the purpose of determining the maximum bearing surface area, only the area of the catch basin
adjustment ring in contact with the top of a 600 x 600 mm precast concrete catch basin shall be used.
Any excess material not in contact shall be removed.

The area of the full size catch basin adjustment ring in contact with the top of a 600 x 600 mm precast
concrete catch basin box after removal of excess shall not exceed 0.28 m², which is the calculated area
of the top of the catch basin box.

1854.07.04.04 Static Design Full Load Testing Procedure

The static design full load shall be the design load requirements as specified in CAN/CSA S6, determined
to be 166.6 kN. This load shall be used for full size testing or the steps for equivalent stress for
specimens shall be followed.

1854.[Link] Specimens

For testing, a minimum of 9 full size 50 mm catch basin adjustment units for specimens or a minimum of 9
mini test specimens cut from a 50 mm catch basin adjustment ring shall be selected. These specimens
shall be the same size and be divided into 3 specimens for each of the 3 temperature groupings. The
same samples for each temperature groupings shall be used for the compression deformation and
compression set testing. For adjustment units using a web design, each mini specimen shall be cut as
close to opposing sides of adjacent webs as possible without removing mass from those webs and shall
be full thickness of the adjustment ring. The top and bottom surfaces shall not be larger than the plates of
the compression equipment.

1854.[Link] Equivalent Stress and Design Load for Mini Specimens

Af = the area of the full size catch basin adjustment unit in contact with the top of the catch basin.

Ams = load bearing surface area of the mini specimens

Si = initial stress on the adjustment ring = 14 kN / Af

Sf = final stress on the adjustment ring = 166.6 kN / Af

Lmi = initial load on the mini specimens = Si X Ams

Lmf = final load on the mini specimens = Sf X Ams

April 2018 Page 4 of 7 [Link] 1854

1854.[Link] Testing Procedure

Compression deformation and compression set testing shall be as shown in Table 1.

All specimens shall be tested for initial compression deformation, final compression deformation, and
compression set. Three samples shall be tested for each of the 3 temperature groupings: -20 °C, +23 °C,
and +30 °C.

The specimens shall be maintained at the specified test temperatures for a minimum of 2 hours,
immediately prior to the test period.

1854.[Link] Initial Compression Deformation

The initial compression deformation for each specimen shall be tested in the following manner:

a) The thickness of each specimen in 4 equally spaced locations around the frame shall be recorded to
the nearest 0.02 mm prior to being subjected to any testing. The average of these values shall be
recorded as average thickness prior to test (D0). If D0 is not between 47 and 53 mm, the specimen
shall be replaced.

b) The specimen shall be placed in the compression equipment using care to place it exactly in the
centre between the plates to avoid tilting.

c) An initial constant load of 14 kN shall be applied on the full size specimens or initial load (Lmi) on the
mini specimens. Immediately, determine the thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance
between the frame and bottom plate in the same 4 equally spaced locations around the frame. The
average of these values (D1) represents the initial thickness of the specimen prior to compression.

d) Over a period of 30 seconds or less, apply and maintain a constant load of 166.6 kN on the full size
specimen or final load (Lmf) on a mini specimen.

e) Immediately after the required load has been achieved, determine the initial compression deformation
thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance between the frame and bottom plate in the
same 4 locations. Using the average of these measurements (D2) calculate the average initial
compression deformation as follows:

Cd1 = D1 - D2

Where:

Cd1 = average initial compression deformation

D1 = average initial thickness
D2 = average initial compression deformation thickness

1854.[Link] Final Compression Deformation

The final compression deformation for each specimen shall be tested in the following manner:

a) Maintain the load of 166.6 kN in step d) of the Initial Compression Deformation clause for a period of
30 minutes.

b) At the end of the 30-minute period, determine the final compression deformation thickness of the
specimen by measuring the distance between the top and bottom plates at the same 4 locations,
average the measurements, and calculate the average final compression deformation as follows:

April 2018 Page 5 of 7 [Link] 1854

 Cd2 = D1 - D3

Where:

Cd2 = average final compression deformation

D1 = average initial thickness, as determined in step c) of the Initial Compression Deformation clause
D3 = average final compression deformation thickness

1854.[Link] Compression Set

The average compression set for each specimen shall be tested in the following manner:

a) Remove the load on the specimen and allow it to rest undisturbed for a period of 30 minutes.

b) At the end of the 30-minute rest period, apply a constant 14 kN load to the specimen. Immediately
determine the compression set thickness of the specimen by measuring the distance between the
frame and bottom plates at the same 4 locations, average the measurements, and calculate the
average compression set as follows:

Cs = D 1 - D 4

Where:

Cs = average compression set

D1 = average initial thickness, as determined in step c) of the Initial Compression Deformation clause
D4 = average compression set thickness

1854.07.04.05 Fatigue Load Test

A single full size catch basin ring of area Af shall be tested to 1,000,000 cycles of 1 second duration for
the fatigue load requirements as specified in CAN/CSA-S6, determined to be 98 kN at 23 °C.

At the end of the fatigue testing, the adjustment ring shall perform without failure. Failure of this test is
defined as deformation or cracking that would compromise the structural integrity or water tightness of the
installation when it is subjected to the specified loads, seasonal temperatures, and placement of hot mix
asphalt.

1854.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1854.08.01 Certificate

Suppliers shall provide a certificate upon request to indicate that the product was produced and tested in
accordance with this specification. Included with the certificate shall be reports from qualified
independent third party laboratories proving that the product meets the requirements of this specification.

1854.08.02 Inspection and Testing

The Owner may make inspections and tests at such times as considered necessary to ensure that the
material supplied is according to this specification.

All material failing to comply with the requirements of this specification shall be rejected.

April 2018 Page 6 of 7 [Link] 1854

 TABLE 1
Maximum Allowable Percentage Compression Deformation and Compression Set
For a Single 50 mm Thick Adjustment Unit or Equivalent Sample

Temperature of Maximum Average Maximum Average Maximum Allowable

Adjustment Ring Initial Compression Final Compression Average Compression
°C Deformation Deformation Set
(Cd1 / D1)*100% (Cd2 / D1)*100% (Cs / D1)*100%
% % %

30 3.3 7.4 1.3

23 1.9 3.0 0.8
-20 1.1 0.8 0.5

April 2018 Page 7 of 7 [Link] 1854

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 1860
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2019

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

GEOTEXTILES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1860.01 SCOPE

1860.02 REFERENCES

1860.03 DEFINITIONS

1860.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1860.05 MATERIALS

1860.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

1860.07 PRODUCTION

1860.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1860.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL – Not Used

1860.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for geotextiles.

1860.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

ASTM International

D 4354-12 Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics and Rolled Erosion Control
Products (RECPs) for Testing
D 4355/D 4355M-14 Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,
Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus
D 4491/D 4491M-17 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
D 4533/D 4533M-15 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
D 4873-16 Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls
and Samples
D 4632/D 4632M-15a Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles

November 2019 Page 1 of 8 [Link] 1860

D 6241-14 Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-
Related Products Using a 50 mm Probe

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

148.1 No. 10-94 Methods of Testing Geosynthetics - Geotextiles - Filtration Opening Size

Bureau de normalisation du Québec (BNQ)

BNQ 7009-910 Geotextiles - Quality of Geotextiles Used in Road Engineering - Certification

Protocol

1860.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Duplicate Samples means two samples taken at the same time and location, one to be used for quality
assurance testing and the other for referee testing.

Filtration Opening Size (FOS) means the opening size of a geotextile in microns corresponding to 95%
by mass particle diameter passing through the geotextile in the hydrodynamic sieving test CGSB 148.1,
Method No. 10.

Geosynthetic means a synthetic material used in geotechnical engineering applications. Geosynthetics

may include such items as geotextiles, geomembranes, geocells, geogrids, geonets, and geocomposites.

Geotextile means a permeable synthetic textile material that is used in association with foundation, soil,
rock, earth, or other geotechnical related material for one or more of the following functions: separation,
filtration, drainage, or protection. They may be woven, non-woven, or knitted.

Lat means a length equal to the circumference of a full geotextile roll provided by the manufacturer.

Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV) means the average value minus two standard deviations of a
given property established by the manufacturer during production. The average roll value for a given
property must meet or exceed this value.

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
materials received from the Contractor meet the specified requirements.

Quality Control (QC) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Contractor, Subcontractor,
supplier, and manufacturer to ensure that materials supplied to the Owner meet the specified
requirements.

Referee Testing means testing of a material attribute for the purpose of resolving acceptance issues at
the request of the Contractor or the Owner.

November 2019 Page 2 of 8 [Link] 1860

1860.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

1860.04.01 Submission Requirements

Prior to the use of a geotextile in the Work, a certificate from the manufacturer stating the name of the
manufacturer, product name, style number, chemical composition, and other pertinent information
required to fully describe the geotextile as evaluated under the manufacturer's QC program, shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator. The certificate shall identify the name of the supplier of the
geotextile covered pipe or tubing. A person having legal authority to bind the manufacturer or supplier
shall attest to this certificate.

Upon request, documentation describing the manufacturer's QC program shall be made available to the
Contract Administrator.

The requirements stated above shall be waived for geotextiles certified according to BNQ 7009-910.

1860.05 MATERIALS

Geotextile fibre or yarn shall be composed of at least 95% by mass of polypropylene, polyethylene,
polyester, or other synthetic polymers, excluding polyamides.

Geotextiles shall contain stabilizers or inhibitors if necessary, to make the filaments resistant to
deterioration by excessive ultraviolet (UV) light and heat exposure. Geotextiles shall be resistant to acid
and alkali action and shall be unaffected by micro-organisms and insects.

1860.07 PRODUCTION

1860.07.01 Woven Geotextiles

Woven geotextiles shall be produced by interlacing two or more sets of filaments, yarns, fibres, film, tape,
or other elements in such a way that the elements pass each other, essentially at right angles and with
one set of elements parallel to the fabric axis. The edge of woven geotextiles shall be finished to prevent
the outer yarn from pulling away.

1860.07.02 Non-Woven Geotextiles

Non-woven geotextiles shall consist of a manufactured sheet, web, or batt of directionally or randomly-
oriented fibres, filaments, or other elements produced by bonding or interlocking the elements by
mechanical, thermal, or chemical means.

1860.07.03 Knitted Sock Geotextiles

Knitted sock geotextiles shall be produced by interlooping one or more yarns, fibres, or filaments in a
continuous tube. Knitted sock geotextiles are suitable only for wrapping of subdrain pipe.

1860.07.04 Seams

When sections of geotextile are joined by sewing, the seam strength shall be at least 90% of the
minimum grab tensile strength requirement for the class of geotextile specified in the Contract
Documents.

Seams joining two sections of geotextile shall be sewn with thread meeting the material requirements for
the geotextile or, shall be bonded by thermal or chemical means.

November 2019 Page 3 of 8 [Link] 1860

1860.07.05 Physical Requirements

1860.07.05.01 Woven and Non-Woven Geotextiles

Woven and non-woven geotextiles are classified as either Class I or Class II and shall meet the physical
property requirements shown in Table 1.

1860.07.05.02 Knitted Sock Geotextiles

Knitted sock geotextiles shall meet the physical property requirements shown in Table 2.

1860.07.05.03 Temporary Silt Fence

Geotextiles for temporary silt fence shall be woven or non-woven and shall meet the physical property
requirements shown in Table 3.

1860.07.06 Protection during Shipment and Storage

Geotextiles shall be protected against excessive UV exposure and contamination from dirt, dust,
moisture, and any other deleterious materials, until they are installed. All geotextiles shall be wrapped in
an opaque protective covering from the time of manufacture to the time of installation. The geotextiles
and protective wrapping shall be free of tears and punctures, upon delivery to the work.

Geotextiles intended to be covered by soil, rock, earth, or other materials shall not be exposed to direct
sunlight for more than 72 hours following the removal of the protective wrap.

Geotextiles shall be protected from temperatures greater than 60 °C.

1860.07.07 Identification

Each roll of geotextile or geotextile-covered pipe or tubing shall be clearly marked according to ASTM
D 4873 with a permanent, legible identification tag or label either on the protective wrap or the inner core
as applicable, or affixed to a geotextile-covered pipe or tubing. Product labels shall show the name of the
manufacturer or supplier, product number, type, Class, roll number, and date of manufacture.

For Class I and Class II geotextiles, the product label requirements stated in the paragraph above, shall
be waived for geotextiles certified by the BNQ according to BNQ 7009-910 for the requirements specified
in the Materials and Production sections. BNQ-certified geotextiles shall bear the “BNQ” mark of
conformity, the BNQ Product Designation, as specified in Table 1, as well as all other identification marks
specified by BNQ.

1860.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1860.08.01 General

When the Owner has elected to carry out QA testing to ensure that material used in the Work is
according to the requirements of this specification, applicable geotextiles shall be sampled and tested
according to the methods identified in Tables 1, 2, or 3, at the following rates:

a) For Class I or II geotextile, one sample per 10,000 m 2 of installed product.

b) For knitted sock geotextile, one sample per 10,000 m of installed subdrain pipe wrapped with knitted
sock geotextile.

c) For temporary silt fence geotextile, one sample per 10,000 m of silt fence barrier installed.

November 2019 Page 4 of 8 [Link] 1860

When the quantity of a geotextile is less than the lot size specified above, a minimum of one QA sample
per each geotextile type shall be tested to verify that the material meets the requirements of this
specification.

Testing shall be carried out at a laboratory designated by the Owner. The Owner shall be responsible for
all costs associated with QA testing.

1860.08.02 Sampling

1860.08.02.01 General

QA sampling shall be carried out by the Contractor, in the presence of the Contract Administrator.

Sampling shall be according to ASTM D4354 and as specified in the Contract Documents.

All QA samples shall be duplicate samples with both samples taken side-by-side.

Each sample shall be rolled and placed into separate UV-protective containers (e.g., sealed cardboard
box or opaque plastic bag). If a rolled sample is too large to fit within a UV-protective container, it may be
folded in a manner that minimizes the number of folds required to fit the sample into the container.

Each sample shall be accompanied with a copy of the roll label or identification tag, as well as the
appropriate contract-related information and testing requirements, as specified in the Contract
Documents. All such information shall be placed in a moisture-proof envelope directly attached to each
UV-protective container.

1860.08.02.02 Sample Size, Preparation, and Marking

Samples of Class I and Class II geotextiles shall be the full width of the roll and at least 2.0 meters in
length in the machine direction.

Samples of temporary silt fence geotextile and knitted socks shall be a minimum of 3.0 m² in area.

When samples are taken from a roll of material for testing, at least one full lat of the material from that roll
shall be discarded prior to sampling.

All samples shall be completely dry, free of damage, dust, or other contamination, at all times. Any
samples that have been allowed to become moist or wet shall be air-dried in a protected place, away
from direct sunlight until they are completely dry prior to packaging.

All samples shall be permanently marked with the machine direction.

For temporary silt fence geotextile that is attached to wooden stakes, the wooden stakes shall be
carefully removed to avoid any tearing of the geotextile and the stakes discarded. The area within 150
mm of each of the stakes that were removed, shall then be permanently marked by crosshatching, to
ensure that such areas are not used for testing.

1860.08.03 Acceptance

When QA testing has been carried out, QA test results shall be used for acceptance purposes.

November 2019 Page 5 of 8 [Link] 1860

1860.08.04 Referee Testing

The Contractor may invoke referee testing for one or more attributes by submitting a written request to
the Contract Administrator, within five Business Days following notification that a sample representing a
lot of geotextile does not meet the requirements of this specification. The notification shall include the
type and, where applicable, the class of geotextile, as well as the specific attribute or attributes for which
the referee testing is being requested.

The retained duplicate QA samples shall be used for referee testing.

Referee testing shall be carried out, as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot
and shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor.

When a referee test result shows that the materials are in accordance with the physical property
requirements of this specification, then the material represented by that test result shall be accepted.

When a referee test result shows that the material does not meet the physical property requirements of
this specification, then the material represented by that test result, including any material already in the
Work, shall be considered rejectable. Rejected material shall be replaced at no additional cost to the
Owner.

If a lot is considered rejectable based on the referee test results, then the Contractor shall also be
responsible for the cost of the referee testing of that lot, including the cost of transporting the samples to
the referee laboratory, at the rates specified in the Contract Documents. In all other cases, the Owner
shall bear the cost of the referee testing and the cost of transporting the samples of that lot.

November 2019 Page 6 of 8 [Link] 1860

 TABLE 1
Physical Property Requirements for Woven and Non-Woven Geotextiles

Geotextile Class

Class I Class II*

Non- Non-
Property Test Method Unit Woven Woven
Woven Woven
BNQ Product Designation
OPSS 1860- OPSS 1860- OPSS 1860- OPSS 1860-
I-W I-N II-W II-N
Tensile strength,
ASTM D 4632/D 4632M N 800 350 1100 700
MARV, minimum
Tear strength,
ASTM D 4533/D 4533M N 300 180 400 250
MARV, minimum
Puncture strength,
ASTM D 6241 N 1650 990 2200 1375
MARV, minimum
Permittivity, ASTM D 4491/D 4491M,
s-1 0.05
minimum Method A

Filtration opening CGSB 148.1, Method

µm As specified in the Contract Documents
size (FOS), typical No. 10

Ultraviolet stability,
ASTM D 4355/4355M % 50% retained tensile strength at 500 hours
minimum
*Note: A Class II Woven geotextile may be used to replace a Class I Woven geotextile or a Class II Non-Woven geotextile
may be used to replace a Class I Non-Woven geotextile, as long as the geotextile being proposed for use meets the
requirements for Filtration Opening Size (FOS), according to CGSB 148.1, Method No. 10, as specified in the Contract
Documents.

TABLE 2
Physical Property Requirements for Knitted Sock Geotextiles

Acceptance
Property Test Method
Requirements

Puncture resistance, N ASTM D6241 800

FOS, maximum, µm CGSB 148.1, Method No. 10 As specified in the Contract Documents

Permittivity, minimum, s-1 ASTM D 4491/D 4491M, Method A 1.0

November 2019 Page 7 of 8 [Link] 1860

 TABLE 3
Physical Property Requirements for Temporary Silt Fence Geotextiles

Unsupported Silt Fence

Supported Silt
Property Test Method Unit
Fence
Woven Non-Woven

Maximum post spacing - m 1.2 2.0 1.2

Tensile strength, MARV, ASTM D 4632/

N 400 550
minimum D 4632M

ASTM D 4491/ -1
Permittivity, minimum s 0.05
D 4491M

Filtration Opening Size CGSB 148.1,

µm As specified in the Contract Documents
(FOS), maximum Method No. 10

Ultraviolet stability, ASTM D 4355/

% 70% retained tensile strength at 500 hours
minimum D 4355M

November 2019 Page 8 of 8 [Link] 1860

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 2001
STANDARD APRIL 2021
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 2001 November 2014)

Note: The PROV implemented in April 2021 replaces OPSS 2001 COMMON, November 2014 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR SIGNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2001.01 SCOPE

2001.02 REFERENCES

2001.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2001.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2001.05 MATERIALS

2001.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2001.07 PRODUCTION

2001.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2001.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2001.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for signs.

2001.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM):

Book 2 - Sign Design, Fabrication & Patterns

CSA Standards

O121-08 (R2013) Douglas Fir Plywood

ASTM International

A4956 - 13 Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control

April 2021 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 2001

A653 / A653M - 11 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)
by the Hot-Dip Process
A792 / A792M - 10 Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
B209 - 10 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

2001.05 MATERIALS

2001.05.01 General

Signs shall be fabricated according to OTM Book 2. Sign dimensions, patterns, colour, minimum reflective
sheeting, and sign blank number shall be according to OTM Book 2, Master Sign Library, Sign Pattern
Template.

Sign blank material type shall be selected in accordance with OTM Book 2.

2001.05.02 Aluminum Sign Blanks

Aluminum sign blanks shall be fabricated from aluminum sheeting according to ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-
T6 or Alloy 5052-H38. The aluminum shall be 2.1 mm thick.

Sign blanks shall not deviate more than 3 mm from the specified size in any dimension, except thickness.

2001.05.03 Steel Sign Blanks

Steel sign blanks shall be fabricated from galvanized, galvannealed, or galvalume steel made from sheets
or coils. Coated steel shall be 1.6 mm thick.

Galvanized and galvannealed steel shall be according to ASTM A653M, regular type, coating designation
Z275.

Galvalume steel shall be according to ASTM A792M, coating designation AZM180.

Sign blanks shall not deviate more than 3 mm from the specified size in any dimension, except thickness.

2001.05.04 Plywood Sign Blanks

Plywood sign blanks shall be 19 mm thick, Douglas Fir Medium Density Overlaid Two Sides (MDO 2S)
according to CSA O121. The front face and back face overlay shall be 60/60. Inner plies shall be
Douglas Fir.

Sign blanks shall not deviate more than 4 mm from the specified size in any dimension, except thickness.

2001.05.05 Retroreflective Sheeting

Retroreflective sheeting shall be according to ASTM D4956.

2001.07 PRODUCTION

2001.07.01 Aluminum and Steel Sign Blanks

2001.07.01.01 General

April 2021 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 2001

Sign blanks shall be flat. Raised edges and burrs shall be removed.

2001.07.01.02 Cleaning and Coating

Sign blanks shall be degreased.

Sign blanks shall be prepared ready to accept overlay sheetings and paints according to the
manufacturer’s specifications.

2001.07.02 Plywood Sign Blanks

2001.07.02.01 Sign Faces

Surfaces shall be smooth, impermeable, and weatherproof.

One coat of primer or appropriate sealer shall be applied to the back face of the sign.

The front face of the sign shall be primed and painted according to the sheeting manufacturer’s
specifications and instructions.

2001.07.02.02 Sign Edges

All voids in the sign edges shall be filled with plastic wood. One coat of primer or appropriate sealer shall
be applied.

2001.07.03 Markings

The month, year of manufacture, and the name of the supplier shall be printed clearly on each sign with a
weatherproof marking.

2001.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2001.08.01 Inspection and Testing

The quality of the finished product may be subject to inspection and approval by the Owner. The Owner
may make tests to govern the acceptance or rejection of the materials.

2001.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2001.09.01 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of signs delivered and accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of signs delivered to the
destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner’s laboratory, shall be included in the price.

April 2021 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 2001

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 2401
STANDARD NOVEMBER 2018
SPECIFICATION (Formerly OPSS 2401, Nov 2010)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 2401 COMMON, November 2010 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2401.01 SCOPE

2401.02 REFERENCES

2401.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2401.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2401.05 MATERIALS

2401.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2401.07 PRODUCTION

2401.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

2401.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the material requirements for electrical handholes.

2401.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

A23.1-09/A23.2-09 (R2014) Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods

and Standard Practices for Concrete
G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality
Steel/Structural Quality Steel
G164-18 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles

ASTM International

A 48/A 48M-2016 Grey Iron Casting

C 857-2016 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground
Precast Concrete Utility Structures
F 593-2017 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

November 2018 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 2401

American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

SCTE 77-2017 Specifications for Underground Enclosure Integrity

2401.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2401.04.01 Design Requirements

All material for non-concrete and semi-concrete handholes shall have a minimum compressive strength of
135 MPa and shall be suitable for installation and use through a temperature range of -40 to +70 °C.

2401.05 MATERIALS

2401.05.01 General

All concrete shall be according to CSA A23.1 and CSA A23.2.

All electrical handholes shall be according to ASTM C 857 and ANSI/SCTE 77.

As a minimum, all non-concrete and semi-concrete electrical handholes consisting of cover and box shall
be according to ANSI/SCTE 77 TIER 22.

The thickness of each electrical handhole cover shall be minimum 10 mm.

Each electrical handhole cover shall be galvanized steel according to CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21 and
CAN/CSA G164 or cast ferrous alloy according to ASTM A 48, Class No. 30 C. The top side of each
metallic electrical handhole cover shall have a checkered tread.

Non-concrete and semi-concrete electrical handholes installed in earth or sidewalk may have non-metallic
covers. The top side of each non-metallic cover shall have a checkered tread or a surface with a static
coefficient of friction that is a minimum of 0.5, as determined using the tests specified in ANSI/SCTE 77.

All electrical handholes shall have lugs, studs, or other means of bonding all metallic components to
ground.

2401.05.02 Fastening Material

All bolts, studs, screws, nuts, washers and other fastening material shall be stainless steel and shall be
according to ASTM F 593.

2401.07 PRODUCTION

2401.07.01 General

General requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Electrical handholes shall be produced as specified in the Contract Documents.

2401.07.02 Marking

Each handhole shall have identification markings located on the outside vertical surfaces of the handhole
showing the manufacturer's name or trademark and the date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

November 2018 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 2401

The top surface of the handhole cover shall be permanently marked, showing the manufacturer's name or
trademark, the date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd), and the standard designation OPSS 2401. These
markings shall be located on the top surface of the handhole cover or embossed into a corrosion-resistant
metal plate securely cemented to the top surface of the handhole cover.

2401.07.03 Shipping

The supplier shall provide notice of intent to deliver 3 Business Days prior to the shipping date.

November 2018 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 2401

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2409
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2018
(Formerly OPSS 2409, Nov 2014)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 2409 COMMON, November 2014 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2409.01 SCOPE

2409.02 REFERENCES

2409.03 DEFINITIONS

2409.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2409.05 MATERIALS

2409.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2409.07 PRODUCTION

2409.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

2409.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for traffic signal runner cable and traffic signal riser cable.

2409.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 239-17 Control and Instrumentation Cables

2409.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply:

November 2018 Page 1 of 5 [Link] 2409

Traffic Signal Runner Cable means the polyethylene insulated polyvinyl chloride jacketed multi-
conductor cable, for use in traffic signal systems, suitable for direct burial or aerial installation and rated at
600 volts.

Traffic Signal Riser Cable means the polyethylene insulated polyethylene jacketed multi-conductor
cable, for use in traffic signal systems, suitable for use on traffic signal pole installation and rated at
600 volts.

2409.05 MATERIALS

2409.05.01 Cable

Traffic signal cable shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 239, rated 600 volts.

Conductors of the traffic signal runner cable shall be #14 AWG solid copper.

Conductors of the traffic signal riser cable shall be #14 AWG, minimum of 19 strands or #14 AWG solid
copper.

2409.05.02 Insulation

Insulation of the conductors shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 239.

2409.05.03 Jacket

Outside jacket of the traffic signal runner cable shall be as shown in Table 1 and the polyvinyl chloride
shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 239.

2409.05.04 Conductor Identification

Conductor identification shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 239.

Colour coding and printing of the conductors shall be as shown in Table 2 to 7.

2409.07 PRODUCTION

2409.07.01 General

Traffic signal runner cable and traffic signal riser cable shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 239.

2409.07.02 Marking

Cable shall be permanently marked according CSA C22.2 No. 239.

November 2018 Page 2 of 5 [Link] 2409

 TABLE 1
Traffic Signal Runner Cable Outside Jacket Thickness
Diameter of Completed Average Jacket Thickness Minimum Jacket Thickness
Conductor Assembly
mm mm mm
0 - 10.9 2.0 1.6
11 - 17.9 2.4 2.0
18 - 26.9 2.8 2.2
27 - 38.9 3.2 2.6
39 - 50.9 3.6 3.0
51 - 75.9 4.0 3.2
76 and over 4.8 4.0

TABLE 2
4 Conductor Runner Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour

#1 White
#2 Red
#3 Yellow
#4 Blue

TABLE 3
7 Conductor Runner Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour Lettering

#1 White -
#2 Red Red one
#3 Red Red two
#4 Yellow Amber one
#5 Yellow Amber two
#6 Blue Green one
#7 Blue Green two

November 2018 Page 3 of 5 [Link] 2409

 TABLE 4
12 Conductor Runner Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour Lettering

#1 White -
#2 Black -
#3 Orange -
#4 Red Red one
#5 Red Red two
#6 Red Red three
#7 Yellow Amber one
#8 Yellow Amber two
#9 Yellow Amber three
#10 Blue Green one
#11 Blue Green two
#12 Blue Green three

TABLE 5
19 Conductor Runner Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour Lettering

#1 White White one
#2 White White two
#3 Black -
#4 Orange -
#5 Red Red one
#6 Red Red two
#7 Red Red three
#8 Red Red four
#9 Red Red five
#10 Yellow Amber one
#11 Yellow Amber two
#12 Yellow Amber three
#13 Yellow Amber four
#14 Yellow Amber five
#15 Blue Green one
#16 Blue Green two
#17 Blue Green three
#18 Blue Green four
#19 Blue Green five

November 2018 Page 4 of 5 [Link] 2409

 TABLE 6
5 Conductor Riser Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour

#1 White
#2 Red
#3 Yellow
#4 Blue
#5 Green with Yellow Tracer

TABLE 7
7 Conductor Riser Cable

Conductor Insulation Colour Lettering

#1 White -
#2 Red -
#3 Yellow Amber one
#4 Yellow Amber two
#5 Blue Green one
#6 Blue Green two
#7 Green with Yellow Tracer -

November 2018 Page 5 of 5 [Link] 2409

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2410
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

EXTRA LOW-VOLTAGE CABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2410.01 SCOPE

2410.02 REFERENCES

2410.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2410.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2410.05 MATERIALS

2410.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2410.07 PRODUCTION

2410.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

2410.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for extra low-voltage cables suitable for underground or aerial
installation.

2410.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

International Municipal Signal Association

19-5 1997 Polyethylene Insulated, Polyethylene Belted, Copper Shielded, Polyvinyl Chloride Jacketed
Signal Cable
50-2 1997 Polyethylene Insulated, Polyethylene Jacketed, Loop Detector Lead-in Cable

November 2017 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 2410

2410.05 MATERIALS

2410.05.01 Conductors

Conductors of all cables shall be according to IMSA 19-5 and shall be #14 AWG stranded tinned copper.
The number of conductors shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

2410.05.02 Communication Cables

2410.05.02.01 General

Communication cable shall be polyethylene insulated, polyethylene belted, and polyvinyl chloride
jacketed.

2410.05.02.02 Insulation

Insulation and inner belt insulation shall be according to IMSA 19-5.

2410.05.02.03 Shielding

Shielding shall be according to IMSA 19-5.

2410.05.02.04 Jacket

Overall jacket shall be according IMSA 19-5.

2410.05.02.05 Fillers

Fillers shall be according to IMSA 19-5.

2410.05.03 Lead-In Cables

2410.05.03.01 General

Lead-in cables shall be polyethylene insulated and polyethylene jacketed.

2410.05.03.02 Insulation

Insulation shall be according to IMSA 50-2.

2410.05.03.03 Shielding

Shielding shall be according IMSA 50-2.

2410.05.03.04 Jacket

Overall jacket shall be according to IMSA 50-2.

2410.05.03.05 Drain Wire

Drain wire shall be according to IMSA 50-2.

November 2017 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 2410

2410.07 PRODUCTION

2410.07.01 Communication Cables

Communication cables shall be according to IMSA 19-5.

2410.07.01.01 Marking

Cable shall be permanently marked according to IMSA 19-5, at intervals not exceeding one metre,
showing the following:

a) Size of conductor.

b) Voltage rating.

c) Year of manufacture.

d) IMSA specification number.

2410.07.02 Lead-In Cables

Lead-in cables shall be according to IMSA 50-2.

2410.07.02.01 Marking

Cable shall be permanently marked according to IMSA 50-2, at intervals not exceeding one metre,
showing the following:

a) Size of conductor.

b) Voltage rating.

c) Year of manufacture.

d) IMSA specification number.

November 2017 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 2410

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2414
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2019

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2414.01 SCOPE

2414.02 REFERENCES

2414.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2414.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2414.05 MATERIALS

2414.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2414.07 PRODUCTION

2414.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2414.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for the following:

a) Supply control cabinet assembly Type 1 - 120/240 V, 100 A, 1-phase, 3-wire.

b) Supply control cabinet assembly Type 2A - 120/208 V, 100 A, 3-phase, 4-wire.

c) Supply control cabinet assembly Type 2B - 347/600 V, 100 A, 3-phase, 4-wire.

d) Supply control cabinet assembly Type 3 - 120/240 V, 100 A, 1-phase, 3-wire, no lighting contactor.

e) Distribution assembly - 347/600 V.

2414.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C9-2017 Dry-Type Transformers

C22.2 No. 0.12-M1985 (R2016) Wiring Space and Wire Bending Space in Enclosures for Equipment
Rated 750 V or Less
C22.2 No. 0.17-00 (R2018) Evaluation of Properties of Polymeric Materials
C22.2 No. 0.4-2017 Bonding of Electrical Equipment

November 2019 Page 1 of 12 [Link] 2414

C22.2 No. 5-2016 Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Moulded-Case Switches and Circuit-
Breaker Enclosures
C22.2 No. 9.0-1996 (R2016) General Requirements for Luminaires
C22.2 No. 14-2018 Industrial Control Equipment
C22.2 No. 18.1-2013 (R2018) Metallic Outlet Boxes
C22.2 No. 29-2015 Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards
C22.2 No. 38-2018 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
C22.2 No. 41-2013 (R2017) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
C22.2 No. 45.1-2007 (R2017) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
C22.2 No. 45.2-2008 (R2013) Electrical Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel
C22.2 No. 55-2015 Special Use Switches
C22.2 No. 65-2018 Wire Connectors
C22.2 No. 66.1-2006 (R2015) Low Voltage Transformers - Part 1: General Requirements
C22.2 No. 66.2-2006 (R2015) Low Voltage Transformers - Part 2: General Purpose Transformers
C22.2 No. 76-2014 Splitters
C22.2 No. 83-M1985 (R2017) Electrical Metallic Tubing
C22.2 No. 94.1-2015 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations
C22.2 No. 94.2-2015 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations
C22.2 No. 106-2005 (R2014) HRC - Miscellaneous Fuses
C22.2 No. 144.1-16 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
C22.2 No. 227.2.1-2014 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
C227.5-2008 (R2018) Three-Phase Live-Front Pad-Mounted Distribution Transformers
G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/
Structural Quality Steel
G164-2018 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
W59.2-M1991 (R2013) Welded Aluminum Construction

Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)

Ontario Electrical Safety Code

Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

CAN/ULC-S102-10 Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and
Assemblies

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

B18.15-2008 Forged Eyebolts

ASTM International

A 480/A 480M-18 General Requirements for Flat Rolled Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip
A 489-18 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes
A 666-15 Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat
Bar
B 209-14 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
G 34-01(2018) Test Method for Exfoliation Corrosion Susceptibility in 2XXX and 7XXX Series
Aluminum Alloys (EXCO Test)

IEEE

C62.11-2012 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits (>1 kV)

November 2019 Page 2 of 12 [Link] 2414

National Equipment Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA 250-2014 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

2414.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2414.04.01 Design Requirements

2414.04.01.01 Power Supply Equipment Requirements

Supply control cabinet assemblies shall be according to the Contract Documents. Completed assemblies
shall be “service entrance ready.” The complete assembly shall pass Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)
equipment inspection and have an ESA label of approval. These approvals shall be obtained prior to the
unit being shipped.

Completed distribution assemblies shall be approved according to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

2414.04.02 Submission Requirements

2414.04.02.01 Working Drawings

The Contractor shall submit four sets of Working Drawings to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days
prior to the commencement of fabrication. An Engineer shall review the Working Drawings and affix a
reviewed stamp with his or her signature to the Working Drawings verifying that the drawings are
consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings for supply control cabinet assemblies shall include the following
information:

a) Detailed dimensioned layout, including sections and details to show enclosures, equipment layouts
and mounting arrangements, and exact weights.

b) Detailed bill of materials.

c) Wiring diagrams.

d) Details of equipment nameplates.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings for distribution assemblies shall include the following information:

a) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show enclosures, structural details, equipment layouts and
mounting arrangements, anchor bolt locations, and overall weights.

b) Detailed bill of materials.

c) Wiring diagrams.

d) Details of equipment nameplates and notices.

Once fabrication of the equipment has commenced, materials and dimensions shown on the submitted
Working Drawings shall not be changed.

November 2019 Page 3 of 12 [Link] 2414

2414.05 MATERIALS

2414.05.01 Enclosures

2414.05.01.01 Supply Control Cabinet Assemblies

Enclosures shall be welded 14 gauge stainless steel type 304 and shall have a No. 2B finish outside
according to ASTM A 666 and ASTM A 480.

The panelboard cover for the supply control cabinet assembly shall be manufactured to accommodate the
number of standard-sized single-pole branch circuit breakers as specified in the Contract Documents.
Unused openings shall be covered with removable blank covers or inserts.

The removable internal equipment panel consisting of a combination backboard and drip shield shall be
fabricated from 14 gauge stainless steel type 304 and shall have a No. 2B finish according to
ASTM A 666 and ASTM A 480.

Barriers and dead-front panels shall be fabricated from clear thermoplastic polycarbonate according to
CSA C22.2 No. 0.17.

2414.05.01.02 Distribution Assemblies

Exterior cubicles shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 94.1 and CSA C22.2 No. 94.2, enclosure
NEMA 250, Type 3.

Enclosures for electrical equipment inside the cubicle shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 94.1 and
CSA C22.2 No. 94.2, enclosure NEMA 250, Type 1.

The exterior of the cubicle shall be fabricated from 5052-H32 marine-type sheet aluminum according to
ASTM G 34. The sheet aluminum shall be 4.7 mm thick minimum and reinforced. Fabrication shall be
according to ASTM B 209 for 5052-H32 sheet aluminum.

The cabinet base shall be steel H-beam according to CSA G40.21, Grade 260W, and shall be hot dip
galvanized according to CSA G164.

Equipment backplate supports shall be aluminum brackets welded to the aluminum sheeting. All other
cabinet materials shall be sheet, formed, or cast aluminum or stainless steel.

Eyebolts shall be drop forged steel and according to ASTM A 489 and ANSI/ASME B18.15.

All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel.

2414.[Link] Insulation and Ventilation

Enclosure insulation shall be rated at minimum R 8/RSI l.4 and have a flame spread rating not greater
than 25 when tested according to CAN/ULC-S102. Insulation shall be applied to the entire surface of the
walls, doors, and ceilings, except areas for openings to the exterior.

Enclosure ventilation shall be according to the Contract Documents. Ventilation openings shall be
screened, vermin proof, and tamper proof louvres.

2414.05.02 Breakers

Breakers shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 5 for use with copper bus.

November 2019 Page 4 of 12 [Link] 2414

2414.05.03 Contactors

Contactors shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 14.

2414.05.04 Lightning Arrestors

Lightning arrestors shall be according to IEEE C62.11.

2414.05.05 Outlet Boxes and Fittings

Outlet boxes and fittings shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 18.1.

2414.05.06 Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables

All interconnecting wires and cables shall be copper with type RWU90 insulation and according to
CSA C22.2 No. 38.

2414.05.07 Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards

Panelboards and enclosed panelboards shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 29. Buses shall be copper.

Panelboards shall accept bus bar bolt-on breakers and all bus work shall be of copper construction. All
interconnecting wire and cables shall be of copper construction and bending radius according to
CSA C22.2 No. 0.12.

2414.05.08 Grounding and Bonding Materials

All equipment used for grounding and bonding shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 0.4 and
C22.2 No. 41.

2414.05.09 Rigid Metal Conduits

Rigid metal conduits shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 45.1 and CSA C22.2 No. 45.2.

2414.05.10 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Dry-type distribution transformers shall be according to CSA C9.

2414.05.11 Switches

Switches shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 55.

2414.05.12 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles

Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 144.1.

2414.05.13 Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Conduits and Connectors

Non-metallic liquid tight conduits and connectors shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 227.2.1.

2414.05.14 Specialty Control Transformers

Specialty control transformers shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 66.1 and CSA C22.2 No. 66.2.

November 2019 Page 5 of 12 [Link] 2414

2414.05.15 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 83.

2414.05.16 Enclosure Lamps

Enclosure lamps shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 9.0.

2414.05.17 Splitters

Splitters shall be according to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 76.

2414.05.18 High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) Fuses

High rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 106.

2414.05.19 Wire Connectors

Wire connectors shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 65.

2414.05.20 Neutral Bus Bars

Neutral bus bars shall be copper.

2414.07 PRODUCTION

2414.07.01 General

General requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

2414.07.02 Supply Control Cabinet Assemblies

2414.07.02.01 Cabinet Fabrication

Supply control cabinet assemblies shall be assembled and wired according to the Contract Documents.

2414.07.02.02 Enclosures

The enclosure for the supply control cabinet assembly shall be constructed so that exposure to weather,
moisture, or external splashing do not impair the effectiveness of the enclosed electrical equipment. The
enclosure shall be manufactured to meet the requirements of NEMA 250, Type 4X.

The enclosure shall consist of the following:

a) Pole mounting brackets according to the Contract Documents.

b) Doors with:

i. An inside mounted, continuous, piano-type stainless steel hinge.

ii. A latching mechanism to hold the door open at 90° and 150-180°.
iii. A copper or stainless steel flexible flat braid jumper connected between the door and the cabinet
by means of welded studs.
iv. A stainless steel padlocking provision.
v. A stainless steel three-point padlocking handle with a nylon roller wheel complete with bearing.
vi. Tamperproof stainless steel mounting hardware accessible from the inside.

November 2019 Page 6 of 12 [Link] 2414

 vii. A door handle that travels and stops below the keyhole with minimum 25 mm clearance and
rotates 90° pointing straight down for the closed position and pointing horizontally for the open
position.

c) Removable internal equipment panel with a combination backboard and drip shield. The drip shield
shall be formed so that the electrical components mounted on the backboard are not affected by
moisture forming on the interior at the top of the enclosure.

d) Barriers formed according to CSA C22.2 No. 29 separating the service cables from the branch
circuits and the photoelectric controller cables.

e) Internal dead-front panels for the main breaker and circuit breaker sections that prevent unsafe
contact by service personnel with the live circuits from all sides.

f) A printed schedule for the supply control cabinet identifying circuits mounted on cardboard, inserted
in a clear plastic bag, and permanently attached to the inside of the door.

Dead-front panels shall be formed so that the circuit breaker panel has to be removed prior to the main
breaker panel can be removed. Both panels shall be supplied with quarter-turn screw latches welded to
the dead-front panels.

2414.07.03 Distribution Cabinet Assemblies

2414.07.03.01 Cabinet Fabrication

Cabinets shall consist of self-supporting sheet aluminum cubicles and formed aluminum framework
welded to form open bottom cubicles. The cabinet shall be tamperproof according to CSA C22.2 No. 94.1
and CSA C22.2 No. 94.2. Eyebolts suitable for lifting the cabinet shall be attached to the formed
aluminum framework.

A minimum of three aluminum channels shall be mounted to the full height for the back side of the
cabinet. Channels shall be welded to the aluminum sheeting and framework and may form part of the
structural framework.

2414.07.03.02 Backplates

Aluminum backplates shall be installed for mounting of electrical components. Backplates shall be
securely bolted to the aluminum channels using bolts through the channels with the heads tack-welded to
the channels. Backplates shall be sized so that the total weight of the backplate plus electrical
components does not exceed 70 kg.

Aluminum backplates shall be finished with fire-rated paint and provided with isolating means to minimize
galvanic action between the backplates and the steel electrical components.

2414.07.03.03 Doors

Doors shall be according to CSA C227.5.

Doors shall be lapping and reinforced for strength and rigidity. Each door shall consist of:

a) An inside mounted, continuous, piano-type stainless steel hinge.

b) Two latching mechanisms to hold the door open at 90° and 150-180°, one at the top and one at the
bottom.

November 2019 Page 7 of 12 [Link] 2414

c) A copper or stainless steel flexible flat braid jumper connected between the door and the cabinet by
means of welded studs.

d) A stainless steel padlocking provision.

e) A stainless steel three-point padlocking handle with a nylon roller wheel complete with bearing.

f) Tamperproof stainless steel mounting hardware accessible from the inside.

g) A door handle that travels and stops below the keyhole with minimum 25 mm clearance and rotates
90° pointing straight down for the closed position and pointing horizontally for the open position.

h) Screened, vermin proof, and tamperproof louvres to give ventilation as required. All louvres shall be
equipped with racks and 305 x 406 x 25 mm metal reusable filters.

2414.07.03.04 Welding

All welding shall be according to CSA W59.2. Welding on aluminum shall be done by the gas metal arc
process.

2414.07.03.05 Cabinet Finish

Exterior and interior components of the cabinet shall have a natural aluminum finish with all welds and
scratches ground smooth. Cabinets with scratches more than 0.5 mm wide, 0.5 mm deep, or 150 mm
long shall not be accepted.

2414.07.03.06 Bonding and Grounding of Electrical Equipment

All non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical equipment shall be bonded according to
CSA C22.2 No. 0.4.

2414.07.03.07 Spare Parts

Each cabinet shall include one set of contacts, packaged and identified for each contactor, and one set of
fuses for each switch. A 450 x 150 x 150 mm spare part box shall be fabricated from sheet aluminum and
mounted in a location inside the cabinet.

2414.07.03.08 Metering

Distribution assemblies shall have meter sockets acceptable to the power supply authority and mounted
on a removable backplate in the metering cabinet cubicle.

2414.07.03.09 Warning Signs

Warning signs shall be as specified in the Contract Documents and be prominently displayed on the
outside of each exterior door.

2414.07.03.10 Ground Bus

A continuous copper ground bus and ground connectors shall be installed in the distribution assembly
according to CSA C227.5. The ground bus shall have four connectors suitable for #2/0 AWG cables in the
lighting and services compartment, four connectors suitable for #6 AWG cables in the cubicle and
extension cabinet assembly, and one connector suitable for #2/0 AWG cable in the metering cubicle for
field connections.

November 2019 Page 8 of 12 [Link] 2414

2414.07.03.11 Electrical Components

The electrical components shall be as shown in Table 1.

2414.[Link] Installation of Electrical Components

Component arrangements shown on the Contract Documents are indicative of the general requirements
and adjustments that may be made to component locations to suit different sizes of enclosures and
regulations or physical requirements regarding spacing of enclosures.

Wiring shall be installed in flexible non-metallic liquid-tight conduit, rigid metal conduit, or electrical
metallic tubing between enclosures.

2414.[Link] Nameplates for Electrical Components

The following nameplates shall be engraved lamacoid nameplates with 6 mm high, 1.5 mm stroke width
black letters on yellow background fastened with stainless steel or aluminum pop rivets on the identified
equipment for identification:

a) To the main feed switch for distribution assemblies:

NOTICE

READ BEFORE OPERATING

Advanced Traffic Management Systems are 24 hour operational and must remain ON unless
necessary to de-energize for safety reasons.

b) To the 600 V utility disconnect:

NOTICE

This breaker controls the feeder to the 120/240 V utility panel. Some circuits are 24 hour
operational and must remain ON unless necessary to de-energize for safety reasons.

All other nameplates shall be engraved lamacoid with black letters on white background.

2414.[Link] Panelboard Schedules

A printed schedule for each panelboard shall be provided indicating equipment served and a description
of circuit breaker sizes for each panel as specified in the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be
mounted on cardboard, inserted in a clear plastic bag, and hung on the inside of the main door panel.

2414.07.04 Markings

Markings shall be engraved on a stainless steel plate permanently attached with stainless steel or
aluminum pop rivets to the outside of the door and located in a highly visible location. Each power supply
equipment shall have identification markings showing the following:

a) Assembly manufacturer’s name or trademark.

November 2019 Page 9 of 12 [Link] 2414

b) Enclosure manufacturer’s name or trademark.

c) Standard designation OPSS 2414.

d) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

e) kVA rating (distribution assembly only).

f) Total weight.

The manufacturer shall attach the label SERVICE ENTRANCE READY on the dead front panel of the
supply control cabinet assembly.

2414.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2414.08.01 Inspection

The Contract Administrator shall be notified a minimum of three Business Days prior to the start of
fabrication for the power supply equipment.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place of manufacture of the power supply
equipment for the purpose of inspecting and examining plant records and certificates; materials used;
process of manufacturing, including welding and galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be
considered necessary, while the power supply equipment is being fabricated.

The Contract Administrator and ESA shall be notified when the power supply equipment is ready for
inspection.

All power supply equipment may be subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to
shipment.

2414.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2414.09.01 Packaging and Shipment

The supplier shall provide four copies of Working Drawings when required by the Owner. Working
Drawings shall include all detailed dimensions and a complete list of component materials and
accessories.

The supplier is responsible for loading, delivery, and off-loading of power supply equipment to designated
areas. Power supply equipment shall be subject to inspection during and on completion of off-loading. If
any damage to the power supply equipment is encountered during the inspection, the supplier shall be
responsible for the necessary corrective measures, which are subject to the approval of the Owner.

The supplier shall advise the Owner three Business Days prior to the shipping date of the intent to deliver
and confirm that arrangements for off-loading has been made.

November 2019 Page 10 of 12 [Link] 2414

2414.09.02 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of power supply equipment delivered
and accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of the power supply
equipment delivered to the destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed by the Owner, shall be included in the price.

November 2019 Page 11 of 12 [Link] 2414

 TABLE 1
Electrical Components for Distribution Cabinet Assemblies

Electrical Components Quantity

Service entrance disconnect - 600 V, 3-pole, fusible complete with three HRC1 Class R
1
time delay fuses. Fuse holders and distribution blocks suitable for service cable.
Main feed switch - 600 V, 400 A, 3-pole, non-fusible switch complete with terminals
1
suitable for service cable.
Lighting system disconnect - 600 V, 225 A, 3-pole, 4-wire, solid neutral complete with
1
terminals suitable for lighting system feed cable.
Utility disconnect - 600 V, 30 A, 2-pole. 1
Lighting contactor - 600 V, 200 A, 3-pole, 120 V coil electrically operated, electrically
1
held.
Lighting system panelboard - 600 V, 225 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, solid neutral, surface
1
mount, enclosed, suitable for 48 branch circuits, 30 A, 1-pole, bolt-on type breakers.
Utility panelboard - 240 V, 3-wire, single phase, 100 A, surface mount, enclosed,
1
suitable for 15 A, 1-pole, bolt-on type breakers.
Advanced Traffic Management System combination panelboard - 347/600 V, 225 A,
3-phase, 4-wire, solid neutral, surface mount, enclosed, suitable for 48 branch circuits, 1
breakers suitable for load.
Relamp switch - 125 V, 15 A, 1-pole, toggle type, mounted in a utility box with steel
1
cover.
Light switch - 125 V, 15 A, 1-pole, toggle type mounted in a utility box with steel cover. 1
GFCI receptacle - 125 V, 15 A, mounted in a utility box with steel cover. 1
Main splitter - 600 V, 400 A, 4-wire, surface mounted. 1
Incandescent lighting luminaire - 125 V, 150 W, wall-mounted type, enclosed, complete
1
with gasket and clear glass globe.
Secondary lightning arrestor - 650 V, 3-pole, thyrite type, mounted on each load panel. 3
Dry type transformer -120/240/600 V, 15 KVA, 60 Hz, single phase. 1

November 2019 Page 12 of 12 [Link] 2414

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2420
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2018
(Formerly OPSS 2420, Nov 2010)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 2420 COMMON, November 2010 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

WOODEN POLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2420.01 SCOPE

2420.02 REFERENCES

2420.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2420.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2420.05 MATERIALS

2420.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2420.07 PRODUCTION

2420.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2420.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for wooden poles and reinforcing stubs.

2420.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

O15-15 Wood Utility Poles and Reinforcing Stubs

O80 Series-15 Wood Preservation

2420.05 MATERIALS

2420.05.01 Wood Species

Wood species of poles and reinforcing stubs shall be western red cedar, red pine, jack pine, lodgepole
pine, and southern yellow pine (i.e., long leaf, short leaf, loblolly, and slash).

November 2018 Page 1 of 3 [Link] 2420

2420.05.02 Quality of Poles before Treatment

Physical properties of western red cedar, red pine, jack pine, lodgepole pine, and southern yellow pine
shall be according to CAN/CSA O15.

2420.05.03 Dimensions

Pole dimensions shall be according to CAN/CSA O15.

Pole class and length shall be as specified in the Contract Documents and the Pole Substitution
subsection.

2420.05.04 Pole Substitution

If a pole of the desired class and length is not available, a pole of equal or greater ground line
circumference may be substituted, provided any excess length is cut from the top.

2420.05.05 Preservatives

Preservatives shall be according to CAN/CSA O80 Series.

2420.07 PRODUCTION

2420.07.01 Preservation Treatment

2420.07.01.01 Preparation of Poles

Preparation of poles and reinforcing stubs for the preservative treatment shall be according to
CAN/CSA O80 Series.

2420.07.01.02 Preservation Options

Western red cedar shall be butt treated according to CAN/CSA O80 Series to a length that brings the
treatment to 300 mm above the ground line.

Red pine, jack pine, lodgepole pine, and southern yellow pine shall be full length treated according to
CAN/CSA O80 Series.

2420.07.01.03 Preservative Retention

Penetration of the preservative shall be according to CAN/CSA O80 Series.

2420.07.02 Marking

Each pole shall have identification marking located 3 m from the butt of the pole. Poles shall be legibly
and permanently marked with the following information in letters a minimum of 16 mm high:

a) Class and length.

b) Species.

c) Manufacturer identification.

d) Year in which pole was treated (i.e., yyyy).

November 2018 Page 2 of 3 [Link] 2420

2420.07.03 Shipping

The Contractor shall advise the Owner of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2420.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2420.08.01 Inspection

All work is subject to an inspection by the Owner’s representative prior to shipment.

The supplier shall notify the Owner of the date that the fabrication of the poles is to commence.

The Owner’s representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records and certificates, the materials used, the fabrication process, and
to make any tests as may be considered necessary, while work on the poles is being performed.

November 2018 Page 3 of 3 [Link] 2420

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2421
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 2421, November 2012)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 2421 COMMON, November 2012 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SPUN CONCRETE POLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2421.01 SCOPE

2421.02 REFERENCES

2421.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2421.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2421.05 MATERIALS

2421.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2421.07 PRODUCTION

2421.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2421.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for round spun concrete poles, maximum 21.3 metres in
length.

2421.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1301 Cementing Materials

OPSS 1302 Water
OPSS 1303 Admixtures for Concrete

CSA Standards

A14-07 Concrete Poles

A3001-08 Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete
G30.18-09 Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

November 2017 Page 1 of 5 [Link] 2421

2421.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2421.04.01 Design Requirements

2421.04.01.01 General

All poles shall be of proper class according to CAN/CSA A14 and the Contract Documents.

If poles are not specified by class, the Owner shall provide the manufacturer with the load that the poles
must resist and other sufficient information to allow the producer to determine the loads.

Extra stiff poles shall be manufactured according to CAN/CSA A14.

2421.04.02 Submission Requirements

2421.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of concrete poles.

Three (3) sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior
to the commencement of fabrication of the concrete poles for information purposes only. Prior to making
a submission, the seals and signatures of a design Engineer and a design-checking Engineer shall be
affixed on the Working Drawings verifying that the Working Drawings are consistent with the Contract
Documents.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and the design or
design-checking Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the
work, the drawing shall be sealed and signed by as many additional design and design-check Engineers
as necessary.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensions.

b) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

c) Equipment and hardware layout.

d) Pole weight.

e) List of hardware items.

f) Nameplate details.

2421.04.02.02 Certification

A certificate signed by the manufacturer’s Engineer stating that all steel and cementing materials used in
the production of spun concrete poles supplied meet the requirements of this specification shall be
submitted with the Working Drawings.

November 2017 Page 2 of 5 [Link] 2421

2421.05 MATERIALS

2421.05.01 Cementing Materials

Cementing materials shall be according to OPSS 1301 and CAN/CSA A3001.

Silica fume or blended cement containing silica fume shall not be used.

2421.05.02 Water

Water used in the production of spun concrete poles shall be according to OPSS 1302.

2421.05.03 Air Entraining, Chemical, and Superplasticizing Admixtures

Air entraining, chemical, and superplasticizing admixtures shall be according to OPSS 1303. Relative
density and pH of air entraining admixtures and non-volatile content and relative density of chemical and
superplasticizing admixtures shall be within tolerances stated in OPSS 1303, and to the requirements
shown in the MTO’s pre-qualified products list or, when specified in the Contract Documents, the Owner’s
pre-qualified products list.

2421.05.04 Reinforcement

When mill test certificates originate from a mill outside of Canada or the United States of America, the
Contractor shall have the information on the mill test certificate verified by testing by a Canadian
laboratory. This laboratory shall be accredited by the Standards Council of Canada to comply with the
requirements of ISO/IEC DIS 17025 for the specific tests or types of tests required by the material
standard specified on the mill test certificate. The mill test certificates shall be stamped with the name of
the Canadian laboratory and appropriate wording stating that the material is in accordance with the
specified Contract requirements. The stamp shall include the appropriate material specification number,
testing date, and the signature of an authorized officer of the Canadian laboratory.

2421.05.04.01 Non-Prestressed Longitudinal Reinforcing Steel

Non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcing steel shall be according to CAN/CSA A14 and shall be weldable
according to CSA G30.18.

2421.05.04.02 Prestressed Longitudinal Reinforcing Steel and Helical Reinforcement

Prestressed longitudinal reinforcing steel and helical reinforcement shall be according to CAN/CSA A14.

2421.05.05 Apertures and Handholes

Apertures and handholes shall be according to CAN/CSA A14 and the Contract Documents.

2421.07 PRODUCTION

2421.07.01 General

Dimensions and class of the pole shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Concrete for poles shall be placed monolithically.

The pole top shall have a smooth finish plane at right angles to the axis of the pole.

November 2017 Page 3 of 5 [Link] 2421

Apertures in poles shall be of a size and if necessary shall be locally reinforced or framed so that the
required bending capacity at the aperture is sustained.

Apertures shall have a smooth inside finish without sharp corners.

The handhole cover plate shall be formed to suit the contour of the pole.

2421.07.02 Concrete

Concrete shall be produced to meet the compressive strength as specified in CAN/CSA A14.

Sufficient cylinders shall be cast to verify the 28-Day compressive strength of the poles supplied to the
Contract. Compressive strength testing shall be according to CAN/CSA A14.

Concrete shall be tested according to the frequency and requirements of CAN/CSA A14.

2421.07.03 Grounding

A stranded #6 AWG bare copper grounding conductor shall be attached to the non-prestressed
longitudinal reinforcing steel rod brazed to the zinc cast handhole frame with a 13 mm standard lug.

2421.07.04 Marking

Each pole shall have the following identification markings located approximately 100 mm above the top of
the handhole:

a) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.

b) Year of manufacture.

c) Overall length.

d) Class identification number.

e) Prestressed poles shall be marked and identified by the letter P.

These markings shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

The pole shall have the pick-up point or points for unloading purposes marked with black tape around the
complete circumference.

2421.07.05 Packaging and Shipping

Each pole shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are delivered
as an entity.

The Owner shall be notified of the shipping date a minimum of 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2421.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2421.08.01 General

All work is subject to an inspection by the Owner's representative prior to shipment.

Poles not meeting the requirements of this specification shall be rejected by the Owner.

November 2017 Page 4 of 5 [Link] 2421

The Owner shall be notified a minimum of 1 Business Day in advance of the date that the fabrication of
the poles is to commence.

The Owner's representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of inspecting
and examining plant records; certificates; materials used; fabrication process, including welding and
galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be considered necessary, while the poles are being
fabricated.

The manufacturer’s Engineer shall provide a stamped certification that the poles supplied to the Work
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and the requirements of CAN/CSA A14.

2421.08.02 Acceptance or Rejection

2421.08.02.01 Structural Testing

Acceptance shall be according to a stamped certification by the manufacturer’s Engineer that ongoing
testing has been performed and evaluated according to CAN/CSA A14 and that the most recent two tests
for classification, torsion, and transverse testing meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and
the requirements of CAN/CSA A14. All required supporting test data and certificates shall be less than 12
months old at the time of submission.

2421.08.02.02 Marking

Markings not meeting the requirements of the Marking subsection shall be rejected by the Owner.

November 2017 Page 5 of 5 [Link] 2421

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 2422
SPECIFICATION November 2016

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

HEAVY CLASS STEEL AND
SECTIONAL STEEL POLES, BASE MOUNTED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2422.01 SCOPE

2422.02 REFERENCES

2422.03 DEFINITIONS

2422.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2422.05 MATERIALS

2422.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2422.07 PRODUCTION

2422.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2422.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

APPENDICES

Appendix 2422-A Commentary

2422.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for base mounted galvanized heavy class steel and sectional
steel poles 6.0, 7.5, 9.0, and 10.50 metres in height.

2422.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

2422.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

2422.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual

CSA Standards

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural
Quality Steel
G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
S6-14 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
W59-13 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

LTS-5-M Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic
th
Signals, 5 Edition, Interim Revisions (2010)

2422.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Product Drawings means drawings prepared by the manufacturer that have been approved by the
Owner for use with the product.

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

2422.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2422.04.01 Design Requirements

All poles shall be designed to support the required traffic signal and lighting system components and shall
be according to CSA S6 and MTO Structural Manual. All poles shall be according to CSA S6 and
AASHTO LTS-5-M for fatigue requirements, AASHTO Fatigue Importance Category 2.

2422.04.01.01 Wind Loading

Wind loading shall be based on the maximum wind pressure for Ontario according to CSA S6.

2422.04.01.02 Ice Loading

Ice loading shall be based on the maximum ice loading for Ontario according to CSA S6.

2422.04.01.03 Geometric Parameters

Latitude of design and fabrication details is at the discretion of the supplier and is subject to approval of the
design by the Owner.

2422.04.01.04 Supported Load Parameters

Design calculations shall employ force and dimensions for various items of equipment to be mounted on the
poles as shown in Table 1.

2422.04.01.05 Heavy Class Steel and Sectional Steel Pole

Heavy class steel and sectional steel poles used for traffic signal or combination traffic signal and lighting
system shall be capable of bearing the loads associated with configurations shown in Table 2.

2422.04.01.06 Location of Equipment

Mast arms shall be to be solidly attached to the pole at a height above the pole base plate as given by:

HA = 5,650 mm - H

where: HA = mast arm height above the pole base plate

H = mast arm height from Table 1

Where more than one mast arm is considered, the shorter arm shall be attached to the pole at a point
300 mm above that of the longer arm.

Pedestrian heads shall be mounted at a height of 2,750 mm above the pole base plate.

Luminaire brackets shall be mounted at a point 150 mm from the top of the pole.

2422.04.02 Submission Requirements

2422.04.02.01 Product Drawings

The heavy class steel and sectional steel pole manufacturer shall submit the product drawings and the
design assumptions and calculations for the poles to the Contract Administrator.

As a minimum, the product drawings shall include the following information:

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

a) Material properties and standards.

b) Dimensions.

c) Hardware requirements.

d) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

e) Anchor bolt locations.

f) Welds.

g) Joining method for heavy class steel poles sections.

The product drawings and calculations shall bear the seals and signatures of the design and design-
checking Engineers.

2422.04.02.02 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of heavy class steel and sectional steel poles.

Three sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to
the commencement of fabrication of the heavy class steel and sectional steel poles for information
purposes only. An Engineer shall affix his or her seal and signature on the Working Drawings verifying
that the Working Drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and a single Engineer
is unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be signed
and sealed by as many additional Engineers as necessary.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensions.

b) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

c) Equipment layout.

d) Anchor bolt locations.

e) Exact pole weight.

f) Detailed bill of materials.

g) Details of equipment nameplates.

A copy of the Working Drawings shall be retained at the fabricator’s plant during and after the heavy class
steel and sectional steel pole fabrication.

2422.05 MATERIALS

2422.05.01 General

All steel used in the production of poles shall be according to CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300WT, for pole
shafts, base plates, and gussets.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

All galvanized steel shall be according to CSA G164.

All welding shall be according to CSA W59.

2422.07 PRODUCTION

2422.07.01 General

General requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

All welds, except for fillet welds, shall be ground smooth.

The pole base plate for any height of pole shall be made with mounting holes suitable for the anchor rod
or anchorage assembly. The pole base plate shall be reinforced with four welded gussets equally spaced
around the pole or with a welded collar or combination of both welded collar and gussets.

The underside of the anchor base shall be true, distortion free, and perpendicular to the centreline of the
pole shaft after fabrication.

A waterproof, removable galvanized steel top cap shall be furnished with the pole. The cap shall blend with
the general pole design to present a neat overall appearance. The cap shall be rigidly secured to the top of
the pole by a hexagonal head stainless steel set screw.

Wiring apertures at the bracket mounting level and at the handhole shall be accurately positioned on the
pole. The wiring apertures shall provide a smooth cable entrance.

For lighting applications, a wiring aperture, complete with rubber grommet, shall be provided.

Handholes, complete with covers, shall be reinforced with a steel handhole frame of such strength and
cross-section that the strength of the pole is not reduced.

2422.07.02 Heavy Class Steel Poles

The poles, as specified in the Contract Documents, shall be round or octagonal in cross-section and shall
taper uniformly inwards from the base for the height of the pole.

Poles shall have one or two longitudinal automatically electrically welded joints from top to bottom.

The maximum permitted number of circumferential (transverse) welded joints shall be as shown in Table 3.

The pole sections shall be joined by an electrical weld before galvanizing.

Sweep shall not exceed 3.2 mm per 4.57 m, and the overall sweep shall not be greater than:

(Pole height (m)/4.57 m) x 3.2 mm

In all cases, the base shall telescope the butt end of the pole and be secured with one continuous weld on
the inside of the base at the end of the pole and another continuous weld on the outside at the top of the
base. All welding at base shall be made in such a manner as to ensure that the welded connection shall
develop the same strength of the adjacent pole section to resist any bending action.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

2422.07.03 Heavy Class Sectional Steel Poles

The pole sections shall be of round tapered construction so that a number of sections may be assembled by
means of an overlapping press fit to form a tapered steel pole of the height specified in the Contract
Documents.

Each section shall have one longitudinal automatically electrically welded joint from top to bottom.

Each section shall be stencilled with O-L (nominal overlap requirement) and graduations in one-inch
increments.

2422.07.04 Ground Bar

A ground bar with a bronze ground connector suitable for No. 6 AWG wire shall be welded to the inside of
each pole. The bronze ground connector shall be attached to the ground bar before shipment.

2422.07.05 Marking

Each pole shall have identification marking located approximately 300 mm above the top of the handhole
showing the following:

a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.

b) Height of pole.

c) Gauge of steel.

d) Bolt circle diameter.

e) Designation OPSS 2422.

f) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

This marking shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

2422.07.06 Packaging and Shipping

Each pole shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are delivered
as an entity.

The Contract Administrator shall be notified of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2422.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2422.08.01 Inspection

All work is subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

The supplier shall notify the Contract Administrator of the date that the fabrication of the poles is to
commence.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place of fabrication of the poles for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records and certificates while work on the poles is being performed;
materials used; process of fabrication, including welding and galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be
considered necessary.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

2422.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2422.09.01 Working Drawings

Within 30 Days of receipt of a purchasing order to supply heavy class steel and sectional steel poles, the
supplier shall submit 4 copies of pole Working Drawings, as described in the Submission Requirements
subsection, to the Owner, for approval.

Working Drawings shall be given final approval by the Owner, if found to be acceptable, or shall be
marked with deficiencies, if unacceptable.

Unacceptable drawings shall be returned to the supplier for correction. The supplier shall resubmit
4 copies of corrected Working Drawings within 14 Days. When the resubmitted drawings are acceptable
to the Owner, they shall be given final approval.

One copy of the final approved drawings shall be returned to the supplier along with written notification to
commence fabrication. Within 14 Days of receipt of the notification to commence fabrication, the supplier
shall submit 4 copies of all final approved Working Drawings to the Owner.

Fabrication of the equipment shall not commence until the supplier has received final approved Working
Drawings and written notification to commence fabrication from the Owner. All fabrication shall conform to
the dimensions indicated on the final approved Working Drawings.

The supplier shall advise the Owner of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2422.09.02 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of heavy class steel and sectional steel
poles supplied and accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of the heavy class steel and
sectional steel poles delivered to the destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed by the Owner, shall be included in the price.

Page 7 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

 TABLE 1
Supported Load Parameters
Projected
Item of Equipment Dimensions Area Weight
mm m² N
Roadway Lighting Luminaire (Ovuloid) 990 L x 380 H 0.22 107
Roadway Lighting Bracket (Aluminum) 2400 L x 1200 H (tapered) 0.15 112
Double Arm Brackets (Aluminum) 400 L x 42 Dia. (2 per set) 0.04 24
Mast Arm (Aluminum) 610 L x 250 H (tapered) 0.04 78
1200 L x 530 H (tapered) 0.10 91
1800 L x 610 H (tapered) 0.15 114
2400 L x 840 H (tapered) 0.19 65
3000 L x 610 H (tapered) 0.23 94
3600 L x 840 H (tapered) 0.38 113
4600 L x 1070 H (tapered) 0.47 216
5500 L x 910 H (tapered) 0.70 324
6100 L x 1070 H (tapered) 0.79 307
6700 L x 1150 H (tapered) 0.85 354
7600 L x 1140 H (tapered) 1.10 504
Traffic Signal Heads (Aluminum: 4-Section) 1650 H x 610 W 1.01 123
Pedestrian Heads (Aluminum: 2-Section) 690 H x 345 W 0.23 78
Traffic Signs Varies: see Table 2 1.50 23

TABLE 2
Heavy Class Steel and Sectional Steel Pole Configurations
Maximum Number of
Pole Luminaire Longest Mast Mast Arm Pedestrian
Height and Bracket Arm with Head Total Length Heads Traffic Signs
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3)
2
m set m m m
10.5 1 7.6 13.1 2 0.75
9.0 1 7.6 13.1 2 0.75
7.5 1 7.6 13.1 2 0.75
6.0 0 7.6 13.1 2 0.75
Notes:

1. Mast arm total length applies to the sum of the lengths of two mast arms at 90-degree
orientation.

2. Two pedestrian heads at 90-degree orientation include a set of double arm brackets for each.
2
3. Traffic signs shall be split to give 0.25 m mounted on the mast arm beside the signal head and
2
0.5 m mounted at 2.75 m height above the pole base plate.

Page 8 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

 TABLE 3
Circumferential Welded Joints
Pole Height Maximum Number
m of Welds
6.0 1

7.5 1

9.0 1

10.5 2

Page 9 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

Appendix 2422-A: November 2016
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer,

during the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract.
This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations
discussed in this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s
design decisions and methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 10 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2422

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 2423
SPECIFICATION April 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

STEEL POLES, BASE MOUNTED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2423.01 SCOPE

2423.02 REFERENCES

2423.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2423.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2423.05 MATERIALS

2423.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2423.07 PRODUCTION

2423.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2423.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL – Not Used

APPENDICES Not Used

2423.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for base mounted galvanized steel poles maximum 15.1 m in
length.

2423.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

2423.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.
Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract
Documents as the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract
requirements and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices.
Depending on these considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available
appendices.

2423.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is
a provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this
specification to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-
oriented specification, the references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a
municipal-oriented specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel / Structural
Quality Steel
W59-13 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

ASTM International

A123 / A123M-15 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products

2423.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2423.04.01 Submission Requirements

2423.04.01.01 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of steel poles.

Three (3) sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior
to commencement of fabrication of the steel poles, for information purposes only. Prior to making a
submission, the seals and signatures of a design Engineer and a design-checking Engineer shall be
affixed on the Working Drawings verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and the design or
design-checking Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

work, the drawing shall be sealed and signed by as many additional design and design-checking
Engineers as necessary.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensions.

b) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

c) Equipment layout.

d) Anchor bolt locations.

e) Exact pole weight.

f) Detailed bill of materials.

g) Details of equipment nameplates.

2423.05 MATERIALS

2423.05.01 General

All steel used in the production of poles shall be according to CSA G40.21, grade 300W, for pole shafts,
and grade 300WT, for base plates and gussets.

All steel shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 123.

2423.07 PRODUCTION

2423.07.01 General

The length of the poles shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Shafts shall be round or octagonal in cross-section as specified in the Contract Documents and taper
uniformly inwards from the base for the length of the pole.

Shafts shall have one or two longitudinal automatically electrically welded joints from top to bottom.

All welding shall be according to CSA W59.

All welds, except for fillet welds, shall be ground smooth.

The maximum permitted number of circumferential welded joints shall be as shown in Table 1.

The pole sections shall be joined by an electrical weld.

After fabrication, the poles shall be galvanized.

Sweep shall not exceed 3.2 mm per 4.57 m, and the overall sweep shall not be greater than:

(Pole length (m) / 4.57 m) x 3.2 mm

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

The pole shall be supplied with a one-piece fabricated rolled steel base plate. The pole may be supplied
as specified in the Contract Documents with a one-piece fabricated rolled steel plate without gussets.

The base shall telescope the butt end of the shaft and be secured with one continuous weld on the inside
of the base at the end of the shaft and another continuous weld on the outside at the top of the base. All
welding at the base shall be made in such a manner that the welded connection develops the same
strength of the adjacent shaft section to resist any bending action.

After fabrication, the underside of the base plate shall be true, distortion free, and perpendicular to the
centreline of the pole shaft.

A removable galvanized steel or aluminum top cap shall be supplied with the shaft. The cap shall blend
with the general pole design to present an overall neat appearance. The cap shall be secured rigidly to
the shaft by a hexagonal head stainless steel set screw.

Wiring apertures at the bracket mounting level and at the handhole shall be accurately positioned on the
pole. Wiring apertures, complete with neoprene grommets, shall provide a smooth cable entrance.

Handholes shall be complete with covers and shall be reinforced with a steel handhole frame of such
strength and cross section that the strength of the shaft is not reduced.

2423.07.02 Mounting Plate for Grounding

The mounting plate for the grounding post shall be welded to the shaft in such a manner as to present a
smooth surface on the exterior of the shaft.

A mounting plate with a bronze split-bolt type ground connector suitable for No. 6 AWG wire shall be
welded to the inside of each pole. The bronze ground connector shall be attached to the mounting plate
prior to shipment.

2423.07.03 Marking

Each pole shall have the following identification markings located approximately 100 mm above the top of
the handhole:

a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.

b) Length.

c) Gauge of steel.

d) Bolt circle diameter.

e) Designation OPSS 2423.

f) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

These markings shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

2423.07.04 Packaging and Shipping

Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

Each pole shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are
delivered as an entity.

The grounding connector shall be assembled inside the pole prior to shipment.

The Owner shall be notified of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2423.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2423.08.01 Inspection

All work is subject to an inspection by the Owner's representative prior to shipment.

The Owner shall be notified a minimum of 1 Business Day in advance of the date that the fabrication of
the poles is to commence.

The Owner's representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of inspecting
and examining plant records; certificates; materials used; fabrication process, including welding and
galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be considered necessary, while the poles are being
fabricated.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

 TABLE 1
Circumferential Welded Joints

Pole Length
Maximum Number of Welds
m
6.0 1

7.5 1

9.0 1

10.5 2

12.0 2

13.6 2

15.1 3

Page 6 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2423

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2426
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

STEEL TRUSS BRACKETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2426.01 SCOPE

2426.02 REFERENCES

2426.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2426.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2426.05 MATERIALS

2426.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2426.07 PRODUCTION

2426.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2426.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for steel truss brackets for use with spun concrete poles and
metal poles and associated hardware.

2426.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G40.21-13 Structural Quality Steels

G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
W59-13 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

ASTM International

A 53/A 53M-12 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

November 2017 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 2426

2426.05 MATERIALS

2426.05.01 Brackets

Brackets shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe and according to ASTM A 53, Grade B.

2426.05.02 Steel Bracket Clamp Plates

Steel shall be according to CSA G40.21, Grade 38WT.

2426.07 PRODUCTION

2426.07.01 General

Steel truss brackets shall be fabricated according to the Contract Documents.

All welding shall be continuous and according to CSA W59.

When fabricating the steel truss bracket, the manufacturer shall make provision between members to
ensure good internal flow and adequate drainage during the process of hot dip galvanizing the assembled
steel truss bracket. Hot dip galvanizing shall be according to CAN/CSA G164.

Galvanized steel bracket mounting plates shall be supplied complete with stainless steel hardware and
two fabricated galvanized steel bracket clamp plates according to the Contract Documents.

A galvanized steel or aluminum end cap shall be fastened on the end of the lower member.

2426.07.02 Marking

Each steel truss bracket shall have identification markings in a visible location indicating the following:

a) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.

b) Bracket length.

c) Date of manufacture.

d) Designation OPSS 2426.

Identification markings shall be embossed on the steel truss bracket or on a corrosion-resistant metal
plate securely attached to the steel truss bracket.

2426.07.03 Packaging and Shipment

Each steel truss bracket shall be shipped complete with mounting hardware, suitably packaged to ensure
that all parts are delivered as a complete unit. A complete parts list shall be included in the shipment.

2426.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2426.08.01 Inspection

All steel truss brackets are subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

November 2017 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 2426

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2428
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ALUMINUM TAPERED ELLIPTICAL BRACKETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2428.01 SCOPE

2428.02 REFERENCES

2428.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2428.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2428.05 MATERIALS

2428.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2428.07 PRODUCTION

2428.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2428.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for aluminum tapered elliptical brackets and associated
hardware.

2428.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

W59.2-M1991 (R2013) Welded Aluminum Construction

ASTM International

B 221-14 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

2428.05 MATERIALS

2428.05.01 Aluminum Alloy

Aluminum alloy shall be according to ASTM B 221, Type 6063-T6.

November 2017 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 2428

2428.07 PRODUCTION

2428.07.01 General

All welding shall be continuous and according to CSA W59.2.

Brackets shall be fabricated according to the Contract Documents.

2428.07.02 Marking

A permanent label shall be attached to the tapered elliptical bracket in a visible location indicating the
following:

a) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.

b) Bracket length.

c) Date of manufacture.

d) Designation OPSS 2428.

2428.07.03 Packaging and Shipment

Each tapered elliptical bracket shall be shipped complete with mounting hardware, suitably packaged to
ensure that all parts are delivered as a complete unit. A complete parts list shall be included in the
shipment.

2428.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2428.08.01 Inspection

All tapered elliptical brackets may be subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to
shipment.

November 2017 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 2428

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2432
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 2432, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 2432 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LUMINAIRES FOR HIGHWAY LIGHTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2432.01 SCOPE

2432.02 REFERENCES

2432.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2432.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2432.05 MATERIALS

2432.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2432.07 PRODUCTION

2432.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2432.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for highway lighting luminaires with integral ballasts for use in
conventional and high mast lighting.

2432.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 9.0-96 (R2011) General Requirements for Luminaires

C653-13 Photometric Performance of Roadway and Street Lighting Luminaires
C811-13 Performance of Highmast Luminaires for Roadway Lighting
C863-11 Energy Efficiency of High-Intensity Discharge (HID) and Low-Pressure
Sodium (LPS) Lamp Ballasts

November 2017 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 2432

2432.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2432.04.01 Design Requirements

2432.04.01.01 Photometric Requirements

As a minimum, the photometric performance of the luminaires for conventional lighting shall be according
to CSA C653.

As a minimum, the photometric performance of the luminaires for high mast lighting shall be according to
CSA C811.

Photometric test results shall be provided for the luminaires supplied and shall include the following data:

a) Isolux curves and mounting height correction factors.

b) Utilization charts or graphs.

c) Candlepower distribution curves indicating peak intensity.

d) Luminous intensity tables to Illuminating Engineering Society format (I-tables).

e) Luminaire efficiency values.

f) Luminous outputs above and below horizontal.

g) Lamp lumen outputs and wattages.

2432.04.01.02 Electrical Requirements

All electrical components and assembled luminaires shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 9.0.

Ballasts, lamp sockets, ground connectors, internal wiring, and all other components shall be suitable for
the supply voltage as specified in the Contract Documents and the maximum temperature encountered in
totally enclosed outdoor weatherproof luminaires.

Ballasts shall be constant wattage auto-transformer or isolated secondary transformer type for grounded
systems. Auto-transformer type ballasts shall have a maximum tolerance of 12% variation in lamp
wattage for a 5% variation in line voltage. Isolated secondary transformer type ballasts shall have a
maximum tolerance of 12% variation in lamp wattage for a 10% variation in line voltage.

Ballasts shall be Class H, 180 °C insulation; 60 hertz; and low temperature, -35 °C with a power factor not
less than 0.90.

The minimum nominal secondary open circuit voltage of the ballast for various lamps shall be sufficient to
provide reliable starting at -35 °C.

Ballasts shall be suitable for the lamp’s nominal operating voltage. Terminal blocks shall be held rigidly
and shall provide a positive connection for terminating the field wiring.

The current crest factor of the ballast shall not exceed 1.8 for high pressure sodium lamps.

Energy efficiency of lamp ballasts shall be according to CAN/CSA C863.

November 2017 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 2432

2432.04.01.03 Mechanical Requirements

The luminaire shall be comprised of a cast aluminum ballast housing, spun or formed aluminum optical
housing with a glass lens or refractor, and stainless steel hardware.

The ballast housing shall form a watertight enclosure for the ballast components that shall be readily
interchangeable without removing the luminaire from the mounting bracket. The ballast housing shall be
either integral or modular design. If it is of modular design, it shall be attached to the housing using
stainless steel hardware.

Mounting arrangements shall consist of a slip fitter assembly for a 50 mm diameter internal pipe size
tenon. The slip fitter shall be secured using stainless steel hardware with an independent levelling
device. Adjustment of the luminaire in the vertical plane shall be 3 degrees minimum.

The lamp socket shall be a mogul type with a porcelain-enclosed, nickel-plated brass shell rated for
4,000 volts, and spring-loaded centre contact. The lamp holder shall have an electrically insulated lamp
stabilizer and shall hold the lamp's outer envelope to precise alignment with suitable means for vibration
damping.

The optical assembly shall consist of a precision formed specular aluminum reflector with an anodized
finish and accurately positioned within the luminaire outer housing. The assembly shall be sealed at the
top by a high temperature neoprene or silicone rubber gasket between the ballast casting and reflector
and at the bottom by a hinged door assembly.

Alternatively, the optical assembly shall consist of a pressed borosilicate glass reflector and refractor of
open ventilated design. The reflector shall have a smooth non-porous inner surface and be encased
within the luminaire outer housing. The refractor shall be attached to the reflector using stainless steel
hardware. The reflector or refractor assembly shall be readily removable without removing the luminaire
from the mounting bracket.

The door assembly shall consist of a gasketed doorframe and a clear tempered shock-resistant glass
lens and shall be attached to the reflector housing using stainless steel toggle latches, one of which shall
be hinged.

2432.04.02 Submission Requirements

2432.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Three copies of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum of 14
Days prior to the commencement of fabrication.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) All mechanical details, including dimensions, layouts, weights, and mounting arrangements for
components.

b) All electrical details, including wiring diagrams and component ratings.

c) All photometric information regarding the luminaires, including, but not limited to lamp position and
photometric data sheets.

d) Shield details.

e) Certification by an Engineer that the luminaires for conventional lighting comply with CSA C653.

f) Certification by an Engineer that the luminaires for high mast lighting comply with CSA C811.

November 2017 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 2432

Each Working Drawing shall be sealed and stamped by an Engineer certifying that the Working Drawings
comply with the Contract Documents.

One copy of the final accepted Working Drawings shall be returned to the supplier, along with written
notification to commence fabrication. Within 14 Days of receipt of notification to commence fabrication,
the supplier shall submit 3 copies of all final accepted Working Drawings to the Contract Administrator.

Fabrication of the equipment shall not commence until the Working Drawings have been accepted by the
Contract Administrator.

Once fabrication of the equipment has commenced, materials and dimensions shown on the final accepted
Working Drawings shall not be changed.

2432.05 MATERIALS

2432.05.01 Marking

A permanent label shall be attached to the interior of the luminaire indicating the manufacturer's name or
trademark, catalogue number, date of manufacture, and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
or Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) photometric classification and distribution type; the suitable
supply voltage and frequency; the lamp type; the lamp wattage; and the nominal operating voltage of the
lamp so that it is clearly visible during maintenance operations.

A label including a wiring diagram shall be attached to each ballast showing the ballast schematic wiring
diagram and shall be visible during maintenance operations.

For asymmetrical luminaires with adjustable optical systems, a permanent embossed identification mark
shall be located on the luminaire that is clearly visible and identifiable as an orientation mark.

2432.07 PRODUCTION

2432.07.01 Ballast Assemblies

Ballast assemblies shall be factory pre-wired with all connections clearly marked and identified.

2432.07.02 Lamp Socket Positions

The lamp socket position shall be pre-set at the factory for the specified distribution.

2432.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2432.08.01 Inspection

The supplier shall notify the Owner of the date that the fabrication of the luminaires is to commence.

The Owner’s representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records, certificates, materials used, fabrication process, and to make any
tests as may be considered necessary, while the luminaires are being fabricated.

All luminaires are subject to an inspection by the Owner’s representative prior to shipment.

November 2017 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 2432

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 2434
SPECIFICATION November 2016

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LUMINAIRES FOR UNDERPASS LIGHTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2434.01 SCOPE

2434.02 REFERENCES

2434.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2434.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2434.05 MATERIALS

2434.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2434.07 PRODUCTION

2434.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2434.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

APPENDICES

2434-A Commentary

2434.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for underpass luminaires with integral ballast for use with
70 to 400 watt high pressure sodium lamps.

2434.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the Ontario
Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

2434.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract Documents as
the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract requirements
and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices. Depending on these
considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available appendices.

2434.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is a
provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this specification
to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented specification is
specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-oriented specification, the
references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 89-15 Swimming-Pool Luminaires, Submersible Luminaires and Accessories

C863-16 Energy Efficiency of High-Intensity Discharge (HID) and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS)
Lamp Ballasts

ASTM International

B 117-11 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

D 1654-08 Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to
Corrosive Environments

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C136.31-2010 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

60598 (2014-05) Luminaires

62262 (2002-02) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Against External
Mechanical Impacts (IK code)

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

2434.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2434.04.01 Submission Requirements

2434.04.01.01 Working Drawings

Three copies of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum of 14 Days
prior to the commencement of fabrication.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) All mechanical details, including dimensions, layouts, weights, shield details, and mounting arrangements
for components.

b) All electrical details and certified test reports, including wiring diagrams and component ratings.

c) All photometric information and certified test reports regarding the luminaires, including, but not limited to
lamp position, photometric data sheets, and photometric test reports.

d) Certified Test Reports for UL/CSA listing, IP rating, IK rating, and ANSI C136.31 vibration.

2434.04.01.02 Photometric Test Results

Photometric test results for the luminaires supplied shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator and
include the following data:

a) Isolux curves and mounting height correction factors.

b) Utilization charts or graphs.

c) Candlepower distribution curves indicating peak intensity.

d) Luminous intensity tables to Illuminating Engineering Society format (I-tables).

e) Luminaire efficiency values.

f) Luminous outputs above and below horizontal.

g) Lamp lumen outputs and wattages.

2434.04.01.03 Luminaire Test Results

Certified test results for the luminaires supplied shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator and include
the following data:

a) UL/CSA Listing Report according to CSA C22.2 No. 89.

b) Minimum IP65 Rating according to IEC 60598.

c) Minimum IK08 Rating according to IEC 62262.

d) 1.5G Vibration Test Report according to ANSI C136.31.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

2434.05 MATERIALS

2434.05.01 Electrical Components

All electrical components and assembled luminaires shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 89.

Ballasts, lamp sockets, ground connectors, internal wiring, and all other components shall be suitable for the
supply voltage as specified in the Contract Documents and the maximum temperature encountered in totally
enclosed, outdoor, weatherproof luminaires.

Ballasts shall be constant wattage auto-transformer or isolated secondary transformer type for grounded
systems. Auto-transformer type ballasts shall have a maximum tolerance of 12% variation in lamp wattage for
a 5% variation in line voltage. Isolated secondary transformer type ballasts shall have a maximum tolerance
of 12% variation in lamp wattage for a 10% variation in line voltage.

Ballasts shall be Class H, 180 °C insulation; 60 hertz; and low temperature, -35 °C with a power factor not less
than 0.90.

The minimum nominal secondary open circuit voltage of the ballast for various lamps shall be sufficient to
provide reliable starting at -35 °C.

Ballasts shall be suitable for the lamp’s nominal operating voltage. Terminal blocks shall be held rigidly and
shall provide a positive connection for terminating the field wiring.

The current crest factor of the ballast shall not exceed 1.8 for high pressure sodium lamps.

Energy efficiency of lamp ballasts shall be according to CAN/CSA C863.

All wiring within fixture shall have a minimum temperature rating of 125 °C.

2434.05.02 Mechanical Components

The luminaire shall be comprised of a polycarbonate, aluminum, or stainless steel enclosure with a specular
reflector and a glass prismatic refractor. Enclosure shall meet a scribe creepage rating of 7 according to
ASTM D 1654, when tested for 5,000 hours according to ASTM B 117.

The luminaire shall be provided with a 20 mm threaded duct entry in each end of the enclosure and a cable
entry hole in the rear of the enclosure together with a suitable waterproof gasket.

The luminaire shall have continuous captive gasket between the door and enclosure and between the refractor
and the enclosure to provide a weatherproof seal.

All fixture hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel and shall be captive. Proper dielectric insulation shall be
provided between luminaire housing and fixture hardware of dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic reaction.

The luminaire shall be provided with a ground terminal or lug for a single conductor #12 AWG stranded copper
wire.

All unused cable and duct entry holes shall be plugged with approved filler caps.

The lamp socket shall be a porcelain-enclosed, nickel-plated brass shell rated for 4,000 volts, and spring-
loaded centre contact. The lamp holder shall have an electrically insulated lamp stabilizer and shall hold the
lamp's outer envelope to precise alignment with suitable means for vibration damping.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

The refractor shall be heat-resistant and non-discolouring, with high resistance to breakage from thermal
shock. It shall be securely attached to the housing by hinges and a safety device to hold it in the open
position.

The reflector shall be fabricated of polished, chemically brightened, anodized aluminum not subject to
distortion and shall be readily removable.

The luminaire shall be accessible with tool-less entry.

The luminaire shall not be subject to damage by vibration when closed and in the operating position.

2434.05.03 Marking

A permanent non-corrosive nameplate shall be attached to the exterior of the luminaire and located so that the
marking is clearly visible after installation. The nameplate shall indicate the manufacturer’s name or
trademark, catalogue number, lamp wattage, and nominal voltage.

A permanent label shall be attached to the interior of the luminaire indicating the manufacturer's name or
trademark, catalogue number, date of manufacture, and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) photometric classification and distribution type; the suitable supply
voltage and frequency; the lamp type; the lamp wattage; and the nominal operating voltage of the lamp so that
it is clearly visible during maintenance operations.

A label including a wiring diagram shall be attached to each ballast showing the ballast schematic wiring
diagram and shall be visible during maintenance operations.

For asymmetrical luminaires with adjustable optical systems, a permanent embossed identification mark shall
be located on the luminaire that is clearly visible and identifiable as an orientation mark.

2434.07 PRODUCTION

2434.07.01 Ballast Assemblies

Ballast assemblies shall be factory pre-wired with all connections clearly marked and identified.

2434.07.02 Lamp Socket Positions

The lamp socket position shall be pre-set and legibly marked at the factory for the specified distribution.

2434.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2434.08.01 Inspection

The supplier shall notify the Contract Administrator of the date that the fabrication of the luminaires is to
commence.

The Contract Administrator shall have access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of inspecting and
examining plant records, certificates, materials used, fabrication process, and to make any tests as may be
considered necessary, while the work is being performed.

All luminaires are subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

2434.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2434.09.01 Packaging and Shipment

The supplier shall provide 3 copies of the luminaire ballast engineering data and shielding data such as
material type, gauge thickness, and mounting arrangement to the Owner.

Each luminaire shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are
delivered as an entity. A complete parts list shall be included in the shipment. All cartons shall be marked
with the ANSI or IES luminaire classification and distribution types.

The supplier is responsible for loading, delivery, and off-loading of luminaires to designated areas. Luminaires
shall be subject to inspection during and on completion of off-loading. If any damage to the luminaires is
encountered during the inspection, the supplier shall be responsible for the necessary corrective measures
subject to the approval of the Owner.

The supplier shall advise the Owner 3 Working Days prior to the shipping date of the intent to deliver and
confirm that arrangements for off-loading have been made.

2434.09.02 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of the underpass luminaires delivered and
accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be full compensation for the supply and delivery of
the underpass lighting luminaires to the destination at the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner's laboratory, shall be included in the price.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

Appendix D 2434-A, November 2016
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer, during
the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract. This
appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations discussed in
this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s design decisions and
methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 7 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434

Page 8 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2434
 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2452
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2018
(Formerly OPSS 2452, Nov 2010)

Note: The PROV published in November 2018 replaces OPSS 2452 COMMON, November 2010 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ALUMINUM POLES, BASE MOUNTED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2452.01 SCOPE

2452.02 REFERENCES

2452.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2452.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2452.05 MATERIALS

2452.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2452.07 PRODUCTION

2452.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2452.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for base mounted aluminum poles maximum 15.1 m in length
with cast shoe bases.

2452.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

W47.2-2011 (R2015) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum

ASTM International

B 221M-13 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wires, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)
B 108/B108M-18e1 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

November 2018 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 2452

2452.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2452.04.01 Submission Requirements

2452.04.01.01 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of aluminum poles.

Three sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to
commencement of fabrication of the aluminum poles, for information purposes only. Prior to making a
submission, the seals and signatures of a design Engineer and a design-checking Engineer shall be
affixed on the Working Drawings verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and the design or
design-checking Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the
work, the drawing shall be sealed and signed by as many additional design and design-checking
Engineers as necessary.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensions.

b) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

c) Equipment layout.

d) Anchor bolt locations.

e) Exact pole weight.

f) Detailed bill of materials.

g) Details of equipment nameplates.

A copy of the Working Drawings shall be retained for 7 years.

2452.05 MATERIALS

2452.05.01 General

Aluminum used in the production of pole shafts shall be according to ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T4.

Aluminum used in the production of base castings shall be according to ASTM B 108, alloy A 356.0-T6.

2452.07 PRODUCTION

2452.07.01 General

The length of the poles shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

The completed pole assembly shall be tempered to T6 condition and have a minimum yield strength of
165 MPa and a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 193 MPa.

November 2018 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 2452

Shafts shall be round in cross-section and taper from bottom to top.

Shafts shall be fabricated from a single tube with a wall thickness of 4.775 or 6.35 mm as specified in the
Contract Documents.

Welded joints shall not be permitted for shafts.

Sweep shall not exceed 3.2 mm per 4.57 m, and the overall sweep shall not be greater than:

(Pole length (m)/4.57 m) x 3.2 mm

The pole shall be supplied with a one-piece cast shoe base complete with 8 gussets and a factory
installed dampener for poles over 9.0 m in length.

After fabrication, the underside of the cast shoe base shall be true, distortion free, and perpendicular to
the centreline of the pole shaft. When the cast shoe base is in contact with concrete, a cold tar epoxy
coating shall be applied to the underside.

A removable aluminum top cap shall be supplied with the shaft. The cap shall be secured rigidly to the
shaft by a hexagonal head stainless steel set screw.

Wiring apertures at the bracket mounting level and at the handhole shall be accurately positioned on the
pole. Wiring apertures, complete with neoprene grommets, shall provide a smooth cable entrance.

All welding shall be according to CSA W47.2.

The handhole shall be formed by extrusion or other appropriate method and be designed such that the
strength and cross-section of the shaft is not reduced.

Handhole covers shall be provided complete with a neoprene gasket, secured with stainless steel
fasteners, aluminum back bar, and stainless steel inserts.

The shaft shall be rotary sanded and protective wrapped for shipment.

2452.07.02 Mounting Plate for Grounding

The mounting plate for the grounding post shall be welded to the shaft in such a manner that the temper
of the shaft is not impaired and to present a smooth surface on the exterior of the shaft.

2452.07.03 Marking

Each pole shall have the following identification markings located approximately 100 mm above the top of
the handhole:

a) Manufacturer's name or trademark.

b) Length.

c) Wall thickness.

d) Bolt circle diameter.

e) Designation OPSS 2452.

f) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

November 2018 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 2452

These markings shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

2452.07.04 Packaging and Shipping

Each pole shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are
delivered as an entity.

The grounding connector shall be assembled inside the pole prior to shipment.

The Owner shall be advised of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2452.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2452.08.01 Inspection

All work is subject to an inspection by the Owner’s representative prior to shipment.

The supplier shall notify the Owner of the date that the fabrication of the poles is to commence.

The Owner’s representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records; certificates; materials used; fabrication process, including
welding; and to make any tests as may be considered necessary, while the poles are being fabricated.

November 2018 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 2452

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL [Link] 2453
STANDARD November 2019
SPECIFICATION

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SECTIONAL STEEL POLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2453.01 SCOPE

2453.02 REFERENCES

2453.03 DEFINITIONS

2453.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2453.05 MATERIALS

2453.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2453.07 PRODUCTION

2453.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2453.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2453.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for sectional steel poles.

2453.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM):

Book 12 - Traffic Signals

Structural Manual

CSA Standards

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality

Steel/Structural Quality Steel
S6-14 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

November 2019 Page 1 of 9 [Link] 2453

ASTM International

A123/A123M-17 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

LTS-5-M Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic
Signals, 6th Edition, with 2015 and 2019 Interim Revisions

2453.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Product Drawings means drawings prepared by the manufacturer that have been approved by the
Owner for use with the product.

2453.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2453.04.01 Design Requirements

All poles shall be designed to support the required traffic signal and lighting system components and shall
be according to CSA S6 and MTO Structural Manual. All poles shall be according to CSA S6 and
AASHTO LTS-5-M for fatigue requirements, AASHTO Fatigue Importance Category 2.

2453.04.01.01 Wind Loading

Wind loading shall be based on the maximum wind pressure for Ontario according to CSA S6.

2453.04.01.02 Ice Loading

Ice loading shall be based on the maximum ice loading in Ontario according to CSA S6.

2453.04.01.03 Geometric Parameters

Latitude of design and fabrication details is at the discretion of the supplier and is subject to approval of the
design by the Owner.

2453.04.01.04 Supported Load Parameters

Design calculations shall employ force and dimensions for various items of equipment to be mounted on the
poles as shown in Table 1.

2453.04.01.05 Sectional Steel Poles

Sectional steel poles used for traffic signal or combination of traffic signal and lighting system shall be base
mounted and shall be capable of bearing the loads associated with configurations shown in Table 2.

Direct buried sectional steel poles shall be capable of bearing the loads associated with the equipment
shown in Table 3.

Flasher/sign poles shall be capable of bearing the loads associated with the equipment shown in Table 4.

November 2019 Page 2 of 9 [Link] 2453

2453.04.01.06 Location of Equipment

Mast arms shall be solidly attached to the pole at a height above the pole base plate as given by:

HA = 5,650 mm - H

Where:

HA = mast arm height above the pole base plate

H = mast arm height from Table 1

When more than one mast arm is considered, the shorter arm shall be attached to the pole at a point
300 mm above that of the longer arm.

Pedestrian heads shall be mounted as specified in the Contract Documents.

Luminaire brackets shall be mounted at a point 150 mm from the top of the pole.

2453.04.02 Submission Requirements

2453.04.02.01 Product Drawings

The sectional steel pole manufacturer shall submit the product drawings and the design assumptions and
calculations for the poles to the Contract Administrator.

As a minimum, the product drawings shall include the following information:

a) Material properties and standards.

b) Dimensions.

c) Hardware requirements.

d) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

e) Anchor bolt locations.

f) Welds.

g) Joining method for sectional steel poles sections.

The product drawings and calculations shall bear the seals and signatures of the design and design-
checking Engineers.

2453.04.02.02 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of sectional steel poles.

Three sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to
the commencement of fabrication of the sectional steel poles for information purposes only. An Engineer
shall affix his or her seal and signature on the Working Drawings verifying that the Working Drawings are
consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

When multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and a single Engineer
is unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be signed
and sealed by as many additional Engineers as necessary.

November 2019 Page 3 of 9 [Link] 2453

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensions.

b) Plans, elevations, sections, and details to show pole structural details.

c) Equipment layout.

d) Anchor bolt locations.

e) Exact pole weight.

f) Detailed bill of materials.

g) Details of equipment nameplates.

2453.05 MATERIALS

2453.05.01 General

All steel used in the production of poles shall be according to CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300WT, Category 2,
for pole shafts, base plates, and gussets.

All welding shall be according to CSA W59.

2453.07 PRODUCTION

2453.07.01 General

General requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

The pole base plate for any height of pole shall be made with mounting holes suitable for the anchor rod
or anchorage assembly.

The underside of the anchor base shall be true, distortion free, and perpendicular to the centreline of the
pole shaft after fabrication.

A waterproof, removable galvanized steel top cap shall be furnished with the pole. The cap shall blend with
the general pole design to present a neat overall appearance. The cap shall be rigidly secured to the top of
the pole by a hexagonal head stainless steel set screw.

Wiring apertures at the bracket mounting level and at the handhole shall be accurately positioned on the
pole.

All wiring apertures shall provide a smooth cable entrance and be complete with rubber grommets.

Handholes, complete with covers, shall be reinforced with a steel handhole frame of such strength and
cross-section that the strength of the pole is not reduced.

2453.07.01.01 Galvanizing

All components shall be hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123.

November 2019 Page 4 of 9 [Link] 2453

2453.07.02 Steel Sections

2453.07.02.01 General

The following covers types and lengths of sectional steel poles:

a) Base mounted: 7.00, 8.70, and 10.50 m

b) Direct buried: 5.25, 7.00, 8.70, 10.25, and 12.00 m

c) Flasher/sign: 3.30 m

Pole sections shall be of round tapered construction so that a number of sections may be assembled by
means of an overlapping press fit to form a tapered steel pole of the desired length.

Each section shall have one longitudinal automated electrically welded joint from top to bottom.

Each section shall be stencilled with O-L and graduations in one inch increments. O-L represents the
nominal overlap requirement for each section.

2453.07.02.02 Base Mounted and Direct Buried Poles, 5.25 m and Longer

For lighting applications, a wiring aperture, complete with 28.5 mm ID rubber grommet shall be drilled
300 mm from the top of the pole.

Each base mounted pole shall be supplied with a reinforced 180 x 300 mm handhole, complete with
cover. Each direct buried pole shall be supplied with a reinforced 100 x 200 mm handhole, complete with
cover. A 6 x 38 x 250 mm long plate shall be welded inside the pole opposite the handhole. A ground
connector shall be mounted on the plate. The ground connector shall be suitable for No. 6 AWG wire.

Each direct buried pole to be mounted solely with a power supply control cabinet shall have no handhole.

The centre of the handhole on base mounted poles shall be 1.1 m from the bottom of the pole and on
direct buried poles the centre of the handhole shall be 2.75 m from the bottom of the pole.

Base mounted poles shall have a steel plate anchor base with 4 holes on a 449 mm bolt circle, suitable
for mounting on 32 mm diameter studs.

Direct buried sectional steel poles shall have 65 x 300 mm wiring apertures on each side of the pole, the
centre of the apertures shall be 1.25 m from the bottom of the pole.

2453.07.02.03 Flasher Poles

The flasher pole shall be comprised of two pole sections totalling 2.3 m in length with a 1.2 m length of
50 mm IPS Schedule 40 pipe inserted 230 mm into the top and welded in place to provide a total length
of 3.3 m.

The top end of the extension shall be threaded, and the thread cleaned after galvanizing.

Each pole shall be supplied with a 75 x 100 mm handhole, complete with cover. The bottom edge of the
handhole shall be 150 mm from the bottom of the pole.

A ground terminal shall be provided in the handhole.

The flasher pole shall be supplied with a steel plate anchor base with 4 holes on a 150 mm bolt circle,
suitable for mounting on 16 mm diameter studs.

November 2019 Page 5 of 9 [Link] 2453

2453.07.03 Marking

Each pole shall have identification marking located approximately 100 mm above the top of the handhole
showing the following:

a) Manufacturer's name or trademark.

b) Length.

c) Designation OPSS 2453.

d) Manufacturer's catalogue number.

e) Date of manufacture (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

This marking shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

2453.07.04 Ground Bar

A ground bar with a bronze ground connector suitable for No. 6 AWG wire shall be welded to the inside of
each pole. The bronze ground connector shall be attached to the ground bar before shipment.

2453.07.05 Packaging and Shipping

Each pole shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts are delivered
as an entity.

The Contract Administrator shall be advised of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

2453.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2453.08.01 Inspection

All work is subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

The supplier shall notify the Contract Administrator of the date that the fabrication of the poles is to
commence.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place of fabrication of the poles for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records and certificates while work on the poles is being performed;
materials used; process of fabrication, including welding and galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be
considered necessary.

2453.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2453.09.01 Working Drawings and Shipment

Within 30 Days of receipt of a purchasing order to supply sectional steel poles, the supplier shall submit
3 copies of pole Working Drawings, as described in the Submission Requirements subsection, to the
Owner.

The supplier shall advise the Owner of the shipping date 3 Business Days prior to delivery.

November 2019 Page 6 of 9 [Link] 2453

2453.09.02 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sectional steel poles supplied and
accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of the sectional steel poles
delivered to the destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed by the Owner, shall be included in the price.

November 2019 Page 7 of 9 [Link] 2453

 TABLE 1
Supported Load Parameters

Dimensions Projected Area Weight

Item of Equipment
mm m² N
Roadway Lighting Luminaire (Ovaloid) 990 L x 380 H 0.22 107
Roadway Lighting Bracket (Aluminum) 2400 L x 1200 H (tapered) 0.15 112
Double Arm Brackets (Aluminum) 400 L x 42 Dia. (2 per set) 0.04 24
Mast Arm (Aluminum) 610 L x 250 H (tapered) 0.04 78
1200 L x 530 H (tapered) 0.10 91
1800 L x 610 H (tapered) 0.15 114
2400 L x 840 H (tapered) 0.19 65
3000 L x 610 H (tapered) 0.23 94
3600 L x 840 H (tapered) 0.38 113
4600 L x 1070 H (tapered) 0.47 216
5500 L x 910 H (tapered) 0.70 324
Traffic Signal Heads (Aluminum: 4-Section) 1650 H x 610 W 1.01 123
Pedestrian Heads (Aluminum: 2-Section) 690 H x 345 W 0.23 78
Traffic Signs Varies: see Table 2 1.50 23

TABLE 2
Base Mounted Sectional Steel Pole Configurations

Maximum Mast Number of Traffic Street

Pole Luminaire Longest Mast
Arm Total Length Pedestrian Signs Name Sign
Height and Bracket Arm with Head
(Note 1) Heads (Note 3) (Note 4)
m set m
m (Note 2) m2 m2
7.00 1 5.5 11.0 2 0.75 0.97
8.70 1 5.5 11.0 2 0.75 0.97
10.50 1 5.5 11.0 2 0.75 0.97

Notes:

1. Mast arm total length applies to the sum of the lengths of two mast arms at 90-degree orientation.

2. Two pedestrian heads at 90-degree orientation include a set of double arm brackets for each.

3. Traffic signs shall be split to give 0.25 m 2 mounted on the mast arm beside the signal head and
0.5 m2 mounted at 2.75 m height above the pole base plate.

4. Street name or roadway identification sign shall have a maximum height of 0.45 m and a maximum
length of 2.10 m. The sign shall be mounted on each mast arm or pole and the distance between the
centre of the sign and the surface of the pole shall not exceed half the length (L) of the mast arm.
Pole mounted street name signs shall be mounted at the same height as the mast arm mounted signs
or at the top of the pole, whichever is less.

November 2019 Page 8 of 9 [Link] 2453

 TABLE 3
Direct Buried Sectional Steel Pole Configurations
Pole Height Luminaire and Bracket Supply Control Cabinet Type 1
(Note 1) (Note 2)
m set each
5.25 2 N/A
5.25 N/A 2
7.00 2 N/A
7.00 N/A 2
8.70 2 N/A
8.70 N/A 2
10.25 2 N/A
10.25 N/A 2
12.00 2 N/A
12.00 N/A 2

Notes:

1. See Table 1.

2. Each supply control cabinet shall have maximum dimensions of 865 mm H x 465 mm W x 250 mm D
and a maximum weight of 700 N.

TABLE 4
Flasher/Sign Pole Configurations
Traffic Signal Head
Pole Height Beacons Traffic Signs
(3 display sections)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
m each m2
each
3.3 2 N/A 0.5
3.3 N/A 1 0.5

Note:

1. Each beacon or traffic signal display shall be a 300 mm display according to OTM Book 12 and the
total weight of the beacons or the three section traffic signal head shall be a maximum of 200 N.

November 2019 Page 9 of 9 [Link] 2453

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2460
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2018

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

TRAFFIC SIGNAL ARMS, BRACKETS,
HANGERS, FITTINGS, AND HARDWARE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2460.01 SCOPE

2460.02 REFERENCES

2460.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2460.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2460.05 MATERIALS

2460.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2460.07 PRODUCTION

2460.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2460.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for single member arms, aluminum pipe arms, double arm
brackets, traffic signal hanger assemblies, and traffic signal mounting hardware and accessories.

2460.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 2461 Signal Heads

CSA Standards

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality

Steel/Structural Quality Steel
S157-05/S157.1-05 (R2015) Strength Design in Aluminum
W47.2-11 (R2015) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum
W59-13 Welded Steel Construction (Metal/Arc Welding)

November 2018 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 2460

ASTM International

A 123/A 123M-15 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
A 307-14e1 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
A 563-15 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
B 108/B108M-15 Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
F 593-13ae1 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
F 594-09 (2015) Stainless Steel Nuts

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

B18.2.1-2012 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Asken Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex
Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series)
B18.2.2-2015 Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange,
and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
B18.21.1-2009 Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)

2460.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2460.04.01 Design Requirements

2460.04.01.01 Traffic Signal Arms, Brackets, Hangers, Fittings, and Hardware

All traffic signal equipment shall be designed to accommodate a five section signal head with 300 mm
lenses complete with backboard according to OPSS 2461.

2460.04.01.02 Aluminum Components

Structural design shall be according to CAN/CSA S157.

2460.04.02 Submission Requirements

2460.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Four sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to
the commencement of fabrication. An Engineer shall review and sign the Working Drawings verifying that
the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and a single Engineer
is unable to sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be signed by as many
additional Engineers as necessary.

Once fabrication of the equipment has commenced, materials and dimensions shown on the submitted
Working Drawings shall not be changed.

2460.05 MATERIALS

2460.05.01 Structural Steel

Structural steel shall be according to CSA G40.20/G40.21, minimum yield strength 300 MPa.

November 2018 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 2460

2460.05.02 Steel Hardware

Steel bolts shall be according to ANSI B18.2.1 and ASTM A 307, Grade A, minimum yield strength
400 MPa. Steel nuts shall be according to ANSI B18.2.2 and ASTM A 563, Grade A, minimum yield
strength 400 MPa. Steel washers shall be according to ANSI B18.21.1.

Stainless steel bolts shall be according to ASTM F 593 with head marking F593C. Stainless steel nuts
shall be according to ASTM F 594. Stainless steel washers shall be fabricated from 18.8 alloy.

2460.05.03 Cast Alloy Materials

Fittings cast from non-ferrous alloys shall be according to ASTM B 108 and strength requirements
compatible with other components and the design requirements. Fittings shall be cast with aluminum
alloy, grade A356.2 or G6290. Castings shall be F or T6.

2460.05.04 Aluminum Pipe and Tube

Aluminum pipe shall be 38 mm (1½˝) diameter, schedule 40, 6061-T6, and strength requirements
compatible with other components and the design requirements.

Aluminum tubes shall be fabricated from 6063 alloy.

2460.07 PRODUCTION

2460.07.01 General

2460.07.01.01 Galvanizing

All structural steel, steel hardware, and cast ferrous components shall be hot dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123.

2460.07.01.02 Welding

All welding of steel shall be according to CSA W59.

All welding of aluminum shall be according to CSA W47.2.

2460.07.02 Single Member Arms

Single member arms shall be fabricated by tapering and bending aluminum tube to the required
dimensions. The end of the arm shall be provided with a 50 mm IPS (iron pipe size) tenon, 100 mm long
for mounting of a hanger. The tenon shall be horizontal when the arm is mounted on a vertical surface.
After fabrication, arms shall be heat treated to T-6 temper.

The vertical rise of the mast arm shall be according to Table 1.

The pole attachment assembly shall be fabricated from structural steel complete with:

a) Flat steel pole straps with four hex head bolts, nuts, and lock washers for mounting on metal or
concrete poles.

b) Four 20 mm diameter bolt holes for mounting on wooden poles.

The pole plate collar attachment to the aluminum arm shall be retained by hex head bolts with nuts and
lock washers. The number of hex head bolts shall be according to Table 1.

November 2018 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 2460

Pole attachment assemblies for use with wooden, metal, or concrete poles shall be fabricated to suit arms
and pole diameters.

Pole plate assemblies for use with wooden poles shall be fabricated to suit arms and pole diameters.

The completed aluminum signal member arm shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

2460.07.03 Aluminum Pipe Arms

Aluminum pipe arms shall be fabricated from 50 mm IPS aluminum pipe. The pipe shall be bent such
that the tenon end is horizontal when the arm is mounted on a vertical surface to give the vertical rise, as
measured from the top of the pole plate to the centre of the tenon according to Table 2.

The pole plate for attachment of the mast arm shall be a cast alloy universal plate with adjustment set
screws permitting adjustment of the angle of the mast arm over a range of 15° and shall be complete with
two 20 mm diameter bolt holes for mounting on wooden poles and with a lipped portion, top and bottom,
suitable for attachment of pole attachments.

Pole attachment assemblies shall be fabricated from flat structural steel complete with pole plate straps,
12.7 mm diameter U bolts, nuts, lock washers, and round washers for mounting on metal or concrete
poles. Pole attachment assemblies shall be provided for aluminum pipe arm pole plates and be
fabricated to suit pole diameters.

2460.07.04 Double Arm Brackets

Double arm brackets shall be fabricated from 38 mm IPS schedule 40, aluminum pipe to the length
specified in the Contract Documents. Each bracket shall consist of a cast aluminum 90° flanged street
elbow, pole plate, and hexagonal or octagonal locknut and a neoprene washer. The cast pole plate shall
be provided with four 16 mm diameter bolt holes for mounting on wooden poles and with lipped edges,
top and bottom, suitable for use with 16 mm wide stainless steel strapping. The completed double arm
bracket shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

2460.07.05 Traffic Signal Hanger Assemblies

Traffic signal hanger assemblies shall be of the following types, as specified in the Contract Documents:

a) adjustable mid-section hanger

b) dual-end hanger

Traffic signal hanger assemblies shall be fully adjustable to provide the required signal visibility.

2460.07.06 Signal Mounting Hardware, Fittings, and Accessories

Signal mounting hardware, fittings, and accessories for aerial installation shall be as specified in the
Contract Documents.

2460.07.07 Packaging

Aluminum arms shall be wrapped in heavy paper to protect the finish.

Steel components shall be strapped together with external corners protected with packing material. Small
components, hardware, fittings, and accessories shall be packaged securely in cardboard containers and
protected with packing material.

November 2018 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 2460

2460.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2460.08.01 Inspection

The Contract Administrator shall be notified a minimum of 3 Business Days prior to the start of fabrication
for the traffic signal arms, brackets, and hangers.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place of manufacture of the traffic signal arms,
brackets, and hangers for the purpose of inspecting and examining plant records and certificates;
materials used; process of manufacturing, including welding and galvanizing; and to make any tests as
may be considered necessary, while the traffic signal arms, brackets, and hangers are being fabricated.

The Contract Administrator shall be notified when the traffic signal arms, brackets, and hangers are ready
for inspection.

All traffic signal arms, brackets, and hangers may be subject to an inspection by the Contract
Administrator prior to shipment.

November 2018 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 2460

 TABLE 1
Aluminum Single Member Arm Requirements
Arm Length
Arm Rise Number of Hex Head Bolts for
m
m Pole Plate Collar Attachment
(Note 1)
1.2 0.53 2

1.8 0.61 2

2.4 0.84 2

3.0 0.61 3

3.6 0.84 3

4.6 1.07 3

5.5 0.91 3

6.1 1.07 3

6.7 1.14 3

7.6 1.20 3

Notes:

1. Measured from the centre of the pole plate to the centre of the tenon.

TABLE 2
Aluminum Pipe Arm Dimensions
Arm Length Arm Rise
m m
0.6 0.25

1.2 0.25

November 2018 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 2460

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2461
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2021

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SIGNAL HEADS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2461.01 SCOPE

2461.02 REFERENCES

2461.03 DEFINITIONS

2461.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2461.05 MATERIALS

2461.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2461.07 PRODUCTION

2461.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2461.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

2461.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for traffic signal heads and associated components and
accessories.

2461.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM):

Book 12 - Traffic Signals

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 0.4-17 Bonding of Electrical Equipment

C22.2 No. 127-15 Equipment and Lead Wires
S157-17 Strength Design in Aluminum

April 2021 Page 1 of 8 [Link] 2461

Institute of Transportation Engineers

ST-017B Equipment and Material Standards of the Institute of Transportation Engineers, April 3, 2006
ST-052 Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement,
June 27, 2005
ST-054 Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Arrow Traffic Signal
Supplement, January 1, 2008
ST-055 Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indicators: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Signal Modules,
February 1, 2011

ASTM International

D4956-19 Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control

Others

Federal Specification Colour Yellow 595B-33538

Federal Specification Colour Gray MVCL-14187
Ontario Highway Traffic Act, R.S.O. 1990, Chapter H.8

2461.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Backboard means a panel surrounding a signal head used for the purpose of increasing the attention value
of the signal.

Chromaticity means the colour quality of light that is defined by the wavelength (hue) and saturation.

LED Lamp means a light emitting diode (LED) signal module, LED arrow signal module, or LED pedestrian
signal module.

LED Arrow Signal Module means a signal unit comprised of an array of LEDs, lens, and related power
supply that provides an arrow traffic signal indication.

LED Pedestrian Signal Module means a signal unit comprised of an array of LEDs, lens, and related
power supply that provides a pedestrian signal indication consisting of a walking pedestrian or hand icon.

LED Signal Module means a signal unit comprised of any array of LEDs and related power supply and
any required lenses that provides a circular traffic signal indication when connected to appropriate power.

Programmable Visibility Head means the traffic signal head that can be programmed to limit the visible
area of the indication.

2461.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2461.04.01 Design Requirements

2461.04.01.01 Signal Head Requirements

Signal heads shall be designed to be attached to the traffic signal hanger assemblies using cushion
hangers, adjustable mid-section hangers, or dual-end hangers with standard 38 mm internal pipe size
gusseted pipe and fittings. Structural design of aluminum shall be according to CSA S157.

April 2021 Page 2 of 8 [Link] 2461

2461.05 MATERIALS

2461.05.01 General

Signal heads, components, and accessories shall be according to ITE ST-017B and as specified in the
Contract Documents.

2461.05.02 Signal Head Housings

Signal head housings shall be a die-cast aluminum or a moulded polycarbonate body with hinged door
assembly to provide a water and dust tight enclosure. The openings of the signal head housing shall be
provided with a removable sealing device. Aluminum alloy shall be according to CSA S157. The
polycarbonate signal head shall be moulded, ultraviolet and heat stabilized, flame retardant resin, and shall
be yellow according to Federal Specification Colour Yellow 595B-33538.

When specified in the Contract Documents, the colour of the signal head housing with grey body and the
back of the aluminum or polycarbonate backboard shall be according to Federal Specification Colour Gray
MVCL-14187.

Stainless steel reinforcing plates shall be provided according to the manufacturer’s recommendation for the
mounting arrangement as specified in the Contract Documents for the signal head.

2461.05.03 Visors

Each lens shall be provided with a removable visor of the cowl (cap) type. When specified in the Contract
Documents, lenses shall be provided with removable visors of the tunnel, full-circle, or louvre type.

2461.05.04 Snow Shields

When specified in the Contract Documents, snow shields shall be provided and installed according to the
manufacturer’s recommendation. Snow shields shall be a one-piece injection molded unit, resistant to
fading and discoloration with exposure to direct sunlight, and contain no electronic heaters or circuitry. The
unit shall be entirely transparent and shall not degrade the LED photometric requirements in any way.

Each snow shield shall be provided with a new neoprene rubber gasket, and be compatible with all traffic
module sizes listed in Table 1.

2461.05.05 Wiring

Wiring shall be #18 AWG stranded copper type TEW and according to CSA C22.2 No. 127.

2461.05.06 Ground Terminals

Ground lugs shall be provided in signal heads to accommodate a #14 AWG bonding wire.

2461.05.07 Backboards

As a minimum, backboards shall be fabricated from 1.00 mm thick aluminum sheets or 3.00 mm thick high-
density polyethylene sheets and shall project a minimum of 125 mm all around beyond the signal head
housing. The signal head backboard shall be standard colour yellow according to Federal Specification Colour
Yellow 595B-33538.

All backboards shall be opaque, and shall be outfitted with a strip of 75 mm wide fluorescent yellow prismatic
retroreflective sheeting according to ASTM D4956, Type XI, around the front facing border.

April 2021 Page 3 of 8 [Link] 2461

2461.05.08 Reflectors

Reflectors shall be Alzak aluminum and the reflective surface shall be according to ITE ST-017B.

2461.05.09 Lenses

Lenses shall be convex prismatic of the polycarbonate or glass type according to chromaticity
characteristics specified in ITE ST-017B and with the size, type, colour, and orientation specified in the
Contract Documents.

2461.05.10 Paint

Paint shall be synthetic resin enamel and according to Federal Standard Colour Yellow 595B-33538.

2461.05.11 LED Lamps

2461.05.11.01 Physical and Mechanical Requirements

The LED signal modules at minimum shall be according to ITE ST-052 and the Contract Documents.

The LED arrow signal modules at minimum shall be according to ITE ST-054 and the Contract Documents.

The LED pedestrian signal modules at minimum shall be according to ITE ST-055 and the Contract
Documents.

Each LED lamp shall have a single lens with a smooth outer surface. All circular red lenses shall be tinted
red and all circular amber lenses shall be tinted amber. The use of tinting or other materials to enhance
ON/OFF contrasts shall not affect chromaticity and shall be uniform across the face of the lens. The lens
shall be UV stabilized and shall be capable of withstanding direct ultraviolet sunlight exposure for a
minimum period of 60 months without exhibiting evidence of deterioration or colour change.

All circular red, amber, and green LED lamps shall have an incandescent look that provides a softened and
uniform appearance.

The LED lamps shall be capable of retrofitting and replacing incandescent lamps without modifications to
a standard ITE traffic signal housing. Installation shall only require the removal of the existing lens, lamp
reflector assembly, and gasket. Each LED lamp shall have secured jacketed and colour coded cables for
connecting to power and for bonding to system ground. The connecting cable shall be rated 600 volts. All
wire leads shall be one metre in length, pre-stripped, and tinned.

Each LED lamp shall be a sealed unit that includes all parts necessary for operation (e.g., printed circuit
board, power supply, lens, and gasket) and shall be weatherproof after installation and connection. A one-
piece 12.5 mm wide neoprene gasket shall be provided and installed on the LED lamp prior to delivery.

All LED lamps shall be according to the size, colour, and design specified in the Ontario Highway Traffic
Act and the OTM Book 12.

The LED pedestrian signal module shall be the single unit with the walking pedestrian and hand
superimposed in the same unit according to the Ontario Highway Traffic Act and the OTM Book 12.

All LED lamps shall be approved by the Electrical Safety Authority or by an organization accredited by the
Standards Council of Canada.

The LED lamps for use in programmable visibility head shall comply with the general requirements for LED
signal modules. The LED lamps shall be designed and constructed to be installed in a programmable
visibility head without modification to the housing.

April 2021 Page 4 of 8 [Link] 2461

2461.05.11.02 Electrical Requirements

Electrical requirements for LED signal modules shall be according to ITE ST-052; the LED arrow signal
modules shall be according to ITE ST-054; and the LED pedestrian signal modules shall be according to
ITE ST-055.

Maximum power consumption for LED lamps shall be according to Table 1 and Table 2.

Power factor shall be a minimum of 0.95.

2461.05.11.03 Photometric Requirements

Photometric requirements of the LED signal modules shall be according to ITE ST-052. Photometric
requirements of the LED arrow signal modules shall be according to ITE ST-054.

All LED signal and arrow signal modules shall be the expanded view type.

2461.05.11.04 LED Lamp Identification

Each LED lamp shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model number, serial number, and date
of manufacture (i.e., month-year) marked on the back of the module.

The following operating characteristics shall be permanently marked on the back of the module: nominal
operating voltage; power consumption, in watts; and volt-amperes.

Each LED lamp shall have a symbol of the type of module (e.g., circle or arrow) in the colour of the module
marked on the back of the module. The colour of the module shall be written out next to the symbol.

When specific mounting orientation is required, each module shall have prominent and permanent marking
consisting of an up arrow or the word UP or TOP.

2461.05.11.05 LED Lamp Warranty

The warranty period for each LED lamp shall be 60 months, commencing from the date of switch on for
operation of the traffic signals in which the LED lamp is used. Any LED lamp deemed to have a visual or
operational deficiency shall be replaced within 30 days. The warranty shall cover all delivery, parts, and
material costs.

2461.07 PRODUCTION

2461.07.01 General

Sectional signal heads consisting of one to six sections shall be supplied as specified in the Contract
Documents.

Lenses shall be arranged in the following order commencing from the top of the signal head to the bottom:

a) Red

b) Amber

c) Green

d) Straight Through Green Arrow

April 2021 Page 5 of 8 [Link] 2461

e) Left Turn Green / (Amber) Arrow

f) Right Turn Green Arrow

When any of the foregoing indications are not required, the order of arrangement shall be maintained by
omitting those sections, which are not required.

Each section shall consist of a signal head housing, wiring, visor, LED lamps, reflectors, and lens, as
specified in the Contract Documents.

Each complete assembly shall consist of a ground terminal and, when specified in the Contract Documents,
a backboard.

Pedestrian signal heads shall consist of one or two housing sections suitable for rectangular signals. One
display shall be a translucent lunar orange hand and the other display shall be a translucent lunar white
walking pedestrian. Standard square visors shall be provided.

2461.07.02 Wiring

Loops of 150 mm length of wire shall be left in each section.

2461.07.03 Bonding

Metallic components shall be bonded together and grounded to the ground terminal according to
CSA C22.2 No. 0.4.

2461.07.04 Assembly

All components shall be factory assembled using mechanical devices according to the strength
requirements of ITE ST-017B.

2461.07.05 Painting

All externally visible portions or components of the metal signal heads, with the exception of lenses and the
underside of visors, shall be painted yellow. The underside of the visors of the metal signal heads and the
visors of the polycarbonate signal heads shall be painted matte black.

2461.07.06 Signal Head Identification

Each signal head shall have identification markings in a visible location indicating the manufacturer's name
or trademark, date of manufacture, and standard designation OPSS 2461.

Identification markings shall be embossed on the signal head or on a corrosion-resistant metal plate
securely attached to the signal head.

2461.07.07 Packaging

Each signal head shall be packaged securely in cardboard cartons. Backboards and separately ordered
components may be packaged separately.

April 2021 Page 6 of 8 [Link] 2461

2461.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2461.08.01 Inspection

The Contract Administrator shall be notified a minimum of three Business Days prior to the start of
fabrication for the signal heads.

While work is being performed, the Contract Administrator shall have access to the place of manufacture
of the signal heads for the purpose of inspecting and examining plant records and certificates, materials
used, process of manufacturing, and to make any tests as may be considered necessary.

All signal heads may be subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

April 2021 Page 7 of 8 [Link] 2461

 TABLE 1
LED Signal and Arrow Signal Modules
Maximum Power Consumption (Watts) based on Operating Temperatures (°C)

Red Amber Green

25°C 74°C 25°C 74°C 25°C 74°C

Circular 300 mm 11 17 22 25 15 15

Circular 200 mm 8 13 13 16 12 12

300 mm Arrow 9 12 10 12 11 11

Programmable
11 17 22 25 15 15
Visibility Indication

TABLE 2
LED Pedestrian Signal Modules
Maximum Power Consumption (Watts) based on Operating Temperatures (°C)

25°C 74°C

Hand 10 12

Walking Pedestrian 9 12

April 2021 Page 8 of 8 [Link] 2461

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2471
SPECIFICATION JULY 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SECTIONAL STEEL HIGH MAST LIGHTING POLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2471.01 SCOPE

2471.02 REFERENCES

2471.03 DEFINITIONS

2471.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2471.05 MATERIALS

2471.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2471.07 PRODUCTION

2471.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2471.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used

2471.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for base mounted sectional steel high mast lighting poles 25, 30, 35,
40, and 45 metres in height with a multisided cross-section.

2471.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 906 Structural Steel

OPSS 911 Coating Structural Steel Systems

Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications

Structural Manual
Designated Sources for Materials (DSM)

CSA Standards

B95-1962 (R2002) Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness and Lay)

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural
Quality Steel
S6:19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code

July 2023 Page 1 of 8 [Link] 2471

W47.1-09 (R2014) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
W178.1-18 Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations
W178.2-18 Certification of Welding Inspectors

ASTM International

A500/A500M-18 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

48.9712-2014 Non-Destructive Testing - Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

LTS-5-M Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic
Signals, 5th Edition, Interim Revisions (2010)

International Organization for Standardization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC)

17025:2017 General Requirements for the Competence of the Testing and Calibration Laboratories

Others

Federal Standard 595C Color Standards

2471.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Multisided Cross-Section means a steel section having either eight or twelve sides as specified in the Contract
Documents.

2471.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2471.04.01 Design Requirements

Sectional steel high mast lighting poles shall be designed according to CSA S6, Structural Manual,
AASHTO LTS-5M, DSM product drawings, and as specified in the Contract Documents. Each pole shall be
capable of supporting a total load of 2,000 kg with a combined effective projected area of all the luminaires,
shroud, and shields of 4.0 m².

2471.04.02 Submission Requirements

2471.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of the sectional steel high mast lighting poles.

Three sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator 14 Days prior to
commencement of fabrication of the sectional steel high mast lighting poles, for information purposes only. An
Engineer shall review the drawings and affix a reviewed stamp with his or her signature to the Working Drawings
verifying that the Working Drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering
practices.

July 2023 Page 2 of 8 [Link] 2471

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and a single Engineer is
unable to seal and sign the Working Drawings for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be signed and
sealed by as many additional Engineers as necessary.

A copy of the Working Drawings shall be retained at the fabricator’s plant during and after pole fabrication.

The Working Drawings shall contain all information necessary to fabricate the sectional steel high mast lighting
poles including:

a) Dimensioned drawings, including lengths, sizes, cross-sections, and details of the sectional steel pole, and
exact weights of pole sections.

b) Final forces for field assembly of pole sections.

c) Details for the mounting supports of the winch assembly, the head frame assembly, and the electrical panel
assembly.

d) Details of access opening and of access door.

e) Welding details, including welding procedures to be used for each joint.

f) Detailed bill of materials.

g) Details of identification nameplates.

2471.04.02.02 Mill Test Certificates

Mill test certificates shall be submitted according to OPSS 906.

2471.04.02.03 Welding Procedures

Welding procedure data sheets for each joint configuration to be welded shall be prepared according to
CSA W59, stamped with CWB’s acceptance, and available for review during fabrication of the sectional steel
high mast lighting poles. Three sets of welding procedures shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator
14 Days prior to commencement of fabrication of the sectional steel high mast lighting poles, for information
purposes only.

2471.04.02.04 Welder’s Qualification

Welders shall have valid CWB issued qualification cards indicating the welding processes and the positions for
which they are qualified to weld. Prior to the commencement of fabrication, three copies of the Welders’ and
Welding Operators’ current qualification cards shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

2471.05 MATERIALS

2471.05.01 Steel

All structural steel shall be CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350WT, Category 3. Higher grades of steel shall not be
accepted.

Steel for tenon pipe shall be CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, or A 500M Grade C.

For pole masts, silicon content reported on the mill test certificate shall be less than or equal to 0.06%.

2471.05.02 Electrodes

Electrodes and flux used for welding shall have a low hydrogen content and shall be as specified in the
fabricator’s CWB approved welding procedures.

July 2023 Page 3 of 8 [Link] 2471

2471.05.03 Paint Coatings

Paint coatings shall be according to OPSS 911 and the Contract Documents.

The colour of the finish coat shall be equivalent to 16307 grey according to Federal Standard 595C.

2471.07 PRODUCTION

Requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Production shall be done in fabrication facilities listed in the relevant DSM listing.

Structural steel fabrication shall be according to OPSS 906, CSA W59, Contract Documents, and the Working
Drawings.

2471.07.01 Tolerances

Fabrication shall be according to the dimensions on the sealed and signed Working Drawings.

The dimensions of the assembled high mast lighting pole shall be within the following tolerances:

a) Overall height of pole mast: 5 mm for every 1 m in height.

b) Cross-sectional width of shaft across flats:

i. 1.0%, for widths less than 500 mm,

ii. 0.75% for widths greater than 500 mm.

c) Maximum sweep of the pole mast on its overall length measured from a chord joining the extremities and
the centreline of the mast shall not exceed 0.2% of its overall length.

d) Maximum deviation from straight of the shaft wall on any 3 m length of pole mast shall not exceed 5 mm.

e) Offset between the centreline of the top section of the pole and the centreline of the bottom section of the
pole shall not exceed 150 mm.

f) Offset between the centreline of the base plate and the centre of the pole mast at base shall not exceed
5 mm.

g) Wall thickness shall be within the tolerance permitted in CSA G40.20/G40.21 and ASTM A500M.

2471.07.02 Fabrication

2471.07.02.01 General

The pole mast shall be cold formed from steel plate and each section shall be fabricated with one or two
continuous longitudinal welds. If two welds are used, they shall be on opposite sides of the pole shaft.

One circumferential shop splice per section shall be permitted. Where possible, the shop splice shall be
completed prior to forming the pole cross-section.

In the area of the lap splice between pole segments, there shall be no protrusions preventing proper alignment
of one section with the next. Any excess weld material shall be removed by grinding to form a smooth surface
maintaining a uniformly tapered section.

Each pole shall be supplied with a reinforced handhole complete with a cover. The cover shall have provision
for padlocking and shall be fitted with a silicone rubber gasket such that, upon locking, the cover shall be tightly
fitted to the handhole.

July 2023 Page 4 of 8 [Link] 2471

Each pole shall be supplied with the appropriate mounting plate, brackets, and other attachments required for
the installation of the raising and lowering equipment. The mounting plate, brackets, and other attachments
shall be attached to the shaft wall by welds as specified in the Contract Documents. Nuts for securing the
electrical panel shall be welded to the back of the mounting plate at each mounting hole as specified in the
Working Drawings.

The head frame shall be assembled to the pole by means of a tenon mounting system. The tenon shall be
compatible with the head frame and raising and lowering device.

In the tenon mounting system, a circular plate with nominal thickness of 12 mm shall be welded to the top of
pole as specified in the Contract Documents. The plate shall have a circular opening through its centre, equal
to the outside diameter of the tenon, through which the tenon shall be inserted.

The pole section joints shall be slip fitted connections as specified in the Contract Documents. Joint details shall
not interfere with the raising or lowering of the luminaire assembly.

The maximum overlap shall be such that the height of the completed mast complies with the permitted overall
tolerances. The minimum overlap length shall be as per the Working Drawings.

Shop trial-assembly shall be carried out to check the fit of the sections. The manufacturer shall determine the
necessary compressive assembly forces and lap lengths to be achieved during the pre-assembly operation to
ensure the final field assembly shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Sections shall be
match-marked to facilitate the field assembly. The markings shall be permanent and the location, size, and
marking medium shall not interfere with the slip joint.

All cut edges of the base plate shall have a surface finish not greater than 1,000 (25μm) as defined in CSA B95.
All corners shall be ground to a radius of 3 mm.

2471.07.02.02 Fabrication Outside of Canada and USA

For high mast lighting poles fabricated in a production facility outside of Canada and USA, the following
additional requirements shall apply:

a) The fabrication facility must be listed on List #6.60.40 in the Electrical Division of the DSM.

b) Fabrication of high mast lighting poles shall not begin until the information on the mill test certificates is
verified by testing at a Canadian laboratory according to OPSS 906. The mill test certificates by the
Canadian laboratory shall be stamped with the name of the laboratory and state that the material is
according to the specified Contract requirements.

Two copies of these stamped mill test certificates shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

c) All high mast lighting poles fabricated outside of Canada and USA shall be shipped to a facility in Canada
certified in accordance with CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2 for quality verification.

d) Shipped high mast lighting poles shall be accompanied by reports containing the results of all inspection
and testing performed in the production facility outside of Canada and USA demonstrating compliance with
the Quality Control subsection of this Specification.

e) Shipped high mast lighting poles shall not be galvanized or coated and shall be in a condition that permits
inspection and testing.

f) The Contractor shall hire an independent welding inspection company to perform quality verification of
shipped high mast lighting poles according to the Quality Control subsection of this Specification. All costs
incurred to perform inspection and testing at a Canadian facility shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

July 2023 Page 5 of 8 [Link] 2471

g) Acceptance of high mast lighting poles shall be based on satisfactory inspection of one randomly selected
complete pole from a lot. The size of a lot shall consist of a maximum 5 poles. All of the components of the
pole shall be inspected and tested according to the Quality Control subsection of this Specification. The
reports accompanying the shipment shall also be reviewed by the welding inspector. Inspection, testing,
and reporting shall be done on each shipment received.

h) The welding inspector shall ensure that traceability of all structural steel has been maintained by:

i. Correlation of heat numbers on high mast pole steel to the mill test certificates.
ii. Review of mill test certificates, verifying that materials used conform to the contract requirements.

i) If the inspection or testing performed on the high mast lighting poles demonstrate that they do not meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents, all poles in that lot shall be rejected.

2471.07.03 Welding

All welding shall be according to CSA W59, including its provisions for cyclically loaded structures, and shall be
undertaken by a manufacturer certified in accordance with CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2.

During fabrication, upon request the Contractor shall make available to the Contract Administrator the CWB
approved qualification cards for each Welder and Welding Operator employed on the work.

Welds for circumferential splices shall be full strength complete joint penetration.

The longitudinal seam welds shall be single V and shall be made from the outside of the structure. Throat
thickness shall be according to CSA W59, to ensure a minimum of 60% joint penetration.

Longitudinal seam welds within 150 mm of a complete penetration circumferential weld or within the lap of the
slip joints plus an additional 150 mm extending from the slip joint shall be full strength complete penetration
groove welds and shall be ground smooth.

Any section of weld that does not meet the acceptance standards shall be removed, re-welded, and
re-inspected.

2471.07.04 Coating

2471.07.04.01 Galvanizing

All steel components of sectional steel high mast lighting poles shall be hot dip galvanized according to
OPSS 911.

2471.07.04.02 Paint Coating

After galvanizing and prior to paint coating, each component of the sectional steel high mast lighting pole shall
be checked for continuity and smoothness of the galvanized coating. Any deficiencies in galvanized coating
shall be corrected according to OPSS 911.

Components specified to be paint coated shall then be paint coated after surface preparation according to
OPSS 911, using one of the approved paint systems for coating galvanized surfaces from the ministry’s DSM.
The dry film thickness of galvanized coating after surface preparation by sweep blasting shall be at least 87 μm.

During trial-assembly, care shall be taken not to damage the coatings of the pole. Any damage to the coatings
that occur during the trial-assembly or any other operations shall be repaired according to OPSS 911.

2471.07.05 Identification Nameplate

Each sectional steel high mast lighting pole shall have an identification nameplate as specified in the Contract
Documents.

July 2023 Page 6 of 8 [Link] 2471

The nameplate shall be made of stainless steel and shall be securely attached to the outside upper part of the
handhole cover by rivets. A neoprene or rubber gasket shall be placed between the handhole cover and the
nameplate to prevent corrosion effects.

2471.07.06 Quality Control

The Contract Administrator shall be notified of the fabrication, testing, and delivery dates.

2471.07.06.01 Certification

2471.[Link] Welding Inspection Company

The company undertaking welding inspection shall be certified under the Bridges category in accordance with
CSA W178.1. Certification shall include visual inspection as well as all non-destructive testing methods required
to fulfill the inspection and testing requirements of this specification.

2471.[Link] Welding Inspectors for Visual Inspection and Non-Destructive Testing

Visual inspection of the sectional steel high mast lighting poles shall be performed by welding inspectors
certified in accordance with CSA W178.2. Certification shall be to either CWB level 2 or CWB level 3.

Non-destructive testing of the sectional steel high mast lighting poles shall be performed by an ultrasonic or
radiographic technician, or both, certified in accordance with CAN/CGSB 48.9712, to either CGSB level 2 or
CGSB level 3 for the method used.

2471.[Link] Coating Inspectors

Coating inspectors shall have successfully completed National Association of Corrosion Engineers Coating
Inspection Program (NACE CIP) Level 1 and Level 2 with a minimum of 3 years of proven coating inspection
experience.

2471.07.06.02 Inspection, Testing, and Reporting

2471.[Link] Welding Inspection and Testing

The welding inspector shall inspect and test the sectional steel high mast lighting poles as follows:

a) Visual Inspection

i. The fabrication of steel components shall be visually inspected to ensure material, dimensions, fit-up,
and welding are according to specifications. Certification of conformance by the welding inspector for
each phase of the fabrication shall be based on the applicable Working Drawings, codes, and
specifications.

The welding inspector shall witness the trial-assembly of the pole sections to ensure compliance with
the Contract Documents.

When the sectional steel high mast lighting poles have been delivered to the Working Area and prior to
installation, the inspector with the required credentials shall inspect them to ensure that all the
components of the high mast lighting poles are according to the Contract Documents.

b) Non-Destructive Testing

i. All complete penetration groove welds, including shaft to base welds, circumferential splices in shaft
and welds at slip joints, shall be 100% tested. Longitudinal welds at the bottom of the shaft shall be
tested for a length of 2.0 m from the base plate. All testing of groove welds shall be by radiographic or
ultrasonic test method and shall be according to CSA W59 for cyclically loaded structures. Any weld
repairs shall be tested by appropriate methods as determined by an Engineer.

July 2023 Page 7 of 8 [Link] 2471

2471.[Link] Coating Inspection

The coating inspector shall inspect each phase of the cleaning and coating work for compliance with the
Contract Documents prior to proceeding to the next phase. Acceptance of the surface preparation and coating
thickness measurements shall be according to OPSS 911.

2471.[Link] Reporting

Prior to shipping the high mast lighting poles to site, the Contractor shall submit 2 copies of the inspection
reports, containing the results of all the inspection and testing performed during fabrication, welding, and coating
work, to the Contract Administrator. The inspection reports shall be completed and certified by the applicable
inspector and signed and sealed by an Engineer.

2471.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Sectional steel high mast lighting poles are subject to inspection by the Owner at any time during the course of
fabrication and installation.

Welding is subject to inspection by the Owner using both visual and non-destructive testing procedures and
techniques according to CSA W59 for cyclically loaded structures.

The surface preparation and coating of sectional high mast steel lighting poles are subject to inspection by the
Owner during the coating work. Acceptance of the work shall be based on the applicable OPS specification and
SSPC Standards.

July 2023 Page 8 of 8 [Link] 2471

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 2474
SPECIFICATION November 2016

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY - HIGH MAST LIGHTING POLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2474.01 SCOPE

2474.02 REFERENCES

2474.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2474.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2474.05 MATERIALS

2474.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2474.07 PRODUCTION

2474.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2474.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

APPENDICES

2474-A Commentary

2474.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements of anchorage assemblies for the 25, 30, 35, 40, and 45 m base
mounted sectional steel high mast lighting poles.

2474.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the Ontario
Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

2474.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract Documents as
the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract requirements
and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices. Depending on these
considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available appendices.

2474.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is a
provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this specification
to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented specification is
specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-oriented specification, the
references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

G40.20-13/G40.21-13 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural

Quality Steel
G164-M92 (R2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
W59-13 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
W178.2-14 Certification of Welding Inspectors

ASTM International

A 153/A 153M-16 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

A 449-14 Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, General Use
A 563-15 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

Canadian General Standards Board

48.9712-2014 Non-Destructive Testing - Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel

Page 2 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

2474.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2474.04.01 Submission Requirements

2474.04.01.01 Working Drawings

Six sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum 14 Days prior to the
commencement of fabrication. An Engineer shall affix his or her seal and signature on the Working Drawings
verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents and sound engineering practices.

When multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and a single Engineer is
unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be signed and
sealed by as many additional Engineers, as necessary.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings for anchorage assemblies shall include the following information:

a) Dimensioned drawings, including plans, elevations, sections of the anchor rods, nuts, top and bottom
plates, and their exact weights.

b) Mill test certificates reports of all steel being used.

2474.05 MATERIALS

2474.05.01 Steel

Anchor rods shall be made of new billet steel round bar, quenched and tempered medium carbon steel, with a
minimum yield strength of 517 MPa and a minimum tensile strength of 725 MPa, and shall satisfy
Charpy V Notch test requirements of 20 joules at minus 30 °C.

The length, number, and size of the anchor rods shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Other general requirements shall be according to ASTM A 449 for anchor rods and ASTM A 563 for anchor
rod nuts.

Anchor assembly top and bottom plates shall be made of PL10 x 100 mm according to CSA G40.20/G40.21,
Grade 300W.

2474.05.02 Anchorage Setting Templates

The anchorage setting template shall be made of 20 mm thick plywood or hard wood or metal. Metal
templates shall be a minimum of 12 gauge steel.

2474.07 PRODUCTION

2474.07.01 General

All fabrication shall be according to dimensions specified in the Working Drawings and as specified in the
Contract Documents.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

Anchorage assembly shall be supplied complete, as specified in the Contract Documents. Each assembly
shall be supplied complete with anchor rods, hexagonal nuts, hardened steel washers, and steel top and
bottom plates.

Each anchorage assembly shall be supplied with one anchorage setting template for positioning of the anchor
rods to suit the required bolt circle diameter of the pole.

2474.07.02 Tolerance

Dimensions, threads, and hexagonal nuts tolerances shall be according to ASTM A 563, Grade DH. Exposed
nuts are to be tapped oversized according to ASTM A 563 to allow for the thickness of the zinc coating on the
rod threads.

2474.07.03 Welding

Hexagonal nuts shall be welded to the top and bottom plates according to CSA W59.

2474.07.04 Coating

The anchorage assembly shall be completely galvanized according to CAN/CSA G164M or ASTM A 153.

The exposed hexagonal nuts and washers shall be galvanized according to CAN/CSA G164M or
ASTM A 153.

2474.07.05 Quality Control

Certification from the manufacturer shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator certifying that the
anchorage assembly is according to the strength and material requirements as specified in the Contract
Documents.

An inspector retained by the manufacturer shall inspect and test the anchorage assemblies. The inspector
shall be certified for testing bridges according to CSA W178.2. The certification shall be either Level 2 or
Level 3 for the methods used as specified in CAN/CGSB 48.9712.

The inspector shall inspect the place of manufacture of the anchorage assemblies while work on the units is
being performed and shall inspect and examine the plant records and certificates, the materials used, and the
fabrication process and shall conduct any tests as it may be considered necessary.

Two copies of the completed inspection report shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator. Inspection
reports shall be completed and certified by the inspector.

When the anchorage assemblies have been delivered to the Working Area and prior to installation, the
inspector shall inspect the anchorage assemblies to ensure that they meet all the Contract requirements.

2474.07.06 Testing

Visual inspection of the anchorage assemblies shall be performed by welding inspectors certified by the
Canadian Welding Bureau under CSA W178.2 at a Level 3 category or working under a Level 2 inspector.

2474.07.07 Packaging and Shipment

Each anchorage assembly shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts
are delivered as an entity. A complete parts list shall be included in the shipment.

Page 4 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

The supplier shall be responsible for loading, delivery, and off-loading of the anchorage assemblies to the
designated areas. Anchorage assemblies shall be subject to inspection during and on completion of off-
loading. If any damage is encountered during the off-loading inspection, the supplier shall be responsible for
the necessary corrective measures subject to the approval of the Owner.

2474.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2474.08.01 Welding

All welding shall be subject to a visual inspection. Procedures and techniques for visual testing shall be
according to CSA W59, Clause 7 and 8.

If faulty welding or material is encountered during the inspection procedures, the manufacturer shall submit
corrective measures to the Contract Administrator for approval.

2474.08.02 Inspection

The Contract Administrator shall be notified a minimum of 3 Business Days prior to the start of fabrication,
testing, and delivery.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place of manufacture of the anchorage assemblies
for the purpose of inspecting and examining plant records and certificates; materials used; process of
manufacturing, including welding and galvanizing; and to make any tests as may be considered necessary,
while the anchorage assembly is being fabricated.

All anchorage assemblies may be subject to an inspection by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

2474.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2474.09.01 Measurement and Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of anchorage assemblies supplied and
accepted.

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of the anchorage assemblies
delivered to the destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed by the Owner, shall be included in the price.

Page 5 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

Appendix 2474-A, November 2016
FOR USE WHILE DESIGNING MUNICIPAL CONTRACTS

Note: This is a non-mandatory Commentary Appendix intended to provide information to a designer, during
the design stage of a contract, on the use of the OPS specification in a municipal contract. This
appendix does not form part of the standard specification. Actions and considerations discussed in
this appendix are for information purposes only and do not supersede an Owner’s design decisions and
methodology.

Designer Action/Considerations

No information provided here.

Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings

No information provided here.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 11/2016 [Link] 2474

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL METRIC
STANDARD [Link] 2475
SPECIFICATION April 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNINTERRUPTIBLE

POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS FOR LED TRAFFIC SIGNALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2475.01 SCOPE

2475.02 REFERENCES

2475.03 DEFINITIONS

2475.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2475.05 MATERIALS

2475.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2475.07 PRODUCTION

2475.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE – Not Used

2475.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL – Not Used

APPENDICES Not Used

2475.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems for traffic signals
utilizing light emitting diode (LED) modules.

2475.01.01 Specification Significance and Use

This specification is written as a provincial-oriented specification. Provincial-oriented specifications are

developed to reflect the administration, testing, and payment policies, procedures, and practices of the
Ontario Ministry of Transportation.

Use of this specification or any other specification shall be according to the Contract Documents.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475

2475.01.02 Appendices Significance and Use

Appendices are not for use in provincial contracts as they are developed for municipal use, and then, only
when invoked by the Owner.

Appendices are developed for the Owner’s use only.

Inclusion of an appendix as part of the Contract Documents is solely at the discretion of the Owner.
Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification and only become part of the Contract Documents as
the Owner invokes them.

Invoking a particular appendix does not obligate an Owner to use all available appendices. Only invoked
appendices form part of the Contract Documents.

The decision to use any appendix is determined by an Owner after considering their contract requirements
and their administrative, payment, and testing procedures, policies, and practices. Depending on these
considerations, an Owner may not wish to invoke some or any of the available appendices.

2475.02 REFERENCES

When the Contract Documents indicate that provincial-oriented specifications are to be used and there is a
provincial-oriented specification of the same number as those listed below, references within this specification
to an OPSS shall be deemed to mean [Link], unless use of a municipal-oriented specification is
specified in the Contract Documents. When there is not a corresponding provincial-oriented specification, the
references below shall be considered to be to the OPSS listed, unless use of a municipal-oriented
specification is specified in the Contract Documents.

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C22.1-15 Canadian Electrical Code

C22.2 No. 94-M91 (R2001) Special Purpose Enclosures

Electrical Safety Authority

Ontario Electrical Safety Code

National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

TS 2-2016 Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements Version 03.07

2475.03 DEFINITIONS

AGM VRLA Battery means a sealed battery using absorbed glass mat and valve regulated lead acid
technology.

CSA Enclosure Type 3 means an enclosure for either indoor or outdoor use, constructed so as to provide a
degree of protection against rain, snow, and windblown dust, undamaged by the external formation of ice on
the enclosure.

Gel Cell Battery means a sealed battery containing acid in a gel form.

Page 2 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475

2475.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2475.04.01 Design Requirements

Each UPS system shall be designed for the traffic signal controller cabinet and equipment to which the UPS
system will be connected. A comprehensive and detailed wiring diagram for each UPS system shall be
designed and documented. The wiring diagram shall clearly indicate all UPS system wiring and connections,
and shall clearly indicate all wiring and connections between the UPS system and the traffic signal controller
cabinet and equipment.

2475.04.02 Submission Requirements

Prior to the installation of the UPS system, three copies of a comprehensive and detailed wiring diagram for
each UPS system at each traffic control signal shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

2475.05 MATERIALS

2475.05.01 General

The UPS system shall provide uninterruptible power and conditioning of the utility power required for the
operation of all electronic equipment used to operate the traffic control signals in the event of main utility
power supply failure or voltage or frequency fluctuations.

The UPS system shall be supplied complete with UPS automatic switch.

The UPS control unit shall be a line interactive or double conversion type with automatic voltage regulation for
120V, 60Hz, single phase.

The UPS system shall include all wiring necessary to interconnect the UPS control unit to the power source
and to the traffic signal control components.

The UPS control unit must latch from line to battery and from battery to line (transfer time) in less than
60 milliseconds.

When installed at a traffic signal using LED signal lamps, the UPS system shall be capable of maintaining full
signal display operation for a minimum of 4 hours after which it shall be capable of maintaining a flashing
signal display for a further 6 hours minimum.

Switching from full operation to a flashing operation may be determined by a timer circuit or based on battery
capacity.

If the UPS control unit or the batteries fail, the system shall automatically switch back to utility line power.

If line power is restored during flashing operation, the traffic control signals shall commence the start-up
sequence specified in the traffic control signals’ timing sheet.

The UPS cabinet shall be supplied complete with pedestal or pole mounting hardware as indicated in the
Contract Documents.

The battery installation and wiring to the batteries shall be according to Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

Page 3 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475

The UPS system components shall operate properly for the time periods specified above under the following
conditions:

a) Ambient temperature -37 °C to +74 °C

b) Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent

c) The UPS system components shall withstand shock and vibration according to NEMA TS 2.

2475.05.02 UPS Cabinet

The cabinet shall be approved according to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

The UPS cabinet shall be a CSA Enclosure Type 3 cabinet constructed of aluminum and shall be painted
grey. The cabinet shall be fabricated using sheet aluminum 3.17 mm thick and adequately reinforced by
welded aluminum members.

The dimensions and details of the UPS cabinet shall be according to the Contract Documents.

The cabinet shall have one door hinged on one side with a continuous stainless steel piano hinge.

The door shall use a latch and lock mechanism. The door handle shall be zinc coated and painted the same
colour as the cabinet.

The opening in the UPS cabinet shall allow full access to UPS components housed in the cabinet.

The cabinet shall be vented according to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

The circuit providing power to the battery heating mats shall be thermostat controlled and the thermostat shall
be located in the UPS cabinet.

2475.05.03 Batteries

Batteries shall be AGM VRLA or gel cell technology.

Battery leads to UPS control unit shall be of suitable length and not less than 2.5 metres.

Each battery shall be placed on its own heater mat with all heater mats being supplied with AC power by the
UPS control unit.

Battery mats shall become inoperable with loss of line voltage.

The batteries shall be protected by a circuit breaker or a fuse.

Each battery shall be labelled with the date of manufacture. The label shall be at a visible location on the top
of the battery.

In addition to any other warranty, the Contractor shall provide a 3 year warranty on the batteries. The
warranty period for each battery shall be 3 years, commencing from the date of “switch on” for operation of
the UPS system in which the batteries are used. Any defective battery shall be replaced within 30 days. The
warranty shall include all labour, Equipment, and Materials required to replace the batteries, including traffic
control and all removal and disposal work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and disposal
of any defective batteries replaced under warranty. The Owner shall be the sole judge in determining if a
battery is defective.
Page 4 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475
2475.05.04 UPS Control Unit

The UPS control unit shall be rack mountable with the following maximum dimensions: width of 483 mm (19-
inch), depth of 254 mm (10 inches), and height of 153 mm (6 inches).

The front face of the control unit shall have indicators capable of displaying the following:

a) Number of times the system was on battery supply

b) Total time on battery supply

c) Battery charge status to indicate the battery capacity

Each of the battery supply indicators listed above shall have a manual reset switch.

The UPS control unit shall have a minimum of one standard 120V grounded socket located on either the back
or the front panel.

The UPS control unit shall contain over-current protection located on the front panel to switch power on/off
from the batteries and to switch AC input and output power on/off.

The UPS control unit shall have a self-test feature to test the UPS automatic switch and the control circuitry.

The UPS control unit shall have an open collector output or an AC or DC contact closure to indicate when the
traffic signal is operating on battery supply.

The UPS control unit shall have an open collector output or an AC or DC contact closure to indicate low
battery alarm.

The UPS control unit shall have a minimum of 1 switched AC output that will switch on when the traffic signal
has been on battery supply continuously for 4 hours.

A 9 pin male serial port and/or Ethernet port shall be located on the front panel to allow for communication to
a laptop computer for changing software settings. The Ethernet port shall support dynamic host configuration
protocol (DHCP).

A set of battery voltage test points, or a readout indicating battery voltage condition shall be located on the
front panel.

2475.05.05 UPS Automatic Switch

The UPS automatic switch shall allow the UPS control unit to be removed for replacement or maintenance
without turning off the traffic signal system.

The utility line power shall be connected to the input of the automatic switch. Under normal operating
conditions the automatic switch shall connect the utility line power to the UPS control unit. In the event that
the UPS control unit is not present or does not function, the automatic switch shall automatically connect the
utility line power directly to the traffic signal system, bypassing the UPS control unit.

2475.05.06 Power Conditioning and the Use of Batteries by the UPS

Under normal operating conditions the utility line power shall flow through the UPS control unit to the traffic
signal system and any other connected loads.
Page 5 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475
When the utility line power is within the operating parameters specified by the UPS manufacturer and the
Contract Documents the UPS control unit shall condition and deliver the power to the loads without drawing
power from the batteries.

When the utility line power is not within the operating parameters specified by the UPS manufacturer and the
Contract Documents the UPS control unit shall condition and deliver the power to the loads by drawing power
from the batteries as required.

2475.05.07 Electrical

The UPS system shall accept an AC voltage input range of 85 to 135 VAC, single phase, 2 wire plus ground
without drawing on battery power.

The UPS system shall provide voltage regulation at 120 VAC ± 3 percent under any line, load or battery
conditions other than “low battery”, and a frequency regulation of 60 Hz ± 3 Hz synchronized to the utility line
power.

Power rating shall be a minimum of 1000 VA (700W). The UPS system shall provide pure sine wave output,
computer grade power compatible with all equipment loads, with power factor correction.

The UPS system shall include full time protection from sudden voltage increase with inrush protection and AC
line filtering.

The UPS system shall provide complete isolation from the line operating as a separately derived power
source according to Section 10, Grounding and Bonding, CSA C22.1.

The direct current (DC) system of the UPS system shall have a nominal DC system voltage of 60 VDC or
less. The UPS DC system short circuit current shall not exceed 5000 A.

2475.07 PRODUCTION

All wires and leads shall be tied and secured within the UPS cabinet prior to delivery.

Page 6 Rev. Date: 04/2017 [Link] 2475

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2476
SPECIFICATION APRIL 2019

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

RAISING AND LOWERING EQUIPMENT
FOR HIGH MAST LIGHTING POLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2476.01 SCOPE

2476.02 REFERENCES

2476.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2476.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2476.05 MATERIALS

2476.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2476.07 PRODUCTION

2476.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2476.01 SCOPE

The specification covers the requirements for raising and lowering equipment for high mast lighting poles.

2476.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS 911 Coating Structural Steel Systems

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material

OPSS 1704 Paint Coating Systems for Structural Steel

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 38-18 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

C22.2 No. 42-10 (R2015) General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs, and Similar Wiring Devices
C22.2 No. 49-18 Flexible Cords and Cables

April 2019 Page 1 of 11 [Link] 2476

C22.2 No. 94-M91 (R2011) Special Purpose Enclosures
G40.20-13/G40.21-13 (R2018) General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality
Steel/Structural Quality Steels
W47.1-09 (R2014) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
W59-18 Welded Steel Construction
W178.1-18 Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations
W178.2-18 Certification of Welding Inspectors

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

48.9712-2014 Non-Destructive Testing - Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel

ASTM International

A 123/A 123M-17 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
F 593-17 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
F 594-09 (2015) Stainless Steel Nuts

IEEE

C62.1-1989 Gapped Silicon-Carbide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

250-2018 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

2476.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2476.04.01 Design Requirements

Raising and lowering equipment for high mast lighting poles shall be designed such that under all
conditions the load on the winch cable shall never exceed 25% of the minimum breaking strength of the
winch cable.

Raising and lowering equipment for high mast lighting poles shall be designed such that under all
conditions the load on each support cable shall never exceed 25% of the minimum breaking strength of
each support cable.

2476.04.02 Submission Requirements

2476.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Working Drawings shall be prepared for the fabrication of raising and lowering equipment for high mast
lighting poles.

Three sets of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 14 Days prior to
commencement of fabrication of the raising and lowering equipment for high mast lighting poles, for
information purposes only. Prior to making a submission, the seals and signatures of a design Engineer
and a design-checking Engineer shall be affixed on the Working Drawings.

Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the same Working Drawing and the design or
design-checking Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Working Drawing for all aspects of the
work, the drawing shall be sealed and signed by as many additional design and design-checking
Engineers as necessary.

April 2019 Page 2 of 11 [Link] 2476

A copy of the Working Drawings shall be retained at the fabricator’s plant during and after pole
fabrication.

Working Drawings shall include the following:

a) Detailed dimensioned layouts, including plans, elevations, and sections to clearly indicate the
following:

i. Luminaire support rings and arms

ii. Luminaire mounting arrangements
iii. Counter-balancing arrangements
iv. Head assembly balancing arrangements
v. Motor mounting arrangements
vi. Winch mounting arrangements
vii. Electrical breaker box mounting arrangements
viii. Junction box details and mounting arrangements
ix. Electrical control enclosure mounting arrangements

b) Detailed wiring diagrams for the internal drive luminaire raising and lowering equipment.

c) Detailed wiring diagrams for the portable power units.

d) Detailed bill of materials for the following:

i. Support cables and connectors

ii. Electrical cables and connectors
iii. Electrical circuit breakers
iv. Motors, reducers, and torque limiters
v. Electrical control enclosures
vi. Motor control circuitries

e) Functional test data reports on the raising and lowering mechanism indicating that the gearbox
mechanism meets manufacturer’s specifications.

f) Detailed parts list and sources of supply for each of the items listed.

2476.05 MATERIALS

2476.05.01 Attachment Hardware

All bolts, washers, spacers, springs, and locknuts shall be stainless steel type 304. Locknuts shall be
vibration-proof and of the captive type. Self-tapping screws shall be stainless steel type 302HQ. Bolts
shall be according to ASTM F 593 and nuts according to ASTM F 594.

2476.05.02 Latch Shaft and Locking Pin

The latch shaft and locking pin shall be formed from a continuous casting of type 316 stainless steel.

2476.05.03 Pulleys

Pulleys shall be fabricated from stainless steel or steel with a chromate finish.

2476.05.04 Luminaire Support Ring

The ring shall be fabricated from steel channel according to CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300W, and hot dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 123. If required, counter balancing galvanized hardware shall be

April 2019 Page 3 of 11 [Link] 2476

supplied as part of the ring assembly. The steel shall be certified to be impact tested per heat to
Category 3 and shall satisfy the Charpy V-Notch test requirements of 20 joules for Grade 300 WT. Silicon
content in the steel shall be equal to or less than 0.06%.

2476.05.05 Luminaire Tenon Arms

The luminaire tenon arms shall be HSS 60 mm diameter x 6.4 mm thick. The tenon arms shall be
fabricated according to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 260 WT, for high strength weldable notch tough
steel, and hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123. The steel shall be certified to be impact tested
per heat to Category 3 and shall satisfy the Charpy V-Notch test requirements of 20 joules for
Grade 260 WT. Silicon content in the steel shall be equal to or less than 0.06%.

2476.05.06 Electrical Junction Box on the Ring

The electrical junction box on the ring shall be of stainless steel, CSA C22.2 No. 94, Type 4X, or
NEMA 250, Type 4X, size 300 x 300 x 150 mm complete with connector and terminal blocks.

The connector shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 42. The connector shall be protected with a cover
and shall be housed in a CSA C22.2 No. 94, Type 3R, or NEMA 250, Type 3R, weatherproof, gasketed,
polyester fibreglass reinforced housing.

2476.05.07 Lightning Arresters

Secondary thyrite-type lightning arrestors shall be rated to 650 V and according to IEEE C62.1.

2476.05.08 Electrical Cables

The electrical wiring on the ring shall be type SOW or SOOW according to CSA C22.2 No. 49 or
Type TWH according to CSA C22.2 No. 38.

The power riser cable shall be type SO, SOW, or SOOW according to CSA C22.2 No. 49.

The circuit breaker cable shall be type SO, SOW, or SOOW according to CSA C22.2 No. 49.

The motor power cable and remote operating switch cable shall be type SOW or SOOW according to
CSA C22.2 No. 49.

The motor cable shall be #12 AWG, number of conductors suitable for single or 3 phase motors.

The remote switch cable shall be #14 AWG, 4 conductor cable.

2476.05.09 Bumper Guard

The bumper guard shall be made from extruded santoprene thermoplastic rubber.

2476.05.10 Centring Arms

Centring arms shall be stainless steel spring-loaded complete with rubber non-marking rollers.

2476.05.11 Latch Indicator Flags

Indicator flags shall be flat stainless steel and shall be covered on the bottom side with high reflectance
material.

2476.05.12 Twist Lock Plug Connectors

Twist lock plug connectors shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 42.

April 2019 Page 4 of 11 [Link] 2476

2476.05.13 Winch Cable

As a minimum, the winch cable shall be 7.94 mm (5/16”) diameter pre-stretched, stainless steel
type 302/304, 7 x 19 strand aircraft cable.

2476.05.14 Internal Drive Motor

The internal drive motor shall be a 600 V, 3-phase, 1.5 hp reversible motor suitable for the 347/600 V
system or a 240 V, single-phase, 1.5 hp reversible motor suitable for the 120/240 V system.

2476.05.15 Portable Power Unit

Portable power units shall be supplied when external drive mechanisms are used for driving the winch
and shall be capable of operating the system at the capacity described and as specified in the Contract
Documents.

The portable power unit shall be provided with a remote operating switch.

The portable power unit shall be provided with a torque limiting device between the power unit and the
winch.

The portable power unit shall be equipped with a shear key that will give way before the breaking strength
of the support cables is exceeded.

The portable power unit shall operate using a 120 V single-phase power source. When required to suit
the power distribution system, a step down transformer shall be supplied with the unit. The portable
power unit and the transformer shall be equipped with a female connector component of the combination
twist lock plug connector type unit as described in the Electrical Connectors and Fittings clause in the
Electrical Cables and Equipment subsection to match the plug for the luminaire riser wire and so ensure
that the riser cable is disconnected prior to lowering the luminaire support ring. The transformer is to be
housed in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for portable use.

2476.05.16 Reversing AC Magnetic Starter

The reversing AC magnetic starter shall comprise of an overload relay and a reversing contactor
assembly rated 600 V, 7.5 hp for the 347/600 V system or 240 V, 3 hp for the 120/240 V system. Coil
voltage for the contactors shall be 30 V or less.

The magnetic starter shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to ensure against both contactors
being energized simultaneously.

2476.05.17 Control Transformer and Power Supply

A control transformer, 347/30 V for the 347/600 V system or 120/30 V for the 120/240 V system shall be
used to provide the 30 V or less coil voltage for the starter.

2476.05.18 Torque Limiter

The torque limiter shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant materials.

The torque limiter shall have automatic resetting features and provide flexibility between shafts.

2476.05.19 Remote Operating Switch Assembly

The complete remote operating switch shall have a CSA C22.2 No. 94, Type 4X, or NEMA 250, Type 4X,
enclosure and operate at 30 V or less.

April 2019 Page 5 of 11 [Link] 2476

2476.05.20 Support Cables and Fittings

As a minimum, the support cables shall be flexible, 4.76 mm (3/16”) diameter, pre-stretched, stainless
steel type 302/304, 7 x 19 strand aircraft cables with a nominal breaking strength of 1,678 kg.

All cable fittings shall be stainless steel compression type and their load rating shall be at least 95% of the
minimum breaking strength of the cable.

2476.05.21 Shroud Material and Coating

The shroud shall be 1.5 mm thick reinforced anodized aluminum. Coating shall be according to
OPSS 911 and OPSS 1704.

2476.05.22 Electrical Connectors and Fittings

Electrical plugs and connectors for use with the riser wiring shall be a combination twist lock type that
includes a disconnect switch according to CSA C22.2 No. 42.

2476.05.23 Housing for Connector

The housing for connector shall be CSA C22.2 No. 94, Type 3R, or NEMA 250, Type 3R, weatherproof,
gasketed, polyester fibreglass reinforced housing.

2476.05.24 Electrical Breaker and Control Enclosure

The electrical breaker and control enclosure shall be CSA C22.2 No. 94, Type 4X, or NEMA 250,
Type 4X, aluminum enclosure.

2476.07 PRODUCTION

2476.07.01 General

General requirements for electrical work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

All fabrication shall be according to the dimensions on the Working Drawings and the Contract
Documents.

2476.07.02 Head Frame Assembly

The head frame assembly shall consist of the following:

a) Pulleys designed to support the power riser and support cables. The pulleys shall be fabricated from
stainless steel or steel with a chromate finish and shall run on permanently lubricated bearings.
Pulley diameters shall be large enough to prevent damage to the riser and support cables.

b) A slip fitter to suit the pole tenon.

c) Guides to ensure cables remain on their pulleys.

d) Guides and stops to ensure the luminaire support ring is properly positioned.

e) Spun aluminum dome cover to protect the pulleys from the elements. The cover shall be bolted to
the head frame with stainless steel hardware.

April 2019 Page 6 of 11 [Link] 2476

f) Three latching mechanisms to support the ring when it is in the locked position. The latching
mechanisms shall consist of a stainless steel cam cover, a latch cam, and a latch shaft with a locking
pin. The latch shaft and locking pin shall be formed from a continuous casting of type 316 stainless
steel. The locking pin shall not be welded onto the latch shaft. The latch shall engage the latch plate.
The latching mechanisms shall remove all the load from the winch and support cables when in the
locked position.

2476.07.03 Luminaire Support Ring Assembly

The luminaire support ring shall support a maximum of 12 luminaires weighing a total maximum of
400 kg. The ring for the 25, 30, 35, 40, and 45 m poles shall support luminaires complete with shields
and shroud having a combined maximum luminaire effective projected area of 4.0 m2. Rings shall be
capable of being drilled to accept up to 12 equally spaced HSS 60 mm diameter x 6.4 mm thick wall
luminaire tenon arms. The arms shall be bolted to the ring.

The ring shall be fabricated from steel channel and hot dip galvanized. The ring shall be a balanced
assembly and, if required, counter balancing galvanized hardware shall be supplied as part of the ring
assembly.

Each tenon arm shall be capable of supporting a luminaire and shield having a maximum combined
effective projected area of 0.2 m2.

One weatherproof, stainless steel junction box, size 300 x 300 x 150 mm complete with connector and
terminal blocks shall be mounted to the ring in-line with the pole handhole. The box shall be readily
accessible for maintenance and shall not obstruct the raising or lowering of the ring. The male connector
mounted on the ring-mounted junction box shall be used for testing the luminaires when the ring is in the
lowered position. The connector shall be angled downward and shall be mounted on the surface of the
junction box. This male connector shall be the inlet component of a combination twist lock plug connector
unit and shall be compatible with the female connector unit supplied with the riser wiring. The connector
shall be protected with a cover and shall be housed in a weatherproof, gasketed, polyester fibreglass
reinforced housing. Liquid-tight, strain-relief, zinc-plated steel cable fittings complete with stainless steel
locknuts and sealing washers shall be used for cable entries.

Secondary thyrite-type lightning arrestors shall be installed from the phase conductor to ground. The
arresters shall be mounted on the ring junction box.

The ring shall be wired to the junction box and luminaire arms as required. All wiring on the ring shall be
SOW or SOOW, with the number, size, and phase of conductors as specified in the Contract Documents.

The ring shall be equipped with a bumper guard. The bumper shall be continuous and securely fastened
to the inside of the ring using plastic bolts and an appropriate bonding agent.

The ring shall be equipped with three equally spaced centring arms.

The ring shall be equipped with a top latching mechanism. The top latching mechanism shall lock and
maintain the ring in the raised position, allowing the tension on the winch cable to be released.

The ring shall have three high visibility reflector indicator flags showing the latched and unlatched
condition of the latches.

2476.07.04 Transition Assembly

The transition assembly shall consist of a galvanized transition plate and attachment hardware for the
winch and support cables. Each support cable shall be terminated with a galvanized or stainless steel
thimble and compression sleeve and shall be attached to the transition plate either through a galvanized
forged eyebolt or an anchor spring. The winch cable shall be terminated similarly and shall be attached
to the plate through a galvanized or stainless steel shank ball or swivel of sufficient size to sustain the

April 2019 Page 7 of 11 [Link] 2476

loading on the cable. The support cables shall travel through the pole shaft, over the head frame pulleys
to the luminaire support ring where they are led through guides and are terminated with a collet type
device or strand vise. Shock-absorbing compression springs shall be installed either at the transition
assembly or at the cable attachment on the ring. The transition assembly design shall prevent twisting of
the support cables and assure smooth winding of the winch cable.

The power riser cable originating from the ring junction box shall enter the head frame assembly such that
no pressure is exerted on the cable while the ring is raised or lowered. The cable shall be supported by
head frame pulleys and terminated with a male connector which is the inlet component of a combination
twist lock plug connector unit and shall be compatible with the female unit provided with the riser wiring.
It shall be protected with a cover and shall be housed in a weatherproof, gasketed, polyester fibreglass
reinforced housing.

2476.07.05 Winch Assembly

The winch to raise and lower the luminaire support ring shall be a sealed, maintenance free, oil bath
worm gear that incorporates an internal friction drag brake to prevent free spooling. The winch drum shall
have a cable guide assembly to guide the uncoiled cable neatly on the drum. The winch shall have a
minimum lifting capacity of 750 kg and operate at 3 m/min ± 0.5 m/min. The winch drive shall be a
horizontal drive and through a 16 mm (5/8”) hex socket input shaft.

The drum shall be large enough to hold sufficient cable to meet individual pole height requirements. As a
minimum, the winch cable shall be 7.94 mm (5/16”) diameter pre-stretched, stainless steel type 302/304,
7 x 19 strand aircraft cable. The free end of the cable shall be finished with a galvanized or stainless
steel thimble and compression sleeve. The winch cable shall be connected to the transition assembly
through a galvanized or stainless steel shank ball or swivel.

The winch shall fit through the handhole opening and shall be mounted to the winch mounting plate with
the hex socket input shaft to the right of the drum and pointing up. The winch mounting plate shall be
attached to the pole mounting plate inside the handhole.

Operating instructions for raising and lowering the ring shall be provided and inscribed on a piece of
anodized aluminum. The operating instructions shall be mounted on the inside of the pole handhole
cover using silicone sealant. The lettering shall be large enough to be easily discernible.

2476.07.06 Internal Drive Motor

The internal drive motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, and require no maintenance.

The internal drive motor shall be assembled and mounted on the support plate by unistrut supports or
similar products that facilitate quick easy removal of the complete unit when required. The removal of the
internal drive motor shall be possible with a ring in either the latched or unlatched position without causing
freewheeling of the winch drum.

The internal drive motor shall be operated by a remote operating switch.

2476.07.07 Reducer

A reducer used to reduce the speed of the motor shall be installed between the motor and torque limiter.
The reducer shall be set such that the winch operates at 3 m/min ± 0.5 m/min.

2476.07.08 Torque Limiter

The torque limiter shall have automatic resetting features and provide flexibility between shafts. The
torque limiter shall be bidirectional and factory pre-set at a torque value such that the raising and lowering
equipment is according to the Design Requirements subsection and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.

April 2019 Page 8 of 11 [Link] 2476

2476.07.09 Remote Operating Switch Assembly

The remote operating switch shall be enclosed in a yellow, soft rubber moulded box. The box shall be
provided with a tongue-and-groove cover and have a weatherproof, neoprene gasket seal and
compression type nylon cord grip. The remote switch shall be clearly marked “Raise” and “Lower” and be
attached to a 13 m cord. The raise and lower labels shall coincide with the supporting mechanism in the
raised and lowered positions respectively. The raise and lower labels or nameplates shall be attached to
the face of the remote operating switch assembly.

When an internal drive motor is used, the switch shall include a stainless steel bracket complete with
S hook.

2476.07.10 Shroud

The shroud shall be attached to the luminaire support ring by means of mounting brackets.

The shroud support brackets, stiffeners, and mounting arms shall be fabricated from aluminum angle with
an anodized finish. All fastening bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel.

The interior surface of the shroud assembly, shroud sections, supporting brackets, stiffeners, and
mounting arms shall have a matte black finish. The exterior surface of the shroud shall be painted to suit
the colour and finish of the high mast lighting pole.

The shroud and its supporting mounting brackets shall be constructed as specified in the Contract
Documents.

The diameter of each shroud shall accommodate the luminaires and tenon arms that it encompasses.

2476.07.11 Electrical Cables and Equipment

2476.07.11.01 Electrical Cables

The power riser cable shall be terminated with a male connector of the inlet type that shall be a
component of a combination plug connector unit. The connector shall be protected with a cover and shall
be housed in a weatherproof, gasketed, polyester fibreglass reinforced housing. The cable shall have
sufficient length to meet individual pole height requirements. In addition, there shall be a 2 m type SO,
SOW, or SOOW jumper cable installed at the cover mounted electrical panel. The jumper cable shall be
used for the following:

a) Connection to the power riser cable with a ring in the raised position.

b) Connection to the connector on a ring junction box for luminaire testing with the ring in the lowered
position.

The motor power cable shall be able to be disconnected by means of a combination plug connector. The
cable shall consist of a male and female cord-to-cord device that is sized to match the line voltage,
phasing, and horsepower rating of the motor, and be of the ampacity rating specified in the Contract
Documents. The unit shall include a spring-loaded connector lid, safety shutter, and spring-loaded pawl
to prevent the plug from disengaging from the connector. The dead front connector shall be provided with
spring-loaded silver nickel contacts that make or break the circuits. The unit as a whole shall be housed
in a weatherproof, gasketed, polyester fibreglass reinforced housing.

The cable colour coding for each phase shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 49 and shall be consistent
both in the head and panel circuitry and as specified in the Contract Documents.

A braided copper strap shall be connected between the pole handhole cover and ground stud.

April 2019 Page 9 of 11 [Link] 2476

2476.07.11.02 Electrical Connectors and Fittings

Electrical plugs and connectors for use with the riser wiring shall be a combination twist lock type that
includes a disconnect switch. The cord-to-cord unit shall be sized to match the line voltage, phasing, and
horsepower rating of the motor, and be of the ampacity rating specified in the Contract Documents. It
shall include a spring-loaded receptacle lid, safety shutter, and spring-loaded pawl to prevent the plug
from disengaging from the connector and, that when operated, disconnects the circuits. The dead front
connector shall be provided with spring-loaded silver nickel contacts that make or break the circuits. The
unit as a whole shall be housed in a weatherproof, gasketed, polyester fibreglass reinforced housing.

2476.07.11.03 Electrical Breaker and Control Enclosure

One aluminum enclosure, sized as required, shall be used to house one main disconnect switch; branch
circuit breakers; and motor controller complete with control transformer, terminal board, and 30 V or less
power supply as required for the equipment located in the pole handhole and the system voltage. The
enclosure shall be mounted on the inside of the pole using angle brackets or standoffs as specified in the
Contract Documents.

2476.07.12 Welding

All welding shall be according to CSA W59. Welding shall only be undertaken by a fabricator fully
approved under the requirements of CSA W47.1.

Prior to commencement of welding, the Canadian Welding Bureau Qualification Certificates for each
person to be employed on the work shall be made available to the Contract Administrator. Certificates
shall be currently valid and shall indicate the positions that the operator is qualified to weld.

2476.07.13 Testing

The company and inspector undertaking welding inspection shall be engaged by the Contractor. All
welds shall be 100% examined by Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI). The raising and lowering
equipment shall be subjected to all visual and non-destructive testing.

The company undertaking welding inspection shall be certified for testing bridges in conformance with
CSA W178.1. The certification shall encompass at least the following methods: radiograph, ultrasonic,
and magnetic particle.

The inspector undertaking welding inspection shall be certified for testing bridges in conformance with
CSA W178.2. Certification shall be to either Level II or III for the methods used, as required by
CAN/CGSB 48.9712.

2476.07.14 Quality Control

The manufacturer shall certify that the raising and lowering devices are according to the strength and
material requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.

The inspector shall perform the visual inspection and non-destructive testing of the raising and lowering
devices. Both the inspector and the company employing the inspector shall be certified according to the
Testing subsection.

The inspector shall inspect the place of manufacturer of the raising and lowering equipment while work on
the units is being performed and shall inspect and examine the plant records and certificates, materials
used, and fabrication process. The inspector shall conduct any tests as may be considered necessary.

Two copies of the completed inspection report shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator. The
inspection report shall be completed and certified by the inspector.

April 2019 Page 10 of 11 [Link] 2476

2476.07.15 Packaging and Shipping

Raising and lowering equipment shall be shipped complete with hardware, suitably packaged to ensure
that all parts are delivered as an entity. A complete parts list shall be included in the shipment. All
cartons shall be marked with appropriate pole numbers.

Raising and lowering equipment shall be subject to inspection during and on completion of off-loading. If
any damage is encountered during the inspection, the Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary
corrective measures subject to the approval of the Owner.

The Contractor shall advise the Owner 3 Business Days prior to the shipping date of the intent to deliver
and confirm that arrangements for off-loading have been made.

2476.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2476.08.01 Welding

All welding may be subject to inspection by both visual and non-destructive testing. The procedure and
technique for visual and non-destructive testing shall be according to CSA W59, Clause 7 and 8.

If faulty welding is encountered during the inspection, corrective welding measures shall be submitted to
the Contract Administrator by the Contractor.

2476.08.02 Inspection

The Contract Administrator shall be notified of the dates that fabrication and testing of the raising and
lowering equipment will commence.

The Contract Administrator shall have free access to the place where the raising and lowering equipment
is manufactured for the purpose of inspecting and examining the plant records, certificates, materials
used, and fabrication process, while work is being performed. The Contract Administrator shall make or
witness any tests as may be considered necessary.

All raising and lowering equipment may be inspected by the Contract Administrator prior to shipment.

April 2019 Page 11 of 11 [Link] 2476

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2479
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 2479, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 2479 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

FLOODLIGHT LUMINAIRES USED IN HIGH MAST LIGHTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2479.01 SCOPE

2479.02 REFERENCES

2479.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2479.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2479.05 MATERIALS

2479.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2479.07 PRODUCTION

2479.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2479.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for high mast floodlight luminaires with integral ballast for use
in high mast lighting.

2479.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C22.2 No. 9.0-96 (R2011) General Requirements for Luminaires

C863-11 Energy Efficiency of High-Intensity Discharge (HID) and Low-Pressure
Sodium (LPS) Lamp Ballasts

November 2017 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 2479

2479.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2479.04.01 Design Requirements

2479.04.01.01 Photometric Requirements

Photometric test results shall be provided for the floodlight type luminaire supplied and shall include the
following data:

a) Isolux curves and mounting height correction factors.

b) Utilization charts or graphs indicating the total beam utilization.

c) Candlepower distribution curves indicating peak intensity.

d) Luminous intensity tables to Illuminating Engineering Society format (I-tables).

e) Luminaire efficiency values.

f) Lamp lumen outputs and wattages.

2479.04.01.02 Electrical Requirements

All electrical components and assembled luminaires shall be according to CSA C22.2 No. 9.0.

Ballasts, lamp sockets, ground connectors, internal wiring, and all other components shall be suitable for
the supply voltage as specified in the Contract Documents and the maximum temperature encountered in
totally enclosed, outdoor, weatherproof luminaires.

Ballasts shall be constant wattage auto-transformer or isolated secondary transformer type for grounded
systems. Auto-transformer type ballasts shall have a maximum tolerance of 12% variation in lamp
wattage for a 5% variation in line voltage. Isolated secondary transformer type ballasts shall have a
maximum tolerance of 12% variation in lamp wattage for a 10% variation in line voltage.

Ballasts shall be of Class H, 180 °C insulation; 60 hertz; and low temperature, -35 °C with a power factor
not less than 0.90.

The minimum nominal secondary open circuit voltage of the ballast for various lamps shall be sufficient to
provide reliable starting at -35 °C.

Ballasts shall be suitable for the lamp’s nominal operating voltage. Terminal blocks shall be held rigidly
and shall provide a positive connection for terminating the field wiring.

Energy efficiency of lamp ballasts shall be according to CAN/CSA C863.

2479.04.01.03 Mechanical Requirements

The luminaire housing shall be cast aluminum or heavy-duty sheet aluminum. The ballast shall be
integral. All external fasteners and associated hardware shall be stainless steel. The luminaire shall be
provided with a built-in aiming device.

Mounting arrangements shall be trunnion type or slip fitter for a 50 mm diameter internal pipe size tenon
with provisions for vertical and horizontal adjustment. The luminaire shall be complete with all external
fasteners and associated hardware required for the aiming of the luminaire and attachment to the slip
fitter or mounting pad.

November 2017 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 2479

The optical assembly shall consist of a specular high purity anodized aluminum reflector. The reflector
shall be precision formed and assembled in a way that the formed contour is maintained when it is
removed from the luminaire housing. The optical assembly shall be sealed with a high temperature
neoprene or silicone rubber gasket located between the door frame and luminaire housing.

When required and as specified in the Contract Documents, a secondary reflector or louvre shall be
provided inside the sealed optical assembly. The louvre shall effectively screen the lamp from direct view
and provide a cut-off 10° above the peak intensity on the vertical plane.

The door assembly shall consist of a gasketed door frame and a clear tempered shock-resistant glass
lens and shall be hinged to the luminaire housing. The luminaire shall be accessible with tool-less entry.

The lamp socket shall be a mogul type with a porcelain-enclosed, nickel-plated brass shell rated for 4,000
volts, and spring-loaded centre contact. The lamp holder shall have an electrically insulated lamp
stabilizer and shall hold the lamp's outer envelope in precise alignment with suitable means for vibration
damping.

The luminaire assembly when closed and in the operating position shall not be subject to damage by
vibration.

2479.04.02 Submission Requirements

2479.04.02.01 Working Drawings

Three copies of Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator a minimum of 14
Days prior to the commencement of fabrication.

As a minimum, the Working Drawings shall include the following information:

a) Detailed dimensioned layout, including plans, elevations, and weight.

b) Photometric curve data.

c) Details of optical system.

Each Working Drawing shall be sealed and stamped by an Engineer certifying that the Working Drawings
comply with the Contract Documents.

One copy of the final accepted Working Drawings shall be returned to the supplier, along with written
notification to commence fabrication. Within 14 Days of receipt of notification to commence fabrication,
the supplier shall submit 3 copies of all final accepted Working Drawings to the Contract Administrator.

Fabrication of the equipment shall not commence until the Working Drawings have been accepted by the
Contract Administrator.

Once fabrication of the equipment has commenced, materials and dimensions shown on the final accepted
Working Drawings shall not be changed.

2479.05 MATERIALS

2479.05.01 Marking

A permanent non-corrosive nameplate shall be attached to the exterior of the luminaire and located so
that the marking is clearly visible during relamping. The nameplate shall indicate the manufacturer's

November 2017 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 2479

name or trademark, catalogue number, electrical rating, input amperes, luminaire voltage, date of
manufacture, and the vertical and horizontal beam distribution.

A permanent label shall be attached to the interior of the luminaire indicating the manufacturer's name or
trademark, catalogue number, date of manufacture, and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
or Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) photometric classification and distribution type; the suitable
supply voltage and frequency; the lamp type; the lamp wattage; and the nominal operating voltage of the
lamp so that it is clearly visible during maintenance operations.

A label including a wiring diagram shall be attached to each ballast showing the ballast schematic wiring
diagram and shall be visible during maintenance operations.

For asymmetrical luminaires with adjustable optical systems, a permanent embossed identification mark
shall be located on the luminaire that is clearly visible and identifiable as an orientation mark.

2479.07 PRODUCTION

2479.07.01 Ballast Assemblies

Ballast assemblies shall be factory pre-wired with all connections clearly marked and identified.

2479.07.02 Lamp Socket Positions

The lamp socket position shall be pre-set at the factory for the specified distribution.

2479.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2479.08.01 Inspection

The supplier shall notify the Owner of the date that the fabrication of the luminaires is to commence.

The Owner’s representative shall have free access to the place of fabrication for the purpose of
inspecting and examining plant records, certificates, materials used, fabrication process, and to make any
tests as may be considered necessary, while the luminaires are being fabricated.

All luminaires are subject to an inspection by the Owner’s representative prior to shipment.

November 2017 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 2479

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2485
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 2485, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 2485 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLLERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2485.01 SCOPE

2485.02 REFERENCES

2485.03 DEFINITIONS - Not Used

2485.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2485.05 MATERIALS - Not Used

2485.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2485.07 PRODUCTION

2485.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used

2485.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for electronic photoelectric controllers rated for 1,800 VA for
use with 105 to 305 volt power supply at 60 Hz.

2485.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

CSA Standards

C239-02 (R2011) Performance Standard for Dusk-to-Dawn Luminaires

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C136.10-2010 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating
Receptacle - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

November 2017 Page 1 of 2 [Link] 2485

2485.07 PRODUCTION

2485.07.01 General

Photoelectric controllers shall be electronic and according to CAN/CSA C239.

Photoelectric controllers shall be of weatherproof construction and operational within a temperature range
of -40 to 65 C.

Photoelectric controllers shall be factory preset at 16 lux switch-on light level and 50 lux switch-off light
level.

2485.07.02 Electrical Requirements

Photoelectric controllers shall be provided with three locking type blades according to ANSI C136.10.

Photoelectric controllers shall be supplied with contacts normally closed at nighttime or under failure
conditions. Photoelectric controllers shall have an internal lightning arrester with a minimum spark over of
2.0 kV. The power consumption of the photoelectric controller itself shall be 5 watts or less.

2485.07.03 Marking

A permanent type of identification shall be provided on the outside of the photoelectric controller
indicating the manufacturer's name or trademark, catalogue number, voltage, VA rating, and date coding.

November 2017 Page 2 of 2 [Link] 2485

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2501
SPECIFICATION JULY 2023

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CALCIUM CHLORIDE AND CALCIUM-MAGNESIUM CHLORIDE BLEND

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2501.01 SCOPE

2501.02 REFERENCES

2501.03 DEFINITIONS

2501.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS - Not Used

2501.05 MATERIALS

2501.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2501.07 PRODUCTION

2501.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2501.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2501.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for calcium chloride and calcium-magnesium chloride blend for use
as a dust suppressant or de-icer.

2501.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

15.1-92 Standard for Calcium Chloride

ASTM International

D1293-18 Standard Test Methods for pH of Water

E449-18 Analysis of Calcium Chloride

Pacific Northwest Snowfighters (PNS)

Test Method B Corrosion Rate as Conducted from the NACE Standard TM0169-95 (1995 Revision) and
as Modified by the Pacific Northwest States *
Test Method C Percent Total Settleable Solids and Percent Solids Passing on a No. 10 Sieve *
* [Part of 2008 Pacific Northwest Snowfighters Snow and Ice Control Chemical
Products Specifications and Test Protocols]

July 2023 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 2501

2501.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Calcium Chloride Solid means a granular form of anhydrous calcium chloride (CaCl2) that may be applied
directly or dissolved in water to form calcium chloride solution.

Calcium Chloride Solution means an aqueous solution of calcium chloride solid.

Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend means an aqueous solution containing predominantly calcium chloride
with supplemental magnesium chloride (MgCl2).

2501.05 MATERIALS

2501.05.01 Calcium Chloride Solid

Calcium chloride solid shall be loose, dry, and according to CAN/CGSB 15.1, Type S:

a) Grade 1, Class A;

b) Grade 2, Class B; or

c) Grade 3, Class B.

2501.05.02 Calcium Chloride Solution

Calcium chloride solution shall be according to CAN/CGSB 15.1, Type L, Class 1, and shall be homogeneously
mixed.

Calcium chloride solution used as a dust suppressant shall contain a minimum of 35% by mass of pure calcium
chloride and shall meet the requirements shown in Table 1.

Calcium chloride solution used as a de-icer shall:

a) Contain a minimum of 29% by mass of pure calcium chloride.

b) Meet the requirements shown in Table 1.

2501.05.03 Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend

Calcium-magnesium chloride blend used as a dust suppressant shall have a minimum of 27% by mass of
calcium chloride, a minimum calcium chloride equivalence of 35% and shall meet the requirements shown in
Table 2. Calcium-magnesium chloride blend shall exhibit no crystallization above 5 °C.

Calcium-magnesium chloride blend used as a de-icer shall:

a) Contain a minimum of calcium chloride equivalence of 29% and shall meet the requirements shown in
Table 2.

b) Meet the requirements shown in Table 1.

2501.07 PRODUCTION

2501.07.01 Packaging and Delivery

Calcium chloride solid shall be delivered in moisture-proof 20, 40, or 1,000 kg bags by railway hopper car or by
truck and in a dry and useable condition.

July 2023 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 2501

Calcium chloride solution and calcium-magnesium chloride blend shall be delivered by railway tank car or truck
tank.

2501.07.02 Labelling

2501.07.02.01 Calcium Chloride Solid and Calcium Chloride Solution

Labelling shall be according to CAN/CGSB 15.1 with each container legibly marked with the following:

a) Cautionary information specified in CAN/CGSB 15.1.

b) Manufacturer's or supplier's name.

c) Date packaged (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

d) Type, grade, and class.

e) Concentration of pure calcium chloride.

f) Unit size (mass or volume).

g) Standard number (i.e., CAN/CGSB 15.1).

When bulk shipping is provided, the shipping manifest shall include the same information.

2501.07.02.02 Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend

The shipping manifest shall include the following information:

a) Manufacturer's or supplier's name.

b) Date shipped (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

c) Words "Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend".

d) Concentration of pure calcium chloride and percent calcium chloride equivalency.

e) Unit size (volume).

2501.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2501.08.01 Sampling and Testing

2501.08.01.01 General

Calcium chloride solid, calcium chloride solution, and calcium-magnesium chloride blend may be subject to
sampling and testing for conformity to the specified requirements. All materials that fail to meet the specified
requirements shall be rejected.

2501.08.01.02 Sampling Calcium Chloride Solid

A minimum of three samples shall be selected by the Owner at random from the shipment. Samples shall be
taken by the Owner by scraping aside the top layer of material to a depth of approximately 25 mm and taking a
0.5 kg representative sample by means of a sampling tube or other method. Precautions shall be taken during
the sampling operation to avoid exposing the sample unduly to atmospheric moisture. Immediately after
collecting the three samples, the individual samples shall be mixed thoroughly to form a composite sample of
material, and then be stored and sealed in a suitable glass or plastic container.

July 2023 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 2501

2501.08.01.03 Sampling Calcium Chloride Solution and Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend

A minimum of three samples from each tank of the shipment shall be selected by the Owner. Each sample shall
be representative of the contents of the tank. Precautions shall be taken during the sampling operation to avoid
exposing the sample unduly to atmospheric moisture. Immediately after collecting the three samples, the
individual samples shall be mixed thoroughly to form a composite sample of material, and then be stored and
sealed in a suitable glass or plastic container.

2501.08.02 Certificate

Upon request, a manufacturer’s certificate shall be provided stating that an independent laboratory has tested
the product and found it to be according to this specification.

2501.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2501.09.01 Measurement and Payment

2501.09.01.01 General

Payment at the price specified in the purchasing order shall be for the supply of the calcium chloride solid,
calcium chloride solution, or calcium-magnesium chloride blend delivered to the destination on the date and
time specified.

The cost of all testing, except that performed in the Owner's laboratory, shall be included in the price.

2501.09.01.02 Calcium Chloride Solid

Measurement of calcium chloride solid shall be by mass in kilograms. Weighing shall be as specified in the
purchasing order.

2501.09.01.03 Calcium Chloride Solution

Measurement of calcium chloride solution, at the concentration specified, shall be by one of the following
methods:

a) Mass of solution in tonnes.

When shipped by railway tank car or when weighed at the source of supply, the mass of solution shall be
substantiated by bills of lading in as many copies as the Owner may require. Railway scales shall be as
specified in the purchasing order.

When weighing by truck tank, the mass of solution shall be determined as specified in the purchasing order.

b) Volume of solution in litres.

The volume of solution in litres shall be measured by means of a metering device as specified in the
purchasing order.

When volumetric measurement is used, the Owner shall be provided with an invoice for each tank load of
solution delivered. The invoice shall contain a note signed by the delivery person, as the official
representative of the supplier of solution, indicating the total volume in litres of the delivery tanker and
certifying the actual volume of solution in litres delivered in each tank load.

When calcium chloride solution is used as a dust suppressant, the mass of solution in tonnes may be converted
to a mass of equivalent solid in kg. In converting the mass of solution to an equivalent mass in solid, a
conversion factor for a 35% calcium chloride solution of 1 tonne of solution to 455 kg of solid shall be used.

July 2023 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 2501

The volume in litres of solution may be converted to an equivalent mass of solution in tonnes. In converting the
volume of solution to an equivalent mass of solution, the following conversion factors shall be used:

a) 1.357 kg/litre shall be used for a minimum 35% solution.

b) 1.283 kg/litre shall be used for a minimum 29% solution.

2501.09.01.04 Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend

Measurement of calcium-magnesium chloride blend, at the concentration specified, shall be by one of the
following methods:

a) Mass of solution in tonnes.

When shipped by railway tank car or when weighed at the source of supply, the mass of solution shall be
substantiated by bills of lading in as many copies as the Owner may require. Railway scales shall be as
specified in the purchasing order.

When weighing by truck tank, the mass of solution shall be determined as specified in the purchasing order.

b) Volume of solution in litres.

The volume of solution in litres shall be measured by means of a metering device as specified in the
purchasing order.

When volumetric measurement is used, the Owner shall be provided with an invoice for each tank load of
solution delivered. The invoice shall contain a note signed by the delivery person, as the official
representative of the supplier of solution, indicating the total volume in litres of the delivery tanker and
certifying the actual volume of solution in litres delivered in each tank load.

July 2023 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 2501

 TABLE 1
Calcium Chloride Properties

Calcium Chloride Solution

Material/Property Test Procedure
Dust Suppressant De-Icing

<1%
Total Settleable Solids - PNS Test Method C
(Note 1)
Minimum 70% less
Corrosion Inhibitor - corrosive than PNS Test Method B
Sodium Chloride

pH (Note 2) 6 to 9 6 to 9 ASTM D1293

Notes:
1. 99% of the solids passing through a 2.00 mm sieve after being stored for 168 hours at -29  1 °C.
2. Dilute 1 part product to 4 parts distilled water before attempting a reading.

TABLE 2
Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend Properties

Calcium-Magnesium Chloride Blend

Material/Property Test Procedure
Dust Suppressant De-Icing

Calcium Chloride (CaCl2),

27.0 22.0 ASTM E449
% minimum by mass
Magnesium Chloride (MgCl2),
As required for total CaCl2 equivalence (Note 1) ASTM E449
% minimum by mass
Total CaCl2 equivalence,
35.0 29.0 (Note 1)
% minimum by mass
Other Alkali Chlorides:
NaCl, KCl, 2.0 1.75 ASTM E449
% maximum by mass
pH (Note 2) 6 to 9 6 to 9 ASTM D1293
Minimum 70% less
Corrosion Inhibitor - corrosive than PNS Test Method B
Sodium Chloride
Notes:
1. Total CaCl2 equivalence = % CaCl2 + (% MgCl2 x 1.166).
2. Dilute 1 part of product to 4 parts distilled water prior to attempting a reading.

July 2023 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 2501

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2502
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2021

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SODIUM CHLORIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2502.01 SCOPE

2502.02 REFERENCES

2502.03 DEFINITIONS

2502.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2502.05 MATERIALS

2502.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2502.07 PRODUCTION

2502.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2502.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2502.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for the supply and delivery of sodium chloride.

2502.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

ASTM International

D632 - 12(2020)e1 Standard Specification for Sodium Chloride

D2216 - 19 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content
of Soil and Rock by Mass
E534 - 18 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Sodium Chloride

2502.03 DEFINITIONS

Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that
materials received from the supplier meet the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.

November 2021 Page 1 of 4 [Link] 2502

2502.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2502.04.01 Submission Requirements

The supplier upon delivery, shall submit all test results in writing verifying the material is according to this
specification.

2502.05 MATERIALS

2502.05.01 General Requirements

Sodium chloride shall be in a free-flowing state until used and shall be according to Table 1 and Table 2 or
ASTM D632, Type I Grade 1.

2502.07 PRODUCTION

When delivery in bags is specified, sodium chloride shall be delivered in four-ply, asphalt-lined or
polyethylene-lined bags in sound condition and containing 40 kg. The closures shall be sewn.

Each bag shall be marked with the following:

a) Name of supplier/manufacturer.

b) Net mass.

c) Salt grade, (i.e., coarse crushed rock salt or fine crushed rock salt).

When delivery in bulk is specified, the sodium chloride shall be shipped by rail or truck, whichever is
specified.

2502.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2502.08.01 General

A laboratory designated by the Owner shall carry out QA testing for purposes of ensuring that the sodium
chloride used in the Work is according to the physical, chemical, and gradation requirements of this
specification. Testing will be performed at the discretion of the Owner.

2502.08.02 Inspection, Sampling, and Testing

Inspection of sodium chloride shall be according to ASTM D632.

Sampling, testing methods, and procedures shall be as outlined in ASTM D632 and Table 1.

One of the QA samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory. The QA laboratory
shall retain the remaining samples for referee testing, if required.

2502.08.03 Acceptance

The material shall be deemed acceptable if all the test results meet all applicable requirements of this
specification.

November 2021 Page 2 of 4 [Link] 2502

Material that fails to meet the gradation requirements according to ASTM D632 shall be rejected. The
supplier shall remove all rejected material as directed.

QA test results for a sample that is not according to Table 2 shall be rejected. The supplier shall remove
all rejected material as directed.

2502.08.04 Referee Testing

The supplier may invoke referee testing by submitting a written request to the Owner, within 5 Business
Days following notification that the sample representing the material does not meet the requirements of this
specification.

Referee testing shall be carried out according to ASTM E534.

The retained duplicate QA samples shall be used for referee testing.

All referee test results for a lot shall replace the respective QA tests for acceptance of the applicable lot and
shall be binding on both the Owner and the supplier.

If a lot is not accepted based on the referee test results, then the supplier shall be responsible for the cost
of the referee testing of that lot. If a lot is accepted based on the referee test results, the Owner shall bear
the cost of the referee testing.

2502.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2502.09.01 Measurement and Payment

Sodium chloride shall be measured by mass in tonnes as specified in the purchase order.

When shipped in bulk, sodium chloride shall be weighed at the source of supply and the mass shall be
substantiated by bills of lading in as many copies as the Owner may require.

Payment at the price specified in the purchase order shall be for the supply of the sodium chloride delivered
to the destination on the date and time specified.

The cost of all testing except that performed in the Owner’s designated laboratory, shall be included in the
price.

November 2021 Page 3 of 4 [Link] 2502

 TABLE 1
Testing Methods and Procedures

Property Test Method Min. Mass Required

Moisture content ASTM D2216 500g
Sodium chloride content, dry mass basis ASTM D632 500g
Insoluble matter, dry mass basis ASTM E534 500g

TABLE 2
Sodium Chloride Chemical Composition, by Mass

Characteristic Per Cent

Moisture content not more than 1.5
Sodium chloride content, dry mass basis not less than 95.0
Insoluble matter, dry mass basis not more than 4.0

November 2021 Page 4 of 4 [Link] 2502

 ONTARIO
PROVINCIAL
STANDARD [Link] 2510
SPECIFICATION NOVEMBER 2017
(Formerly OPSS 2510, November 2015)

Note: The PROV published in November 2017 replaces OPSS 2510 COMMON, November 2015 with
no technical content changes.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR

TALL OIL PITCH EMULSION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2510.01 SCOPE

2510.02 REFERENCES

2510.03 DEFINITIONS

2510.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2510.05 MATERIALS

2510.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used

2510.07 PRODUCTION

2510.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2510.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL

2510.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for tall oil pitch emulsion suitable for use as granular sealer.

2510.02 REFERENCES

This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standards Specifications, Material

OPSS 1004 Aggregates - Miscellaneous

ASTM International

D 244-09 Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts

November 2017 Page 1 of 6 [Link] 2510

Ontario Ministry of the Environment and Climate Change Publications

Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection
Act

Protocol for Analytical Methods Used in the Assessment of Properties Under Part XV.1 of the
Environmental Protection Act

Environmental Protection Act, Ontario Regulation 347, General - Waste Management - R.R.O. 1990

Environment Canada Publications

EPS 1/RM/13 Biological Test Method: Reference Method for Determining Acute Lethality of Effluents to
Rainbow Trout, Second edition, 2000 with May 2007 amendments
EPS 1/RM/14 Biological Test Method: Reference Method for Determining Acute Lethality of Effluents to
Daphnia magna, Second edition, 2000

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Publications

Method 301B Ready Biodegradability: CO2 Evolution, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals,
1992
Method 302B Inherent Biodegradability: Zahn-Wellens/EMPA Test, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of
Chemicals, 1992

United States Environmental Protection Agency Publications

SW-846 Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods, July, 1992

Other

ISO/IEC 17025-2005 General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration
Laboratories

2510.03 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:

Effluent means any liquid waste that may be discharged to the aquatic environment.

Tall Oil means a mixture of rosins and fatty acids produced from the processing of pulp and paper.

Tall Oil Pitch (TOP) means the residue formed during the distillation of tall oil. Major components consist
of fatty acids, resin acids, esters, and neutral materials.

Tall Oil Pitch Emulsion (TOP emulsion) means a tall oil pitch homogeneously dispersed in a water-
emulsifier solution.

2510.04 DESIGN AND SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

2510.04.01 Submission Requirements

Valid test results from an acceptable laboratory showing complete conformance of the TOP emulsion with
the requirements of this specification shall be made available upon request.

November 2017 Page 2 of 6 [Link] 2510

2510.05 MATERIALS

2510.05.01 Tall Oil Pitch

TOP shall be produced from distilled tall oil from the processing of pulp and paper not associated with the
use of chlorine-based chemical to bleach pulp for the production of white paper.

2510.05.02 Water

Water shall be clean and free of contaminants that could adversely affect TOP emulsion and the
environment.

2510.05.03 Emulsifier

Emulsifier shall be according to the manufacturer’s requirements.

2510.05.04 Tall Oil Pitch Emulsion

TOP emulsion shall meet the physical property requirements of Table 1 and the environmental testing
requirements of Table 2.

Components used to produce the TOP emulsion shall not contain any petroleum based products, calcium
chloride, magnesium chloride, lignosulphonate, or lignan derivatives.

Addition of any asphalt products, solvents, polymers, or other additives during or after the manufacture of
TOP emulsion shall not be permitted.

TOP emulsion shall show no signs of separation.

2510.07 PRODUCTION

2510.07.01 Storage

Tall oil pitch emulsion that is to be stored longer than 7 Days shall be kept out of direct sunlight and
maintained at a temperature of not less than 5 °C.

If stored more than 60 Days, the TOP emulsion shall be circulated prior to use using a low speed
mechanical impeller or a pump rated at 5 hp or less. When a pump is used, the TOP emulsion shall be
drawn from the bottom of the storage tank and fed to the top of the same tank with a submerged hose to
avoid bubbling.

2510.07.02 Shipment

Tall oil pitch emulsion shall be shipped in sealed containers of a size that minimizes the air space
between the surface of the liquid and the top of the container.

All shipping containers shall be clean and reusable. Reused containers shall be free of any form of
contamination and, if required, cleaned prior to loading.

Tall oil pitch emulsion shall be protected from freezing.

A bill of lading or an invoice, as applicable, shall be supplied in as many copies as required by the Owner
for each container of TOP emulsion delivered.

November 2017 Page 3 of 6 [Link] 2510

2510.07.03 Sampling and Testing

2510.07.03.01 General

Samples shall be collected, handled, prepared, and tested in accordance with the requirements of
Table 1 and Table 2, except as noted below.

2510.[Link] Laboratory Requirements

Solids content testing of TOP emulsion shall be carried out in a laboratory that is acceptable to the
Owner.

An acceptable laboratory for conducting environmental testing listed in Table 2, Section A, shall be one
that has been certified by an organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada in accordance
with ISO/IEC 17025 and participates in mandatory proficiency testing programs for the applicable
parameter in Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental
Protection Act.

An acceptable laboratory for conducting environmental testing listed in Table 2, Section B, shall be one
that has been certified by an organization accredited by the Canadian Association for Environmental
Analytical Laboratories (CAEAL) or by the Standards Council of Canada (SCC).

2510.[Link] Solids Content

Solids content shall be determined by measuring the mass of the residue remaining after drying a
representative sample of TOP emulsion using the following procedure:

a) Obtain a minimum 500 ml sample of TOP emulsion following thorough mixing or circulation of the
contents of the shipping or storage container.

b) Measure and record the mass of a suitable clean dry specimen container on a balance readable to
0.1 g and accurate to within 0.1% of the test load. A suitable container shall be one that is resistant
to corrosion and change in mass upon heating, cooling, and exposure to materials of varying pH.

c) Decant approximately 100 ml from the representative sample into the specimen container. Measure
and record the mass of the container and TOP emulsion.

d) Place the specimen and container in an oven maintained at 110 °C  5 °C and dry to a constant
mass. Specimens may be dried at higher temperatures with a hot plate or burner provided that steam
is allowed to escape freely.

e) Allow the container and remaining residue to cool to room temperature. Measure and record the
dried mass and container using the same balance as above.

f) Calculate the percent solids as follows:

Percent solids = [(MCR - MC)/ (MCT - MC)] x 100 = MR/MT x 100

where: MC = mass of container, g

MCT = mass of container and TOP emulsion, g
MCR = mass of container and residue, g
MT = mass of TOP emulsion specimen, g
MR = mass of residue, g

g) Report the solids content as percent solids to the nearest 0.1%.

November 2017 Page 4 of 6 [Link] 2510

2510.[Link] Particle Charge

The particle charge of the TOP emulsion shall be determined according to ASTM D 244 in the same
manner as required for an asphalt emulsion.

2510.[Link] Environmental Testing

2510.[Link].01 Sample Preparation

Sample preparation for Daphnia magna, and Rainbow Trout testing shall be as follows:

a) Obtain a sufficient amount of inert, non-absorptive material for the substrate meeting the gradation
requirements of 9.5 mm clear stone according to OPSS 1004.

b) Prepare the substrate by applying the TOP emulsion at a rate of 1,000 ml per 1,000 g of substrate
distributed evenly in 4 coats (i.e., 250 ml per 1,000 g substrate per coat).

c) Stir the mixture after each coat has dried to ensure that substrate particles do not adhere to each
other.

d) Allow each coat of the TOP emulsion to dry completely prior to the application of the next coat.

e) To prepare the effluent for testing, expose a maximum of 1,000 ml of dechlorinated tap water for each
100 g of prepared substrate for a minimum of 24 hours.

f) Decant sufficient effluent as required for each test.

2510.07.04 Marking

Bill of lading or invoice, as applicable, shall be legibly marked with the following information:

a) Product name.

b) Name of the manufacturer.

c) Date shipped (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd).

d) Product type.

e) Net content mass in tonnes or volume in litres, as applicable.

f) Solids content in percent.

g) Particle charge (i.e., cationic).

2510.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2510.08.01 Inspections, Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance

The Owner reserves the right to make inspections, take samples, and perform tests at times and locations
as the Owner may consider necessary to ensure that the materials supplied are in accordance with this
specification.

November 2017 Page 5 of 6 [Link] 2510

 TABLE 1
Physical Requirements
Solids content, % Particle Size, m
Particle Charge
Minimum Maximum (Note 1)

8 (Note 2) 5.0 Cationic or non-ionic

Notes:

1. As determined by a particle size analyzer capable of resolution below 10 m.

2. When the TOP emulsion is supplied at a higher concentration, it may be diluted with water to meet the
solids content of this specification.

TABLE 2
Environmental Testing
Section Test Requirement Test Method
Full Metal Scan Less than or equal to the
Inorganic Anions concentrations for
As described in Protocol
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Agriculture or Other
for Analytical Methods
Dioxins and Furans Property Use shown in
Used in the Assessment
Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs) Table 1 of Soil, Ground
A of Properties Under Part
Water and Sediment
XV.1 of the
Standards for Use Under
Acid / Base / Neutral Extractable Environmental
Part XV.1 of the
Organics Protection Act.
Environmental Protection
Act.

Minimum 20%
Inherent Biodegradability OECD Method 302B
B biodegradation in 28 Days

Ready Biodegradability Maximum 60% ThCO2 OECD Method 301B

No greater than 50%
impairment or mortality
Daphnia magna LC50 EPS 1/RM/14
after continuous exposure
for 48 hours.
Less than the concentration
shown in Schedule 4 of
Leachate Testing: Ontario Regulation 347 as SW - 846, Toxicity
C Metals amended by Ontario Characteristic Leaching
Non-Metals, Metalloids Regulation 558/00, under Procedure, Method 1311
the Environmental
Protection Act
No greater than 50%
impairment or mortality
Rainbow Trout LC50 EPS 1/RM/13
after continuous exposure
for 96 hours.

November 2017 Page 6 of 6 [Link] 2510